Power Semiconductor Controlled Drives - Gopal K Dubey PDF

lIST OF PRINCIPAL SYMBOLS
Per unit frequency i.e. ratio of operating to

rated frequency
Stator to rotor tums ratio
AC side to con verter side transformer tums
ratio
aT,/an
Viscous friction coefficient
Voltage induced in the armature of a dc motor or in the stator of an induction motor, V
Frequency, Hz
Base frequency, Hz
Frequency of the carrier wave, Hz
Average value of the armature current of a
dc motor, A
Instantaneous value of the armature current
of a dc motor, A
Ripple in armature current, A
Average value of the armature current at
critical speed wmc, A
Average value of the dc link current of a
con verter, A
i,
t.,
J
K
K<
m'
N,
N"
Instantaneous value of the dc link current of

a con verter, A
Field current of a synchronous motor, A
Per pha e ac equivalent of IF for
synchronous motor (also field current of a de
motor), A
I.{Xm/X,) for a synchronous motor, A
Magnetising current, A
The ratio (V /jX,) for a synchronous motor, A
Ratcd value of 1:"for a synchronous motor, A
Fundamental component of rotor current, A
Fundamental component of rotor current referred to stator, A
1m
1:"
1,
1,
1;
R.M.S. value of a non-sinusoidal current, A

Fundamental component of induction motor
tator (or synchronous motor armature) current, A
Commutating inductance of a ynchronous

motor, H
OC link inductance, H
Synchronous inductance of a synchronous
motor, H
Modulation index
Speed, rpm
Synchronous speed, rpm
Slip-speed, rpm
Number of poles
Rotor circuit elecjrical power, W
Rotor circuit copper loss, W
Air-gap power, W
Develope mechanicaJ power, W
Power recovered. W
Arrnature circuit resistance of a dc motor, n
Braking resistance, D.
Rotor resistance, D.
Instantaneous value of ac source current, A

kth harmonic in induction motor tator (or
synchronous motor armature) current. A
Polar moment of inertia of rnotor-load system referred to the motor shaft, Kg-rn'
K<<t>
dc motor constant
(also eddy current
coefficient)
<t>/1.
Arrnature circuit inductance of a dc motor, H
Rotor resistance referred to stator,

Stator resistance. D.
Thcvenin 's equivalen! re istance. n

Slip pcr unit (also Laplacc operator)
kth harmonic lip per unit
Slip al the maxirnurn torque
Time, S
Torque developed, N-m (al o chopper period, S)
'
Torque developed,
-rn
Torque at the critical speed, Wmc, N-m
Friction torque,
-rn
Load torque.
-rn
fr,
Torque required to do the useful meCh ni

work.
-rn
BreakdownJPull-out torque.
-rn
~
Commutation overlap angle. rad.
'!'-i
v
v
V.
\"0
v.
v,
Source voltage. V
Instantaneous value of de source voltage. V,~
Average value of the dc motor armature ~
voltage (also rectifier output voltage), V ~
#j
trl y
..
':::"i
ad
trun
Y"
nimum value of commutation
lead angle.
,
Margin angle for a load commutated 10verter (al o the angle at which the induccd
emf of a converter fed dc motor equals the
ac source voltage). rad
8,~
T
l'J
Minimum value of margin angle. rad

Phase of 1; with air-gap emf E. rad
Armature time constant. S
Mechanical time constant , S
<t>
t/J
Power factor angle of a synchronous motor

or an induction motor. rad
Fundamental power factor angle , rad
Pha e of injected voltage V, with respect to
source voltage V. rad
Phase of stator current with respect to the
so urce voltage V. rad
Flux per poleo Webers
tan-'(wL./R.)
Excitation ernf'. V
kth harmonic component in a non-sinusoidal
w
W
Source frequency. rad/scc

Speed. rad/sec
Peak value of an ac source voltage. V
X,
Commutation lead angle of a load commutated inverter or the angle at which the dc
~tor
armature current drops to zero, rad
lnstantaneous value of the de motor arma

ture voltage. V
In tantaneous inverter output voltage betwcen phase A and the central point of the
de source. V
Fundamental component in a non-sinusoidal
volraze. V
Average value of dc link voltage. V
Instantaneous value of dc link voltage. V
voltage.
x;
f3
Injccted voltage, V
lnstantaneous ac source voltage , V
Magnetising reactance. n
Rotor leakage reactance. n
Rotor leakage reactance referred to tator. n
Stator lcakaze reactance of an induction
motor or ynchronous reactance of a syn-
chronous motor. n
Thevenin's equivalent reactance.
lR2 + (WL,)1J'1
Firing angle , rad
4>,
ch,
Wmb
Wmc
W"'O
Wm,
w"
D
D'
Variable*
Variable
Base speed. rad/ ec

Speed on the boundary between
and discontinuous conductions.
Ideal no load speed, rad/sec
Synchronous speed. rad/sec
Slip peed. rad/sec
Duty ratio of a chopper. torque
ynchronous
motor fed from
sourcc
Torque angle of a synchronous
from a currcnt source
conunuous
rad/sec
anglc 1'1 a
a voltagc
motor fcd
Rcference value of a variable

Phasor
Power Semiconductor
Controlled Orives
Gopal K. Dubey
Professor of Electrical Engineering
Indian Institute of Technology
Kanpur, India
Prentice Hall
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey 07632
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Dubey, G. K. (date)
Power semiconductor controlled drives / Gopal K. Dubey.
p. cm.
Bibliography: p.
Includes index.
ISBN 0-13-686890-8
1. Electric machinery-Regulation.
2. Power semiconductors.
3. Electronic control. 1. Title.
TK2851.D83 1989
621.31'7-dcI9
88-9690
CIP
Editoriallproduction supervision
and interior design: Sophie Papanikolaou
Cover design: George Comell
Manufacturing buyer: Mary Noonan
1989.by Prentice-Hall, Inc.
A Division of S'imon & Schuster
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey 07632
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be
reproduced, in any form or by any means,
without permission in writing from the pubtisher.
Printed in the United States of America
1098765432
ISBN
0-13-686890-8
Prentice-Hall Intemational (UK) Limited, London

Prentice-Hall of Australia Pty. Limited, Sydney
Prentice-Hall Canada Inc., Taranta
Prentice-Hall Hispanoamericana, S.A., Mexico
Prentice-Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi
Prentice-Hall of Japan, Inc., Tokyo
Simon & Schuster Asia Pte. Ltd., Singapore
Editora Prentice-Hall do Brasil, Ltda., Rio de Janeiro
Con ten ts
PREFACE
CHAPTER
xv
POWER SEMICONDUCTOR
DRIVES:
1.1
CONTROLLED
AN INTRODUCTION
'The Power Semiconductor

Elements
1
Orive and lts
1.2 .Dynamics of the Motor Load System -. 3

1.2.1 Fundamental Torque Equations
3
1.2.2 Components of the Load
Torque
4
1.2.3 Some Cornmon Load Torques
5
1.2.4 Classification of Load Torques
9
1.2.5 Electric Braking
9
1.2.6 Speed Torque Conventions and
Multiquadrant Operation
10
1.2.7 Steady-State Stability
11
1.3
1.4
The Converter Motor System

1.3.1 Types of Converters
13
1.3.2 Rating of Converters and
Motors
14
1.3.3 Harmonics and Power Factor
1.3.4 Advantages of Converters
13
16
16
Speed Control and Multiquadrant

Operation
16
v
Contents
vi
1.5
Drive Specifications
1.6
Power Semiconductor Devices

21
1.6.1 Thyristors
22
1.6.2 Assyrnetrical Thyristors
24
1.6.3 Gate-Turn-Off Thyristors
24
1.6.4 Power Transistors
26
1.6.5 Power MOSFETs
30
1.6.6 Syrnbol of a Self-Cornrnutated
Serniconductor Switch
32
References
Problems
CHAPTER 2
20
32
33
DC MOTORS
35
2.1
Steady-State
Speed Torque
Relations
36
2.2
Methods of Speed Control

39
2.2.1 Armature Voltage Control
39
2.2.2 Field Control
41
2.2.3 Cornbined Armature Voltage and
Field flux Control
42
2.2.4 Armature Resistance Control
44
2.3
Starting
2.4
Braking
45
2.4.1 Regenerative Braking
46
2.4.2 Dynarnic Blakng
. 48
2.4.3 Plugging
51
2.5
45
Multiquadrant
Operation of a Separately
Excited DC Motor with Regenerative

Braking
52
2.6 . Loss Minimization

Drives
2.7
in Adjustable
Speed DC
54
Transfer Functions of Separately Excited

DC Motor
57
2:7.1 Armature Control
58
2.7.2 Field Control
61
References
Problems
CHAPTER 3
62
62
RECTIFIER CONTROL OF DC MOTORS

3.1
Controlled
3.2
Braking Operation of Rectifier Controlled

Separately
Rectifier Circuits
Excited Motor
66
71
65
vii
Contents
3.3
1-Phase Fully-Controlled
Rectifier-Fed
Separately Excited Motor

72
3.3. 1 Modes of Operation
72
3.3.2 Steady-State Motor Performance
Equations
77
3.3.3 Mode Identification
83
3.3.4 Speed- Torque Characteristics
3.3.5 Rectifier with Controlled
Flywheeling
93
3.4
1-Phase Half-Controlled
Separately
3.5
84
Rectifier-Fed
Excited Motor
101
Rectifier-Fed

102
3.5.1 Conventional Operation of the
Rectifier
102
3.5.2 Operation with Controlled
Flywheeling
109
3.5.3 Operation with a Freewheeling
Diode
114
3.6
Armature
Current
Ripple and Its Effect on
Motor
Performance
115
3.6.1 Effect on Motor
Performance
116
3.6.2 Ca1culation of the Maximum Current
Ripple and the Selection of Filter
.Inductance
117
3.7
Rectifier-Source
3.8
Pulse-Width Modulated Rectifiers

3.8.1 Equal Pulse-Width
Modulation
127
3.8.2 Sinusoidal Pulse-Width
Modulation
130
3.9
Current Control
3.10 Multiquadrant
Interaction
122
126
132
Operation
of Fully-Controlled
Rectifier-Fed DC Motor
133
3.10.1 Armature Current Reversal
134
3.10.2 Field Current Reversal
139
References
Problems
CHAPTER
140
141
CHOPPER CONTROL
4.1
Principie
OF DC DRIVES
of Operation
Techniques
146
and Control
145
Contents
viii
4.2
Motoring
Operation of Separately Excited
Motor
150
4.2.1 Steady-State AnaIysis for Time
Ratio Control
152
4.2.2 Steady-State Analysis for Current
Limit Control
155
Motoring Control of Series Motor
4.3.1 Steady-State Analysis for Time
Ratio Control
157
4.3.2 Steady-State Analysis with Current
Limit Control
158
4.4
Regenerative Braking of DC Motors

4.4.1 Separately Excited Motor
159
4.4.2 Series Motor
164
4.5
Dynamic and Composite
Braking of DC
Motors
165
4.5.1 Dynamic Braking
4.5.2 Composite Braking
165
166
4.6
4.7
Current Control
Multiquadrant
References
Problems
5
CLOSED-LOOP
5.1
Control of Chopper-Fed
Consisting of
Regenerative
Consisting of
Reverse
172
175
181
182
CONTROL
Single-Ouadrant
OF DC DRIVES
Variable Speed
Drives
184
5.1.1 Arrnature Voltage Control at
Constant Field
184
5.1.2 Field Weakening
188
5.1.3 Details of Various Blocks of
Closed-Loop Drives
189
5.2
159
167
Motors
168
4.7.1 Two-Quadrant Control
Forward Motoring and
Braking
168
4.7.2 Two-Quadrant Control
Forward Motoring and
Regenerative Braking
4.7.3 Four-Quadrant Control
CHAPTER
156
4.3
Four-Ouadrant
Variable Speed
Drives
195
5.2.1 Dri ve Employing Arrnature ReversaI
by a Contactor
195
184
Contents
6.8.3 Efficiency and Derating
6.8.4 Torque Pulsations
265
References
Problems
CHAPTER 7
268
269
CONTROL OF INDUCTION MOTOR BY AC

VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS
7.1
AC Voltage Controller
7.2
Four-Quadrant
Operation
Circuits
273
275
Fan or Pump and Crane Hoist Drives

7.3.1 Fan and Pump Drives
278
7.3.2 Crane Hoist Drive
280
7.4
AC Voltage Controller
Starters
7.5
Loss Minimization
281
Problems
281
282
Control of Induction
INDUCTION
Motor by Voltage
Source Inverters
284
8.1.1 Three-Phase Voltage Source
Inverter
285
8 ..1.2 Six-Step Inverter
287
8.1.3 Six-Step Inverter Voltage
Control
289
8.1.4 PWM Inverter
298
8.1.5 Braking and Multiquadrant
Control
308
8.1.6 Voltage Source Inverter Variable
Frequency Drives
313
8.2
278
282
FREQUENCY-CONTROLlED
MOTOR DRIVES
8.1
273
Control and Closed-Loop
7.3
References
CHAPTER 8
263
Motor by Current
Source Inverters
320
8.2.1 Three-Phase Current Source
Inverter
320
8.2.2 Current Sources
325
8.2.3 Braking
326
8.2.4 Pulse-Width Modulation in a
Thyristor C.S. Inverter
328
283
Contents
xi
8.2.5 Pulse-Width Modulated GTO C.S.
Inverter
330
8.2.6 Current Source Inverter Variable
Frequency Drives
335
8.2.7 Comparison of Current Source and
Voltage Source Inverter
Drives
341
8.3
Current-Controlled
8.4
Cycloconverters
References
Problems
. CHAPTER 9
342
345
350
352
SLIP POWER CONTROLLED WOUND-ROTOR

INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES
9.1
Static Rotor Resistance Control

9.1.1 Analysis and Performance
9.2
Static
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.3
Modified
Problems
356
357
384
Kramer Drives
386
387
SVNCHRONOUS MOTORS
10.1
Wound-Field
Cylindrical
389
Rotor
Motor
390
10.1.1 Equivalent Circuits
391
10. 1.2 Performance Equations for
Operation from a
Voltage Source
394
10.2
355
Scherbius Drives
365
Power Factor Considerations
368
Rating and Applications
371
Equivalent Circuit and
Analysis
373
9.2.4 Performance
379
9.2.5 Supersynchronous Speed
Control
_"383
References
CHAPTER 10
PWM Inverters
Operation
of a Wound-Field
Cylindrical
Rotor Motor from Constant Voltage and

Frequency Source
395
10.2.1 Motoring and Regenerative
Braking Operations
395
Contents
xii
10.2.2 Power Factor Control and

V -Curves
397
10.3
Cylindrical
Rotor Motor Operation from a
Current Source
10.4
Wound-Field
401
Salient Pole Motor
Operating from a Voltage Source of

Constant Frequency
10.5
403
Starting and Braking when Fed from a

Constant Frequency Source
10.6
Brushless Excitation of Wound-Field

Machines
10.7
406
406
Permanent Magnet Synchronous
Motor
Operating from a Fixed Frequency

Source
10.8
407
Synchronous
Reluctance Motor
Operating from a Voltage Source of

Fixed Frequency
10.9
408
Operation with Nonsinusoidal

Supplies
409
10.10 Speed Control

References
Problems
CHAPTER
11
414
SELF-CONTROLLED
DRIVES
410
414
(BRUSHLESS
SVNCHRONOUS
MOTOR
DC ANO AC MOTOR
DRIVES)
416
11.1
Self-Control
11.2
Brushless and Commutatorless

AC Motors
11.3
418
DC and
422
Current Source Inverter with Load

Commutation
424
11.3.1 Analysis of Cornrnutation and

Inverter Operation
427
11.3.2 Power Factor Optirnization
433
11.3.3 Generation of Inverter Firing
Signals
434
11.3.4 Inverter Control Strategies
435
11.3.5 Merits and Disadvantages of Load
Cornmutation
443
11.3.6 Cornmutation at Low
Speeds
444
Contents
xiii
11.4
Cycloconverter
Commutation
11.5
Synchronous
with Load
446
Motor Control
Requirements
447
11.5.1 Operation of a Wound-Field
Synchronous Motor from a
Variable Frequency Current
Source
447
11.5.2 Operation of a Perrnanent Magnet
Variable Frequency Current
Source
454
11. 5.3 Operation of a Perrnanent Magnet
Variable Frequency Voltage
Source
458
11.5.4 Operation of a Wound-Field
Variable Frequency Voltage
Source
460
Motor at the Maximum Torque to
Armature Current Ratio
461
Motor at the Maximum
Torque-to-Flux Ratio
462
11.5.7 True DC Motor Operation
462
11.6
Operation of Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives with Semiconductor
11.7
Converters
464
11.6.1 Current Source lnverter
Drives
464
11.6.2 Voltage Source Inverter
Drives
467
11.6.3 Cyc1oconverter Drives
467
Self-Controlled
Motor
Synchronous
Drives (Brushless and Commutatorless

DC and AC Motor Drives) and Their
Applications
467
11.7.1 Load Commutated Synchronous
Motor Dri ves
468
11. 7.2 Line Commutated
Cycloconverter-Fed Synchronous
Motor Drives
472
Contents
xiv
11.7.3 Voltage Source Inverter-Fed

Synchronous Motor Drives
11.7.4 Servo Drives
476
11.7.5 Starting Large Synchronous
Machines
476
References
Problems
474
476
478
BIBLIOGRAPHY
481
ANSWERS TO SELECTED PROBLEMS

INDEX
490
484
Preface
The book describes fundamental s cornmon to all electrical drives: de drives fed by con. trolled rectifiers and choppers; squirrel-cage induction motor drives controlled by ac
voltage controllers, inverters, and cycloconverters; slip-power controlled wound-rotor
induction motor drives; and inverter and cycloconverter controlled synchronous motor
drives, including brsshless de and ac motor drives. Both open-loop and closed-loop
drives are discussed. Apart from thyristor converters, GTO and power transistor converters are also covered. Attention is also given to the interaction between the motor and
converter, and to the relative performance features of various drives. Emphasis is placed
on fundamentals, and conventional methods of motor analysis are used so a reader not
familiar with ccrnplicated methods of motor analysis can also follow the text.
A number of sol ved examples are given to demonstrate drive performance features, as well as analysis and design methods. Unsolved problems are given at the end
of each chapter. Answers to these problems are given at the end of the book.
A list of references is provided at the end of each chapter. A bibliography listing
relevant and related books is also given at the end of the book.
It is hoped that the book will be useful to practicing engineers, university teachers,
and students. It can be used as a textbook for a one-semester senior or graduate course.
While a senior-Ievel course may cover only sixty to seventy percent of the text, the entire book can be used for a graduate course. The reader is assumed to have a basic
knowledge of power electronics, electrical machines, and control systems. The course
may also run concurrently with a first course on power electronics.
The manuscript has been mainly prepared at I.I.T. Kanpur. A few parts were
also prepared at the University of British Columbia, Vancouver, Canada, and Virginia
xv
xvi
Preface
Polytechnic lnstitute and State University, Blacksburg, VA, USA. The author wishes
to express his sincere thanks to these institutions for making the necessary facilities
available.
The author greatly appreciates the assistance of Mr. Omprakash Arora and Mr.
D. N. Joshi in coordinating activities related to the manuscript's preparation. Thanks are
also due to Mr. C. M. Abraham and Mr. L. S. Bajpai for the excellent typing.
The author acknowledges the patience and support of his wife Shakti and sons
Anurag and Parag during the preparation of this manuscript.
Many other individuals, particularly students and colleagues, have helped in many
different ways during the preparation of the manuscript. 1 gratefully acknowledge
their help.
Gopal K. Dubey
Bibliography
1. Adkins, B., and R. G. Harlay, The General Theory of Alternating Current Machines,
Chapman and Hall, 1975.
2. Andreas, 1. C.; Energy Efficient Electric Motors, Selection and Application, New York:
Mareel Dekker, 1982.
3. Baliga, B.J., and D. Y. Chen, Power Transistors: Device Design and Applicatiuns,
IEEE Press, 1984.
.
4. Bedford, B. D., and R. G. Hoft, Principles of In verter Circuits, New York: John Wiley,
1964.
5. Berde, M. S., Thyristor Engineering, Delhi: Khanna Publishers, 1981.
6. Bird, B. M., and K. G. King, An Introduction to Power Electronics,
ew York: Wiley.
1983.
7. Boldea, I., and S. A. Nasar, Electric Machines Dynamics, New York: Maemillan, 1981.
8. Bose, B. K., Adjustable Speed AC Drives, New York: IEEE Press, 1981.
9. Bose, B. K.: Power Electronics and AC Drives, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall,
Ine., 1986.
lO. Briehart, F., Forced Commutated
Inverters-Design
and Industrial
Application,
Maemillan, 1984.
11. Campbell, S. l., Solid-State AC Motor Control: Selection and Application, New York:
Mareel Dekker, Ine., 1987.
12. Chilikin, M., Electric Drives, Moseow: Mir Publishers, 1970.
13. Csaki, F., K. Ganszky, I. Ipsits, and S. Marti, Power Electronics, Budapest: Aeademiai
Kiado, 1971.
14. Datta, S., Power Electronics and Control. Prentiee Hall-Resten. 1985.
15. Davis, R. M., Power Diode and Thyristor Circuits, Cambridge University Press, 1971.
16. De, G., Principles of Thyristorised Converters, Calcutta: Oxford and IBH Publishing
Co., 1982.
17. De, G., Electrical Drives and Their Control. Bombay: Aeademie Books Ltd., 1970.
481
482
Bibliography
18. Dewan, S. B., G. R. Slemon, and A. Straughen, Power Semiconductor Drives, New
York: John Wiley Interseienee, 1984.
1.9. Dewan, S. B., and A. Straughen, Power Semiconductor Circuits, New York: John
Wiley, 1975.
20. Dubey, G. K., S. R. Doradla, A. Joshi, and R. M. K. Sinha, Thyristorised Power
Controllers, Delhi: Wiley Eastem, 1986.
21. El-Hawary, M. E., Principies of Electric Machines with Power Electronic Applications,
Prentiee Hall-Restan, 1986.
22. Finney, D., The Power Thyristor and lts Applications, New York: MeGraw-Hill, 1980.
23. Fitzrald, A. E., C. K. Kingsley, Jr., and S. D. Umans, Electric Machinery, New York:
MeGraw-Hill Intemational, 1983.
24. Fransua, A., and R. Magureanu, Electrical Machines and Drive Systems, Oxford:
Teehnieal Press, 1984.
25. Graham, D. R., and 1. C. Hoy, SCR Manual, 5th Edition, General Eleetrie, 1972.
26. Gentry, P. E., F. W. Gutz Willer, N. Hardy, and E. E. Zastrov, Semiconductor Controlled
Rectifier: Principie and Application of P-N-P-N Devices, Englewood Cliffs, N.l.:
Prentiee-Hall, Ine., 1964.
27. Gupta, S. c., and L. Hasdorff, Automatic Control, New York: John Wiley, 1970.
28. Gyugyi, L., and B. R. Pelly, Static Power Frequency Changers, New York: John Wiley,
1976.
29. Haneoek, N. N., Electric Power Utilisation, Sir Issae Pitman and Sons, 1967.
30. Haneoek, N. N., Matrix Analysis of Electric Machinery, Oxford: Pergamon Press, 1964.
3!. Harnden, Jr., J. D., and F. B. Golden, Power Semiconductor Applications, vols. 1 and Il,
IEEE Press, 1972.
32. Heumann, K., Basic Principies of Power Electronics, Berlin: Springer- Verlag, 1986.
33. Hindmarsh, 1., Electric Machines and Drives Worked Examples, Oxford: Pergamon
Press, 1985.
34. Hoft, R. G., Semiconductor Power Electronics, New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold Co.,
.1986.
35. Jones, C. V., The Unified Theory of Electrical Machines, New York: Plenum Press,
1967.
36. Jones, R. W., Electric Control Systems, New York: John Wiley, 1959.
37. Kosow, r. R., Control of Electric Machines, Englewood Cliffs, N.l.: Prentice-Hall, Ine.,
1973.
38. Kuo, B. C.; Automatic Control Systems, Englewood Cliffs, N.1.: Prentice-Hall, Ine.,
1982.
39. Kuo, B. C., Digital Control Systems, New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1980.
40. Kusko, A., Solid State DC Motor Drive, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1969-.
41. Lander, C. W., Power Electronics, MeGraw-Hill Book Co. (U.K.), 1981.
42. Langsdorf, A. S., Theory of Alternating Current Machinery, New York: MeGraw-Hill
Book Co., 1955.
43. Leonhard, W., Control of Electric Drives, Berlin: Springer-Verlag, 1985.
44. Lindsay, 1. F., and M. H. Rashid, Electromechanics and Electric Machinery, Englewood
Cliffs, N.1.: Prentice-Hall, Ine., 1986.
45. Lipa, T. A., and D. W. Novotny, Dynamics and Control of AC Machines, Leeture Notes,
Univ. of Wiseonsin, 1984.
46. Mazda, F. F., Thyristor Control, New York: Wiley, 1973.
47. MeMurray, The Theory and Design of Cycloconverters, Cambridge, Mass.: M.r.T.
Press, 1972.
48. Moltgen, G., Line Commutated Thyristor Converters, Siernarr's , Pitman Publishing, 1972.
Bibliography
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
483
Motto, Jr., J. W., Introduction to Power Electronics, Galgotia Publication, 1981.

Murphy, J. M. D., Thyristor Control of AC Motors, Oxford: Pergamon Press, 1973.
Nagrath, I. J., and M. Gopal, Control System Engineering, Delhi: Wiley Eastem, 1975.
Nagrath, I. J., and D. P. Kothari, Electric Machines, Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill, 1985.
Nasar, S. A., and L. E. Unnewehr, Electromechanics and Electric Machines, John Wiley,
New York, 1979.
Ogata, K., Modern Control Engineering, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, lnc.,
1970.
Oxner, E. S., Power FETS and Their Applications, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: PrenticeHall, Inc., 1982.
Partap, H., Art and Science of Utilisation of Electrical Energy, Surat: Pritam, 1975.
Pearman, R. A . Power Electronics: Solid State Motor Control, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.:
Prentice-Hall, Inc., 1980.
Pearman, R. A., Solid State Industrial Electronics, Reston, VA: Resten Publishing
Co., 1984.
Pelly, B. R., Thyristor Phase Control/ed Converters and Cycloconverters, New York:
John Wiley, 1971.
Pillai, S. K., A First Course on Electrical Drives, Delhi: Wiley Eastem, 1971.
Ramamoorty, M., An lntroduction to Thyristors and Their Applications, New Delhi:
Affiliated East West Press, 1977.
Ramshaw, R. S., Power Electronics: Thyristor Controlled Power for Electric Motors,
Chapman and Hall, 1973.
Rice, L. R., ed., Silicon Controlled Rectifier Design Handbook, 2nd Edition,
Westinghouse, 1970.
Sen, P. C.; Thyristor DC Drives, New York: Wiley, 1981.
Sen, P. c., Power Electronics, New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill, 1987.
Slemon, G. R., and A. Straughen, Electric Machines, Reading: Addison-Wesley, 1981.
Senguier, G., Power Electronic Converters, AC/DC Conversion, London: North Oxford
Academic, 1986.
Shepherd, W., Thyristor Control of AC Circuits, London: Crosby Lockwood Staples,
1975.
Shepherd, W., and L. N. Hulley, Power Electronics and Motor Control, Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press, 1987.
Shepherd, W., and P. Zand, Energy Flow and Power Factor in Nonsinusoidal Circuits,
Cambridge University Press, London, 1979.
Steven, R. E., Electrical Machines and Power Electronics, Van Nostrand Reinhold,
1983.
Sugandhi, R. K., and K. K. Sugandhi, Thyristor-Theory
and Applications, New Delhi:
Wiley Eastem, 1981.
Takeuchi, J., Theory of SCR Circuits and Application to Motor Control, Tokyo Electrical
Engineering College Press, 1968.
Tarter, R. E., Principles of So lid State Power Conversion, Howard W. Sams, 1985.
Wood, P., Switching Power Converters, Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1981.
Answers to Se/ected
Prob/ems
CHAPTER
1
1.1
A: unstable, B: unstable, C: stable, D: stable.
1.2
(a)
1.3
CHAPTER
a
WmA
+ Va2
4be
2e
'
WmB
a - Va2 - 4be
2e
;
For positive and real equilibrium speeds a2 > 4be;

(b) WmA is stable and WmB is unstable.
A: unstable, B: stable, C: unstable, D: stable, E: unstable, F: stable, G: unstable,
H: stable.
a
+ Va2
4e(d - b)
a - Va2
4e(d - b)
1.4
(a)
1.5
For positive and real speeds d> b and a2 > 4e(d - b);
(b) WmA is stable and WmB is unstable.
3 S.
WmA
2e
'
WmB
2e
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
484
(a) deerease to 500 rpm; (b) deerease to 25 A.

(a) Inerease to 2000 rpm; (b) Inerease to 400 A.
II n.
1000 rpm, 200 A.
(a) 139.4 V; (b) 80 pereent.
562.5 rpm.
52.5 V.
Answers to Selected Problems
2.8
2.9
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
CHAPTER
485
1.44.
1118 rpm (c\ockwise), 223.6 A in reverse direction.
1022 rpm.
0.89 n.
8.64 n.
(a) 2.16 n, (b) 384 N-m, (e) 211 N-m.
(b) (i) 53.2, (ii) 130, (iii) 117.4

(b) (i) a=86.3, an=O, (ii) a= 180, an= 106.2, (iii) a= 180,
an = 85.3.
3.3 (a) mode IV, 8.1 N-m; (b) mode 1,30 N-m; (e) mode V, 31.9 -rn; (d) mode VI.
16.3 N-m.
3.4 (a) mode II, 13.9 N-m; (b) mode 1,24 N-m; (e) mode VI, 12.3 -rn; (d) mode V,
23.9 N-m.
3.5 a = 30: 878 rpm, 558.3 rpm, 140 N-m; a = 120: 760 rpm, 462 rpm, 153 N-m.
3.6 (a) 2485 rpm, 1003 rpm, 15 N-m; (b) O rpm, -1408 rpm, 18 -rn.
3.7 (a) mode 1, 71.8; (b) mode 1, 64.6; (e) mode V, 1W.
3.8 (a) mode 1, a = 112, an = 0; (b) mode 1, a = 98, an = 0; (e) mode V, a = 180,
an = 73.8.
3.9 (a) mode 1, 155 rpm; (b) mode 1, 184 rpm; (e) mode V, - 359 rpm.
(a) -80 rpm; (b) 370 rpm.
3.10
3.11 (a) 460/180 V; (b) (i) 18.9, (ii) 124.3, (iii) 117.4.
....3.12 (a) 460/180 V; (b) (i) a = 18.9; (ii) a = 124.3; (iii) a = 57.4, a = 120.
n
3.13 (a) 416 rpm; (b) -824 rpm; (e) 495 rpm.
3.14 (a) 87 rpm; (b) 484 rpm.
3.15 (a) mode Il, 841 rpm; (b) mode 1, 443 rpm; (e) mode IlI, 1111 rpm.
3.16 (a) mode 1, 61.r; (b) mode 1, 41; (e) mode III, 110; (d) mode I1I, 110.
3.17 0.7, 88 percent, 98.66 percent.
3.18 6.66 N-m, 16.9 mH.
3.19 96 mH, O rpm, 9.36 N-m.
3.20 22.2 percent, 4.94 mH.
(a) 6.74 A; (b) 0.78, 80.6 percent; (e) (i) 98 percent, (ii) 96 percent.
3.21
3.1
3.2
(a) 230/260;
(a) 230/260;
CHAPTER 4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
0.57, 1.69 A.
Few points on the characteristic are:
N(rpm)
1141
453
343.6
292.5
Ta(N-m)
22.5
162
338.8
528.5
(a) 643 rpm, 2.3 KW; (b) 0.96 A; (e) 971.4 rpm, 1214 rpm.
(a) 410 rpm; (b) 0.458.
486
Answers
4.5
E[S+P
P+S]
(a) ~i. = 2R R. + R - ~
B
Kw
2
T. = ~
4.6
(b)
(a)
(b)
4.8
CHAPTER
(a)
to Selected Problems
---rr- (Q
S)]
[R. + 8RB
RB7~P
RBP7~
_R. + RB - (R. + RB)T +
R. + R. + Rs
'
where P = exp{ -(1 - 8)T/r~} - 1, Q = 1 - {exp - 8T/7J,

R = 1 - exp{ -8T /7. - (1 - 8)T /r~}' and
S = exp{ -8T /7 J - exp{-8T/7. - (1 - 8)T /7~};
T. = (O.12N) N-m, N is speed in rpm.
For 45.5 :S N:s 500, 8 = (0.42N - 19.12) -7- 230, and for O:s N:s 45.5, 8 = O,
N is speed in rpm;
0.558,
i.=217.6-218.2e-36.76tA,
O:St:S l.395 x 10-3 S
= 274e-3676(t-O.OOI395)
- 263.6 A,
1.395 x 1O-3S:s t es 2.5 X 1O-3S. Devices conduct as follows: D2: O to
0.075 mS, SI: 0.075 mS to 1.395 mS, DI: 1.395 mS to 2.448 mS and
S2: 2.448 mS to 2.5 mS.
0.918; (b) 0.1515.
6
6.1
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
(a) 59.17 A, 324 N-m, 0.9, 87.9 percent; (b) 0.266,3.91;

(a) Oto -833 N-m, 1200 to 1275.4 rpm; (b) 79.6 kW; (e)
0.136, 3.94.
Im(A)
8.16
4.9
2.86
l.71
0.9
N(rpm)
122
224.8
313
456
866
T(N-m)
26.8
37.5
33.85
24.97
13.5
(a) 88.7 V, 7.4 A, no; (b) 62.75 V. 5.25 A, no.
(a) 1.88 n per phase; (b) 0.41 n per phase.
(a) Few points are tabulated below:
1.0
a
0.2
0.6
143.5 .
182
Motoring Tmax(N-m)
62.8
-512
-403.6
Braking Tmax(N-m)
-1170.5
(b) Few points are:
a
0.2
0.6
1.0
Ts(N-m)
53.4
90.4
80.56
117 percent, no, (V/f) ratio should be increased to 2.36.
Few points are
f(Hz)
6
12
18
24
48
36
41.5
V(V)
17
29.3
53.7
78
102.6
Few points are given here
f(Hz)
6
12
18
24
36
48
V(V)
30
43
54.5
65
85.9
106.4
For constant motoring breakdown torque: (V/f) = 2.9,
For constant (V/f) control: (V/f) = 2.1,
Braking breakdown torques: for (V/f) = 2.9, -1435 N-m
for (V/f) = 2.1, -761.3 N-m.
316 rpm.
(e) 1.87; (d) 2.72 kW.

1216 rpm.
0.368
4549
2.58
1.6
82
-136
60
127
60
127
2.0
53
-83
487
6.13
(a) 0.4, 2.46; (b) 0.99,0.445.
6.14
6.15
6.16
6.17
6.18
29.3 N-m, 1642 rpm.

(a) 42.67 Hz, (b) 820 rpm; (e) 51.3 Hz, 25.46 A; (d) 51.3 Hz. 26 A.
(a) 37.3 Hz; (b) 938.6 rpm, 25.56 A; (e) 939.6 rpm, 26.1 A.
20.25 V.
8.94/-8.4
V or 45/-95.4 V; former will be preferred because of more efficient
operation.
(a) (i) 1135.2 rpm, (ii) 1157.5 rpm; (b) (i) 1234.8 rpm, (ii) 1264.2 rpm.
(a) Few points are
12, p.u.
0.147 0.5
0.8
1.2
1.6
2.0
2.5
3.0
IWstl, rad/sec O
3.97 6.59 10.2 14.0 18.3 24.6 32.8
The slip speed will be positive for motoring and negative for braking;
(b) motoring: 1120 rpm, 50.17 A; Braking: 1280 rpm, 50.17 A;
(e) motoring: 34.6 Hz, 32.3 A; Braking: 32 Hz, 32.3 A.
43 N-m, 10.48 A, 82.8 percent.
6.19
6.21
6.22
CHAPTER
7
7.2
CHAPTER
1.169,0.73
8
8.1
8.2
(1) 41.33 Hz, 75.7 A, 48; (2) 860 rpm, 75.7 A, 60.6; (3) 10.2, 1.025.
(1) 41.4 Hz, 49, 77.2 A, 91.1 percent, 0.81, 0.626; (2) 1169 rpm,"61 A,
93 percent, 0.81, 0.6; (3) 0.4 and 2.4 for motoring and braking respectively,
37.5 percent.
8.3
(1) slip speeds are 4.19 rad/sec and 1.99 rad/sec at rated and half rated torques
respectively for all frequencies;
(2) Few points are tabulated below:
30 Hz
Ws(,
rad/sec
6.28
10.47
15.7
20.94
T, N-m
257
344
372.7
357.8
60 Hz'
Ws(, rad/sec
5
10.33
15.1
T, -m
147
18l.2
170.6
783 rpm, 40S, 15.33 A, 0.73, 15.63 A, 93 percent, 0.816.
(1) 182.2 N-m, 54.4 Hz , 49.33 A, 94.3 percent, 0.82;
(2) 1765 rpm, 165 N-m, 46.8 A, 94.8 percent, 0.86;
(3) 3143 rpm.
(1) 128.55 N-m, 67.9 Hz; (2) 2364 rpm, 92 N-m.
(1) 629.6 rpm; (2) 43 Hz; (3) 1477.5 rpm; (4) 70.8 Hz.
(1) 43.4 Hz, 185 A, 86.62 kW, 0.78, 92 percent;
(2) 631 rpm, 182.3 A; 58.68 kW, 0.77,88.8 percent.
64 Hz, 78.7 kW, 109 A.
8.84 D.
(1) 102A, 125 A, 42.2; (2) 40.4 Hz , 86.2 A, 0.66; (3) 736.6 rpm, 92.4 A,
113.2 A, 67.9.
2243 rpm, 41.68 A, 51 A, 47.3, 98.9 percent
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.8
8.9
8.10
8.11
8.12
8.13
488
8.14
.8.15
8.16
CHAPTER

0.75 .
1208.8 rpm, 82.7 A, 132.7.
32.86 Hz, 0.185.
9
9.1
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.8
CHAPTER
(1) 0.911; (2) 005.3 N-m.

(1) R = 4 or 0.003 11; (2) For R = 4 11, 8 = 0.685 or 0.99; (3) For R
N = -261 rpm or -16200 rpm.
(1) 0.85; (2) 8880r 144 rpm.
(1) 0.31; (2) 31l.4 N-m, 0.29; (3) 0.126.
(1) 0.508; (2) 287 N-m, 0.57; (3) 394 N-m, 0.42.
(1) 0.305; (2) 126; (3) 994.8 rpm.
4 fi,
10
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
..
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
(1) 15.2 A, 6l.4 N-m; (2) 59.7; (3) 0.93 (lagging), 8.45 A;
(4) Unity power factor operation not possib1e.
(1) 5.23,62.75; (2) 0.71 (leading), 616.8 A, 99.6 percent;
(3) 140.5 A.
15.5 A, 0.84.
53373 N-m, 200 A.
Below base speed: I~, power factor and T are he1d constant at 19.24 A, 0.8 and
79.6 N-m respective1y. V and P m change linearly from their zero values at zero speed
to 254 V and 15 kW respectively at base speed .
Above base speed:
N(rpm)
T(N-m)
Pm(kW)
cos cjJ
2160
67.7
15.3.
0.817
2461
59.6
15.37
0.82
For 0.8 of full load power, theoretically, thereis no restriction on the maximum
speed.
.
24.47 N-m, yes at this torque the power factor will be unity for all speeds below base
speed.
7800 rpm, 18.37 N-m, power factor will vary with speed.
Below base speed: I~, T and IF are held constant at 47 A, 3979 N-m and 13.33 A
respectively. P m and V will increase linearly with speed from their zero values at zero
speed to 500 kW and 3810.5 V, respectively, at 1200 rpm.
Above base speed: V and P m will be constant at 3810.5 V and 500 kW respectively.
For other parameters few points are:
N(rpm)
T(N-m)
I~(A)
IF(A)
1440
3315.8
39.17
12.2
1680
2842
33.6
11.4
2040
2340.6
27.6
10.7
2400
1990
23.5
10.3
1l.6 A.
489
CHAPTER
11
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.S
11.8
(1) 41.6,48029 N-m, 11 kV; (2) 2347 rpm; (3) 169.

(1) 53.6; (2) 0.66,43.64,2704.7
N-m, 2934.6 V.
(1) 177.4; (2) 0.16,555.5 N-m, 717.4 V, 76.9.
(1) 66.9; (2) 0.6, 25327 N-m; (3) 0.43, 3630 N-m.
(1) 8';" = 191; (2) O, O N-m; (3) 0.187, -1578.7 N-m.
Three points on the speed-torque curves are:
rm,
1.5 x rated
rated
O
11.9
11.10
11.11
Constant
margin angle
Constant commutation
lead angle
Constant no-load
torque angle
1020
945.6
820
10254
7345
O
1020
1116
1361
10254
6059
O
1020
2340
17807
10254
2863.5
O
For 1, = 10 A, 8' = 131, T = 28.75 N-m, V = 184 V.

(1) 155.3 N-m; (2) 573 V (line).
118 N-m, 0.99.
Index
A
AC voltage controllers:
crcuits, 273-74, 276
induction motor control, 273-81
induction motor starters, 281
Air-gap power, 207
Angle:
cornrnutation lead, 428, 435-37
commutation overlap, 426
firing, 68, 71
hold-off, 275
margin, 428, 435
no-Ioad torque, 430
torque, 395, 402
Armature current ripple, 115-16
effect on motor performance, 116-17
B
Base frequency. 304
Base speed, 15,284,313.335,344,411,447,450,
454, 457, 459-61

Blowers, 417, 471
Braking, 9-10, 45, 71, 159, 165-66,214,308,326,
362, 395, 406, 429, 448, 463, 466

Breakdown torque, 209
Brushless ac motor, 424, 473
Brushless dc motor, 424, 468-72, 475
Brushless excitation, 406
490
Chopper:
control techniques, 146
current limit control, 148, 155
four-quadrant,
175-80
step-down, 147, 149
step-up, 149-50
time ratio control, 148, 152
two quadrant, 169-75 _.
Chopper control of de motors:
composite braking, 166-67
current control, 167
dynarnic braking, 165
four quadrant control, 175-81
regenerative braking, 159-65, 168, 172
separately excited motor control, 150-56
series motor control, 156-59
two quadrant controls. 168-81
Circulating current, 137-38
Closed-loop control of dc drives:
armature reversal by a contractor, 195
current sensing, 190
dual converters, 197,201
field weakening, 188
four quadrant drives, 195-201
inverse cosine firing. 193
PI controller, 184-86, 191
single quadrant drive. 184
speed sensing, 189
transfer characteristics,
192-95
491
Index
Coiler drive , 6, 7
Commutating inductance, 424, 465
Commutation, 23
line, 23, 427
load. 424, 425, 427, 443, 446, 468
forced, 32, 126
Commutation lead angle, 428
constant commutation lead angle control, 435-37
Commutation overlap. 426, 465
Cornrnutatorless ac motor, 424, 473
Commutatorless de motor. 385, 424, 475
Composite braking:
chopper-fed dc motors, 166-67
induction motor drives, 311, 328
synchronous motor drives, 466
Compressor, 417, 471
Constant power, 7. 17, 233. 284, 313, 449
Constant torque, 17.40,233,284.313.449.459
Continuous conduction, 68, 76
Controlled tlywheeling (see Controlled rectifiers)
Controlled rectifiers:
controlled tlywheeling, 93-94, lO9-12, 123-25,
290, 326, 371
freewheeling diode, 68, 114
fully-controlled, 66-68
half-controlled, 66, 68-70
line commutated inverter, 68, 72
pulse-width modulated, 126-32, 290, 326, 371
transfer charcteristics,
192-95
Converters, 2, 13-16 (see a/so Power semiconductor
con verters)
,.,. machine side, 425
ratings. 14
source side, 425
Conveyer, 417, 471
Crane hoist drive, 280
Current control:
cascade control, 186
current-lirnit control, 133, 167, 185-87, 315-16
dc drives, 132-33, 167, 185-87
induction motor drives, 314-18, 325, 342
inner current control, 132, 167, 185-87. 468
parallel current control. 186
synchronous motor drives, 468
Current controlled PWM inverter, 342-44
Current ripple:
definition, 115-6, 153
effect on dc motor performance, 116-17
maximum, 117
normalised,118-19
Current sensing, 190
Current source inverter, 284, 320
autosequentially commutated, 323-25
current controlled PWM, 342-44
current sources, 325
GTO current source, 330-34
induction motor drives, 335-38 (see also

Induction motor drives)
load commutation in. 424-27
pulse width modulation in, 328, 330
synchronous motor drives, 464-72 (see also
Synchronous motor drives)
Cycloconverters,
14, 345-49
current source type, 349
induction motor drives, 349
line commutated, 345-49
load commutation, 446
synchronous motor drives, 467. 472-74
voltage source type, 349
o
Damper winding, 390, 397, 465
DC dynamic braking, 217-22
DC link, 289
DC motor:
cumulatively compound, 35, 38-39
separateIy excited, 35, 37-39
series, 35, 36-39
speed torque relations, 36-37
DC motor control (see a/so Closed-Ioop control of dc
drives)
arrnature resistance control, 44
arrnature voltage control, 39-40. 42
chopper control (see Chopper control of dc
rnotors)
dynamic braking. 48-50
field control, 41-43
loss minimization, 54-57
multiquadrant operation, 52-53
plugging, 51-52
rectifier control (see Rectifier control of dc
rnotors)
regenerative braking, 46-48, 71, 159
speed control, 39-45
starting, 45
transfer functions, 57-62
Diesel electric locomotive. 6. 8
Discontinuous conduction. 73, 76, 87, 152, 160. 194
Displacement factor, 122
Distortion factor, 122
Drive specifications, 20 -21
Drives, 1 (se e a/so Power semiconductor drives)
constant power, 17
constant torque, 17
multi-motor, 17
multi-speed, 17
variable speed, 17
Dual converters:
nonsimultaneous control, 135-36, 197
simultaneous control, 135, 137-38, 20I
492
Duty cycle, 146
Duty ratio, 146, 357
Dynamic braking, 46
dc motors, 48-50
de motors-fed by choppers, 165
induction motor, 214, 217-22
induction motor drives, 309-311, 328
synchronous motor, 406
synchronous motor drives, 466-67
E
Electric braking, 9-10
Electric dri ve, l. 2
Excavators, 6, 8
Excitation emf, 391
Extruders, 417, 471
F
Fan, 6, 226, 278, 379-80, 417
Fibre spinning mili, 412
Firing angle, 68, 71
Flywheel energy storage, 417, 471
Forced cornrnutation, 32
Freewheeling diode, 68, 114
Frequency controlled inducrion motor drives (see
Inducrion motor drives)
Fully-controlled recrifiers, 66-68
G
Gate turn-off thyristor (GTO), 24
Gearless dri ves, 417, 472
H
Half-controlled rectifiers, 66. 68-70
Harrnonics, 16, 125, 148,261-66.273,288,
290-91, 300. 306, 308, 322, 330, 348, 409. 411,
464-67
Hoist, 6, 8. 280
Hunting, 396, 411, 416, 418
Inducrion motor:
deep-bar squirrel-cage rotor, 210
design classificarion, 211-12
double squirrel-cage rotor, 210
equivalent circuits, 206, 218, 240, 247, 258-60,
288, 375
Index
generator operation, 205
harmonic equivalent circuits. 262-63
non-sinusoidal supplies, 261-66
squirrel cage, 203, 204, 209
steady state analysis, 205-9
torque pulsations, 265
wound rotor, 212
Induction motor control (se e also Induction motor
drives)
counter torque braking, 216
current source, operation, 247-53
dc dynamic braking, 217
injection of voltage in the rotor, 239, 367
loss minimization, 255-60, 281
multiquadrant control, 260
plugging, 216
regenerarive braking, 205, 214, 234, 241, 260
rotor resistance control, 239, 356
starting, 213, 281
variable frequency control, 227-35, 251-53
variable terminal voltage control, 226-27
Inducrion motor drives
ac voltage controller fed, 273
closed-loop control, 277-78, 316-18, 335-38,
362-63,380
composite braking, 311, 328
current controlled PWM inverter, 344
current source inverter, 325, 335-38, 341-42
cycloconverter fed, 349
dynamic braking, 309-11, 314, 316
- equivalent circuir, 291, 295, 297, 360, 375
four-quadrant
operation, 275-76, 278, 310. 320,
328, 349, 362
los s minimization, 281
minimum los s control, 318, 337
power factor considerarions, 368-71
PWM inverter, 298, 315-19
regenerative braking, 309-11, 314, 317, 328, 349
six-step inverter, 289, 314
slip power control, 355
slip power recovery scheme, 365
static Kramer drives, 355, 385
static rotor resistance control, 355-62
static Scherbius drives, 365-84
subsynchronous converter cascade, 365
voltage source inverter, 284, 313-20, 341-42
Interval:
duty, 78, 151
energy storage, 160
energy transfer, 160
freewheeling, 94-95, 151
zero current, 78
Inverse cosine firing, 192, 346
Inverters (see also Current source and Voltage source
inverters)
493
Index
current controlled PWM, 342-44
current source, 284, 320-21, 323, 326-33.
335-38
line commutated, 68, 72
load commutated, 424, 468
PWM,298
voltage source, 284-86
K
Kramer drives, 384-85
L
Load commutation,
Load torques:
active, 9
components, 4
passive, 9
Loss minimization,
424-27
54, 256
M
Machine tools, 65
Margin angle, 428, 435
constant margin angle control, 435
Mechanical power, 207
Mechanical time constant, 11, 58
Mine winders, 65. 222. 349
Minimum loss control, 57, 318, 337
MOSFETS, power, 30-32
Motor load system, 3
dynamics.3
Motor ratings, 14
N
Natural characteristic,
1, 39
Naturally commutated device, 32
No-load torque angle, 430
constant no-load torque angle control, 436-37
Normalised:
speed, 86, 101, 114
torque, 86, 101, 114
p
Paper milI, 7, 42, 65, 412
Per unit:
frequency, 227
output voltage, 118-19
Plugging:
de motors, 51-52
induction motor. 216. 261
rectifier-fed dc motor, 72
Power factor, 122,273.290.314.326.368-71.
397-98,433-34,448-49,455,457,461.473
fundamental, 122
Power semiconductor con verter, 2
advantages. 16
drawback, 16
harrnonics, 16, 123-25, 261
power factor. 16, 122
rating. 14,
types, 13
Power semiconductor devices:
asymmetrical thyristor, 24
gate tu m-off thyristor (GTO), 24-25
power MOSFET, 30-32
power transistor, 26-30
reverse conducting thyristor. 24
thyristor, 22-24
Power semiconductor drives, 1
elements, 1, 2
multiquadrant operation. 10-11. 16-20
Printing press, 65
Proportional plus integral (PI) controllers.
191,319,468
Pull-out power. 397
Pull-out torque, 397
Pulsed mode, 444
Pulse-width modulation:
equal, 127
minimum loss, 308
natural sampling, 299
selective harrnonic elimination, 306
sinusoidal, 130, 299
triangulation, 299
uniforrn sampling, 305
Pump, 6, 226. 278, 379-80, 417
184-86.
R
Rectifier (see Controlled rectifiers)
Rectifier control of dc rnotors:
closed loop speed control (see Closed loop control
of dc dri ves)
controlled f1ywheeling, 93-94. 109-12, 114,
123-25
controlled rectifier circuits, 66
current control, 132
dual converters. 135, 197-201
field current reversal, 139-40
filter inductance, selection, 117
494
fully-controlled rectifier-fed, 72, 102
half-controlled rectifier-fed, 101, 114
hannonics, 123-25
mode identification, 83-84
modes of operation, 72-77, 94-96, 101-2, 104,
111-12
multiquadrant operation, 133-40
performance equations, 77-83, 95-99, 103-5,
Ill-14
pulse-width modulated rectifier, 126
regenerative braking, 71, 75,77,98,105,114,
133
speed torque characteristics,
84-87, 100, 101,
105-6, 114
transfer characteristics,
192-95, 200
Regenerative braking:
dc motors, 46-48
dc motors chopper controlled, 159-65
induction motors, 214-16, 234, 241, 260-61
induction motor drives, 309-11, 314, 317, 328,
349
rectifier controlled separately excited motor,
71-72
synchronous motor drives, 411, 429, 448, 464-67
Rolling milis, 7, 65, 349, 417, 471
Rotor position encoder, 418-20
s
Scherbius drive, 365
Self commutated semiconductor:
devices, 32
switch, 32, 126, 146-47, 285, 320
Self-control, 418, 426
Self-controlled mode, 410
Servo-drives, 476
Slip-power, 207
Slip power controlled induction motor drives (see
Induction motor drives)
Slip power recovery scheme, 365
Slip-speed. 204. 229, 250, 252. 317, 335-38
optimum, 260, 318
Slip-speed regulator, 317, 336
Speed control, 16-20, 39, 225,410
Speed regulation. 17
Speed sensing, 189
Starter, 281
Starting, 45,213,281,372,406,476
Static:
Kramer drive, 384-85
rotor resistance control, 356
Scherbius dri ve, 365
Synchronous
motor (see also Synchronous
motor
control)
Index
brushless excitation, 406
equivalent circuits, 391-93, 401
excitation emf, 391
hannonic equivalent circuits, 409- lO
hunting, 366, 411, 416, 418
non-sinusoidal supplies, 409- lO
pennanent magnet motor, 407
pull-out power, 397
pull-out torque, 397
synchronous reactance, 393
synchronous reluctance motor, 408
torque (or power) angle, 395, 402
torque angle curves, 396, 405
V-curves, 397
wound field cylindrical rotor, 390
wound field salient pole, 403
Synchronous motor control (see also Synchronous
motor dri ves)
constant voltage and frequency operation, 395,
403, 407-8
current source operation, 40 I
dynamic braking, 406
four-quadrant operation, 411
frequency control, 410-13
power factor control, 397-98
regenerative braking, 395, 406, 411
self-controlled mode, 410
speed control, 410
starting, 406, 408, 411, 476
true synchronous mode, 410
Synchronous motor drives
brushless de motor, 424, 468-72, 475
commulatorless ac motor, 424, 473
cornmutatorless dc motor, 385, 424, 468-72, 475
constant commutation lead angle control, 435-37
constant margin angle control, 435
constant no-load torque angle control, 435-37
current source inverter, 464
cycloconverter, 467, 472
four-quadrant operation, 466-67
leading power factor operation, 449-52. 455-57
load commutated current source inverter. 468
load cornrnutated cycloconverter. 468
load commutation, 424-25, 446
maximum torque 10 armature current ratio
operation, 461
maximum torque to flux ratio operation, 462
pennanent magnet motor fed from a current
source, 454-58
pennanent magnet motor fed from a voltage
source, 458-60
pulsed mode, 444
self-control, 418, 426
servo drives, 476
true de motor operation, 462
true synchronous mode, 410
495
Index
unity power factor operation 448-49,457.460_61
voltage source inverter drives, 411, 467, 474-75
wound field motor fed from a current source,
447-52
wound field motor fed from a voltage source ,
460-61
Synchronous reactance, 393
Synchronous speed, 204, 390
Transier characteri,tic,
of recrifiers. 192-95
discontinuous conduction effect, 194
Transistor, power, 26-32
Darlington, 29
True dc motor operation. 462
True synchronous mode, 410
v
T
Textile mill, 412
Thyristors, 22. 32
asymmetrical, 24
reverse conducting, 24
Torque:
breakdown, 209
maximum 209-9
pull out, 397
Torque angle , 395, 402
Traction, 6-8, 166,417,471
Voltage source inverter. 284

induction motor fed by (see Induction motor
drives)
pulse-width modulated, 298-308
PWM for minimum loss , 308
PWM, selective harmonic elimination. 306
PWM. sinusoidal, 299-304
PWM, uniforrn sampling, 305
six step, 287-89
synchronous motor fed by (se e Synchronous motor
drives)
voltage control, 289
LlST OF PRINCIPAL SYMBOLS
Per unit frequency i.e. ratio of operating to

rated frequency
Stator to rotor turns ratio
AC side to con verter side transformer turns
ratio
aTI/aT2
Viscous friction coefficient
K.
Voltage induced in the armature of a de motor or in the stator of an induction motor, V

Frequency, Hz
Base frequency, Hz
Frequency of the carrier wave, Hz
Average value of the armature current of a
dc motor. A
lnstantaneous value of the armature current
of a dc motor, A
Ripple in armature current, A
Average value of the armature current at
critical speed Wonc, A
Average value of the dc link current of a
con verter. A
la
<PIla
Arrnature circuit inductance of a dc motor, H
In
N.
N'J
lnstantaneous value of the de link current of

a con verter, A
Field current of a synchronous motor, A
Pcr phase ac equivalent of lF for a .synchronous motor (also field current of a de
motor), A
1,{Xm/XJ
for a synchronous motor, A
Magnetising current, A
The ratio (V IjX,l for a synchronous motor, A
Rated value of l,'n for a synchronous motor, A
Fundamental component of rotor current. A
Fundamental component of rotor current referrcd to stator, A
R.M.S. value of a non-sinusoidal current, A
Fundamental component of induction motor
stator (or synchronous motor armature) current, A
lnstantaneous value of ac source current, A

kth harmonic in induction motor stator (or
synchronous motor armature) current, A
Polar rnoment of inertia of motor-load system referred to the motor shaft. Kg-m"
K.<P
de motor constant
(also eddy current
coefficient)
Commutating inductance of a synchronous

motor, H
DC link inductance, H
Synchronous inductance of a synchronous
motor, H
Modulation index
Speed, rpm
Synchronous speed, rpm
Slip-speed. rpm
Number of poles
Rotor circuit electrical power. W
Rotor circuit copper loss. W
Air-gap power, W
Develope mechanical power, W
Power recovered, W
Armature circuit resistance of a dc motor.
Braking resistance, n
Rotor resistance, n
Rotor resistance referred to stator, n
Stator resistance , n
Thevenins equivalen: resistance, n
Slip per unit (also Laplace operator)
kth harmonic slip pcr unit
Slip at the maximum torque
Time, S
Torque developed, N-m (also chopper period, S)
Torque developed,
-rn
Torque at the critical speed, Wmc,
-rn
Friction torque, N-m
Load torque, N-m
Torque required to do the useful mechanical
work, N-m
Breakdown/Pull-out
torque , N-m
Commutation
overlap angle , rad.
Source voltage, V
Instantaneous
value of de source voltage. V
Average value of the dc motor armature
voltage (also rectitier output voltage), V
lnstantaneous
value of the de motor armature voltage, V
Instantaneous
inverter output voltage betwecn pha e A and the central point of the
de ource. V
Fundamental component in a non-sinusoidal
voltage. V
Average value of dc link voltage. V
Instanfneous
value of de link voltage , V
Excitation emf. V
kth harrnonic component in a non-sinu .oidal
voltage. V
Peak value of an ac source voltage , V
Injected voltage , V
.,X
lnstantaneous
ac source voltage. V
Magnetising
reactance , n
Rotor leakage reactance. n
Rotor leakage reactance referrcd to stator. n
Stator leakage reactance
of an induction
motor or synchronous
reactance of a synchronous motor, n
Thevenin's
equivalent reactance , n
[R2 + (wL./J' 2
Firing angle, rad
e.:
y
'Ymin
8,
Cornrnutation
lead angle of a load commutated inverter or the angle at which rhe de
motor armature current drops to zero , rad
Minimum value of commutation lead angle.
rad
Margin angle for a load commutated
inverter (also the angle at which the induced
emf of a con verter fed de motor equal the
ac ource voltage), rad
Minimum value of margin angle, rad
Phase of 1; with air-gip emf E. rao
Armature time constant, S
Mechanical time constant , S
Power factor ancle of a svnchronou
motor
or an induction ~otor, rid
Fundamental
power factor angle, rad
Phase of injected voltage V, with respc t to
souree voltage V, rad
.
Pha e of tator current with rcspect to the
source voltage V. rad
Flux per pole, Webers
tan -'(wL./R.l
Source frequency. rad/ ec

Speed. rad/sec
Base speed, rad/sec
Wmb
Speed on the boundary between continuous
wmc
and discontinuous
conductions,
rad/sec
Ideal no load speed, rad/sec
Synchronous
specd, rad/sec
Slip
speed.
ra.I/sec
w"
Duty ratio of a hopper, torque angle of a
synchronous
motor fed from a voltagc
source
15'
Torquc angle of a synchronous
motor fed
from a current source
Variable*
Reference value of a variable
Variable
Phasor
w
1
Power Semiconductor
Controlted Orives:
An Introduction
This chapter describes the common features of electrical drives controlled by power
semiconductor converters.
1.1 THE POWER SEMICONOUCTOR ORIVE
ANO ITS ELEMENTS
The block diagram of an electrical drive controlled by a power semiconductor converter is shown in figure 1.1. The load is usually a machine designed to accomplish
a certain task. For examplevmachines like trains, rolling milIs, machine tools, paper
mills, cranes, excavators, and so on constitute a load on the electrical drive. Usually
the requirements of the load can be specified in terms of speed and torque demands.
As examples, some requirements of loads for transient operations and normal running are listed in section 1.5. The requirements of some specific loads are described
in section 1.2.3
For a suitable drive to be selected for a specific load (or application), complete
information about the load requirements should first be obtained. A motor having
speed-torque and speed-current characteristics that suit the load requirements is choseno A motor will have characteristics compatible to the load if it satisfies the speed
and torque requirements of the load without exceeding the current limitation imposed either by the motor rating or the source capacity. The characteristic obtained
when the supply is maintained at rated conditions is called the natural characteristic.
For example, the speed-torque characteristic of an induction motor obtained at the
rated terminal voltage and frequency will be its natural characteristic. Usually, the
natural speed-torque characteristic is not compatible with the load requirements.
Therefore, a power semiconductor converter is interposed between the source and
the motor.
0
Power Semiconductor
Controlled Drives-An
Introduction
Chap. 1
Power
semiconductor
converter
Command
signal
Figure 1.1
drive.
Block diagrarn of an electric
The power semiconductor convertor, which will from now on simply be called
a con verter, controls the flow of power from the source to the motor in such a way
that the motor speed-torque and speed-current characteristics become compatible
with the load requirements. The controls for the converter are built in a control unit
which operates at much lower voltage and power levels. The control unit consists of
linear and digital integrated circuits and transistors. It may also consist of a microprocessor when sophisticated control is required. The command signal, which adjusts the operating point of the drive, forrns an input to the control unit. The low
voltage control unit is electrically isolated from the power circuit (or converter-motor
circuit) for two reasons: In the absence of isolation, a malfunction may lead to
the application of the power circuit voltage to the control unit. This may damage the
control unit and may be detrimental to the safety of the operator who applies the
command signal. Converters generate a considerable amount of harmonics. In the absence of isolation, the harmonics can enter the control unit and interfere with its operation. Sensingof certgin parameters - such as converter current, motor speed, and
so on - is usually required either for protection or for closed-loop operation. This
function is perforrned by the sensing unit. When sensing the power circuit's electrical parameters - such as the converter current, voltage, and so on - isolation is
provided between the power circuit and the control circuit for the reasons just stated.
The complete drive system-c-consisting of the load, motor, converter, source,
control unit, and sensing circuit-must
be treated as an integrated system. The operating point of the motor may be disturbed due to a change in any of these elements
of the drive. Any such disturbance may produce changes which may affect the entire
system. Choice of various elements is also interrelated. For example, the source may
be deterrnined by the necessity of using a particular motor, or the motor may have to
be selected to suit the source available. Usually the converter is selected to make the
motor characteristics suitable to the load; however, it has to be chosen taking into account the capacity of the source and rules goveming its use. For example, it may be
necessary to limit the current inrush during starting or other transient operations, to
avoid voltage fluctuations on the supply lines, even when such a limitation is not required for the safe and satisfactory operation of the motor or the loado Further, a converter capable of imparting necessary characteristics to the motor most economically
may have to be abandoned because harmonics are generated in the supply lines or
due to the power factor deteriorating beyond permissible limits.
Seco 1.2
1.2 DVNAMICS
Dynamics
of the Motor
OF THE MOTOR
Load System
LOAD SVSTEM
This section is concemed with the presentation of the dynamic relations applicable
to all types of motors and loads.
1.2.1 Fundamental
Torque
Equations
A motor generally drives a load (machine) through some transmission system. While
the motor always rotates, the load may rotate or may undergo a translational motion.
The load speed may be different from that of the motor; if the load has many parts,
their speeds may be different, and while some may rotate, others may go through a
translational motion. It is convenient, however, to represent the motor load system
by an equivalent rotational system, as shown in figure 1.2. The following notation
is adapted:
J
= polar moment of inertia of the motor-load system referred to the motor shaft,
Kg-m2
Wm = instantaneous angular velocity of the motor shaft, rad/ sec
T = developed torque of the motor, N-m
T L = the load (resisting) torque, referred to the motor shaft, N-m
Any motor-load system can be described by the following fundamental torque equation:
(1.1)
Equation (1. 1) shows that the torque developed by the motor is counterbalanced by a
"'" load torque TL and the dynamic torque Jdwm/dL The torque component Jdwm/dt is
called the dynamic torque because it is present only during the transient operations.
The drive accelerates or decelerates depending on whether T is greater or less
than TL. During the acceleration period, the motor should supply not only the load
torque but an additional component Jdwm/dt to overcome the inertia of the drive. In
applications having a load with large inertia, such as trains, the motor torque must
exceed the load torque by a large amount to get an adequate amount of acceleration.
Similarly, in applications requiring fast response, the motor torque should be main-:
tained at the highest value and the motor-load system should be designed to have the
lowest possible inertia. When the speed increases, the kinetic energy of the drive
given by !Jw~ also increases; and, therefore, in addition to the energy supplied to
the load, the motor should also supply the kinetic energy. During the deceleration
period, the dynamic torque Jdwm/dt changes its sign, and thus assists the motor
torque T in maintaining the motion of the drive by extracting energy from the stored
kinetic energy. When the load has a high inertia, the motor should produce a large
~Mr
~(.)
Figure 1.2
Equivalent motor-load system.
~~
T ~)
w) (-)
L) )
Power Semiconductor
Introduction
Chap. 1
braking torque (negative T) to get adequate deceleration. When fast response is required, the braking torque should be maintained at the highest value and the motorload system should be designed with the lowest possible inertia.
When, for a short time, the load torque T L exceeds the maximum torque capability of the motor running at a given speed, deceleration occurs and the dynamic
torque assists the motor torque in maintaining the motion. In some applications, involving a large torque of relavtively short duration followed by a no-load or lightload period of sufficient duration, the dynarnic torque component is used so that a
motor of smaller rating can be used. For example, in a pressing machine, a large
torque of short duration is required during the pressing operation; otherwise the
torque is nearly zero. A flywheel is mounted on the motor shaft to increase the
equivalent inertia J. During the no-load period, the drive accelerates to store the kinetic energy. During the pressing operation, the load torque is much higher compared to the motor torque. The deceleration occurs, producing a dynamic torque.
The dynarnic torque and the motor torque together are able to produce the torque required for the pressing operation. In the absence of the flywheel, the motor will be
required to supply the entire torque required for the pressing operation, and therefore
the motor rating has to be much higher.
1.2.2 Components
of the Load Torque
The load torque T L can be further divided into the following components:
1. Friction torque T F: The friction will be present at the motor shaft and also in
the various parts of the loado The friction torque T F is the equivalent value of
various friction torques referred to the motor shaft.
2. Windage torque Tw: When a motor runs, the wind generates a torque opposing
the motion. This is known as the windage torque.
3. Torque required to do the useful mechanical work, T M: The nature of this torque
depends on the type of loado It may be constant and independent of speed, it
may be some function of speed, it may be time invariant or time variant, and
its nature may also vary with the change in the load's mode of operation.
The variation of friction torque with speed is shown in figure 1.3a. Its value at
standstill is much higher than its value at slightly above zero speed. Friction at zero
speed is called stiction or static friction. For the drive to start, the motor torque should
at least exceed stiction. The friction torque can be resolved into three components as
shown in figure 1.3b. The component Tv which varies linearly with speed is called
viscous friction and is given by the following equation:
(1.2)
where B is the viscous friction coefficient.

The component Te which is independent of speed is known as coulomb friction.
A third component Ts accounts for the additional torque present at standstill. Since
Ts is present only at standstill, it is not taken into account in the dynarnic analysis.
Seco 1.2
Dynamics
of the Motor Load System
Torque
(a)
(b)
Figure 1.3
Friction torque and its components.
The windage torque Tw, which is proportional to speed squared, is given by

the following equation:
Tw=Cw~
(1.3)
where C is a constant.
From the preceding discussion, for finite speeds,
T L = TM+ BWm
+ Te + Cw ~
(l.4)
In many applications (Te + Cw~) is very small compared to BWm and negligible compared to TM' To simplify the analysis, the term (Te + Cw~) is approximately accounted forby updating the value of the viscous friction coefficient, B.
With this approximation, from equation (1.1)
(1.5)
When TMand T are constant or proportional to speed, equation (l.5) will be a firstorder linear differential equation which can be solved analytically. Otherwise, equation (1.5) will be a nonlinear differential equation which should be solved numerically.
Theoretically, the transients decay to zero in infinite time, which is not true in practice.
To resolve this anomaly, the transient operation is considered over when a 95 percent change in speed has already taken place. For example, when the speed is changed
from Wml to Wm2, the equilibrium is assumed to have been reached when the speed
becomes equal to Wml + O.95(wm2 - Wml).
1.2.3 Some Common Load Torques
It is interesting to know the speed-torque requirements of few specific applications.
Figure 1.4 shows speed-torque plots for some applications.
Power Semiconductor
(a) Fan and eentrifugal
Introduction
(b) Traction
pumps
excluding
Chap. 1
gravity
Wm
A
A'
D
(d)
(e) Coiler drives
wm
Diesel-electrie
Low
Speed
I
I
loco motive
High
speed
A ~-----,.
A'I------\
O
TL
I
I
I
C
(e) Excavators
Figure 1.4
,,
(f)
Holst
Some examples of load torque requirernents.
In the case of centrifugal pumps, blowers, fans, and other loads involving the
turbulent flow of fluid, the load-torque varies as the square of speed, as shown in
figure l.4a. This is nothing but the windage torque given by equation (1.3). The
windage is also a predominant component at high speeds for trains, cars, and so on.
The variation of the traction load torque with speed, excluding the torque due to
gravity, is shown in figure l.4b. It is applicable to electric trains and road vehicles.
It is comprised of the windage, viscous friction, coulomb friction, and stiction.
When deciding about the torque requirements of the driving motor, the torque components that are needed to provide acceleration and to overcome gravity must also be
Seco 1.2
Dynamics of the Motor Load System
accounted foro In the case of electric trains, owing to very large inertia, the accelerating torque forms the major proportion of the total torque in the accelerating range,
particularly at low speeds. An important factor known as the coefficient of adhesion
is defined as follows:
Coefficient of adhesion
[(the maximum tractive effort which can be

applied without slipping at wheels/weight
on the driving wheels)]
The tractive effort is nothing but the driving force at the wheel rim, and, therefore, it
is proportional to the motor torque. The wheels coupled to the motor are called driving wheels. The foregoing equation suggests that for a given value of the coefficient
of adhesion, there is a maximum value of torque which can be exerted without the
driving wheels slipping. Slipping is always to be avoided as it damages the track and
reduces its life. The value of the coefficient of adhesion depends on the conditions of
the rail and wheel surface. In long distance trains, the distance between the consecutive stations is generally great. Acceleration and deceleration times form only a very
small proportion of the total time of travel between the two stations. Therefore, the
average speed mainly depends on the maximum speed and the acceleration is allowed
to be low to suit the passengers' convenience. In this case, locomotives are used to
drive the trains. Then the maximum weight on the driving wheels can be at the most
equal to the weight of the locomotive. Therefore, the maximum torque that can be
applied without the wheels slipping is small.
In the case of suburban trains, the distance between the consecutive stations is
usually very small. The acceleration and deceleration times form a major proportion
of the total traveling time. To get a high average speed, it is necessary to reduce the
acceleration time. For a given value of the coefficient of adhesion, the acceleration
can be increased only by increasing the weight on the driving wheels. Hence, instead of a locomotive, motorized train cars are used. Each motorized train car has its
own driving motor. The usual pattem is to use the motorized train car and trailer cars
in a ratio of 1: 2. This allows a much higher weight to come on the driving wheels,
. compared to a locomotive, and hence, much faster acceleration can be obtained.
The coefficient of adhesion also depends on the speed-torque characteristic of
the motor. When a wheel slips, the speed of the driving motor increases. If the
torque drops by a large amount, for a given increase in speed, the wheel regains its
grip immediately. Thus a motor speed-torque characteristic with a low regulation of
speed is preferred to prevent wheel slippage. A smooth change of torque is also desirable to prevent wheel slippage. This is easily achieved when power semiconductor
converters are used.
Figure l.4c shows the speed-torque curves for applications where the driving
motor is required to operate at a constant power. One such example is a coiler drive
which is used in steel strip, paper, and plastic mills. In a reversible cold rolling steel
strip mill, the strip to be rolled is received by the mill in the form of a reel wound on
a mandrel. The mandrel is mounted on one side of the rolling stand s. The purpose of
the rolling stand is to reduce the cross section and to improve the surface finish. Another mandrel is mounted on the other side of the rolling stands. After rolling, the
Power Semiconductor
Introduction
Chap.1
strip is wound on this mandrel. As the rolling process progresses, the strip uncoils
from one mandrel and coils on the other mandrel. To maintain even, good quality
roUing and coiling, it is necessary to keep the strip's tension constant on both sides.
Since the rolling stands receive and give out the strip at a fixed linear speed, the
coiling and uncoiling is done at a constant power. Thus, the motor driving the coiling reel must develop a constant motoring power, and the motor coupled to the uncoiling reel must develop a constant braking power. The amount of power changes
with the cross section and the material of the strip.
Figure l.4d shows the required motor speed-torque characteristics of a diesel
electric locomotive. A diesel electric loco motive employs a de motor fed by a dc
generator driven by a diesel engine. Instead of a dc generator, an altemator followed
by a diode rectifier may also be used. Since the speed-torque curves of the diesel engine are not compatible with the traction requirements, it cannot be directly coupled
to the driving wheels. By interposing the de generator-rnotor set, speed-torque curves
compatible with the traction requirements are obtained. The generator-rnotor system
essentially acts as a torque converter, similar to a gear system in a car, but of course
with a much superior performance. The diesel engine runs at full speed developing
constant power. When the fuel injection is set at maxirnum, it develops full power.
To make full use of the diesel engine power, the de motor should develop constant
power over the range of speed. Care is also taken to ensure that the diesel engine is
not overloaded, otherwise it will simply stall. This is achieved by the constant power
characteristic Be. The part CD is obtained by imposing a limit on the maximum
motor torque. This is done for three reasons: (1) to limit the rnotor-generator current
within a safe limit, (2) to prevent wheel slippage when the coefficient of adhesion is
low, and (3) to prevent too higha motor torque which may lead to a draw-bar fracture when the coefficient of adhesion is high. The part AB is required to limit the
m~tor speed within the permissible values and also to. limit the terminal voltages of
the motor and generator within rated values. For lower fuel injections, we get the
inner characteristics, for example B'C' shownin the figure. The different speed and
torque limits, A'B and C'D', are' imposed to take care of varying conditions of the
track related to the gradient and the adhesive coefficient. The characteristics SI and
S2 are provided fOTshunting purposes.
The characteristics shown in figure l.4d are realized by interposing a converter
between the source and the generator field.
The motor speed-torque requirements for excavators are shown in figure l.4e.
The purpose of the excavator is to dig earth. While digging, it may come across a
rock. The motor will then simply stop. In such a situation, the motor torque must be
limited to prevent mechanical damage to the excavator, and the motor current should
also be restricted within the converter rating. This explains why the portion Be has
the nature shown in the figure. The characteristics AB, A'B', A"B", and so on are
provided to take care of the varying nature of the material to be excavated.
The crane-hoist characteristics are shown in figure 1.4f. In a low speed hoist,
the torque is mainly due to gravity, which is constant and independent of speed. In
high speed hoists, the viscous friction and windage also form an appreciable proportion of the load torque.
I
Sec.1.2
Dynamics of the Motor load System
1.2.4 Classification of Load Torques

Various load torques can be classified into two broad categories:
1. Active load torques.
2. Passive load torques.
Load torques which have the potential to drive the motor under equilibrium
conditions are called active load torques. Such load torques usually retain their sign
when the direction of the drive rotation is changed. Torque due to the force of gravity
and torques due to tension, compression, and torsion undergone by an elastic body
come under this category. Let us consider the example of an electric train. When the
train climbs up, the active torque due to gravity opposes the motion. Therefore, the
driving motor has to generate extra torque to overcome the torque due to gravity. On
the other hand, when the train goes down a steep grade, it is driven by the torque due
to gravity. The motor produces braking torque to limit the speed within the safe values. This confirms the features of the active load torque just stated.
Load torques which always oppose the motion and change their sign on the reversal of motion are called passive load torques. Torques due to friction, cutting,
and so on are in this category.
1.2.5 Electric Braking
In electric braking, the motor is made to work as a generator producing a negative
torque. The electric braking may be required due to the following reasons:
1. If a motor running at some speed is disconnected from the supply, the only
opposing torque will be' the load torque T L. The motor will stop only after the
kinetic energy stored in its inertia is dissipated. When either the load torque is
small or the inertia is large, the motor takes a long time to stop. In applications
requiring frequent stops, the stopping time must be reduced by introducing
additional opposing torque by the use of electric braking.
2. In some applications, such as traction, rapid emergency stops are essential to
prevent accidents. The electric braking helps in achieving quick and smooth
stops.
3. There are applications where accurate stops are required, such as in lifts,
machine tools, ingot buggy control, and the screwdown mechanism in rolling
mills. Electric braking allows accurate steps without subjecting mechanical
parts to unduly large stress.
4. In certain applications involving active loads, the drive speed will reach dangerous values if the braking force is not provided by the motor. For example,
in a hoist application when a loaded hoist is being lowered, the motor should
provide a braking force to hold the speed within safe limits. Similarly in traetion, when a train goes down a steep gradient, a braking force is required to
hold the train speed within safe limits.
10
Power Semiconductor
Introduction
Chap. 1
The braking force can also be obtained by using mechanical brakes. However,
this leads to wear and tear of the mechanical parts. It is not as smooth as electric
braking. Furthermore, by using regenerative braking (explained in later chapters),
the energy is usefully employed instead of being wasted as with mechanical brakes.
1.2.6 Speed Torque Conventions
and Multiquadrant
Operation
In electrical machines, the torque is usually expressed as a function of speed (or

slip), and therefore the speed is treated as an independent variable and the torque as
a dependent variable. Accordingly, the speed is plotted on the 'X' axis and the
torque on the 'Y' axis. In drives, the torque is considered the independent variable,
and therefore is plotted on the 'X' axis. The speed, which is now the dependent variable, is plotted on the 'Y' axis. The reason for this convention is as follows. When
selecting a drive, the first thing to be noted is the torque the motor should produce
for the drive to be operable. The question of finding the drive speed arises only if the
drive operates. Hence the torque is regarded as the independent variable.
For the proper use of equation (1.5) and the consideration of the multiquadrant
operation of drives, it is useful to establish suitable conventions about the signs of
torque and speed. The motor speed is considered positive when rotating in the forward direction. For drives which operate only in one direction, the forward speed
will be their normal speed. For reversible drives the forward speed is chosen arbitrarily. Then the rotation in the opposite direction gives the reverse speed which is
assigned the negative signo The positive motor torque is defined as the torque which
produces acceleration or a positive rate of change of speed in the forward direction.
It tends to drive the motor in the forward direction. According to equation (1.5), the
positive load torque is opposite in direction to the positive motor torque. Motor torque
in the direction opposite to the positive motor torque will produce --deceleration or a
positive rate of change of speed in the reverse direction. It tends to drive the motor
in the reverse direction.
A motor operates in two modes-motoring
and braking. In motoring, it converts electrical energy to mechanical energy, which supports its motion. In braking,
it works as a generator converting mechanical energy to electrical energy, which is
consumed in some part of the circuit; and therefore it opposes the motion. The motor
can provide motoring and braking operations in both forward and reverse directions.
Figure 1.5 shows the torque and speed coordinates for both positive and negative signs, chosen according to the convention just explained. In quadrant 1, the
power, which is the product of speed and torque is positive. Hence, the machine
works as a motor supplying the mechanical energy. The operation in quadrant 1 is
called forward motoring. In quadrant ll, the power is negative. Hence, the machine
works under braking opposing the motion. The operation in quadrant II is called forward braking. When coupled to a passive load, the deceleration will be caused both
by the machine and the loado Consequently, the drive cannot have an equilibrium
speed in this quadrant. Operation in this quadrant will take place only under transients. The same will happen when coupled to an active load torque with a positive
signo However, if the active load torque is negative, the drive can have an equi-
Seco 1.2
Dynamics
11
of the Motor Load System
Forward
braking
Forward
motoring
@ @
Figure 1.5
drives.
Multiquadrant operation of
Reverse
motoring
Reverse
braking
librium speed in this quadrant. Then the drive will also operate in steady-state in this
quadrant. For example, when an electric train moves down a steep gradient, the
torque due to gravity supports the motion and the braking opposes the motion. By
the adjustment of the braking torque, the train is made to run at a desired speed.
Following the preceding arguments,
it can be noted that quadrant III gives
reverse motoring and quadrant IV provides reverse braking.
1.2.7 Steady-State
Stability
According to equation (1.1), the equilibrium speed of a rnotor-load system is obtained when the motor torque equals the load torque. This is the speed at which the
drive will normally operate in steady-state provided it is a speed of stable equi.,.. librium. Equilibrium speed will be viewed as the stable speed provided that the operation will be restored to this speed after any smaIl departure from it due .to any
disturbance in the motor-load system. The stability of an equilibrium point can be
readily investigated by using the concept of steady-state stability. In this concept, the
stability of an equilibrium point is evaluated from the steady-state speed-torque curves
of the motor and the loado It is assumed that any departure from the equilibrium
point, due to any disturbance, will be along these curves. This in effect means that
the motor is assumed to be in electrical equilibrium for all operating points. The basis
of this assumption is that the electrical time constant of a motor is usuaIly negligible
compared to its mechanical time constant.
At a given equilibrium operating point, let the motor torque, load torque, and
drive speed be denoted by Te' T Le, and Wme respectively. Then
dWme = O
dt
( 1.6)
A disturbance in the supply, load, or any part of the drive will cause perturbations in
the motor torque, load torque, and drive speed. At a time t, measured from the instant
the disturbance is caused, let these perturbations be denoted by ~ T, ~ T L, and ~wm
12
Power Semiconductor
Introduction
Chap. 1
respectively. Hence, at time t, the motor torque, load torque, and motor speed will
be (Te + ~T), (TLe+ ~Td, and (wme + ~wm) respectively. Now from equation (1.1)
Jd(wme + ~wm) + (T + ~T ) - (T + ~T) = O
dt
Le
L
e
(1.7)
Substituting from equation (1.6) gives

Jd(~wm>
dt
+ ~T
- ~T
=O
(1.8)
This differential equation provides the relation between small perturbations around
an equilibrium point. For small perturbations, the speed-torque curves of the motor
and load can be assumed to be straight lines. Thus
~T
(d~J~Wm
~TL = (:~~)~wm
and
(1.9)
Where (dT/ dwm)and (dT L/ dwm)are the slopes of the steady-state speed-torque curves
of the motor and the load at the operating point under consideration. Substituting
from equations (1.9) into equation (1.8) and rearranging the terrns gives
J d(~wm)
dt
+ [dT L - dT ] ~w = O
dWm
dwm'
(1.10)
This is a first-order linear differential equation. If the initial deviation in speed at

t = O is (~wm)O'then the solution of equation (1.10) will be
1 (dTL
~Wm = (~wJoe - -
dW
dT_\
-;;:,j'
(1.11)
An equilibrium point will be stable when ~wm' approaches O 'as t approaches

infinity. For this to happen, the exponent in equation (1.11) must be negative.
This gives
dTL _ dTj
( dWm dw:)
> 0-
(1.12)
Equation 0.12) suggests that for an increase in speed, the load torque must
exceed the motor torque so that deceleration takes place and the operation retums
to the equilibrium speed. Similarly, for a decrease in speed, the motor torque must
exceed the load torque so that acceleration occurs and the operation retums to the
equilibrium speed.
Let us examine the equilibrium points A and B, which are obtained when an
induction motor dri ves the load T Ll, as shown in figure 1.6. Let us first examine
point A for the steady-state stability. A small increase in speed makes the load
torque greater than the motor torque. Deceleration occurs and the operation is restored to point A. Sirnilarly, a small decrease in speed causes the motor torque to exceed the load torque. Acceleration occurs and the operation is restored to point A.
Thus, A is a stable equilibrium point. Let us next examine the stability of the equilibrium point B. A smalI increase in speed causes the motor torque to exceed the load
Sec.1.3
Converter
13
Motor System
Load torque
T Ll
Motor torque
Figure 1.6 Steady-state stability of equilibrium points.
Torque
torque. Acceleration takes place and the operating point moves away from B. Similarly, a small decrease in speed malees the load torque greater than the motor torque,
causing deceleration and the operating point to drift away from B. Thus B is an unstable equilibrium point.
Let us now consider the equilibrium point e which is obtained when the motor
drives the load-torque T L2. The load T L2 has a characteristic similar to the fan load
(fig. 1.4a). Examination of point e shows that it is a stable equilibrium point. Note
that points B and e lie on the same part of the motor speed-torque curve. However,
e provides the stable operation but not B. This shows that the stability of an equilibrium point depends not on either the motor characteristic alone or the load characteristic alone but on the relative nature of the two.
Notice that the part of the motor characteristic on which points B and e are situated has a positive slope. Such a motor characteristic gives unstable operation with
most loads, and therefore, it is sometirnes called a statically unstable characteristic.
1.3 THE CONVERTER
MOTOR
SYSTEM
This section describes types of converters and features common to all variable speed
drives controlled by power semiconductor converters.
.
1.3.1 Types of Converters
The motors commonly used in variable speed drives are induction motors, de motors,
and synchronous motors. For the control of induction motors, a fixed frequency ac
supply with variable voltage or a variable frequency ac supply with variable voltage
or current is required. Synchronous motors need a variable frequency supply with
variable voltage or current. For the control of de motors, a variable voltage de supply
is required. The variable voltage de supply is also used for the control of induction
and synchronous motors.
The supply that is generally available is the fixed voltage and fixed frequency
ac supply. Sometimes a fixed voltage de supply may be available. To satisfy the supply needs of various motors, a number of power semiconductor converters have been
Power Semiconductor
14
TABLE 1.1
Controlled
Drives-An
Introduction
Chap. 1
Converters, Their Conversion Functions and Applications
Con verter
Conversion Funetion
l. Controlled
reetifiers
AC to variable de
2. Choppers
Fixed voltage de to variable

voltage de
Fixed voltage ae to variable
voltage ae at same frequeney
DC to fixed or variable voltage
and frequeney ae, voltage or
eurrent sources
3. AC voltage
eontrollers
4. Inverters
(voltage
souree or
eurrent
souree)
5. Cycloeonverters
Fixed voltage and frequeney ae

to variable voltage and
frequeney ae
Applieations
Control of de motors,
induetion motors and
synehronous motors
Control of de motors and
induetion motors
Controlofinduetion
motors
Control of induetion
motors and synehronous
motors
Induetion motors and

synehronous motors
developed. These converters along with their conversion functions and applications
are listed in table 1.1. A variable speed drive may use a single converter or more
than one con verter. Further, each converter listed in the table may be realized using
different circuits. These circuits may not only differ in performance but also in terms
of their capability for motor control in various quadrants. Usually, the lesser the number of quadrants covered, the lower the cost and the simpler the converter circuito
While various features of individual converters and their circuits will be discussed in later chapters, some features cornmon to all converters are presented in the
following sections. Some of the features cannot be explained at this.stage. Therefore,
they would be simply stated. The detailed explanations will be given in later chapters.
1.3.2 Ratings of Converters
and Motors
During transient operations such as starting, braking, speed reversal, speed changing, and SO on, the motor current can be allowed to be higher than its rated current,
due to its large thermal capacity. For example, depending on the design of the motor
and the duration of the transient operation, a de motor may be allowed to carry 2 to
3.5 times the rated current. The flow of current equal to the maximum permissible
value allows full use of the motor torque capability both during motoring and braking. Consequently, the transients are completed in the shortest posssible period, and
the motor does not stall due to short-time overloads. When fast response during transient operations is not necessary, then the motor current need not be allowed to exceed the rated current.
Converters use semiconductor elements which do not have any capacity for
overload, due to their low thermal capacity. Therefore, their current rating is chosen
as equal to the maximum current that may be required to flow through the motor.
When the motor current is allowed to be K times (K > 1) the rated current, to get
fast response during transient operations, the converter rating must be K times the
Sec.1.3
Converter Motor System
15
motor rating. Consequently, the converter cost, and hence the drive cost, increases
substantially. The increase in the cost of the drive is well accepted as a price to be
paid for the increase in the total work done by the drive, which may ultimately lead
to an increase in production or financial retum. Almost all converter drives are provided with some kind of current control, the purpose of which is to prevent the current from exceeding a perrnissible value. When the motor current is allowed to be
K times its rated current, the current control will fail to protect the motor against
sustained overloads. In this case, additional thermal protection will be required to
protect against sustained overloads.
When fast response is not necessary during transient operations, the motor current is restricted to its rated value. This minimizes the cost of the con verter and the
drive. The current control now provides protection against the sustained overloads
as well.
The continuous torque and power limitations of a drive in the four quadrants of
operation are shown by the solid lines in figure 1.7 for speeds below and above base
speed Wmb' The base speed is the highest drive speed available at the rated flux (or
without weakening of flux). From standstill to base speed, both for motoring and
braking operations and for rotation in either direction, operation at the rated current
imposes a limitation on the maximum available torque. The available power increases linearly with speed and generally reaches maximum value-equal
to the
continuous power rating of the motor-at
base speed. Usually the motor is operated
at a reduced voltage below base speed. Above base speed, the motor terminal voltage
is maintained at the rated value. Motor operation at the rated current (and rated volt-
Maximum speed
r---
--
....\
Maxi~um
"
r-
--","-
..- /
Maximum
continuous
power
.....,
mb
:
... ...
" -, power
"
<, .
L_
transrent
Maximum
continuous
Maximum
transient
torque
torque
I
I
....w
mb
'"
" ",
,,
,
'" '"
'"
--
:
J
/
/
'-- _-'----t--..J- - - .../
Figure 1.7 Mximum, continuous and transient, torque and power limitations of
drives in four quadrants.
16
Power Semiconductor Controlled Drives-An
Infroduction
Chap. 1
age) imposes a limitation on the maximum developed power, and the maximum
available torque decreases with the increase in speed. One of the factors which imposes a limitation on the maximum speed is the mechanical strength of the motorload system. Other factors, which are applicable to specific motors, are described in
the relevant chapters.
As explained in the previous section, when fast response is desired, the motor
current is allowed to exceed the rated current during transient operations. When the
converter rating is chosen to match the motor transient current rating, the torque and
power limitations shown by the dotted lines are obtained (fig. 1.7). During transient
operation, the current may be forced to reach maximum permissible value, thus
causing the drive to operate on the dotted curves. This is done to make fuIl use of
the motor torque and power capabilities.
1.3.3 Harmonics
and Power
Factor
All power semiconductor converters have harmonics in their output voltage and current. The contribution of these harmonics to the power developed by the motor is
negligible. The harmonic currents increase the rms value of the motor current and
distort the flux. Consequently, the copper and core losses are increased. To prevent
the motor temperature from exceeding a safe value, the load on the motor must be less
than rated. In other words, the motor has to be derated in the presence of harmonics.
All power semiconductor converters also have harmonics in their input currents.
These harmonics cause line voltage fluctuations, adversely affecting other loads connected to the same lines. They also produce radio frequency interference through
conduction and radiation.
Some converters such as the controlled rectifier, the cycloconverter, and the ac
voltage controller suffer from a poor power factor, particularly at low output voltages.
-1.3.4 Advantages
of Converters
The discussion of the previous section has revealed some drawbacks of power semiconductor converters. To present a balanced picture, it is essential that we consider
their advantages as weIl. The main advantages are high efficiency, fast response,
control flexibility, easy maintenance, reliability, low weight and volume, less noise,
long life, and so on. Because of these advantages, and in spite of the disadvantages
mentioned in the previous section, power semiconductor converters have replaced
the conventional power controllers such as magnetic amplifiers, mercury-arc rectifiers, and so on in virtually all applications.
1.4 SPEEO CONTROL
ANO MULTIQUAORANT
OPERATION
In certain drive applications, the change in speed is not required. The driving motor
then operates at the rated conditions of supply on the natural speed-torque curve.
Such drives are called single speed or constant speed drives. Here no converter is
connected between the source and the motor during normal running. However, a
converter may be employed during starting and also sometimes during braking.
Seco 1.4
17
Operation
Some drives operate at discrete speed settings. These drives are called multispeed drives. In some other drives, stepless control of speed may be required. These
drives and also the multi-speed drives are called variable speed drives. There are applications where the speeds of a number of motors must be controlled simultaneously.
These motors are fed from a common con verter. Such drives are called multi-motor
drives. In all these drives, the converter which is used for speed control is also employed for starting control and sometimes al so for braking control.
A variable speed drive is called a constant power drive if the maximum power
capability of the drive does not change with the change in speed setting. The corresponding mode of operation is called the constant power mode or region. It must be
noted that the term "constant power" refers to the maximum power capability of the
drive and not to the actual power output which may vary from no load to full load.
The constant torque drive and constant torque mode or region are defined in the
same way.
Ideally, it is desired that for a given speed setting, the motor speed should
. remain constant as the load torque is changed from no load to fullload. In practice,
the speed drops with an increase in the load torque. The speed regulation is defined as
lati
- no load speed - full load speed
spee d regu ation f 111 d
d
u oa spee
( 1.13)
If the open-loop control fails to provide the desired speed regulation, the drive is
operated as a closed-loop speed control system.
.
The range of desired speed variation depends on the application.
In some
drives, the speed must be controlled from the base speed to 10 percent of the base
speed. In some other drives speed control abeve the base speed is also required and
the ratio between the maximum and minimum speed can be as high as 200. There
are also applications where the range of speed control is as low as from base speed
to 80 percent of the base speed.
Next we examine how the transition from one speed setting to another speed setting occurs. Various speed transitions can be classified into the following categories:
1. Decrease in speed in the same direction.

2. Speed reversal.
3. Increase in speed in the same direction.
Figure 1.8 shows the ideal speed torque characteristics of a variable speed drive for
few speed settings. The continuous torque and power limitations are shown. The load
characteristics are also shown. Now we consider the foregoing transition categories
1. Decrease in speed in the same direction: Let the drive be initially operating
at
point SI (fig. 1.9a) for which the speed is Wm1. If the drive has been running in
steady-state at this point, the motor torque will be equal to the load torque. We
now desire to change the operation to a lower speed Wm2. As soon as the command for speed change is received, the con verter transfers the operation to
point A in the braking quadrant. Since the transition from SI to A is done in a
very brief time, the motor speed does not change appreciably due to its inertia.
Now the motor is braked at the maximum current, which in vol ves braking at
Power Semiconductor
18
Introduction
Chap. 1
Wm
TL
1
(n)
-,
7
O
-,
speed
Maximum
power
<,
Base speed
\ (1)
Maximum
torque
\.
8
9
(m) \
10
(Iv)
13
Speed
settin 9 s
Base spee d
-:
11
12
'"
<,
Maximum
/
/
Figure 1.8 Motor speed-torque curves for

different speed settings along with load
characteristic.
the maximum power frorn A to B and braking at the maximum torque frorn B
to C. At e the desired speed is reached. The converter therefore transfers the
operation back to motoring, and the drive settles at point S2-at which the
motor torque equals the load torque. When the transition from SI to S2 must be
done in the least possible time, the braking is carried out at the maximum transient power and torque limits shown by the dotted lines in figure 1.7.
2. Speed reversal: Let the speed of the drive be changed from Wm1 to -Wm2'
which means the transfer of the operation frorn SItO S 2, as shown in figure
1.9b. Soon after the command for the speed change is received, the operation
is transferred to point A in the braking quadrant. The motor is braked to zero
speed, initially at maximum power and then at maximum torque. At zero speed
the converter transfers the operation to reverse motoring. The drive is accelerated at maximum torque to point D for which the motor speed is -Wm2' At D,
the motor is permitted to change its torque. The drive finally settles at S2 for
which the motor torque equals the load torque. Figure 1.9b also shows the
transition frorn speed Wm1 to -Wml> which occurs along the path SI, A, B, e,
D, E, F, and S 1. In the speed reversal also, when the transition from a given
operating point to another operating point is to be achieved in a rninirnum
time, braking and acceleration are done at the maximum transient torque and
power limits, shown by the dotted lines in figure 1.7.
Sec.1.4
19
Operation
Maximum
power
Wm1
--- ~---
----
S,
Maximum
torque
-------.----
Wm1
-----....---B
Maximum
power
S,
Maximum
torque
e
o
-Wm2
.".
F
---
s-
-Wm1
TL
(bl
Wm
TL
Maximum
power
__
S,
e
B
Maximum
----
Figure 1.9 Various speed transitions:

(a) Speed reduetion, (b) Speed reversal and
(e) Inerease in speed.
o
(el
-A
torque
20
Power Semiconductor
-o
lntroductlcn
Chap. 1
51
Figure 1.10 Speed transitions when single

quadrant converter is used.
3. Increase in speed in the same direction: Figure 1.9c shows the transition from
point S2 at speed Wm2 to point SI at speed Wml' When the speed command is
received, the operation is transferred to point A in the same quadrant. The
drive is accelerated initially at maximum torque arid then at maximum power
until the operation reaches point e for which the speed is Wml' The motor is
now allowed to change its power. The operation finally settles at point SI' In
this case also, for the fast response, the maximum transient torque and power
limits can be used.
The preceding discussion presents the ideal paths to be followed for transition
from one speed setting to another. Power semiconductor converters allow transition
to be obtained very close to these ideal paths. Because of the economic considerations, these transitions are often obtained in a different manner. Let us consider a
drive which runs only in the forward direction. For the ideal transition just described,
a two-quadrant converter capable of providing operation in quadrants 1 and II will be
required. The main purpose of operation in the second quadrant is to provide fast deceleration when the speed is to be lowered. In this operation, a passive load torque
always assists the braking torque produced by the motor. If the load torque is sufficiently large, enough deceleration can be obtained in the absence of the motor-braking
torque. Hence, one can use a single-quadrant converter. This allows considerable reduction in the cost of the converter. There are a number of applications where the
load torque has a sufficiently large value. A few examples are paper and printing
machines, blowers, pumps, and so on. A single-quadrant converter can also be employed in those applications where the slow response to decrease in speed command
can be tolerated.
When a single-quadrant converter is employed, the motor torque can at the
most be made zero. The path followed for the decrease in speed command from Wml
to Wm2 will now be as shown in figure 1.10.
1.5 DRIVE SPECIFICATIONS
The purpose of the drive is to drive the load (machinery) in such a manner that it is
able to accomplish the task assigned to it. Therefore, most of the drive specifications
are governed by the load requirements. The load requirements can be divided into
Seco 1.6
Power Semiconductor
Devices
21
TABLE 1.2' Load Requirements

Requirements Related to Starting, Stopping, and Reversing .'
1. Nature and range of load torque: How does the load torque vary with speed for its various speed
settings? Is the machine startedlstoppedlreversed on no load, light load, full load, or heavy load?
2. What is the inertia-Iow
or high?
3. How much time is allowed for these operations?
4. How frequently are these operations carried out?
5. Is the smooth acceleration and deceleration necessary?
6. Is an accurate stop required?
7. Should there be provision for quick stop or reversal during emergency?
8. Are these operations done manually or automatically?
Requirements Related to the Normal Running
l. Nature and range of the load torque and power: How does the load torque vary with speed for its
various speed settings? What are the maximum and minimum vaIues of torque and power? Is the
load continuous or intermittent?
2. Will it be required to run just at one speed or at few discrete speeds?
3. Is an adjustable speed required? What is the desired range of speed? Should it be controlled
steplessly or in steps?
4. What is the permissible regulation of speed in (2) and (3)?
5. WiII the load be overhauling (driving the motor as a generator) at any part of the cycle? Will it be
supplying a substantial amount of energy while overhauling or only a small amount of energy?
Requirements Related to Location and Environment
1. Does the location allow easy access for maintenance?
2. Is it going to be used in an environment consisting of dust, flammable gases, and so on?
3. Is it going to be submerged in water or any other liquid?
these categories: (1) requirements related to the transient operations of starting, stopping, and reversing, (2) requirements related to normal running, and (3) requirements related to location and environment. These requirements are listed in table 1.2.
'Other specifications are govemed by the source. Some of these are the type of
available source, its capacity, and the rules goveming its use related to the peak
current, reactive power, power factor, harrnonics, ability to accept the regenerated
power, and so on.
Usually more than one converter-motor system can satisfy the specifications
just listed. The one which is best, considering cost (capital and running), reliability,
efficiency, life, maintenance needs, and so on, and the requirements for the load and
source, is selected.
In the next chapters, we will study various drives controlled by power semiconductor converters and come to know about their capabilities and limitations in relation to the preceding requirements.
1.6 POWER SEMICONDUCTOR
DEVICES1
to 10
The present section briefly describes the characteristics and the relative capabilities
of the power semiconductor control devices commonly used in drives.
22
Power Semiconductor
Chap. 1
tntroduction
While discussing the relative capabilities, terms like iow, medium, and high
power drives will be used. They will refer to drive ratings from Oto 100 kW, 100 kW
to 750 kW, and 750 kW and above, respectively.
1.6.1 Thyristors
The circuit symbol and the VA - lA characteristic of a thyristor are shown in figures l.lla and b, respectively. In the absence of the gate current Ig, the current carried by the thyristor for the anode to cathode voltage VA, less than the forward break
over voltage VBO and greater than the reverse breakdown voltage, is close to zero.
Hence, it behaves as an open switch. However, if VA is made greater than the forward
breakover voltage, the thyristor voltage drops to a very small value (1.2 to 2.6 V,
depending on the voltage rating), and the thyristor behaves as a closed switch. The
forward breakover voltage decreases with an increase in the gate current. If the gate
current is made sufficiently large, the breakover voltage becomes practically zero.
The thyristor is used essentially as a controlled switch. For a given application,
a thyristor is chosen such that the peak forward and reverse voltages to which it may
be subjected during normal operation are less than its forward breakover voltage and
greater than its reverse breakdown voltage. This ensures that the thyristor remains
off in the absence of the gate current. The gate current is applied at the instant turnon is desired. The thyristor turns on provided VA> O. After turn-on, when lA
reaches a value known as the latching current, the thyristor continues to conduct even
after the gate signal has been removed. Hence, only a pulse of current is required for
tum-on.
A pulse transformer PT (or optical isolater) provides isolation between the gate
and the firing' circuit (fig. 1.12). A pulse train of frequency 5 to 10 kHz is used instead of a single pulse. The use of a pulse train allows a reduction in the size of the
pulse transformer. The diodes in the gate circuit clamp the negative voltage and prevent the reverse current from flowing through the gate circuit when the thyristor is
r,
Forward
conduction
Anode
A
Ig2
r,
G
Gate
Ig
Reverse
breakdown
voltage
192
VA
I
C
Reverse
blocking
Veo = Forward
> Ig1 > o

Ig1
voltage
Cathada
(a)
Veo
Forward
blocking
breakover
Ig
(b)
Figure 1.11 Thyristor: (a) Circuit symbol, (b) VA - lA characteristics.
o
VA
Seco 1.6
Power Semiconductor
23
Devices
dl/dt inductor
t----1~- --1
R *0
___
Firing
circuit
Figure l.U
Thyristor protections.
e
Gate circuit
.J
e
Snubber
conducting; otherwise, it may be damaged. I Because of the high current gain of the
thyristor, the gate current pulse amplitude is very small compared to the thyristor
current rating. For example, for a thyristor rated 200 A (rrns), the gate current pulse
amplitude may be of the order of 500 mA.
During the initial part of turn-on, only a small area near the gate conducts. The
conduction spreads across the whole cross section with a finite velocity. If the anode
current builds up faster than the spreading velocity, a large current will flow in a narrow region. Consequently, the thyristor will be damaged due to local heating. Hence,
thyristors are assigned a dI/dt rating. lt may typically be in the range of 20 to 500
A/ JL seco Fast-rising gate currents are employed to improve the dI! dt rating. An aircore inductor of few tums in series with the thyristor (fig. 1.12) is enough to restrict
the rate of rise of the anode current within a safe limito
The spurious turn-on of a thyristor can occur because the rate of rise of the
anode to cathode voltage is greater than a critical value called the dV/dt rating. The
dV/dt rating may typically be in the range of 20 to 1000 V per usec. An RC snubber
circuit (fig. 1.12) is connected in parallel with the thyristor to limit the dV !dt. lt also
protects the thyristor from voltage surges. Sometimes a diode, shown by the dotted
lines, is added to make the snubber action more effective .
. The major limitation of the thyristor is that it cannot be tumed off by the gate
signal. For tum-off-also
known as cornmutation-the
anode current, lA, must be
reduced below a value which is known as the holding current. Subsequently, it should
be subjected to a reverse bias of sufficient duration for it to regain forward voltage
blocking capability. The turn-off time ranges from 5 to 100 usec, The slower thyristors with tum-off times 50 usec and above are employed in ac to dc converters and
ac voltage controllers. They are called converter grade thyristors. Thyristors with
fast turn-off times are called inverter grade thyristors. They are used in inverters and
choppers. Their turn-off times are generally in the range of 5 to 50 usec depending
on the voltage rating. The lower turn-off times are obtained at the expense of a
larger conduction drop.
In the circuits powered by an ac source, the foregoing conditions for the thyristor turn-off are reached during the negative half cycle. The tum-off achieved with
the help of the line voltage is called the line commutation. The line cornmutation has
the advantages of simplicity and reliability. However, the restriction that the cornmutation can be done only after the line voltage reverses has been responsible for the
24
tntroductlon
Chap. 1
poor power factor, large reactive power, and large low frequency harmonic content
in the line current and the load voltage of controlled rectifiers, cycloconverters, and
ac voltage controllers. In the case of circuits fed by a dc source, the natural cornrnutation is obtained when the load is sufficiently under-darnped or when the load has a
back ernf and it operates with a leading power factor. For other loads, the forced
commutation must be used by adding components. This not only increases the cost,
but decreases the reliability and frequency of operation, and increases the losses.
During turn-off with a reverse bias, a thyristor carries current in the reverse
direction. This current, known as the reverse recovery current, stops flowing by a
snap action. This causes high transient voltage to be generated by the anode circuit
inductance across other thyristors in the circuit. The snubber circuit of figure 1.12 is
able to provide protection against the transient voltage by providing a path for the inductive current to flow.
Thyristors are assigned average and rms current ratings. The current should not
be allowed to exceed these ratings even for a short duration, because of the low thermal capacity of thyristors. However, they have the ability to withstand short duration
current surges. A thyristor may withstand a surge lasting three cycles (at 60 Hz) with
its magnitude up to around ten times the rated rms current. Thyristors are protected
against sustained overloads by the fast-acting closed-loop current control of converters. Fast fuse links are also provided. They are set to operate only when the current
control cannot provide protection.
Thyristors are cornrnercially available up to 4000 V, 1500 A (av), and 1200 V,
3000 A (av). High-power drives usually employ thyristors. They are also widely used
in medium and low power drives, particularly in drives employing ac to de converters and ac voltage controllers.
1.6.2 Asymmetrical
Thyristors
In voltage-source inverters, and some choppers and thyristor commutation circuits, a

diode is connected antiparallel with the thyristor. In these applications, the reverse
voltage blocking capability of the thyristor is not of much significance and can be allowed to be smal!. The extra freedom made available can be used by the thyristor
designer to reduce tum-off time, turn-on time, and conduction drop. Alternatively, it
can be used to increase the forward blocking voltage. Asymmetrical thyristors are
designed with a reverse blocking voltage of around 30 V. The turn-off times are typically in the range of 3 to 30 usec, and they are substantially lower compared to a
syrnrnetrical thyristor of the same ratings.
A reverse conducting thyristor is obtained by monolithically integrating an .antiparallel diode with an asyrnrnetrical thyristor on the same chip. This eliminates the
stray inductance between the thyristor and diode connections, and reduces the heatsink size. The disadvantage is that the ratio of thyristor and diode current ratings
cannot be altered.
1.6.3 Gate- Turn-Off Thyristors
As the name suggests, a gate-turn-off thyristor (GTO) is a special thyristor where the
turn-off can be achieved by a negative gate current pulse. GTOs have been in existence since the mid-1960s. It is only recently that they have become commercially
Seco 1.6
."..
Power Semiconductor
Devices
25
available with improved characteristics and large power handling capabilities. Ratings up to 2500 V and 2000 A are available.
The turn-on gate current pulse has the same order of magnitude as that of a
thyristor. For tum-off, a negative gate current pulse of much higher magnitude is required. The turn-off gain of a GTO is defined as the ratio of the anode current prior
to turn-off to the amplitude of the negative gate current pulse required for turn-off.
The gain is very low: typically 3 to 5. However, this is not a significant disadvantage, noting that the pulse duration is only a few microseconds. Compared to this,
the forced commutation of a thyristor requires a current pulse 1.2 to 2 times the anode
current and of duration 2 to 3 times the thyristor turn-off time. Hence, the thyristor
commutation circuit loss is much higher than the loss of the GTO turn-off circuito
Consequently, a GTO converter is more highly efficient than a forced-commutated
thyristor converter. Due to the absence of bulky commutation circuits, a GTO converter has a lower volume than a forced-commutated thyristor converter.
Because of the faster switching speed, a GTO converter can operate at a higher
frequency than a thyristor converter. This reduces filter size and gives more efficient
and improved drive performance.
Due to the preceding advantages, the GTO is finding an increasing number of
applications in medium and high (lower range) power drives employing inverters and
choppers. They have opened up the possibility of operating ac to dc converters with
improved power factors and reduced reactive power, harmonics, and current ripple.
The firing circuit is required to generate two sets of pulses. One for turn-on
and another for turn-off. If the GTO with an unshorted emitter structure is used, a
reverse gate bias of a few volts may also be provided to enhance the dV /dt-capability
which is otherwise low. The anode shorted emitter structures have dV /dt rating
comparable to that for thyristors, but they cannot block the reverse voltage .
Polarized Snubber and Turn-Off Characteristics:
The snubber for a GTO is
required to perform the following two functions, in addition to limiting dV/dt during
its off state: to limit dV /dt during and after turn-off to prevent retriggering, and to
reduce device power dissipation during turn-off. Because of the more stringent requirements of a GTO snubber, a polarized snubber is used and the snubber capacitor
size is severa! times higher than that of a thyristor. Figure 1.13 shows a GTO chopper with a polarized snubber. The stray inductances are also shown, as they have a .
considerable effect on the turn-off characteristics, which are shown in figure 1.14.
The turn-off is initiated by applying a negative gate current pulse Ig at t = O.
The finite rate of rise of the gate pulse is due to the lead inductance and the finite
switching times of the semiconductor devices used in the gating circuit. The load
current can be assumed constant during tum-off time because of its large time constant. During the saturation time ts' the GTO remains in the on-state conducting full
anode current with a small voltage drop equal to the conduction drop. After ts, the
GTO begins to block the anode current. At the same time, the gate-cathode junction
begins to recover and the gate current begins to decrease. The rate of fall of the
anode current is rather large (>300 A/ #s). Because the load current is constant, the
current through the snubber is forced to rise fast. Consequently, a voltage spike is
produced across the GTO, the magnitude of which depends on the stray inductance
L, and the turn-on characteristic of the snubber diode D. It is important to minimize
Power Semiconductor
26
Inductive
Introduction
Chap. 1
load
Stray
inductors
,+
-l
v
GTO
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
RI
I
I
I
I
I
I
JI
L
Polarized
snubber
Figure 1.13 GTO chopper with polarized

snubber.
v
Voltage
spike
Tail
current
o
Figure 1.14
GTO tum-off characteristics.
the voltage spike, because it causes power dissipation in a localized region of the
GTO. This is chiev;d by using a fast-tum-on diode for O and mounting the snubber
as close as possible to the GTO to minimize stray inductance. It may further be
noted that during the fall time tF, the anode voltage is rising when the anode current
is falling. A high power dissipation occurs during this periodo The snubber capacitor
limits this power by limiting the anode voltage. After the fall time, a tail of current
is produced. The anode voltage rises at arate determined by the snubber capacitor
and overshoots before settling to the source voltage V. The tail current and overshoot
voltage can be decreased by increasing the snubber capacitor and consequently decreasing the device power dissipation, but at the expense of the snubber loss.
1.6.4 Power Transistors
The circuit symbol of a NPN transistor is shown in figure l. 15a. The collector current le versus collector-emitter voltage VCE characteristics, with base current lB as a
parameter, are shown in figure 1.15b. The PNP transistor has characteristics similar
to the NPN transistor, with the current and voltage directions being reversed. Increasing the collector-emitter voltage beyond a certain level leads to avalanche
breakdown. A reversal of the collector-emitter voltage will break down the baseemitter junction at a much lower voltage than the forward breakover voltage. When
employed in applications requiring reverse voltage blocking capability, a diode is
connected in series with the transistor. This, however, increases the on-state losses
Seco 1.6
Power Semiconductor
27
Devices
lc
Collector
C
lc~
Iv"
Base 0----1
B
lB increasing
Saturation
voltage
E
Emitter
(a)
lB = O
I
Reverse
VCE
Breakover
voltage
breakdown
(b)
Figure 1.15 NPN transistor: (a) Circuit symbol, (b) le - VCE characteristics.
considerably. Within the working range, the collector current is a function of the
base current. The ratio le/lB is the transistor current gain. At high current levels, the
power transistors typically operate at a current gain of 10 to 20.
In convertors, the power transistor is operated as a controlled switch. With
zero base current, it blocks the voltage with a smallleakage current (fig. 1.15b), and
thus operates in the off-state. With a base current, which takes it into saturation, the
power transistor conducts a large collector current with a small voltage drop (0.6 to
1.1 V); hence the device operates in the on-state. Unlike the thyristor, it requires a
continuous base drive to remain in the on-state. Since the current gain is low, the
base current magnitude is large. This creates some problems at high current levels.
The transistor gain is not constant but changes substantially with the collector current. ldeally, the base current should be just enough to keep it under saturation. A
lower current will desaturate it, thus increasing the power dissipation. A higher current will tend to reduce tum-on time but cause higher base dissipation and an increase in tum-off time, as explained later. Thus, ideally the base current should track
the collector current to keep the transistor just under saturation for all operating
points. Altematively, the base current can be chosen for the highest collector current, leading to overdrive for lower collector currents and the consequent disadvantages just stated.
Although the transistor can be tumed off by making the base current zero, a
negative base drive is used to get fast tum-off. The tum-off time consists of two
parts: the storage time and the fall time. During the storage time, the negative base
drive sweeps out the minority carriers in the base. The collector junction remains
forward biased and the transistor continues to conduct. During the fall time, the collector begins to block and tum-off is completed. A negative base drive reduces the
storage time. Hence, the largest negative base drive that can be allowed without exceeding emitter-base avalanche breakdown voltage is used. lt may be noted that the
overdrive of the base during the on-state increases the storage time.
Transistors can switch considerably faster than thyristors. Switching times of
less than 1 to 2 asee are possible.
28
Power Semiconductor
Introduction
Chap. 1
The transistors are assigned continuous and peak current ratings which are limited on the basis of the maximum junction temperature. The ratio of themaximum to
continuous current rating is low compared to thyristors. The difference is due to the
fact that the voltage drop in a thyristor remains small, even for very large transient
currents, but not in a power transistor. The voltage rating consists of maximum
(breakdown) collector-to-emitter voltage VCEO (sus) with base open.
Second Breakdown:
The second breakdown is caused by the localized heating effects during tum-on and tum-off. During tum-on, due to a forward bias between the base and emitter, the collector current is concentrated at the emitter
periphery. On the other hand, during tum-off, due to a reverse bias between the base
and the emitter, the collector current tends to concentrate at the center of the emitter.
In either case, the collector current becomes concentrated in a small area where a hot
spot is forrned. The rise in junction temperature at the hot spot accentuates the current concentration due to the negative temperature coefficient of the transistor drop
and leads to therrnal runaway. It may be noted that the second breakdown is different
from the avalanche breakdown, which is defined as the first breakdown.
The manufacturers supply safe operating area curves for tum-on and tum-off,
taking into account various limitations of the transistor, including the second breakdown. The tum-on and tum-off load lines should be selected such that they lie within
the respective areas and minimize tum-on and tum-off dissipations.
Polarized-Snubber:
A transistor snubber perforrns three functions: to shift
the device switching power loss to the snubber circuit, to avoid second breakdown,
and to control dV / dt. The dV/ dt and dI/ dt ratings for a transistor are somewhat
higher than for a GTO but less than those for a thyristor of the same rating. Because
of the stringent snubber requirements, a polarized snubber with a large capacitor is
used, as in the case of a GTO. The operation of the polarized snubber has been explained with the help of the chopper circuit shown in figure 1.16. Initially, the transistor is off and the load current is freewheeling through diode DF. The snubber
capacitor is charged to supply voltage V. The application of the base drive tums on
the transistor. The supply voltage is absorbed by the inductor L and the load current
is gradually transferred to the transistor. In the absence of L, the diode reverse recovery current, with an impressed voltage V, would flow through the transistor, increasing the dissipation and possibly leading to a second breakdown. The value of L
I nductive
load
e
Figure 1.16 Transistor chopper with polarized snubber.
Seco 1.6
Power Semiconductor
29
Devices
required is 1 to 2 JLH. The source usualIy will have this amount of inductance. In
that case, L can be omitted. During the on-state, e wilI be discharged to a transistor
conduction drop through resistor R, dumping almost alI its stored energy in R. A
negative base drive is applied when the tum-off is desired. The transistor tums off
after the storage and fall time. The load current is diverted to the snubber and the
collector-emitter voltage rises slowly at arate determined by the value of C. When
the capacitor voltage becomes equal to the supply voltage, the load current is transferred to DF The capacitor voltage, after a small overshoot, settles to V. In the absence of e, the collector voltage will rise to the supply voltage soon after the collector
current begins to fallo Because high VCE and Ic exist simultaneously, the transistor
dissipation will increase substantially, causing a second breakdown.
Darlington Power Transistor:
A substantial improvement in gain (100-300),
. with a consequent reduction in the basedrive, is obtained by connecting two transistors in cascade to form what is known as a Darlington connection as shown in figure 1.17. The two transistors can be incorporated in the same chip. A bypass diode
D may also be added as shown by the dotted lines. Resistors RI and R2 are low-ohm
resistors for reducing the collector leakage current and to provide bias voltages across
the base emitter junctions. A diode DI may be added to provide a low-impedance
path for the reverse base current of transistor T2 for fast tum-off. Altematively, El
can be used for this purpose. The increase in gain is achieved at the expense of
higher conduction drop (1. 7 to 2.2 V) and slight decrease in switching frequency.
Comparison with Thyristor:
The advantages of the transistor over the thyristor are (1) much higher switching frequency leading to improved and more efficient
operation of converters; (2) can provide current limit protection by the base drive
circuit; (3) does not require forced commutation circuit and saves the associated
switching losses, cost, weight, and volunie; and (4) low conduction drop.
The relative disadvantages are (1) requires large and continuous base drive;
(2) cannot withstand reverse voltage; (3) the ratio of maximum to continuous current
is low; and (4) the on resistance decreases with the increasing temperature, making
the paralleling of the device difficult.
The power transistors, including the Darlington transistors, suitable for drive
application are available up to the ratings of 120 V, 750 A and 1000 V, 60 A.
e
----,
T1
T *0
2
- - -l<l----
~--~r---~--~~--~---J
R1
Figure 1.17
Darlington power transistor.
E1
30
Introduction
Chap. 1
Because of the high switching frequency and more efficient operation, power
transistors have succeeded in replacing thyristors in a number of lowand medium
power (up to around 200 kW) drives employing inverters and choppers.
Comparison with GTO: The advantages (1), (2), and (3), and disadvantages
(1) through (4) just mentioned are applicable when the transistor is compared with
the GTO. Both do not require a cornmutation circuit and therefore both have the associated advantages mentioned in the previous section. The drive power (sum of the
power required for tum-on and tum-off) is lower for the GTO due to the use of a
pulse both during tum-on and tum-off. It is more appropriate to compare them for
this feature, considering the duty cycle. The transistor is efficient for a short duty
cycle, while the GTO is for a long duty cycle. In the case of a short-circuit or fault
leading to over currents, the transistor will come out of saturation and may fail by
second breakdown. The chances of the GTO failure will be less, because the controllable current is much higher - typically two to six times the rated rms current.
The controllable current is the maximum on-state current that can be tumed off by
the negative gate pulse.
Power transistors find wide application in low and medium (lower range) power
inverter and chopper drives. They provide a superior and cheaper drive for low
voltage applications (230 V and less). The rapid increase in the on-state resistance
with the voltage rating has limited the device's rating below 1000 V for power applications. For high-current applications involving 450 V and above they cannot be
used. Naturally, GTOs find application in this range.
1.6.5 Power MOSFETs
At present, the power handling capacity of the power metal-oxide semiconductor
field-effect transistor (MOSFET) is low -)ypically
1000 V and 50 A. Its drive applications are also few.However, because of its superior characteristics, a possibility
of its wide application at low power levels exists.
The circuit symbol is shown in figure l. 18a for an N-channel MOSFET. The
device has an integral antiparallel diode which permits reverse current of the same
magnitude as that of the main device. The nature of the drain current ID versus drainto-source voltage Vos characteristics,
with gate-to-source
voltage VGS as a
parameter, is shown in figure 1.18b. These characteristics have two distinct regions:
the constant resistance [ROS(on)] region and the constant current region. It may be
noted that appreciable drain current does not flow until VGS crosses a threshold
value-typically
2 to 4 V. In the characteristics shown, the threshold voltage is
around 3 V.
.
In drive applications, a MOSFET is operated as a switch. The application of
sufficiently large VGS (around 10 V) ensures operation in the constant resistance region which corresponds to the saturation region for the power transistor. This provides the on-state of the switch. Making VGS zero or simply shorting the gate and
source terminals brings VGS below the threshold value and tums off the MOSFET.
The on-state power dissipation depends on the value of ROS(on), which in tum depends on the voltage rating of the MOSFET and increases substantially with temper-
Seco 1.6
Power Semiconductor
Devices
Drain
O
Constant current
_-------
,_------G
g------'I ....
"\
vGS
=9 V
7 V
1...---------
VGS
5 V
3V
~S
Source
(a)
Figure 1.18 Power MOSFET: (a) Circuit symbol, (b)
(b)
ID
VDS
characteristics.
ature. Because of the large value of RDS(on),the conduction loss of the MOSFET is
high.
Unlike the power transistor which is a current controlled device, the MOSFET
is a voltage controlled device. Since the gate terminal is electrically isolated from
the source by a silicon oxide layer, the gate circuit impedance is very high and the
device power gain is very large. Because of the very high input impedance, it can be
driven directly from CMOS gates.
Since, unlike the power transistor, it is a majority-carrier device, there is no inherent storage time delay associated with it. The turn-on and turn-off times depend
.,Qnthe ability of the gate drive circuit to charge and discharge a tiny input capacitor
Ciss which is the sum of the capacitances between gateand source, and gate and
drain. Typical switching times are 150 to 200 nS for a 500 V 26 A device. Because
of the low switching times and practically zero gate drive power, the switching loss
of a MOSFET is almost ni!. Power MOSFETs do not suffer from the problem of a
second breakdown. Any high current concentration in a region increases the resistance at that point, due to the positive resistance coefficient. This forces current to
be uniformly distributed over the area.. The snubber is now required to provide only
dV /dt protection, and hence, an RC snubber with a small capacitor is required and
the snubber switching losses are very smal!.
Since the power transistor is the power MOSFET's main competitor, it is good
to know their relative advantages and disadvantages. The advantages of the power
MOSFET over the power transistor are (1) lower switching losses, (2) no second
breakdown, (3) much larger gain and hence, simple and cheaper drive circuitary,
(4) better reliability, ruggedness, and thermal stability, (5) higher peak current handling capability, (6) easy to parallel due to the positive resistance coefficient, (7) relatively more linear transfer characteristics, (8) much higher switching speeds. The
only disadvantage is a higher conduction drop-typically
4.5 V compared to 1 V
for the power transistor-for
ratings of 400 V and 10 A.
32
Power Semiconductor
1.6.6 Symbol of a Self-Commutated

Switch
Introduction
Chap. 1
Semiconductor
GTOs, power transistors, and MOSFETs are termed self-comrnutated semiconductor

devices because they can be turned off by their respective control signals (that is, a
GTO by a gate pulse, a power transistor by a base drive, and a MOSFET by a gateto-source voltage). The self-cornmutation capability malees their turn-off independent of the polarity of the source voltage, the load voltage, or the nature of loado
Therefore, these devices are suitable for applications in converters fed from a de
source, such as inverters and choppers. They are also suitable for the rectifiers where
cornmutation is desired before the reversal of the source voltage polarity. On the
other hand, a thyristor is a naturally commutated device. It canoot be turned off by
its gate signal and its cornmutation is not independent of the polarity of the source or
load voltage or the nature of the loado However, when a thyristor is employed with a
forced comrnutation circuit, its turn-off can be made independent of the polarity of
the source voltage, load voltage, and the nature of the loado Further, its commutation
takes place by the application of a low-power gate signal to the thyristor of the cornmutation circuit. Hence, a thyristor with a forced comrnutation circuit behaves like a
self-cornmutated semiconductor device. Since a thyristor with a forced comrnutation
circuit, GTO, power transistor, and MOSFET essentially operates as a switch, it can
be classified as a self-commutated semiconductor switch. A common symbol for the
self-cornmutated semiconductor switch is shown in figure 1.19. The diode indicates
the direction in which the switch can conduct current. The control signal is denoted
by es, which can be a voltage signal or current signal depending on the device.
es
Figure 1.19 Symbol of a self-cornmutated

semiconductor switch.
The foregoing classification and common symbol are useful because there are
many applications, such as inverters, choppers, and so on, where a GTO, power
transistor, MOSFET, or a thyristor with forced comrnutation circuit may be used.
REFERENCES
l. G. K. Dubey, S. R. Doradla, A. Joshi, and R. M. K. Sinha, Thyristorised Power Controllers, Wiley Eastem, 1986, pp. 15-16.
2. B. R. Pelly, "Power semiconductor devices-A
status review," Conf. Rec. IEEE/lAS
Int. Sem. Power Converter Conf., May 1982, pp. 1-19.
3. B. J. Baliga and D. Y. Chen, "Power Transistors: Device Design and Application,"
IEEE Press 1984, pp. 1-19.
4. A. Ferraro, HAn overview of low-Ioss snubber technology for transistor converters,"
IEEE Power Electron. Specialists Conf. 1982, pp. 466-477.
5. F. Brichart, Forced Commutated Inverters-Design
and Industrial Application, Macrnillan, 1984, pp. 25-47.
Chap. 1
Problems
33
6. M. Okamura, T. Nagano, and T. Ogawa, "The current status of the power gate turn-off
switch (OTO)," IEEE lnt. Semiconductor PowerConverter Conf., 1977, pp. 39-49.
7. N. Seki, y. Tsuruta, and K. Ichikawa, "Gating circuits developed for high power thyristors," IEEE Power Electron. Specialist Conf., 1981, pp. 215-225.
8. R. L. Steigerwa1d, "Application techniques for high power gate turn-off thyristors,"
IEEE Ind. Appl. Society Meet, 1975, pp. 165-174.
9. B. K. Bose, "Power Electronics and AC Drives," Prentice-Hall, 1986, pp. 1-27.
10. O. Chryssis, "High Frequency Switch Mode Power Supplies," McOraw-Hill, 1984,
pp. 41-79.
PROBLEMS
1.1 Figure Pl.1 shows the speed-torque curves of the motor and load in the four quadrants.
Cornment on the stability of the equi1ibrium points A, B, C, and D.
Wm
);<T
TL
TL
Torque
;x(' )(T'
T
Figure Pl.l
1.2 A motor operating with a suitable control system develops a torque given by the relation
T = aWm - b. The motor drives a load for which the torque is given by the expression
TL = c)~, where a, b, andc are positive real constants. (a) Find the equilibrium speeds.
What relation must exist between the constants for the drive to have two positive real
speeds? (b) Determine the stability of the equilibrium points.
Torque
(a)
Torque
(b)
34
Power Semiconductor
Introduction
Chap.
T
F
Torque
(e)
Torque
(d)
Figure P1.2
1.3
Figure P1.2 shows the speed-torque curves of four motor-Ioad combinations.

on the stability of the equilibrium points A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H.
1.4
A motor operating with a suitable control system develops a torque given by the relation
T = aWm + b. The motor drives a load whose torque is given by the expression T L =
cw~ + d, where a, b, e, and d are positive real constants. (a) Find the equilibrium speeds
in terms of the constants a, b, e, and d. What relation must exist between the constants
for the drive to have two positive real speeds? (b) Will the drive be stable at the equilibrium points obtained in (a)?
1.5 Motor and load torques

0.1 Wm N-m. Calculate
speed. J = 0.1 kg-rrr'.
Comment
are given by the following equations: T = 10 N-m and TL =

the time taken for the speed to change from O to the equilibrium
.
10
Synchronous Motors
There are many types of synchronous motors. Prominent among these are woundfield, permanent magnet, and reluctance motors. The stator, which has a 3-phase
,winding, is known as an armature.
The rotor of a wound- field motor has a de field winding fed from a de source
through brushes and slip rings. When the brushes and slip rings are not acceptable
because of frequent maintenance requirements, they are replaced by a brushless
excitation system.
.
Generally, the rotor of a synchronous motor has salient poles. The high-speed
and high-power machines, with two or four poles, employ cylindrical rotors. They
are mainly used as alternators. In the present text, cylindrical rotor theory is primarily used because it is simple and also adequate for the analysis of salient pole
motors, unless very accurate analysis is needed.
The feature which makes a wound-field motor different from other synchronous
motors is that its power factor can be controlled by controlling its field excitation.
In low- and medium-power motors, field excitation can be provided using permanent magnets, thus dispensing with the field winding losses, de source, brushes,
and slip rings. But then the ability to control the power factor is lost. Permanent
magnet motors are usually designed to operate at unity power factor at full load. At
light loads they operate at a low (leading) power factor and efficiency.
The rotor of a synchronous reluctance motor has salient poles but without a
field winding. The air-gap flux is produced solely by the magnetizing current drawn
from the armature supply. Consequently, the machine has a low (lagging) power factor. It is suitable for applications requiring low torque and power.
Synchronous motors have a number of advantages over dc and induction motorso Due to the absence of a commutator, synchronous motors are not subjected to
389
390
Synchronous
Motors
Chap. 10
the limitations of dc motors, such as a limit on maximum speed, voltage, and power
ratings, frequent maintenance, and an inability to operate in explosive and contarni.
nated environments. They also have lower weight, volume, and inertia compared to
a dc motor for the same rating. The wound-field and permanent magnet synchronous
motors have a higher full-load efficiency and power factor than an induction motor.
Wound-field motors can be designed for a higher power rating than induction motorso Since the air-gap flux is not produced solely by the magnetizing current drawn
from the armature, a larger air-gap suiting the mechanical design can be chosen. The
speed can be precisely controlled by frequency control and can be made independent
of variations in supply voltage, field current, and loado The ability to control the
power factor gives them additional advantages described in the next chapter. However, compared to a squirrel-cage induction motor, they have a higher cost and size
for the same rating and require more maintenance.
The present chapter describes various types of synchronous motors, their analysis and performance, the effect of harmonics, and variable frequency control from an
independent oscillator. The self-control which is widely used in variable speed synchronous motor drives is described in the next chapter.
10.1 WOUND-FIELD
CYLlNDRICAL ROTaR MOTOR
The cylindrical rotor machine has its rotor in cylindrical form with a distributed de
field winding embedded in the rotor slots. It is characterized by a uniform airgap. This type of rotor construction is employed in high-speed machines because of
greater mechanical strength. The rotor has another winding known as the damper or
amortisseur winding, which is like a squirrel-cage winding in an induction motor.
The balanced three-pliase winding on the armature (stator) has the same number of
poles as the de winding on the rotor.
When the armature is supplied by a balanced three-phase ac source of frequency w radians per second (of f hertz), an air-gap flux wave rotating at a synchronous speed Wms radians per seco is produced. Where
2
Wms
47Tf
rad./sec.
p
= -w = p
(10.1)
and p = number of poles.

When excited, the field produced by the de winding on the rotor interacts with
the air-gap flux wave to produce torque. For the production of a steady unidirectional torque, the air-gap flux wave and the rotor field must travel at the same speed.
Since the field produced by the de winding revolves with the rotor, the rotor must
run exactly at synchronous speed. Hence, a synchronous motor fed by a constant
frequency source operates at a constant steady-state speed regardless of the load,
supply voltage, or de field winding current. When running in the steady state, the
Seco 10.1
Wound-Field
Cylindrical
Rotar Motor
391
relative speed between the air-gap flux wave and the rotor damper winding is zero.
Hence, no voltages are induced in the damper winding. Thus, it does not have any
influence on the steady-state operation of the motor.
10.1.1
Equivalent
Circuits
The symbol of a wound-field motor is shown in figure 1O.la and its phasor diagram
showing the relationship between various field components and induced voltages is
shown in figure 1O.1b. The rotor is running at synchronous speed. The distributed
field winding on the rotor produces the field mmf F, sinusoidally distributed in space
and revolving at synchronous speed. The three-phase armature winding connected
to a balanced three-phase supply carries a phase current I, and produces the armature reaction mmf A, which is also sinusoidally distributed in space and rotates at synchronous speed in the same direction as F. The mmf R, which is the resultant of
mmfs F and A produces the air-gap flux wave <l>a which also rotates at synchronous
speed and consequently induces back emf E in a phase of the machine. E is 90 out of
phase with respect to <l>a. E is known as the air-gap emf. The field emf F alone
can be imagined to induce a voltage Vf in the armature. Its magnitude is equal to the
open circuit voltage induced in the armature. It is known as the excitation emf. It is
in quadrature with F.
Based on the phasor diagram of figure 10.1b, the equivalent circuit shown
inside the dotted lines in figure 1O.2a is obtained. If is th~ fundamental frequency
armature phase current which accounts for the field mmf F in the sense that when
flowing through the three-phase armature winding it will produce a rotating mmf
identical to F and consequently produce the same excitation emf Vf' The magnetizing current 1m required to produce the air-gap flux <l>a is the sum of phasors Is and If.
The air-gap flux causes the emf E to be induced in the armature phase. Xm is the
magnetizing reactance. The complete phasor diagram of the machin is obtained
when R, and Xse, which are, respectively, the per-phase resistance and leakage reactance of the armature winding, are added. Figure 1O.2b shows the phasor diagram
. based on this equivalent circuit. Here El is the total emf induced in the machine by
the air-gap flux and the leakage flux. The equivalent current If is obtained as follows.
E
Field
(a) Motor
(b) Phasor diagram
Figure 10.1
Synchronous motor.
392
t,
Synchronous
Rs
r-
xs2
---
--
1,
------,
t;
Et
Xm
....
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
r,
I
I
I
I
---.J
L ___________
Chap. 10
Motors
(a)
1,Rs
I
I
/
/
VI
/
/
t,
.-
I
I
Figure 10.2 Per phase equivalent circuit

and phasor diagrarn of a cylindrical rotor
synchronous machine.
1m
(b)
Let the number of turns in the annature phase winding and rotor field winding
be n, and n respeetively. The peak of rotating mmf produeed by the rms eurrent Ir
flowing through (n.a/p) turns per pole is
F
= ~ (v'2Ir)
The peak of the rotating mmf produeed

turns per pole is given by
(~a)
by a de eurrent
(10.2)
IF flowing
through
(nr/P)
(10.3)
For If to be equivalent
of IF, F
= F2. Hence,
from equations
(10.2) and (10.3)
r, = (v'2 nr)IF
3 na
or
( 10.4)
Seco 10.1
Wound-Field
where n is constant
Cylindrical
393
Rotor Motor
for a given machine and is given by
n=
(v'2 nr)
(10.5)
3 na
Since the armature winding resistance R, is very small, it can be ignored,

except for the calculation of los s and efficiency. With this assurnption, E, = V in
figure lO.2b. Replacing the circuit on the right of terminals A and B by Thevenin's
and Norton's equivalent circuits yields the equivalent circuits shown in figure 1O.3a
and b, respectively. Where
X, = Xm + Xsc
( 10.6)
v, = jXm1r
(10.7)
,_Xm _ Vr
r
-X-
r--:x
J
(10.8)
and
I~ = Is
+ I; =-:x
J
(10.9)
s
The reactance X, is known as--.!.ynchronous reactance. If V is taken as a reference

phasor and the angle between V and Vf is denoted by 8, then
.( 10.10)
1,
x,
1,
I
v
1,
l'f
1;"
(a)
(b)
Figure 10.3 Simplified equivalent circuits and phasor diagrams of a cylindrical rotor
synchronous machine.
394
Synchronous Motors
Chap. 10
and
Ir =
.Vf
JXs
= 1;/-(5 + 7T/2)
(10.11)
The magnetizing reactance Xm is a nonlinear function of 1m, because of saturation. When the motor is operated in a narrow range of 1m, a suitable average value of
the magnetizing reactance can be chosen for this range and used in the equivalent
circuits. With this assumption, the analysis is only approximate. It is, however,
widely used because of its simplicity. Here also, Xm and X, are assumed constant.
10.1.2 Performance Equations
Voltage Source
for Operation
from a
From figure 1O.3a, the power input to the motor is expressed as

Pin
= 3VIs cos
cjJ
Since the armature los s has been neglected, this is also the air-gap power. As no
power is transferred to the rotor circuit, all of the air-gap power is con verted into
mechanical power; hence
(10.12)
Again from figure 1O.3a,
or
Is
cos
cjJ
v, cos( -5
= - cos( -7T/2)
- -
x,
Xs
V
.
s;,'
f
=-SlTIu
- 7T/2)
( 10.13)
Xs
From equations (10.12) and (10.13),

_ 3VVf
Pm-X-sm
s;,
( lQ.14)
Now torque is
Substituting from equation (10.14) yields

3 VVf
T=-'-'sm5
Wms
x,
(10.15)
Seco 10.2
Operation
of a Wound-Field
Cylindrical
Rotor Motor
Alternative
expressions
for Pm and T are obtained by substituting
tions (10.8) and (10.9) into equations (10.14) and (10.15). Thus,
Pm = 3VI; sin 8
= 3XsI:r,I; sin 8
T=~VI;
sin 8
395
from equa(10.16)
(10.17)
( 10.18)
Wms
3XsI'I'm
=-
. ~
f Sin u
(10.19)
Wms
Equations (10.14) to (10.19) have been derived for the case when Vf lags behind V, by
substituting the appropriate sign for the angle of lag. Hence, in these equations, 8
should be taken positive when Vf lags behind V.
10.2 OPERATION OF A WOUNO-FIELO CYLlNORICAL ROTOR

MOTOR FROM A CONSTANT VOLTAGE ANO
FREQUENCY SOURCE
This is the conventional operation of synchronous motors in the sense that in the past
synchronous motors were employed only in constant speed drives where they were
fed frorn a source of constant voltage and frequency. Some salient features of this
operation are discussed here.
10.2.1 Motoring and Regenerative Braking Operations

For a given field excitation IF, Vf is constant according to equations (10.4) and
(10.7). Then, for given values of supply voltage, frequency, and field current, the
motor torque or power is a function only of 8; as in equations (10.14) and (10.15).
The angle 8 is known as the torque (or power) angle. The motor meets the changes
in load torque demand by the adjustment of 8.
Torque versus torque angle curves for two field excitations
are shown in
figure 10.4, and the speed torque characteristic for a given field excitation is shown
in figure 10.5. A positive 8 gives the motoring operation and a negative 8 gives the
regenerative braking operation. The phasor diagrams for the motoring and braking
operations at given values of V and Vf are shown in figure 10.6. When 8 is positive,
V leads Vf and the motor power factor angle cp is less than 90. Consequently, power
flows frorn the source to the machine, giving a motoring operation. When 8 is negative, V lags Vf. To satisfy Kirchhoff's voltage law, I, must differ in phase frorn V by
more than 90. Consequently, power flows from the machine to the source, resulting
in a regenerative braking operation. Since the regenerative braking operation is obtained at a fixed speed, it can be used only for holding speed against an active load
torque. It cannot be employed for decelerating or stopping the motor.
We shall briefIy consider a transient operation for a change in load torque.
When initially operating in the steady state, an increase in load torque causes the
rotor speed to decrease and 8 to increase. When 8 reaches a value which makes the
motor torque equal the load torque, the rotor speed is lower than synchronous speed.
396
Synchronous
Motors
Chap. 10
T
Braking ~--I----
Motoring
1800
Figure 10.4 Torque-angle curves of a

cylindrical rotor synchronous machine.
Pull-out
torque
Braking
-Tmax
Motoring
(a) Motoring
Figure 10.6
T max
Figure 10.5 Speed-torque characteristic

with a fixed frequency supply.
Ib)
Braking
Phasor diagrams for a fixed IF'
Consequently, 8 continues to increase. Since the motor torque is now higher than
the load torque, the rotor accelerates. When the rotor speed reaches synchronous
speed, 8 is larger than required; hence, the rotor continues to accelerate beyond synchronous speed. Thus, the rotor oscillates around synchronous speed and the required 8 value before reaching steady state. Similar oscillations are produced for a
disturbance in V or IF or frequency. These oscillations are known as hunting. The
damper winding is provided to damp these oscillations. When the rotor runs at synchronous speed, the relative speed between the air-gap rotating wave and the rotor is
Seco 10.2
Operation
of a Wound-Field
Cylindrical
Rotar Motor
397
zero; consequently,
no voltage is induced in the damper winding and its presence
has no influence on the motor operation. During hunting, the rotor speed deviates
from the synchronous
speed. Consequently,
voltages are induced in the damper
winding and torque is produced by induction motor action. The torque direction is
such that it opposes any deviation from synchronous speed, consequently damping
the oscillations.
From equations (10.14) and (10.15) and figure 10.4, for given values of supply
voltage, frequency, and field excitation, the maximum torque or power, known as
pull-out torque (Tmax) or pull-out power, is reached at 8 = 90. Thus,
max
=~
Wms
(VxVr)
(10.20)
Any increase of load torque beyond the motoring pull-out torque (8 = 90) will cause
the rotor to slow down. Synchronous motor action will be lost since it will be impossible to restore the rotor speed to synchronous speed. This phenomenon is known as
pulling out of step or losing synchronism. Automatic circuit breakers are provided to
disconnect the motor from the supply when such a situation arises. In regenerative
braking, the pull-out torque is reached at 8 = -90. Care should be taken not to
. exceed the pull-out torque otherwise the machine speed may reach dangerously high
values. Thus, the pull-out torque represents the maximum short time overloading eapacity or the steady-state stability limit of the motor for motoring and braking operations. The pull-out torgue can be increased by an increase in the field excitation or
the supply voltage.
The stability limit for step changes in torgue is lower than the pull-out torgue.
When the load torgue is suddenly increased, the rotor slows down to allow 8 to
increase. When 8 reaches a value 8" for which the motor torgue is equal to the load
torgue, the rotor speed is lower than the synchronous speed. Conseguently 8 continues to increase, while the rotor accelerates. If the 'rotor speed fails to reach the synchronous speed before 8 exceeds (180 - (1), the rotor will pull out of step, even
through the load torgue is less than pull-out torgue .
.10.2.2 Power Factor Control and V-Curves

From figure 1O.3b,
(10.21)
which gives
I, sin cjJ
=-
I, cos cjJ
I:n + 1; cos 8
(10.22)
= 1; sin 8
(10.23)
Now let us examine the motor operation at a constant torgue and variable field excitation. From equation (10.18), for a constant torque, 1; sin 8 is constant. Consequently the in-phase component of armature current I, cos cjJ is also constant from
eguation (10.:23). ~t a given source voltage, I:n is also constant. This suggests that
the phasors I, and 1; lie on vertical loci AA' and BB', respectively, and their sum
has a fixed value j:n as shown in figure 10.7. The figure shows the phasor diagrams
Synchronous
398
Motors
Chap. 10
I
I
I
I
91
I
I
I
I
1.1
I
I
lA'
I'm
Figure 10.7 Synchronous motor power

factor control by the control of field
excitation.
for two values of 1;, by continuous lines for 1;1 and by chain-dotted lines for lb. For
1;1, (- l:n + 1;1 cos 8) < O; consequently, according to equation (10.22), the machine
draws a lagging reactive component of current from the line, resulting in a lagging
power factor. For 1[2, (- I:n + Ilz cos 8) > O; hence, the machine draws a leading
reactive component of current from the line, giving a leading power factor. The
machine operates at unity power factor with a field current, which satisfies the following equation:
- l:n
+ 1; cos 8 = O
(10.24)
Thus, when operating at a constant torque, the machine operates' at a lagging power
factor for a low value of field current IF. An increase in IF improves the power factor
and reduces arrnature current. The minimum value of the arrnature current is reached
when the power factor becomes unity. A further increase in the field current causes
the machine to operate with a leading power factor and increased arrnature current.
Figure 10.8 shows the plots between I, and IF for different values of torque. These
curves are commonly known as V curves because of their shape. The machine
is said to be under-excited when operating at a lagging power factor and overexcited when operating at a leading power factor.
1,
Pull-out
points
Unity
power
/
/
/
factor
Rated torque
Half rated torque
No load
OL--------L------------------
__~~
Figure 10.8
motor.
V-curves of a synchronous
Seco 10.2
Operation
of a Wound-Field
Cylindrical
Rotor Motor
399
When operating at a given IF and variable torque, the pull-out torque is reached
at 8 = 90. From figure 10.7, at pull-out (that is, at 8 = 90), the entire magnetizing
current I:n is drawn from the source; consequen tIy, the machine always operates at a
lagging power factor. The locus of pull-out points is also shown in figure 10.8.
Example 10.1
A 3-phase 6600- V, 6 pole, 60 Hz, 1100 kW, y -connected
motor has the following parameters:
Xm
= 30 n,
= 6 n,
resistance = S n,
X,e
field winding
When operating
R,
1.2
wound-field
synchronous
n,
=2
at the rated power and unity power factor, calculate
1. The field current and torque angle at full loado

2. The pull-out
torque.
3. The power factor, armature current, and efficiency
at half the rated torque and
rated field current.
4. The field current to get unity power factor at half the rated torque.
Neglect
friction,
windage,
and core loss.
Solution:
Synchronous
Wm,
J,
1.' Since the full-Ioad

v'3
66001, = 1100
1, = 991..!!..
1; = I~ - 1, =
From equations
.
SIO
or
x W + 31; x
1.2
991..!!.. =
-99
- j1OS.8
144.9
2
= 86
94 A
.
(10.16),
= 3V1; =
power factor is unity,
lOS. 8/ -900
30
Pm
OS' 8/ --"9"000
.~A
(10.8) and (10.4),
Xm n
From equation
12S.7 rad/sec.
=.2S.!i. = 36
= 381O.S V
I:m-y----:36-1
- V - 381O.S -
which gives
= p=
1100 X 103
12S.7
= 87S1 N-m
Rated torque =
V = 66oo/v'3
41T x 60
6
41Tf
speed
= 41.6
1100 X 103
6600
3 x v'3 x 144.9
(electrical)
13.9
= 0.66
(mechanical).
144.9/-1330
Synchronous
400
Motors
Chap. 10
2. From equation (10:18), the pull-out torque is

3
Tmax=-VXI=--x--x
Wm,
3
125.7
6600
,
144.9= 13178 N-m
V3
3. Half of rated torque = 4375.5 N-m

From equation (10 .18)
3
6600
4375.5 =----144.9
125.7 V3
or
sin 0=0.33,
sin
cos 0=0.94

1, sin el> = -I~
+ 1; cos 0= -105.8 + 144.9 x 0.94 = 30.4
1, cos el> = 1; sin 0= 144.9 x 0.33 = 47.8
Hence 1, = V(30.4)2
+ (47.8)2 = 56.6 A
cos el> = 47.8

56.6 = 0.84 (leading)
leading
Power output Pm= 4375.5 x 125.7 W = 550 kW
Losses = 3 x (56.6)2 x 1.2 + 86.942 x 5 = 49.32 kW
Efficiency = 550 ~5~9.32 = 0.92
4. Power input at half rated torque and unity power factor
=
V3 x 66001, = 550 x 103 + 31~x 1.2
which gives 1, = 48.5 A

Since the power factor is unity, from equations (10.22) and (10.23),
o=
1; cos
I~ = 105.8
1; sin 0=48.5
Hence, 1; = V105.82 + 48.52 =
X,
IF = X
116 A
1; 36 116
x ~ = 30 x ""2 = 69.6 A.
Example 10.2
The motor of example 10,1 is operating under regenerative braking. Calculate
1. The braking torque at unity power factor, and the rated armature current and
terminal voltage. Also calculate the field current and torque angle.
2. What the power factor and the armature current wiU be when the driving load
torque is 8000 N-m and the field current has the rated value.
Solution:
Wm,
From example 10.1: Rated 1; = 144.9 A

= 125.7 rad/sec
and
I~ =
105.8/ -90
Seco 10.3
Cylindrical
Rotor Motor
Operation
1. The rated armature current

Developed Power
Braking torque
from
a Current
Source
401
99/1800 A
V3 x 6600 x 99 + 3 x 992 x 1.2
1167 x 103 W
1167 X 103
125.7 = 9284 N-m
From equations (10.22) and (10.23) at unity power factor,

1; cos
o = I~ =
105.8
1; sin 0= 1, cos cP = 99 cos 180 = -99

0
Hence, 1;
145 A
O = tan-IC~:~8)
-43 (electrical).
2. From equation (10.18)

3
6600
.
x ,;:; x 144.9 SIn O
125.7
v3
-8000
or
=--
sin 0= -0.6
or
cos 0=0.8

=
-105.8
144.9 x (-0.6)
Hence, 1, = VIO.122
..
+ 144.9 x 0.8
1, sin cP
1, cos cP
cos cP
10.12
-86.94
+ 86.942 = 87.53 A
-86.94/87.53
-0.99
10.3 CYLlNDRICAl ROTOR MOTOR OPERATION FROM A

CURRENT SOURCE
In figure 10.9, the equivalent circuit and the phasor diagram of figure 1O.3b have
been redrawn, taking the annature current as the reference vector. The angle 8' between the phasors Ir and I, is related to 8 by the following equation:
8'
= !!.- + 8 - cP
(10.25)
2
Now,
v = jx.i; = jXs(IsLQ + 1;/-8')

=
"
Power developed
"
Xslr sin 8'
+ jXs(Is + Ir
cos 8')
is
(10.26)
Synchronous Motors
402
Chap. 10
l.
(a) Equivalent circuit
r;
(b) Motoring operation
Figure 10.9
(e) Braking operation
Synehronous motor fed by a current souree.
and torque is
- Pm
T ---
s
3(X
- )
Wms
I s l'f sm
.
s::,
(10.27)
Wms
An altemative expression for torque is obtained by substituting from equation (10.25)

into equation (10.27), giving
T
3(X )lsl
S
cos (8 - cf
(10.28)
Wms
From equations (10.27) or (10.28), the pull-out torque is
Tmax = 3(X )lls

S
..
(10.29)
Wms
The pull-out torque can be increased by increasing either I, or Ir.

For given values of I, and Ir. the torque is a function of the angle 8'. Hence 8'
is defined as the torque angle. A torque versus torque angle curve is shown in
figure 10.10. The motoring operation is obtained for O::;::; 8' ::;::;
1T, and the braking operation is obtained fOI:1T::;::; 8' ::;::;
21T. A given valu of motoring torque is obtained at
T
Figure 10.10 Torque-5'

eurves of a
synehronous maehine fed by a current
souree.
Seco 10.4
..
Wound-Field
Salient Pole Motor
403
two values of 8'-that

is, 8 and (7T-6).
Similarly, a given braking torque is
available at two values of 8' -that
is, (7T+ 82) and (37T - 82). Figure 10.11 shows
the locus of
as 8' is varied from Oto 7Twith Ir and I, constant. Phasors
I, and
V are shown for two values of 8' which yield the same value of torque. The following may be noted:
I:n
r:n,
1. When 8' is less than 7T/2, the machine always operates at a lagging power factor. However, when 8' is greater than 7T/2, the machine may operate at either a
lagging or a leading power factor.
2. For 8' greater
is higher.
I:n
than 7T/2,
3. Because of the large value of

under heavy saturation.
and V have lower values
I:n for
and the power factor
8' less than 7T/2, the machine may operate
For these reasons, during the motoring operation, the preferred range of 8' is
7T/2 < 8' < 7T. A similar analysis of the braking operation will show that the preferred range of 8' is 7T< 8' < 37T/2. The preferred range of operation of 8' is al so
indicated in figure 10.10.
~ 10.4 WOUND-FIElD SALlENT POlE MOTOR OPERATING FROM

A VOlTAGE SOURCE OF CONSTANT FREQUENCY
The salient pole motor has field poles projecting out from the rotor coreo It is characterized by different air-gap reluctances in the direct and quadrature axes. The tendency of the rotor poles to align with the rotating air-gap mmf wave at a position of
minimum reluctance (or maximum flux) causes reluctance torque to be produced, in
addition to the synchronous torque present in a cylindrical rotor motor. A damper
winding is also provided on the rotor poles.
." Figure 10.11 Phasor diagram showing

variation of 1;" and V with IJ'.
', t
//
\ f2
./
~
\
\f
li~
/ Locus of
/ r;"
1;"2
\
"
"-
Locus ot > <,
I~
Jr--
rmy /
-- .
Synchronous
404
Motors
Chap. 10
In the normal operating range of the motor, [he reluctance torque is very small
compared to the synchronous torque; therefore, the motor performance can be calcu.
lated with satisfactory accuracy by cylindrical rotor theory as presented in previous
sections. When more accurate results are required, the analysis presented next can
be used.
Because of the different air-gap reluctances in the direct and quadrature axes,
the magnetizing reactances, and therefore, the synchronous reactances are also different for the direct and quadrature axes. Let the synchronous reactances in the direct and quadrature axes be denoted by Xds and Xqs, respectively. Because of the
difference in the reactance values, it is difficult to obtain a simple equivalent circuit.
The machine is best described directly in terms of a phasor diagram. Figure 10.12
shows the phasor diagrams for motoring and braking operations, neglecting armature
resistance. Ids and Iqsare the direct .and quadrature axis components of armature current L. The relationship between Ir and Vfis obtained by replacing X, by Xds in
equation (l0.8). Thus,
1;
(10.30)
jx.,
From the phasor diagram of figure 1O.12athe following equations are obtained:
I, cos
cp = Iqs cos
8 - Ids sin 8
(10.31)
I - V cos 8 - Vf
dsX
ds
(10.32)
----J.-
q-axis
----J.-
q-axis
d-axis
(a) Motoring
(b)
Braking
Figure 10.12 Phasor diagrams of a salient pole motor.
Seco 10.4
Wound-Field
Salient Pole Motor
=y
sin 8
qs
Substituting
405
(10.33)
qs
(10.32) and (10.33) into equation
from equations
lA.s cos
Yr sin 8
X
'1-' -
+ Y(Xds
2X X
ds
ds
The developed
power is given by equation
tion (10.34) into equation (10.12) gives
Xqs)
Sin
(10.31) yields
25:
(10.34)
qs
(10.12).
Substituting
from equa-
Pm
3 [YYr . 5:+ y (Xds - Xqs) . 25:]

X Sin u
2X X
Sin U
ds
ds
( 10.35)
qs
Now
(10.36)
The torque expression has two components.

The first is the synchronous torque.
This is similar to the expression in equation (10.15), except that X, is replaced by
Xds. This component increases with field excitation. The second component is due to
the reluctance torque. It is independent of field excitation. The torque versus torque
angle curves for three values of field excitation are shown in figure 10.13. The
steady-state stability limits, which are reached at the peak values of torque, are al so
shown in the figure.
The expressions for operation from a current source can be derived following a
similar approach.
T
Braking
~--+---
Motoring
Steadv-state
stability
"
Figure 10.13 Torque-angle curves of a
salient-pole synchronous machine.
"
(lagging)
limit
406
Synchronous
Motors
Chap. 10
10.5 STARTING ANO BRAKING WHEN FED FROM A

CONSTANT FREQUENCY SOURCE
A synchronous motor fed from a constant frequency source is not self-starting. It is
normally started as an induction motor, with the damper winding serving as a squirrelcage rotor. The field winding is shorted through a discharge resistance to keep
interwinding voltages within safe values. When near synchronous speed, the field is
excited. The synchronous torque assisted by the damper winding torque is able to
pull the rotor into step with the rotating field.
The starting current is high and the starting torque is low. Any attempt to
decrease the starting current and increase the starting torque by increasing the
damper winding resistance makes the damper winding less effective during pulI-in
and hunting. In large size motors, the high starting current (5 to 10 times the fullload current) causes a large dip in the supply voltage, consequently further reducing
the starting torque which is already low.
Since the frequency is constant, regenerative braking can be employed only for
holding an active load at synchronous speed. For stopping, dynamic braking is used.
Dynamic braking is obtained by disconnecting the armature from the source and
connecting it to a three-phase resistor. The machine works as a synchronous generator and dissipates the generated energy in the braking resistor. Since the synchronous
reactance is higher than the braking resistance for most of the speed range, the variation in armature current and torque is not large; therefore, a single section of resistance is enough. Plugging is not used because of the high current, which is far
beyond the capability of the damper winding unless it is specially designed.
10.6 BfUJSHLESS EXCITATION OF WOUNO-FIELO MACHINES
Here we are concemed mainly with the excitation of synchronous motors for variable speed applications. One commonly used method is to convert ac to de in a converter and apply it to the field -winding through slip rings and brushes. The field
excitation is then varied by controlling the firing angle of the converter. In this configuration, because of wear the brushes must be replaced at regular intervals. This is
not desirable in applications requiring minimal maintenance. These applications,
therefore, employ brushless excitation systerns.? One such system makes use of a
l-phase shell type rotating transformer shown in figure 10.14. The secondary winding is placed on the rotor, which has a circular cross section and is mounted on the
motor shaft. Because of the air-gaps on either side, the rotor and the secondary
winding are free to rotate with the motor. The portion of the shaft inside the secondary winding is made hollow to avoid eddy currents. The connections from the
secondary winding are taken through the hollow shaft to a diode bridge mounted on
the motor shaft. The primary has two sections, which are placed on the stationary
coreo The voltage induced in the secondary winding is rectified by the rotating diode
bridge and then fed to the field. The voltage induced in the secondary depends on
the transformer tums ratio and is independent of rotor speed. When variable field
excitation is required, the primary is connected to the ac mains through a voltage
controller; otherwise it is directly connected.
Seco 10.7
Permanent
Magnet Synchronous
407
Motor
Snaft
r-r-r:
Central
limb
/'
./
I
z-
Core
~
'"E
Secondary
winding
'E"
.:
I---r'e
o,
a,
I
~
(a) Top view
Primary
Shaft
Core
Figure 10.14 Rotary transfonner

brushless excitation.
for
0-
Secondary
(b) Side view
10.7 PERMANENT MAGNET SVNCHRONOUS MOTOR

OPERATING FROM A FIXED FREQUENCV SOURCE
In pennanent magnet synchronous motors, field excitation is obtained by suitably
mounting the permanent magnets on the rotor.4.5 Ferrites or rare earth (cobaltsamarium) magnets, with linear magnetization characteristics, are employed. Ferrites are commonly used because of low cost, but the machine becomes bulky due to
low remnance. Rare earths, because of their high remnance, allow a large reduction
in weight and size, but they are very expensive.
The armature (stator) has the usual 3-phase winding. The damper winding
is also provided on the rotar to serve the same purposes as in the case of a woundfield motor.
Because of the linear magnetization characteristics of magnet materials, the
equivalent circuit of figures 10.3 and 10.9, with constant values of Vf and Ir, are applicable. The equivalent circuit parameters can be obtained by short-circuit and open
circuit tests, as in the case of a wound-field motor. Because of the low permeability
of the magnet material, the flux path has a higher reluctance than in a wound-field
motor; therefore, the magnetizing reactance, and consequently the synchronous reactance, has a lower value. Since the equivalent circuits are identical, equations (10.12)
Synchronous
408
Motors
Chap. 10
through (10.20) and (10.25) through (10.29) and al! characteristics described in sections 10.1-10.3 and 10.5 for a constant field operation of a wound-field motor are
al so applicable.
Like a wound-field motor, the permanent magnet motor fed from a constan
frequency source is also started as an induction motor, with the damper winding
serving as a squirrel-cage
rotor. The starting performance of a permanent magnet
motor is worse than that of a wound-field machine. Since the excitation cannot be
"turned off," it causes a braking torque to be produced. As a result, the starting
torque is lower.
The use of permanent magnets for excitation eliminates brushes and slip rings,
and the associated maintenance. It also eliminates the field copper los s and the need
for a de source. However, because of the constant field, the power factor cannot be
controlled. If the field is designed to obtain a unity power factor at full load, the motor operates at a very low power factor (leading) at light loads, resulting in poor efficiency. Furthermore,
permanent magnet motors are expensive because of the high
cost of magnets and rotor assembly. Because of the high cost and poor starting performance they are used only in those applications where their synchronous machine
characteristic is an absolute necessity.
10.8 SYNCHRONOUS RELUCTANCE MOTOR OPERATING

FROM A VOLTAGE SOURCE OF FIXED FREQUENCY
A reluctance motor can be visualized as a salient pole synchronous motor without a
field winding. Consequently,
only reluctance torque is present. The torque expression is obtained by substituting Yf = O or ignoring the synchronous torque in equation (10.36). Thus,
T
= 3y2
Wms
XdS
Xqs]
L 2XdsXqs
sin 28
(10.37)
.
The machine is capable of providing both motoring and braking operations. The pullout torque (T max) or steady-state stability limit is reached at 8 = 450, giving
Tmax _--- 3y2

Wms
[X
dS -
2XdsXqs
qs]
(10.38)
The rotor is constructed with flux barriers so that the flux in the q-axis of the machine is much les s than that in the d-axis. This makes Xds ~ Xqs; consequently, the
pull-out torque is increased. The torque angle curve shown in figure 10.13 for zero
excitation is applicable to this machine. The speed-torque curve shown in figure 10.5
is al so applicable, except that the pull-out torque is much lower.
Because of the absence of the field excitation, the entire magnetizing current
required to produce the air-gap flux has to come from the arrnature supply. Con sequently, the machine has a low lagging power factorbetween 0.65 to 0.75 at
fullload.
The reluctance motor fed from a constant frequency source is also started as an
induction motor with the damper winding serving as a squirrel-cage rotor. Consequently, the starting current is high but the torque is low.
Seco 10.9
409
Supplies
The reluctance motor is suitable for low-power applications

where its synchronous machine characteristic
is of absolute necessity, and the low torque and
poor power factor are acceptable.
10.9 OPERATION WITH NONSINUSOIDAL
SUPPLlES
Various points discussed in section 6.8 regarding the operation of an induction motor
with nonsinusoidal supplies are also applicable to synchronous motors, provided that
the appropriate equivalent circuit is used. Figure 10.15a shows the kth harmonic per
phase equivalent
circuit of a wound-field
synchronous
motor without a damper
winding. It is obtained from the fundamental equivalent circuit of figure 1O.3a by
substituting
appropriate
values of impedance and ignoring the fundamental
frequency voltage Vf' Because of the skin effect, the stator resistance has a somewhat
higher value for the kth harmonic then at the fundamental. Since Rsk is very small
compared to kXs' it can be ignored. This gives the equivalent circuit shown in figure 1O.15c. From the equivalent circuit,
. (10.39)
When fed by a nonsinusoidal voltage source, because

monic currents have very small values. Consequently,
the motor performance.
When fed by a nonsinusoidal
of Isk can produce a large harmonic voltage, causing
machine terminal voltage. The undersirable low-speed
caused by the harmonic losses will al so be presento
Rs.
of a large value of kXs' harharmonics have little effect on

current source, a small value
considerable distortion in the
torque pulsations and derating
r-----------,
kx,
kX,
R,./s.
I
I
L_________
ls'
Damper
V.
I
(al
(b]
kx,
V.
ls'
k(Xs' +
x.:
ls.
V.
I
(el
(d)
Figure 10.15 kth hannonic equivalent circuits of a synchronous motor.
I
.J
Synchronous Motors
410
Chap. 10
The per-phase harmonic equivalent circuit of a wound-field motor with a

damper winding is shown in figure 1O.15b. It is obtained from the fundamental
equivalent circuit of figure 1O.2a by ignoring the fundamental frequency current
source If and accounting for the effect of the damper winding. Because of the difference in speed between the rotating field produced by the kth harmonic and the rotor
speed, the damper winding acts in the same way as the squirrel-cage rotor of an induction motor, and consequently has a similar equivalent circuit. As explained in
section 6.8.2, slip Sk is close to 1 for all values of k. Since kXm is very large and Rsk
and Rrk are small compared to kXsc and kX the equivalent circuit of figure 1O.15b
can be approximated by the equivalent circuit of figure 1O.15d. Now,
p
1 ks
Vk
k(Xsc + X)
(10.40)
Note that (Xsc + Xr) ~ X;

The machine behavior is similar to an induction motor. When fed by a nonsinusoidal voltage source, the flux essentially remains sinusoidal, and the torque is
produced mainly by the fundamental. Harmonics are able to produce sixth and
twelfth harmonic frequency torque pulsations. The machine losses increase due to
harmonic currents, leading to its derating. When fed by a nonsinusoidal current
source, harmonics flow through the low impedance path offered by the damper
winding (fig. 1O.15b). Hence, 1m and consequently the flux and terminal voltage are
somewhat sinusoidal. Torque is only produced by the fundamental component of the
current. Torque pulsations and machine derating are also present.
The equivalent circuit of figure 1O.15b and the approximate equivalent circuit
of figure 1O.15d are applicable to permanent magnet synchronous motors with and
without damper windings. When a damper winding is present, Rrk and X, will represent the combined eftect of damper winding and core loss in magnets. The behavior
of the machine on nnsinusoidal supplies will be similar to a wound-field motor with
a damper winding. In the absence of a damper winding, Rrk and X, will represent
only core losses and the corresponding phase shift in the current, and their values
will be large. Therefore, the machine behavior on nonsinusoidal supplies will be
somewhat similar to a wound-field motor without damper windings.
10.10 SPEED CONTROL
For a given frequency, a synchronous motor runs at a fixed speed equal to synchronous speed; therefore, its speed can be controlled by the control of its supply frequency. With variable frequency control, the synchronous motor may operate in two
modes: a true synchronous mode and a self-controlled mode. The former mode of
operation is described here and the latter mode is discussed in the next chapter.
In the true synchronous mode, the supply frequency is controlled from an independent oscillator, as in the case of an induction motor.
For a given frequency setting, the machine runs at a fixed speed, independent
of variations in load, supply voltage, and field current. Hence, the speed can be controlled precisely in open loop by precisely controlling the frequency. When operating
in steady state, a gradual increase in frequency causes the armature field speed to be-
Sec.10.10
Speed Control
411
come sornewhat greater than the rotor speed and the torque angle to increase. The
motor accelerates to follow the changes in frequency. When the frequency reaches a
new value, the machine settles at the new speed after hunting oscillations which are
damped by the damper winding. On the other hand, a gradual decrease in frequency
causes the armature field speed to become somewhat lower than the rotor speed.
Consequently, the torque angle becomes negative. The motor decelerates under regenerative braking following the changes in frequency. When the frequency reaches
a new setting, the machine settles at a new speed after oscillations which are damped
by the damper winding.
The foregoing discussion suggests that the frequency must be changed gradually to allow the rotor to track the changes in the revolving field speed, otherwise the
motor may pull out of step. For slowly changing torques, the motor will be steadystate stable up to the pull-out torque. For sudden changes in the load torque, it will
be stable for the lower range of torques.
The motor can also be started by increasing the frequency slowly from its zero
value. It draws a much lower current and produces a much higher torque compared
to starting as an induction motor. The machine can also be braked down to zero
speed by regenerative braking. A given phase sequence thus provides operation in
quadrants I and 11. Its reversal at standstill gives operation in quadrants III and IV.
In practice, the true synchronous mode of operation is employed only with
voltage source inverters. Hence, it is described here only for operation with voltage
source inverters.
As in the case of an induction motor, the common control strategy is to operate
the motor at a constant air-gap flux up to the base speed and at a constant terminal
voltage above the base speed. The air-gap flux depends on the value of the magnetizing current I:n. Hence, constant air-gap flux operation below base speed is achieved
by operating the motor with a constant (V/O ratio. At low speeds, the (V/Oratio is
increased to compensate for the armature resistance drop. The terminal voltage saturates at the base speed. A further increase in frequency causes the flux to change
inversely with speed.
Since Vr, Wms' and any reactance are proportional to frequency, according to
equations (10.15), (10.36), and (10.38), for all synchronous motors, the operation at
a constant (V/O ratio maintains a constant pull-out torque at all speeds, both during
motoring and braking. According to equations (10.14) and (10.35), for wound-field
and permanent magnet synchronous motors, the operation at a constant terminal voltage above base speed produces a somewhat constant pull-out power at all speeds,
both for motoring and braking. Consequently, the pull-out torque varies inversely
with speed. In the case of wound-field motors, an increase in field current increases
the pull-out torque for all speeds, below and above the base speed. Speed torque
curves for different frequencies are shown in figure 10.16. A constant flux operation
has been assumed below the base speed.
The voltage source inverter may consist of a 6-step inverter or a pulse-width
modulated inverter. The waveform for a 6-step inverter is shown in figure 8.1 b and
the harmonic content is given by equation (8.2). Because of the low impedance of
the damper winding, according to equation (10.40), the harmonic content in the armature current will be high. The harmonics will cause losses and torque pulsations.
Synchronous
412
Motors
Chap. 10
Wm
/
.J
\.
"
.i/
/
points
\~
Base speed
./
Pul-out
f increasing
,
<,
I
1
.1.
.1.
-Tmax
T mex
Figure 10.16 Speed-torque curves of a

synchronous motor with variable frequency
control.
AC supply
V*
Controlled
rectifier
Flux
control
f*
Inverter
Delay circuit
Synchronous reluctance or
permanent magnet motors
Figure 10.17 Variable frequency

of multiple synchronous rnotors.
control
The harmonic currents can be reduced by increasing the impedance of the damper
windings but then they wilI be less effective during hunting. When the torque pulsations are unacceptable, a pulse-width modulated inverter may be used.
Because of the hunting and stability problems, the true synchronous mode is
employed only in multiple synchronous reluctance and permanent magnet motor
drives requiring accurate speed tracking between the motors - for example, in fiber
spinning rnills, paper milIs, textile milIs, and so on. A drive for such applications is
shown in figure 10.17. The frequency command f* is applied to the inverter through
Seco 10.10
413
Speed Control
a delay circuit to ensure that the change in inverter frequency is slow enough for the
motor speed to track the revolving field speed. A flux controller changes the machine terminal voltage with frequency to maintain a constant flux below base speed
and a constant terminal voltage above base speed for all motors. Since all the motors
are connected in parallel to a common inverter, their speeds are uniquely related to
the command frequency.
The variable speed synchronous motor drives are generally operated in the selfcontrolled mode, which is described in the next chapter.
Example 10.3
The machine of example 10.1 is now controlled from a variable frequency source. The
(V /0 ratio is maintained constant up to base speed. Calculate
1. The arrnature current, torque angle, and power factor at full-Ioad torque, half
the rated speed, and the rated field current.
2. The arrnature current and power factor at half the rated speed, half full-load
torque, and the rated field current.
3. The torque and field current for the rated arrnature current, 1500 rpm, and the
unity power factor.
Solution: From example 10.1, I~ = 105.8 A, Rated power factor = 1.0, Rated
torque = 8751 N-m, o = 41.6, Rated arrnature current = 99 A, Rated I; = 144.9 A,
Rated speed = 120 f/p rpm = 120 x 60/6 = 1200 rpm or 125.7 rad/sec.
1. Half rated speed
600 rpm.
Since the ratio (V/O is constant, I~ is constant. According to equation (10.19) o will
remain the same. From equations (10.22) and (10.23), for constant values of o and I~,
the in-phase and quadrature components of arrnature current remain unchanged. Hence,
I, and the power fa~tor also remain unchanged. This is true for any speed. Thus,
r, = 99
A,
0= 41.6 (electrical)
and
power factor = 1.0
2. Half the rated torque = 4375.5 N-m

From equation (10.19)
4375.5
or
~(~.5 X2~6) x 105.8 x 144.9 sin

. Xl
.7
sin 0=0.33
and
cos 0= 0.94.
Since equations (10.22) and (10.23) are independent of frequency, they are applicable
here also; hence,
I, cos
I, sin
1> = -105.8 + 144.9 x 0.94

1> = 144.9 x 0.33 = 47.8
which gives
I,
cos
Y30.42
+ 47.82
1> = 0.54 (leading)
56.6 A
30.4
414
Synchronous
Motors
Chap. 10
3. Since the operation is taking place at the rated (constant) terminal voltage,
rated current, and unity power factor, developed power is
Pm
1100 X 103 W
1500 X
60
Cm =
=
3
21T
1100 X 10
157.1
157.1 rad/sec ,
7003 N-m
At 1500 rpm,
X
45
= ~ = 6600/\13 = 84.68 A
1/
m
Since cf>
1500 X 36
1200
X,
45
0, from equations (10.22) and (10.23),
I; cos 8
= 84.68
I; sin 8
Hence, I;
99
l30 A.
REFERENCES
1. G. R. Slemon and A. Straughen, Electric Machines, Addison-Wesley, 1980.
2. A. E. Fitzgerald, C. Kingsley, and A. Kusko, Electric Machinery, McGraw-Hill, 1971.
3. S. Bertini, M. Mazzucchelli, P. Molpino, and G. Sciutto, "Different excitation systems
for inverter fed synchronous motors with variable speed," Proc. IEEE lAS Annual Meeting 1981, pp. 678-682.
4. M. Ohkawa, S. Nakamura, "Characteristics and design of permanent magnet synchronous
motor," Electrical Engineering in Japan, vol. 90, no. 6, 1970, pp. 125-136.
5. T. J. E. Miller, T. W. Neumann, and E. Richer, "A permanent magnet excited high efficiency synchronous motor with line start capability," Proc. IEEE lAS Annual Meeting,
1983, pp. 455-461.
6. A. V. Gumaste and G. R. Slemon, "Steady-state analysis of a permanent magnet synchronous motor dri ve with voltage source inverter," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. lA-17,
no. 2, March-April 1981, pp. 143-151.
7. G. R. Slemon and A. V. Gumaste, "Steady-state analysis of a permanent magnet synchronous motor drive with current source inverter,' IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., MarchApril 1983, pp. 190-197.
PROBLEMS
10.1
A 10 kW, 3-phase, 440 V, 60 Hz, 4 pole, Y-connected permanent magnet synchronous

X; = 15 n, X,e = 1 n, negligible R" Rated power factor = 0.85 (lagging)
Calculate
Chap. 10
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
Problems
415
1. The equivalent field current 1; and pull-out torque.

2. The torque angle at full load.
3. The power factor and the armature current at 60 percent of the rated torque.
4. The torque when operating at a unity power factor.
eglect friction, windage, and core loss.
A 10 MW, 3-phase, 6600 Y, 60 Hz, 4 pole, Y-connected wound-field motor has the
following parameters:
Xm = 8 n, X,e = 0.5 n, R, = 0.01 n, Rated power factor = 1.0, Rated field current =
200 A, Field winding resistance = 1.2 n, Core, friction, and windage losses = 10 kW.
Calculate
1. The constant n and the torque angle at full load.
2. The power factor, armature current, and efficiency at half the rated torque and rated
field current. Assume core, friction, and windage losses remain constant.
3. The field current to get the unity power factor at 60 percent of the rated torque.
The motor of problem 10.1 is operating in regenerative braking. Calculate the armature current and power factor at the rated braking torque.
The motor of problem 10.2 is operating under regenerative braking. Calculate the
braking torque when the machine operates at the rated armature current and unity
power factor. Assume the core, friction, and windage losses remain constant at 10 kW.
What is the field current?
A 15 kW, 3-phase, 440 Y, 60 Hz, 4 pole, Y-connected, permanent magnet synchronous motor has the following parameters:
X; = 12 n, X,e = 1.2 n, negligible R" Rated power factor = 0.8 (lagging)
The motor is controlled by variable frequency control with a constant (YIO'ratio up to
the base speed and at a constant (= rated) terminal voltage above the base speed.
Calculate and plot T, P m' Y, 1~, and the power factor against speed for the motor
operation at the rated armature current. An application requires that the machine should
supply 80 percent pf full-load power for al! speeds above base speed. What will be the
maximum available speed for such an application?
eglect friction, windage, and core loss.
10.6 For the drive of problem 10.5, calculate the torque which gives unity power factor
operation at base speed. Will the power factor at this torque be unity for all speeds
below base speed?
10.7 Calculate the speed at which the drive of problem 10.5 operates at the unity power
factor and 0.8 of the rated current. Calculate the torque at this operating point. Will
the power factor at this torque be unity for all speeds above base speed?
10.8 A 500 kW, 3-phase, 6600 Y, 60 Hz, -pole, Y-connected wound-field synchronous
Xm = 78, X,e = 3, Rated power factor = 1.0, n = 5, R, = negligible
The motor speed is controlled by variable frequency control with a constant (Y lO ratio
up to base speed and a constant (= rated) terminal voltage above base' speed.
Calculate and plot T, P m' Y, I~, and IF versus speed for the motor operation at
the rated armature current and unity power factor. What is the range of constant power
operation? Neglect friction, windage, and core loss.
10.9 What value of the field current will be required in the drive of problem 10.8 to obtain
unity power factor operation at 200 kW and 1200 rpm?
10.10 Derive an express ion for torque for a salient pole synchronous motor fed from a fixed
frequency current source.
11
Self-Controlled Synehronous
Motor Orives (Brushteee de
and ae Motor OrivesJ
The self-controlled variable speed synchronous motor drives have a number of advantages which make them either superior to or competitive with induction motor or
de motor variable speed drives.
1. The operation of a synchronous motor in the self-controlled mode eliminates
hunting and stability problems, and permits the realization of versatile control
charactetistics cf a de motor without the limitations associated with commutator and brushes, such as limits on maximum speed, voltage, and power,
frequent maintenance, inability to operate in contaminated and explosive environments, and so on. The self-controlled synchronous motor drives have been
built for power ratings of tens of megawatts and speeds approaching 6000 rpm,
which are beyond the capability of de and induction motor drives. They have
good dynamic response and smooth starting and braking operation with a high
torque-to-current ratio.
2. The power factor of a wound-field synchronous motor can be controlled by
controlling its field current. The operation of the drive at unity power factor
minimizes the KVA rating, cost, and losses of variable frequency supplies, and
maximizes the motor power output while reducing its losses. By operating the
machine at a leading power factor, the inverter thyristors can be commutated
by the armature induced voltages. Use of this commutation-known
as load
commutation - eliminates the need for thyristor commutation circuits, thus
permitting substantial savings in cost, weight, volume, and losses in a thyristor
inverter. Further, the load commutation increases the frequency range of a current source inverter and a cycloconverter. The permanent magnet motor can
also operate with a leading power factor by the adjustment of its torque angle.
416
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
417
Motor Drives
Hence, the load commutation and the associated benefits are available with the
permanent magnet drives also.
Because of these advantages, theself-controlled synchronous motor drives are
employed in the following variable speed applications:
1. The self-controlled synchronous motor drives fed from a load commutated current source inverter or a cycloconverter have been used in medium to very high
power (tens of megawatts) or high-speed drives such as compressors, extruders, induced and forced draft fans, blowers, conveyers, aircraft test facilities,
main line traction, steel rolling milis, large ship propulsion, flywheel energy
storage, and so on.
2. The self-controlled synchronous motor drives fed from a line commutated cycloconverter are employed in low-speed gearless drives for ball mills in cement
plants, mine hoists, rolling milis, and so on.
3. Recently, self-controlled permanent magnet synchronous motor drives are finding applications in servo drives which so far have been dominated by de motors.
4. The self-control is also employed for starting large synchronous machines in
gas turbine and pumped storage power plants. A common inverter is timeshared by a number of machines.
The applications of self-controlled synchronous motor drives are expected to
increase, particularly in the areas dominated by de drives. The only disadvantage of
the self-controlled synchronous motor drives, compared to dc drives, is their cornplex control. However, this is not a major problem due to the recent progress in
logic gates and microcomputers.
"'"'
Figure 11. 1 shows the phasor diagram for the variable frequency operation of a
synchronous motor. It is obtained from the phasor diagram of figure 10.3. The cur-
tf1=.~+_..l...._---_~- q-axls
l'f
lB
Figure 11.1
diagram.
Synchronous motor phasor
d-axis
418
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
rent phasors are independent of frequency. The induced voltages are given by the
following equations [equations (10.8) and (10.9)]:
v = aXsI.'r,
(11.1)
Vr
( 11.2)
aXsI;
where the per-unit frequency "a" is the ratio of the frequency of operation f to the
rated frequency frated- that is,
a = f/frated
(11.3)
and X, is the synchronous reactance at the rated frequency frated'

When operating at given values of L, 1;, and 8' (or 8), the parameters I.'r" flux,
and torque have fixed values. The induced voltages V and Vr, and the reactance drop
increase linearly with frequency but their phase relationship remains independent of
frequency.
Since the equivalent circuit is based on the assumption of a negligible drop
across R V represents both the terminal voltage and the induced voltage (voltage E,
in fig. 10.2) due to the flux linking the armature (that is, the sum of the air-gap flux
and armature leakage flux).
11.1 SELF-CONTROL
In self-control, as the rotor speed changes, the armature supply frequency is also
changed proportionately so the armature field always moves at the same speed as the
rotor. This ensures that the armature and rotor fields move in synchronism for al! operating points. Consequently, a self-controlled synchronous motor does not pull out
of step and does not suffer from the hunting oscillations and instability associated
with a step change in torque or frequency when controlled from an independent oscillator.
The accurate tracking of speed by frequency is realized with the help of a rotor
position sensor, of which there are two types: rotor position encoder or armature terminal voltage sensor. In a rotor position encoder, the firing pulses to the serniconductor switches of the variable frequency con verter feeding the motor are delivered
when the direct axis (or quadrature axis) of the rotor makes certain predetermined
angles with the axes of the armature phases. Consequently the switches are fired at a
frequency proportional to the motor speed. The frequency of the voltage induced in
the armature is proportional to the speed. Hence, the desired tracking of speed by
frequency is also realized when the con verter frequency is made to track the frequency of the induced voltages. Since the induced voltages cannot be sensed
directly, they are sensed indirectly through the armature terminal voltages. We
will come across an example of this when we consider load commutation in the next
section.
Self-control ensures that for all operating points the armature and rotor fields
move exactly at the same speed. Consequently, the motor cannot adjust the torque
angle (8' or 8) mechanically as in conventional operation (see section 10.2.1). In
fact we do not need it, because the torque angle can now be adjusted electronical!y.
This feature provides an additional controllable parameter and thus, greater control
Seco 11.1
419
Self-Control
of the motor behavior. Consider a specific example involving a particular rotor position encoder and the current source inverter of figure 8.14 as a variable frequency
source, mainly to explain how a rotor position encoder is employed to generate reference signals for the firing of the semiconductor switches of an inverter and how
the torque angle 8' (or 8) is set electronically.
Figure 11.2 shows an optical rotor position encoder for a 4 pole synchronous
machine. It consists of a circular disc mounted on the rotor shaft. The disc has two
90 (180 electrical) slots S' and S" on an inner radius, with a separation of 90 between them. The outer periphery has a large number of slots. There are four stationary optical sensors P to P4. Three of them P to P3 are placed 60 (or 120 electrical)
apart on the inner radius. The fourth one P4 is placed on the periphery. Each sensor
has a light-emitting diode and a photo transistor. Consequently it gives an output
whenever it faces a slot. The waveforms produced by the sensors are also shown
in the figure. They are drawn such that time is measured from the instarit the disc
occupies the position shown in the figure. The square pulses P to P3 are of 180
duration with a phase shift of 120 and their frequency is proportional to the motor
0
Slots
/
<,
900
";j)ooo
J
/T'
,.../
PJ
"
600 I 600
I
I
4 P2
(a)
3600
1800
1200
3000
wt
wt
PJb
600
Figure 11.2 Rotor position encoder and

its output waveforms (Le-Huy et al,
'Microprocessor
control of a current-fed
synchronous motor drive', IEEE lAS
Annual Meeting, 1979, IEEE 1979).
2400
wt
hnn nnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnr
O
1800
3600
(b)
wt
Self-Controlled
420
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
speed. The edges of the square pulse PI are used as reference points for the generation of firing pulses for semiconductor switches SI and S4 of the inverter (fig. 8.14).
Sirnilarly, square pulses P2 and P3 are used to generate firing pulses for the other two
switch pairs (S3' S6) and (S5' S2)' The pulse train P4 also has a frequency proportional to speed. It is used to sense speed and the setting of inverter firing angles. At
all speeds, P4 has the same number of pulses in the 180 duration of a square pulse.
Hence, the firing angle can be measured independent of speed simply by counting
the pulses starting from the reference points.
Figure 11.3 shows how switches SI and S4 of the inverter are fired to obtain a
desired value of the torqueangle 8' for phase A. According to the phasor diagram of
figure 11.1, the fundamental component of phase A current leads Ir by an angle 8',
and Ir always lies along the direct axis which rotates at synchronous speed. Hence,
switches SI and S4 must be fired such that the peak of the fundamental component I,
occurs when the revolving direct axis is 8' electrical degrees behind the phase A
axis. This is achieved by firing SI when the direct axis is (8' + 60) electrical behind
the axis of phase A. S4 is then fired 180 electrical later than SI' If the slots are
aligned with the direct axis such that the front edge of pulse PI leads I by 270, then
the firing pulse for the switch SI must be delayed by an angle of 210 - 8'
[270 - (8' + 60)] with respect to the front edge of PI, and the firing pulse for S4
must be delayed by the same angle with respect to the trailing edge of P l'
The preceding example considers one type of rotor position encoder. They are
available in many forrns and may use optical or magnetic sensors.
Note that the self-control is applicable to all variable frequency convertersnamely, voltage source inverters, current source inverters, current controlled pulsewidth modulated inverters, and cycloconverters. The only difference compared to
their conventional operation is that their frequency is deterrnined by the machine
speed and not by an independent oscillator. This, however, leads to significant
changes in their control aspects, which are listed here:
..
1. Frequency is not available anymore as an independent control variable.
Reference
point
\
I
I
I
I
l
I
Fundamental
~270---'
Figure 11.3 Control of torque angle 8'.
Seco 11.1
421
Self-Control
2. When the motor is fed from a voltage source inverter or cycloconverter,
the
voltage is changed as a function of frequency to obtain operation at a constant
flux below base speed and at a constant terminal voltage above base speed.
Hence, in the case of a permanent magnet motor, the only parameter left free
for the control of torque and speed is the torque angle
[equation (10.18)]. To
illustrate this, figure ll.4a shows a closed-loop speed control system employ-
Supply
s
t--+-f
Controller
~-~--l
VSI
Sensor
(a)
AC supply
ex
Controlled
rectifier
'
eSI
Controller
0'*
f*
Sensor
(b]
Figure 11.4 Closed loop speed control of self-controlled synchronous

from (a) voltage source inverter and (b) current source in verter.
motor drives fed
422
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
ing a voltage source inverter-fed self-controlled synchronous motor. The block

diagram of the self-controlled machine shows that the frequency and output
voltage of the inverter are changed as a function of speed. When operating in
the steady state, an increase in speed command will produce a speed error, increasing the torque angle and causing the machine torque to exceed the load
torque. The motor will accelerate. As the rotor speed increases, the inverter
frequency and voltage will also change. The drive will reach the steady state
when the motor torque balances the load torque and the actual speed is close to
the desired speed. The speed error will depend on the type of controller ernployed. Note that the change in operating point has been brought on by the
change in the torque angle and not the frequency, as in the control from an independent oscillator.
In the case of a wound-field motor, Ir can also be controlled in addition to 8.
This additional freedom can be used to control the power factor. Hence, 8 and
Ir are controlled such that the control of speed and torque is achieved with the
power factor maintained at the most favorable value. Generally, it is preferable
to maintain unity power factor.
3. When the motor is fed from a variable frequency current source (current source
inverter, current controlled pulse-width modulated inverter and current source
cycloconverter), the parameters left free for control are Is and 8' for a permanent magnet motor and Is, 8', and I for a wound-field motor. In a permanent
magnet motor, I, and 8' are controlled to control speed and torque along with
either flux or power factor or a suitable combination of the two. In a wound-field
motor, all three parameters Is' 8', and Ir are controlled so that the control of
speed and torque is achieved along with the control of flux and power factor.
Figure 11.4b shows a closed-loop system of a self-controlled permanent rnagnet motor fed by a variable frequency current source. In this configuration, 8' is assumed to be fixed at some suitable value and Id or Is is used to control speed and
torque. Since 8' is held constant, both the flux and power factor will change with the
operating point. The operation of the drive in response to a change in the speed cornmand is similar to the drive of figure 11.4a.
In the discussion under points 2 and 3, some idea about the control of the
torque and speed in a self-controlled motor was given. Other control possibilities have
simply been stated. These will be examined in sufficient detail in section 11.5 after
explaining various control requirements of self-controlled synchronous motor drives.
11.2 BRUSHLESS ANO COMMUTATORLESS
AC MOTORS
OC ANO
Figures 11.5a and b show block diagrams of a self-controlled synchronous motor fed
from an inverter and a cycloconverter, respectively. When an inverter is employed,
the drive is controlled from a de source. The inverter may be a current source inverter, current controlled PWM inverter or a voltage source inverter. Depending on
the type of inverter, the de source may be a controllable current source or a constant
or a controllable voltage source (figs. 8.2, 8.3, 8.17, and 8.26). When a cyclocon-
Seco 11.2
Brushless and Commutatorless
423
DC and AC Motors
Motor
DC supply
Inverter
o or o'
o'
or
o"
--~
Phase delay
and firing
circuit
Rotor
position
and f'
Rotar
position
sensor
K===:::{
(a) Brushless DC motor
Motor
Cvcloconverter
AC supply
O or
---+-1
o"
Phase del ay
and firing
Rotor
position
and f'
circuit
Figure 11.5
motors.
Self-controlled
Rotar
position
sensor
synchronous
(b]
Brushless AC motor
verter is employed, the drive 'S fed directly frorn the ac mains. The cycloconverter
can be controlled to produce either a voltage source or a current source.
Operation of the drive of figure II.Sa is similar to that of a de motor. In a de
motor, the stator field is stationary. Though the armature conductors carry alternating currents, with the help of the commutator and brushes, the spatial distribution of
the arrnature current direction is maintained the same for all speeds. Consequently,
the arrnature mmf wave also remains stationary and a steady torque is produced at all
speeds. To achieve sparkless commutation, the brushes are placed in the neutral
axis, giving a displacement of 90 between the field and arrnature mmf waves. From
equation (10.27), this displacement gives the maximum torque per ampere of the armature current.
In the case of the self-controlled synchronous motor drive of figure [1.Sa, the
inverters frequency is changed in proportion to the speed so that the arrnature and
rotor mmf waves revolve at the same speed, thus producing a steady torque for all
speeds, as in a dc motor. The rotor position sensor and inverter now perform the
same function as the brushes and commutator in a de motor. However, there is a
slight difference between the two machines. Unlike a de motor, the self-controlled
drive does not have to operate at 8' = 90, because it does not have a problem with
sparking. Hence, 8' can be chosen at a suitable value to satisfy other performance
requirements.
424
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
Because of the similarity in operation with a de motor, the inverter-fed selfcontrolled synchronous motor drive of figure 11.5a is known as a commutatorless de
motor. When the synchronous motor is a permanent magnet motor, a reluctance
motor, or a wound-field motor with a brushless excitation system, the drive does not
have any brushes. Consequently,
it is defined as a brushless and eommutatorless de
motor or simply a brushless de motor. Even when using a wound-field motor without the brushless excitation system, the drive is sometimes called a brushless de
motor because the brushes and slip rings of the excitation system are not as objectionable as the commutator and brushes in a dc motor.
While the brushless dc motor has the versatile control characteristics
of a de
machine, it does not suffer from the limitations
imposed by the commutatornamely, restrictions
on the maximum speed and power ratings, frequent maintenance, inability to operate in explosive and contaminated environments,
and o on.
From the drive of figure 11.5a, a brushless de series motor can be obtained by
connecting the field in series with the de link.
The drive of figure Il.5b and an ac commutator motor also have the same sirnilarities. Hence, the drive of figure 11.5b is known as eommutatorless ae motor.
11.3 CURRENT SOURCE INVERTER WITH LOAD

COMMUTATION
One important reason for preferring synchronous motor drives over squirrel-cage induction motor drives for high speed, and high and medium power ratings is the load
commutation.
The load commutation
is made possible because of the ability of a
synchronous motor to operate at a leading power factor. The load commutation has
been employed for current source inverters and cycloconverters.
Figure 11.6 shows a current source inverter feeding a synchronous motor. The
de supply for the inverter is obtained from a 6-pulse fully controlled rectifier, which,
together with the link inductor Ld, can be considered to constitute a current source
for the inverter. The link inductor reduces the ripple in the link current Id and prevents the inverter and rectifier from interfering with each other's operation.
The synchronous
motor has been modeled as a three-phase set of sinusoidal
voltages with rrns value V behind a commutating inductance Le per phase. Due to
the very short duration of commutation transients, the commutating
inductance is
equal to the subtransient inductance of a synchronous motor. 11 The phase voltages
VAN,vBN, and VeN are the voltages induced in the arrnature due to the flux linking the
arrnature (the air-gap flux and the arrnature leakage flux). Since the arrnature resistance drop has been neglected, these voltages are equal to the terminal voltages.
Hence, they are represented by phasor V in the phasor diagram of figure 11. l or
figure 1O.3b. Note that this model of the synchronous motor is valid only for operation during commutation
intervals. For steady-state
operation,
the model of figure 1O.3a- which consists of excitation voltage Vf behind the synchronous reactance X, or its equivalent given in figure 10. 3b - is applicable.
The inverter is similar to the current source inverter of figure 8.15, except that
the commutation circuit, consisting of diodes DI to D6 and capacitors Cito C6, is
absent. The function of the commutation
circuit is now performed
by induced
Seco 11.3
Current Source Inverter with Load Commutation
425
i.,
Id
L_~_
A'
T'1
T'3
T6
T.
T2
TF
T~
'V
I
-l
VAN
iA
B'
N
Vd1
'V
Vd
N
iB
c'
'V
ic
T'
T'6
Rectifier (or source

side converter)
v'6v
vAB
Motor
ig1
T'2
(a)
I nverter (or machine

side converter)
VBA
2,.
wt
426
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
voltages VAN,vBN, and VCN.Thyristors are fired in the sequence of their numbers
with a 60 interval. Turning on an odd-numbered thyristor causes commutation of
the previously conducting odd-numbered thyristor. The sarne is true for even-nurnbered thyristors. Thus, each thyristor conducts for 120 and only two thyristors conduct at a time (neglecting the commutation intervals when three thyristors conduct at
a time, as shown later).
Figure 11.6b shows the waveforms of all six line voltages. The transfer ofcurrent from an outgoing to an incoming thyristor can take place when the respective
line voltage is positive so that it acts to forward bias and reverse bias the incoming
and the outgoing thyristors, respectively. The firing angle for the incoming thyristor
is then measured from the instant when the respective line voltage is zero and increasing. For example, the transfer of current from thyristor T5 to thyristor TI can
occur as long as the line voltage vACis positive. Consequently, for thyristor T 1> the
firing angle ex is measured from the instant vAC= O and increasing, as shown in the
figure. Each firing pulse has a duration of 120.
Now let us examine the operation of the inverter for ex > 90 as shown in the
figure. Initially, one assumes the thyristors T5 and T6 are conducting. The de link
voltage Vdwill then be VCB.At ex, TI is fired. Because of the cornmutating inductors,
the current cannot be transferred instantaneously from T5 to TI. Consequently, the
equivalent circuit shown in figure 11.7 is obtained for the commutation interval. The
de link current Id is assumed constant during this interval. Since the line voltage vAC
is positive, it reduces iT5 to O and increases iTI to Id in the period u (fig. 11.6b)
known as the commutation overlap angle. Now T5 tums off and TI and T6 conduct,
making Vdequal to vAB.By considering various conduction and commutation intervals, one can draw the waveform of the de link voltage Vdand machine phase currents.
Since the average value of Vdis negative and Id is positive, the power flows from the
de link to the machine, giving motoring operation. If we examinethe operation for
ex < 90, we will find that the average of Vdis positive. Since the direction of Id remains unchanged, the power flows from the motor to the de link, the inverter works
as a rectifier, and the machine regenerates.
Because the firing is synchronized with the machine induced voltages, the frequency of operation of the inverter is the same as the frequency of induced voltages.
Hence, the machine always operates in the self-control mode. The terminal voltage
(or induced voltage) sensor now essentially acts as a rotor position sensor.
b
N
Figure 11.7 Equivalent circuit for the

commutation of current from T, to TI in
the inverter of Fig. 11.6.
Seco 11.3
Current
Source
Inverter
with
Load Commutation
427
The cornparison o the in verter operation with that of a 6-pulse fully controlled
rectifier with a source inductance (when inverting) shows that both are identical in
all respects. In a 6-pulse fully contralled rectifier, the cornmutation is done by line
voltages; henee it is called line comrnutation.
The comrnutation pracess in the inverter is identical to the line cornmutation. But because the voltages induced in the
load are responsible for the comrnutation, it is defined as the load cornmutation.
11.3.1 Analysis
of Commutation
Frorn the equivalent
and Inverter
Operation
circuit of figure ll. 7,

iTl
+ iTS = Id
(11.4)
L diTl - V - L diT5 = O
e dt
AC
e dt
Differentiating
equation
(11.4) yields
di-,
di-
dt
dt
-=--
Substituting
(11.5)
frarn equation
(1l. 6) into equation

diTI
dt
(1l.6)
(1l.5)
gives
VAC
2Lc
-=-
(11. 7)
Frarn figure 11.6b,
V3 (V2V) sin wt
V3 (V2V) sin(wt - 60)
VAB =
VAC=
(11. 8)
(11. 9)
The de link voltage is given by .

Vd = -LcSubstituting
frarn equation
di-
dt
+ VAB
(11.7) gives
(11.10)
The comrnutation
tion (11. 7),
period ends at wt
= a: + u
Id
Substituting
frarn equation
= 2L
w
when iT5 = O and iTI = Id' Frorn equa-
fa+7T/3+u
v ACd(wt)
a+7T/3
(11. 9) yields
cos a: - cos
+ u)
2wLcId
=~
v6V
(1l.11)
428
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
Let us define an angle f3 as shown in figure 11.6b. Note that f3 is the angle of lead
with respect to the instant when vACceases to be positive. The angle f3 is called the
commutation lead angle and is given by
f3
Substituting
from equation
= 180
0
-
(11.12) into equation

cos ()f3 - u - cos f3
After turn-off, T5 remains reverse

duration is denoted by y, then
biased
(11.12)
ex
(11.11) yields
2wLc
= ~ 17
v6V
(11.13)
Id
until vAC = O and is decreasing.
If this
(11.14)
y=f3-u
The angle y is known as the margin angle. For a safe commutation,
y> wtq
(11. 15)
where tq is the tu m-off time of thyristors. The waveforms for the commutation interval are shown in figure 11.6b. Figure 11.6b also shows the phase current waveforms. For phase A, the fundamental component is also shown in the figure. When
overIap angle u is zero, the fundamental component leads VANby an angle f3. The
effect of the commutation overIap is to delay the fundamental component. The delay
is approximately
0.5 u when the current waveform is assumed to be trapezoidal.
Hence, in the presence of overIap, the fundamental component leads the induced
voltage VANby (f3 - 0.5 u). By considering
different intervals of operation,
the
waveforms shown in figure 11. 8 can be drawn for the terminal voltage of phase A,
VaN' It differs from VANonly during the overIap period as shown (assuming negligible drop across Rs) "Tbe fundamental component of the phase A current can al so
be assumed to lead VaNby (f3 - 0.5 u). Hence the power factor angle of the machine
el> is
el> = f3 - 0.5 u (leading)
(11.16)
v.NorvAN
-+lul-
wt
II.J 'YL,
11
I ,
11-/3-1
,
1 rt> 11
I---i
1
1
: /1.>
/Fundamental
--!".
c-:>
<\" 7;
lA
>.
wt
Figure 11.8
Motor terminal voltage and current.
Seco 11.3
429
For safe commutation, f3 must be greater than u (fig. 11.6b); hence, <p wiil always
be positive. This shows that with load commutation, the machine always operates
with a leading power factor.
The nature of variation of u, y, and <p with L, when the machine operates at a
fixed value of f3 equal to f3c and a constant flux (constant I.'n and variable ID is
shown in figure 11. 10. At a constant flux the ratio (V/ w) is constant. From equation (11.13), when f3 is held constant, u depends only on Id or L.
The phasor diagrams of the machine for motoring (f3 < 90) and braking
(f3 > 90) operations with load commutation are shown in figure 11.9. Since the
machine operates at a leading power factor, the torque angle 5' lies between 90 and
180 for motoring and between 180 and 270 for braking, as noted in section 10.3.
In this range of 5', the conventional operation of a synchronous motor is steady-state
unstable. But with self-control, the operation becomes stable. For example, an increase in 5' caused by a disturbance, with other parameters unchanged, will reduce
the motor torque, causing a decrease in speed. Consequently, the induced voltage
will decrease, increasing the motor current and torque, and restoring the balance
between the motor and load torques.
In equation (11.13), w depends on speed, and V depends on speed and I.'n.The
current I.'nin tum depends on I, and Ir. Hence, for a given operating point characterized by given values of f3, I, (or Id), Ir, and speed, u has a fixed value. From
r,
~ = l- 0.5 u
(180 -
c')
2700
t/J
r;
r; e
e
(a) Motoring
Figure 11.9 Phasor diagrams

source inverter.
Figure 11.10
for a constant
cP u and 'Y versus Is curves
f3.
(b) Braking
of synchronous
motor fed by a load commutated
current
430
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
equation (11. 16), the power factor angle 1> has a unique value. In the phasor diagrams of figure 11.9, for given values of Is, If, and 1>, all sides and angles of triangle ABC have unique values. Therefore, the torque angle 8' (or 8) also has a
unique value. Thus, for a given set of values of Is, If, and speed, there is a unique
value of 8' for a given f3. This suggests that f3 can also be controlled indirectly by
controlling 8'. Let us define a variable 8~ as
8~= 8' + 0.5 u
(11.17)
When the commutation overlap is neglected, the armature current has a 6-step waveform shown in figure 11.3. When the firing pulses are generated using a rotor position encoder, as explained in section 11. 1, then if the encoder is set to produce a
constant torque angle 8~, the torque angle will stay fixed at this value. When the
commutation overlap cannot be neglected, as in a real situation, then the torque
angle will be equal to 8~ for a no-load operation (I, = O). As the load (or Is) increases, the torque angle 8' will vary according to equation (11. 17). The angle 8~is
defined as the no-load torque angle. Note that the firing pulse to an odd-numbered
thyristor of an inverter is delivered (fig. 8.14) when the direct axis malees an angle of
(8~ + 60) with respect to the axis of the respective phase (fig. 11.3).
For a 6-step current waveform, from equations (8.23) and (8.24)
r, = V6Id
(11.18)
1T
(11.19)
Where Inns is the rms value of phase currents. The effect of the overlap is to phase
shift I, by 0.5 u. However, its magnitude remains approximately the same.
When the commutation overlap is zero, Vdwill be equal to VASfrom wt =
(a + 1T/3) to (a + 21T/3) (figure 11.6b). The average value of Vdwill then be
Vd=-
Ja+21T13
1T
a+1T13
3V6
vAsd(wt)=--Vcosa
(11.20)
1T
The effect of the commutation overlap is to change the de link voltage from VASto
VAS- 0.5VAC [equation (11.10)]. The change in the average value of the de link
voltage is given by
3 Ja+1T13+u
Ud = 0.5v ACd(wt)
1T
a+1T13
3V6V
= ~[cos
a - coso
+ u)]
(11.21)

3
Ud = - (wLcld)
(11.22)
1T
The average de link voltage in the presence of commutation overlap is

3V6V
3
Vd= --cos a - - (wLcId)
1T
1T
(11.23)
Seco 11.3
431
The power input to the motor is

(11.24)
Power developed
by the motor is
Pm
Substituting
from equations
= Pin -
3I~sRs
(11.25)
(11.24) and (11.19) gives

Pm =
VctId- 2IRs
and developed torque is

(11. 26)
Also
or
T _- - 3 [ VIs cos
2)
cP - InnsRs
(11.27)
Wms
Equations (11.26) and (11.27) are valid for both motoring and braking operations.
Speed control below base speed is obtained by the control of the rectifier output voltage Vdl (Fig. 11.6b). An increase in the rectifier output voltage, with f3 he Id
constant, increases the de link current Id' As a result, I, and the motor torque increase. The machine speeds up and the induced voltage V increases until the 'balance
between the rectifier output voltage Vdl and the in verter counter emf Vd is restored.
HI a wound-field motor, usually the field is also controlled below base speed to
maintain a constant flux, as explained in section 11.5.1.
For a wound-field motor, speedcontrol
above base speed is obtained by reducing the field current I. A decrease in I reduces I:n, which reduces the induced
voltage V and the inverter counter emf Vd' Therefore, Id and the machine torque increase. The motor speed increases until V has a value which allows the balance to be
restored between the rectifier voltage Vd! and the inverter counter emf Vd'
In a permanent magnet motor,
cannot be changed. Therefore, speed control
above base speed is obtained by increasing f3. An increase in f3 reduces the inverter
counter emf Vd for a given V. The dc link current Id increases, increasing torque.
The motor speed increases until V is large enough to restore the balance between the
inverter counter emf Vd and the rectifier output voltage Vd!' The increase in f3 has
an adverse effect on the power factor [equation (11.16)]. Furthermore, the machine
terminal voltage also increases with speed. Because of the poor power factor and
high terminal voltage, both copper loss and core los s become large and efficiency
decreases.
Example 11.1
The synchronous motor of a self-controlled drive, fed from a load-commutated current
source inverter, has the following name plate data:
Ir
5 MW, 3-phase, 6600 Y, 6-pole, 50 HZ, Y-connected, unity power factor
432
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
The parameters are X, = 10 n, subtransient reactance = 1.8 n, and negligible R" core
loss, friction, and windage. The field is controlled to maintain a constant flux below
base speed and the rated terminal voltage above base speed. The machine is operated at
a constant cornmutation lead angle of 50.
1. Calculate the margin angle, power factor, developed power, and torque for
machine operation at the rated armature current (rms) and speed.
2. Repeat 1, for a speed of 1600 rpm.
3. Calculate
for l.
4. Calculate the de link voltage for l.
s;
Solution:
v=
6~0 = 3810.5 V
At the rated frequency,

Rated speed =
= 271"X 50 = 314 rad/sec.
120f
p
rpm =
120 x 50
6
= 1000 rpm
= 104.7 rad/sec.
5 x 106
Rated armature current = r-;
= 437.4 A
v3 x 6600
When fed from an inverter, for an rms motor current of 437.7 A, from equations (11.18)
and (11.19),
Id =
/3I
'/-Zrm,
V6
'/-Z(3 x 437 .4 = 536 A
V6
1 =-Id=-X536=418A
'71"
71"
1. Since the machine is operating at a constant flux, at rated speed the terminal
voltage will have the rated value.
From equations (11.13) and (11.14)
2 x 1.8
cos 'Y - cos(500) = 17
x 536
v6 x 3810.5
which gives 'Y = 32.

Now u = f3 - 'Y = 50 - 32 = 18
1> = f3 - 0.5 u = 50 - 9 = 41
Power factor = cos 41 = 0.75
Developed power = 3VI, cos
1>
= 3 x 3810.5 x 418 x 0.75 = 3.58 MW

3.58 x 106
Torque =
O
= 3.4 X 104 N-m
1 4.7
Seco 11.3
Current
Source
Inverter
with
Load Commutation
433
2. Above the rated speed, the machine operates at the rated terminal voltage;
hence
v=
n,
3810.5 V, wLc = 1.6 x 1.8 = 2.88
Id = 536 A
From equation (11.13),

0
cos l' - cos 50 =
2 x 2.88
V6
x 536
6 x 3810.5
which gives l' = 13
u = f3 - l' = 50
13 = 37
u=500-18S=31S
cf>=f3-0.5
Power factor = cos 31.5 = 0.85

Pm = 3VI, cos cf>= 3 x 3810.5 x 418 x 0.85 = 4.06 MW
T
4.06 x 106
104.7 x 1.6
2.43
104 N-m
3 I,=~=381O.5=381A
m
X,
10
From figure 11.9,
+ I; - 2I~I, cos(90 + cf
= 3812 + 4182 + 2 x 381 x 418 sin 41
I;2 = I;;
or
I; = 727 A
From triangle ABC,
sin
I,
Now 0' = o + 90 + cf>= 25.7 + 90

o~= 0' + 0:5 u = 156.7 + 9 = 165.7
0
4. ex = 180
f3 = 180
+ 41 = 156.7 and from equation (11.17),

0
50 = 130
3V6
Vd = --
x 3810.5 cos 1300 - -(1.8
7T
x 536)
7T
= -6650 V
11.3.2
Power Factor Optimization
In a motoring operation, the power factor is maximum when f3 is minimum or ex is

maximum. At a minimum f3, the inverter output voltage is maximum. Consequently,
the power transferred from the de link to the machine for a given value of Id is maximized. This in turn maximizes the machine torque for a given Is'
434
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
A minimum value of 13 is obtained whcn the margin angle is chosen just sufficient (Yrnin)to ensure safe commutation. Then equation (11.15) can be written as
(11.28)
where K, is a safety factor
Now the minimum value of
13
is
f3min
(11. 29)
u + Ymin
and maximum power factor from equations (11. 16) and (11.29) is
(PF)max= COS(f3rnin
- 0.5 u) = COS(Ymin
+ 0.5 u)
(11.30)

cos(u
2wLcId
+ Yrnin)= COSYrnin- V6 V
(11.31)
In equation (11.31), w depends on speed, and V depends on speed and I~. The current I~ in tum depends on I, and Ir. Hence, for a given operating point, determined
by values of I, (or Id), Ir, and speed, the overIap angle u can be evaluated from
equation (11. 31). Then f3min can be obtained from equation (11. 29).
In the braking operation, the power factor, and consequently the regenerated
power and braking torque for a given Id are maximized when 13 = 180 (or a = 0).
Then the maximum power factor is
(PF)rnax= Icos(l80 - 0.5 u)1 = cos 0.5 u
11.3.3 Generation
of Inverter
(11.32)
Firing Signals
Te reference signals for the control of the commutation lead angle 13 can be generated by using either machine terminal voltages or a rotor position encoder.
Figure 11.8 shows the induced voltage vANand the terminal voltage VaNfor
phase A. The induced voltage VANwhich is the sum of a sinusoidal voltage Vf and a
nonsinusoidal drop across the synchronous reactance, is nonsinusoidal. The terminal
voltage VaNis more distorted because of commutation transients. Any attempt to filter it causes a frequency dependent phase shift, for which it is difficult to compensate. However, one can assume the zero crossing points of the terminal voltage are
approximately the same as for the induced voltage. These zero crossing points can
be used as reference points for generating inverter firing signals. This is achieved by
converting terminal voltages into rectangular voltages using zero crossing detectors.
A digital control circuit using counters then generates firing signals by using the zero
crossing points of the rectangular waveforms as reference points. 14
As explained in section 11.3.1, for given values of Is, Ir, and w, there is a
unique value of 5' or 5 for each value of 13. Consequently, 13 can be controlled indirectly by controlling 5' or 5 using a rotor po sitio n encoder as explained in section 11.1 for a current source inverter without commutation overlap. The effect of
commutation overIap is to delay the fundamental component I, by 0.5 u. Hence, the
odd-nurnbered thyristors of the inverter of figure 11.6 should be fired when the
direct axis is 5' + 60 + 0.5 u or 5~ + 60 behind the respective armature phase axis.
Seco 11.3
435
The rotor position encoder arrangement is generally preferred because of simplicity.

However, an encoder is not suitable for contaminated environments and highspeed drives.
11.3.4 Inverter Control Strateqles
.,
A number of approaches are possible for inverter control. A few commonly used
control strategies are described here.
Constant Margin Angle Control:
The operation of the inverter at the minimum safe value of the margin angle gives the highest power factor and the maximum torque per ampere of the armature current, thus allowing the most efficient use
of both the inverter and motor. The exact implementation of this control strategy is
not possible because the minimum value of the commutation lead angle cannot be
accurately predicted. It is therefore implemented only approximately. Even then it
requires complex control. The implementation of this control strategy using rotor
position encoder and terminal voltage sensing methods is described in section 11.7.
Operation at a Constant Commutation Lead Angle:
A simple control is
obtained when the inverter operates at a constant f3. From equations (11.29) and (11.31),
cos f3min
cos l'min -
KGD
(11.33)
where K is a constant.
Equation (11.33) shows that f3min has the highest value when the ratio (Id/I;")
has a maximum va1ue. When the operation is limited to the base speed, the ratio
(Id/I;") is maximum when Id or torque is maximum. If the inverter is operated at a
constant commutation lead angle f3c' which is equal to the value of f3min at the rnaximum value of Id, then commutation is ensured for all operating points. ow the machine will still operate at the highest power factor at the maximum torque; however,
the power factor and efficiency will be lower for low torques (due to a decrease in u)
compared to the control at a constant margin angle. A comparison of figures 11.9a
and 11.11a, which are drawn for the same value of f3 but different value of Is, confirms this behavior. Figures 11.11a and 11. 11e compare the power factors for this
scheme and the constant margin angle control for the same L.
r;
(a) Constant f3c
l'f
(b] Constant oS;"
(e) Constant margin angle
Figure 11.11 Variation of power factor for dfferent control schernes.
Self-Controlled Synchronous Motor Drives
436
Chap. 11
When the machine also operates above base speed at a constant terminal vcltage, f3min has a maximum value when the machine operates at maximum Id and highest
speed (equation (11.31. Hence, f3c is chosen based on this point. Now for lower
values of speed and Id, the machine will operate at a lower power factor and efficiency
compared to the constant margin angle control.
.
Operation at a Constant No-Load Torque Angle 8;c: In this scheme, the
drive is operated at a constant no-load torque angle
The value of a:x, is chosen
to provide enough commutation margin angle at the highest value of Id' This will
ensure safe commutation for lower values of Id' As a specific example, let us consider how to evaluate
Assume that the machine operates at a constant flux. Then
Ir'nwill be a known constant. Now f3min can be obtained for the highest value of
Id from equation (11.33). Since u = f3min - Ymin' </> can be evaluated from equation (11.16). Now from triangle ABC of figure 11.9a,
a:x,.
a:x,.
Ir
= VI~ + 1;; - 2IsIr'ncos(90 + </

(11.34)
Also
l'm
sin(l80 - a')
Ir
sin(90 + </
or
sin
a'
(~7)
cos </>
(11.35)
Since Ir'nand </> are already known, Ir for tire maximum value of Id (or Is) is obtained
from equation (11.34), sin a' is obtained from equation (11.35), and a:x, is then calculated from equation (11.17). When the drive also operates above base speed, at a
constant terminal voltage, then Ir'n(at the maximum Id) will have a minimum value at
the highest speed. Hence, a~c must be evaluated for the highest values of Id and
speed. AIso in this scheme the drive has a low power factor and efficiency for
low values of Id' Figures l1.9a and l1.11b, which are drawn for the same value of
but different values of Is' show the decrease in power factor with Is' Figures 11.11b and e compare the power factor of this scheme with the constant margin
angle control.
Note that the constant commutation lead angle control and constant no-Ioad
torque angle control are not the same. Let figure 11.9a represent the phasor diagram
for the maximum value of I, for a scheme which operates only up to base speed.
Then f3c and a:x, will be evaluated based on this operating point. At this operating
point all three schemes will have the same performance. When I, is reduced, the
phasor diagrams of figure 11.11 are obtained for these schemes. The constant commutation lead angle control offers a performance which is better than the constant
no-load torque angle control, but inferior to constant margin angle control. The constant commutation lead angle control and constant no-load torque angle control are
reported to give increased torque pulsations at low speeds.
a~c
Seco 11.3
437
Figures 1l.12a, b, and e show the variation of {3, <p, and 8' for the three control schemes for operation below base speed, when they are designed to provide the
same margin angle at the highest current. Note that from equation (11.13) u is al so a
function of {3. The u curve of figure 11.12a, which is drawn for the constant margin
angle control, is not applicable to the other two control schemes.
There are a few other control schemes which essentially provide a compromise
between the complexity and excellent performance of the constant margin angle control and the simplicity and poor performance of the constant commutation lead angle
control or constant no-load torque angle control. Two of these are described next.
Commutation Lead Angle Varying Linearly witb Id:
Here the value of the
commutation lead angle is given by
{3 =
+ Kf3Id
"min
(11. 36)
Kf3 is suitably
chosen to make enough margin angle available

as shown in figure 11. 13.
No-Load Torque Angle Varying Linearly witb
h'
at all operating
points,
Here the no-load torque
angle is given by
8~
= 8~m + KI),Id
(11.37)
(;,., -
'
(;'" -
90)
....
........................
....
e,. ....;.._-_._
-- ..::.
<,
....
90)
<,
'-.
....
<, .......
r,
(a)
-.-.
<,
90
~o
l,
(b)
--- -
_.
-
+ 'Ym;n
1,
(e)
Constant margin angle control

Constant commutation lead angle control
Constant no-load torque angle control
Figure 11.12 {3, cf>and 5' versus 1, curves for various control techniques.
Figure 11.13 {3 varying linearly with Id'
438
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
where 8~m is the value of the torque angle which provides a margin of Yrnin for
Id = O. When Id = O (or I, = O), Y is in phase with Yf (figure 11.9a), u = O and from
equations (11.16) and (11. 29) cf> = Ymin' Hence from figure 11.9a,
(11.38)
The constant K. in equation (11.37) is chosen to provide a sufficient margin angle
for all operating points.
Example 11.2
A self-controlled load-commutated current source inverter drive employs a motor with
the following name plate data: 546 kW, 3-phase, 6600 Y, 60 Hz, 6 pole, Y-connected,
Le = 50 rnH, X, = 81 n, Power factor = 1.0, R, = negligible
The field current is controlled to keep a constant flux up to base speed. Constant
cornmutation lead angle control is employed. The drive is not required to operate above
base speed. The maximum motor current (rms) is not to exceed its rated value.
1. Calculate f3e so that a minimum margin angle of 15 is available for all
operating points.
2. With the value of f3e fixed as in 1, calculate the power factor, tarque, and de
link voltage for the rated speed and the rated armature current.
3. Repeat 2 for 25 percent of the rated armature current. Also calculate the
margin angle.
Neglect core loss, friction, and windage.
Solution:
When operation takes place at a constant flux, except at low speeds, the
voltage-to-frequency
ratio remains constant, and with commutation lead angle
maintained constant at f3e' from equation (11.11) through (11.14) u and y depend only
on Id and are independent of speed. Hence, f3e can be evaluated by providing a 15
margin angle at the rated armature current and speed
Rated armature current =
Rated speed =
V =
546 x
lQ3
,;:;
v 3 x 6600
= 47.74 A
120 x 60
6
= 1200 rpm = 125.7 rad/sec.
6600
v'3 = 3810.5
V,
= 27Tf= 27Tx 60 = 377 rad/sec.
wLe = 377 x 50 x 10-3 = 18.85
1. When fed from an inverter, Inns = 47.74 A.

Id= .j%Inns=VT'3X47.74=58.47
v'6
Is=-Id=-X
7T
v'6
7T
58.47=45.6
A
A

cos
a
fJe
2 x 18.85 x 58.47
= cos 15 , 17
v6 x 3810.5
Seco 11.3
Current
Source
Inverter
with
439
Load Commutation
or
/3c
43.
= /3c - 'Ymin = 43 - 15 = 28
cf> = /3c - 0.5 u = 43 - 14 = 29
2. u
= cos
Power factor
Pm
29 = 0.87
= 3VIs cos cf> = 3 x 3810.5 x 45.6 x 0.87 = 453.5
kW
T = 455.5 X 10 = 3608 N-m
125.7
ex
= 180 - /3c = 180 - 43 = 137

3v'6
3
Vd = -x 3810.5 cos 137 - - (18.85 x 58.47)
7T
7T
= -7571
3. I,
0.25 x 45.6
Id = 0.25 x 58.47
11.4 A
14.62 A

cos 'Y - cos /3c
2wLc
Id
v6V
,17
or
cos 'Y= cos 43
2 x 18.85
+ , 17
v6 x 3810.5
x 14.62
which gives 'Y= 37.8

now
u = /3c - 'Y
= 43 - 37.8 = 5.2
cf> = /3c - 0.5 u = 43 - 0.5 x 5.2 = 40.4
Power factor
P;
=3x
cos 40.4
0.76
3810.5 x 11.4 x 0.76
99 x 103
125.7
= 99
kW
787.6 N-m

3v'6
3
Vd = -x 3810.5 cos 137 - - (18.85 x 14.62)
7T
= -6782
7T
Example 11.3
The drive of example 11.2 now also operates above base speed. The maximum speed is
1800 rpm and the armature current is limited to the rated value.
Self-Controlled
440
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
1. Calculate f3c so that a mnimum margin angle of 15 is available for al!

operating points.
2. With the value of f3c fixed as in 1, calculate the power factor, torque, and de
link voltage at half the rated speed and 25 percent of the rated current. What
is the margin angle?
Solution: Now u has the highest value at the rated armature current and 1800 rpm.
Hence, f3c should be chosen for these values of current and speed. From example 11.2,
at the rated rms current (47.74 A):
1, = 45.6 A
and
Id = 58.47 A
At 1800 rpm, which is above base speed,

V = 3810.5 V
1800
w = 1200 x 377 = 565.5 rad/sec.
wLc = 1.5 x 18.85 = 28.28 ohms
2 x 28.28 x 58.47
cos f3 e = cos 15 , 17
v6 x 3810.5
or
and
a = 180 - f3c = 127.7
1, = 0.25 x 45.6 = 11.4 A
2. Id = 0.2' x 58.47 = 14.62 A,

At half rated speed:
wLc = 0.5 x 18.85 = 9.42
V = 0.5 x 3810.5 = 1905 V,

cos y - cos f3c
cos
y = cos
2wLc
Id
v6V
= ,17
2 x 9.42
52.3
+ v'6
6 x 1905
x 14.62
or
y = 47.9
u = f3c - y = 52.3 - 47.9 = 4.4
cp = f3c -
0.5 u = 50.1
Power factor = 0.64

Pm=3x
1905 x 11.4xO.64=41
103
41 x
T = 0.5 x 125.7 = 652 N-m
kW
Seco 11.3
441
(11.23),
From equation
3Y6
Vd = --
1T
14.62)
1T
-2856
1905 cos 127.7 - -(9.4

V
Example 11.4
The drive of example
11.2 is to be controlIed by constant no-Ioad torque angle control.

margin
angle of 15 is available
1. Calculate
operating
8~c so that a minimum

points.
for al!
2. Calculate
25 percent
3. Calculate
25 percent
the power factor, torque, and de link voltage for rated speed and
of the rated arrnature current with 8;'" set as in l.
the power factor, torque, and de link voltage for rated speed and
of the rated arrnature current, when constant margin angle control
is employed.
Solution:
4>
11.2 at the rated speed and armature current,
From example
=
29,
I,
45.6 A,
Id
58.47 A,
,
V
3810.5
(
)
1 =- = --= 47 A constant
x,
From equation
81
(11.34),
+ I~2 + 2IsI~ sin 4>

= 45.62 + 472 + 2 X 45.6 x 47 x
1;2 = 1;
sin 29
or
1; = 79.8 A
From equation
sin 8' =
(11.35),
1;) cos
(1',\
4>
(47 \
79.8) cos 29 = 0.515
or
Since the machine

Therefore,
8;'" = 8'
=
operates
+ 0.5
at a leading power factor, the feasible
value of 8' is 149.
149 + 14 = 163 (electrical)
or 54.3 (mechanicaI)
2. This part can only be sol ved by iteration using the fol!owing sequence of
steps:
(a) Assume a value for {3and obtain u from equation (11.13) and calculate 4>.
(b) Obtain 1; from equation (11.34) and 8' from equation (11.35).
(e) Calculate 8;'" and compare it with its actual value. If different, go back to
step (a) and try another value of {3.
The iteration for {3= 69, which yields 8;"'-close
to the actual value, is
given here.
442
Self-Controlled
At 25 percent rated armature current:

cos (f3 - u )
=.
2wLc
17
v6V
Id
Synchronous
Id =
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
14.62, 1, = 11.4.
+ COS f3
or
cos(69 - u)
which gives u
V6
18.85
6 x 3810.5
. 14.62 + cos
69
3.67
1> = f3 - 0.5 u = 67.2

1;2
+ 472 + 2 x
11.42
11.4 x 47 sin 67.2
or
1; = 57.68
From equation (11. 35),

sin
o' =~57.68
cos 672
.
thus,
o' =
161.6
o;'" = o' + 0.5
163.4
which is nearly equal to the actual value.

Now Pm = 3 x 3810.5 x 11.4 x cos 67.2
3
T = 50.5 X 10
125.7
Power factor
cos 67.2
40
1.
8 N-
= 50.5
kW
0.39
3V6 x
Vd = --
3810.5 x cos 111- 3 x 18.85 x 14.62.;-
1T
1T
-3457
V.
3. When constant margin angle control is used, for all operating points 'Y
'Ymin
= 15

cos (u
0)
150 2 x 18.85 x 14.62
+ 15 = cos
17
v6x381O.5
or
f3 = 24.92
Seco 11.3
443
and
cJ>
= 24.92
Power factor
Pm
T
=3x
el' =
0.5 x 9.920
cos 19.960
19.960
0.94
3810.5 x 11.4 x 0.94

3
= 974
122.5 X 10
125.7
180
24.92
0
-
5 N-
122.50 kW
x 18.85 x 14.62
155

3\16
Vd = --
8 O
>< 3 1 .5 cos 155 - ------
= -8341
Next we compare the values of T and the power factor for the three control
schemes for 25 percent of the rated arrnature current:
Constant
f3 = f3,
Constant 5~ = 5;"
Constant
Margin Angle
401.8
0.39
974.5
. 0.94
787.6
0.76
T(N-m)
Power factor
The superiority of constant margin angle control is demonstrated by these results.

11.3.5
Merits
and Disadvantages
The load commutated

advantages:
current
source
of Load Commutation
inverter
has the following
merits
and dis-
1. Compared to the forced commutated current source inverter of figure 8.15, the
load commutated inverter of figure 11.6 uses 6 capacitors and 6 diodes less.
Consequently,
a load commutated
inverter has lower cost, weight, volume,
and losses. Hence, synchronous motor drives with load commutated inverters
are widely used in high-power applications.
2. A forced commutated current source in verter has a low frequency range. The
attainable frequency range of a load commutated inverter depends on the commutating inductance and the tum-off time of the inverter thyristors. With converter grade thyristors and even with motors with somewhat larger than the
usual value of commutating
inductances,
operation at up to several hundred
Hertz is possible." When operating above base speed at a constant induced
voltage V, the overlap angle increases with frequency, thus requiring operation
at a larger f3. But, because of the large value of u, the power factor does not
become too low [equation (11.16)].
3. With permanent magnet motors, the operation above base speed is obtained at
a large f3; consequently, the motor operates at a low power factor and efficiency.
444
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
4. Load commutation is caused by induced voltages. At very low speeds, the induced voltages are too small to provide satisfactory commutation. Hence, for
low speeds - typically below 10 percent of base speed -load commutation
cannot be used.
11.3.6 Commutation
at Low Speeds
As mentioned in the previous section, load commutation is employed only for

speeds above 10 percent of base speed. Hence, for lower speeds, a pulsed mode of
operation, also known as the link current interruption method, is employed.
In the inverter of figure 11.6, a cycle of operation consists of six 60 intervals.
In these invervals, thyristors conduct de link current in pairs of two in the sequence
TT6, TT2, T2T3, T3T4, T4Ts, and TsT6. Somewhat similar operation of the inverter
is obtained when each time the current is to be transferred from one pair to another,
Id is forced to zero by making the firing angle of the line side con verter close to
180. ConsequentIy, thyristors in the outgoing pair tum off due to the lack of current. Now the firing angle of the line side con verter is brought back to the original
value and the incoming pair of inverter thyristors is fired to establish the flow of Id
through it. Figure 11.14 shows the waveforms of the de link current and machine
phase currents and voltages. The six intervals of operation and thyristor pairs under
lb
.
dr=Jr=Jr=JCJCJC.
o
VaN
I I
II
I
I
II
I I
II
I
I
wt
wt
wt
wt
Devices under
conduction
Figure 11.14 Pulsed mode of operation

of the drive of Fig. 11.6.
Seco 11.3
445
conduction are also shown. The phase current pulse is less than 120 wide. The angular gap between two adjacent pulses depends on the time required by the line ide
converter to force Id to O and to reestablish it. Because of a large value of Ld, a few
cycles of the ac supply are required to accomplish this change in Id' However, the
angular gap remains small because of the low frequency of the inverter operation.
The effect of the angular gap is to reduce the motor current and torque. The
gap can be substantially reduced by connecting a freewheeling thyristor across the de
link inductor, as shown by dotted lines in figure 11.6. At the time of commutation,
the current Id is transferred to the freewheeling thyristor, instead of being forced to
zero. The operation is explained with the help of figure 11.15. At such a low speed,
the line side converter output voltage is low. Consequently it operates at a firing
angle slightly less than 90. The de link voltage Vdl is shown in the figure. When
commutation is desired, a single firing pulse is diverted from the converter to the
freewheeling thyristor. This causes Vdl to become negative for a duration of 90
(around 5 msec. for a 50 Hz supply). Consequently, the current is transferred to the
freewheeling thyristor and the outgoing inverter thyristor pair is tumed off. Now the
incoming inverter thyristor pair is fired. The current Id is transferred to this pair
when the next firing pulse is given to the line side converter.
When the rotor position sensor consists of a rotor position encoder, the firing
pulses required for the foregoing operation can be obtained from the encoder. At
approximately 10 percent of base speed, the operation is shifted from the pulsed
mode to normal operation. A terminal voltage sensor cannot be used to generate the
firing pulses at standstill. Hence, when a terminal voltage sensor is employed, at
standstill, the firing pulses are obtained from an independent oscillator. Soon after
the motor starts, the independent oscillator is replaced by the terminal voltage sen-
wt
(a)
(b]
(e)
Figure 11.15 Pulsed mode of operation of

the drive of Fig. 11.6 with a freewheeling
thyristor. (a) Vdl. (b) Id. (e) Firing pulses for
converter thyristors, (d) Firing pulse for the
freewheeling thyristor.
l__ ~,---_
(dl
Self-Controlled
446
Synchronous
sor. When the speed reaches approximately

mode ceases and normal operation begins.
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
10 percent of base speed, the pulsed
11.4 CYCLOCONVERTER WITH LOAD COMMUTATION

A cycloconverter feeding a synchronous motor is shown in figure 11.16. For commutation considerations, the synchronous motor is modeled in the same way as in
figure 11.6. The cycloconverter consists of three dual converters A, B, and C, each
consisting of two three-pulse controlled rectifiers. During the positive half-cycles of
phase current i A, i B, and ic, the machine draws currents from rectifiers A +, B + ,
and C+, respectively, and during the negative half-cycles, from rectifiers A-, B-,
and C-, respectively. The rectifiers are controlled to produce the six-step current
waveform of figure 11.6b. For this they conduct in pairs with a sequence (A+, B-),
(A+, C-), (B+, C-), (B+, A-), (C+, A-), and (C+, B-). Load commutation is
used mainly to obtain a changeover from one pair to another. For example, when
pair (A +, C-) is conducting, phase A carries positive current and phase C carries
negative current. These two pairs conduct together for 60 in a cycle of the machine
induced voltage. During this conduction, the two rectifiers are controlled in the sarne
way as a single rectifier. The next pair to conduct is (B+, C-). For this, current
must transfer from rectifier A + to rectifier B +. For this transfer, the induced
voltage vAB must be positive. Hence, the transfer is initiated at a suitable lead angle
13. If at this instant thyristor Al of rectifier A+ has been in conduction, then thyrisOual
converter
A
Oual
converter
B
Oual
con verter
C
-A,
Rectifier A+
Rectifier B+
R
>-
<1:
Rectifier C+
b
B
Rectifier A-
Rectifier B-
Rectifier C-
~--~.J--~----~--~---------+---r--------~
.--
Figure 11.16 Load and source cornmutation in a cycJoconverter.
Motor
Seco 11.5
Synchronous
Motor
Control
Requirements
447
tor B 1, which is connccted to the sarne supply line as Al' is fired at a lead angle f3.
The induced voltage vAB transfers the current from Alto B I after an overlap angle u
and subsequently subjects Al to a reverse bias of duration (f3 - u) so that it can regain forward voltage blocking capability. The commutation process is identical to
the current source inverter, and the analysis of commutation given in section 11.3.1
and description of sections 11.3.2 to 11.3.4 are applicable.
At low speeds, the machine induced voltages are too small to cause the transfer
of current from one rectifier to another. Hence, the source voltage is used to effect
this commutation. Let us again consider the transfer of current between the pairs
(A + , C -) and (B + , C - ), which requires transfer of conduction from rectifier A +
to rectifier B +. For this, the thyristor of rectifier B +, whose anode is at a higher potential than the conducting thyristor of rectifier A + is fired. For example, if A I has
been in conduction and VBR is positive when the current transfer is desired, then B3
is fired. Since voltage VBR is positive, B3 tums on and Al is commutated.
The main advantage of the load commutation in a cycloconverter is that the
output frequency can be higher than the ac supply frequency, thus providing speed
control over a wide range.
11.5 SVNCHRONOUS
MOTOR
CONTROL
REQUIREMENTS
The basic control strategy is to operate the machine preferably at a constant flux
below base speed and at reduced flux and constant terminal voltage above base
speed. The same approach has been used for a rectifier controlled de motor or an induction motor with variable frequency control. As explained in section 11.2, a variable frequency controlled synchronous motor with self-control essentially works as a
commutatorless or a brushless de motor. However, the synchronous motor control is
not as simple as that of a de motor, mainly because, unlike a dc motor, the synchronous motor operates without eliminating the armature reaction. Consequently
the flux does not depend on the field current alone, but also on the armature current.
Further, the additional requirements related to power factor impose additional constraints on the drive operation and control. In this section, how these requirements
are achieved will be examined. Because of the flexibility of field control in a woundfield motor, the flux, power factor and speed can be simultaneously controlled. In a
permanent magnet motor, along with speed, either the flux or power factor can be
controlled.
11.5.1
Operation
of a Wound-Field
Synchronous
Motor
from a Variable Frequency Current Source
Below base speed, the armature current is controlled to vary torque and speed, and
the field current and tarque angle are controlled to maintain a constant flux and the
desired power factor. At base speed, either the terminal voltage saturates or reaches
the rated value. Therefore, above base speed, the field current and torque angle are
controlled to vary the flux inversely with speed and to maintain the power factor at
the desired value.
A drive fed from a variable frequency current source may operate at a leading
power factor when load commutation is used otherwise it may operate at unity
448
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
power factor to maximize the use of the source and motor ratings and to minirnize
losses. Therefore, the motor will be examined for unity and leading power factor
operations below and above base speed.
Operation at Unity Power Factor
Constant flux operation below base speed is obtained by keeping I:n constant at the
rated value. Thus, when I, is increased to increase torque, I and 8' are also controlled simultaneously
to maintain I:n constant and to obtain a unity power factor.
Figure 11. 17 shows the phasor diagrams for motoring and braking operations. From
triangles ABC in these phasor diagrams,
+ I~
I = VI;
(11.39)
8 = tan-I(Is/IM)
8' = [90 + 181] = [90 + tan-I(Is/IM)]
(11.40)
where a positive sign is for motoring, a negative sign is for braking, and 1M is the
rated value of I:n. I and 8' as a function of I, are shown in figure 11. 17c. If Ir and 8'
are varied as a function of I, as shown in figure 11.17c, then the machine will operate at a constant flux and unity power factor below base speed.
T= (; PLs)IsIr sin 8'

where L, is the synchronous
From triangles ABC,
(11.41)
inductance.
I cos 8
= 1M
or
Ir sin 8'
where again a positive sign is for motoring
IM
(11.42)
and a negative sign is for braking.
v
1,
A
I
/
/
I
I
/
//
./
Loeus \
of 1M
",
'-
1M
~
B
B
(a) Motoring
Figure
(e)
Ib) Braking
11.17
Unity power factor operation
of a wound-field
synchronous
motor.
Seco 11.5
Synchronous
Fromequations
Motor Control
449
Requirements
(11.41) and (11.42),
.T
(11.43)
(~ PLs) IslM
From equation (11.43), torque is proportional to armature current and it is independent of frequency or speed. When operating at the maximum permissible current,
the torque has a constant value. Therefore, below the base speed, the machine operates in the constant torque mode.
Above base speed (a > 1), Y is held constant. Hence, the magnetizing current
must be reduced to (1M/a). From equations (11.39) and (11.40),
= VI~ + (IM/a)2
(11.44)
(11.45)
Now I and a' are functions

relationship. Now
of I, and frequency.
It is difficult to implement
such a
(11.46)
Since y is constant, the drive operates in a constant power mode.

The variation of T, Y, I , and I:n with per-unit speed "a" for the machine
operation at a constant I, is shown in figure 11.18.
Operation at a Leading Power Factor
The machine operates at a leading power factor when fed by a load commutated inverter or cyc1oconverter. Here, the machine operation is initially examined for a constant leading power factor. The results obtained are then extended to constant margin
angle control, constant commutation lead angle control and constant no-Ioad torque
angle control. Note that constant margin angle control is required only durirrg motoring, when the machine side con verter or.erates as an inverter. For braking, f3 can be
set at 1800 for all operating points. Therefore, the analysis is considered only for motoring 'operation. The analysis for braking can be carried out in the same way.
From the triangle ABC of figure 11.9a,
I = VI; + I~ -
21sIM cos(90
+ cP)
(11.47)
~------------~~------~~--------l,
T
---'
Figure 11.18 Unity power factor
operation of a synchronous motor fed
from a variable frequency source.
1.0
Per-unit frequency a
l'
l;"
2.0
450
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
and
1;
sin(l80
- 8')
sin(90
+ <p)
or
1; sin 8'
= 1M COS <p
(11.48)
<p)
(11.49)
or
8'
= sin-'G7
cos
For a given value of <p and constant 1M, 1; is known as a function of I, from equation (11.47). Then 8' is known as a function of 1; from equation (11.49).
From equations (11. 41) and (11. 48),
(11.50)
At a constant power factor angle <p, torque is proportional to the armature current 'and power is proportional to speed. Consequently,
the machine operates in a
constant torque mode. The torque available at the maximum permissible current is
reduced by a factor cos <p compared to the operation at unity power factor. This ernphasizes the need for operation at the least value of <p-that
is, with the constant
margin angle control.
Expressions for the operation above base speed (a> 1) at a constant <p are obtained by substituting (1M/a) for 1M in equations (11.47), (l1.49):and
(11.50) giving
(11.51)
8'
sin-,(IM
al;
cos
<p)
(11.52)
(11.53)
The developed
power is given by ,
Pm
(3V cos <p)Is
(11.54)
Therefore, at a given power factor, the machine operates in a constant power mode.
However, the maximum available power is reduced by a factor of cos <p compared to
the operation at unity power factor.
Seco 11.5
Synchronous
Motor Control
Requirements
451
Equations for the constant margin angle control below base speed are obtained
by substituting from equation (11. 30) into equations (11.47), (11. 49), and (11. 50),
giving
Ir = VI; + IK.t+ 2IsIM sin(0.5u + Ymin)
8' = sin-I
[~7
cos(0.5u
+ Ymin)]
T = (~ PLs) IMIs cos(0.5u

From equations
(11.55)
(11.56)
+ Ymin)
(11.57)
KG:)
(11.58)
(11.29) and (11.33),

cos(u + Ymin)=
COS
Ymin-
From equation (11.58), u is a function of Id only. At low frequencies where flux is

not constant u will also be a function of speed. Since <P is not constant, the torque
does not vary linearly with T.
The equations for the constant margin angle control above base speed are obtained by substitution
from equation (11. 30) into equations (11.51), (11.52) and
(11.54), giving
Ir = VI~ + (IM/a)2 + 2Is(IM/a) sin(0.5u + Ymin)
(11.59)
8' = sin-I G~r cos(O.5u + Ymin)]
(11.60)
Pm=3VIs
Replacing
IM by (IM/a) in equation
cos(0.5U+Ymin)
(11.61)
(11.58) gives
cos(u + Ymin)=
COS
Ymin-
K(~:)
(11.62)
According to equation (11.62), u increases with speed; consequently, the power factor and the power for a given I, decrease with an increase in speed. Thus, maximum
available power falls with an increase in speed.
The performance equations and control requirements for constant commutation
lead angle control and constant no-load torque angle control can be similarly derived.
Now let us examine the performance of the open loop system of figure 11.6.
The nature of variation of T with I, for various control techniques is shown in
figure 11.19a. Their nature can be explained as follows. Let, in all three control techniques, the inverters operate at the minimum margin angle at the maximum current
and let the corresponding
power factor angle be <Po' If the machine is operated at a
constant <Po, then from equation (11.50), T changes linearly with I, as shown in the
figure. According to figure ll.l2b,
when operating with constant margin angle control, <p is lower than <Po for all values of Is; hence, higher torques are produced. The
curves for other control schemes can be explained similarly with the help of fig-
452
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
.......
....
--
---..-....-
1,
(a)
(b)
---- --
Constant margin angle control

-
Constant commutation
-
lead angle control
Constant no-Ioad torque angle control
Figure 11.19 Performance curves for load

commutated inverter-fed wound-field
synchronous motor drive.
ure 11.12b. These characteristics are also applicable to the load commutated cycloconverter case. The nature of speed-torque characteristics for the three control
schemes for a fixed value of the source side converter firing angle and for the operation below base speed is shown in figure 11.19b. Similar curves are obtained for a
cycloconverter fed drive for a given value of the firing angle of the cycloconverter's
dual converters. The difference between these curves at low torques occurs due to
different values of {3. In the case of constant margin angle control, {3decreases as
torque is reduced, but it remains constant for the constant commutation lead angle
control (fig. 11.12a). For a larger {3, a higher value of induced voltage and therefore
of speed is required te obtain a balance between Vdl and Vd [(11.23)]. For the same
reason the constant no-load torque angle control will give higher speeds than the
constant commutation lead angle control at low torques. In the constant margin
angle control, {3increases with Id; thus, the speed tends to increase with torque. On
the other hand the voltage drops across the resistances of the de link inductor and
motor, and u increase with Id and this, tends to decrease the speed. Depending on the
machine parameters, the speed may increase or decrease with an increase in torque.
Example 11.5
The drive of example 11.2 is now fed from a constant dc link voltage Vd = -7571 V.
Calculate the speed and torque for Id = 58.47 A, 43.85 A, 29.25 A, and 12.62 A for
the constant margin angle control and the constant commutation lead angle control.
For both the control schemes at Id = 58.47 A, the drive operates at a minimum margin
angle of 15.
Solution:
At Id = 58.47 A, both the control schemes will have the same torque and
speed. From example 11.2 these are 3608 N-m and 1200 rpm, respectively.
At the rated speed, V = 3810.5 V, w = 377 rad/sec.
wLc = 377 x 50 x 10-3

= 18.85 n
Sec.11.5
Synchronous
Motor Control Requirements
= X'=~=0.215
453
377
Since the motor operates at a constant flux, (wLclV) and I~ are constant at all speed .
Constant Margin Angle Control:

cos(u
2 x 18.85
+ 15) = cos 15 - \16
6 x 3810.5
Id
= 0.966 - 0.004Id
(E 11. 1)
From equation (11.23) for the per-unit speed a (actual speedlrated speed),
3\16
Vd= --Va
cos(l80
7T
3
- f3) - -wLcald
7T
3\16
= [ --:;;- x 3.810.5 cos(l80 - f3) -
3]
7T X
18.85Id a
or
-7571
a = ------....,---8913 cos(l80 - f3) - 18Id
(Ell.2)

3
T = "2 pL,IM1, cos cf>
3
="2' 6 x 0.215 x 47I, cos cf>
Por Id
(EI13)
= 90.951, cos cf>

A,
= 43.85
\16
I, =-
\16
X
x 43.85 = 34.2 A
Id =-
7T
7T
From equation (El I.\),

cos(u
+ 15) = 0.966 - 0.004 x 43.85
which gives u = 22.76,
f3 = 22.76 + 15= 37.76
Hence
cf> =
Ymin
+ 0.5u = 15 + 0.5 x 22.76 = 26.38
From equation (EI1.2),

-7571
a = 8913 cos(l80 - 37.76) - 18 x 43.85 = 0.966
Speed = a
x 1200 = 0.966 x 1200 = 1159 rpm
From equation (E 11.3),

T = 90.95 x 34.2 x cos 26.38 = 2786.6 N-m
Self-Controlled
454
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
Following the foregoing steps, the speed and torque can also be calculated for other
values of Id' The results are listed in the table here:
58.47
Id (A)
T (N-m)
Speed (rpm)
29.25
1836
1122
43.85
2786.6
1159
3608
1200
14.62
975
1087
Note that speed falls with a decrease in torque.
Constant Commutation Lead Angle Control:

From example 11.2 for Id =
58.47 A, speed and torque are 1200 rpm and 3608 N-m, respectively, and f3c = 43.
0)
2 x 18.85
cos (43 - u = cos 43 + V6 x 3810.5 Id
= 0.73
+ O.OO4Id
(EII.4)
From equation (ElI.2)

a=
For Id
-7571
-7571
=
8913 cos 137 - 18Id -6518.6 - 18Id
43.85 A,
From equation (Ell.4),
cos(43 - u) = 0.73
+ 0.004 x 43.85 = 0.9
(E 11.5)
or
u = 18
Then
rJ>= f3 - 0.5 u
= 43 - 0.5 x 18 = 34
From equation (E 11.5),

a=
-7571
-6518.6 - 18 x 43.85
Hence, speed
1200 x 1.04
= 1.04
1248 rpm
From equation (El 1.3),

T
90.95 x 34.2 x cos 34 =; 2579 N-m
Following the preceding steps for different values of Id gives the results tabulated here:
Id (A)
T (N-m)
speed (rpm)
58.47
3608
1200
43.85
2579
1248
29.25
1688
1289
14.62
789.5
1339
11.5.2 Operation
Motor
of a Permanent
Magnet Synchronous
from a Variable Frequency Current Source
Since the operation of a permanent magnet motor takes place at a constant Ir, the
analysis of this section is also applicable to the operation of a wound-field motor
with a constant field current.
Below base speed, the speed is controlled by varying the armature current and
above base speed it is controlled by weakening the flux. In a wound-field motor we
varied 15, Ir, and 8' (or f3) to control T, flux, and the power factor for a given speed.
Seco 11.5
Synchronous
Motor
Control
455
Requirements
In a permanent magnet motor Ir is constant. Consequently I, and 8' can be varied to

achieve torque control along with the control of either flux or the power factor for a
given speed. The control of the power factor is important when load commutation is
employed. On the other hand, flux control may be desirable when fast transient response is desired.
Operation
at a Leading Power Factor
The analysis is presented for motoring operation only. We can use the phasor diagram of figure 11.9. Note that Ir is constant and l:n is a variable. From triangle ABC,
ls
sin 8
Ir
sin(90 + cp)
1'm
sin(I80 - 8')
(11.63)
which yields
(11.64)
Now
(11. 65)
or
(O
.66)
Tl;u! operation at a constant cp is obtained, if 8' is increased with I, according to

equation (11.66). Since 8' increases with ls' according to equation (11.41), the
torque increases less than linearly with.I, (note that 8' > 90).
When fast transient operation is required, the motor is allowed to carry several
times the rated current. Consider the operation of the drive when maximum current
allowed under transient operation is equal to twice the rated current. A permanent
magnet motor is designed to have unity power factor at full loado For load commutation it is made to operate at a leading power factor by increasing the torque angle 8'.
According to equation (11.41) this causes machine torque to reduce for the rated current. To achieve load commutation at twice the rated current requires a large increase in 8', consequently a proportionate increase in torque is much less than in
current. Compare this behavior with that of a wound-field motor. In a wound-field
motor, the leading power factor for twice the rated current is obtained partly by an
increase in Ir and partly by an increase in 8'. From equation (11.48) the decrease in
the factor sin 8' is compensated by an increase in Ir; hence, torque increases in proportion to arrnature current.
It is useful to examine this behavior from another direction. From equation (11.63),
sin 8'
1, -- l' f-m
cos cp
(11.67)
456
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11

T
= (~
PLs) r.r; cos
cp
(11.68)
As I, is increased to increase torque, with cp heId constant, 5' increases. Consequently I:n decreases [equation (11. 67)], decreasing flux and not allowing torque
to increase in proportion to I, [equation (11.68)]. Thus, unlike a wound-field motor,
which operates at a constant flux, a permanent magnet motor operates at a reduced
flux for a large Is' This effect is similar to an armature reaction in a de motor.
The operation above base speed is obtained as follows. At base speed, for
given values of I, and cp, 5' is given by equation (11.66). If for a given operating
point, 5' is increased more than that given by equation (11.66), then I:n and induced
voltage will decrease (fig. 11.9a) and the motor speed will increase to obtain a balance between the terminal voltage and the induced voltage. Further, according to
equation (11.66) for a given Is' cp will increase with 5'. Hence, the motor power factor and power capability will reduce and losses will increase with an increase in speed.
Expressions for constant margin angle control are obtained by substituting
from equation (11.30) into equations (11.66) and (11.68). According to equation (11.31), u now depends on Id, I:n, and speed. The performance equations and
performance requirements for other control techniques can be similarly obtained.
Now examine the behavior of the open-Ioop drive of figure 11.6. Figure 11.20
shows the speed-torque curves for constant commutation lead angle control and constant no-Ioad torque angle control for operation below base speed at a constant value
of the source side converter firing angle. In the former control, speed increases with
torque. With an increase in torque, Is' 5', and u increase and flux decreases. The
increase in I, increases the voltage drops across various resistances, which has a
tendency to decrease the speed. The effeci of the cornmutation overIap is to decrease
the speed for a given value of the inverter counter emf Vd' The field weakening
tends to increase the speed. Since the latter effect dominates, the speed increases
with torque. In constant no-Ioad torque angle control, speed drops with torque. Here
also, while the resistance drops tend to decrease speed with torque, the armature
reaction tends to increase it with torque. Figure 11. 12a shows that f3 decreases with
an increase in Is' This has the effect of reducing speed for a given Vd [equa-
Constant
o~
---
Constant
commutation
---
Constant
no-Ioad torque
lead angle control

lead angle control
Figure 11.20 Speed-torque curves for

load commutated inverter-fed permane?t
magnet synchronous motor drive.
Seco 11.5
Synchronous
Motor
Control
457
Requirements
tion (11.23)]. The net result of these effects is to cause a de crease in speed with an
increase in torque.
Next let us examine the behavior of the drive above base speed. When a rotor
position encoder is employed, 8~ is increased to increase speed. An increase in 8~
causes f3 to increase and flux to reduce. Both changes cause speed to increase
[equation (11.23)]. When a terminal voltage sensor is employed, operation above
base speed is obtained by increasing f3. Here again, an increase in speed is obtained
due to an increase in f3 and a decrease in flux.
As explained earlier, the drive power factor, efficiency, and power capability
decrease and machine terminal voltage increases with an increase in speed.
Operation at Unity Power Factor
The machine operates at unity power factor when 8' is varied with Is' The relevant
equations are obtained when 1> = O is substituted in equations (11.66) through (11.68).
Operation at a Constant 8' Below Base
Speed
If a value of 8' can be chosen so that at the highest value of I, or torque, I~ = 1;,
then the flux will be the same as at no load. The locus of I~ and terminal voltage for
a given speed when I, is increased from O to its maximum value at a constant 8' is
shown in figure 11.21. The phasors are shown for I, = O and the maximum value of
Is' I~ is equal to Ir for I, = O and at the maximum value of Is' The value of 8' can be
obtained as follows.
From triangle ABC,
1;2
+ I~ -
- 8')
21;ls cos(l80
1;;
= 1;2
or
cos
s::'
u = -
I,
21;
(11.69)
.This operation allows high torque to be obtained at the maximum value of Is' The
power factor is also maintained high. However, because of the lagging power factor
operation at high currents, forced commutation is required. This technique can be
used for low-power drives where transistor inverters are employed.
\
t,
\\Increasing
r, \
A
1.'-+-----"
Vf
I~ = I~
180-5'
Figure 11.21 Phasor diagram for a

constant 8' which make the value of 1;" at
the maximum 1, equal to
Ir.
r;
C 1,;
~
o
~~
Increasing I,
ls;
458
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
At a given torque, a constant power factor is maintained for all speeds. At a

given speed, as the torque is reduced from its maximum value, the power factor increases from its minimum lagging value, reaches unity, becomes leading, and has a
minimum value at the lowest armature current.
Example 11.6
A 10 kW, 3-phase, 440 V, 60 Hz, 4 pole, Y-connected pennanent magnet synchronous
X,= 15 n.
R, is negligible,
Rated power factor = 1.0
The machine is controlled from a transistor current source inverter at a torque angle o'
such that at the rated current 1~ = 1;. Calculate the motor torque at the rated current,
and the terminal voltage at 1200 rpm and the rated current. Neglect harmonics, core
loss, friction, and windage.
Solution:
V = 440/\1'3 = 254 V
10 x 103
The rated 1, =
V'3 x 440
r: =~=
m
13.1 A
254 = 16.93 A
15
X,
From figure 11.17 for the unity power factor operation

1;2=1;+1~2=
13.12+ 16.932
or
1;=21.4A
.. From equation (11.69), for I~ = 1; at a given 1"
cos
o'
= _~=
21;
13.1
2x21.4
which gives o' = 107.8.

T =
(2.2
x 4 x ~)
x 13.1 x 21.4 sin 107.8 = 63.72
377
120 x 60
Rated speed =
4
= 1800 rpm
-rn
.
1200 21.4
Terminal voltage at 1200 rpm = 1800 x 16.93 x 440
= 371 V (line)
11.5.3 Operation
Motor
of a Permanent
Magnet Synchronous
from a Variable Frequency Voltage Source
The discussion of this section will be applicable to self-control as well as to control

from an independent oscillator. The main difference between the two controls is that
while the torque angle is the independent variable in the forrner, frequency is the independent variable in the latter.
Seco 11.5
Synchronous
459
The basic control strategy is to oprate the motor at a constant flux below base
speed and at a constant terminal voltage above base speed. The constant flux operation below base speed is achieved by operating the machine at a constant (V/O ratio,
which is increased at low speeds to compensate for the armature resistance drop.
The phasor diagram of figure 11.1 is applicable,
and torque and power are
given by equations (10.16) to (10.19). Substituting for Wms frorn equation (10.1) and
X, = wLs, gives
Pm = 3VI; sin
=
T
3Lswl;"l;
3; (~)I;
sin
(11. 70)
sin
(11.71)
(11. 72)
= (3P2Ls) l'ml'f SIO. U~
(11.73)
Below base speed, the magnetizing current is constant and equal to its rated value
1M, Hence, from equations (10.22) and (10.23) or figure 11.1
1> = 1; cos o - 1M
I, cos 1> = 1; sin o
I, sin
(1l.74)
(1l. 75)
Consider the operation of the motor below base speed for a constant armature
current. Since both 1; and 1;" are constant, all the sides of triangle ABC of figure 11.1
have fixed values; therefore,
has a constant value. The torque is also constant frorn
equation (11. 73). This is true for any speed. Therefore the machine operates in the
constant torque mode. Since
is constant, frorn equations (11. 74) and (11. 75), the
in-phase and quadrature components of armature current are also constant. Consequently, the power factor is also constant for all speeds.
Let us examine the operation of a motor which has been designed to operate at
a lagging power factor. When it operates at the rated current, at any speed, it will
operate at the designed lagging power factor. A decrease in Is, irrespective of speed,
reduces o, T, and the quadrature component of armature current. At some value of I,
or
(1; cos
1M) becomes zero. Then the machine operates at a unity power factor. A further decrease in I, causes the motor to operate at a leading power factor.
The lowest leading power factor is obtained at the minimum value of L.
Next, let us consider the operation above base speed for which the per-unit frequency a> l. Since V is constant
o,
o-
r:m = 1aM
Equations
(11.73) and (11.74) are modified
CP2
(11. 76)
to
Ls
(11. 77)
I, sin 1> = 1; cos 0- 1M
(11. 78)
) (1:)1; sin
Self-Controlled
460
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
The in-phase component of the armature current is still given by equation (11.75).
Now let us consider the operation at the rated annature current for which the rnachine operates at a lagging power factor below base speed. As shown in figure 11.22,
for a constant I, and variable l.'n (= 1M/a), point C of triangle ABC moves along a
circular path with a radius equal to Is' Consequently,
as the speed increases, initially 8 increases, reaches a maximum value, and then decreases again. From equations (11. 70), (ll. 75) and (ll. 78), as the speed is increased above the base speed,
with the annature current held at the rated value, the developed power and power
factor increase initially. The power reaches the maximum value at a speed for which
the power factor is unity and 8 is maximum [equation (ll. 70), assuming that motor
parameters
are such that 8 does not reach 90 before the power factor becomes
unity]. A further increase in speed causes a decrease in power and the power factor,
which is now leading. When the power factor becomes the same as at base speed,
the motor produces the same power as at base speed. A further increase in speed reduces the power below the base speed value. This imposes a limit on the maximum
speed for applications requiring essentially a constant power capability. Therefore,
the speed range of a motor designed for a lagging power factor is generally higher
than the one designed for a unity or leading power factor.
Now consider the variation of the power factor at a constant speed above base
speed, when the current is reduced from the rated value. If the power factor at the
rated current is lagging, it improves, reaches unity and becomes leading for low values of current. If the power factor has already become leading at the rated current, it
becomes more leading as the current is reduced.
11.5.4
Operation of a Wound-Field Synchronous Motor

from a Variable Frequency Voltage Source
Here al so the machine operates at a constanl flux below base speed and at a constant
terminal voltage above base speed. Additional flexibility made available by the field
current control is used to control the power factor.
It is preferable to maintain the power factor at unity. From equation (11. 74),
the motor operates at a unity power factor below base speed when
1; cos 8 - 1M = O
or
1; = ~
cos 8
= constant
cos 8
(ll. 79)
l.
s
Increasi ng a
'" _.-.4-
/'
"
I
I
I
I
I'f
B
Figure 11.22 Field weakening by

increasing s.
Seco 11.5
Synchronous
461
Thus Ir should be varied with 5 according to equation (11 .79).

The power input to the machine is given by
Pm
3VIs
( 11.80)
and
(11.81)
Thus, at the unity power factor operation, the armature current varies linearly with
torque. For a given armature current, the torque has a constant value at all speeds;
hence the motor operates in the constant torque mode.
Above base speed, V is held constant; therefore
l'
From equation
(11. 82)
(11. 79), for the unity power factor operation,
l' f -
Therefore,
= 1M
1M
a cos 5
(11.83)
Ir is to be changed as a function of 5 and speed. Now

Pm
3VIs
(11.84)
which shows that the machine operates in the constant power mode above base speed.
At a given Is' variables T, V, 1 and I ~ vary with "a" in the same manner as
shown in figure 11.18.
r,
11.5.5 Operation
Maximum
From
ratio
5' =
gram
of Permanent Magnet Motor at the

Torque to Armature Current Ratio
equation (10.27), which applies to current source operation, for a given Ir, the
(T /Is) is maximized
when motoring and braking operations
take place at
90 and 5' = 270, respectively (that is, at pull-out points). The phasor diafor the motoring operation at 5' = 90 is shown in figure 11.23a.
The maximum (T /Is) ratio operation can also be identified in terms of the internal power factor, which is defined as the cosine of the angle between the armature
current Is and the excitation emf Vf' The ratio has a maximum value when the internal power factor is unity. Note that under this condition the terminal (actual) power
factor is always less than unity; it is lagging for motoring and leading for braking.
In this operation, the (T /Is) ratio is maximized essentially by boosting the airgap flux. The machine may operate under heavy saturation and the core los s will be
high but the copper loss will be low. When operating at 5' = 90 from a variable fre-
462
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. "
(b)
(a)
Figure 11.23 Operation at (a) mximum

(T/I,) ratio or S' = 90 and (b) mximum
(T/I:.J ratio or S = 90.
quency current source, for the same maximum dc link voltage, the base speed will
have a lower value. For higher speeds, S' will have to be increased to weaken the
flux. This control technique of maximizing the (T/Is) ratio by boosting the flux can be
used in servo drives requiring fast transient response but only low-speed operation.
11.5.6 Operation
Maximum
of Permanent Magnet
Torque-to-Flux
Ratio
Motor at the
From equation (10.19), applicable to voltage source operation, for a given Ir, the
(T /I:n) ratio is maximized when motoring and braking operations take place at
S = 90 and S = 270, respectively (that is, at pull-out operating points). The phasor
diagram for the motoring operation at S = 90 is shown in figure 11.23b. The machine operates at a lagging power factor.
In this operation the (T/I:n) ratio is maximized by boosting the arrnature current. The machine will have high copper loss and low core loss. The base speed will
have a higher value compared to the maximum (T/Is) ratio operation. This operation
can be used in servo applications requiring operation over a wide speed range.
11.5.7 True
De
Motor Operation
Here the synchronous motor operation is termed true dc motor operation when it operates at S' = 90 for motoring and at S' = 270 for braking, thus yielding maximum
torque per ampere of the arrnature current at a given field current. However, such an
operation will have low base speed, and heavy saturation, high core loss, and a low
lagging power factor when operating at and near the maximum permissible current.
These drawbacks are caused by arrnature reaction. Armature reaction can be eliminated by providing a compensating field winding located in the quadrature axis and
carrying the armature current. By suitably choosing the turns, the compensating
winding mmf can be made equal to and opposite the arrnature winding mmf. Then
the air-gap flux becomes independent of the armature current and depends on the
value of field current only. Figure 11.24a shows the phasor diagram of a machine
with a compensating winding. The current Ifc is the equivalent arrnature phase current, which produces the same revolving mmf as the compensating winding. It can be
evaluated in the same way as Ir (section 10.1.1). The current Ifc induces a voltage E,
Sec.11.5
Synchronous
463

1,
1,
I,X,
l'f
l'f
(a) Motoring
(b) Braking
R,
v~
I
(e) Equivalent cireuit
v
I,X,
l'f
(d) Motoring
I,X,
1;
(e) Braking
Figure 11.24 True de motor operation with eompensating winding: (al to (el are for the
unity power factor operation and (d) and (el are for the leading power factor operation.
which is equal and opposite to the LX, drop. Hence, V, 1s, and Vf are in phase. The
machine now operates at unity terminal, as well as at the unity internal power factor
while retaining 8' at 90. Figure 11.24b shows the corresponding
diagram for the
braking operation. This gives the optimum condition of operation for the drive in the
sense that while the machine torque and power for given values of I, and Ir are maximized, the inverter rating for a given power output is minimized.
The machine
equivalent circuit under these operating conditions is shown in figure 11.24c, which
is similar to a de machine. From the phasor diagrams and the equivalent circuit,
(11.85)
464
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
and
(11.86)
The machine operation at the leading power factor for all values of I, is
achieved when the armature reaction is over-cornpensated by choosing Irc higher
than Is. The phasor diagram is shown in figure l1.24d for the motoring operation.
By a suitable choice of Irc' the angle el> at full load can be adjusted to be a little
higher than (0.5 u + "min), where u is the overlap angle at full loado As the armature
current changes, both el> and u change, resulting in a good power factor and reliable
load commutation for all loading conditions, both for motoring and braking operations. Note that the firing instant of thyristors leads I, by an angle 0.5 u. Hence,
when a rotor position encoder is employed, the firing pulses to respective thyristors
must be delivered when the direct axis makes an angle of 150 + 0.5 u with the
respective phase axis.
Thus, the use of a compensating winding can substantially improve the performance of the drive. But the improvement is obtained at the expense of an increase in
cost, bulk, and inertia of the motor.
0
11.6 OPERATION OF SELF-CONTROLLED SVNCHRONOUS

MOTOR DRIVES WITH SEMICONDUCTOR CONVERTERS
Characteristics and control requirements of self-controlled synchronous motor drives
related to a specific variable frequency semiconductor con verter are described in this
section.
Recalling that in a self-controlled synchronous motor drive, the converter
frequency is controlled by the motor speed, and therefore, it is not available as an
independent control parameter, as in the case of a converter controlled from an independent oscillator. A self-controlled synchronous motor drive is neither subjected to
hunting, nor is it started as an induction motor; therefore, a damper winding is not
needed to serve its conventional roleo It does not mean that it is not needed at all. It
is certainly employed in certain drives but the reasons for its use are different than
the conventional ones.
11.6.1 Current
Source Inverter
(CSI) Drives
A CSI synchronous motor drive may employ a load commutated thyristor inverter
(fig. 11.6), a forced commutated inverter (fig. 8.14), or a current controlled pulsewidth modulated inverter (figs. 8.26 and 8.27). A forced commutated inverter may
consist of a forced commutated thyristor inverter (fig. 8.15) or a self-cornmutated
transistor or GTO inverter. The current controlled pulse-width modulated inverters
usually employ a voltage source inverter (fig. 8.1) with transistor switches, though
GTOs may also be used.
lnverter with Rectangular Current Waveforms
The load commutated (fig. 11.6) and forced commutated inverters (figs. 8.14 and
8.15) give approximately rectangular or trapezoidal current waveforms which are
rich in harmonics. The harmonic content is given approximately by equation (8)2).
Seco 11.6
Operation of Self-Controlled Synchronous Motor Drives
465
The effect of harmonics on the machine performance is discussed in section 10.9.

The main effects are to distort the machine terminal voltages, increase losses, and
produce torque pulsations which cause stepped motion at low speeds. The damper
windings are helpful in reducing the distortion of the machine terminal voltage.
They offer a low impedance path to the harmonic currents; consequently, the magnetizing current (fig. 1O.15b) and flux become nearly sinusoidal, making the terminal
voltage also nearly sinusoidal. The damper windings also reduce the commutating
inductance, and thus help in reducing the commutation overlap. Therefore, damper
windings are always employed in these drives.
At the time of commutation, the current in one phase of the armature jumps
from O to Id and in another phase it jumps from Id to O. This sudden change of phase
currents produces voltage spikes in the terminal voltage. Further, the sudden change
in the rnrnf's of two armature phases caused by the sudden change of current tends to
ehange the flux linkage. Since the flux linkage cannot change abruptly, a burst of
current is produced in the damper windings and field winding to counteract the
changes in the armature mmf's. The magnitude of the burst of current in the damper
windings is much larger than that in the field, because of the damper windings'
lower impedance.
It is useful to examine the exact nature of the armature mmf wave. The operation of the motor can be divided into 6 intervals of approximately 60 duration, separated by commutation intervals. When operating in any one interval, two machine
phases carry de link current and produce a stationary armature mmf wave. The
commutation shifts the de link current from one phase to another; consequently
the armature mmf wave jumps by an angle of 60 (electrical) around the air-gap, The
rnrnf wave again remains stationary for an interval of 60 until the next commutation
occurs and shifts it around the air-gap by another 60. Thus, the armature mmf wave
does not revolve continuously and srnoothly but in discrete steps of 60. As a result
of this, at very low frequencies, the rotor also moves in steps. At high frequencies,
the inertia causes the rotor to move continuously and smoothly. If now the rotor
speed is assumed constant, the armature mmf wave moves at a variable speed with
respect to the rotor, although its average speed remains the same as that of the rotor.
Because of the difference in the instantaneous speeds of the armature mmf and rotor,
currents are induced in the damper and field windings to maintain the flux linkages
constant. This tendency to maintain a constant flux linkage smoothens out the effects
of stepped motion of the armature mmf and produces a nearly sinusoidal air-gap flux
wave. Hence, the machine terminal voltages are nearly sinusoidal, except at the
instant of commutation where voltage spikes are produced by sudden changes
of current.
The load commutated inverter or forced commutated inverter is fed from the
closed-loop current source of figure 8.17b when the supply is ac and from the
closed-loop current source of figure 8.17c when the supply is dc. When braking is
required, a fully controlled rectifier is used in the scheme of figure 8.17b and a twoquadrant type D chopper is used in figure 8.17c.
In section 11.3, the load commutated inverter is discussed without a closedloop current source because it is not essential for its operation. In actual practice, it
is always employed with a closed-loop current source. The closed-Ioop current con-
466
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
trol causes the source side con verter or chopper to track the inverter terminal voltage
at a constant current. When the torque angle 8' (or angle 3 in a load commutated inverter using terminal voltage sensing) is changed to change the motor operation from
motoring to regenerative braking, the inverter changes its operation from inversion
to rectification and its terminal voltage reverses. Since the source side converter
tracks the inverter terminal voltage at a constant de link current, its operation automatically and smoothly shifts from rectification to inversion, causing the regenerated
energy to be fed to the ac mains. Similarly, the change of motor operation back to
motoring will cause the source side converter operation to change to rectification,
automatically and smoothly. Similar operation is obtained for the chopper case.
For both load commutated and forced commutated inverter drives one-phase
sequence gives operation in quadrants I and 11. When the motor is stationary, the
reversal of phase sequence, by interchanging the firing pulses between any two legs
of the inverter, will drive the motor in the reverse direction and will provide operation in quadrants III and IV. The composite braking described for the induction
motor for the scheme of figure 8 .17c can also be employed. However, unlike an
induction motor, dynamic braking can also be employed by deactivating the chopper, connecting a resistor across the de link and causing the inverter to operate as
a rectifier.
Only thyristor inverters can be built at high power levels. Therefore, the load
commutated thyristor inverters are widely used in high power applications because
of the absence of a commutation circuit. But then the inverter operates at a leading
power factor. The power factor can be improved by the constant margin angle control but at the expense of complex control. The forced commutated thyristor inverter
can provide unity power factor operation, but it is not employed because it is expensive and it is difficult to achieve reliable forced commutation at high power levels.
The inverters at low power levels are usually built using power transistors. Since the
comutation poses no problem, the drive can operate at unity or lagging power factor.
While the unity power factor operation is required to minimize the inverter kVA
rating and the drive losses, fue operation at a lagging power factor is required when
the motor is operated at 8' = 90 or 8 = 90 to obtain a high peak torque to get fast
transient response (section 11.5.5).
Current Controlled Pulse-Width
Modulated Inverter
A current controlled pulse-width modulated inverter has very high frequency harmonics which have little effect on machine operation. Consequently, the torque pulsations are absent at all speeds, including very low speeds. The current controlled
pulse-width modulated inverter is suitable for high-performance servo drives. A
voltage source transistor inverter (inverter of figure 8.1a with transistor switches) is
employed to obtain fast switching. The dc supply for the inverter is obtained using
the circuits of figure 8.3, which are also employed for a pulse-width modulated
voltage source inverter. Because of similar power circuits, the braking and multiquadrant operations described in section 8.1.5 for a pulse-width modulated voltage
source inverter fed induction motor are applicable to a current controlled pulse-width
modulated inverter fed synchronous motor with only one difference. While braking
Sec.11.7
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
467
in the former case is obtained by a change in frequency, in the latter case, it is obtained by a change in torque angle 8'.
11.6.2 Voltage Source Inverter Orives
The machine may be fed by a six-step inverter or a pulse-width modulated inverter.
The output voltage of a 6-step inverter is shown in figure 8. 1b and its harmonic content is given by equation (8.2). It was shown in section 10.9, that in the absence of
damper windings, the machine offers a high impedance to harmonics; consequently,
the harmonics are filtered out and the armature current has a sinusoidal waveform.
Since in a self-controlled synchronous motor drive, damping action is not required,
it is desirable not to use a damper winding in voltage source inverter drives. Since
the machine is able to filter out the harmonics, a pulse-width modulated inverter
may not be required.
The discussion ofsection 8.1.5 about the braking and multiquadrant operations
of voltage source inverter fed induction motor drives is also applicable to voltage
source inverter fed synchronous motor drives, except that the changeover from
motoring to braking, or vice versa, in a synchronous motor drive is obtained by a
change in torque angle 8 rather than in frequency.
11.6.3 Cycloconverter
Orives
A synchronous motor drive may employ a cycloconverter with line commutation or

a cycloconverter with load commutation. A line commutated cycloconverter may
operate with a current source characteristic or with a voltage source characteristic. In
either case, the armature current is sinusoidal at low frequencies; hence, low-speed
torque pulsations are absent. The changeover from motoring to braking, and vice
versa, is done by the control of torque angle. The reversal of phase sequence allows
operation in all four quadrants. To keep the harmonic content low in th machine
current and voltage and in the source current, the frequency of operation is limited to
40 percent of the source frequence. Hence, the drive is suitable for applications
requiring low speed range.
When load commutation is used, a cycloconverter can operate at a frequency
higher than the source frequency. Hence, a wide speed range is obtained. At low
speeds, a load cornmutated cycloconverter operates with line commutation, which
eliminates low-speed torque pulsations. When operating in load commutation, the
operation is somewhat similar to a load commutated current source inverter. Therefore, the description given in section 11.6.1 about harmonics and damper windings
is applicable.
11.7 SELF-CONTROLLEO SVNCHRONOUS MOTOR ORIVES

(BRUSHLESS ANO COMMUTATORLESS OC ANO AC
MOTOR ORIVES) ANO THEIR APPLlCATIONS
As explained earlier, self-controlled synchronous motor drives are popularly known
as commutatorless de and ac drives depending on whether the synchronous motor is
fed from a de supply through an inverter or from an ac supply though a cyclocon-
468
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
verter. When these drives employ a wound-field motor with a brushless excitation
system or a permanent magnet motor then they are called brushless dc and ac drives,
respectively.
Numerous control methods are possible. Here, a few methods will be described, basically to demonstrate the control principies described in section 11.5 for
the cases which have practical applications.
11.7.1
Load Commutated
Synchronous
Motor
Drives
In load commutation, the firing pulses may be derived either from the rotor position
encoder or machine terminal voltage sensor and any one of the control strategies
described in section 11.3.4 may be used. The machine may be fed from a load
commutated current source inverter or a load commutated cycloconverter. The drive
may accordingly be called a brushless (or commutatorless) de or ac drive with load
commutation.
Figure 11.25 shows a brushless de motor drive employing a permanent magnet
synchronous motor and a terminal voltage sensor. Figure 11.2Sa shows a drive with
a constant commutation lead angle control. The drive employs an inner current control loop with an outer speed loop like the de drive of figure S. lb. The inner current
control loop is nothing but a closed-loop current source. The terminal voltage sensor
generates reference pulses of the same frequency as the machine induced voltage.
The phase delay circuit shifts the reference pulses suitably to obtain control at a constant commutation lead angle f3c' Depending on the sign of the speed error ewm' f3c is
set to provide motoring or braking operation. Signals f and Wm are obtained from the
terminal voltage sensor. The speed and de link current controllers are generally PI
controllers.
.. An increase in speed command w~ produces a speed error ewm' The speed controller and current limiter set the de link current cornmand Id' at the mximum allowable value. The machine accelerates at the maximum available torque. When close
to the desired speed, the current Iimiter desaturates and the drive settles at the desired speed and at the de link current which balances the load torque. Similarly, a
reduction in speed cornmand produces a negative speed error. This sets f3c at 180
and the drive decelerates at the maximum torque. When the speed error changes
sign, the operation shifts to motoring and the drive settles at the desired speed.
If the portion enclosed by dotted lines in figure 11.2Sa is replaced by the portion shown in figure 11.2Sb, the drive operates according to the control law of
equation (11.36), which allows the machine to operate with improved performance.
Figure 11.26 shows the same drive when the terminal voltage sensor is
replaced by a rotor position encoder. Figure 11.26a is for operation at a constant
no-Ioad torque angle, 8:X. When the circuit enclosed by dotted lines in figure 11.26a
is replaced by the circuit shown in figure 11.26b, the drive operates according to the
control law of equation (11.37), yielding better performance.
In the systems of figures 11.25 and 11.26, base speed is reached when the converter output voltage saturates. The speed above base speed is obtained by increasing the phase delay of the phase delay circuit with speed. This will increase f3c or 8:X
and consequently increase the drive speed.
Seco 11.7
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
-- ----
supp 1y
469
Drives
_o,
----AC
Motor
1
Load
commutated
inverter
Controlled
rectifier
I
I
I
I
Current
controller
and firing
circuit
Terminal
voltage
sensor
I
1
I
I
I
I
r---
--------
--,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
I
-.J
Rotor
position
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
Current
limiter
Sign of
ewm
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Sign of I
Hotor
position
Speed
controller
}-.----'Ym;n
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ewm~----------------~
_________
(a)
Figure 11.25
and permanent
Load eommutated
magnet motor.
I
I
1
I
(b)
brushless de motor drive with terminal voltage sensor
Figure 11.27 shows a drive employing a wound-field synchronous motor, the

terminal voltage sensor, and the control law of equation (11.36). The field current is
controlled as a function of Id to maintain a constant flux. The relationship between
rt and Id can be worked out for the control law of equation (11.36) with the help of
the analysis of section 11.5.1. The field current command 11 acts as a reference signal for the closed-loop control of field current; the details of which are not given in
the figure. The drive is similar to the drive of figure 11.25 with the control law of
equation (11. 36). The only difference is the addition of field current control. The
arrangement for the braking operation is not shown. It can be easily incorporated by
causing /3 to become 180 whenever the speed error becomes negative. The speed
control above base speed can be obtained by adding a variable negative offset signal
to It. This will produce smaller and smaller values of field current as the offset
0
470
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Chap. 11
Motor Drives
r----------l
I
AC
Controlled
supply
rectilier
I
Load
commutated
inverter
LI~d~..,...,.,"""'
t-t----t'
Motor
I
I
I
I
I
I
Current
controller
and firing
circuit
Rotor
position
encoder
r------------,
I
I
I
IL
I
I
I
I
I
I
Current
limiter
I
I
Sign 01
Rotor
I
positiorr'
and I
e",m
Speed
controller
e",m
1-+--6;'"
t-----------.I
(a)
(b]
Figure 11.26 Load comrnutated brushless de motor drive using rotor position eneoder
and permanent magnet motor.
signal is increased. It will also be necessary to increase K.a of the controller with the
increase of the offset signal, or else cornrnutation failure will occur.
Figure 11.28 shows the constant margin angle control for a wound-field motor
drive employing a rotor position encoder. The scheme is based on the analysis of
section 11.5. l. The drive has an outer speed loop and an inner current control loop
as usual. In addition, it has an arrangement to produce constant flux operation and
constant margin angle control. From the value of de link current command Id', I, and
0.5 u are produced by blocks (1) and (2), respectively. The signal cp is generated
from 'rrnin and 0.5 u [equations (1l.16) and (1l.29)] in adder (3). In block (4) Ir is
calculated from the known values of Is' cp, and 1M [equation (1l.47)]. Note that
the magnetizing current I~ is held constant at its rated value 1M to keep the flux
constant. 1;* sets a reference for the closed-loop control of the field current IF.
Block (5) estimates 8'* from known values of cp and I* [equation (1l.49)]. The
Seco 11.7
Self-Controlled
AC
Controlled
supply
rectifier
Synchronous
Motor
Drives
471
Load
commutated
inverter
--
--,
I
I
Current
controller
and firing
circuit
I
l
I
l
I
I
1"
d
+
1"
d
Current
limiter
Speed
controller
1"
d
Field
control
Field
function
generator
AC supply
Figure 11.27
Load cornrnutated brushless or comrnutatorless
de motor drive ernploying a wound field motor, terminal voltage sensor and approximate constant margin
angle control.
phase delay circuit suitably shifts the pulses produced by the encoder to produce the
desired value of 8~ [= (8' + 0.5 u)].
When the terminal voltage sensor is used, constant margin angle control can be
obtained by a small modification to the scheme of figure 11.28. First, the portion
enclosed in dotted lines is replaced by the portion of figure 11.27 enclosed by dotted
lines. Second, block (5) of figure 11.28 is no longer needed. The command f3* for
the phase delay circuit is obtained simply by adding u and Ymin [equation (ll. 29) l.
In all the schemes discussed in this section, the circuit required for starting has
been omitted for simplicity.
Because of the advantages described in section 11.3.4, the load commutated
inverter drives are used in medium power, high-power and very high power (tens of
megawatts) drives, and high-speed drives, such as compressors, extruders, induced
and forced draft fans, blowers, conveyers, aircraft test facilities, steel rolling mills,
large ship propulsion, main line traction, flywheel energy storage, and so 011.1-4.7.8.9
Self-Controlled
472
Synchronous
Motor
-A
~
upply
Controlled
rectifier
Load
commutated
inverter
Id-
Id
ex
r- f
I
I
I
I
I
I
Current
controller
and firing
circuit
~~~
Firing
circuit
IL ___
+
1"d
Speed
Rotor
position.
encoder
I
I
I
I
I
Rotor
position
and f
I
I
I
"------------
__
I
...1
wm
lL 0
V6
controller
and current
limiter
~-t~- -- - - - ---+--,
Phase
delay
0.5U~
1"d
Chap. 11
Motor Drives
1r
0.5 u
Wm
"Ymin
sn " (~~
\6t
1M
1'"
f tI M
.. \6
1,
JI~+ l~
cos \6)
+ 2l,lM
sin \6
I
I
IF
r;"
Field
control
AC supply
Figure 11.28 Load cornrnutated brushless or commutatorless dc motor drive with constant margin
angle control and using a wound-field motor and rotor positon encoder.
They have also been used for the starting of large synchronous machine in gas turbine and pumped storage plants. High-power drives usually employ rectifiers with
higher pulse numbers (12 or more), to minimize torque pulsations. The con verter
voltage ratings are also high so that efficient high voltage motors can be employed.
11.7.2
Une Commutated
Cycloconverter
Synchronous Motor Drives
Fed
Line commutated cycloconverter fed wound-field synchronous motor drives (brushless or commutatorless ac drives) have been employed in low-speed gearless drives
for rolling milis, mine hoists, ball milis in cement plants, and so on. These drives
Seco 11.7
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor
473
Drives
are characterized by very low operating speeds, large power and fast transient response. For example, a ball mill in a cement plant may employ a motor with typical
ratings of 8750 hp, 1.0 PF, 14.5 rpm, 4.84 Hz, 1900 V, and 40 poles." They are
called gearless drives because, unlike conventional drives, the low-speed operation
of the load is obtained without a reduction gear, thus eliminating the associated cost,
space, and maintenance.
A cycloconverter is ideally suited for such applications because it gives nearly
sinusoidal output voltage and current waveforms when operating at low frequencies.
A cycloconverter drive employing a line commutated current source cycloconverter and a wound-field synchronous motor is shown in figure 11.29. The drive is
operated at a constant flux and unity power factor. The control strategy needed for
such an operation is described in section 11.5.1. If 1; and 8' are varied as a function
AC supply
Firing
circuit
1
I
Reference
wave
generator
I------~
+
Angle
function
generator
Rotar
position
and fO
1
I
Rotar
position
encoder
Sign
ewm
Field
control
Absolute
value and
limiting
ewm
Field
function
generator
AC supply
t---------'
Figure 11.29 Brushless or cornmutatorless

cycJoconverter-fed
wound-field machine.
ac motor drive using line-commutated
current source
Cvcloconverter
474
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
of Is, according to equations (11.39) and (11.40) (figure 11.17c), operation at unity
power factor and constant flux is obtained. The required relationships between I, and
1; [equation (11.39)] and I, and 10'1 [equation (11.40)] are implemented with the help
of field and angle function generators. To obtain a motoring operation, the angle o'
is assigned a positive sign when the speed error is positive. When the speed error is
negative, o' is assigned a negative sign to obtain a braking operation. By incorporating an arrangement for the change of phase sequence at zero speed, a four-quadrant
operation is obtained. The drive operates as follows.
Based on the speed error, the absolute value and limiting circuit sets a current
reference I. Depending on the value of I, command signals 1;* and 0'* are produced by the field and angle function generators, respectively. Ir* acts as a reference
signal for the closed-loop control of the field current. I, 0'*, and f* act as cornmand signals for the reference wave generator. The function of the reference wave
generator is to produce three sinusoidal current reference signals i, i, and it with
a frequency f*, phase 0'* with respect to Ir (or direct axis), and amplitude proportional to I. The cycloconverter has three dual converters, each one connected to
one phase of the machine, as shown in figure 8.29 for an induction motor. By ernploying closed-Ioop current control for each dual converter, the actual machine
phase current is made to track the reference signal produced by the reference wave
generator. The machine torque angle and field current are increased as a function of
I to maintain the machine operation at a constant flux and unity power factor.
When the speed command is increased, a speed error is produced, which in
turn increases r to the maximum value. The machine accelerates at the highest
available torque. When close to the desired speed, r and torque are reduced and the
machine settles at the desired speed and a value of I which balances the load
torque. Similarly, a reduction in speed command will decelerate the machine at the
highest available braking torque. When the speed error changes sign, the operation
will be transferred back to motoring and the drive will then settle at the desired
speed and with a value of r required to balance the load torque.
11.7.3 Voltage Source Inverter
Motor Drives
Fed Synchronous
Figure 11.30 shows a drive employing a synchronous motor fed by a voltage source
inverter. First, ignore the portion shown by dotted lines and assume a constant 1;.
The encoder senses the rotor position and frequency (or speed) signals. From the frequency signal, the flux control block produces the terminal voltage command V* for
the closed-loop control of the machine terminal voltage. This ensures machine operation at a constant flux. At base speed the output of the flux control block saturates;
then above base speed the machine operates at a reduced flux.
Since Ir and I.'r,are constant, the torque depends only on
according to equation (11. 73). When in steady state, the drive will be operating at a which balances
the load torque and the speed will be close to the speed command w~. An increase in
speed command will produce a positive speed error, which will increase 0*. Con sequently and T will increase and the machine will accelerate to the desired speed. A
o,
Seco 11.7
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor
Drives
475
AC line
Voltage
controller
and firing
circuit
Controlled
rectifier
1------.-1
v
Voltage
source
inverter
o
Flux
control
Motor
o'
Speed
controller
El
Phase
delay
Rotar
position
and f
I
I
I
I
Rotar
position
encoder
I
I
I
r-----'
I
I
I
I
o'
L--..j
r-----' I
I~I
I
I
I
IF
II
Field
control
I~
r~
~o:~fa~~
I1-_ -l
I
~
...J
L..-1--.J
controller
AC supply
Figure 11.30
inverter.
Brushless
or eommutatorless
de motor drive fed from a voltage souree
decrease in speed command will produce negative 0*, and the motor will decelerate
under braking. Just when the speed error becomes positive, the operation will shift
back to motoring and the machine will settle to the desired speed.
In a wound-field motor, the portion shown by the dotted lines can be added
to operate the motor at unity power factor. Following
the analysis presented
in section 11.5.4, the machine will operate at unity power factor below base speed if
is changed with o according to equation (11. 79). The power factor controller
changes the field current command It with 0* according to equation (11.79). When
the drive operates above base speed, for each 0*, It must be inversely changed
with speed.
Ir
476
Self-Controlled
Synchronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
11.7.4 Servo Drives
Low-power servo drives 25 kW) can be built using a 'permanent magnet motor
and a transistor inverter. These brushless drives are being considered to replace de
servo motor drives. The servo drives should have stepless torque control at all
speeds, including standstill, and high peak torque to achieve fast transient response.
The first requirernent poses no problem. The second requirement can be achieved by
carrying out the transient response at the maximum allowable current. Further, the
machine can also be operated at 8' = 90 to produce maximum torque per ampere
or at 8 = 90 to produce a maximum torque-to-flux ratio. This will require forced
commutation, which poses no problem in a transistor inverter. A transistor inverter
may be a 6-step current source inverter. Although the circuit will be simple, the
torque pulsations will be present, which will not be acceptable in high-performance
drives. The high-performance drives, therefore, use a current controlled pulse-width
modulated inverter (refer to section 11.6.1). When the inverter is fed from a dc
source, regenerative braking is obtained without any addition to the power circuit.
When fed from an ac source, dynamic braking is used by adding a braking resistor, a
diode, and a transistor in series across the dc link.
11.7.5 Starting
Large Synchronous
Machines
When operating with self-control, the starting current is low and starting torque is
high. Hence, the self-control principie is employed for starting large synchronous
machines in gas turbine and pumped storage power plants. The load commutated
current source inverter is employed. The machine is started using the pul sed mode of
operation of the inverter. Above around 10 percent of base speed, when the induced
voltages are adequate to provide commutation, the pulsed mode is .replaced by load
commutation. The motor accelerates and reaches synchronous speed. When the
terminal voltage , phase, and frequency match, the machine is switched into the
utility line and the inverter is disconnected. This starting method, though expensive,
becomes economically acceptable when a number of machines timeshare a cornmon starter.
REFERENCES
l. R. A. Morgan, "A status report-ac
drive technology," IEEE lAS Annual Meeting,
1981, pp. 543-547.
2. R. Chauprade and A. Abbodanti, "Variable speed drives: modern concepts and
approaches," IEEE lAS Annual Meeting, 1982, pp. 20-30.
3. B. K. Bose, "Adjustable speed ac drives-a
technological status review,' Proc. IEEE,
vol. 70, no. 2, Feb. 1982, pp. 116-196.
4. B. Mueller, T. Spinanger, and D. Wallstein, "Static variable frequency starting and drive
system for large synchronous rnotors," IEEE lAS Annua1 Meeting, 1979, pp. 429-438.
5. J. A. Allan, W. A. Wyeth, G. W. Herzog, and J. A. 1. Young, "Electrical aspects of the
8750 hp gearless ball-rnill drive at St. Lawrence cement company," IEEE Trans. on Ind.
Appl., vol. IA-11, Nov./Dec. 1975, pp. 681-687.
Chap. 11
References
477
6. H. Stemmer, "Drive system ano electronic control equipruent of the gearless tube mili,"
Brown Boveri Review, March 1970, pp. 120-128.
7. Y. Shinryo, I. Hosono, and K. Syoji, "Cornrnutatorless de drive for steel rolling rnill,"
IEEE lAS Annual Meeting 1977, pp. 263-271.
8. A. Habock and D. Kollensperger, "Application and further development of converter-fed
synchronous motor with self control," Siemens Review, 1971, pp. 393-395.
9. H. W. Weiss, "Power transmission to synchronous machines for adjustable-speed purnp
and compressor drives," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-19, no. 6, Nov./Dec. 1983,
pp. 996-1002.
10. H. Le-Huy, R. Perret, and D. Roye, "Microprocessor control of a current-fed synchronous motor drive," rEEE lAS Annual Meeting 1979, pp. 873-880.
11. E. W. Kimbark, Power System Stability, vol. I1I, Synchronous Machines John Wiley,
1956.
12. 1. P. Chassande and M. Poloujadolf, HA complete analytical theory of self-controlled
inverter fed synchronous motor," rEEE Trans. on PAS, vol. PAS-lOO, no. 6. June 1981,
pp. 2854-2861.
13. A. C. Williamson, N. A. H. Issa, and A. R. A. M. Makky, "Variable-speed inverter-fed
synchronous motor employing natural commutation," Proc. lEE, vol. 125, no. 2, 1978,
pp. 113-120.
14. H. Le-Huy, A. Jakubowicz, and R. Perret, "A self-controlled synchronous motor drive
using terminal voltage system," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-18. no. 1,
Jan./Feb. 1982, pp. 46-53.
15. . Sato and V. V. Semenov, "Adjustable speed drive with a brushless de motor," IEEE
Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IGA-7, no. 4, July/Aug. 1971, pp. 539-543.
16. 1. Bencze and G. Weiner, "Machine commutated inverter drive as an economical
solution of ac drives," IPEC, 1982, pp. 385-388.
17. J. Davoine, R. Perret, and H. Le-Huy, "Operation of a self-controlled synchronous
motor without a shaft position sensor," IEEE lAS Annual Meeting 1981. pp. 696-701.
,.J..8.T. Maeno and M. Kobata, "AC commutatorless and brushless motor," IEEE Trans. on
PAS, vol. PAS-91, July/Aug. 1972, pp. 1476-1484.
19. L. J. Jacovides, M. F. Matouka, and D. W. Shimer, "A cycloconverter synchr.onous
motor drive for traction applications,"
IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-17.
July/Aug. 1981, pp. 407-418.
20. J. Rosa, "Utilization and rating of machine commutated inverter synchronous motor
drives," rEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-15, MarchlApril 1979, pp. 155-164.
2!. S.
ishikata, S. Muto, and T. Kataoka, "Dyn ami c performance
analysis of
self-controlled synchronous motor speed control systems," IEEE lAS Annual Meeting,
1981, pp. 671-677.
22. S. Nishikata and T. Kataoka, "Dynamic control of a self-controlled syncnronous motor
drive system," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-20. no. 3. MaylJune 1982.
pp. 598-604.
23. 1. Leimgruder, "Stationary and dynamic behavior of a speed controlled synchronous
motor with cos cp or cornmutation limit line control," Conf. Rec. IFAC Symp. on Control
in Power Elect. and Electrical Drives, 1977, pp. 463-473.
24. G. R. Slemon and A. V. Gumaste, "Steady state analysis of permanent magnet
synchronous motor drive with current source inverter," rEEE lAS Annual Meeting, 1981,
pp. 683-690.
25. B. K. Bose and T. A. Lipo, "Control and simulation of a current-fed linear inductor
motor," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-15, ov./Dec. 1979, pp. 591-600.
478
Self-Controlled
Synehronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
26. A. V. Gumaste and G. R. Slemon, "Steady-state analysis of a permanent magnet

synchronous motor drive with voltage source inverter," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl.,
vol. lA-l7, no. 2, MarchlApril 1981, pp. 143-151.
27. W. R. Pearson and P. C. Sen, "Brushless dc motor propulsion using synchronous rnotors
for transit cars ," IEEE Trans. Ind. Electronics,
vol. IE-31, no. 4, Nov. 1984,
pp. 346-351.
28. J. P. Chassande, A. A. Abdel-Razek, M. Poloujadoff, and A. Laumond, "Various
practical results coneerning the operation of inverter fed self-controlled synchronous
rnachines,' IEEE Trans. on PAS, vol. PAS-IOI, no. 12, 1982, pp. 4649-4655.
29. A. B. Plunket and F. G. Turnbull, "Load commutated inverterlsynchronous motor drive
without a shaft-position encoder,' IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-15, no. 1,
Jan.lFeb. 1979, pp. 63-71.
30. M. F. Brosnan and B. Brown, "Closed-Ioop speed control using an ac synchronous
motor," IPEC, 1982, pp. 373-376.
31. M. Lajoie-Mazene,
C. Villaneuva, and J. Hector, "Study and implementation of
hysteresis controlled inverter on a permanent magnet synchronous machine ,' IEEE lAS
Annual Meeting 1984, pp. 426-431.
32. B. Murty, "Fast response reversible brushless de drive with regenerative braking,' IEEE
lAS Annual Meeting, 1984, pp. 445-450.
33. D. Riehlein, "Gearless drive for a cement mili," Sieman's Review, vol. 38, no. 9, 1971,
pp. 393-395.
PROBLEMS
11.1
A brushless de motor drive with a load commutated current source inverter has a
synchronous motor with the following name plate data: 10 MW, 3-phase, II kV,
60 Hz, 6 pole, Y-connected, unity power factor. The parameters are X, = 12 n, subtransient reactance = 3 n, R, = negligible. The field is controlled to maintain a constant flux below base speed and the rated terminal voltage above base speed. The drive
operates at a constant commutation lead angle of 60.
1. Calculate the margin angle, torque, and terminal voltage when the motor operates
at the rated armature current (rms value) and 1200 rpm.
2. lf the current is restricted to rated (rms) value and a minimum margin angle of !00
must be maintained for reliable commutation, calculate the highest speed at which
the drive can operate.
3. Calculate
for 1.
A 1100 kW, 3-phase, 6600 V, 60 Hz, 6 pole, Y-connected, unity power factor synchronous motor has the following parameters: X, = 36 n, R, = 1.2 n, and subtransient
reactance of !O n.
This motor is ernployed in a load commutated current source inverter drive. The field
current is controlled to keep a constant flux below base speed. The drive operation
above base speed is not required. The rms value of the armature current is not allowed
to exceed 1.5 times the rated current. Constant comrnutation lead angle control is
employed.
1. Calculate f3c so that a minimurn margin angle of !00 is available for all operating
points.
s;
11.2
Chap. 11
Problems
479
2. With the value of /3c fixed as in 1, calculate the power factor, margin angle, torque,
and de link voltage for half the rated speed and half the rated current.
Neglect friction, windage, and core loss.
11.3 The drive of problem 11.2 is now control!ed by constant no-load torque angle control.
1. Calculate S;,., so that a minimum margin angle of 10 is available for al! operating
points.
2. With S;,., fixed in 1, calculate the power factor, torque, de link voltage, and margin
angle for half the rated speed and half the rated current.
11.4 A brushless de motor drive is fed by a load commutated current source inverter. The
wound-field synchronous motor used in the drive has the following details: 5 MW,
3-phase, 6600 V, 6 pole, 60 Hz, Y-connected, 0.9 (lagging) power factor, X, = 10.8 n,
subtransient reactance = 3 n, and negligible Rs'
The field is controlled to maintain a constant flux up to base speed and the rated
terminal voltage above base speed. The armature current is not allowed to exceed its
rated (rms) value. The desired speed range is from 20 percent of base speed to 50
percent above base speed.
1. Calculate /3c so that a mnimum margin angle of 15 is available for al! operating
points.
2. With the value of /3c fixed as in 1, calculate the power factor and torque at the rated
current (rms) and the rated speed.
3. Repeat 2 for 20 percent of the rated current and the rated speed.
11.5 Repeat problem 11.4 when constant no-load torque angle control is employed.
11.6 The wound-field synchronous motor of a load commutated current source inverter fed
brushless de drive has the following details: 15 MW, 3-phase, 11 kV, 4 pole, 60 Hz,
Y-connected, 0.85 (lagging) power factor, X, = 4 n, subtransient reactance = 1.2 n,
and negligible R;
The field is controlled to maintain constant flux. The maximum armature current (rms)
allowed is twice its rated value.
1. lf the machine is controlled by constant cornmutation lead angle control, calculate
/3c to get a margin angle of 10 at the maximum allowable current. Calculate and
plot 1>, /3, S', and 1; versus r, curves.
2. Repeat 1 when the drive is control!ed by constant no-load torque angle control and
constant margin angle control.
11.7 A load commutated brushless ac motor drive employs the synchronous motor of
problem 11.1. The drive is operated below base speed and at a constant flux. Calculate
and plot, S' versus L, and 1; versus I, curves for /3c = 60.
11.8 Calculate and plot speed-torque curves for constant commutation lead angle control,
constant no-load torque angle control, and constant margin angle control of the drive
of problem 11.2 for a de link voltage of 6000 Volts. At 1.5 times the rated current, all
three control schemes are designed to give a minimum margin angle of 10.
11.9 A 10 kW, 3-phase, 440 V, 60 Hz , 4 pole, Y-connected permanent magnet motor has
the following parameters: X, = 16 n, Rated power factor = 0.85 (lagging), and negligible Rs' Neglect core loss, friction, and windage. The motor is fed from a current
source inverter to form a brushless de motor drive. Calculate and plot S' as a function
of I, to get the unity power factor operation for al! operating points below base speed.
Also obtain the T versus I, plot and the motor terminal voltage versus I, plot for the
rated speed.
480
Self-Controlled
Synehronous
Motor Drives
Chap. 11
11.10 A 25 kW, 3-phase, 440 V, 50Hz, 4 pole, Y-connected permanent magnet synchronous
motor has the following parameters: X, = 15 n, negligible R" and the rated power
factor = 1.0.
.
The machine is controlled from a current source inverter at a torque angle [)' such that
at the rated current 1~ = 1;.
1. Ca\culate the torque at half the rated armature current.
2. What will be the motor terminal voltage at half the rated armature current and
1000 rpm?
Neglect harmonics, core loss, friction, and windage.
11.11 The drive of problem 11.10 operates above base speed by keeping the armature current
constant at the rated value and increasing b', Ca\culate the torque, and power factor
for a motor speed of 2000 rpm and rated terminal voltage.
11.12 A brushless de motor drive employs a load commutated current source inverter-fed
wound-field synchronous motor. The drive is controlled by constant eornmutation lead
angle control. Derive expressions expressing 1; as a function of 1, for the constant flux
operation of the machine. Draw a block diagram of such a closed-Ioop speed control
system.
11.13 Repeat problem 11.12 for a drive controlled by the approximate constant margin angle
control given by equation (11.36).
11.14 A brushless de motor drive employs a permanent magnet motor fed from a current
source inverter. Draw the block diagram of a closed-Ioop speed control system which
gives motor operation at unity power factor below base speed.
De
Motors
DC drives are widely used in applications requiring adjustable speed, good

speed regulation and frequent starting, braking, and reversing. Some important applications are rolling mills, paper mills, mine winders, machine tools, and traction.
The present chapter describes the steady-state speed torque relations, methods
of speed control, starting and braking, and the dynamics of de motors.
Commonly used de motors are shown in figure 2.1. In the case of a separately
excited motor, the field and armature voltages can be controlled independent of each
other. In a shunt motor, the field and armature are connected to a common source.
Therefore, an independent control of the field current or armature voltage can be done
only by inserting a resistance in the appropriate circuit; however, this is an inefficient method of control. In the case of a series motor, the field current is the same as
the armature current, and, therefore, field flux is a function of armature current. In a
cumulative compound motor, the magnetomotive force of a series field is a function
of the armature current and is in the same direction as the mrnf of the shunt field.
A,
F,
A,
l.
l.
F,
VI
A2
F2
(a) Separately exeited
Figure 2.1
+
V
A2
(b) Shunt
Commonly used de motors (continued on next page).
35
DC Motors
36
A,
Chap. 2
F,
s,
+
+
V
A2
F2
(e) Series
(d) Cumulative eompound
Figure 2.1
(continued).
2.1 STEADY-STATE SPEED TORQUE RELATIONS

The steady-state equivalent circuit of the armature of a de machine is shown in
figure 2.2. The resistor R, is the resistance of the armature circuit. For separately excited and shunt motors, it is equal to the resistance of the armature winding; and for
series and compound motors it is the sum of armature and series field winding resistances. Basic equations of a de motor are
Kewm
(2.1)
V = E + Rala
(2.2)
= Kela
(2.3)
T
where
 = flux per pole, Webers

la = armature current, A
V = armature voltage, V
.
R. = resistance of the armature circuit,
Wm = speed of armature, rad/sec,
T = torque developed by the motor, N-m
K, = constant
From equations (2.1) to (2.3)

V
s,
K - K la
e
= Ke -
(2.4)
n,
(Ke<I2 T
(2.5)
Equations (2.1) to (2.5) are applicable to all three types of de motors: namely, separately (or shunt) excited, series, and compound motors.
Sec.2.1
Steady-State
Speed Torque Relations
37
Figure 2.2 Steady-state equivalent circuit

of the arrnature circuit of a de motor.
In the case of separately excited motors, if the field voltage is maintained consant, one can assume the flux is practically constant as the torque changes. Let
Ke<l>
Kconstant)
(2.6)
Then from equations (2.1), (2.3), and (2.4) to (2.6)

T= KIa
(2.7)
E=Kwm
(2.8)
Ra
=K-K'Ia
Wm
(2.9)
(2.10)
Thus, the speed torque characteristic of a separately excited motor is a straight
line, as shown in figure 2.3. The no-Ioad speed Wmo is determined by the values of
the armature voltage and the field excitation. Speed decreases as torqu increases
and speed regulation depends on the armature circuit resistance (equation (2.10)). In
"'"practice, due to armature reaction, the flux decreases as torque increases, even when
the field current is kept constant. So the decrease in speed will be less than that
given by equation (2.10). At high torque values, the field may be weakened to such
an extent that the slope of the characteristic may become positive, leading to an unstable operation. In this situation, a relatively weak additional series field is employed to reduce the demagnetizing effect of the armature reaction. The usual drop
.-.-.
\
\
-'- '-. 1'......

\
\
Separately
F:-::-::-::-=-=-=.",..,~~~~--_
I ,
;j
ci
Vl
Figure 2.3
dc motors.
Speed-torque characteristics of
<.
0.5
0.5
1.0
Torque, p.u.
excited or
shunt
,,
""
'Compound
" Series
38
DC Motors
Chap. 2
in speed from no load to fullload, in the case of a medium size motor, is of the order
of five percent. Separately excited motors are employed in applications requiring
good speed regulation and adjustable speed.
In the case of series motors, the flux is a function of armature current. In the
unsaturated region of the magnetization characteristic, <l>can be assumed to be proportional to la. Thus,
<l>= Kfla
Substituting
in equations
(2.11)
(2.1), (2.4), and (2.5) gives

(2.12)
T = KeKrli
w
a,
KeKrla
KeKr
=-----VIRa
=-r==
YKeKr
\.T - KeKr
(2.13)
(2.14)
where the armature circuit resistance R, is now the sum of the armature and field
winding resistances.
A speed-torque characteristic of a dc series motor is shown in figure 2.3. In the
case of a series motor, any increase in torque is accompanied by an increase in the
armature current and, therefore, an increase in flux. Because the flux increases with
torque, the speed must drop to maintain a balance between the induced voltage and
the supply voltage. The characteristic
is, therefore, highly drooping. A motor of
standard design works at the knee point of the magnetization
characteristic
at the
rated torque. At heavy torque overloads,
the magnetic circuit saturates and the
speed-torque curve approaches a straight line.
Series motors are suitable for applications requiring high starting torque and
heavy torque overloads. With an increase in torque, the flux al so increases; therefore, for the same increase in torque, the increase in motor current is less compared
to that in a separately excited motor. Thus, during heavy torque overloads,
the
power overload on the source and the thermal overloading of the motor are kept
limited to reasonable values.
According to equation (2.14), speed vares inversely as the square root of the
torque. Hence, speed increases as torque is reduced. Generally, the mechanical
strength of a dc motor permits it to operate at about twice the rated speed. Thus the
series motor should not be used in those drives where there is a possibility of the
load torque being dropped to the extent that the speed may exceed twice the rated
value. The series motor finds applications in those drives where frequent starting and
frequent torque overloads occur and at the same time the torque does not drop below
a safe minimum value.
Performance equations for a cumulative compound motor can be -derived from
equations (2.1) to (2.3). The speed-torque characteristic is drawn in figure 2.3. The
no-load speed depends on thc s.rength of the shunt field, and the drop-in speed depends on the strength of the series field. Suitable values of no-load speed and dropin speed can be realized by properly choosing the relative strength of the two fields.
Cumulative compound motors are used in those applications where a drooping char-
Sec.2.2
39
acteristic similar to that of a series motor is required and at the same time the noload speed must be limited to a safe value; typical examples are lifts, winches, and
so on. It is also used in intermittent load applications, where the load vares from almost no load to very heavy loads. In these applications, a fly-wheel is mounted on
the motor shaft. During a heavy load period, the drooping characteristic allows the
speed to drop, and, therefore, a large proportion of the total torque demanded by the
load is supplied from the energy stored in the fly-wheel. The energy lost by the flywheel is replenished by the motor during a light load periodo This permits the use of
a smaller size motor and equalizes the load on the supply system. A pressing machine is a typical example of this type of application.
The characteristics shown in figure 2.3 are called the natural speed-torque
characteristics because they are obtained when a motor is operated at the rated
voltage and flux, and without any external resistance in series with the armature
or field.
2.2 METHODS OF SPEED CONTROL

The speed-torque relation of de motors, equation (2.5), shows that the speed can be
controlled by any of the following three methods:
1. Armature voltage control.
2. Field flux control.
3. Armature resistance control.
2.2.1 Armature
Voltage
Control
If the armature voltage of a separate or series excited dc motor running at a steadystate speed is reduced (by a small amount), then, according to figure 2.2, the armature current, and, therefore, the motor torque will decrease. As the motor torque will
be less than the load torque, the motor will decelerate, causing speed and back emf
to decrease. It, will finally settle at a lower speed at which its torque equals the load
torque. If the armature voltage of a separately excited motor is reduced by a large
amount, it may become less than the back emf. The armature current will then re- .
verse and the motor will work as a generator producing negative torque. This operation will continue until the motor speed has fallen to a value at which the motor back
emf becomes equal to the applied voltage. After that, deceleration will occur in the
manner just explained. In the case of a series motor, even when the armature voltage
is changed by a larger step, it does not work as a generator, and the deceleration
occurs because the motor torque is lower than the load torque.
On the other hand, if the armature voltage of a dc motor running at a steadystate speed is increased, according to equations (2.2) and (2.3), the armature CUfrent, and, therefore, the motor torque will increase and the motor will accelerate,
causing the motor speed and back ernf to increase. It will finally settle at a higher
speeq at which its torque equals the load torque.
While increasing or decreasing the speed, the armature voltage should be
changed only in small steps. A large change in the armature voltage causes a large
40
DC Motors
Chap. 2
amount of current to flow through the armature, which may damage the commutator
or reduce its life.
Steady-state speed-torque characteristics of dc separately and series excited
motors for different armature voltages are shown by solid lines in figures 2.4a and b,
respectively. By reducing the armature voltage, a motor can be operated for any
speed-torque combination Iying between the natural speed-torque curve and the
torque axis. In the case of a separately excited motor, the no-load speed also changes
and the speed-torque characteristics for different voltages are parallel straight lines.
As the armature voltage cannot be increased beyond the rated value, this method of
speed control is used only to get the motor operation below its natural speed-torque
characteristics.
The important feature of this method of speed control is that the nature and the
slope of the speed-torque characteristics do not change with the change in speed. It
provides a constant torque drive because the maximum permissible armature current,
and, therefore, the maximum torque capability, of the motor remains constant at all
the speeds.
The variable de voltage can be obtained by using either of the following semiconductor converters:
1. Controlled rectifier (or ac to de converter).
2. Chopper (de to de converter).
Methods 1 and 2 are described in chapters 3 and 4, respectively.
."..
--
Armature
---
Flux control
voltage control
at full field
at rated armature
voltage
\
\
Decreasing <1>
at constant
Decreasing <1>
at constant V
....
-,
--~~
--, .....
------~
~-""::
\
\
\
Natural
Decreasing V
at constant <1>
(a) Separately
Figure 2.4
excited
Decreasing V
at full field
(b) Series
Speed-torque curves of separately excited and series motors.
Sec.2.2
41
2.2.2 Field Control

If the field of a separately or series excited motor running at a speed is weakened, its
induced emf decreases. Because of low armature resistance, the current increases by
an amount much larger than the decrease in the field flux. As a result, in spite of the
weakened field, the torgue is increased by a large amount, considerably exceeding
the load torgue. The surplus torgue thus available causes the motor to accelerate
and the back ernf to rise. The motor will finally settle down to a new speed, higher
than the previous one, at which the motor torque with the weakened field becomes
egual to the load torque. Any attempt to weaken the field by a large amount will
cause a dangerous inrush of current. Care should therefore be taken to weaken the
field only slowly and gradually.
On the other hand, when the field of a separately excited motor is increased,
the induced ernf increases and often exceeds the supply voltage; thus, not only the
armature current reduces but it often reverses. When this happens, the motor works
as a generator and feeds energy to the supply system. This energy is obtained at the
expense of the kinetic energy of the machine and the load. A rapid reduction of
speed takes place and finally the motor settles at a new speed, lower than the previous one, at which the motor torque becomes egual to the load torgue. In the case of
a series motor, the increase in field reduces the armature current by a large amount
(but does not reverse it). Because the motor torgue is lower than the load torgue, the
motor decelerates to a lower speed at which the motor torgue eguals the load torgue.
Steady-state speed-torque characteristics of separate and series excited motors
at reduced flux are shown by dotted lines in figures 2.4a and 2.4b, respectively. At a
reduced flux, for a given increase in torque, the armature current, and therefore, the
armaturedrop,
increases by a larger amount. Consequently, the back emf, and,
therefore, the speed, drops by a larger amount. Thus, the lesser the flux, the greater
is the slope of the speed-torquecurves. At low values of flux, a decrease in flux may
even lead to a decrease in speed if the torque demand is not low (fig. 2.4a).
In the case of a shunt motor, the lowest speed obtainable is that corresponding
to full field with no external resistance in the field circuit. In the case of a separately
excited motor, the lowest speed is limited by the heating of the field coils and the
saturation of the magnetic circuito Since at full excitation, modern machines work
with an appreciable amount of saturation of the magnetic circuit, the speed can be
decreased only by a small amount below the natural speed torque characteristic. The
highest speed is limited by the instability of the motor due to the demagnetizing effect of armature reaction under the weak field and the mechanical strength of the
motor. With a normally designed de motor, a speed range of 1.5 to 2 times the rated
speed can be obtained; and with specially designed motors, the range can be up to
6 times the rated speed. To prevent instability, separately excited motors are fitted
with a relatively weak series field to assist the main field. Under the momentary
heavy loads, a heavy current will strengthen the main field and tend to reduce
the speed.
Field control of shunt and separately excited motors provides a constant power
control because the maximum power capability of the motor remains nearly constant
at all speeds. It is assumed that the rnaxirnum allowable armature current Iamax does
not change as the field weakens. At the armature current Iamax, the counter ernf E re-
DC Motors
42
Chap. 2
mains constant for all speeds because the terminal voltage is held constant at Y.
Consequently,
the allowable motor developed power E Iamax remains substantially
constant over the speed range and the maximum allowable torque varies inversely
with the speed.
The assumption that the maximum allowable armature current Iamaxdoes not
change with a reduction in flux is only approximate. The armature reaction becomes
more effective as the main flux is reduced; therefore, the maximum current that the
motor can carry without sparking at the commutator is decreased, reducing the maximum allowable developed power at high speeds.
In a separately excited motor, control of flux is obtained by the variation of the
voltage across the field using a controlled rectifier or a chopper, depending on
whether the main supply is ac or de. Small size machines are connected as shunt motors, and the variation of flux is obtained by inserting a variable resistance in the
field circuit. In a series motor, the control of flux is achieved by connecting a diverter resistance across the field winding. Some series motors have taps on the field
winding. In these motors the flux can be controlled by changing the number of turns
in the field winding.
2.2.3 Combined Armature
Voltage
and Field Flux
Control
In drives requiring a wide range of speed control, armature voltage control is combined with field control. Arrnature voltage control has the advantage of retaining the
maximum torque capability of the motor at all speeds. It is therefore employed
wherever it can be, and field control is used only for getting speeds which cannot be
obtained by armature control. In such drives, base speed is defined as the normal
(rated) armature voltage full field speed. This is the speed at which the motor runs
on the natural speed-torque characteristic.
Speeds from standstill to base speed are
obtained by the armature voltage control, and the field is maintained constant at the
rated value. Speeds above the rated value cannot be obtained by armature control because the motor armature voltage must not be increased beyond the rated value.
Therefore, speeds above base speed are obtained by field control, provided the load
torque demand at these speeds can be met even with the reduced torque capability of
the motor. Typical examples of such drives are rolling milis, coiler drives, traction,
and so on. The variation of torque (T) and power (P m) ratings of the drive with this
dual control for speeds below and above basespeed are shown in figure 2.5. The armature current rating is assumed to be constant for all speeds, as shown in the figure.
An exception to the practice of not using field control below base speed is
made in multi-rnotor drives with a cornmon armature supply. Paper mills and continuous rolling mills are examples of this type of a multi-rnotor drive. The combined
speed variation of all the motors is done by armature voltage control. Finer control
of relative speeds of various motors is achieved by field control.
Example 2.1
A 230 Y, 500 rpm, 100 A separately excited dc motor has an armature resistance of
0.1 O. The motor is driving, under rated conditions, a load whose torque is constant
and independent of speed. The speeds below the rated speed are obtained with armature
Sec.2.2
Method of Speed Control
43
Maximumspeed
I
I
I
Figure 2.5 Torque and power lintations in

combined armature voltage and field control.
-----
Armature
voltagecontrol-
I
I
I
I
I
+: ..--Field
..
I
I
I
contrOI--j
I
I
I
I
voltage control (with full field) and the speeds above the rated speed are obtained
field control (with rated annature voltage).
1. Calculate
the motor terminal
by
voltage when the speed is 400 rpm.
2. By what amount should flux be reduced to get a motor speed of 800 rpm?
Neglect
the motor's
Solution
rotational
losses.
Back ernf at 500 rpm.
= V - Ralal = 230 speed = Wml = (500/60)
E,
10
= 220 V
21T = 52.4
Rated
X
Let the flux at rated conditions = <1>1
Then Ke<1>1x 52.4 = El = 220
or
K <1>= 220 = 4.2
e
(E2.l)
52.4
rad/sec.
1. Back emf at 400 rpm,
E2
= El
400
500
= 220 x (400) = 176 V

500
Since the load torque is constant,

Now the motor terminal voltage
= E,
la
= 100 A
+ laRa
+ 10 = 186 V
176
2. Let the new flux <1>2= k<1>1

Since E = Ke<1>wm
E = K <1>x 800 X
3
e 2
60
= K.k<1>1x 83.8
21T
(E2.2)
44
Chap.
DC Motors
Substituting
EJ
Since T
frorn equation
(E2.1) gives
= k x 4.2 x 83.8 =
= K.<1>Ia, we have
or
Substituting
230
or
230
frorn equations
= 351.9k + ~
(E2.3)
351.9k
1 - <1>1
1 _ lal _ 100
a2- <1>2al -
v = EJ + Ia2Ra
(E2.4)
k -k
= EJ + 0.1Ia2
(E2.5)
(E2.3) and (E2.4) into equation

or
351.9k2 - 230k
10 = O
(E2.5) gives
or
= 0.61
or
0.05
The feasib1e value of k = 0.61.

Thus the flux rnust be reduced to 0.61 of its rated value.
2.2.4 Armature Resistance Control

Speed torque characteristics of separately excited (or shunt) and series motors for
various values of externa! resistance Re in series with the armature are shown in figures 2.6a and 2.6b, respectively.
The main drawback of this method of speed control is its poor efficiency. For
example, for a constant torque load, the combined power input to the motor (both
for separately excited and series motors) and the series resistance remains constant;
while the power supplied to the load decreases in praportion to the speed. Thus the
percentage efficiency of the motor is the same as the speed of the motor expressed as
a percentage of the rated speed; at 10 percent of the rated speed, motor efficiency is
just 10 percent.
Figure 2.6a shows that the armature resistance control changes the nature of
the speed-torque characteristics of a separately excited (or shunt) motor frorn that
of nearly a constant speed at all torques to variable speed characteristics. Because of
this and because of the poor efficiency, this method is seldom used with separately
excited motors, except for getting speeds which are required for very short times.
Inereasing R. '
Increasing R.
Natural
T
(a) Separately
Figure 2.6
excited
T
(b) Series
Speed-torque curves of de motors with resistance control.
Sec.2.4
Braking
45
For intennittent drives where low speed running is required only for a short
time, the decrease in the overall efficiency will not be mucho Because of the simplicity and low initial cost, this method is found quite convenient and economical for intermittent duty drives employing series motors.
2.3 STARTING
The maximum current that a de motor can safely carry during transients of short duration is limited by the maximum annature current that can be commutated without
sparking. Theoretically, the commutating pole winding is expected to cancel out all
the voltages opposing the commutation at all values of speed and current. In practice
it is found that the cancellation becomes inadequate with the increase in the value of
the current, and hence sparking occurs above a certain current Iimit. In the case of
an uncompensated machine, current is kept within twice the rated value; and in the
case of specially designed and compensated machines, it is allowed up to 3.5 times
the rated value.
If started with full voltage across its tenninals, a medium size motor will have
to carry current of the order of 20 times the rated current. Such a high current will
damage the motor due to heavy sparking at the commutator and heating of the winding. Therefore, it becomes necessary to limit the current to a safe value during starting. This is achieved by reducing the voltage across the motor terrninals and
progressively increasing it as the motor speed increases. The motor voltage is reduced either by decreasing the source voltage or by dropping a part of the source
voltage across a series connected resistance.
In applications requiring adjustable speed, a controller is provided for the control of speed. The same controller can also be employed for limiting the current during starting. Where control of speed is not required, a starter is used to limit the
current. In applications not requiring frequent starting, the most widely used method
is to insert an extra sectionalized resistance in the annature circuit and to cut it gradually such that the motor current does not exceed a safe value and at the same time
the torque developed by the motor remains higher than the load torque.
2.4 BRAKING
The reasons for using electric braking are given in section 1.2.5.
During braking, the motor essentially works as a generator. With the direction of
current shown in the steady-state equivalent circuit of figure 2.2, the machine develops torque in the positive direction and converts electrical energy into mechanical
energy, which is absorbed by the loado If by some means the motor annature current
is reversed while maintaining the flux in the same direction, the motor torque wiU
reverse and the machine will work as a generator, absorbing mechanical energy from
the load and converting it into electrical energy. The mechanical energy is obtained
from the load either from the energy stored in the inertia of the motor load system or
from the active load torque on the motor shaft. The braking operation is classified in
Sec.2.4
Braking
45
For intermittent drives where low speed running is required only for a short
time., the decrease in the overall efficiency will not be mucho Because of the simplicity and low initial cost, this method is found quite convenient and economical for intermittent duty drives employing series motors.
2.3 STARTING
The maximum current that a de motor can safely carry during transients of short duration is limited by the maximum armature current that can be commutated without
sparking. Theoretically, the commutating pole winding is expected to cancel out all
the voltages opposing the commutation at all values of speed and current. In practice
it is found that the cancellation becomes inadequate with the increase in the value of
the current, and hence sparking occurs above a certain current limito In the case of
an uncompensated machine, current is kept within twice the rated value; and in the
case of specially designed and compensated machines, it is allowed up to 3.5 times
the rated value.
If started with full voltage across its terminals, a medium size motor will have
to carry current of the order of 20 times the rated current. Such a high current will
damage the motor due to heavy sparking at the commutator and heating of the winding. Therefore, it becomes necessary to limit the current to a safe value during starting. This is achieved by reducing the voltage across the motor terminal s and
progressively increasing it as the motor speed increases. The motor voltage is reduced either by decreasing the source voltage or by dropping a part of the source
voltage across a series connected resistance.
In applications requiring adjustable speed, a controller is provided for the control of speed. The same controller can also be employed for limiting the current during starting. Where control of speed is not required, a starter is used to limit the
current. In applications not requiring frequent starting, the most widely used method
is to insert an extra sectionalized resistance in the armature circuit and to cut it gradually such that the motor current does not exceed a safe value and at the same time
the torque developed by the motor remains higher than the load torque.
2.4 BRAKING
The reasons for using electric braking are given in section 1.2.5.
During braking, the motor essentially works as a generator. With the direction of
current shown in the steady-state equivalent circuit of figure 2.2, the machine develops torque in the positive direction and converts electrical energy into mechanical
energy, which is absorbed by the loado If by some means the motor armature current
is reversed while maintaining the flux in the same direction, the motor torque will
reverse and the machine will work as a generator, absorbing mechanical energy from
the load and converting it into electrical energy. The mechanical energy is obtained
frorn the load either from the energy stored in the inertia of the motor load system or
from the active load torque on the motor shaft. The braking operation is classified in
46
DC Mbtors
Chap. 2
accordance with the manner in which the generated electrical energy is disposed of.
There are three methods of braking a de motor:
1. Regenerative braking.
2. Dynamic braking or rheostatic braking.
3. Plugging or reverse voltage braking.
2.4.1 Regenerative
Braking
In regenerative braking, the energy generated is supplied to the source. Usually the
source will not have the ability to store the energy. The energy supplied is diverted
to other loads connected to the source, where it is usefully employed and the source
is relieved from supplying this much energy. If the source does not have the ability
to store energy nor are there other loads connected to the source, regenerative braking cannot be employed.
Separately
Excited Motor
The steady-state equivalent circuit of a separately excited motor and source is

given in figure 2.2. If by some method the induced emf E is made greater than the
source voltage V, the current wiU reverse. The machine will work as a generator and
the source will act as a sink of energy, thus giving regenerative braking. It may be
emphasized that for regenerative braking to take place, the source-motor circuit
should have the abilit to e
current in either direction, and the source must have
.the ability to absorb energy. The induced ernf E can be made greater than the source
voltage V either by increasing E or decreasing V.
In those applications where the motor is supplied by its own unit source, V can
be-varied and kept below E for all speeds greater than zero. For speeds less than the
rated no-Ioad speed, the field current is maintained at the rated value. By appropriately varying V with E, the desired braking torque can be obtained. For speeds
greater than the rated no-load speed, V is fixed at the rated value and the field current is varied to adjust E to get the desired braking torque. The field control also ensures that E does not exceed the rated motor voltage by a substantial amount. The
speed-torque characteristics are shown in figure 2.7 for speeds below and above the
rated no-Ioad speed. They are obtained when the motoring characteristics of
figure 2.4a are extended into the second quadrant. They can be calculated from
equation (2.10) by using appropriate values of K.
In some applications, the source voltage V cannot be changed. For example, in
electric traction, the same source caters to a number of loads which may be operating simultaneously and may require a constant voltage. In these applications, regenerative braking occurs only when E exceeds V. This happens when the speed
increases beyond the rated no-load speed. For speeds substantially greater than the
rated no-load speed, the field must be weakened to restrict the braking current and
torque. For speeds lower than the rated no-load speeds, E can exceed V only by
strengthening the field. Since the motor field is normally designed to operate at the
knee point of the magnetization characteristic under rated conditions, the flux can be
increased only by a small amount by increasing the field current. The heating of the
field winding also does not permit the field current to be increased beyond a certain
Sec.2.4
47
Braking
-~-.~-.
---- --
--__
Decreasinq <1>
at constant V
- - - _
r-- .
-__
------------- ------ - - .. -
-..
Natural
WmO
Braking
Motoring
Decreasing V
at constant <1>
o
Figure 2.7 Regenerative braking speedtorque curves of a separately excited motor.
--
Armature
voltage control at rated flux
- - - Flux control at rated armature voltage
value. Therefore, when the machine is fed by a constant voltage source, regenerative
braking can be employed only for speeds above and slightly below base speed.
When fed by a constant voltage source, regenerative braking below base speed
can also be obtained by connecting a step-up chopper between the machine and the
source. By the adjustment of the step-up ratio, the chopper output voltage can be
made to exceed the source voltage even for very low values of the terminal voltage
of the machine. This allows the regenerative braking operating down to very low
speeds. This method of regenerative braking is described in section 4.4.
The variations of torque, power and motor current ratings shown in figure 2.5
for the motoring operation are also applicable for the regenerative braking operation.
Example 2.2
.,.
..
The separately excited motor of example 2.1 is now coupled to an overhauling load
with a torque of 800 N-m. Determine the speed at which the motor can hold the load by
regenerative braking. Source voltage is 230 V. Neglect the rnotor's rotational losses.
Solution:
From example
Rated motor torque
2.1, El = 220 V,
= TI =
Wml =
52.4 rad/sec.
x 1
220 x 100
al =
= 420 N-m
52.4
Wml
T = Ke<l>I.
Thus
and
(E2.6)
420 = Ke<l>Ial = Ke<l>' 100
(E2.7)
800 = Ke<l>Ia2
where Ia2 is the current under regenerative
braking.
From equations(E2.6)
1 = 800 x 100 = 190 A

a2
420
back ernf E = V
The new speed
+ Ia2Ra = 230 +
E
Wm
= El
19 = 249 V
249
Wml
= 220 x 52.4 = 59.3 rad/sec
or
566 rpm
and (E2.7)
48
DC Motors
Chap.2
Series motor
Series motors cannot be used for regenerative braking in the same simple way
as separately excited motors. For the regenerative braking to take place, the motor
induced emf must exceed the supply voltage and the armature current should reverse. The reversal of armature current will reverse the current through the field,
and, therefore, the induced ernf will also reverse, setting up a short-circuit condition. By connecting the field through a bridge rectifier, it is possible to maintain the
current through the field winding in the same direction. However, a switch ayer
from the motoring to regeneration will involve a change in the magnitude of the current, and, therefore, in the induced voltage. Because of this, the machine will not be
able to self-excite against the supply voltage. One commonly used method of regenerative braking of the series motor is to connect it as a shunt motor. Since the resistance of the field winding is low, a series resistance is connected in the field circuit
to limit the current within the safe value. One can also use a chopper, as explained in
section 4.4.2.
The main advantage of regenerative braking is that the generated electrical
energy is usefully employed instead of being wasted in rheostats as in the case of dynamic braking and plugging.
The dynamic braking of a dc motor is effected by disconnecting it from the source
and closing the armature circuit through a suitable resistance (fig. 2.8). The motor
now works as a generator, producing the braking torque.
For the braking operation, the separately excited (or shunt) motor can be connected either as a separately excited generator (fig. 2.8b), where the flux remains
coristant, or it can be. connected as a self-excited shunt generator, with the field
winding in parallel with the armature (fig. 2.8c). When working with separate excitation, the speed-torque curves can be calculated from equation (2.10) by substituting V = O and the appropriate value of the armature circuit resistance R, (R, is now
the sum of the braking resistance and the armature winding resistance). For the calculation of the speed-torque characteristics with the self-excitation, the actual mag-
1,
A2
F2
A2
(a) Motoring
(b)
Figure 2.8
F2
Braking with separate

exeitation
Dynamie braking
of
separately excited motor.
A2
(e) Braking with
self-exeitation
F2
Sec.2.4
Braking
49
netization characteristics (K.,<t> versus field current curve) should be used to account
for the saturation. When motoring at the rated speed, the induced ernf is nearly equal
to the supply voltage. If the braking is initiated now, a resistance equal to the starting resistance is required to limit the braking current within the safe limit. The
speed-torque curves of a separately excited (or shunt) motor under the dynamic braking with separate and shunt excitations are shown in figure 2. lOa, for two values of
the braking resistance. In both cases, the torque decreases with speed. In the selfexcitation case, the induced voltage, and, therefore, arrnature and field currents,
decreases with speed. Thus, the decrease in torque for a given change in speed is
larger compared to that for the separate excitation. Furtherrnore, in the case of selfexcitation, the torque becomes zero at a finite speed. This is because for a given
value of resistance, there is a critical value of speed wmc below which the machine
fails to self-excite. After the braking torque falls to zero value, the machine coasts
with only friction opposing the motion. Due to all these factors, the braking time
with self-excitation is considerably larger compared to that with separate excitation.
When used to hold an active load, the operation at lower speeds is not possible due
to the absence of the braking torque. Therefore, self-excitation is used only for
emergency stops in the event of failure of the supply.
When quick braking is required, variable resistance is used. The maximum
value of the resistance is chosen such that the current at the initiation of braking
at the highest speed will have the maximum perrnissible value. The resistance is
reduced with the speed to maintain the braking torque at the highest value until
RB =0.
For dynamic braking, the series motor is usually connected as a self-excited
series generator. For the self-excitation, it is necessary that the current forced through
the field winding by the induced ernf aids the residual flux. This requirement is satis+fied either by reversing the armature terrninals or the field terrninals (fig. 2.9). The
speed torque characteristics are shown in figure 2.lOb, for two values of the braking
resistance. For a given value of thebraking resistance, as the speed falls thetorque
decreases by a large amount and becomes zero at a finite speed. The speed-torque
relation can be calculated from equations (2.4) and (2.5) by substituting V = O and
A1
51
+
v
(a) Motoring
Figure 2.9
(b) Braking with

self-excitation
Dynamic braking of series motor.
50
Chap.2
DC Motors
-
Seperate
---
Self-excitation
o
(b) Series motor
(a) Separately excited motor
Figure 2.10
Speed-torque eurves of de motors under dynamie braking,
the appropriate value of the armature circuit resistance R, (sum of the armature and
field winding resistances and the braking resistance), and by using the actual magnetization characteristic (relation between Ir and Ke<l. According to equation (2.14),
with V = 0, in the unsaturated region of the magnetization characteristic, the speed
becomes independent of torque and is given by the following equation:
(2.15)
This is the critical speed, below which the machine fails to self-excite, and, therefore, the braking torque drops to zero.
As the braking operation is slow with self-excitation, when faster braking operation is required, the machine is connected for the separate excitation, and an appropriate
resistance is inserted in series with the field to limit the current within the safe value.
Dynamic braking is an inefficient method of braking, because all the generated
energy is wasted as heat in resistances.
Example 2.3
The magnetization eurve of a de series motor when running at 600 rpm is given by
eurrent:
emf:
20
215
30
310
40
381
50
437
60
485
70
80
519
550
The total resistanee of the motor is 1 n.

When eonneeted for dynamie braking against a load giving a torque of 400 N-m,
we wish to limit the motor speed to 500 rpm. What resistanee must be eonneeted aeross
the motor terrninals? Negleet the motor's rotationallosses.
Sec.2.4
Braking
51
Solution
Ke<l>
=-
wm
and
= Ke<l>la,
N-m.
From these relations and the magnetization characteristic

20
3.4
68
30
4.9
147
40
6.06
60
7.72
50
6.96
243
70
8.26
578
463
348
80
8.75
700
T and Ke<l> versus la plot is given in figure E2.1. For a torque of 400 N-m, la = 54.3 Amps
and Ke<l> = 7.22. At 400 N-m,
E = Ke<l>wm
Now
E = (RB
= 7.22
+ RJla
or
500
60
X 27T= 378 V
378
= (RB + 1)54.3
or
RB
= 6!l
800
600
E
090
-,"
1--
400
200
~
O
~ __
20
~~
40
~ __
60
80
~O
100
l. A
Figure E2.l
2.4.3 Plugging
If the arrnature terminals (or supply polarity) of a separately excited (or shunt) motor
when running are reversed, the supply voltage and the induced voltage will act in the
same direction and the motor current will reverse, producing braking torque. This
type of braking is called plugging. In the case of a series motor, either the arrnature
terminals or field terminal s should be reversed. Reversing of both gives only the
normal motoring operation. For the motoring connections of figures 2.8a and 2.9a,
the plugging connections are shown in figure 2.11.
52
DC Motors-
Chap. 2
F,
+
l.
A,
A,
F2
(a) Separately-excited
Figure 2.11
(b] Series
Plugging operation of de motors.
" ,,,
Series',
" ,,
"
"
"Ii
Figure 2.12 Speed-torque eurves of de

motors under plugging.
When running at the rated speed, the induced voltage will be nearly equal to
the supply voltage Y. Therefore, at the initiation of braking, the total voltage in the
arrfature circuit will be nearly 2 Y. To limit the current within the safe value, a
resistance equal to twice the starting resistance will be-required.
The performance characteristics of separately and series excited motor s for
plugging are obtained from equations (2.10) and (2.14) by replacing Y by - Y. The
speed-torque characteristics are shown in figure 2.12. Since the braking torque
remains sufficiently large from rated to zero speed,. the change in arrnature circuit
resistance during braking is not necessary. The braking torque is not zero at zero
speed. When used for stopping, an additional arrangement is required to disconnect
the motor from the supply at or near zero speed, otherwise it will speed up in the
reverse direction.
Plugging is a highly inefficient method of braking. Not only is power supplied
by the load, but also the power taken from the source is wasted in resistances.
2.5 MULTIQUADRANT OPERATION OF SEPARATELV
EXCITED DC MOTOR WITH REGENERATIVE BRAKING
Multiquadrant drives employing semiconductor converters mostly employ regenerative braking because of the saving in energy. Figure 2.13 shows the polarities of the
source voltage, back ernf, and arrnature current for the operation in different quadrants. These quantities-that
is, Y, E, and Ia- are taken positive for the forward
Sec.2.5
Multiquadrant Operation of Separately Excited
Forward
braking
Reverse motoring
53
De Motor
Forward
motoring
Reverse braking
Torque
IR. t
IR.
-r:'V'>IE,~E -r:'V'<IE,~E
~~
Figure 2.13 Sign of source voltage,

motor current and back ernf in various
quadrants of motor operation.
motoring (quadrant 1). The torque and speed are also positive in this quadrant. When
the operation takes place in the forward braking quadrant (quadrant TI), the back ernf
will continue to be positive because the motor still runs in the forward direction. For
the torque to become negative and the direction of energy flow to reverse, the armature current must have opposite (-ve) direction and V should be less than E. When
reverse motoring (quadrant lIT), the back ernf will reverse (-ve) because of the reversal of speed. To keep the torque negative and the energy flow from the source to
the motor (a conditionwhich
must be satisfied for the motoring operation), the
source voltage and current must have reverse (- ve) directions, and Ivl > IEI. When
in the reverse braking quadrant (qauadrant IV), the back ernf will be negative. For
the torque to be positive and the energy to flow from the motor to the source, la and
V must have positive and negative directions respectively, and Ivl < IEI. The directions of the source voltage and current for various quadrants are listed in table 2.1.
TABLE 2.1
Quadrants of
Operation
Polarity of
Source Voltage
Direction of
Source Current
Forward motoring
(1 quadrant)
Forward braking
(II quadrant)
Reverse motoring
(ill quadrant)
Reverse braking
(IV quadrant)
+ve
+ve
+ve
-ve
-ve
-ve
-ve
+ve
54
DC Motors
Chap. 2
These entries show that for an operation consisting of forward motoring and regenerative braking (quadrants I and 11), one needs a source with a positive voltage
and the ability to carry current in either direction. For an operation consisting of forward motoring and reverse braking, the source should be able to provide voltage in
either direction; however, it need not have the ability to carry current in either direction. For operation in all four quadrants, the source should be able to provide voltage
in either direction and should allow the current to flow in either direction.
The preceding discussion is helpful in discovering the quadrants in which a
motor can operate when fed by a given converter or chopper.
2.6 LOSS MINIMIZATION
IN ADJUSTABLE SPEED De DRIVEs1
The high cost of energy provides an incentive to reduce energy losses in adjustable
speed drives. Reduced losses not only reduce operating costs but also reduce the
capital cost of the utility system supplying the adjustable speed drives. In battery
operated vehicles, the reduction of los se s allows more efficient use of the battery
and thus increases the range of vehicle in terms of the distance traveled before the
battery discharges.
At any operating point, characterized by a speed and a torque, a combination
of the armature current and the field current can be found that meets the requirement
of the operating point and minimizes the drive's losses.
A de motor drive will have the following los s components:
1. Armature
circuit .loss Pa: This will be the sum of the loss in armature supply,
the brush contact loss, and the armature winding loss. This los s can be expressed as P, = I~Ra, where R, is the armature circuit resistance, which accounts for losses in the armature supply, in the brush contact, and the armature
winding.
2. Field circuit loss P including the field circuit power supply: If the field circuit
resistance is R then Pr = IfRf
3. Armature core loss P, which is a function of motor speed
density Bg: Let P, = KJ(Bg, wm).
4. Friction and windage
Wm
and air-gap flux
loss Pw: Since P w is a function of speed, P w = Kwf(wm).
S. Stray los s P, which is a function of the armature

Let P, = Ksf(la' wm).
current la and the speed
Wm:
Loss due to the armature and the field supply harmonics are not considered here.
When semiconductor
supplies are used, the motor armature andJor the fie1d supply
voltage usually have a considerable amount of harmonics; therefore, this loss should
be taken into account.
The total loss of the de motor drive is
P = I~Ra
+ IfRf + Kef(Bg,
To a first order the loss component

P = I~Ra
w~
+ Kwf(w~ + Ksf(la,
wm)
(2.16)
can be simp1ified to the following:
+ IfRf + KeB ~w~ + Kww~ + KsI~w~
(2.17)
Sec.2.6
Loss Minimization in Adjustable Speed De Drives
55
The effect of the armature reaction produced by la on the flux density is neglected
here.
Due to the saturation of the magnetic circuit, the relation between Bg and If is
nonlinear, Thus
Bg = x.r,
(2.18)
= f(lf)
(2.19)
K,
Equation (2.19) indicates that K is a nonlinear function of If. Now,

T = Ke<l>Ia= K~Bgla = K~Kflfla
(2.20)
T
la = K'K I
(2.21)
or
f f
Substituting from equations (2.19) and (2.21) into equation (2.17) gives
I;
_ Ra + Ksw ~ ( T )2
2
22 2
3
P - (K~Kf)2 .
+ IfRf + KcKflfWm + Kwwm
(2.22)
Equation (2.22) expresses the power loss P in terms of T, Wm, and If. For a given
operating point (a given torque T and a given speed wm), the loss will be mnima!
when the parta! derivative of P with respect to If will be zero. Thus,
ap
alf
T,wm -
alf
[(Ra + Ksw~T2
1
2(
2 2)]
K~2
. Kflf + If R + KcKfWm
or
2 (Ra + Ksw~T22(Ra
--13
K,2K2
f
e
f
+ Ksw~)T2
1 aKf
K,2
'K312-al
.e
f f
f
2 2)
+ 21f( Rf + KcKfWm
+ If2 . 2KfKcwm2 -aKf
1a f
=O
or
_ (Ra + KsW~ (_T_)2
r,
K~Kflf
_ (Ra + Ksw~).
x,
aKf(_T_)2
ar, K;Kflf
2 2 (
IfaKf) _
+lfRf+KcwmKflf
I+Kfalf
-o
_Ra+Ksw~12_Ra+Ksw~.aKfI2
If
a
K
or
alf
IR
K 2 2 (1
lL,aKf)=O
a + f f + cW mK fI f + K aKf
(2.23)
56
DC l\7'Iotors
Chap.2
or
(Ra
+ Ksw~,)I;
If[( l+---l~ K) + K,KW~l

~f
Kf
(2.24)
sr,
If the magnetic circuit is assumed linear then K will be a constant according to

equations (2.18) and (2.19). Then aKcI alf will be zero. Substituting this in equation (2.24) gives
(2.25)
Equations (2.24) and (2.25) show that at a given speed and torque, the total drive
loss is minimal when the armature current dependent loss is equal to the field current
dependent loss. A given operating point P, characterized by the specific values of
speed and torque, can be realized by a number of combinations of la and le. as
shown in figure 2.14. However, there would be one combination which would satisfy equation (2.24) or equation (2.25) and thus minimize the total drive loss. The
optimum solution is obtained as follows.
The speed, Wm is taken as the independent variable. For a given Wm equation (2.24) or equation (2.25) is solved for la, and le. subjected to the constraint
imposed by equation (2.20). Equation (2.24), which accounts for saturation, is
a non linear algebraic equation. Some numerical technique, such as the NewtonRaphson method will have to be used to solve this equation.
In a practical system, the optimum solution must be subjected to additional
constraints such as the maximum value of la and the mnimum value of Ir from the
consideration of commutation .
.. The implementation of the mnimum loss control is shown in figure 2.15. I The
speed cornrnand acting on the armature voltage controller sets the desired speed and
maintains it constant. The torque and speed are sensed by a torque-sensor and a
tachogenerator, respectively. It may be noted that T in equation (2.20) is the developed torque. It can be sensed electrically by sensing la and Ir. The signals T and
Wm are now fed to the minimum loss controller, whose function is to solve equation (2.24) or equaton (2.25) for a given Wm, subject to the constraint on T, and then
output the optirnurn value of Ir. The optimum value of Ir acts as a command for the
field current controller.
Equations (2.24) and (2.25) also suggest that at light loads the drive should be
operated at reduced flux even below the base speed. In section 2.2.3 it was sug-
Figure 2.14
Sec.2.7
Transfer Functions of Separately
lt command
Speed
command
Excited
De
57
Motor
r-------------------,
Field eurrent
controller
Armature
voltage
controller
T
Minimum
controller
1055
Torque
sensor
Tachogenerator
1----======-
Figure 2.15
Minimurn
1055
-1
control of a dc drive.
gested that from the consideration of torque capability, below base speed the drive
should always be operated at the rated flux. In the absence of the minimum loss control, this seems to be the most appropriate strategy. Because of the complex control,
the minimum loss control is employed only when the energy saving is large enough
to justify the additional cost and complexity. This will happen only when the drive
runs at light loads for prolonged periods of time.
2.7 TRANSFER FUNCTIONS OF SEPARATELV EXCITED DC

MOTOR
Transfer functions in MI appropriate form are needed for the stability analysis and
design of closed-loop drives. Closed-loop drives may be employed for speed control
or position control, and the motor may be operated with armature control or field
control. In this section, transfer functions of a separately excited motor with armature control and field control are derived in the form suitable for stability analysis
and design of closed-loop drives.
The dynamic model of a dc separately excited motor is shown in figure 2.16.
The source voltage, armature current, back ernf and torque required to do the useful
mechanical work are denoted by v, ia, e, and T M, respectively. The lower case letters
have been employed for the source voltage, armature current, and back emf to ern-
Figure 2.16 Dynamic equivalent circuit of

separately excited motor.
de
t:.=3.,
DC Motors
58
Chap. 2
phasize that these are instantaneous values of time varying quantities. The terms B
and J are respectively the coefficient of viscous friction in N-m/(rad/sec.) and polar
moment of inertia in Kg-rrr' of the motor load system referred to the motor shaft.
2.7.1 Armature
Control
The voltage equation of the armature circuit under dynamic conditions is given by
L di, K
v = R ala + adt" + Wm
(2.26)
From the dynamics of the motor load system equation (1.5),
dWm
J-=T-TM-Bw
dt
(2.27)
Further,
(2.28)
T=Kia
Substitution in equation (2.27) yields
Jdwm
dt
= Ki a - TM - Bw m
(2.29)
Taking the Laplace transform of equations (2.26) and (2.29), assuming zero initial
conditions, gives
sLaIa(s) + RaIa{s) + Kwm(s) = Ves)
(2.30)
sJwm(s) + Bwm(s) + TM(S)= KIa(s)
(2.31)
where Ia(s), Ves), wm(s), and TM(s) are Laplace transforms of the variables ia, v, Wm,
and TM, respectively.
Ves) - Kwm(s)
Ra(l + S'T J
Ves)
Ia(s) = Ra(l + S'T J
(2.32)
where the armature circuit time constant is

a = La/Ra
(2.33)
TM(S) =!. T(s) - TM(S)

B (l + S'T m> B
(1 + S'T m)
(2.34)
'T

(s) = (K/B)Ia(s) _!.
(l +
S'T m>
where the mechanical time constant of the motor load system is

'Tm
= J/B
(2.35)
From equations (2.32) and (2.34), the block diagram shown in figure 2.17 is obtained. The figure shows that the motor behaves as a closed-loop system with an inherent speed feedback due to the back ernf. There are two excitations, Ves) and TM(S).
Sec.2.7
De
Motor
59
T M (5)
Figure 2.17
Block diagram of separately excited dc motor with armature control.
To be able to obtain the responses for both these exeitations, two transfer funetions
are required: one relating wm(s) with Ves) and another relating wm(s) with TM(s).
Let us eonsider the transfer funetion relating wm(s) with Ves). The closed-Ioop
de drives employing semieonduetor
eonverters are usually operated .with an outer
speed eontrolloop and an inner eurrent eontrolloop, as will be explained in ehapter 5.
The transfer funetion should be realized in a form appropriate for this eonfiguration
of the closed-loop drives. A suitable form of the transfer funetion is obtained when it
is realized in two parts: one relating la(s) with Ves) and another relating wm(s) with
lis). Substituting TM = O in equation (2.34) gives
(2.36)
where
Km
Substituting
K/B
(2.37)
(2.36) into equation (2.32) yields
from equation
+ K
] I (s)
RaB (I + STJ (I + STJ
V(s)
Ra(I + STa)
(2.38)
or
Ia(s)
B(I
+ ST m)
V(s) = (K2 + RaB) + RaB(Ta + Tm)s + RaBTaTms2
-(K2+RaB)
(I
+ ST m)
l+RaB(Ta+Tm)
K2 + RaB
KmI(I +
+.RaBTaTm 2
S K2 + RaB S
STm)
1
(2.39)
where
T mI =
KmI
JRa/(BRa
+ K2)
(2AO)
= B/(BRa
+ K2)
(2.41)
DC Mot'ors
60
Chap.2

Ia(s)
Km(l+STm)
V(s) = (1
ST)
(1
(2.42)
ST2)
where
- :1' - :, ~ ~[-(;, + ,0
~ (;,
,0'- 'm~'.]
(2.43)
From equations (2.36) and (2.42), the block diagram shown in figure 2.18a is
obtained.
.
The time constants T and T2 may be complex conjugate. This is true for large
motors and converter drives with a filter inductor in series with the armature. In that
case, equation (2.39) can be rewritten in a more appropriate form:
Ia(s)
Km2(l
V(s)
(1- +
S2 +
Ta
=
ST m)
~\
T:)
+ _1_
TaTm
Km2(l + STm)
S2 + 2gwns + w~
(2.44)
where
(2.45)
(2.46)
1
g = 2" (1 +
Usually
Ta ~ T m'
Ta/T
m)"v'T m/Ta
(2.47)
then from equation (2.38),
[1 + ~~
+l
sT
]ra(S)
V~:)
or
(2.48)
The simplified block diagram based on equations (2.36) and (2.48) is shown in
figure 2.18b.
There are a number of applications where the load torque is proportional to the
speed. In these applications the effect of the load torque on the drive performance
can be taken into account by simply combining it with the viscous friction term and
upgrading the value of B, equation (2.29). Then all the equations just derived will
also account for the effect of the load torque on the drive performance. When the
load torque is not proportional to the speed, a separate transfer function is required
Sec.2.7

V(s)
De Motor
Km,(l
+STm)
+ s T,)(l
(1
61
+ s T2)
(a)
V(S)
Km,(l+sTm)
Figure 2.18 Simplified block diagrams of

separately excited motor with armature control: (a) Exact, (b) Approximate.
(1 +STm,)
(b)
between Wm(S) and T M(S). This transfer function is obtained by combining the block
diagram of figure 2.17 with other blocks of the system and setting the reference
speed to zero.
2.7.2 Field Control

Some de drives are operated with field control and with a constant current in the
arrnature circuit. Usually, the arrnature current is maintained constant using a closedloop system. Since the arrnature time constant is very small compared to the field
time constant, the response time of the closed-loop system controlling the arrnature
current can be considered zero, and thus the change in the arrnature current due to
the variation of field current and motor speed can be neglected.
From the dynamic equivalent circuit of figure 2.16
di,
V f = Rflf + L fdt
Assuming
a linear magnetic
(2.49)
circuit and noting that the arrnature current is constant,
(2.50)
T = KaIf
where K, is a constant.
From the dynarnics of the motor load system (equation (2.27 and equation (2.50)
Jd:m
Taking the Laplace
initial conditions, gives
= Kaif - TM - BWm
transform
Vf(s) = RfIf(s)
Jswm(s)
From equations
(2.49) and (2.51), assuming
of equations
= KaIf(s)
+ LfsIf(s)
- TM(s) - Bwm(s)
(2.52) and (2.53), by rearranging
(l
+ ST m)
T M(S)
B (l
_ T(s) - T M(S)
- B(l + STm)
(2.52)
(2.53)
(2.54)
= Rf(l + STf)
(s) = (Ka/B)If(s)
zero
the terms,
Vf(s)
If(s)
(2.51)
+ ST m)
(2.55)
(2.56)
DC"Motors
62
Chap. 2
T M (S)
Figure 2.19
Block diagram of separately excited motor with field control.
where 'rr = Lr/Rr.

Substituting from (2.54) in equation (2.55) gives
(2.57)
where
From equations (2.50), (2.54), and (2.56) the block diagram shown in figure 2.19 is
obtained. When the load torque is proportional to the speed, it can be combined with
the viscous friction by upgrading the value of B. The transfer function for such a
case is obtained by letting TM(s) = O in equation (2.57).
REFERENCES
l.
Alexander Kusko and Donald Galler, "Control means for minimization of losses in ae and
de motor drives," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Applications, vol. IA-19, July/Aug. 1983,
pp. 561-570.
PROBLEMS
2.1
2.2
A separately excited de motor is running at 1000 rpm, driving a load whose torque is
proportional to the square of the shaft speed. The annature current is 100 A. The armature resistance drop and the rotational losses of the motor are negligible and the magnetic circuit can be assumed linear. The motor armature voltage is reduced from 200 V
to 100 V. Mark and explain the correct answer.
(a) The motor speed will increase to 2000 rpm/decrease to 500 rpm/decrease to
(1ooo/Y2) rpm/remain constant.
(b) The annature current will increase to 200 A/decrease to 50 A/decrease to 25 A.
constant. The motor annature current is 200 A, and the annature resistance drop and the
rotational losses are negligible. The magnetie circuit can be assumed linear. The field
current is reduced to half.
Mark and explain the correct answer.
(a) The motor speed will increase to 2000 rpm/decrease to 500 rpm/remain constant.
(b) The motor current will decrease to 100 A/increase to 400 A/remain eonstant.
Chap. 2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
Problems
63
proportional to the speed. The motor armature voltage is 220 V and the armature current is 20 A. What resistance should be inserted in the armature circuit to reduce the
motor speed to 250 rpm? The armature resistance is I {l.
A de shunt motor is running at 1000 rpm, driving a load whose torque is constant at all
speeds. The armature current is 100 A. The armature resistance drop can be neglected
and the field circuit can be assumed linear. If the source voltage is reduced to half, calculate the motor speed and the armature current.
A 220 V, 960 rpm, 90 A separately excited de motor has an armature resistance of
0.06 n. Under rated conditions the motor is driving a load whose torque is constant and
independent of speed. The speeds below the rated speed are obtained with armature
voltage control (with full field) , and the speeds above the rated speed are obtained by
fie1d control (with rated armature voltage).
(a) Ca1culate the motor terminal voltage when the speed is 600 rpm.
(b) Obtain the value of flux as a percent of rated flux if the motor speed is 1200 rpm.
Neglect the motor's rotationallosses.
A 200 V de series motor takes 20 A and runs at 500 rpm with a certain load on its
shaft. The field winding and armature resistances are of 1 each. A resistance of 9
is now connected in parallel with the armature. Find the motor speed if the load on the
motor shaft is removed. Neglect friction and windage.
A dc series motor is driving a load whose torque is proportional to the square of the
speed. When supplied with 200 V it takes 100 A and runs at 1000 rpm. The total resistance of the armature and field is 0.1 n. What voltage should be applied to the motor to
reduce its speed to 500 rpm? Assume the magnetic circuit of the motor is linear, and neglect friction and windage.
A de series motor is driving a load whose torque is constant and independent of speed.
The motor speed is increased from 1000 rpm to 1200 rpm by eonnecting a diverter resistance across its field. Find the ratio of the armature to the field winding current. Assume a negligible drop across the field winding and the armature resistance, and a linear
magnetic circuit.
A de series motor is driving a load whose torque is constant. The motor is running at
1000 rpm (clockwise) and the armature current is 200 A. Find the magnitude and the
direction of the motor speed and armature current if the motor terminal voltage is reversed and the number of turns in the field winding are reduced to 80 percent. Neglect
the voltage drop across the armature and field, and assume a linear magnetic circuit.
A motor is to be selected for driving a load having a large torque of short duration followed by a long no-load periodo A fly-wheel of suitable inertia is already mounted on
the load shaft. Out of the various types of de motors (separately or shunt excited, series
and compound) which one will you recommend for this application and why?
A 220- V, 960 rpm, 90 A de separately excited motor has an armature resistance of
0.06 n. It is coupled to an overhauling load with a torque of 300 N-m. Determine the
speed at which the motor can hold the load by regenerative braking.
The motor-load system of problem 2.11 is now braked by dynamic braking instead of
regenerative braking. It is required that the machine should hold the load at 600 rpm.
Calculate the value of external resistance to be connected across the armature.
The following figures give the magnetization curve of a de series motor when running
at 960 rpm:
field current
e.m.f.
A
V
20
261
40
540
60
738
80
882
1()()
945
64
DC Motors
Chap. 2
The total resistance of the annature and field is 0.3 O. When eonneeted for dynamie
braking against a load whose torque is 600 N-m, it is desired to limit the motor speed to
750 rpm. What resistanee must be eonneeted aeross the motor terminals? Negleet the
motor's rotationalloss.
2.14 The motor of problem 2.11 is braked by plugging from an initial speed of 800 rpm. Caleulate (a) the resistanee to be plaeed in the annature eireuit to limit the initial braking
eurrent to twiee the full load value, (b) the initial braking torque, and (e) the torque
when the speed has fallen to zero.
2.15 A de separately exeited motor is supplied by a de souree whieh can carry eurrent in either direetion. The motor is running on no load with a weak fie1d. Now the field eurrent
is inereased. State and explain the various operations (braking, motoring) the motor will
have before it settles at a new steady-state speed.
3
Rectifier Control
of DC Motors
Controlled rectifier fed de drives are widely used in applications requiring a wide
range of speed control andJor frequent starting, braking, and reversing. Some prorninent applications are in rolling mills, paper milis, printing presses, mine winders,
machine tools.
The line diagram of a controlled rectifier-fed separately excited de motor drive
is shown in figure 3.1. The maximum dc output voltage of the rectifier under continuous conduction should be equal to the rated armature voltage of the motor. If the ac
AC source
(single phase
or polyphase)
D iode bridge
or controlled
rectifier
Controlled
rectifier
Filter
inductor
i,
====
Figure 3.1 Une diagram of a controlledreetifier fed de motor drive.

65
66
Rectifier Control of DC Motors
Chap. 3
source voltage magnitude is such that this requirement is satisfied, then some rectifiers can be directly connected to the ac source; otherwise a transformer with a suitable turns ratio is inserted between the ac source and the rectifier. A filter inductor is
sometimes connected between the rectifier and the motor armature to reduce ripple
in the motor current. This improves the motor performance. Usually, the field is
supplied through a transformer and a diode bridge from the same ac source which
supplies the armature. The transformer turns ratio is chosen to make the field voltage
equal to the rated value. If field control is also required, the diode bridge is replaced
by a controlled rectifier.
3.1 CONTROLLED RECTIFIER CIRCUITS
There are a number of controlled rectifier circuits, some fed from a l-phase supply
and others from a 3-phase supply. For the motor control, controlled rectifier circuits
are classified as fully-controlled and half-controlled rectifiers. Some fully-controlled
and half-controlled rectifiers are shown in figures 3.2 and 3.4 respectively. Single
phase controlled rectifiers are employed up to a rating of 10 kW and in some special
cases up to 50 kW. For higher power ratings 3-phase controlled rectifiers are employed. In those applications where only the l-phase supply is available, such as in
main line traction, l-phase controlled rectifiers are also employed for ratings up to a
few thousand kilowatts. In figures 3.2 and 3.4, the transformer is shown only when
it is essential for the operation of the controlled rectifier. For other controlled rectifiers, the transformer may be required if the motor voltage rating is not compatible
with the ac source vol.age. Figures 3.2a and b show 2-pul e fully-controlled rectifiers fed by a l-phase ac source. In the rectifier of figure 3.2a, only one thyristor is in
series with the armlture compared to two for the rectifier of figure 3.2b. Therefore,
the thyristor voltage drop and thyristor losses are half for the rectifier of figure 3.2a
compared to those for the rectifier of figure 3.2b. Becau e of the e advantages, the
rectifier of figure 3.2a is preferred for the control of low voltage motors. The main
drawback of the rectifier of figure 3.2a is that a bulky transformer is required because only one-half of the secondary winding carries current at any instant. For normal voltage ratings, and particularly when the motor voltage rating and the ac source
voltage are compatible, the circuit of figure 3.2b is employed.
As explained later in this chapter, the performance of a drive is improved when
the rectifier pulse number is increased. Six-pulse operation is realized by employing
the three-phase fully-controlled bridge rectifier of figure 3. 2c. When a transformer is
required, for matching the output voltage of the rectifier and the voltage rating of the
motor, the primary or secondary windings of the transformer are connected in delta
so that the tripplen (third and its multiple) harmonics of the magnetizing current can
flow. Another six-pulse controlled rectifier is shown in figure 3.2d. It is obtained by
connecting two three-pulse controlled rectifiers in parallel through an interphase reactor. Twelve-pulse operation is obtained by connecting two controlled rectifiers of
figure 3. 2d in parallel through an interphase reactor. The two rectifiers are supplied
by two transformer banks with their primaries connected in star and delta, respectively.I! Twelve-pulse operation can also be obtained by connecting two six-pul e
bridge controlled rectifiers of figure 3.2c in series and supplying them with a trans-
(
(b) 2-pulse bridge
reetifier
(a) 2-pulse midpoint

reetifier
'"
~
",o--i----'
s:
0.0---;---+---+
(e) 6-pulse bridge rectifier
Interphase
reactor
2'*3'
3
l'
3'
~~o.'" _-.-_J
0100
l'
2'
(d) 6-pulse midpoint reetifier with interphase reactor
Figure 3_2
Fully-eontrolled
rectifiers.
67
68
Chap. 3
former having two sets of secondaries-one

connected in star and another in delta. 1.2
In all these three-phase controlled rectifiers, each thyristor conducts for 120
The circuit symbol for the fully-controlled rectifiers is shown in figure 3.3a. Va
and la denote the average values of the con verter output voltage and current, respectively. The variation of Va with the firing angle a, assuming continuous conduction,
is shown in figure 3.3b. The motor is said to operate in continuous conduction when
the armature current flows continuously - that is, it does not become zero for a
finite time interval. The output voltage can be controlled from a full-positive (+ Vao)
to a full-negative value (- Vao) by controlling the firing angle from 0 to 180 In
practice, the maximum value of a is restricted to 170 to avoid commutation failure
of thyristors, Since the output voltage can be controlled in either direction, the fullycontrolled rectifiers are two-quadrant converters, providing operation in the first and
fourth quadrants of the Va-l. plane, as shown in figure 3.3c. Imx is the rated rectifier
current. With a negative output voltage, the rectifier works as a line-commutated inverter and the power flows from the load to the ac source.
Some half-controlled rectifiers are shown in figure 3.4. For control of fractional and low integral horsepower motors, the l-pulse rectifier of figure 3.4a may
be employed, with and without a freewheeling diode. The cost of such a drive is low
due to the lower number of devices in the rectifier. The major drawback of this rectifier is the presence of a direct component and even harmonics in the source current
due to its asymmetrical waveform. Single-phase 2-pulse half-controlled rectifiers are
obtained by adding a freewheeling diode to the fully-controll~d rectifiers of
0
la
1 or 3-phase
ae souree
Motor
Fullyeontrolled
rectifier
(a) Line diagram
v.
(b] Output voltage versus

firing angle curve
(e) Ouadrants of operation
Figure 3.3
acteristics.
Fully-controlled
rectifier char-
I
I
*]
]
(b) 2-pulse reetifier
(a) l-pulse rectifier
'III"
'"
s:
o.
~
(e) 2-pulse rectifier
,,
(d) 3-pulse rectifier
~orm~
\
1
to]
jW y 2
u
'"
F2
(f) ~pulse rectifier with two

freewheeling diodes
C"
Figure 3.4
ID
F1
(e) 6-pulse reetifier with

a freewheeling diode
en
,D
Half-controlled
rectifiers.
70
Chap.3
figures 3.2a and b. Altematively, the half-controlled rectifier of figure 3.4b may be
used. The circuit of figure 3.4c is sometimes used to reduce the cost of the drive.
The circuit uses only one thyristor, and a common diode bridge feeds both armature
and field. The freewheeling diode, DF, can be dispensed with when the armature circuit inductance is low and low-speed operation is not required. In the case of a large
inductance andJor low-speed operation, the drop across the freewheeling diode provides a bias to block the thyristor. Compared to 2-pulse fully-controlled rectifiers, 2pulse half-controlled rectifiers consume less reactive power, and therefore operate at
a higher power factor and have less ripple in the motor current.
A 3-phase half-controlled rectifier with three-pulse operation is shown in
figure 3.4d. The 6-pulse half-controlled rectifier of figure 3.4e is obtained by adding
a freewheeling diode to the 3-phase fully-controlled rectifier of figure 3.2c. The
freewheeling action of diode DF takes place for firing angles greater than 60. The
freewheeling actionreduces the reactive component in the line current and the ripple
in the motor current. For this circuit, the total range of the firing angle required for
controlling the output voltage from the maxirnurn to zero value is from 0 to 120.
The advantages of freewheeling action can be obtained for firing angles greater than
30 in the circuit shown in figure 3.4f, which makes use of two freewheeling di ..J~s
DF1 and DF2' The total range of the firing angle required is 150. This circuit is expensive due to the use of a 3-phase transformer with a neutral connection and an additional diode.
The circuit symbol and the variation of the average output voltage Va with the
firing angle a for the half-controlled rectifiers are shown in figures 3.5a and b,
1 or J.phase
ae source
Half-controlled
reetifier
(al
Motor
Line diagram
v.
o
(bl
Output voltage versus

firing angle eurve
Figure 3.5
(el Cuadrant
of operation
Half-controlled rectifier characteristics.
Sec.3.2
Rectifier Controlled
71
respectively. Various notations have the same meaning as stated for the fullycontrolled rectifiers. amaxis the value of a for which Va is zero. As just stated, it has
different values for different circuits. Since only positive values of Va can be obtained, the half-controlled rectifiers operate only in the first quadrant of the Va-la
plane, as shown in figure 3.5c.
The analysis and performance of drives will be considered only for those 1phase and 3-phase rectifier-drives which are widely used. However, the knowledge
gained will enable the reader to analyze any rectifier-drive.
3.2 BRAKING OPERATION
SEPARATEL y EXCITED
OF RECTIFIER CONTROLLED
MOTOR
A fully-controlled rectifier-fed de separately excited motor is shown in figure 3.6a.

The polarities of output voltage, back emf, and armature current shown are for the
motoring operation in the forward direction. The rectifier output voltage is positive
and the firing angle lies in the range :5 a :5 90 The polarities of rectifier output
voltage, back emf, and armature current show that the rectifier supplies power to the
motor which is con verted into mechanical power. With these polarities of the rectifier output voltage and the motor back emf, the direction of power flow can be reversed and' thus the motor can be made to work under regenerative braking if the
armature current can reverse. This is not possible because the rectifier can carry cur'rent only in one direction. The only altemative available for the reversal of the flow
of power is to reverse both the rectifier output voltage Va and the motor back emt E
with respect to the rectifier terminals and make IEI > IV.I as shown in figure 3.6b.
The rectifier output voltage can be reversed by making a > 90, as shown in
v,
I
o ::::a s 90
and V.
>E
(a) Motoring
t 1"
Figure 3.6 Two quadrant operation of

fully-controlled rectifier-fed separately excited motor.
90
< a < 180 and I El>
I V.I
(b) Regenerativebraking
72
Chap.3
figure 3.3b. Under this eondition, the reetifier works as a line eommutated inverter,
transferring power from the de side to the ae mains. The eondition IEI > IYal can
be satisfied for any motor speed by choosing an appropriate value of a in the range
90 < a < 180 The reversal of the motor ernf with respect to the rectifier terrninals can be done by any of the following changes:
0
1. An active load coupled to the motor shaft may drive it in the reverse direction.
This gives reverse regeneration (that is, operation in quadrant IY of the speedtorque plane). In this case no changes are required in the armature connection
with respect to the rectifier tenninals.
2. The field current may be reversed, with the motor running in the forward direction. This gives forward regeneration. In this case also no ehanges are required in the armature connection.
3. The motor armature connections may be reversed with respect to the rectifier
output terminals, with the motor still running in the forward direction. This
will give forward regeneration.
If the drive shown in figure 3.6a runs only in the forward direction and if there
is no arrangement for the reversal of either field or armature, regenerative braking
cannot be obtained. The drive then works essentially as a single quadrant drive.
Regenerative braking cannot be obtained with a half-controlled rectifier because the output voltage eannot be reversed. The plugging operation can be obtained
both with half-controlled and fully-controlled rectifiers by reversing the back ernf by
any of the three methods just stated and keeping the rectifier voltage still positive.
An external resistance must then be included to limit the current. Because of the
poor efficiency and the need for external resistance to limit the armature current,
prugging is not employed with rectifier drives. While operating in regenerative braking, care should be taken to avoid accidental plugging.
3.3 1-PHASE FULLV-CONTROLLED RECTIFIER-FED

SEPARATELV EXCITED MOTOR
Figure 3.7a shows a l-phase fully-controlled rectifier supplying a de separately excited motor. The armature has been replaeed by its equivalent circuit. R, and La are
the armature cireuit resistance and inductanee respectively, and E is the back emf. If
a filter inductance is connected, then its resistance and inductance are included in R,
and La.
The source voltage and thyristor firing pulses are shown in figure 3. 7b. The
thyristor pair Tt,T3 reeeives firing pulses from a to tt and the pair T2,T4 receives firing pulses from (rr + a) to 2rr.
3.3.1 Modes of Operation4,5
The modes of operation of the drive for motoring and regenerative braking are
shown in figures 3.8 and 3.9, respectively. The steady-state waveforms of the motor
terminal voltage Va and the armature eurrent ia, and the devices under conduetion
during different intervals of a cycle of the input ac voltage Vs are shown in these fig-
Sec.3.3
Rectifier-Fed Separately
13
Excited Motor.
i.
ig2
r-i,
v,
--,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R.
I
I
I
ig3
L __
__
.
,
E = KWm
...J
I
2-pulse fully
controlled
rectifier
Separately
excited motor
(a)
-v,
v,
ig" ig3
wt
.,.
O
ig2, ig4
Figure 3.7 I-phase fully-controlled rectifierfed de separately excited motor.
ex
wt
t
ex
1T
1T
+ ex
wt
21T
Ib)
ures. The drive is said to operate in discontinuous conduction when i, becomes zero
for a finite interval of time in each cycle.
The following notations have been used:
Vrn= the peak value of the supply voltage, V
w = supply frequency, rad/sec.
{3= angle at which the armature current drops to zero value, rad
{3' = {3 - 'Ti'
Y = sin"! (EjVrn)-that
is, angle at which the source voltage
back ernf E, rad
.
y' = 'Ti' - sin-I(IEljVrn)
Vs
is equal to the
Chap.3
74
wt
I 21r
wt
I
I
\
\ ...
"
(a) Mode 1, ac> or
"
< 'Y
I
\
,_/
(b) Mode Il, o
/~
> 'Y
~_T_2_' _T
__4
/21r
\1r+ac
\
\
=-:
wt
wt
I
/
I
V,
(e) Mode I1I, ac < 'Y
(d) Mode IV, ac < 'Y
Figure 3.8 Modes of operation of l-phase fully-controlled rectifier-fed separately excited motor for motoring.
The following points are helpful in understanding the modes of operation:

1. The motor annature current flows through the source, and either through the
thyristor pair TI, T3 or through the pair T2, T4. When the pair TI, T3 conducts,
Va= vs' and when the pair T2, T4 conducts, Va= -Vs' When none of the thyristor pairs conducts, ia = and Va= E.
2. When ia> at the instant of firing a thyristor pair, then the biasing on thyristors of this pair will be decided by the source voltage only. If the source
voltage pro vides a positive bias, thyristors will tum on even when the source
voltage is less than E. For example, if at the instant of firing of Ti and T3that is, wt = ex, ia> 0, then ia must be carried by T2 and T4 Since T2 and T4
are on, the voltage across TI and T3 will be VS' TI and T3 will tum on because
Vs is positive. The tum on will occur regardless of whether Vs is greater or less
than E.
Sec.3.3
I-Phase Fully-Controlled
Excited Motor
75
(a) Mode V, o
> or < 'Y'
-V,
..........
,
\
wt
(e) Mode Vil, o
> "r'
Figure 3.9 Modes of operation of I-phase fully-controlled rectifier-fed separately

excited motor for regenerative braking.
3. When ia = O at the instant of firing a thyristor pair, then the biasing on thyristors of this pair will be decided by the difference of the source voltage and the
back emf, The thyristors of this pair will conduct if the source voltage has the
appropriate polarity and its magnitude is higher than E. For example, if i, = O
at wt = a, then T2 and T4 must have already tumed off due to the want of current. Then the voltage across T and T3 is (vs - E). T and T3 will conduct only
if Vs > E, -that is, when a> 'Y.Similarly, if i, = Oat wt = (7T + a), T2 and T4
will tum on only if (-vs) > E or (7T + a) > (7T + 'Y).
4. The regenerative braking operation is obtained by reversing E by any of the
three methods stated in section 3.2 and adjusting a so that the average terminal
voltage of the converter, Va, is negative. Thus, the modes of operation drawn
for + E are for motoring, and those drawn for -E are for regeneration.
76
Chap.3
S. The rate of change of the annature current is given by the following equation:
.l
dia = [v - (E + i RJ]
dt La a
a
(3.1)
According to equation (3.1), if the annature resistance drop is neglected, the rate of
change of the current will be positive when va> E; otherwise it will be negative. For
the motoring operation, ia will be maximum at wt = 7T -" and for the regeneration it
will be maxiinum at wt = ". If the resistance drop is taken into account, ia will be
maximum earlier than these instants. The instants for the rninimum value of current
can be similarly located.
The various modes of operation can now be described.
Modes of Operation under Motoring
Mode 1: This is a continuous conduction mode because the annature current
flows continuously. a may be greater or less than y. Waveforms for the case a < 'Y
are shown in figure 3.8a. Since i,.> O at a, it is possible to tum on thyristors TI and
T3 even though Vs< E. The same is true for thyristors T2 and T4
For the interval a:5 wt:5 7T + a, when TI and T3 conduct,

Vs=
.R
L di,
+Ia a+ aTt
(3.2)
Multiplying both sides by iadt, where dt is a small interval of time, gives

. A-E'
Vslaut
-
A
'2 R AL'
laut
+ la
aut +
a
A
ala(di
Tt)\ ut
(3.3)
The terms of equation (3.3) give energy supplied/consumed by the respective elements. When vs> (E + iaRa), out of the total energy supplied by the source, a part
will be absorbed by E and converted into mechanical energy, a part will be dissipated
in R, as heat, and the remainder will be stored in the annature circuit inductance La.
On the other hand, when Vs< (E + iaRa), energy consumed by E and R, will be
more than that supplied by the source v., and, therefore, the rest of the energy will
be obtained from the energy stored in the inductance. Further, when Vs is negative
(wt> 7T), Vs will also act as a sink of energy in addition to E and R, and all this
energy shall have to come from the energy stored in the inductance La. When La is
small and/or ia is 10w and/or a is large, the inductance will not be able to sustain the
flow of annature current until (dia/dt) becomes positive again either at wt = 7T + 'Y
when a < 'Y or at (7T + a) when a> 'Y. The annature current will therefore fall to
zero and stay zero until the conditions become appropriate for it to flow again, and
thus, discontinuous conduction is obtained.
In the absence of a filter inductance, a low-power drive-which
is characterized by a low-annature circuit time constant - operates in the continuous conduction
Mode 1 only for small values of a and current values larger than the rated motor current.
Three modes of motoring operation with discontinuous conduction are shown
in figures 3.8b to d.
Sec.3.3
t-Phase Fully-Controlled
Excited Motor
77
Mode II [Fig. 3.8b]:

Here a> y, and ia flow from a to {3and stays zero
from {3to (7T + a).
Mode III [Fig. 3.8c]:
Here a < y. Since i, > O at a, thyristors TI and T3
turn on, even though Vs < E. Since the rate of change of current is negative
[equation (3.1)], i, drops to zero at {3' where (3' < y. TI and T3 get commutated
due to the absence of current. At y, TI and T 3 are forward biased again and since the
gate pulses are still present, they conduct again. This also explains the need for a
wide pulse. This mode occurs at low values of torque and a.
Mode IV [Fig. 3.8d]:
Here a < y. Since i, = Oata and vs(a) < E, TI and T3
do not turn on at a. They tum on only after they become forward biased at y. This
mode occurs at light loads for low values of a when the arrnature inductance is low.
Modes of Operation
Braking
during Regenerative
Mode V [Fig. 3.9a]: This is a continuous conduction mode. It occurs only

for large torques. In a low-power drive it occurs at higher than the rated torques.
Mode VI [Fig. 3.9b]: This discontinuous conduction mode occurs for a < y'.
Mode VII [Fig. 3.9c]: It is a discontinuous conduction mode for a> y'. It
occurs only for large values of a. This mode is not present when the gate pulses are
of the duration shown in figure 3.7b. In figure 3.7b the gate pulses end at 7T and 27T.
This mode will occur if each gate pulse has a duration '?7T for a11.values of a. After
conducting from a to {3,thyristors TI and T3 tum off at {3when ia falls to zero value.
ia stays zero until (7T + y'). At (7T + y'), TI and T3 become forward biased and conduct again. Tum on of T2 and T4 at (7T + a) starts the next cycle of the rectifier output voltage ..
The use of extended gate pulses of duration 7T, increases the conduction period
of thyristors, and therefore, increases the regenerated power. Furthermore, it also reduces the difference in the average output voltage between the continuous and discontinuous conductions for the same a. Thus the change in the average output
voltage from continuous to discontinuous conduction is not as abrupt as in the absence of the extended gate pulses. 5 In view of these advantages, it may be u ~
use gate pulses of a duration greater than 7T instead of a duration of (7T - a) as
shown in figure 3.7b. However, the use of extended gate pulses results in the application of a gate signal when thyristors are reverse biased. This increases the reverse
leakage current through thyristors.
3.3.2 Steady-State
Motor
Performance
Equations
For the purpose of analysis, the following assumptions are made:

1. Thyristors are ideal switches-that
is, they have no voltage drop when conducting and no leakage current when blocking. The main implication of this
assumption is that the rectifier voltage drop and losses are neglected. This assumption should not be used with low-voltage motors.
2. The armature resistance and inductance are constant. The skin effect, which is
present due to a ripple in the motor current, does alter the value of the resis-
Rectifier Control of BC Motors
78
tance. It is difficult to account for this variation.

is neglected here.
Chap.3
Since the variation is small, it
3. During a given steady-state
operation, the motor speed is constant. The motor

torque does fluctuate due to the ripple in the motor current. Because the mechanical time constant is very large compared to the period of current ripple,
the fluctuation in speed is in fact negligible. At constant speed, one can assume
the back ernf E is an ideal direct voltage for a given steady-state operation.
4. Source inductance is negligible.

For all the modes described in the previous section, each period of the rectifier
output voltage consists of one or two of the following intervals:
1. Duty Interval: When any one pair of thyristors is on and the ac source is connected to the motor. In this case the motor terminal voltage is Vs when T and
T3 conduct and =v, when T2 and T4 conduct.
2. Zero-current
Interval: During this interval,

motor terminal voltage is E.
The following
intervals:
equations
Duty Interval.
describe
the armature current is zero and 'U1e
the motor operation
for the duty and zero-current
When T and T3 conduct

dia
Va= L aili
+ R'ala + KWm
= V'm SIO wt
(3.4)
When T 2 and T 4 conduct

dia
Va = L aili
+ R'ala + KWm = - V'm SIO wt
(3.5)
Zero-current 1nterval.
i, = O
and
(3.6)
Va = KWm
(3.7)
where K is the motor back ernf constant given by equation (2.6).

Mode 1 [Fig. 3.8a}:
Each cycle of the output voltage consists of only a duty
interval. For the output voltage cycle from a to (7T + a), equation (3.4) is applicable. Solution of equation (3.4) may be considered to have two components, one due
to the ac source, (Vm/Z) sin(wt - "') and the other due to the back emf, (- Kwm/Ra).
Each of these components has in tum a transient component. Let these be represented by a single exponent term K exp( -tITa)' then,
ia(wt) = ~m sin(wt - "') - K;m
+ k
exp( -t/TJ,
for a::;; wt::;;
(7T
+ a)
(3.8)
Sec.3.3
Rectifier-Fed Separately Excited Motor
79
where
Z = [Ri + (wLJ2]1/2
(3.9)
La/Ra
tan-1(wLa/RJ
(3.10)
Ta =
t/I =
(3.11)
and k 1 is a constant.
In the steady-state
ia(a) = ia(1T
+ a)
(3.12)
The solution of equation (3.8), subject to the constraint (3.12), gives the following
steady-state express ion of current:
. ( )_ v, [ . (
".)
la
'1'
wt - -Z
SIn
wt -
t/I) exp{(a - wt) cot

(
".)
- exp -1T cot '1'
a::5 wt::5 (1T + a)
2 sin(a 1
for
t/I}]
KWm
- -R
(3.13)
Since the flux is constant, the average motor torque depends only on the de cornponent (average value) of arrnature current, la. The ac components produce only pulsating torques with a zero average value. Therefore, the motor torque T, is given by
T,
= KIa
(3.14)
la can be obtained from the following expression:

1
la = -
1T
J1T+a
ia(wt) d(wt)
This equation yields a long express ion for la. A simple expression can be obtained
using the following equation:
Average motor terminal voltage Va = average voltage drop across R,
+ average voltage drop across La + back emf
Now Va
= -1 J1T+a
1T
Vm sin wt d(wt)
2V
--1!!
1T
cos a
VaoCOS a
(3.15)
(3.16)
(3.17)
(3.18)
Rectifier Control of DC 'Motors
80
Chap. 3
Thus the steady-state average voltage drop across the inductance is always zero.
Substituting from equations (3.17) and (3.18) into equation (3.15) gives
(3.19)
Equation (3.19) is val id for the steady-state operation
converter.
of a de motor fed by any
I = (2Vrn!7r) cos a - KWrn

a
Ra
Substituting
from equation (3.20) into equation
gives the relation between speed and torque,
(3.20)
(3.14) and rearranging
2Vrn
Ra
Wrn= 7TK cos a - K2 T,
the terms
(3.2 )
Mode II [Fig. 3.8b):

Each cycle of the output voltage consists'of a duty interval and a zero-current intervalo For the output voltage cycle from a to (7T+ a),
the duty interval is from a to f3 and the zero-current interval from f3 to (7T+ a). The
current expression for the duty interval is obtained by subjecting equation (3.8) to
the initial condition ia(a) = O. Thus we get
ia(wt) = ~rn [sin(wt - t/J) - sin(a - t/J) exp{(a - wt) cot
t/J}]
(3.22)
t/J}]
- K;rn [1 - exp{(a - wt) cot
for a:S wt:s f3
Since ia(f3) = O, we have from equation
(3.22)
Vrn sin(f3 - t/J) - KWrn + [KWrn - Vrn sin(a -
s,
a,
t/J)] exp{(a - (3) cot t/J} = O

(3.23)
f3 can be evaluated by the solution of the transcedental
equatiori (3.23).
Now
!U: v:
Va =
sin wtd(wt)
7T+a Ed(wt)]
13
Vrn(cos a - cos (3) + (7T+ a - (3)Kwrn

7T
From equations
(3.24)
(3.19) and (3.24),
I = Vrn(cos a - cos (3) - (f3 - a)Kwrn

a
7TRa
For given a and wrn, f3 is obtained from equation

obtained from equations (3.25) and (3.14), respectively.
(3.23);
(3.25)
la and then T, are
Sec.3.3
Substitution
relation
from equation
Rectifier-Fed Separately Excited Motor'
81
(3.14) yields the speed-torque
_ Vrn(cos a - cos (3) _

7TRa T
Wm K(,8 - a)
K2(,B - a) a
(3.26)
Mode 111 [Fig. 3.8c}:

Each cycle of the output voltage consists of two duty
intervals and a zero-current
interval. The output voltage cycle from y to (7T + y)
consists of a duty interval from y to 7T+ a with Va = vs' another duty interval from
(1T + a) to ,8 with Va= -vs'
and a zero-current interval from ,8 to (7T+ y). The CUfrent expression for the interval y ~ wt ~ (1T + a) is obtained by subjecting equation (3.8) to the initial condition i(y) = O. Thus we get
ia(wt) = ~rn [sin(wt - t/J) - sin(y ~ t/J) exp{(y - cot) cot t/J}]
(3.27)
for y ~ wt -s 7T+ a
- K;rn [1 - exp{(y - cot) cot t/J}]

a
From equation
(3.27)
ia(7T+ a) = - ~rn [sin(a - t/J)
+ sin(y
+a-
- t/J) exp{ -(7T
y) cot t/J}]
(3.28)
- KWrn[l
Ra
Solving
gives
equation
(3.5),
subjected
ia(wt) = - ~rn[sin(wt - t/J)
+ sin(y
- exp{-(7T + a - y) cot t/J}]
to the initial condition
+ 2 sino - t/J)
given in equation- (3.28),
exp{(7T + a - wt) cot I/J}
- t/J) exp{(i - wt) cot t/J}]
(3.29)
for (7T+ a) ~ wt ~,8
- K;rn [1 - exp{(y - wt) cot t/J}] ,

a
Since ia = O at ,8, equation

VZrn[sin(,B- t/J)
+2
(3.29) yields.
sino - t/J) exp{(7T + a - (3) cot t/J}

(3.30)
+ sin(y
- t/J) exp{(y -,8)
cot I/J}]
+ K;rn
[1 - exp{(y - (3) cot t/J}]
=O
,8 can be eva1uated by the solution of equation (3.30).

Now,
Va
[f1T+a
7T
=-
Vrn sin wtd(wt)
Vrn(2 cos a
cos y
ff3
1T+a
cos (3)
7T
Vrn sin wtd(wt)
e7T + y - ,8)Kwrn
f1T+Y
f3
Ed(wt)]
(3.31)
82
Rectifier Control of DC Motor
From equations
Chap.3
(3. 19) and (3: 31)

I = Vm(2 cos a + cos y + cos f3) + (y. - f3)Kwm
a
7TRa
(3.32)
For given a and Wm, {3 can be obtained from equation (3.30). la and then T, can be
obtained from equations (3.32) and (3.14), respective1y.
Substitution from equation (3.32) into equation (3.14) yields the speed torque
relation
Wm
Vm
(
= ({3_ y)K 2 cos a
+ cos
+ cos
)
7TRa
{3 - K2({3 _ y) T,
(3.33)
Mode IV [Fig. 3.8dJ: This mode is identical to mode II. In this mode current
begins to flow at y instead of at a as in mode 11. The relevant equations for ths
mode are obtained by replacing a by y in equations (3.23), (3.25), and (3.26). This
yie1ds
'
V m . (~
-smfJ-!fJ
KWm
---+
n,
m
[KW
V
----smy-!fJ
Ra
)]
exp {( y-{3
cot
=0
I = Vm(cos y - cos f3) - ({3- y)Kwm

a
7TRa
Wm
Vm(cos y - cos f3)

K({3 - y)
7TRa
K2({3 - y) T,
{3 can be eva1uated from equation (3.34), and la and T, can be calculated

tions (3.35) and (3.14), respectively.
(3.34)
(3.35)
(3.36)
from equa-
Mode V [Fig. 3.9aJ and Mode VI [Fig. 3.9bJ: Modes V"and 1 and modes VI
and 11 are identica1 except that the back emf has a negative sign for modes V and VI.
When the braking operation is obtained without a change in the armature connection, the negative E is obtained either due to K being negative or Wm being negative.
The negative K is obtained by the field reversa1, which gives operation in the second
quadrant; and the negative Wm is 'obtained by the speed reversa1, which gives operation in the fourth quadrant. When braking is obtained by the reversa1 of the armature
connection, the net effect is the same as field reversal, and therefore, K can be considered negative. Equations (3.13), (3.14), (3.20), and (3.21) are val id for mode V,
and equations (3.14) and (3.22) to (3.26) are valid for mode VI when appropriate
signs are used for K, Wm, la' and Ta.
Mode VII [Fig. 3.9cJ:
This mode is obtained
pulses are present. The cycle of the output voltage from
duty interval from y' to a with Va = -vs' another duty
Va = vs, and a zero-current
interval from {3 to (7T + y').
intervals is described by the following equations:
L di,
.
aili+Ra1a+
Wm=-
V'
msmwt
only when extended gate

y' to (7T + y') consists of a
interval from a to {3 with
The operation in the duty
fory:5wt:5a
(3.37)
Sec.3.3
La ~it
+ Raia + KWm = Ym sin wt
83
(3.38)
for a ~ wt ~ f3
In equations (3.37) and (3.38), K or Wm will have a negative value depending on

whether the braking operation is in the second or the fourth quadrant.
ia(a) can be obtained frorn the solution of equation (3.37) with the initial condition ia(y') = O. Equation (3.38) can then be sol ved with ia(a) as the initial condition.
Substituting wt = f3 in this solution and noting that ia(f3) = O, gives the following equation frorn which f3 can be evaluated:
~m [sin(f3 - t/J)
sin(y'
- t/J) exp{(y'
- f3) cot t/J} -
2 sin(a - t/J)
(3.39)
exp{(a
- f3) cot t/J}] -
K;m [1 - exp{(y'
- f3) cot t/J}]
= O
Now,
Ya =
[Jy~(-Ym
= -[Ym(2
7T
sin wt)d(wt)
+ J:
v, sin
wtd(wt)
Y
+ J,81T+ ' KWmd(wt)]
cos a - cos y' - cos f3) + KWmC7T + y' - f3)]
(3.40)
(3. 19) and (3.40),
Frorn equations
la
= -R
7T
[Ym(2 cos a - cos y' - cos f3) + Kwm(y' - f3)]
(3.41 )
(3.41) and (3.14)
From equations
= _ Ym (2
Wm
cos a - GOS y' - cos f3) +

7TRa T
(y' - f3)
K2(y' - f3) a
(3.42)
3.3.3 Mode Idntification

For the given values of a and wm, the torque can be calculated by the appraach described in section 3.3.2 if the mode of operation is known. This is done using the
following logic for the motoring and braking operations.
Motoring
1. Check whether a is greater or les s than y.
2. If a> y, assume ia(a) = O and calculate ia(7T+ a) from equation
(3.22). A
negative value of ia(7T+ a) indicates that the current has ceased to flow before
(7T+ a). Thus, if ia(7T+ a) < O, it is mode TI; otherwise, mode 1.
3. If a < y, assume ia(Y)
= O and calculate ia(7T + a) frorn equation (3.27). If

ia(7T + a) ~ O, it is mode IY. If ia(7T + a) > O, calculate
ia(7T + y) from
equation (3.29). If ia(7T + y) < O, it is mode III; otherwise, mode 1.
84
Regenerative
Chap. 3
Braking
1. Check whether a is greater or less than y' .

2. If a < y', assume iaCa) = O and ca1culate iaC-7T
+ a) from equation C3.22). If
iaC7T
+ a) < O, it is mode VI, otherwise, mode V.
3. If a > y' , assume iaCy') = O and calculate iaC7T
+ y') from equations (3.37) and
C3.38). If iaC7T
+ y') < O, it is mode VII; otherwise, mode V.
3.3.4 Speed-Torque
Characteristics
The speed-torque curves of a 2.2 kW, 1500 rpm de motor fed by a l-phase fuIly controIled rectifier with an ac source voltage of 230 V, 50 Hz are shown in figure 3.10
for quadrants I and IV. The regions of continuous and discontinuous conductions and
the modes of operation have been marked.
The ideal no-load speed is obtained when la = O. For firing angles from O to
7T/2, la becomes zero when the back ernf E becomes equal to the peak of the source
voltage, Vm For firing angles >7T/2, la becomes zero when E = Vm sina. Thus the
ideal no-load speed Wmo is given by the foIlowing equations:
O:s a:S 7T/2
Vm sina
K
7T/2:S a:S 7T
C3.43)
C3.44)
The maximum average terminal voltage, 2Vm/7T, is chosen equal to the rated motor
voltage. The ideal no-load speed of the motor when fed by a perfect direct voltage
equal to the rated value will then be 2Vm/7TK. It is interesting to note that the maximum no-Ioad speed with rectifier control is 7T/2 times this value.
The boundary between continuous and discontinuous conductions is shown by
a dotted line (fig. 3.10). For torques less than the rated value, a low-power drive operates predominantly in the discontinuous conduction. In continuous conduction, the
speed-torque characteristics are paraIlel straight lines, whose slope, according to
equation (3.21), depends on the armature circuit resistance Ra. The effect of discontinuous conduction is to make the speed regulation poor. This behavior can be explained from the waveforms of figures 3.8 and 3.9. In continuous conduction, for a
given a, any increase in load causes E and Wm to drop so that la and Ta can increase.
The average terminal voltage Va remains constant. On the other hand, in discontinuous conduction, any increase in load, and the accompanied increase in la causes (3 to
increase. Consequently Va reduces, and the speed drops by a larger amount than in
the case of continuous conduction. Other disadvantages of discontinuous conduction
are the nonlinear transfer characteristics of the con verter and the slower transient response of the drive.
The boundary between continuous and discontinuous conductions is obtained
as detailed in the foIlowing section.
At the boundary, the mnimum value of instantaneous current and the duration
of the zero-current interval are zero. When operating in mode II, an increase in load
Sec.3.3
Excited Motor
85
2000
1500
Boundary between continuous

and discontinuous
conductions
Q=
0
15
30
45
500
60
e-E
30
.,,-
Q)
Q)
75
a.
T N-m
(J)
V
90
-500
105
V
-1000
Continuous
conduction
120
135
V
-1500
VII
V
150
165
180
-2000
Figure 3.10
Speed-torque characteristics for a l-phase fulIy-controlIed rectifier drive,
I-VI denote mode of operation.
increases la and angle f3. The drive enters the continuous conduction mode I when
f3 = (7T + a). Substituting f3 = (7T + a) in equation (3_23) and rearranging the terrns
~~
w
me
RaVm
ZK
. (
",) [1 + exp( -7T cot tfJ)]

exp( -7T cot tfJ) - 1
=--sma-'I'
for motoring when a > 'Y (3,45)
where Wmc is the critical speed (speed on the boundary).

When working in mode IV, an increase in load shifts the operation to mode III.
Further increase in load increases f3. The drive enters the continuous conduction
86
Chap. 3
mode 1 when 3 = ('TT' + y). Substituting 3 = ('TT' + y) in equation (3.30) and rearranging the terms gives
W
_ RaVm[ . (
./,) + {2 sin(a -1/1) exp{(a - y) cot I/I}]
--S1Oy-",
me ZK
exp( -'TT' cot 1/1) - 1
(3.46)
for motoring when a < y

In figure 3.10, mode VI is for the operation in the fourth quadrant for which
the speed is negative. Modes VI and II are identical, except that the speed is negative for mode VI. Therefore, equation (3.45) is also applicable to mode VI.
When operating in mode VII, for a given a, an increase in la increases 3 and
the boundary between continuous and discontinuous conductions is reached when
3 = 'TT' + y'. Substituting 3 = 'TT' + y' in equation (3.39) and rearranging the terms
yields
a.v, [ . ('
= --
me
KZ
S10 y
./,)
- '"
2 sin(a -1/1) exp{(a - 'TT' - y) cot I/I}]

exp( -'TT' cot 1/1) - 1
(3.47)
for braking when a > y'

Torques on the boundary can be calculated from equation (3.21) for all the
foregoing cases.
lt is useful to obtain boundaries on the normalized speed-torque plane for various values of 1/1. These boundaries provide results applicable to any separately excited dc motor. They are obtained as follows:
For the normalization, the base voltage VB is taken to be equal to the maximum average con verter output voltage Vao (equation (3.16. Thus,
Base voltage VB= Vao=
2V
---...!!!
(3.48a)
'TT'
The base current lB is chosen to be equal to the average current that will flow
through the motor when Wm = O and Va = VB. Thus,
v;
Base current lB =-R
Now, the normalized speed
wrnn is
W
2Vm
=-R
'TT'
(3.48b)
given by
'TT'E
=-=-=-rnn VB Vao 2Vm
(3.49)
And the normalized torque Tan is given by

la
la
'TT'Ra
(J
Tan= lan = lB = (Vao/RJ = 2Vm 1
(3.50)
Further
(3.51a)
Sec.3.3
Excited Motor
87
and
(3.51 b)
Substituting from equations (3.48) to (3.50) into equations (3.45) to (3.47) and
equation (3.21), and rearranging the terms gives,
_
7T
wmen- -2 cos
1/1
sino -
1/1)
[1 - exp( -7T cot 1/1)]

(
1/1)
exp -7T cot
- 1
(3.52)
for motoring when a > )' and braking when a < )"
_
wmen-
7T
-2 cos
,1,[ . (
'1'
Sin)' -
,1,)
'1'
{2 sin(a - 1/1) exp{(a - )') cot

(
)
exp -7T cot 1/1 - 1
1/1}]
(3.53)
for motoring when a < )'.

_
1T
wmen- -2 cos
,1,[ . ('
'1'
Sin)' -
,1,)
'1' -
2 sin(a -
1/1)
exp
exp{(a - 7T -)')
cot
)
-7T
cot 1/1 - 1
for braking with a >)"

Wmen=
1/1}]
(3.54)
cos a - Ten
(3.55)
where
Wmenand Ten denote normalized speeds and torques on the boundary.

Figure 3.15 shows the boundaries (dotted lines) on the normalized speedtorque plane for various values of 1/110. Discontinuous conduction takes place to the
left of a boundary. These boundaries are useful in identifying the regions of continuous and discontinuous conductions for any separately excited motor fed by a l-phase
fully controlled rectifier. The boundaries show that the region of discontinuous conduction can be reduced by increasing the value of 1/1. The value of 1/1 can be increased
by adding a filter inductor in the armature circuit of the motor. As explained earlier,
discontinuous conduction has a number of disadvantages such as poor speed regulation; nonlinear transfer characteristic of the rectifier, and poor transient response.
Therefore, a filter inductor is sometimes added to reduce the zone of discontinuous
conduction. However, the addition of the fi!ter inductance increases the losses,
armature circuit time constant, noise, and cost, weight, and volume of the drive.
Example 3.1
.
A 220 V, 1500 rpm, 11.6 A separately excited motor is controIled by a l-phase fullycontrolled rectifier with an ac source voltage of 230 V, 50 Hz. Enough filter inductance
is added to ensure continuous conduction for any torque greater than 25 percent of rated
torque, R. = 2f1.
1. What should be the value of the firing angle to get the rated torque at 1000 rpm?
2. Ca1culate the firing angle for the rated braking torque and -1500 rpm.
3. Ca1culate the motor speed at the rated torque and a = 160 for the regenerative
braking in the second quadrant.
0
88
Chap.3
Solution:
Vm = 230\12 = 325.27 V
E = 220 - 11.6
Cm=
2 = 196.8 V
1500 x 27T
60
= 157 rad/sec .
K = E/Cm = 196.8/157 = 1.25

For continuous conduction, from equation (3.20),
2V
cos el!= laRa + E
7T
(E3.1)
---2!!
1. At the rated torque la = 11.6 A

Back ernf at 1000 rpm = El = (1000/1500)
From equation (E3.1)
2 X 325.27
---cos el!= 11.6
7T
or
cosel!=0.75
+ 131.2 = 154.4
or
el!=41.8.
2. For the speed of -1500 rpm, E = -196.8

From equation (E3.1)
2 X 325.27
---cos el!= 11.6
7T
or
cos el!= -0.84
196.8 = 131.2 V
V.
2 - 196.8 = -173.6
or
el!= 147
3. From equation (E3.1) for el!= 160 and la = 11.6 A

2 X 325.27
---cos 160 = 11.6
7T
+ E or E = -217.78 V
Forward regeneration is obtained either by the field reversal or the armature reversal
for which
K = -1.25
Now
Cm=
K=
-217.78
-1.25
174.2 rad/sec .
= 1663.8 rpm
Example 3.2
Let the motor of example 3.1 have La = 28.36 mH. Calculate motor torques for the following cases:
1.
2.
3.
4.
el!=
el!=
el!=
el!=
60 and speed = 400 rpm

60 and speed = 995 rpm
150 and speed = -640 rpm
130 and speed = -1600 rpm
Sec.3.3
Rectifier-Fed Separately Excited Motor"
Solution: From example 3. 1,

Rated speed = 1500 rpm = 157 rad/see., E at 1500 rpm = 196.8 V
K = 1.25
W
= 27Tf= 27TX 50 = 1OO7T

rad/see .
17T
x 28.36
2
wL.
I/J=tan-1R=tan-1
10-3
=1.35rad
77.350
eot I/J= 0.22

Z = [R;
+ (WLJ2]1/2 = [(2)2 + ('00~~8.36)T/2
= 9.130
Vm = 230Y2 = 3563
9.13
1. E = (400/1500)
x 196.8 = 52.5 V, Wrn = 400 x 27T/60 = 41.9 rad/sec.
K;rn = 1.25 ~ 41.9 = 26.2

a
. lE.
'Y = sin" -=
Vrn
52.5
sin" I ---=
230Y2
9 . 30
Sinee a> 'Y, the system may operate in mode 1 or mode II.
i.(7T+ a)..= 35.63[0.3
+ 0.3 x 0.5] - 26.2[1 - 0.5] = 2.9A
Since i.(7T+ a) > O, the motor operates in the eontinuous eonduetion mode 1.
~ 2 x 230Y2
o
2
41. 9 - 7TXI. 25 eos 60 - -(1.5
2)2 T.
whieh gives T. = 32 N-m.
2. E = (995/1500) x 196.8 = 130.5 V,
Wrn
= 995 x 27T/60 = 104.2 rad/see.
KWrn = 1.25 x 104.2 = 65.1

R.
2
. - lE.
'Y = sm
-
Vrn
5
= sm - I ---130. = 23 .70
230Y2
Sinee a> 'Y the drive may operate in mode 1 or mode II.
i.(7T+ a) = 35.63[0.3
+ 0.3 x 0.5] - 65.1[1 - 0.5] = -16.5A
89
90
Chap.3
Since i.(7T+ a) < O, the motor operates in the discontinuous conduction mode Il. The
torque which is given by equation (3.26) can be calculated if f3 is known.
35.63 sin(f3 - 77.35) - 65.1
+ [65.1 - 35.63 x (-0.3)]

-f3) XO.22}=0
exp{(;
or
35.63 sin(f3 -77.35)
+ 75.8 exp{ (; - f3) x 0.22}
Solution of this equation by trial and error gives

104 2
.
= 230V2(cos
60 - cos 215)
1.25(3.75-7T/3)
65.1
f3 = 215 or 3.75 rad.
7Tx2
(1.25)2(3.75 -7T/3)
r,
which gives T. = 15.4 N-m.

3. Since CUm is -ve, and a> 90, the motor is operating in the fourth quadrant, in one
of the regenerative braking modes V to VII, and K is positive.
640
E = - 1500 x 196.8 = -84V;
K;m = 1.25;
-67
CUm
640 X 27T
60
= -67 rad/sec.
-41.9
y/
= 7T- sin-1(IEI/V ) = 7T- Sin-l(~)

m
230V2
= 165
Since a < y/ the drive may operate either in mode V or VI.

i.(7T+ a)'= 35.63[ -0.95 - 0.95 x 0.5]
+ (41.9) (1 - 0.5)
-30A
Since i.(7T+ a) < O, the motor operates in the dicontinuous conduction mode VI.
35.63 sin(f3 - 77.35)
+ 41.9 + [-41.9 - 35.63 x 0.95]

exp[
or
35.63 sin(f3 - 77.35) - 75.8 exp[ (5; -
Solution of this equation by trial and error gives

-67
f3) x 0.22]
(5;- f3)
=
-41.9
f3 = 238 or 4.15 rad.
230V2 (cos 150 - cos 238)

7Tx 2
1.25(4.15 _ 2.62)
- (1.25)2(4.15 - 2.62) T.
which gives T.
= 3.74
N-m.
x 0.22]
Sec.3.3
l-Phase
Fully-Controlled
91
4. As wm is negative and ex> 90, the motor is operating in the fourth quadrant and K
is positive.
1600
E = -1500 x 196.8
y'
= 1T -
sin-1C/EI/Vm)
-209.9
= 1T -
V,
Wm
1600 x
30
sin-I(209.9/230Y2)
1T
-167.55 rad/sec.
139.8.
Since ex < y', possible modes are V and VI
K;m = 1.25 x (-167.55}/2
-104.7 .

i.(1T
+ ex) = 35.63[ -0.795 - 0.795 x 0.5] + 104.7[1 - 0.5]
9.86A
Since i.(1T + ex) > O this is a continuous conduction mode V.

-167.55
which gives T.
2 x 230Y2
2
1T x 1.25 cos 130 - (1.25)2 T.
47.7 N-m.
Example 3.3
For the motor of example 3.1, ca1culate the speed and torque on the boundary between
continuous and discontinuous conductions for ex = 60.
Solution:
W

=
2 x 35.63 sin(600 _ 77.350) [1 + exp( -1T x 0.22)]

1.25
exp( -1T x 0.22) - 1
51.3 rad/sec.
me
490 rpm
Since equation (3.45) is valid only when ex> y, we should check this condition
E = Kwmc
y
1.25 x 51.3
..
64.1
sin " --230Y2
64.1 V
11.4
thus ex> y
Now from equation (3.21),
51.3 =
2 x 230Y2
2
25 cos 60 - -( 2)2 T,e
1T X l.
l. 5
which gives T.e = 24.6 N-m.

Example 3.4
For the converter motor system of example 3.1, calcu1ate the firing angles for the following points:
1. T,
2. T,
3. T,
30 N-m and N = 424 rpm

32 N-m and N = -1178 rpm
= 20 N-m and N = 733 rpm
where N is the speed in rpm. L, is 28.36 rnH.
92
Chap.3
Solution: From examples 3.1 and 3.2, E at 1500 rpm = 196.8, K = 1.25, W = lOO7T
rad/sec, Ym/Z = 35.6 A, tjJ = 1.35 rad or 77.35, cot tjJ ~ 0.22.
Before a can be calculated, the modes of operation must be identified. This can
be done from figure 3. 15 as follows:
2
= 7TKwm= 7TK. 7TN= 7T X 1.25N = 6.32 X 1O-4N
mn
2Ym
2Ym 30
= 7TRa.Ta =
T
In
2Ym K
60 X 230\12
T = 7.73 x 1O-3T
1.25 a
a
7TX 2
2X230\l2x
For the foregoing points, the normalized values are
= 0.27
Wmn= -0.74
1. Tan = 0.23
2. Tan = 0.247
3. Tan = 0.15
Wmn
Wmn=
0.46
Figure 3. 15a shows that the points 1 and 2 lie

continuous and discontinuous conductions for tjJ
ates in continuous conduction at these points.
conduction at point 3 because it is on the left of
lation for each point separately.
on the right of the boundary between

= 1.35, and, therefore, the drive oper-
The drive operates in discontinuous

the boundary. Now consider the calcu-
1. From (3.21),
424 x 7T 2 X 230v2
30
= 7Tx 1.25
which gives cos a
COf.
0.50 or a
2
a - (1.25)2 X 30
60.
2. Again from equation (3.21)

1178 x 7T 2 x 230v2.
2x 32
30
= ir x 1.25 cos a - (1.25)2
which gives cos a
-0.5
or a
120.
3. Equation (3.19) is valid both for continuous and discontinuous conductions.

From this equation
Ya = I.Ra + E
r,
20
= K R, + E = 1.25 x 2 + 96.2 = 128.2 Y.
In the present case the conduction is discontinuous. The drive may operate in modes II
or IV. As a first approximation, a is calculated assuming continuous conduction. Thus,
2Ym
cos a
7T
128.2
or
cos a
= 128.2 x 7T = 0.62
2 x 230v2
or
= 51.7
Sec.3.3
Excited Motor
93
Now
Thus the approximate value of a, calculated assuming continuous conduction, is

greater than y. The effect of discontinuous conduction is to increase Y. for a given a or
increase a for a given y a- Therefore, the actual value of a must be greater than 51.7.
And hence the drive will be operating in mode 1I.
Substituting known values in equations (3.23) and (3.26) gives
35.63 sin(,8 - 77.35)
+ [48 - 35.63 sin(aO - 77.35)]

exp{(a - ,B) x 0.22} = 48
325.27(cos aO - cos ,80) - 96.2(,8 - a)
100.53
(E3.2)
(E3.3)
Simultaneous solution of equations (E3.2) and (E3.3) gives

a
60
and
,80 = 228.
3.3.5 Rectifier with Controlled
Flywheelings-10
The output voltage wavefonns of a single-phase fully-controlled rectifier have both

positive and negative excursions. Since the current in the rectifier is always positive,
the energy flows from the source to the load during a positive excursion and from
the load to the source during a negative excursion. Thus, a negative excursion of the
voltage during rectification produces energy which flows back and forth between the
source and the loado It is nothing but reactive energy. Similarly, a positive excursion
of the voltage during inversion produces the reactive energy. Hence, negative excursions of voltage during rectification and positive excursions of voltage during inversion cause a large amount of reactive power to be drawn from the source,
particularly at low output voltages. In controlled flywheeling, negative excursions of
the output voltage during rectification and positive excursions of the output voltage
during inversion are eliminated by diverting the load current from the source to the
freewheeling paths fonned by the series connected thyristor pairs TI' T 4 and T 2, T 3.
This gives rise to a considerable improvement in the rectifier power factor and the
motor performance. The rectifier power circuit remains the same as shown in
figure 3.7.
The principIe of controlled flywheeling is explained with the help of the wavefonns of figure 3.11. The thyristor gate pulses are shown in figure 3. II a and the
load voltage wavefonn under the assumption of continuous conduction is shown in
figure 3.11b. The thyristor pair T, T3 is tumed on at u, connecting the source to the
loado At an angle 7T + Un' T4 is gated, which tums on T4 and tums off T3. The load
current now freewheels through the thyristor pair TI, T 4. In rectification, Un is made
zero and the output voltage variation is obtained by varying U from O to 7T. In inversion, U is made equal to 180 - 8, where 8 is a small angle required for the safe
cornmutation of thyristors. The variation of output voltage is obtained by controlling
Un from O to 7T. The load voltage wavefonns
for rectification and inversion are
shown in figures 3.12a and 3.13a, respectively.
94
"'1
Of
1f
1f+Of
Of
1f
1f+Of
'" 1
21f
r==:
21f
Chap. 3
wt
wt
Q3
Ofn
1f
'''6
o
1f +
1r
',~
Ofn
21f
wt
21f
wt
/21f
I
wt
+ an
(a)
-v,
/'-,
V,
-r>;
/
/
I
Ofn
Of
1f
+ Ofn
1f
1f
+ Of
/
/
/1
I I
/
I
... ... /
-v,
... ... /
v,
(b)
Figure 3.11
PrincipIe
of controlled
flywheeling.
The modes of operation of a separately excited motor fed by a rectifier with the
controlled flywheeling are shown in figures 3.12 and 3. 13 for motoring and regenerative braking, respectively. The same notations have been used as listed in section 3.3.1. These modes can be explained following the arguments mentioned for the
conventional operation of the rectifier in section 3.3.1. Each period of the motor terminal voltage may consist of any two or three from among the duty, freewheeling,
and zero-current intervals. The motor operation for the duty and zero-current inter-
Sec.3.3
T3, T2
Rectifier-Fed
Separately
Excited Motor
95
T" T4
L_T_,::..,...;T
3!.-_
T2' T4
~~----~--~----~---E
wt
(a) Mode I,
a>
or
< 'Y
(b] Mode Il,
a>
'Y
T'~L-_T.!.:.',_T'='3_T....J'~'--T-2-'T-4-
wt
(e) Mode III, a
< 'Y
(d) Mode IV, a
Figure 3.12
Modes of operation for motoring of de separately
I-phase reetifier with eontrolled flywheeling with an = 1T.
< 'Y
exeited motor-fed
by
vals is described by equations (3.4) to (3.7). The following equation describes the
operation for the freewheeling interval:
dia.
La dt
Rala
+ KWm
= Va = O
(3.56)
The performance equations for various modes of operation can be derived in

the same way as for the conventional operation of the rectifier in section 3.3.2. The
important equations are given next.
Motoring
Operation
The current is continuous in mode 1, and a can be greater or less than y. The current
is discontinuous in modes 11to IV, mode 11is for a > y, and modes III and IV are
for a <y.
96
wt
wt
"'n > or < 'Y'
(a) Mode V,
(b) Mode VI, "'n
(e) Mode
Chap. 3
< 'Y'
vrr, "'n > 'Y'
Figure 3.13 Modes of operation for regenerative braking of separately excited motorfed by l-phase rectifier with controlled fIywheeling with a = (7T - 8).
Mode 1 [Fig. 3.12a):

Va
=~
~
1T
'"
V m sin wt d(wt) = V m (1 + cos a)

~
= V2ao(1 + cos
a)
(3.57)
From equations (3.14), (3.19), and (3.57),
v; (1 + cos a) --Ta,
w m = -~K
K2
(3.58)
Mode 1I [Fig. 3.12b):

Here the current may become zero in the freewheeling
interval (f3 >~) or in the duty interval (f3 < rr). Figure 3.12b has been drawn for the
fonner case.
Sec.3.3
Case l. B> n:
Solving
(3.4) with the initial condition
equation
97
ia(a) = O
gives
ia(wt) = ~m [sin(wt - I/J) - sin(a - I/J) exp{(a - wt) cot I/J}]
(3.59)
- K;m [1 - exp{(a - wt) cot I/J}],
a:5 wt:5 7T
ia(7T) is obtained by substituting wt = 7T in equation

with ia(7T) as the initial condition gives
(3.59). Solving equation (3.56)
ia(wt) = ~m [sin I/J exp{(7T - wt) cot I/J} - sino - I/J) . exp{(a - it) cot I/J}]
(3.60)
[l - exp[Io - it) cot I/J}],
- ~m
7T:5 wt:5
/3
An equation for /3 is obtained by substitution

Now
Va=7T
[f1T
Vm(l
of wt = /3 and i, = O in equation (3.60).
Vm sin wtd(wt)
+ cos
a)
j(1T+al]
+ f3
+ (7T+ a
Kwmd(wt)
- f3)Kwm
7T
from
equations
(3.14), (3.19), and (3.61),

Vm(I
Wm
+ cos
a)
(3.62)
K(/3'- a)
< tt:
An equation
and ia = O in equation
(3.59). Now,
Case 2. fJ
for /3 is obtained
1 [ff3
Va = 7T a Vm sin wt d(wt)
_ Vm(cos a - cos f3)
by the substitution
of wt = /3
j(7T+al] KWm d(wt)
+ f3
(7T + a - f3)Kwm
7T
From equations
(3.61)
(3.63)
(3.14), (3.19), and (3.63)

_ Vm(cos a - cos f3) _
7TRa
T
K(f3 - a)
K2(/3 - a) a
Wm -
(3.64)
Mode 111 [Fig. 3.12c]:

Here ia starts flowing at y compared to at a in
mode 11. Therefore, the expressions for ia for the intervals y:5 wt :5 7Tand 7T:5 wt :5
(7T+ a) are obtained by replacing a with y in equations (3.59) and (3.60), respec-
98
tively. Solving equation (3.5) with the value of ia(7T+ a), obtained
equation, as the initial condition gives
Chap.3
from the later
ia(wt) = ~m [sin t/J exp{(7T - wt) cot t/J}- sin(a - t/J) exp{(7T + a - wt) cot t/J}
- sin(y - t/J) exp{(t/J - wt) cot t/J}- sin(wt - t/J)]
(3,65)
(7T+ a) :5 wt:5 /3
- K;m [1 - exp{(y - wt) cot t/J}],

a
An equation for /3 is obtained from equation (3.65) by substituting

Now
1 [f1T
Va = 7T
_ Vm(I
Vm sin wt d(wt)
ff3
- Vm sin wt d(wt) +
1T+cr
+ cos
+ cos /3 + cos
a)
+ KWm(7T + y
wt
ia = O.
f1T+Y
]
KWm d(wt)
f3
- f3)
(3.66)
7T
From equations
= /3 and
(3.14), (3.15), and (3.66)

Vm(l
Wm
+ cos a + cos /3 + cos
y)
7TRa
- K2(f3 _ y)
K(/3 _ y)
(3.67)
Mode IV [Fig. 3.12d]: As in mode II, the current may become zero either
before 7T or after 7T. Equations _for this mode are obtained by replacing a with y in
equations (3.59) to (3.64).
Regenerative Braking
Here either Wm will be negative (fourth
(second quadrant operation with the field
assumed to be zero and therefore a = .7T.
it is discontinuous in modes -VI and VII.
quadrant operation) or K-will be negative

or armature reversal). For the analysis, o is
While the current is continuous in mode V,
For mode VI, an < y', and for mode VII,
an>y'.
Mode V [Fig. 3.13a]: A cycle of the output voltage from an to 7T+ an consists of a freewheeling interval from an to 7T and a duty interval from 7T to 7T+ an
with va = vS Therefore,
1 f1T+crn
Va = 7T 1T
From equations
Vm sin wtd(wt)
= - --'!!(I - cos
7T
an)
(3.68)
(3.14), (3.19), and (3.68),

Wm
v, (
= - 7TK 1 - cos
an
) Kr, R,
-
(3.69)
Mode VI [Fig. 3.J3b]:

A cycle of the output voltage from an to 7T+ an consists of a freewheeling
interval from an to 7T, a duty interval from 7T to /3 with
Va = vs' and a zero-current interval from /3 to 7T+ an0 An expression for ia for the interval an:5 wt:5 7T is obtained from the solution of equation (3.56) with the initial
Sec.3.3
Rectifier-Fed
Separately
Excited Motor
condition ia(an) = O. iaC7T)can be obtained from this expression.

equation (3.4) with ia(7T) as the initial current gives
99
Then the solution of
ia(wt) = ~rn [sin(wt - t/J) - sin t/J exp{(7T - wt) cot t/J}]
(3.70)
7T:5 wt:5 f3
- K;rn [1 - exp[Io', - rt) cot t/J}],

a
An equation for f3 can be obtained

tion (3.70). Now
1
Va = 7T
[f{3
11'
_ -Vrn(l
by the substitution
Vrn sin wtd(wt)
+ cos
f3)
rrr+an]
+ J{3
= f3 and
of wt
ia = O in equa-
Kwrnd(wt)
(3.71)
+ (7T+ an - f3)Kwrn
7T
(3.14), (3.19), and (3.71)
From equations
__
+ cos f3) _
Vrn(l
rn -
(f3 - an)K
7TRa
K2(f3 _ an)
(3.72)
Mode VII [Fig. 3.13c}:

A cycle of the output voltage from y' to 7T + y' consists of a duty interval from y' to an with va = =v. a freewheeling interval from an
to 7T, a duty interval from 7Tto f3 with va = vs' and a zero-current interval from f3 to
7T + y'. Solution of equations (3.5), (3.56), and (3.4) for the intervals y' :5 wt :5 an,
an :5 wt :5 7T and 7T :5 wt :5 f3, respectively, with the initial condition ia(y') = O
gives the following express ion for the current:
+ sin(y'
ia(wt) = ~rn [sin(wt - t/J)

- sin(an
.- t/J) exp{(y' - wt) cot t/J}
t/J) exp{(an
- sin t/J exp{(7T - it) cot

- K;rn
wt) cot t/J}
(3.73)
t/J}]
[1 - exp{(y' - wt) cot t/J}],
7T:5 wt:5 f3
An equation for f3 can be obtained

tion (3.73). Now
1
Va = 7T
[fay'n
_ - VrnO
by the substitution
Vrn sin wtd(wt)
+ cos
y'
+ cos f3 -
f{3 Vrn sin

11'
cos an)
of wt = f3 and i, = O in equa-
wtd(wt)
+ KWrn(7T + y'
7T
(1I'+Y']
+ J{3
- f3)
Kwrnd(wt)
(3.74)
From equations (3.14), (3.19), and (3.74)

VrnO
rn =
+ cos
y' + cos f3 - cos an)

K(f3 - y')
(3.75)
100
Chap.3
The nature of speed-torque characteristics s shown in figure 3.14 for various values
of a and an0 For the motoring operation, no-load speeds are given by equations (3.43)
and (3.44); and for the braking operation, the no-load speed is O for all an0
The boundaries between continuous and discontinuous conductions on the normalized speed-torque plane are shown in figure 3.15b for different values of t/J. 10
Normalization has been done using the same base values as in equations (3.48) to
(3.51). A comparison of these boundaries with those of figure 3.15a for the conventional operation (without flywheeling) shows a considerable reduction in the zone of
discontinuous conduction for the controlled flywheeling.
Example 3.5
Repeat example 3.4 for a rectifier with controlled flywheeling.
Solution:
The normalized values of torque and speed have been obtained in exarnpie 3.4. From the boundary for 1fJ = 1.35 rad. in figure 3.15b, it is found that all the three
points provide continuous conduction. Now consider the calculation for each point
separately.
424 x
30
230\12
x 1.25 (l
1T
= 1T
which gives cos a
+ cos a) - (1.2W x 30
= O or a = 90 and always an = O for motoring.
2. At this point the drive works in mode V. From equation (3.69),

1178 x
30
1T
which gives an
230\12
x 1.25 (l
= - 1T
90 and always a
+ cos
=
an)
2 x 32
(l.25)2
180 for braking.
Continuous
conduction
Discontinuous
conduction
",=(180-6)0
Rated
~'T
,
./
-=!:..n...:.._
'" = 90
T,
'" = (180 _ 6)
"'n = (180 -1"

Figure 3.14 Speed-torque characteristics
of l-phase rectifier drive with controlled
flywheeling.
Seco 3.4
1.0
\"
\\
1-Phase Half-Controlled
Rectifier-Fed
Separately
Excited
Motor
101
1.0
,,,~~
...
"''''
, ' ',<'~ .
\
0.6
",',~
,
,
,
,
"
\, ,\ \\ \ \ "<~
'~,~~ t
\
....
0.6
0.2
\ ~
\~
I~
\:;
\.~ \
I~
t"
\j\
I
,
-0.2
I
I
I
-1.0
ITen'
"
I
I
I
I
I
J /
-0.6
0.2
,
,
I
I
I
I
I
/'
0.2
0.0
I------t--.l...-~I--+---'--,.-----'--\-0.1
,;s
\'<b
O~~~--L--~--~-
0.3 \
I
I
\
,
I
I
,1
"
-0.2
I
-0.6
/'
I
,
,1
/
/
I ,~ ,," ","".".'" -:
I ~ ", .",""
--'
.", _--'
,
".
.",
__
(a) Conventional
-1.0
(b) Controlled
control
flywheeling
Figure 3.15
Boundaries between continuous and discontinuous conductions for l-phase fullycontrolled rectifier on norrnalised speed (wmn) and torque (Tn) plane; Wmn = E/(2Yrn/rr) and Tan =
Ia/(2Yrn/rrRJ.
3. Again from equation (3.58)

733 X
30
11" =
which gives cos
230V2 (l
1.25
+ cos
11" X
a =
0.24 or
a =
2_
(l.2W
a) __
20
76 and for motoring an is always O.
3.4 1-PHASE HALF-CONTROLLED

RECTIFIER-FED
SEPARATELV EXCITED MOTOR
When regenerative braking is not required, the motor is fed by a half-controlled rectifier (fig. 3.4b), which is cheaper than a fully-controlled rectifier. The modes of operation and various waveforms of a half-controlled rectifier drive are identical to
modes I to IV of figure 3.12, which are for the motoring operation of the fully-controlled rectifier drive with controlled flywheeling, except that different devices conduct during the various intervals. The equations derived in section 3.3.5' are also
applicable. The speed-torque characteristics are the same as shown in the first quadrant of figure 3.14. The half-controlled rectifierdrive has all the advantages of the
102
Chap.3
fully-controlled rectifier drive with controlled flywheeling except that regenerative

braking is not possible.
3.5 3-PHASE FULLY-CONTROLLED RECTIFIER-FED

SEPARATELY EXCITED MOTOR11
3.5.1 Conventional Operation of the Rectifier
The most widely used de drive is the three-phase fully-controlled (6-pulse) bridge
rectifier fed de separately excited motor drive shown in figure 3.16. The present section considers the conventional operation of the rectifier. The operation with controlled flywheeling is considered in the next section.
Thyristors are fired in the sequence they are numbered, with a phase difference
of 60 The line commutation of an odd-numbered thyristor occurs with the turning
on of the next odd-nurnbered thyristor. The same is true for even-nurnbered thyristorso Consequently, each thyristor conducts for 120 and only two thyristors conduct
at a time-one
odd-numbered and one even-numbered.
The transfer of current from an outgoing to incoming thyristor can take place
when the respective line voltage is of such a polarity that not only does it forward
bias the incoming thyristor but it also leads to reverse biasing of the outgoing thyristor when the incoming thyristor turns on. Thus, the firing angle for a thyristor is
measured from the instant when the respective line voltage is zero and increasing.
For example, the transfer of current from thyristor T 5 to thyristor TI can occur as
long as the line voltage vAC is positive. Hence, for thyristor TI, the firing angle ex is
meagured from the instant vAC = O and increasing as shown in figure 3.16. Each firing pulse is of 120 duration and shifted to vary the firing angle from Oto (180
<,
where <> is a small positive angle required for the commutation of thyristors. If the
line voltage vAB is taken as the reference voltage, then
0
VAB
Vm sin wt
(3.76)
and
ex
= wt-7T/3
(3.77)
The drive has the same number of and similar modes of operation as the 1phase fully-controlled rectifier-fed drive with the conventional operation (figs. 3.8
and 3.9). The discontinuous conduction modes for the motoring operation with
ex < y (corresponding to modes III and IV of fig. 3.8) and for the regenerative braking with ex > y' (corresponding to mode VII of fig. 3.9) occur in a very narrow range
of operation and can be ignored without any appreciable loss of accuracy in the calculation of the drive performance. The remaining four modes of operation are shown
in figure 3.17. Modes I and III are continuous conduction modes and modes 11and
IV are discontinuous conduction modes for the motoring and braking operations, respectively.
Sec.3.5
i.l
i.
r--
- -l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
V.
I
I
I
I
I
L __
21r
i.~
i.2
1r/3
I
71'
21r
Ir
21r
Ir
21r
Ir
21r
Ir
21r
Ir
21r
i:t
i:t
i:t
i.6
Figure 3.16
Mode I [Fig. 3.17a}:

7r/3 to wt = a + 27r/3,
Va
fCl+21T/3
7r
"'+1T/3
=-
E = KWm
1
..1
wt
vAC
vea
-+-Cl----,I
, ..
I
I
I
-__
Motor
6-pulse fully controlled rectifier
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R.
103
wt
wt
wt
wt
wt
wt
3-phase fully-eontrolled reetifier-fed de motor.
For the converter output voltage cycle frorn wt
Vm sin wtd(wt}
=-
tt
cos a
m
Vao cos a
= a+
(3.78)
104
~.
r,
Chap.3
1_--,
TI
T=-6-:--C_T...: :....-_...J
2
(a) Mode 1
7r/3
7r/3
wt
(b) Mode 11
{3
7r
27r
wt
T3
=:J
.,...
T.
l
O
\
(e) Mode III
wt
\
\
\
\
I--+--/-+-~-
(d) Mode IV
Figure 3.17
de motor.
Modes of operation of 3-phase fully-eontrolled reetifier-fed
Sec.3.5
Excited Motor
105
where Vao = 3Vmlrr

3Vm
Wm
Mode 11 [Fig. 3.17b}:
Ra
(3.79)
= 7TK cos a - K2 Ta
For the rectifier output voltage cycle from a + 7T/3 to
a + 27T/3
di,
va= L ad+
R'a1a+ Kwm= V'mSlOwt,
(7T)
a+
~wt~fJ a
(3.80)
Solution of equation (3.80) with the initial condition i.(a + 7T/3) = O gives
i.(wt)
~m [sin(wt -~)
- sin(
- K;.m [1 - exp{
(a
+ ; -~)
exp{
(a
+ ; - wt) cot
~}l
(3.81 )
+ ; - wt) cot ~}]
Since ia(l3) = O, from equation (3.81)

~m[sin(3-~)-Sin(a+;
-~)
=
13 can
-13)
exp{(a+;
K~m [1 - exp{
(a
cot~}]
(3.82)
+ ; -
13)
cot ~}]
be obtained by the solution of equation (3.82). Now

3
Va =7T
=
[ff3
.Vm sin
wtd(wt) +
<>+1T/3
![
Vm{cos ( a + ;)
f<>+21T/3]
Kwmd(wt)
(3
- cos
13} +
(3.83)
KWm ( a + 2; -
13) ]
Vm{cos(a + 7T/3) - cos 3}

K(13 - a - 7T/3)
(3.84)
The examination of the waveforms of Vaand ia for modes I and III shows that they
are govemed by the same equations. Therefore, equations (3.78) and (3.79) are also
applicable to mode III. Since mode III is for regenerative braking operation for
which E is negative, speed should be taken negative for the fourth-quadrant operation and K should be taken negative for the second-quadrant operation, as explained
in section 3.3.2.
What has been said about modes I and III is also true for modes 11 and IV.
Therefore equations (3.80) to (3.84) are applicable to mode IV when appropriate
signs are used for Wm and K.
The speed-torque characteristics of a 2.2 kW, 1500 rpm de motor fed by a 3phase fully-controlled rectifier with an ac source voltage of 170.3 V (line), 50 Hz is
shown in figure 3.18. The regions of continuous and discontinuous conducjions and
Chap. 3
Rectifier control of DC Motors
106
1800
1500
1200
900
600
300
E
e-
ic.
'"
U'l
-300
-600
-900
-1200
-1500
170
-1800
FigU'" 3.1'
spoed-to,que eutve' 01
.3-0"''' fully_eontrolled teetifiel drive-
the mode, 01 oper.tio have been marked. Comparison 01 mese eharac,eristie, with
,ho,e 01 figure 3. lOo,hows a eon,ider.ble reduetion in the zooe 01 di.cootiouou,
a"''' 16 rad . nd
,.dians. Thus, the no-Io.d speed' are giveo
Then.ide.1 00- [oad opera'ion is obtaioed wheo E ~ Ym for O'"

conductio
E ~ Ym sin,a + ,(/3) for
,,/6 '" a"'''
by the following equations:
(3.85)
(3.86)
Sec.3.5
Rectifier-Fed
Separately
Excited Motor
107
A comparison of equations (3.44) and (3.86) and figures 3.10 and 3.18 shows that,
unlike in the single-phase case, no-load speeds can be negative also (for 27r/3 < ex < rr).
When operating in mode 1I, the motor torque increases {3. The boundary between discontinuous and continuous conductions is reached when {3 =ex + 27r/3.
Substitution of this value of {3 in equation (3.82) gives an express ion for the critical
speed Wmc' The critical torque T ac is obtained from equation (3.79).
Figure 3.21 shows the boundaries between continuous and discontinuous conductions on the normalized speed-torque plane for different values of t/J. 11 In drawing
these boundaries all the modes have been taken into account.
For normalization, the base voltage VB is taken to be equal to the maximum
(average) converteroutput voltage Vao[equation (3.78)]. The base current lB is chosen
to be equal to the average motor current that will flow when Wm = O and Va = VB
Thus,
VB
= Vao= 3Vm
7r
Thus the normalized speed

lowing equations:
W
mn
E
VB
Wmn
and
(3.87)
and the normalized torque Tan are given by the fol-
E
7rE
Vao 3Vm'
=-=-=--
(3.88)
These boundaries are helpful in calculating the motor performance and selecting a value of the filter inductance which will allow the discontinuous conduction to
be eliminated for the drive's steady-state operation.
Example 3.6
A 220 V, 1500 rpm de motor has the armature resistance and inductance of 2 n and
28.36 rnH, respectively. It is controlled by a 3-phase fully-controlled rectifier from an
ac source operating at 50 Hz.
1. CaIculate the ac source voltage required to get the rated voltage across the
motor terminal s when operating in continuous conduction.
2. For the ac source voltage obtained in 1, caIculate the motor speed for the
following points:
(a) ex = 60, T. = LO N-m
(b) a = 60, T. = 20.0 N-m
(e) a = 120, T. = 20.0 N-m
Solution: 1.
2. Before the speed can be obtained for a given a and T., one must know the
mode of operation. For this the critical torque is evaluated. Then if the given
torque is greater than the critica!, the conduction will be continuous; otherwise,
discontinuous.
108
Chap.3

Substitution of {3= el +
21T
/3 in equation (3.82) and rearranging the terms gives
=RaVm[Sin(el+3f-tJ)-Sin(el+~-tJ)exp(-~cottJ)l
me
K Z
(E3.4)
cot tJ)
1 _ exp( _;
From exarnples 3.1 and 3.2

K = 1.25,
a
= 60: Substituting
mc
tJ = 1.35 rad
Z= 9.130,
or
77.35
and
cot tJ = 0.22.
the known values in equation (E3.4) gives
= 2 X 162.9V2 [sin(I02.650) - sin(42.65) x 0.794)

1.25 x 9.13
1- 0.794
= 85.8 rad/sec .
3
1 = Va
_V
K Wmc = _1T
COS
R.
ac
el - KWme
R,
3
-162.9V2
cos 60 - 1.25 x 85.8
1T
2
= 1.37A
T"" = K
1.37 = 1.25
1.37 = 1.71 N-m.
Comparison of torques at points (a) and (b) with Tae shows that the drive operates in
discontinuous conduction at (a) and in continuous conduction at (b).
a
Wme
= Uoo:
= 2 X 162.9V2 [sin(l62.650) - sin(l02.65)
1.25 X 9.13
1 - 0.794
= -93.4
0.794]
.
rad/sec .
2.
162.9V2
1T
rae=
cos 120-1.25
x (-93.4)
= 3.376A
Tae = 4.22 N-m.

Since the torque at point (e) is greater than Tae, the drive operates in continuous conduction. Having identified the modes of operation, torques are calculated as follows:
(a) The drive operates in the discontinuous conduction mode Il. From equation (3.82)
2~~~~8 [sin(f30 - 77.35) - sin 42.65 exp{
e;-
{3) x 0.22}]
- 1.2~wm[1 _ exp{(21T/3 - f3) x 0.22}] =
or
25.23[sin(f3 - 77.35) - 1.074 exp( -0.22{3)]
- 0.625wm[I - 1.5853 exp( -0.22{3)] =
(E3.5)
Sec.3.5
Rectifier-Fed
Separately
Excited Motor
109
or
230.38 (-0.5 - cos f30)

(f3 - 21T/3)
1T X 2
1':25
Wm
Wm
(cos f30 + 0.5)

= 184.3 (21T/3 - f3)
x (1.25)2 (f3.- 21T/3)
1.34
(E3.6)
+ (21T/3 - f3)
Iterative solution of equations (E3.5) and (E3.6) gives

f30 = 165.26
and
Wm
= 107.55 rad/sec
or
1027 rpm.
(b) From equation (3.79)

= 3
Wm
230.38 cos 60 __ 2_
1T X 1.25
(1.25)2
= 62.4 rad/sec.
or
20
596 rpm
(e) Again from (3.79)

Wm
3 x 230.38
2 x 20
= 1T X 1.25 cos 120 - (1.25)2
=-I13.6rad/sec.
or
-1085rpm
Example 3.7
The motor of example 3.6 now drives a load whose torque is constant and independent
of speed for a given setting. The minimum value of the load torque is 1.0 N-m. What
inductance must be added to the armature circuit to get continuous conduction for all
operating points?
Solution:
From equation (3.88) the normalized value of torque corresponding to 1 N-m

1TRa
Tan= 3V m
(TK) = 3 x1T230.38
2 x 1.25l = 0.0073
a\
For the elimination of discontinuous conduction, the straight line Tan= 0.0073 should
be on the right of the boundary between continuous and discontinuous conductions.
According to figure 3.21 this is achieved when !/J= 1.5 rad or 85.94. Since
.
wL
!/J=tan-l_a.
Ra
La = w tan !/J= 21T X 50 tan 85.94 = 89.77 mH

External inductance required = 89.77 - 28.36 = 61.4 mH.
3.5.2 Operation with Controlled Flywheeling8,
12, 13
The use of controlled flywheeling is beneficial in improving the power factor, and in
reducing armature current ripple and the region of discontinuous conduction. The
power circuit remains the same as shown in figure 3.16. As in the case of a singlephase fully-controlled rectifier, the controlled flywheeling in a 3-phase fullycontrolled rectifier is implemented by eliminating negative excursions of the output
voltage in rectification and positive excursions of the output voltage in inversion by
110
Chap.3
diverting the armature current to one of the three freewheeling paths formed by
thyristor pairs TI T4, T) T6 and T, T2; for equalloading they are used alternately.
The transfer of the armature current to a freewheeling path is obtained by generating
suitably timed additional gate pulses.
For firing angles less than 60, the instantaneous output voltage of the rectifier
is always positive, and for firing angles greater than 120, it is always negative;
therefore, controlled flywheeling cannot be used. For the firing angle range from 60
Lo
ia
..
wt
'Ir
2'1r
'Ir
2'1r
wt
'Ir
2'1r
wt
f--a---j
ia21
ia3
'Ir/3
ia41
'Ir
I
I
a5U
o
'Ir
wt
2'1r
wt
2'1r
wt
'Ir
"
',\/\/
AB
y'
--......
/'
AC
"
\/
BA
'>:
)</
"
\/
BC
--, ,,--,
""'-.......
y"
2'1r
ia61
CB
~an
:~
i
".--,
\,
\
/>
\/
CA
",--..
>;
\/
"
/
,,
'/
I
I
wt
Figure 3.19 Firing schemes for regions II and III.
Sec.3.5
Excited Motor.
111
to 1200'the instantaneous output voltage has both positive and negative excursions,
and therefore, controlled flywheeling can be used.
Controlled
flywheeling
can be implemented
using the approach shown in
figure 3.19. For wt < a, the motor current is freewheeling through the thyristor pair
T3, T6. At a, TI is gated. Since vAB is positive, TI turns on and T3 turns off, and a
voltage vAB is applied across the motor. At angle an, T4 is gated. Since VBAis positive, T4 turns on and T6 turns off, and the motor current now flows through the freewheeling path formed by the thyristor pair TI, T4. For the motoring operation, an is
fixed at O and varation in the output voltage is obtained by controlling a frorn 'TT'/3
to (2'TT'/3 - 8), where 8 is a small angle required for the cornmutation of thyristors.
For regenerative
braking, a is fixed at (2'TT'/3 - 8) and an is controlled frorn O to
'TT'/3. The output voltage and current waveforms under continuous conduction for the
motoring and braking operations are shown in figures 3.20a and 3.20c, respectively,
The wide pulses shown in figure 3.19 have a duration of 2'TT'/3.
The drive operates in four distinct regions, which are listed in table 3.1.
Regions I and 11 are for the motoring operation and regions III and IV are for the
braking operation. Region I is for the range of a from O to 60 for which the controlled flywheeling cannot be used. The narrow pulses which control an can either
be blanked or can be retained with an = O. Their presence has no effect on the converter operation. In the continuous conduction, the average output voltage vares
frorn 1 per unit to 0.5 per unit. In region 11, the output voltage vares frorn 0.5 per
unit to O. Here the narrow pulses are set to make an = O, and a is controlled by shifting the wide pulses. In region I1I, the wide pulses are set to make a = (2'TT'/3 - 8),
and an is controlled from O to 'TT'/3 to vary the output voltage from O to -0.5 per
unit. In region IV, the output voltage is controlled from -0.5 per unit to -1 per unit
by blanking the narrow pulses and controlling a from 120 to (180 - 8). The same
result is obtained by keeping a = (2'TT'/3 - 8) and varying an from 'TT'/3 ~o 2'TT'/3.
The drive has 12 modes of operation. 13 If the modes which occur in the narrow
range of operation are ignored, one is left with 8 modes of operation. For regions 1
and IV, themodes
are the same as modes I to IV shown in figure 3. 17 for the conventional operation of the converter, and equations (3.76) to (3.84) are applicable.
The remaining four modes, for operations in Regions 11 and I1I, are shown in figure 3.20. The performance equations for these modes can be derived in the same
way as for modes 1, 11, V, and VI (figs. 3.12 and 3.13) of the single-phase converter
with controlled flywheeling. Some important equations are derived next.
Mode V [Fig. 3.20a}:

Va =-
f1T
'TT'
for 'TT'/3:5 a:5
2'TT'/3
Vrn sin wtd(wt)
(3.89)
ah/3
+cos(a+
=3~rn[1
;)]
=Vao[l
+cos(a+
;)]
where Vao = 3Vrn/'TT'

3Vrn [ 1 + cos ('TT')]
w = -a +m
'TT'K
a,
--T
K2
(3.90)
112
Chap.3
~T2~T4~T6
T.
--'x"'--' ...--")(",,-,
/<
'b /'
"1l
CJ
"1 1
>-/--
-r :
>:
CJ /
~I
1
'< /'
"
'bl
I
-,
CJI
'bl/
VI
(a) Mode V
i.
2 'Ir
'Ir
r-a--i
T,
T,
T,
T.
wt
T.
T.
(b) Mode VI
E
wt
.,..
wt
'Ir
(e) Mode VII
1
/
1
/
/
'/
,/
,
/
'Y
..CB /X .....AB
7.....AC ,X .....
BC " .....BA
--'"
--
,,/,
--"
--
,
.,."
wt
(d) Mode VIII
Figure 3.20 Modes of operation of de drive fed by 3-phase reetifier with

eontrolled flywheeling.
Sec.3.5
Rectifier-Fed
Separately
113
Excited Motor
TABLE 3.1
Drive
Operation
Region of
Operation
Range of a
I
II
Motoring
III
Regeneration
IV
Regeneration
Range of an
0<a<rr/3
rr/3 < a < 2rr/3
Motoring
e;-8)
an =0
either
or
2rr/3 < a < tr
rr/3 < an < 2rr/3
0< an < rr/3
Mode VI [Fig. 3.20b]:

for 7T/3 ~ a ~ 27T/3
Replacing a by a + 7T/3 in eqn. (3.60) yields
ia(wt) = ~m [Sin
t/J exp{(7T - wt)
exp{ (
a+ ;
cot
wt) cot
t/J} -
sin(a
t/J}] -
K~m [1 - exp{
7T~ wt ~
An equation for
tion (3.91). Now
f3
is obtained
+ 7T/3 - t/J)
(a + ;
wt) cot
f3
t/J} ] '
(3.91)
by the substitution
of wt
= f3
and ia
= O in
equa-
(3.92)
From equations
(3.14),
(3.19) and (3.92),
= Ym[1
+ cos(a+7T/3)]
f3 - a - 7T/3
7TRaTa
3K2(f3 - a - 7T/3)
(3.93)
Mode VII [Fig. 3.20c]:
for O ~ an ~ 7T/3
For an output voltage cycle from 7Tto 47T/3,
Ya =
-3
f1T+an
7T 1T
Ym sin wt d(wt)
=-
3Y
----.!!!
7T
(1 - cos an)
(3.94)
Thus
(3.95)
114
Chap.3
Mode VIII [Fig. 3.20d):

for 0::5 cxn::5 7T/3
Equation (3.56) is app1icab1e from 7T+ CXn to 47T/3. The operation in the inter.
val 47T/3 to {3is described by the following equation:
Va= VAC= Vrn sin(wt - 7T/3) = La
47T
::5 wt
3
~t+ Raia + Kwrn,
::5
{3
(3.96)
ia(47T/3) is obtained from the solution of equation (3.56) with the initial condition
ia(7T+ CXn) = O. Solution of equation (3.96) with ia(47T/3) as the initial condition gives
ia(wt) = ~rn [sin(wt - ; -~)
(7-
- sin ~ exp{
wt) cot ~}]

(3.97)
- K;rn[1_
exp{(cxn+ 7T- wt) cot ~}]
An equation for {3 is obtained by the substitution of wt = {3 and ia = O in equation (3.97). For an output voltage cycle from 47T/3 to 57T/3,
Va =
[ff3
7T
v; sin(wt -7T/3)d(wt)
+ fa
4~3
+41T/3
KWrnd(wt)]
f3
![-
Vrn{1+ cos({3- 7T/3)} + KWrn(
CXn
+ 4; - {3)]
(3.98)

w
= _
m
Vrn[1 + cos({3- 7T/3)]

K
({3- 7T- cxn)
7TRa
T
3K2(cxn - {3+ 7T) a
(3.99)
It shou1d be nosed that modes VII and VIII are for regenerative braking and
therefore K shou1d be taken negative for the operation in the second quadrant, and
Wm shou1d be taken negative for the operation in the fourth quadrant.
The speed-torque characteristics have essentially the same nature as for the 1phase fully-controlled rectifier with controlled flywhee1ing, except that the discontinuous conduction occurs in a very narrow region and for 7T/3 < CXn < 27T/3 ideal
no-load speeds are negative.
The boundaries between discontinuous and continuous conductions on the norma1ized speed-torque p1ane were obtained taking into account a11the 12 modes of
operation." These are plotted in figure 3.21. Speeds and torques have been normalized using equations (3.87) and (3.88). Comparison of these boundaries with those
for the conventional operation shows that discontinuous conduction is considerab1y
reduced by contro11ed flywhee1ing.
3.5.3 Operation with a Freewheeling Diode
When regenerative braking is not required, a freewhee1ing diode is added to the
fully-controlled rectifier giving a circuit as shown in figure 3.4e. The operation of
this circuit is identical to the motoring operation of the fully-controlled rectifier with
the contro11ed flywheeling. Therefore, the performance equations derived for the
Sec.3.6
Armature
Current Ripple and Its Effect on Motor Performance
115
1.0
0.6
,
'
'\
)1
0.2
tE
:\
\
\
\,
Y Y
/ .
/ ~ . v-::: ';(~'Y'
t:--. /.;.::::r_~~-:.::::::;:::::'i
\
.
l.
'~
-0.2
.'
\'
t
1\/,
>
/
/
I
I
/
l'
I
I
0.031
I
I
Tan
-----
/
I
I
I
\
\
A
/
,1
I
I
,0.02
'~~'::::---I-.;;:::::
."
~ '~ . .~f::::::::',-!-- .
~~"......_0.Q11
,,
\\
/'
4.;--- ~-
'
I
I
I
I
/
-0.6
-1.0
---
Conventional
_.-
Controlled
Common
control
tlywheeling
(CC)
(CF)
tor both CC and CF
Figure 3.21 Boundary curves separating the regions of continuous and discontinuous conductions for 3-phase rectifier drives, Wmn = E/(3V m/n), Tan =
Ia/(3V m/nRa).
motoring operation in section 3.5.2 are valid for this circuit also. The only advantage this circuit has over the fully-controlled rectifier with the contralled flywheeling
is that the control circuit is simpler.
3.6 ARMATURE CURRENT RIPPLE ANO IT5 EFFECT

ON MOTOR PERFORMANCE
The performance of a converter-controlled de motor is significantly different frorn
the de motor fed by a source of smooth direct voltage. Two major differences are the
presence of discontinuous conduction and the ripple in the armature current. Discontinuous conduction has been discussed in the previous sections. The present section
considers the effect of ripple on motor performance.
116
Chap.3
<1>.
wt
(al
(b)
Figure 3.22 Armature current ripple

and its effect on cornmutation.
A typical armature current wavefonn is shown in figure 3.22a. lt can be considered to have an ac ripple superimposed on a de component la. The ripple in the
armature current ~ia is defined by the following equation:
(3.100)
where iamaJ<
and iaminare respectively the maximum and minimum instantaneous values of the armature current.
3.6.1 Effect on Motor
Performance
In the case of a de motor fed by a smooth direct voltage, the average, rms, and peak
values of the armature current are the same. When the motor is controlled by a rectifier, due to the presence of ripple, the rms and peak values of the armature current,
Ir and iamaJ<'
respectively, have higher values than the average value la. While la contributes, to the torque, Ir is responsible for heat loss in the armature resistance, and
iamaJ<
is a measure of the burden on the motor cornrnutation. Furthennore, due to the
skin effect, the armature resistance at ripple frequency is higher than its de value.
Due to the larger values of Ir and the armature resistance, the armature copper loss is
considerably increased. There is also a slight increase in the core los s due to the
presence of ripple.
Another important point to be noted is about the interpole winding heating.
The interpole winding is in series with the armature winding and hence the increase
in the losses in the interpole winding and the consequent temperature rise of the interpole winding can become an important problem because, unlike the armature
winding, the interpole winding is stationary.
The motor commutation problem becomes severe not only because the peak
current iaro.is higher than la but also because the pulsating interpole flux produces
eddy currents in the solid iron yoke, which damp the commutating flux and cause it
to be phase displaced in time after the armature current. The armature and the interpole ripple current are represented by a vector lac in figure 3.22b. The flux <l>alags
the current vector by an angle cJ> deterrnined by the eddy currents. The speed ernf Es
is in phase with <1>a.The reactance voltage which is equal and opposite to Es in the
absence of eddy currents, is shown as a vector E; The result of Es and E, is the un-
Sec.3.6
Armature
117
compensated voltage Eun and gives a measure of the difficulty in commutation. For
satisfactory commutation, the uncompensated voltage Eun must be restricted
fraction of one volt. Conventional motors are designed with a solid yoke. In these
machines the phase angle between I.e and <1>.can be as high as 45 to 50, thus causing severe commutation problems. The phase angle can be reduced to 10 to 15 by
the use of a laminated yoke. This improves the motor-commutation capability in the
presence of ripple. In view of this, de mach~nes for rectifier control are designed
with a laminated yoke.
The motor efficiency is reduced and the motor has to be derated in the presence of ripple due to the reasons just mentioned. At present, some motor manufacturers specify the maximum allowable value of ripple expressed as a percentage of
the rated current. When the ripple is less than this value, full name plate rating can
be used, and for higher values the motor should be derated.
As the rectifier pulse number is increased, the frequency of the rectifier output
voltage ripple increases and its magnitude decreases. The arrnature circuit reactance
increases directly with the increase in frequency, and hence, the current ripple decreases with the increase in the rectifier pulse number. Therefore, the derating of a
dc motor fed by a three-phase rectifier is much less compared to one fed by a singlephase rectifier. The ripple can also be reduced by connecting a filter inductor in the
arrnature circuit. This will also reduce the discontinuous conduction and en-able the
drive to experience a step change in load without a large surge of current. But this
increases the arrnature time constant of the motor, which slows down the transient
response. Furtherrnore, the filter inductor also increases the cost, weight, volume,
power loss, and noise in the drive. Hence, often high ripple is preferred to the presence of a filter inductor.
toa
3.6.2 Calculation of the Maximum Current Ripple

and the Selection of Filter Inductance
The discussion in section 3.6.1 suggests that the arrnature current ripple should be
restricted below a permissible limit. When the ripple is more than the prescribed
limit, it should be reduced either by increasing the rectifier pulse number or by
adding a filter inductor.
As long as the arrnature current is discontinuous, the current ripple, for a given
firing angle, depends on the back emf. When the arrnature current is continuous, any
change in the motor back emf causes change only in the de component of the armature current, and therefore, the ripple becomes independent of back emf and speed.
For a particular firing angle, the ripple becomes maximum and remains constant
when the current is continuous. Therefore, it is adequate to know the ripple for the
continuous conduction modes. For a given a, one can identify the regions in which
the current will have the maximum and minimum values. The minimum and rnaximum values can be obtained by the differentiation of the relevant arrnature current
expressions, and then the ripple can be calculated.
The variation of ripple with the converter output voltage for l-phase drives,
with and without controlled flywheeling, is shown in figure 3.23; where the normal-
118

Conventional
Controlled
Chap.3
control
flywheeling
0.5
.,.",..--
-----0.4
-----,
" ...
...
/~
/
/
/
,/ /
/ __
-1.0
_---------
";",
'"
-_
..:::--._._.__
-0.6
/.
0.2
'"
-7-.....
.
---.I__~
/
/
-----__
'\
..
<,
"",
........"
_.--,:;:,
".
.-.. .....:.~
......1/;,..--'
-0.2
--
_._.-'~~
0.2
.,
.~"
/'.
.~-~.--<, \0.1
--- _-----
~.-.........',
,.:~
/.
/'
__
'"
0.3
/I.~'-""".
,,
,
.1.
= 1.3
"'
'" 1.4
=
'"
= 1.5
0.6
1.0
Vap-
Figure 3.23 Nonnalised annature current ripple 6ian versus per unit output
voltage Vap for l-phase rectifier drives, 6ian = 6ia/(Vm/7TRa) and Vap = Val
(2Vml1T).
ized current ripple has been plotted against the per-unit output voltage for various
values of tJ. 10 The normalized ripple Llian is defined by the following equation:
(3.101)
The per-unit rectifier output voltage Vap is obtained by dividing the rectifier output
voltage by its maximum value 2VJ. giving
v -
Va _
ap-vao
Va
-2Vm/7r
Thus, from equation (3.16) for the conventional control

Vap = cos a
(3.102)
Also from equation (3.57) for the motoring operation with controlled flywheeling
Va = -1 ( 1 + cos a)
Vap = -v;
2
(3.103)
Figure 3.23 shows that the controlled flywheeling reduces the ripple by a large
amount at low speeds. The maximum ripple is also reduced substantially.
Sec.3.6
Armature
119
The nonnalized ripple versus per-unit output voltage plots for 3-phase rectifier
drives are shown in figure 3.24.1113 The nonnalized current ripple is given by equation (3.101). The per-unit output voltage is given by the following equation:
v -
Va _
Va
ap - V.o - 3Vm/1T
Thus, from equation (3.78) for the conventional control,

Vap = cos a
(3.104)
And from equations (3.78) and (3.89) for the motoring operation with the flywheeling
Vap = cos a
for
O :::; a :::;
1T /3
(3.105)
(3.106)
The curves of figures 3.23 and 3.24 are useful for calculating the derating of
the motor and detennining the filter inductance required to keep the ripple within
pennissible values. The curves are plotted only for three values of t/J. The intennediate values can be obtained by noting that the ripple changes linearly with tJi.IO.1I.13
Example 3.7
A 7.5 kW, 230 V, 850 rpm, 40 A dc separately excited motor has the armature resistance and inductance ofO.77 n and 11.8 mH, respectively. It is fed by a 3-phase fullycontrolled rectifier with an ac source voltage of 162.9 V (line) , 60 Hz. Obtain the
----
-1.0
-0.6
-0.2
V.
0.2
---
Conventional
---
Controlled
--
Common
control
(CC)
flywheeling
(CF)
for both CC and CF
--
0.6
1.0
_
P
Figure 3.24 Nonnalised armature current ripple 6ian versus per unit output
voltage for 3-phase rectifier drives; 6ian = ilia(Vm/lTRa)and Vap = Va/(3Vm/rr).
120
Ghap.3
maximum current ripple. What inductance must be added to the arrnature circuit to restrict the ripple to 5 percent of the rated current?
Solution:
./.
'I'=tan
-1
wLa
-=tan
Ra
-1
27TX 60 x 11.8 X 10-3

0.77
= 1.4 rad
From figure 3.24, for
A.
ula
ljJ
= 1.4, the maximum norrnalized ripple is 0.036:
Vm A.
162.9\1'2
=-R ulan =
O 77 x 0.036 = 3.43A
7T
7TX.
For 5 percent ripple ~i. = 0.05 x 40 = 2A

~i
= 7TRa~i = 7Tx 0.77 x 2 = 0.021

an Vm
a 162.9\1'2
From figure 3.24, for ~ian = 0.021,

R.
L a = -;;;
tan
ljJ
ljJ
= 1.47 rad or 84.2. Thus
0.77
8
O
= 2 x 67Ttan 4.2 = 2 .1 rnH
Inductance to be added = 20.1 - 11.8 = 8.3 rnH.

Example 3.8
Find out the therrnal derating of the motor of example 3.7 when fed by I-phase and
3-phase fully-controlled rectifiers. For both the rectifiers the input ac voltage is adjusted
to give 230 V across the motor for a = O. Assume rotationallosses to remain fixed.
Solution:
From example 3.7,
E=230-0.77x40=
ljJ
= 1.4 I!d
199.2 V
Power developed Pd = ExI. = 199.2 x 40 = 7.968 kW

Rotationalloss Pw = (7.968 - 7.5) kW = 468 W
Totalloss = 230 x 40 - 7.5 x 1Q3 = 1700 W
Sngle-Phase Rectifier: At full load Vap= I
From figure 3.23 for ljJ = 1.4 rad and Vap= 1, ~ian = 0.112. Now
2V
V =-- m cos a
a
7T
For a = O
230 = 2Vm
7T
A
ula
or
Vm = 361.3 V
Vm A
361.3
O
6
= -R ulan =
O 77 x .112 = I .73A
7T a
7TX.
RMS value of ~i. = 11.83A.
Sec.3.6
Armature
Current Ripple and It5 Effect on Motor Performance
121
To have the same thennalloading, the nns annature current should remain constant. If
la is the permissible average current then,
1; + (11.83)2 = 402
or
la = 38.21A
E = 230 - 38.21 X 0.77 = 200.58 V

Developed power, P, = 200.58 X 38.21 = 7664 W
Output power = Pd - P w = (7664 - 468)W = 7.196 kW
Percent derating = (7.196/7.5) X 100 = 96%
Three-Phase Rectifier: From figure 3.24 for 1jJ = 1.4 rad and Vap= 1, ~ian = 0.0054
For a = O, Va = 3Vm/7r or 230 = 3Vm/7r or Vm = 241 V
.
Vm.
241
~la = -R ~lan =
O 77 X 0.0054
tt a
7rX.
= 0.54A
= 0.38A(nns)
1;
Now
+ (0.3W = 402 or la = 40 A
Thus with a three-phase rectifier one is able to get nearly full output.
It may be noted that in this example we have not considered derating due to commutation.
Example 3.9
Find out the torque derating at zero speed for thernotor of example 3.7 when fed by a
1-phase fully-controlled rectifier with ac source voltage of 255.5 V, 60 Hz. Neglect
core loss and the annature reaction.
Solution: Speed in rad/sec. = 850 X 7r/30 = 89.01
Rated shaft torque = 7500/83.78 = 84.26 N-m
K
230 - 0.77 X 40 = 2 24
89.01
.
From example 3.7, 1jJ = 1.4 rad

For 1jJ = 1.4 and Vap= O from figure 3.23, ~ian = 0.268
.
Vm
255.5Y2
~la = -R ~lan =
O 77 X 0.268 = 40A
tt a
7rX.
RMS ripple
40/Y2=
28.28A
Since the core loss is negligible, the motor heating takes place only due to the copper
loss. Assuming cooling conditions remain unaffected, the pennissible value of la is
given by
1; + (28.28)2 = 402,
or
la = 28.29A
Since at zero speed, the rotational loss is zero, the shaft-torque will be the same as the
developed torque (assuming negligible Coulomb friction); thus,
The shaft torque at zero speed = K1a= 2.24 X 28.29 = 63.4 N-m
.
Derating of the torque at zero speed
63.4
6 X 100 = 75.24 percent.
4.2
= -8
122
Chap.3
3.7 RECTIFIER-SOURCE INTERACTION

Rectifiers have a poor power factor and draw nonsinusoidal current from the ac
source. In a weak source, with high internal impedance, the line current harrnonics
cause fluctuations of the source voltage. Furtherrnore, the temporary short-circuit of
the lines during the commutation of thyristors, causes sharp current pulses which
further distort the line voltage. The voltage fluctuations adversely affect other ioads
connected to the source. The line current harrnonics, particularly the sharp current
pulses, cause electromagnetic interference of nearby telephone lines and comrnunication equipment. A feedback of voltage fluctuations to the rectifier through the synchronizing signals may cause the drive to become unstable. The instability problem
is overcome by the use of firing schemes irnmune to voltage fluctuations.
For the calculation of the rectifier power factor, it is customary to assume that
the supply voltage is sinusoidal. This assumption is based on the fact that the total
capacity of the source is usually much larger than the loads drawing nonsinusoidal
current (including the rectifier) and that the lines connecting the rectifier with the
source have a low impedance.
The power factor (P.F.) of a l-phase rectifier is defined as
P.F.
VI cos <p
Vlnns
Real power
Apparent power
(3.107)
where
v = rrns source
voltage, V
Inns= rrns source current, A

I
fundamental component of source current, A

"""
<p = Phase difference between V and I

Therefore,
P.F.
(I/Inns) cos <PI
= J.L
COS
<PI
(3.108)
where J.L is called the distortion factor and COS<PI is called the displacement factor or
fundamental power factor. The distortion factor is a measure of the harrnonic content
in the source current.
.
An expression similar to equation (3.108) can be obtained for a three-phase
rectifier.
The source current i, can be described by the following Fourier series:
is =
2: a
sin nwt +
n=1
2: b, cos nwt
(3.109)
n=1
where
1
1
21T
a, = -1
7T
i, sin nwt d(wt)
(3.110)
is cos nwt d(wt)
(3.111)
21T
b,
= -1
7T
Sec.3.7
Rectifier-Source
123
Interaction
The rms value of the nth harmonic in the source current is given by
. 1
1 =-[a2+b2]112
Y2
The phase displacement of the nth harmonic
(3.112)
is given by
~n
_ b
~ = tan I-.!!
(3.113)
an
The individual harmonics, including the fundamental component 11, are obtained
from equations (3.110) through (3.113). The rms value of the current is obtained by
the following expression:
Inns
[2~
f7T i~ d(wt)JI2
(3.114)
In our analysis, thyristors and diodes have been assumed to be ideal switching
elements and this implies a lossless rectifier. Therefore, the input power to the motor
should be equal to the input power of the rectifier. Thus,
Real power
= I;Ra + EIa
(3.115)
where Ir is the rms value of the motor current.

In a de drive, the rectifier power factor and the source current harmonics depend on speed, torque, and firing angle. For the comparison of various rectifiers, it
is common to assume a ripple-Iess armature current. With this assumption, the
TABLE 3.2
Converter
I-phase
Control
Parameters
P.F.
. 0:sa:S7T
0.9 cos a
Fundamental
P.F.
cos a
conventional
I-phase with
controlled
0.8(1 + cos a)
0:sa:S7T
cos{a/2)
V7T-a
an = O
wheeling
I + cos no
2'
I
-(1
2
+ cos a)
0.955 cos a
cos a
0.78
-forn=I,5,7,11
n
cos a
O:s a:S 71'/3
0.955 cos a
cos a
0.78
for n = 1, 5, 7, 11
n
cos a
0.98[1
cos{a/2)
with controlled fly-
0.9 )
cos a
0:Sa:S7T
conventional
3-phase
0.9
for n odd
n
for n odd
flywheeling
3-phase
Per-Unit Output
Voltage
In/l.
71'
271'
-:5aS-
and an = O
(a+
+cos
~)J/
(~)
1.56
l + cos n{a + 71'/3)
for n = 1, 5, 7, ll
l + costo + 71'/3)
124
Chap. 3

v,
o ~------~~--------~---
iA
l. f-
l.
-l.
BC
CA
BA
CB
AC
21T
i.
AB
1T+a
1T
21T
21T
r--
-l.
Conventional
control
Conventional
i.
iA
l.
l.
control
O
21T
-1.
-l.
Controlled
(a)
flywheeling
l-phase rectifier
.,...
Figure 3.25
Controlled
flywheeling
(b) 3-phase rectifier
Source current waveforms for controlled rectifiers.
source current waveforms for some rectifiers are shown in figure 3.25. The time
origins have been chosen in the sam~ way as in figure 3. 7b and figure 3. 16b or
equation (3.76). The expressions for the power factor, fundamental power factor,
and nth harmonic expressed as a ratio of the de component and per-unit output
voltage, as defined in equations (3.102) to (3.112), are listed in table 3.2. The variation of power factor and InfI. with the per-unit output voltage is shown in
figure 3.26. The single-phase rectifiers have al! the odd harrnonics. Three-phase rectifiers have all the odd harrnonics except the third and its multiples. For all the rectifiers, the power factor is low at low-output voltages. Three-phase (6-pulse) rectifiers
have lower amplitude of harrnonics than the single-phase (2-pulse) rectifiers. The
harrnonics decrease with the increase of the rectifier pulse number. Therefore, 12pulse rectifiers are employed for high-power drives.
At high-power levels, the lagging reactive power and the line current harmonics pose a serious problem. The static reactive power compensators with associated
filters are often employed to counteract this problem. Altematively, rectifiers can be
operated with improved control techniques, such as sequence control and pulsewidth modulation."
Sec.3.7
Rectifier-Source
1.0
125
1.0
..-,
,,"
Controlled
flywheeling ;'
..
~..
~
o
Interaction
,- / "
0.5
c..
,-
;'
'"
"
Su
"
~.. 0.5
~
o
c..
/
/
/
0.5
1.0
v;
v;
I"
l.
1.0
f-
0.5
f-
1.0
In
3
0.5
l.
7
I
11
13
9
O
0.5
1.0
Conventional control
1.0
Conventional control
1.0
1.0
In
l.
0.5
v;
v:
In
0.5
l.
0.5
v;
1.0
0.5
0.5
v;
Controlled flywheeling
Controlled flywheeling
(a) l-phase rectifiers
(b] 3-phase rectifiers
Figure 3.26 Power factor and harmonics versus per unit output voltage
curves for controlled rectifiers.
(Previously published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers in lEE Proc.
Part B, vol. 127, no. 4, July 1980).
1.0
126
Chap. 3
Thc sequence control employs two or more rectifiers connected in series.3.15-18

Apart from improving the power factor and reducing harmonics in the source current, it also reduces the ripple in the motor current and discontinuous conduction. It
is widely used in high-power traction drives.
The pulse-width modulation is described in the next section.
3.8 PULSE-WIDTH MODULATED RECTIFIERS

With the availability of self-cornmutated semiconductor switches (power transistors,
GTOs, and MOSFETs) pulse-width modulation techniques are being employed for
controlled rectifiers.":" The pulse-width modulated l-phase and 3-phase fully-controlled bridge rectifiers are shown in figure 3.27_ The self-commutated semiconductor switches SI' S2' and S3 must have reverse voltage blocking capability. They may
be realized using a MOSFET or a power transistor in series with a fast recovery
diode, a GTO with a reverse voltage blocking capability, a GTO in series with a
diode when the GTO does not have the reverse voltage blocking capability, or an inverter grade thyristor with a forced commutation circuit.
T,
(a) I-phase rectifier
~---
...
~----+------+
s:
~----+------I!-----'"
T,
Figure 3.27
(b) 3-phase rectifier
fully-controlled
Pulse width modulated

rectifiers.
Sec.3.8
Pulse-Width Modulated Rectifiers
127
The pulse-width modulation techniques commonly used in rectifiers are equal

pulse-width modulation and sinusoidal pulse-width modulation.
3.8.1 Equal Pulse-Width
Modulation
The principle of equal pulse-width modulation for the l-phase fully-controlled rectifier of figure 3.27a is demonstrated in figures 3.28 and 3.29. A de modulating signal
VRof variable magnitude A and a triangular carrier wave VTof fixed amplitude Am
are compared in a comparator. The carrier wave is synchranized with the ac source
voltage Vs and has integer number of cycles in a half-cycle of vs'
The operation in the rectification mode is shown in figure 3.28. Thyristors T
and T2, which are line commutated, conduct fram A to 1T + A and 1T + A to 21T + A,
respectively. During the interval A=:; wt =:; 1T + A, the self-commutated switch S
conducts when vR> vT; otherwise, the self-cornmutated switch S2 conducts. During
the interval 1T + A=:; wt =:; 21T + A, S2 conducts when VR> VT;otherwise, S conducts. The transfer of current fram T to T2 by line commutation is possible only
when source voltage is negative. Therefore, the gate pulse for thyristor T2 is advanced beyond 1T by an angle A. For the same reason the gate pulse for T is advanced beyond 0 by an angle A. This switching pattem of devices connects the
source to the motor for the intervals for which VRexceeds VTand the source current
flows. For the intervals for which VRis less than VT,the motor current is diverted to
one of the two freewheeling paths formed by pairs (S,T2) and (S2,T); con sequently, the source current and the rectifier output voltage are zera. The source current and the rectifier output voltage waveforms, assuming ripple-less motor current
are shown in figure 3.28. The fundamental component of the source current is now
.in phase with the source voltage, which gives unity fundamental power factor. In
figure 3.28, there are 5 pulses per half-cycle of the source voltage. Consequentlythe
fundamental ac component of the output voltage is smaller than that for the conventional operation. For the same inductance in the armature circuit, the current ripple
and zone of discontinuous conduction operation have very small values compared to
conventional operation,
The inverter operation is shown in figure 3.29. Thyristors T and T2 again conduct for a duration 1T. To comrnutate.T and T2 by line commutation, they receive
gate pulses starting from (1T - A) and (21T - A), respectively. During the interval
- A=:; wt =:; 1T - A, S2 conducts when VR> VT;otherwise, S conducts; and during the
interval 1T - A=:; wt =:; 21T - A, S conducts when VR> VT;otherwise, S2 conducts.
The source current and rectifier output voltage waveforms are also shown in the figure. Here also the source is connected to the motor and the source current flows in
the intervals for which VR> VT' During the intervals when VR< VT,the load current
is diverted to one of the freewheeling paths and the source current is zero. The average output voltage is now negative and the fundamental source current is 180 0utput
of phase with respect to the source voltage, which gives unity fundamental power
factor. The ripple in the motor current and zone of discontinuous conduction will
again be small.
0
A
wt
ig1
2lr
wt
2lr
wt
ig2
ic1
lrl
wt
I
ic2
I
I
lrl
I
2lr
wt
is
I
I
I
2lr wt
Figure 3.28 Waveforms for rectification mode of a l-phase bridge rectifier

with equal pulse width modulation.
128
Figure 3.29 Wavefonns for inversion mode of a l-phase fully-controlled

bridge rectifier with equal pulse width modulation.
129
130
Chap.3
The modulation index m is defined as the ratio of the amplitudes of the modu.
lating signal and the carrier wave. Thus
A
m=-
Am
(3.116)
The magnitude of the output voltage, both during rectification and inversion,
can be varied by controlling the value of the modulation index. Theoretically, the
output voltage magnitude can be varied from its maximum value (2Vm/7T) to O as m
is changed from 1 to O. In practice, due to the finite switching times of SI and S2' the
the pulse widths have certain minimum and maximum values; consequently the output voltage has a finite minimum value, and the maximum value is less than
(2Vm/7T)
The restriction on minimum values of the output voltage produces a current
surge at the time of motor reversal. During reversal the rectifier will be initially inverting and the motor will be decelerating in regenerative braking. As the speed
falls, the modulation index is reduced. At a finite speed the regeneration stops due to
the limitation on the minimum rectifier output voltage for inversion. Now at this
speed the rectifier operation is changed from inversion to rectification to reverse the
motor speed. Since the rectifier output voltage now jumps from its minimum negative to minimum positive value, a surge of current is produced, which causes shock
loading of the drive and may damage the rectifier. This problem can be overcome as
follows.
In the preceding operation, to obtain a unity fundamental power factor, the
phase of the control pulses is jumped by 180 when the operation is shifted from inversion to rectification. If, however, the phase of control pulses is shifted gradually,
then the rectifier output voltage will also change gradually between minimum negative and positive values; the zero output ~oltage being .obtained when the phase is
90. The power factor of the rectifier will, however, be low during this transition.
The modulation is called equal pulse-width modulation because all the pulses
have the same width for a given value of m.
3.8.2 Sinusoidal Pulse-Width Modulation
The principle of sinusoidal pulse-width modulation for the l-phase fully-controlled
rectifier of figure 3.27a is demonstrated in figure 3.30. The dc modulating signal is
now replaced by a rectified sinusoid vR, which is synchronized with the source voltage v, and has a variable amplitude A. The carrier wave VT is also synchronized with
the ac source voltage v, and has an integer number of cycles in a half cycle of V,.
The control pulses, and the source current and rectifier output voltage waveforrns for
rectification are shown in the figure. The operation is identical to that described in
the previous section, except that the pulse width is now a sinusoidal function of its
location, and therefore, it is called sinusoidal pulse-width modulation. The inverter
operation is obtained when the control signals are shifted by 180.
Compared to the equal pulse-width modulation, the sinusoidal pulse-width
modulation has higher power factor and lower harrnonic content in the source current but higher ripple in the motor current. The modulation ceases to be sinusoidal
wt
ig1
11"
211"
wt
211"
wt
I
I
I
I
ig2
I
I
O
11"
ic1
O
11"
wt
ic2
O
11"
is
r=
v,
11"
wt
Figure 3.30 Waveforms for rectification mode of a l-phase rectifier with

sinusoidal pulse width modulation.
131
132
Chap.3
pulse-width modulation when m = l. For m = 1, the output voltage is substantially

lower than its maximum value (2VrnlTT). Therefore, if the operation is restricted to
m = 1, the rectifier will be derated considerably. On the other hand, the operation
for m > 1 will increase the harmonic content substantially.
By having many pulses of the output voltage per cycle of the source voltage,
the ripple in the motor current can be substantially reduced and discontinuous conduction can be completely eliminated without using any filter inductance. Thus, the
higher pulse number improves the motor performance and efficiency. It also reduces
or eliminates the low-frequency harmonics in the source current. But the switching
losses in the converter increase with the pulse number.
A l-phase pulse-width modulated half-controlled rectifier is obtained when
thyristors are replaced by diodes. It can provide only rectification, giving an operation identical to the fully-controlled rectifier.
.
The three-phase pulse-width modulated fully-controlled rectifier is shown in
figure 3.27b. Readers may refer to references [22-24,32 and 33] for its operation.
The equal pulse-width modulation is best for three-phase rectifiers because it gives
less ripple in the motor current and nearly the same power factor as the sinusoidal
pulse-width modulation. Twelve pulses per cycle of the supply voltage is an optimum choice from the consideration of the power factor, motor current ripple, and
switching losses.
3.9 CURRENT CONTROL
Under transient operations such as starting, braking, speed reversal, and sudden
change in speed, and under steady-state overloads, the rectifier current may exceed
safe values. The purpose of current control is to prevent the current from exceeding
safe values. Sometimes, the purpose of current control is to intentionally force the
current to the maximum permissible value during the transient operations. This allows full use of the drive torque capability and consequently gives very fast response.
Effective current control is made possible because of the fast response of semiconductor converters and the simple and stepless control of their firing angles, and
therefore, of their output voltages.
The following methods are used for current control:
1. Inner Current Control Loop: This is employed with closed-loop speed and
position control systems and is shown in figure 3.31 a. The error is processed
through a controlIer (not shown). The output of the controller e, is fed to a limiter which sets a current reference
for the closed-loop current control. The
average motor current la is made to folIow the current reference 1:. During the
transient operations, the signal ec has a large value. Consequently, the output of
the limiter saturates, setting a current reference corresponding to the maximum
perrnissible value. Thus, the current is not allowed to exceed the safe limit.
The inner current control also forces the current to the maximum permissible value during the greater part of the transient operation, consequently giving fast response.
Open-loop drives are sometimes connected with closed-loop current control during starting, braking, and speed reversal. The block diagram of the drive
1:
Sec.3.10
Multiquadrant
Operation
of Fully-Controlled
Cl
Control
circuit
Rectifier-Fed
DC Motor
133
Controlled
rectifier
Limiter
(a) Inner current control
Cl
Control
circuit
Controlled
rectifier
Threshold circuit
(b) Current limit control
Figure 3.31
Current control schemes.
will be similar to that shown in figure 3.31a with the limiter and e, removed.
The reference signal
will be set for, the maximum permissible value. The
drive will operate at the maximum permissible current, giving fast response.
2. Current Limit Control: The block diagram is shown in figure 3.31b. If la is
less than the maximum permissible value Ix, the output of the threshold circuit
rernains zero. As long as la < Ix, the motor operation is not affected by the
threshold circuit. However, if la exceeds Ix, even by a small amount, a large
signal is developed by the threshold circuit, and the rectifier firing angle is
changed by a large amount in a direction to force the current to decrease fast
below L. Soon after la falls below Ix, the threshold circuit goes out of action
and the rectifier firing angle is brought back to the original value. If again la
exceeds I the same step repeats to bring the current below Ix. Thus. the transient process is completed without la exceeding I, by a substantial amount.
1:
3.10 MULTIQUADRANT
OPERATION
RECTIFIER-FED DC MOTOR
OF FULLY-CONTROLLED
Here, the multiquadrant operation of the rectifier drives involving regenerative braking is considered. As explained in the previous section, the current control forms an
integral part of such drives. During transient operations, it limits the current within
safe values and sometimes forces it to stay at the maximum permissible value for the
greater part of the transient operation to get fast response.
134
Chap. 3
As explained earlier, the two-quadrant operation consisting of forward motoring and reverse regeneration is obtained by using a fully-controlled rectifier. For the
two-quadrant operation of forward motoring and regenerative braking or the fourquadrant operation of motoring and regenerative braking in either direction, the following approaches can be adopted:
1. Arrnature current reversal.

2. Field current reversal.
These operations will now be described for the conventional operation of the
fully-controlled rectifiers. The basic approach remains the same for rectifiers with
the controlled flywheeling and pulse-width modulation.
3.10.1 Armature
Current
Reversal
In these schemes, the direction of fie1d current remains fixed. If speed control above
the base speed is required, the field can be supplied from a l-phase half-controlled
rectifier; otherwise it can be fed at a fixed de voltage from a diode bridge. Various
schemes of the armature current reversal are shown in figure 3.32.
1. Single Fully-Controlled Rectifier with a Reversing Switch:
This scheme
is shown in figure 3.32a. A fully-controlled rectifier feeds the motor through a rea
TF
TR
TR
TF
m
b
(a)
'b
b
(b)
(e)
L,
[ *-
V.,
2
=L2=
Id)
(e)
Figure 3.32 Armature current reversaJ: (a) One fully-controlled rectifier with a reversing switch, (b) and (e) reversing switch, (d) DuaJ converter with non-simultaneous control, (e) DuaJ converter with simultaneous control.
Sec.3.10
Multiquadrant
Operation
of Fully-Controlled
Rectifier-Fed
DC Motor
135
versing switch RS. The purpose of the RS is to reverse the motor armature with respect to the rectifier. One setting of switch RS gives operation in the first and fourth
quadrants. The reversal of the armature connection then provides operation in the
second and third quadrants. The RS may consist of a relay operated contactor with
two normally closed and two normally open contacts as shown in figure 3.32b. The
reversing switch can also be realized using a drum controller. The speed reversal is
carried out as detailed in the following section.
To avoid inductive voltage surges and to reduce the size of the reversing
switch, it is necessary to perform the switching at zero armature current. The armature current ia is forced to zero quickly by setting the firing angle at the highest permissible value. When the current value is zero, firing pulses are stopped. As the
instant of zero current cannot be sensed accurately due to the fluctuations in the current and also due to the current through the snubbers, a dead time of 2 to 10 milliseconds is provided to ensure that the current has in fact become zero. Now the
armature is reversed by RS and the firing pulses are released. The firing angle is already set at the highest value. In a 3-phase fully-controlled rectifier, according to
figure 3.17d, at this firing angle the armature current will be either zero or close to
zero. The firing angle is gradually reduced. The armature current builds up and a
smooth transition into the regenerative braking takes place. The connection of the
rectifier for braking at the highest firing angle is called the advanced firing scheme.
It permits a transfer to braking without any surge of current and torque. However, it
introduces a considerable amount of delay because the braking torque remains low
for a considerable periodo
As the firing angle is reduced, the armature current tends to exceed the safe
limit but this is prevented by the current control loop. The motor decelerates to zero
speed under regenerative braking and then accelerates in the reverse direction with
nearly maximum torque under current control." When the speed reaches close to the
steady-state value, the current reduces and the motor settles at a speed in the reverse
direction. "
The slow speed of response is the major limitation of this scheme. The contactor reversal time alone can be"5Q to 100 mS. It needs zero-current sensing and frequent maintenance due to the moving contacts. As the cost is low, it is used in
low-power drives where fast response is not required.
Considerable improvement in performance at the expense of an increase in cost
is obtained if reversing is done using four thyristors as shown in figure 3.32c. The
pair TF is kept on continuously while the pair TR is blocked. The reversal is obtained
by blocking the pair T F at zero current and firing the pair T R.
2. Dual Converters:
A dual converter consists of two fully-controlled rectifiers connected in antiparallel across the motor armature, as shown in figures 3.32d
and e. If rectifier 1 provides operation in the first and fourth quadrants, rectifier 2
provides operation in the second and third quadrants. The dual converters may operate in simultaneous or nonsimultaneous control. In the simultaneous control, commonl known as circulatin current control, both rectifiers o erate simultaneously.
In the nonsimultaneous control, also known as circulating-current-free control, only
one rectifier operates at any given time and another is blocked.
136
Chap.3
In nonsimultaneous control, figure 3.32d, speed reversal is carried out as fol.

lows:
Initially let the drive be in operation in the first quadrant. Then rectifier 1 will
be in operation and the firing pulses to rectifier 2 will be blocked. For speed reversal, the motor must initially operate in the second quadrant and then in the third
quadrant. For this, the operation must transfer to rectifier 2 from rectifier l. Before
rectifier 2 can be activated all thyristors in rectifier 1 must tum off: otherwise a lin
side short-circuit of rectifier 2 throu h the conductin th ristors of rectifier 1 will
take lace' the resultin current cannot be re ulated b the current control and must
be cleared b a hi h-s ed breaker or ex nsive fuse links. The following steps take
care of these requirements.
The armature current is forced to zero by setting the frring angle of rectifier 1
at the highest value. After zero current is sensed, a dead time of 2 to 10 mS is provided to ensure the tUm-off of all the thyristors of rectifier l. Now the fmng pulses
are withdrawn from rectifier 1 and released to rectifier 2. The motor speed will not
change appreciably during this period owing to inertia. The firing angle of rectifier 2,
CX2, can be set in accordance with the advanced firing just described. Because of the
delay involved, it is not usually employed in high-performance drives. The emf
matching method is used in hi h- erformance drives. In this method CX2 is initially
set to make the armature terminal voltage under continuous conduction equal to the
back ernf. It is then reduced to make the maximum allowable current to flow. The
motor tor ue builds u fast and the s eed reversal is achieved at the maximum tor ue
under the influence of current control.
The speed of response of a dual converter with nonsimultaneous control is considerably affected by dead time. In high-performance drives, particularly in lowinertia fast-servo drives, it should be reduced to a minimum. The value of dead time
depends on the accuracy with which the current zero is sensed. Thyristors need only
50 to 100 microseconds to tum off after the current has ceased to flow. If zero current can be sensed exactly, a delay of few hundred microseconds would suffice. Because of the fluctuations in current and also due to the current through snubbers, it is
not possible to sense the current zero accurately. In a converter rated for a few thousand amperes, a current of a few amperes can be considered zero for all practical
purposes; but not in the present case, because even at this current thyristors of the
outgoing rectifier may still be conducting. Adequate dead time is therefore provided
to take care of the uncertainty involved in sensing the current zero.
Since the main purpose of sensing zero current and then providing an adequate
time delay is to ensure that the thyristors of the outgoing rectifier tum off before the
incoming rectifier is activated, it will be more appropriate to sense the state of the
thyristors of the outgoing rectifier instead of zero current. A thyristor tums off completely (that is, develops forward voltage blocking capability) if it is kept reverse biased for a duration greater than the gate recovery time after it has started blocking
the reverse voltage. Since the gate recovery time is of the order of a few microseconds, a delay of a few hundred microseconds after the thyristor has started blocking
the reverse voltage should be adequate. In a 3- hase fully-controlled rectifier, thyristors are frred and conduct in pairs in series; it will, therefore, be adequate to monitor
the states of the lower (or upper) thfee thyristors.
Sec.3.10
Multiquadrant
Operation of Fully-Controlled
137
The dual con verter for simultaneous control is shown in figure 3.32e. The two
rectifiers are controlled simultaneously in such a manner that the sum of their average terminal voltages is zero so that no de current circulates in the loop formed by
the two rectifiers. Thus,
Val+Va2=O
or
or
or
+ VaO cos a2 =
cos al = - cos a2
al + a2 = 180
Vao cos
al
(3.117)
Eguation (3.117) shows that when one rectifier rectifies another inverts. Since
the two rectifiers work in different modes, one in rectification and another in inversion, their instantaneous voltages are not equal. This causes ac circulating current to
flow in the loop formed by the two rectifiers. The inductors L I and L2 are connected
to restrict the ac circulating current.
Although both rectifiers remain in operation simultaneously,
the motor control
in the first and fourth quadrants is still provided by rectifier l. Rectifier 2 carries
only the circulating current and remains ready to take over whenever the need arises.
The two rectifiers reverse their roles when the operation takes place in the second
and third quadrants. Speed reversal from the first to third quadrant is carried out as
described next.
W
e tin in uadrant one rectifier 1 will be rectif in O < a < 90
and rectifier 2 will be inverting (90 < a2 < 180). For the s eed reversal al is increased and a is decreased to satisf e uation (3. 117). The motor back emf exceeds
IVal and Va2. The armature current shifts to rectifier 2 and the motor operates in the
second quadrant. As a2 is decreased gradually, the motor decelerates under regenerative braking. When zero speed is reached al = a2 = 90. Reduction of a2 below 90
will make it work as a rectifier and the motor will accelerate to a speed in the reverse
.direction. During these operations, the armature current is regulated below the safe
value by a current control loop.
The circulating current increases the losses, and reduces the efficiency and
power factor of the drive; therefore, it must be kept to 'a minimum. On the other
hand, the circulating current must be continuous so that the rectifier carrying this
current remains ready to take over the control from the other rectifier without any
delay. The relation (3.117) does not take into account the voltage drops across various elements and the dissimilarity in the fuing of the two rectifiers. Therefore, when
controlled according to the relation (3.117), a large circulating current may flow.
This can be limited by operating the two rectifiers with separate current control loops
as shown in figure 3.33. For a positive ec, rectifier 1 carries the armature current and
circulating current, and rectifier 2 carries the circulating current. For a negative ec'
the rectifiers reverse their roles. For a positive e.; current limiter 2 sets a small
(fixed) current reference If, thus allowing only the necessary amount of current to
circulate. The current control loop for rectifier 1 operates in the same way as the inner current control loop of figure 3.31a. For a negative e.; current limiter 1 sets a
small (fixed) current reference If thus allowing only the necessary amount of current
138
Chap.3
Ll=
1,
1~
ec
Current
limiter 1
Figure 3.33
12
ec
Current
limiter 2
Control of circulating current in a dual converter with simulta-
neous control.
to circulate, and the current control loop for rectifier 2 now operates in the same way
as the inner current control loop of figure 3.33a.
Simultaneous control has a number of advantages. The control is simple. Continuous conduction is guaranteed because of the natural freedom of the motor current
to flow in either direction; hence, a constant gain transfer characteristic of the dual
converter is ensured asd the drive has good speed regulation. It has a number of disadvantages, too. The presence of reactors L and L2 increases the cost, weight, volume, noise, and power loss. The transient response becornes slow due to the
increase in the time constant. Power factor and efficiency are low due to the circulating current. The circulating current increases the reactive power and consequently
the power factor deteriorates for all firing angles, and progressively at lower motor
currents, since the circulating current is almost unaffected by the motor current.
When working at a speed, a large drop in the source voltage due to a fault may cre- .
ate a large difference in the motor back emf and the inverter terminal voltage. A
large current will flow through the motor and inverter. The current cannot be regulated by the current control loop and must be cleared by a breaker or fuse link.
Nonsimultaneous control has the advantages of increased efficiency and a
higher power factor due to the absence of the circulating current. It does not need reactors and saves the associated cost, weight, space, noise, and power loss and provides quicker response to the changes in the firing angle. The main drawbacks are
discontinuous conduction at light loads and the consequent poor speed regulation
and nonlinear transfer characteristics of the converter, the presence of a dead zone
during the reversal of the armature current, and the additional logic requirement to
detect current zero and implement dead time.
Sec.3.10
Multiquadrant
Operation of Fully-Controlled
139
Because of the need for a complex control circuitry and the presence of dead
time, nonsimultaneous control was not used in high-performance drives in the past.
Due to the availability of integrated circuits and better methods of detecting current
zero, nonsimultaneous control can be easily implemented and in fact provides faster
response (due to a very small delay time of 2 to 5 mS). Hence nonsimultaneous control is very widely used now. Simultaneous control is employed only in the low-inertia high-performance servo drives where a dead zone is not acceptable. Recently a
pulse-width modulated GTO dual converter with simultaneous control has been developed where circulating current is completely eliminated.Pr"
3.10.2 Field Current Reversal
Schemes employing field current reversal are shown in figure 3.34. The field CUfrent can be reversed either by using a dual converter or a single fully-controlled rectifier with a reversing switch, which can either be a reversing contactor or a drum
controller. If one direction of the field current gives operation in the first and fourth
quadrants, another direction of the field current will give operation in the second and
third quadrants. Since the field current is much smaller compared to the armature
current, the ratings of the rectifiers of the field circuit will be much smaller cornpared to those of the armature circuit. This makes this drive the cheapest four-quadrant dc drive. Because of the large field time constant, the field reversal takes a long
time. Often field forcing, involving the use of three to five times the normal voltage
during the field reversal, is used to reduce the reversing time. The voltage induced in
the armature winding by the transformer action during field reversal adversely affects commutation, making it necessary to keep the armature current at zero during
field reversal. Because of the large field reversal time in which the torque remains
essentially zero, this drive is rarely used in-spite of the low cost. It is employed in
high-power drives with large inertia, where the delay in field reversal forms only a
fraction of the mechanical time constant, and fast response is not mandatory .
.The following steps are used for the reversal of speed when the field is supplied by a dual con verter. The armature rectifier firing angle is set at the highest
value to force the armature current to zero. The firing angle of the rectifier supplying
the field is now set for the highest value. It inverts and the field current is forced to
~S
(al
(bl
Figure 3.34 Field current reversal: (a) Field control with a dual converter, (b) Field
control with a single rectifier and a reversing switch.
140
Chap.3
zero. After a suitable dead time, the second rectifier is activated at the lowest firing
angle. When the field current has nearly settled, and the motor back emf has reversed, the arrnature rectifier is activated again using the advanced firing scheme explained earlier. The firing angle is progressively changed to first brake and then
accelerate the machine in the reverse direction.
REFERENCES
1. G. K. Dubey, S. R. Doradla, A. loshi, and R. M. K. Sinha, Thyristorized Power Controllers, Wiley Eastern, 1986.
2. B. R. Pelly, Thyristor Phase Controlled Converters and Cycloconverters, Wiley Interscience, 1971.
3. P. C. Sen, Thyristor DC Drive, Wiley Interscience, 1981.
4. P. Mehta and S. K. Mukhopadhyay, "Modes of operation in converter-controlled de
drives," Proc. IEE, vol. 121, March 1974, pp. 179-183.
5. S. B. Dewan and W. G. Dunford, "Improved power factor operation of a l-phase controlled rectifier bridge through modified gating," IEEE PES Conf. Atlanta, 1980,
pp. 317-65:
6. P. N. Miljanic, "The through pass inverter and its application to speed control of induction motor," IEEE Trans. on PAS, vol. PAS-87, 1968, p. 234.
7. W. Farrer and D. F. Andrews, "Fully-controlled regenerative bridges with half-controlled
characteristics," Proc. IEE, vol. 125, no. 2, 1978, pp. 109-112.
8. W. Drurry, W. Farrer, and B. L. lones, "Performance of thyristor bridge converters ernploying flywheeling," Proc. IEE, vol. 127, pt. B, no. 4, luly 1980, pp. 268-276.
9. B. K. Patel and S. R. Doradla, "Operating diagrams and minimum inductance estimation
for fully-controlled converter with half-controlled characteristics," lour. Intn. Engrs. (In. dia), Elect. Engg. Div., vol. 62, pt EL-4, Feb. 1982, pp. 150-157.
10. P. S. Bhat and G. K. Dubey, "Performance and analysis of de motor fed by l-phase converter with controlled flywheeling," lour. Intn. Engrs., Elect. Engg. Div., vol. 65, April
1985, pp. 167-73.
11. P. S. Bhat, G. K. Dubey, and R.Ghosh, "Modes of operation, analysis and evaluation of
optimum filter inductance for 3-phase fully-controlled converter-fed de motor," IEEE
Trans. on PAS~ vol. rAS-I04, No. 7, 1985, pp. 1783-88.
12. S. B. Dewan and W. G. Dunford, "Improved power factor operation of a 3-phase rectifier
bridge through modified gating," IEEE PES Conf., Atlanta 1980, pp. 830-837.
13. P. S. Bhat and G. K. Dubey, "Three-phase regenerative converter with controlled flywheeling," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-21, Nov./Dec. 1985, pp. 143J-40.
14. C. E. Robinson, "Redesign of de motors for applications with thyristor power supplies,"
IEEE Trans. Ind. Gen. Appl., vol. IGA-4, Sept./Oct. 1968, pp. 508-514.
15. H. K. Patel and G. K. Dubey, "Cornparative study of single-phase converter control
schemes," Int. lour. Electronics, vol. 54, 1983, pp. 63-76.
16. P. S. Bhat and G. K. Dubey, "Two-stage sequentially operated regenerative converters
with controlIed flywheling," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-21, Nov./Dec. 1985,
pp. 1441-52.
17. S. Mukhopadhyay, "A new concept for improving the performance of phase controlled
converters," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-14, Nov./Dec. 1978, pp. 594-603.
18. H. K. Patel and G. K. Dubey, "Modified sequence control technique for improving the
performance of regenerative bridge converters," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-19,
Sept.lOct. 1983, pp. 682-689.
Chap. 3
Problems
141
19. T. Fukao and S. Miyari, "AC-DC converter with improved power factor and current
waveforms on ac side," Elect. Engg. in Japan, vol. 94, no. 4, 1974, pp. 89-96.
20. T. Kataoka, K. Mizumachi, and T. Miyairi, "A pulse width controlled ac to de converter
to improve power factor and waveform of ac line current," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl.,
vol. IA-15, Nov./Dec. 1979, pp. 670-675.
21. D. M. Divan and T. H. Barton, "Synchronous chopper for improved performance converters," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-20, May/June 1984, pp. 631-642.
22. S. R. Doradla, C. Nagmani, and S. Sanyal, "A sinusoidal pulse width modulated threephase ac to de converter-fed de motor drive," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-21,
Nov./Dec. 1985, pp. 1394-1408.
23. H. Inaba, A. Veda, T. Ando, T. Kurosawa, Y. Sakai, and S. Shirna, "A new speed control system for dc motor using GTO con verter and its application to elevator," IEEE
Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-21 , MarchlApril 1985, pp. 391-397.
24. T. Kataoka, K. Kawakami, and J. Kotano, "A pulsewidth modulated ac to de converter
using gate turn-off thyristors," IEEE IAS Annual Meeting 1985, pp. 966-974.
25. D. L. Duff and A. Ludbrook, "Reversing thyristor armature dual converter with logic
cross over control," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Gen. Appl., May/June 1965, pp. 216-222.
26. G. Joos and T. H. Barton, "Four-quadrant variable-speed drives-design consideration,"
Proc. IEEE, vol. 63, no. 12, 1975, pp. 1660-1668.
27. A. M. Ali, "Fast changing four quadrant converter," Proc. lEE, vol. 124, Oct. 1977,
pp. 883-884.
28. W. Leonhard, Control of Electrical Drives, Springer-Verlag, 1985.
29. S. B. Dewan, G. R. Slernmon, and A. Straughen, Power Semiconductor Drives, Wiley
1984.
30. T. Krishnan and B. Ramaswamy, "Speed control of de motor using thyristor dual converter," IEEE Trans. on lEC!, vol. IECI-3, 1976, pp. 391-399.
31. R. J. Castell and A. R. Danial, "NoveI4-quadrant thyristor controller,' Proc. lEE, 1972,
p. 1577.
32. B. H. Khan, "GTO converter-fed de motor drives," Ph.D. Thesis, I. I. T. Kanpur.
33. B. H. Khan, S. R. Doradla and G. K. Dubey, "A new GTO dual-converter fed d drive ,'
IEEE PESC, 1988.
PROBLEMS
3.1
A 7.46 kW, 230 V, 500 rpm, 40 A separately excited de motor has an armature resistance of 0.478 n. This motor is controlled by a l-phase fully-controlled rectifier fed
from a 230 V, 60 Hz ac supply through a transformer. It has sufficient inductance to get
continuous conduction for all torques greater than 50 percent of the rated. The transformer and source impedance can be neglected.
(a) A rated dc voltage across the motor at full load is desired. The following three
transformers are available:
(i) 230/260 V
(ii) 230/210 V
(iii) 230/400 V
Choose a transformer from these three to satisfy the preceding requirement.
(b) Having chosen the transformer find the following for the drive:
(i) The rectifier firing angle for the rated torque and half the rated speed.
(ii) The rectifier firing angle for the rated braking torque and the speed of 400 rpm
142
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Chap. 3
(iii) The motor conneetions are now reversed to get the regenerative braking in the
forward direetion. What should be the firing angle to develop rated torque at
300 rpm? Negleet frietion and windage.
Repeat problem 3.1 for a l-phase fully-controlled reetifier with eontrolled flywheeling.
A 220 V, 1500 rpm, 11.6 A separately exeited motor has the armature resistanee and
induetance of 2 n and 28.36 rnH, respectively. This motor is eontrolled by a 1-phase
fully-controlled reetifier with an ae souree voltage of 230 V, 50 Hz. Identify modes and
ealeulate developed torques for the following eonditions of operation:
(a) a = 30 and speed = 1480 rpm
(b) a = 30 and speed = 1000 rpm
(e) a = 120 and speed = -1178 rpm
(d) a = 120 and speed = -640 rpm
The motor of problem 3.3 is now controlled by a l-phase reetifier with eontrolled
flywhee1ing. The ae source voltage is 230 V, 50 Hz. Identify modes and ealculate
developed torques for the following eonditions of operation:
(a) an = O and a = 60, and speed = 1050 rpm
(b) an = O and a = 60, and speed = 891 rpm
(e) an = 120 and a = 180, and speed = -1171 rpm
(d) an = 120 and a = 180, and speed = -1475 rpm
Let the armature induetanee of the reetifier drive of problem 3.1 be 13 rnH. Calculate
no-load speeds, and speeds and developed torques on the boundary between eontinuous
and discontinuous eonduetions for a = 30 and a = 120.
3.6 For the reetifier drive of problem 3.4, ealculate no-load speeds, and the speeds and
developed torques on the boundary between eontinuous and diseontinuous eonduetions
for
(a) a=60, an=O
(b) a = 180, an = 120.
3.7 Let the armature induetanee of the reetifier drive of problem 3.1 be 18.83 rnH. Identify
modes and caleulate firing angles for the following points:
.
(a) T, = 260 N-m, N = !OOrpm
(b) T. = 140 N-m, N = 200 rprn
(e) T, = 170 N-m, N = -250 rpm
N is the moto~ speed in rpm.
3.8 Repeat problem 3.7 for a reetifier with eontrolled flywheeling.
3.9 A 2.4 kW, 220 V, 480 rpm, 12.8 A de motor has the armature resistanee and induetanee
of 2.2 n and 40.0 rnH, respeetively. It is fed by a l-phase fully-controlled reetifier with
an ae souree voltage of 240 V, 60 Hz. Identify modes and ealculate speeds for the
following points:
(a) a = 60, T, = 80 N-m
(b) a = 60, T, = 60 N-m
(e) a = 120, T, = 60 N-m
3.10 The drive of problem 3.9 is now operated with the eontrolled flywheeling. Calculate
speeds for the following points:
(a) a = 180, an = 30, T, = 30 N-m
(b) a = 60, an = O, T, = 30 N-m
3.11 A 12.2 kW, 230 V, 850 rpm, 56 A de separately exeited motor is eontrolled by a
3-phase fully-eontrolled
reetifier fed from 460 V, 60 Hz ae supply through a
transformer. It has an armature resistanee of 0.284 n and suffieient induetanee to assure
Chap. 3
Problems
143
continuous conduction for all operating points with torques greater than 20 percent of
the rated. The transformer and the source impedance can be neglected.
(a) A rated de voltage across the 'motor at full load is desired. Choose a suitable
transformer from the following three available:
(i) 460/460 V
(ii) 460/230 V
(iii) 460/ 180 V
(b) Having chosen the transformer find the following:
(i) The rectifier firing angle for the rated torque and speed.
(ii) The rectifier firing angle for the rated braking torque and the speed of 600 rpm
(iii) The motor field is now reversed to get regenerative braking in the forward
direction. What should be the firing angle to develop rated torque at 500 rpm?
Neglect friction and windage.
3.12 Repeat problem 3.11 for a 3-phase fully-controlled rectifier with controlled flywheeling.
3.13 A 30 kW, 230 V, 860 rpm, 144 A de motor has an armature resistance of 0.07 n. It is
fed by a 3-phase fully-controlled rectifier from an ac source of 170.3 V (line), 60 Hz.
Assuming continuous conduction, calculate motor speeds for the following cases:
(a) a = 60, T. = 300 N-m
(b) a = 150, T. = 400 N-m
(e) a = 120, T. = -400 N-m (obtained by the field current reversal)
3.14 If the rectifier in problem 3.13 is now operated with controlled flywheeling, calculate
speeds for the following points, assurning continuous conduction:
(a) a = 90, an = O, T. = 300 N-m
(b) ~ = 120, an = 60, T. = -300 N-m (obtained by the field current reversal)
3.15 A 3.74 kW, 1000 rpm, 230 V, 20 A dc motor has an armature resistance and inductance
of 1.4 n and 16.5 mH, respectively. The motor is fed by a 3-phase fully-controlled
rectifier with an ac source voltage of 170.3 (Iine), 60 Hz. Identify modes and calculate
speeds for the following points:
.
(a) a = 60, T. = 1.0 N-m
(b) a = 60, T. = 35 N-m
(e) a = 150, T. = - 35 N-m (obtained by the reversal of the field current)
3.16 For the motor of problem 3.15 identify modes and calculate firing angles for the
following:
(a) T. = 11.0 N-m, N = 500 rpm
(b) T, = 30.0 N-m, N = 750 rpm
(e) T, = 30.0 N-m, N = -500 rpm
(d) T, = - 30.0 N-m, N = 500 rpm (obtained by the field current reversal)
3.17 A 10 kW, 1000 rpm, 230 V, 49 A de motor has an armature resistance of 0.2 n. It is
controlled by a 3-phase fully-controlled rectifier with an ac source voltage of 230 V
(line), 60 Hz. When operating at full load with a motor terminal voltage of 230 V, the
armature current ripple was found to be 5 A (rms). Assuming a 10 percent increase in
rotational loss, calculate the power factor and efficiency.
If the thermal loading on the motor is mainly dependent on the copper loss,
calculate the derating of the motor.
3.18 The drive of problem 3.15 is now used to drive a load whose torque remains constant
for a given setting. What should be the rninimum setting of the load torque for the drive
to operate always in continuous conduction?
144
3.19
3.20
3.21
3.22
3.23
3.24
3.25
3.26
Chap.3
The minimum load torque setting is now reduced to half of the value just
calculated. Calculate the value of the external inductance to be connected in the
armature circuit to get continuous conduction for al! operating points.
A 1.5 kW, 230 V, 1000 rpm, 7.8 A de motor has an armature resistance and inductance
of 2.5 n and 16 rnH, respectively. lt is fed by a l-phase fully-controlled rectifier with a
230 V, 50 Hz ac supply. What external inductance must be inserted in the armature
circuit to reduce the maximum ripple under continuous conduction to 60 percent of the
rated current? At what speed will the ripple be maximum? For this speed, ca1culate the
approximate value of the torque on the boundary between continuous and discon_
tinuous conductions (hint: On the boundary ~ia = la)'
A 7.5 kW, 230 V, 1000 rpm, 40 A de motor has an armature resistance and inductance
of 0.5 n and 5 rnH, respectively. lt is supplied by a 3-phase fully-controlled rectifier
from an ac source of 170.3 V (line) and 60 Hz. Find out the maximum ripple as a
percentage of the rated current. How much inductance must be added to keep the
maximum ripple to 10 percent of the rated current?
The motor of problem 3.20 is controlled by a 3-phase fully-controlled rectifier fed frorn
an ac source of 208 V (line), 60 Hz. The rotationallosses can be assumed to be 10 percent higher with the rectifier supply.
(a) Determine the ripple at full load.
(b) Ca1culate the power factor and efficiency.
(e) If the thermalloading of the motor is mainly dependent on the copper loss, ca1culate
() the derating in the output power and
(ii) the derating of torque at zero speed, assuming forced cooling.
List the sequence of steps required for identifying the modes of operation of a separately
excited de motor fed by a l-phase fully-controlled rectifier with controlled flywheeling.
Describe the sequence of steps for identifying the modes of operation and calculating
the speed-torque curves for a 3-phase fully-controlled rectifier-fed separately excited
de motor.
Repeat problem 3.23 for a 3-phase fully-controlled rectifier with controlled flywheeling.
A 3-phase de drive is to be selected for the four-quadrant operation of a large-power
high-inertia load. Suggest a suitable drive and explain reasons for your choice.
When a de motor is fed by a 3-phase controlled rectifier, a step-down transformer can
be interposed between the ac source and the con verter to get the rated motor voltage for
a = O. Alternatively, the rectifier can be connected directly to the ac source. Then the
rated voltage is obtained for a > O. Compare these two alternatives from the consideration of the power factor, efficiency, motor derating, and cost.
4
Chopper Control
of DC Motors
Choppers are used for the control of de motors because of a number of advantages
such as high efficiency, flexibility in control, light weight, small size, quick response, and regeneration down to very low speeds. Chopper controlled de drives
have applications in servos and traction. In traction, they have been used in underground transit, in battery operated vehicles such as forklift trucks, trolleys, and so
on, and in 1500 V de traction to replace resistance controllers.
In servo applications, separately excited de motors or permanent magnet field
dc motors are used because of their flexible control characteristics. In the past, the
series motor was mainly used in traction. Presently, the separately excited motor is
also employed in traction. The main reason for using a series motor was the high
starting torque. The series motor, however, has a number of limitations. The field of
a series motor cannot be easily controlled by static means. If field control is not ernployed, the series motor must be designed with its base speed equal to the highest
desired speed of the drive. The higher base speeds are obtained by using fewer tums
in the field windings. This, however, reduces the torque per ampere at zero and low
speeds. Further, there are a number of problems with regenerative braking of a series
motor, as shown later in this chapter. On the other hand, regenerative braking of a
separately excited motor is fairly simple and can be carried out down to very low
speeds. Because of the limitations of series motors, separately excited motors are
now preferred even for traction applications. In view of the reduced importance of
series motors in recent years, series motor drives will be described only briefly.
For a dc motor control in open-loop and closed-loop configurations, the chopper offers a number of advantages over controlled rectifiers. Because of the higher
frequency of the output voltage ripple, the ripple in the motor arrnature current is
less and the region of discontinuous conduction in the speed-torque plane is smaller.
145
146
Chopper
Control
of DC Motors
Chap.4
As explained in the last chapter, a reduction in the armature current ripple reduces
the machine losses and its derating. A reduction or elimination of discontinuous con.
duction region improves speed regulation and transient response of a drive. To real.
ize a higher frequency of output voltage ripple, it is customary to use a rectifier with
a higher pulse number. Use of a rectifier with a higher pulse number results in a low
utility factor for thyristors and a relatively high cost. On the other hand, a chopper
can be operated at comparatively high frequencies. For example, it is possible lO operate a chopper at 300 Hz even with converter grade thyristors. Frequency can be increased to 600 Hz with inverter grade thyristors. If the output voltage range can be
lowered, corresponding frequencies can be increased to 400 Hz and 800 Hz, respec.
tively. When power transistors are employed, frequency can be higher than 2.5 kHz.
For low power applications, power MOSFETs can be used, and the frequency can
be higher than 200 kHz. The rectifier output voltage and current have a much lower
frequency-loo
Hz in the case of a single-phase rectifier and 300 Hz in the case of
a three-phase fully-controlled rectifier - when the ac source frequency is 50 Hz.
Even when the supply is ac, a chopper drive consisting of a diode bridge followed by a chopper is sometimes preferred. The operation of a chopper in synchronism with the ac source voltage allows an improvement in the line power factor and
a reduction in the armature current ripple.
4.1 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION ANO CONTROL TECHNIQUES

The circuit diagram and the steady-state waveforms of a chopper are shown in
figure 4.1. A source of direct voltage V supplies an inductive load through a selfcommutated semiconductor switch S. The symbol of a self-commutated serniconductor switch has been used because a chopper can be built using any device from
among thyristor with a forced commutation circuit, GTO, power transistor, and
MOSFET. This symbol was explained in section 1.6.6. The diode shows the direction in which the device can carry current. A diode DF is connected in parallel with
the loado The semiconductor switch S is operated periodically with a period T and
remains closed for a time ton =
with o < 8 < l. The variable 8( = ton/T) is called
the duty ratio or duty cycle of a chopper. Figure 4.1 also shows the waveforrn of
control signal ic' Control signal i, will be a base current for a transistor chopper, and
a gate current for the GTO of a GTO chopper or the main thyristor of a thyristor
chopper. If a power MOSFET is used, it will be a gate to source voltage. When the
control signal is present, the semiconductor switch S will conduct if forward biased.
It is assumed that the circuit operation has been arranged such that the removal of i,
will tum off the switch.
During the on interval of the switch, (O ~ t ~ 8T), the load is subjected to a
voltage V and the load current increases from ial and ia2. The switch is opened al
t = 8T. During the off period of the switch, (8T ~ t ~ T), the load inductance rnaintains the flow of current through diode DF. The load terminal voltage stays zero (if
the diode drop is neglected in comparison to V) and the current decreases from ia2to
ial. The interval O ~ t ~ 8T is called the duty interval and the interval 8T ~ t ~ T is
known as the freewheeling interval. Diode DF provides a path for the load current lo
en
Sec.4.1
147
Principie of Operation and Control Techniques
v.
o
sr
T
Ib)
Self-eommutated
semieonduetor switch
i,
s
(el
Load
(al Basie chopper eireuit

(d)
(el
Figure 4.1 Principle of operation of a step-down (or class A) chopper: (a) Basic chopper circuit, (b) 'to (e) Waveforms.
flow when switch S is off and thus improves the load current waveform. Furthermore, by maintaining the continuity of the load current at turn-off, it prevents transient voltage from appearing across switch S, due to the sudden change of the load
current. The source current waveform is also shown in figure 4.1e. The source current flows only during the duty interval and is equal to the load current.
The direct component or average value of the load voltage Va is given by
Va
=-
J,T v
To
1
dt = -
J,IlT V dt = av
To
(4.1)
By controlling
between
and 1, the load voltage can be varied from O to V.
Thus a chopper allows a variable de voltage to be obtained from a fixed voltage de
source.
148
Chopper Control of DC Motors
Chap.4
The switch S can be controlled in various ways for varying the duty ratio
8( = ton/T). The control techniques can be divided into the following categories:
lo Time Ratio Control (TRC).
2. Current Limit Control (CLC).
In TRC, also known as pulse-width control, the ratio of on time to chopper period is controlled. The TRC can be further divided as follows:
lo Constant frequency TRC: The chopping period T is kept fixed and the on period of the switch is varied to control the duty ratio, 8.
2. Variable Frequency TRC: Here 8 is varied either by keeping ton constant and
varying T or by varying both ton and T.
In variable frequency control with constant on time, low-output vo!tages are
obtained at very low values of chopper frequencies. The operation of a chopper at
low frequencies adversely affects the motor performance. Furthermore, the operaton of a chopper with variable frequency makes the design of an input filter very
difficult. In view of this, variable frequency control is rarely used.
In current limit control, also known as point-by-point control, 8 is controlled
indirectly by controlling the load current between certain specified maximum and
minimum values. When the load current reaches a specified maximum value, the
switch disconnects the load from the source and reconnects it when the current
reaches a specified mnimum value. For a de motor load, this type of control, in effect, is a variable frequency variable on-time control.
The following important points can be noted from the waveform of figure 4.1.
lo The source current is not continuous but flows in pulses. The pulsed current
makes the peak input power demand high and may cause fluctuation in the
source vo!tage. The source current waveform can be resolved into dc and ac
harmonics. The fundamental ac harmonic frequency is the same as the chopper
frequency. The ac harmonics are undesirable because they interfere with other
loads connected to the de source and cause radio frequency interference
through conduction and electromagnetic radiation. Therefore, an L-C filter is
usually incorporated between the chopper and the de source. The fi!ter keeps
the harmonic content in the source current due to the chopper within permissible limits. At higher chopper frequencies, harmonics can be reduced to a tolerable level by a cheaper filter. From this aspect, a chopper should be operated at
the highest possible frequency.
2. The load terminal voltage is not a perfect direct voltage. In addition to a direct
component, it has harmonics of the chopping frequency and its multiples. The
load current also has an ac ripple; its adverse effects on the de motor performance were described in section 3.6.1.
For a given duty ratio, the harmonics in the load voltage have fixed magnitudes. The harmonic current in the load, and therefore, the ripple in the load current
depend on the chopper frequency and the load inductance. The ripple in the load current decreases as the chopping frequency is increased or the load inductance is in-
Sec.4.1
Principie of Operation
and Control Techniques
149
creased. A chopper is, therefore, operated at the highest possible frequency. Ir the
load current ripple is still more than the permissible value, it is reduced by introducing a filter inductor between the chopper and the load.
The chopper of figure 4.1 is called a c1ass A chopper. It is one of a number of
chopper circuits, which are used for the control of de drives. This chopper is capable
of providing only a positive voltage and a positive current. It is, therefore, a singlequadrant chopper, capable of providing de separately excted motor control in the
first quadrant. Since it can vary the output voltage from V to O, it is also a stepdown chopper or a de to de buck converter. The basic principie involved can also be
used to realize a step-up chopper or a boost type de to de con verter. The circuit diagram and the steady-state waveforms of a step-up chopper are shown in figure 4.2.
This chopper is known as a class B chopper. The presence of control signal i, indicates the duration for which switch S can conduct if forward biased. During a chopping period T, it remains closed for an interval O'es t ,,;;;8T and remains open for an
interval 8T ,,;;;t,,;;;T. During the on period, i, increases from isl to is2' thus increasing
the magnetic energy stored in inductance L. When the switch is opened, current
flows through the parallel combination of the load and C. Since the current is forced
against a higher voltage, the rate of change of the current is negative. It decreases
from is2 to isl in the switch's off periodo The energy stored in the inductance and the
energy supplied by the low voltage source are given to the load. The capacitor e
serves two purposes. At the instant of opening of switch S, the source current is and
ich
o
11
sr
..
t
(b)
v.
Load
~lJ LL
o
sr
(e)
b
(a) Basie chopper
eireuit
f.o
;'~
151
sr
T
(d)
Figure 4.2 Principie of operation of a step-up (or class B) chopper: (a) Basie chopper
circuit, (b) to (d) Waveforrns.
150
Chap.4
load current i, are not the same. In the absence of C, the tum off of S will force the
two currents to have the same values. This will cause high induced voltages in L and
.the load inductance. Another use of C is to reduce the load voltage ripple. The purpose of the diode D s to prevent any flow of current frorn the load into switch S
or source Y.
For an understanding of the step-up action, C is assumed large enough to
maintain a constant voltage Ya across the loado The average voltage across the termi.
nals a, b is given by
1 T
Yab = T J Vabdt
= Ya(1 - 5)
(4.2)
ST
Average voltage across the inductance
T1 Jro
YL
=-
(4.3)
Sl
iSl
YL
di)
L dt dt
Ldi=O
The source voltage

Y
+ Yab
(4.4)
Substituting frorn equations (4.2) and (4.3) into equation (4.4) gives
Y
Ya(1-
5)
or
Y
Y=-a
1- 5
(4.5)
According to equation (4.5), theoretically the output voltage Ya can be changed from
Y to 00 by controlling 5 from O to l. In practice Ya can be controlled from Y to a
higher voltage, which depends on C, and the parameters of the load and chopper.
The main 'advantage of a step-up chopper is the low ripple in the source current. While most applications require a step-down chopper, the step-up chopper
finds application in low-power battery-driven vehicles such as golf carts, trolleys,
and so on. Here a motor of higher voltage rating is controlled from a low-voltage
battery through a step-up chopper. The principie of the step-up chopper is also used
in the regenerative braking of de motors.
4.2 MOTORING OPERATION OF SEPARATELY

EXCITED MOTOR
This section describes the steady-state analysis and performance of a de separately
excited motor fed by a one-quadrant step-down (class A) chopper of figure 4.1. The
basic scheme of the drive is shown in figure 4.3a. An L-C filter is connected between the source and the chopper to reduce fluctuations in the source current and
voltage. When the filter inductor is assumed lossless and the capacitor C is suffi-
Sec.4.2
Motoring
Operation
151
of Separately Excited Motor
+
V
(a) Chopper
drive
Duty interval
Figure 4.3 Chopper eontrolled de

separately exeited motor.
(b)
F reewheeling
Equivalent
interval
circuits
ciently large, then the chopper input voltage will be equal to the source voltage V.
The equivalent circuits of the motor for the duty and freewheeling intervals are
shown in figure 4.3b.
.
The idealized steady-state output voltage and the armature current waveforms
are shown in figure 4.4a. In this case, armature current flows continuously during a
chopping period and the chopper is said to operate in continuous conduction mode.
During the duty interval, out of the total energy supplied by the source, a part
is absorbed by the arrrrature and converted into mechanical energy, a part is coriverted into heat in resistance R, and the switch, and the remaining energy is stored
in the inductance La. It is this stored magnetic energy in the inductance which is responsible for maintaining the flow of the armature current during the freewheeling
interval; both the mechanical energy and heat losses must be supplied frorn this
stored magnetic energy, as no energy is supplied by the source. When the armature
v,
v,
1---=--.,
v t-----.,
sr
(a) Continuous
T
conduction
Figure 4.4
sr
Ib)
Discontinuous
Motor terminal voltage and current waveforms.
-yT
conduction
152
Chap.4
circuir inductance is low and the armature current is small (at low motor torque), the
stored magnetic energy may not be enough to maintain the flow of current during
the off period of S, particularly when either the back emf is large or the duration of
the off period is long. In that case, the armature current may become zero during the
freewheeling interval, as shown in figure 4.4b, giving discontinuous conduction.
With present day semiconductor devices, choppers operate at frequencies
which are sufficiently high to elirninate discontinuous conduction during the motor's
normal steady-state operation. Discontinuous conduction takes place only under the
transient operation. In view of this, steady-state analysis will be considered only for
the continuous conduction.
In the case of current limit control, the chopper operates between the prescribed current limits; therefore, discontinuous conduction does not occur.
Analysis of the drive will be presented both for the time ratio control (TRC)
and the current limit control (eLC). In addition to assumptions 2 and 3 described in
section 3.3.2, the following assumptions are made:
1. Switch S and diode DF are ideal, having zero drop when conducting and zero
leakage current when not conducting.
2. The turn-off of the switch does not have any effect on the motor terminal
voltage. This assumption is generally valid except in the case of some thyristor
choppers.
3. The discontinuous conduction is ignored due to the reasons just given.
4. The chopper terminal voltage is constant and equal to V as explained earlier in
this section.
4.2.1 Steady-State
(TRC)
Analysis
tor Time Ratio Control
The analysis aims at the calculation of the motor speed-torque curves and the arrnature current ripple. The motor performance equations for the duty and freewheeling
intervals are as follows:
Duty Interval (O~t~ or): From figure 4.3b
R'
L di,
ala + aili
+E=V
(4.6)
Let ia(O) = ial

Solution of equation (4.6) with this initial condition is
ia = (V;a
E) (1 - e-U'Ta+) iale-U'Ta
(4.7)
where Ta = La/Ra, the armature circuit time constant. If the current at the end of the
duty interval is ia2, then from equation (4.7),
i = V - E (1 _ e-8Ti'Ta)
a2
R
a
+ iale-8T1
'Ta
(4.8)
Sec.4.2
Motoring
Operation
153
of Separately Excited Motor
Freewheeling Interval (oT::;' t ~ Ti:
From figure 4.3b,
.
L di,
R ala+
adt +
'
where ti = t - 8T.
The initial eurrent (at ti = O) is ia2' Solving
tion gives
E
i =--(I-e-tTa)+i
a
R
(4.9)
equation
(4.9) with this initial eondi-
'1
e-tTa'1
(4.10)
a2
In the steady state, the value of ia at the end of the ehopping eycIe should be
the same as at the beginning of the eycIe. Thus, the value of ia for ti = (1 - 8)T will
be ial. Substituting this in equation (4.10) gives
i = -~(I
al
R
+ ia2e-(J-Il)TITa
e-(1-Il)TITa)
Solving equations
(4.11)
(4.8) and (4.11) for ial and ia2 gives
. _ :!...
lal-
(ellTITa
IlTIT
a)
TITa
The eurrent ripple ~ia is given by the following
Y [1 + e
~.
la =
ia2 - ial
2
= 2R
(4.12)
(1 - eRa 1 - e
y
la2 -
1) _ ~
R
E
Ra
eT'Ta-l
(4.13)
equation:
TITa -
e/lTITa
eTlTa
lt is explained in seetion 3.3.2 that the steady-state

the induetanee is zero, and, therefore, .
Ya = E + Rala
where Ya and la ate the average values of the annature
respeetively. Substituting from equation (4.1) gives
e(1-Il)TITa]
(4.14)
average voltage drop aeross

(4.15)
terminal voltage and current,
8Y = E + loRa
or
la
8Y-E
R
(4.16)
Sinee the flux is eonstant, the average motor torque depends only on the de
eomponent (average value) of the armature eurrent. The ae eomponents
produce
only alternating torques which have a zero average value. Therefore,
the motor
torque T, is given by
Ta
KIa
(4.17)
154
From equations (4.16) and (4.17) and noting that E

speed in radian sI sec. ,
Kwm, where
Wm
Chap.4
is the motor
(4.18)
It shou1d be noted that equation (4.18) may not be va1id for very 1ight loads
(approaching ideal no load), where discontinuous conduction may be present.
The speed-torque curves with 8 as a parameter are similar to those shown by
the continuous lines in figure 2.4a for the ideal direct voltage. The natural characteristic ideally corresponds to 8 = 1 (assuming a lossless chopper). The lower characteristics are obtained for the smaller values of
If speed control above the base
speed is required, the field may also be supplied by a chopper. In this case the duty
ratio of the armature chopper is either set at1 or the motor is directly connected to
the source. The latter alternative is preferred as it eliminates the chopper losses. The
duty ratio of the field chopper is reduced to get higher speeds. The speed torque
curves for various values of the duty ratio of the field chopper will be similar to
those shown by the dotted lines in figure 2.4a.
When the load torque changes, the average value of the armature current la
changes to make the motor torque equal to the load torque. At a given o, the necessary change in la is obtained due to a change in E. This, however, does not affect the
value of the ripple in the armature current, which is independent of both E and la according to equation (4.14). The current ripple is a function of o and the T ITa ratio.
For a given TITa ratio, the ripple has a maximum value at o = 0.5 (see example 4.1).
At present, some motor manufacturers prescribe the maximum ripple that can
be permitted without adversely affecting the motor commutation ...For the maximum
ripple and 8 = 0.5, the TITa ratio can be calculated from equation (4.14). The chopper frequency is decided based on the capability of the device used to realize
switch S and the desired minimum output voltage.? The armature time constant Ta
and the desired. armature circuit inductance Lt are calculated. If the armature circuit
inductance is less than Lt, an external inductance is added.
o:
Example 4.1
A 250- V separately excited motor de has an armature resistance of 2.5 n. When driving a load at 600 rpm with constant torque, the armature takes 20 A. This motor is controlled by a chopper circuit with a frequency of 400 Hz and an input voltage of 250 V.
1. What should be the value of the duty ratio if one desires to reduce the speed
fram 600 to 400 rpm, with the load torque maintained constant?
2. What should be the minimum value of the armature inductance, if the
maximum armature current ripple expressed as a percentage of the rated
current is not to exceed 10 percent?
Solution: With an input voltage of 250 V and at a constant torque, the motor will run
at 600 rpm when /) = l.
1. At 600 rpm
E
= Va - laRa = 250 - 20
2.5
= 200 V
Sec.4.2
Motoring
155
Operation of Separately Excited Motor
At 400 rpm, the back ernf

400
El = 200 x 600 = 133 V
The average chopper output voltage
+ I.R. = 133 + 20 x 2.5 = 183 V.

Now aV = V.I or a = V.I/V = 183/250 = 0.73.
V.I = El
2.
. V [1 +
ill=-
eTITa -
2Ra
eS'TlT. eTIT
e(l-a)TITa]
(4.14)
Per-unit current ripple = (ili.)p = lili.

rated
= __ V_ [1
2R.lr.ted
+ eTIT.
enlTa - e(!-a)TITa]
eTITa
- 1
(E4.1)
For the maximum value of the per-unit ripple

d(ili.)p = O
da
'
therefore from equation (E4.1)

-
T
+ _e(l-a)TITa
_enIT
'Ta
"'"'
O or a = 1 - a or a = 0.5.
'T.
Substituting in equation (E4.1), the maximum value of the per-unit ripple (ili.)pm is
given by the following equation:
(ilia)pm =2RI
V
a
O 5TIT
[e .
e05TIT.
rated
1]
+1
(E4.2)
For (ili.)pm = 0.1
STITa._ 1 = 0.2R.Irated= 0.2 x 2.5 x 20 = O 04

eO.5TIT.
+1
250
or
eO.5TIT.
or
R.T
2.5
L. = 0.16 = 400 X 0.16 = 39.1 mH.
4.2.2 Steady-State
= 1.08
or
Analysis
0.5T/'Ta = en(l.08) = 0.08
for Current
or
'T.
T
0.16
Limit Control
(CLC)
In CLC, a chopper operates to control the armature current between the prescribed
limits ial and ia2 The chopper adjusts the values of 5 and T such that the current
fluctuates between these prescribed limits. In CLC, the analysis airns at calculating
5, T, and speed-torque curves.
156
Chap.4
Equations (4.6) to (4.8) are valid for the duty interval, and equations (4.9) to
(4.11) are valid for the freewheeling interval. From equation (4.8),
V - E - Raial)
eST= T a log, ( V - E - Raia2
(4.19)
and from equation (4.11),

()1 - eST =
E
a log, ( E
-T
+ Rai-1\
+ Rai~
(4.20)
Adding equations (4.19) and (4.20) yields

T = Ta
log, [(VV -- EE -- Ra~al)

(E + Ra~a2)J
Rala2 E + Ralal
(4.21)
Once T is obtained from equation (4.21), eScan be calculated from equation (4.19).
Then la and T, are obtained from equations (4.16) and (4.17), respectively.
For given values of ial and ia2, the average current and torque are nearly constant for all speeds. This can be shown as follows:
Since the durations eSTand (1 - eS)Tare small compared to the armature circuit
time constant, the variation of ia between ial and ia2takes place along the initial parts
of exponential curves, which can be approximated by straight lines. Thus,
1
la = T
..
[(BT (.
ia2- ial )
Jo lal + eST t
dt
I-BlT
+ Jo
(.
ial - ia2 ,) 'J

la2+ (1 _ eS)Tt dt
ial + ia2
2
= Constant
(4.22)
Thus, the speed-torque curves are parallel to thespeed axis. The CLC changes
the motor speed-torque characteristic from a constant speed to a constant torque
characteristic. This type of characteristic can be used for constant-current starting of
a motor or for torque control of a motor driving a battery-operated vehicle. This type
of characteristic is not suitable for driving most loads due to the problem of instability, unless an additional closed loop is incorporated to control the motor speed.
4.3 MOTORING CONTROL OF SERIES MOTOR
The main problem in the analysis of a chopper controlled series motor arises due to
the nonlinear relationship between the induced voltage E and the arrnature current i,
because of the saturation in the magnetization characteristic. At a given motor
speed, the instantaneous back emf e changes between El and E2 as i, changes between ial and ia2, as shown in figure 4.5. The average effect of this changing emf
can be accounted for by a fixed emf Ea which is given by the following equation:
Ea = Ke<l>wm
= f(Ia)wm = KWm
(4.23)
Thus, the motor back emf constant is assumed to be a function of the average value
of armature current, la. For a given la' K is obtained from the magnetization characteristic of the motor. The magnetization characteristic is obtained by driving the se-
Sec.4.3
Motoring Control of Series Motor
157
i,
a2
al
sr
sr
E2
E,
Figure 4.5 Approximation of time
varying back ernf by a fixed ernf.
ries machine by a prime mover at a fixed speed and exciting the field by a separate
source. For different values of the field winding current la, the armature induced
voltages are obtained. Dividing the induced voltages by Wm aIlows a K versus la
curve to be obtained.
In addition to the preceding simplifying assumption, it is also assumed that the
motor's field inductance and resistance are constant. The field inductance does vary
considerably due to the saturation of the magnetic circuit and to the eddy currents.
However, the variation of the inductance affects the steady-state performance curves
of the motor only by a smaIl amount. 4
4.3.1
Steady-State
Analysis for Time Ratio
Control (TRC)
The analysis of the series motor for TRC is now carried out using the foregoing two
assumptions and the assumptions described in section 4.2 for the separately excited
motor. From equations (4.15) and (4.23), .
or
(4.24)
For the calculation of the motor speed-torque characteristics, the following sequence
of steps is followed. A value of la is chosen; the corresponding value of K is obtained from the magnetization characteristic; Wm is calculated from equation (4.24);
and the torque T, is obtained from equation (4.17). The speed torque curves with 5
as a parameter have the same nature as the curves shown by the continuous lines in
figure 2.4b for the ideal direct voltage. The natural characteristic ideally corresponds
158
Chap.4
to 5 = 1. The lower characteristics are obtained for smaller values of 5. In a series

motor, field control cannot be obtained by a chopper.
With the assumption of equation (4.23), the ripple is given by equation (4.14).
The ripple calculated this way will have a large error. Satisfactory estimation of the
ripple is possible only when the variation of the field inductance and the eddy currents are taken into account. 4
Example 4.2
A 220- V, l00A de series motor has an armature resistanee and an induetanee of 0.06 n
and 2 mH, respeetively. The field winding resistanee and inductance are 0.04
and
18 mH, respeetively. Running on no load as a generator, with the field winding conneeted to a separate source, it gives the following magnetization eharacteristic at
700 rpm:
Field current
25
50
75
100 125
150 175
A
Terminal voltage 66.5 124 158.5 181 198.5 211 221.5 V
The motor is eontrolled by a chopper operating at 400 Hz and 220 V. Ca1culate the
motor speed for a duty ratio of 0.7 and a load torque equal to 1.5 times the rated torque.
Solution:
The speed at whieh the magnetization
700 x 2'TT-j60 = 73.3 rad/see.
charaeteristie
was measured
voltage indueed E = Kewm

K=K=~
e
Torque T,
er,
(E4.3)
= KIa =Wm
From equation (E4.3) and the magnetization eharacteristie

25
22.7
la
. Ta
50
84.6
75
162.2
100
"246.9
125
338:5
150
431.8
175
528.8
N-m
The rated torqueItorque at l00A) = 247 N-m

1.5 x Rated torque = 1.5 x 247 = 370.5 N-m
From the above Ta/la table the eurrent at 1.5 x Rated torque = 133 A
Also K at 133 A = 370.5/133 = 2.79
R,
Now
0.06
=
W
m
4.3.2
+ 0.04
0.1 11
sv -u,n, = 0.7x220-100xO.1
K
2.79
56
l.
ra
d/
seco =
4927
. rpm
Steady-State
Analysis with Current Limit
Control (CLC)
As with equation (4.22) and the related arguments, for a series motor we have
1
a
= ial + ia2
2
Since ial and ia2 are known values for the CLC, la can be calculated from the foregoing equation. K is obtained from the magnetization characteristic and T, is calculated from equation (4.17). For given values of ial and ia2the torque is constant and
Sec.4.4
Regenerative
De
Braking of
159
Motors
independent of speed. Thus, with CLC, the speed-torque curves are the same as
those for the separately excited motor.
4.4 REGENERATIVE BRAKING OF De MOTORS
When fed by a fixed voltage source, regenerative braking of a separately excited
motor can be carried out only for speeds above the rated speed. With chopper control, it is possible to obtain regenerative braking down to nearly zero speed. This
feature has allowed a large amount of energy saving in the underground traction and
battery-operated vehicles. In the case of battery-operated vehicles, the regenerated
power can be stored in the battery. Consequently, energy is saved and the vehicles
can travellonger distances before recharging the battery becomes necessary.
In the absence of chopper control, a series motor cannot be braked by regenerative braking. With chopper control it is possible to brake a series motor using regenerative braking. However, regenerative braking of a series motor is not as simple
and effective as that of a separately excited motor.
4.4.1 Separately
Excited Motor
The regenerative braking circuit is shown in figure 4.6a. It uses essentially the stepup (class B) chopper of figure 4.2a, with the motor (working as a generator) fonning
the low voltage side and the source the high voltage side. The function of inductance
o
r--
i.
v. _
-- ---,
I
I
I
I
I
I
R.
(a)
- -
I
I
Chopper
circuit
I
I
I Motor
L.
L __
I
E
I
I
--'
v,
-,...-......;;-.,
T
(b) Continuous
eonduction
Figure 4.6
(e) Discontinuous
Regenerative braking of separately excited motor.
conduetion
160
Chap.4
L in figure 4.2a is now perfonned by the annature circuit inductance La. A filter is
also connected, between the source and the chopper, for reducing the fluctuations in
the source current and voltage.
The steady-state wavefonns of the motor terminal voltage, Va, and the annature
current, ia, for continuous and discontinuous conductions are shown in figure 4.6b
and e respectively.
The semiconductor switch S is operated periodically with a period T. It remains closed for an interval O~ t ~ eSTand remains open for an interval eST~ t ~ T.
During the on period of the switch, the motor terminal voltage remains zero and due
to the back emf E the annature current increases from ial to ia2. The mechanical energy supplied by the load and the inertia of the motor load system (only if the speed
is changing) is con verted by the machine into the electrical energy. This energy is
partly used in increasing the stored magnetic energy in the annature circuit inductance, and the remainder is dissipated in the armature circuit resistance and the
switch. When the switch is interrupted at t = eST,the annature current flows through
diode D against the source voltage V. During the interval eST~ t ~ T, the sum of the
energy generated by the machine and the energy stored in the inductor during the on
period of the switch is partly dissipated in resistance R, and diode D and the remaining energy is fed to the source, giving regenerative braking. Thus, with the help of a
step-up chopper, it is possible to transfer energy from a back emf of lower voltage to
a de source V of constant and higher potential. As the speed falls and the back ernf
reduces, the duty ratio eSis increased to maintain the braking torque. With a sufficiently large inductance in the annature circuit, it is possible to obtain regenerative
braking down to verylow speeds.
The filter capacitor C has one more use in addition to that described in the first
paragraph of the present section. When the switch is opened, the motor annature
current must flow through the source. TAe source inductance does not allow the
source current to change abruptly without severe voltage stress on the switch. The
capacitor provides an altemative path for the annature current, and thus increases the
regenerated power and reduces the voltage-stress on the switch.
During the on period of the switch, O~ t ~ eST,the energy is stored in the armature inductance. Therefore, the on interval is also called the energy storage interval. The off interval eST~ t ~ T is called the energy transfer interval, because the
regenerated energy is transferred to the source in this interval.
At low values of speed, the motor current may become zero during the energy
transfer interval, giving discontinuous conduction as shown in figure 4.6c. As
present-day choppers operate at sufficiently high frequencies and usually with
enough inductance included in the annature circuit to maximize the regenerated
power, discontinuous conduction occurs only in a very narrow region of the drive
operation. Therefore, the discontinuous conduction mode is neglected here.
The present section describes steady-state analysis and performance for the
TRC. The analysis aims at the calculation of speed-torque characteristics, current
ripple, and regenerated power. The analysis makes use of the same assumptions
as described in section 4.2 for the motoring operation and ignores the presence of
the filter.
Sec.4.4
Regenerative
De Motors
Braking of
Energy Storage lnterval (O::E;

t::E;fiT).
161
The machine terminals are shorted by
the closed switch S. Thus

di,
Rala + L a-=
dt
(4.25)
and let
ia(O) =.a1
Energy Transfer 1nterval (oT ~ t ~ T).

through the source.
The armature
current
now flows
Therefore,
dia
Rala + L aili
(4.26)
and let
i.(aT) = ia2
Since the machine
is working as a generator,
Ya = E - laRa
(4.27)
From figure 4.6b,

(4.28)
Substituting
in equation
(4.27) gives
(1 - a)Y = E - laRa
or
E - (1- a)Y
(4.29)
la =
Torque is still given by equation (4.17), but it has a negative sign due to the reversal
of the arrnature current la. The derivation.of the current ripple gives an express ion
similar to equation (4.14). The maximum ripple can be obtained from equation (4.14)
by substituting a = 0.5.
The regenerated power Prg is given by
1 (I-6lT
Prg =T
(y. i.)dt
An express ion for ia can be derived for the energy transfer interval from equations (4.25) and (4.26). Substituting for ia in the preceding equation and integrating
the resultant express ion gives
y2
P =rg
R,
[(E)
-
- 1 . (1 -
a)
+ TT
T/Ta
{e(l-OlTlTa+
1 - eT/Ta
TlTa
- 1}]
(4.30)
162
Chap.4
The speed-torque curves with 8 as a parameter are similar to those shown by

the continuous lines in figure 2.7 for the ideal direct voltage. Assuming a lossless
chopper, the natural characteristic corresponds to 8 = O. The lower characteristics
are obtained for larger values of 8. If regenerative braking above the rated speed is
desired, the field is supplied through a step-down chopper for reducing the field current. The armature chopper is set for 8 = O or preferably is bypassed to eliminate
chopper losses. The duty ratio of the field chopper is controlled to get the regenerative braking for speeds higher than the rated no-load speed. This gives the speed
torque curves shown by the dotted lines in figure 2.7. The regenerated power versus
speed curves with 8 as a parameter are shown in figure 4.7. For a given 8 the regenerated power increases linearly with speed.
In the absence of field control, the armature current may become excessive
under certain operating conditions. At any operating speed, the armature current is
prevented from exceeding the permissible value by a reduction in the value of 8.
There is always a limitation on the minimum time for which the switch can be on.
Thus, there is al ways a limitation on the minimum value of 8. According to
equation (4.29), when operating with the minimum value of 8, there is a critical
speed beyond which the armature current cannot be prevented from exceeding a safe
value. For the minimum values of 8 encountered in thyristor choppers, the critical
speed may be close to the rated speed and sometimes even less than the rated speed.
The critical speed may be easily exceeded indrives involving active loads. For
example, when a battery-operated vehicle or an electric train is moving down a gradient, the critical speed may be crossed if the driver fails to apply the brakes (regenerative braking) in time. In such a situation, the armature current can be limited
either by weakening the field or raising the value of R. by inserting an external resistance in the armature circuit. While the former has the drawback of reducing the
torque capability of the motor, the latter increases the loss.
The analysis and performance with CLC is not considered here. The necessary
expressions can be derived from equations (4.25) and (4.26). According to equation (4.22) and the related explanation, the torque remains constant and independent
of speed for given settings of i.1 and i.2. Naturally, the braking power increases
linearly with speed. The CLCis employed in battery-operated vehicles.
Example 4.3
A 230 Y, 500 rpm, 90 A separately excited de motor has thearmature resistance and
inductance of 0.115 n and 11 mH respectively. The motor is controlled by a chopper
operating at 400 Hz. If the motor is regenerating,
Prg
Figure 4.7 Regenerative braking performance curves of TRC chopper-fed de separately excited motor.
Sec.4.4
Regenerative
De
Braking of
Motors
163
1. Find the motor speed and the regenerated power at the rated current and a
duty ratio of 0.5.
2. Ca1culate the maximuin safe speed if the minimum value of the duty ratio
is 0.1.
Solution:
At rated conditions of operation,
Er= y - IuR.
= 230 -
90 x 0.115
= 219.7
l. In regenerative braking
= E - I.R. or E = (l - o)Y + I.R.

and l. = 90 A
E = 0.5 x 230 + 90 x 0.115 = 125 Y
(E4.4)
(l - o)Y
At
o = 0.5
Since N = E
Nr Er
where N, = rated speed in rpm and N = speed to be calculated
Thus
N
NrE
Er
500 x 125
219.7
3
11 X 100.115
'T =
a
TI'T.
2.5 x 10-3
10
= 95.65 x
284.5 rpm
1
T = 400 = 2.5 mS
95 65 S
. m,
3
= 0.026
and
'T./T
= 38.3
/T
+ elIT/T
Equation (4.30) is repeated here:

2
= -yR.
rg
[(E)
- -
1 . (l - o)
'T {e(l-8lT
+ .2
l}]
T/T
, -
1 - eT/T.
(4.30)
Now
+ elIT/T
e(l-8)T/T.
e T/T. -
1 - eT/T.
eO.5T/T
=X=
+ eO.5T/T.
e T/T. -
1 - e T/T.
e.5T/T. eOSTIT,
1 O.013
1 = 2.013
= 0.0065

2
p =y
R.
rg
[(~
1) . (I -
o)
+ 2:!
T
x]
230
= 0.115
=
[(125
230 - 1) (I - 0.5)
+ 38.3 x 0.0065 ]
9.52 kW
2. The maximum safe speed will be obtained at the rninimum value of o and the
rated armature current. For higher speeds, the armature current will exceed
Chap.4
164
the rated motor current and this operation will not be safe for the motor. At
the maximum safe speed Nm, the back emf Em is given by
Em
= (l - 8min)V + IarR. = 0.9 x 230 + 90 x 0.115 = 217
= Nr x E = 500 x 217 = 494 rpm

m
4.4.2
E,
219.7
Series Motor
The circuit employed for regenerative braking of a series motor is the same as shown
in figure 4.6. In regenerative braking, the series motor is made to work as a selfexcited de generator, which requires that the field be reversed with respect to the
arrnature, compared to their connection in the motoring operation. The principie of
operation remains the same as described for a separately excited motor.
Using the approximation of equation (4.23) and following the method described
for the separately excited motor in section 4.4.1, the following equation can be obtained for the TRC control:
(4.31)
The regenerated power is given by equation (4.30).
For a given 5, the speed-torque and the speed-regenerated power characteristics are calculated using the following sequence of steps. A value of la is chosen; K
is obtained from the motor magnetization characteristic; and Wm, Ta, and Prg are then
obtained from equations (4.31), (4.17), and (4.30), respectively. The nature of the
speed-torque and the speed-regenerated power characteristics is shown in figure 4.8a
and..b. For a given 5, the torque increases with a decrease in speed and the regenerated power increases with an increase in speed. While the speed-torque curves are
suitable for stopping a motor, they are not suitable for holding an active load, because of the positive slope the drive may become unstable.
o
(a) Speed-torque
Figure 4.8
motor.
curves
T.
o
(b)
Regenerated
power-speed
curves
Regenerative braking performance curves of TRC chopper-fed de series
Sec.4.5
Dynamic and Composite
Braking of DC Motors
165
As in the case of the motoring operation, section 4.3.2, it can be shown that in
the CLC, the torque remains constant and independent of speed, and the regenerated
power increases linearly with speed for a given setting of current limits ial and ia2.
As explained in the case of the separately excited motor in section 4.4.1, the
armature current may become excessive at large speeds due to the restriction on the
minimum value of 8. This is prevented either by inserting an external resistance in
the armature or weakening the field using a special circuit. 6 The regenerative brakof a dc series motor is not as simple and smooth as that of a separately excited motor. The main problems are the difficulty in the initial build-up of the back emf and
the poor stablity.?
4.5 DYNAMIC ANO COMPOSITE BRAKING OF DC MOTORS

The basic circuit is shown in figure 4.9. The only difference between this circuit and
the dynamic braking circuits of figure 2.9 is the addition of a self-commutated
semiconductor switch S, in parallel with the braking resistance RB. The switch is operated
periodically with a period T and remains closed for the duration 8T. This allows a
stepless variation in the effective value of the resistance between the terminals a, b.
If the ripple in the armature current is neglected, then the energy consumed by
the resistance RB in one cycle of the chopper is given by
EB = I;RB(l
The average power consumed
- 8)T
by RB
P a "= ETB = I2aR B (1 - 8)
The effective
value of the resistance
Re
between the terminals
a, b
= ~; = (l - 8)RB
(4.32)
This equation suggests that the effective value of the braking resistance can be steplessly changed from RB to O when the duty ratio of the switch, 8, is controlled from
O to 1. With a reduction in speed, 8 can be increased to reduce Re. Thus the braking
l,
1-----1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I Motor
I
I
I
I
I
I
Figure 4.9 Dynamic braking with

chopper control.
_ E
I
I
-'
166
Chap.4
can be carried out at a constant torque until 8 = 1. Then the motor is braked along
the speed-torque curve corresponding to RB = O (fig. 2.10). The inclusion of the
semiconductor switch allows the braking operation at the highest torque from full to
very close to zero speed.
For dynamic braking, the series motor must self-excite, which requires that the
field be reversed.
4.5.2 Composite Braking
When electrical energy is generated in regenerative braking, it should either be stored
in the source or supplied to the loads connected to the source. With the exception of
batteries, a source cannot store energy; hence, there should be some loads available
to use this energy. If the loads are not available or they are not adequate to consume
all the regenerated energy, then this energy must be dissipated using dynarnic braking. The combination of regenerative and dynamic brakings is ca11ed composite
braking. This type of braking is used in dc traction.
The de supply for traction is usua11yobtained frorn an ac supply. In general, ac
is converted into de by uncontro11ed rectifiers, which permit energy to flow in one
direction onlythat is, from ac to de. When a traction vehicle is retuming its braking energy, it should be taken up by other vehicles since it cannot be fed back to the
ac supply. This may not happen, because, firstly, there may be no vehicles running
at that time, and, secondly, the peak power fed back is always greater than the
power that can be accepted by one other vehicle. There are two possible ways of absorbing this energy:
1. By feeding it to the ac supply using a line commutated inverter. This, however,
increases the cost of conversion equipment.
2. By using composite braking.
A scheme of composite braking is shown in figure 4.lOa. A braking resistor RB
and a thyristor TI are added to the regenerative braking circuit of figure 4.6a. The
waveforms of the motor armature current and the filter capacitor voltage are shown
in figure 4.lOb and c. Thyristor TI is not given the gate pulse as long as the capacitor voltage is below the tolerance limit of the supply voltage Yema""If, however, the
capacitor voltage crosses this limit, the gate pulse is applied to TI to tum it on.
As long as the de network is able to absorb a11the regenerated power, the eapacitor voltage remains below the tolerance limit Yemaxand regenerative braking
takes place. The waveform of Veand ia for this case are shown in figure 4.lOb. If,
however, the supply network cannot accept the regenerated power, which flows into
it during the off period of the switch S, the energy gets stored in the capacitor and its
voltage rises, as shown in figure 4.lOc. When it exceeds the prescribed limit Yemax,
thyristor TI is tumed on and resistor RB is switched in. Now the motor current no
longer flows into the capacitor and the source but into the series resistor RB. When
the semiconductor switch S is tumed on again at T - that is, at the beginning of the
next chopping cycle - the current through resistor RB ceases and thyristor TI is
tumed off. As soon as the switch is tumed off, the current first flows to offer energy
to the source. If the source cannot accept energy, it flows through the capacitor. The
capacitor voltage rises to Yemaxand thyristor TI switches in the braking resistor RB
Sec.4.6
Current Control
167
(a) Chopper
;.~
o
sr
l::: ::
"E:~_nn~
O
sr
-t
(b) Waveforms with only

regenerative braking
Figure 4.10
eireuit
O'----..J.T--------'T'---~
VCn'\IIlC
sr
(e) Waveforms with

composite braking
Composite braking.
The main advantage of this circuit is that the source capacity to accept the energy is checked in every chopping cycle. Energy is supplied to the source as long as
it is able to absorb it. The energy is wasted in the resistance only when the source
cannot accept it. Another advantage is that the power circuit is simple. A thyristor
without its own commutation circuit switches the braking resistor in and out.
4.6 CURRENT CONTROL
The purpose of current control and methods of its implementation are described
in section 3.9 for the case of rectifier control. They are also applicable to chopper
control.
Because of the ability of a self-commutated semiconductor switch to turn off at
any instant, the current-limit control is implemented differently. The instantaneous
value (instead of the average value for rectifiers) of the armature current is compared
with the maximum permissible (instantaneous) value. If the current exceeds the
maximum permissible value, switch S is turned off. This automatically adjusts the
duty ratio such that the current is maintained within safe limits.
168
4.7 MULTIOUAORANT
OC MOTORS
CONTROL
Chap.4
OF CHOPPER-FEO
The multiquadrant control of de motors involving regenerative braking will be considered here. As explained in the previous section, a current control loop forms an
integral part of such drives. Ouring transient operations, it prevents the current from
exceeding the safe value and in some applications forces it to stay at the maximum
perrnissible value for the most part of the transient operation to get fast response. As
in the case of single-quadrant choppers described earlier, the multiquadrant choppers
also employ a filter between the source and the chopper. For simplicity, the current
control loop and the filter will not be shown in the chopper circuits to be described
in this section.
4.7.1
Two-Ouadrant
Control Consisting of Forward
Motoring
and Regenerative
Braking
Two-quadrant operation consisting of forward motoring and regenerative braking requires a chopper capable of giving a positive voltage and current in either direction.
This two-quadrant operation of de motors can be realized in the following two ways.
Scheme 1: Single Chopper with a Reversing Switch.
The chopper circuits
used for forward motoring [fig. 4.3a] and forward regenerative braking [fig. 4.6]
can be combined in the chopper circuit shown in figure 4.11.
S is a self-commutated semiconductor switch, which is operated periodically
such that it remains closed for a duration of 8T and remains open for a duration of
(l - 8)T. e is a manual switch. When e is closed and S is in operation, a circuit
similar to that of figure 4.3a is obtained, perrnitting the forward motoring operation.
Under this situation, terminal a is positive with respect to terminal b.
The regenerative braking in the forward direction is obtained when e is opened
and the arrnature connection is reversed with the help of the reversing switch RS,
making terminal b positive with respect to terminal a. Ouring the on period of
switch S, the motor current flows through a path consisting of the motor arrnature,
switch S and diode DI' and increases the energy stored in the arrnature circuit inductance. When S is opened, the current flows through the arrnature, diode O2, source V,
diode 010 and back to the.armature, thus feeding energy to the source.
When working in motoring, the changeover to regeneration is done in the following steps. Switch S is deactivated and e is opened. This forces the arrnature current to flow through diode O2, source V, and diode DI' The energy stored in the
Figure 4.11
Forward motoring and regenerative braking control with a single chopper.
Sec.4.7
Multiquadrant
Control of Chopper-Fed DC Motors
169
armature circuit is fed back to the source and the armature current falls to zero. After
an adequate delay to ensure that the current has indeed become zero, the armature
connections are reversed and switch S is reactivated with a suitable value of 8 to
start regeneration.
The chopper circuit of figure 4. l l can also be used for a series motor. Its armature is connected as shown and the field is connected outside the reversing switchthat is, either between a and R or between S and b. The field is connected outside
the reversing switch to ensure that the direction of its current remains the same both
for motoring and regeneration. During motoring, the direction of the induced voltage
will be to make the left terminal positive with respect to the right terminal. Just after
the switch-over to regeneration (with Copen, armature reversed, and zero motor
current), due to residual magnetism, the armature will have some induced voltage
with the right side terminal positive. During the on period of S, the induced emf will
force a current through the path consisting of the armature, S, DI> and the field. The
direction of the current will be appropriate to assist the residual magnetismo Con sequently, the induced emf will build up by self-excitation. It should be noted that field
reversal cannot be used in this case, otherwise the machine will fail to self-excite.
This scheme is widely used in underground traction and battery-operated
vehicles.
Scheme 2: Class C Two-Quadrant Chopper.
In some applications, such as
servo drives, machine tools, and so on, a smooth transition from motoring to braking
and vice versa is required. For such applications, the class C chopper of figure 4.12a
is used. The self-cornmutated semiconductor switch S , and diode D constitute one
chopper and, the self-commutated semiconductor switch S2, and diode D2 form another chopper. Both the choppers are controlled simultaneously, both for motoring
and regeneration. The switches S and S2 are closed alternately. In the chopping period T, S is kept on for a duration 8T, and S2 is kept on from 8T to.T, To avoid a
direct short-circuit across the source, care is taken to ensure that S and S2 do not
conduct at the same time. This is generally achieved by providing some delay between the turn-off of one switch and the turn-on of another switch.
The waveforms of the control signals, Va' ia, and is, and the devices under conduction during different intervals of a chopping period are shown in figure 4.12b. In
drawing these waveforms, the delay betweeh the turn-off of one switch and turn-on of
another switch has been ignored because it is usually very small. The control signals
for the switches S and S2 are denoted by ie and ie2, respectively. It is assumed that a
switch conducts only if the control signal is present and the switch is forward biased.
The following points are helpful in understanding the operation of this circuit.
1. In this circuit, discontinuous conduction does not occur, irrespective of its frequency of operation. It may be recalled that discontinuous conduction occurs
when the armature current falls to zero and stays at the zero value for a finite
interval of time. As explained in sections 4.2 and 4.4.1, the current may become zero either during the freewheeling interval or in the energy transfer interval. In the present circuit, freewheeling will occur when S is off and the
current is flowing through D i- This will happen in interval 8T ~ t ~ T, which
is also the interval for which S2 receives the control signal. If i, falls to zero in
the freewheeling interval, the back emf will immediately drive a current
170
Chap. 4
(a)
o
c2
liT
+ sr
2T
I
I
I
I
O----------~6T~----~T---------T-+~6-T-----2~T----+-t
~1___L___~[
O
6T
T+ 6T
2T
;:L~~
~
is
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:
I
I
I
L-.....
~ __ ....:....--L---.:--L--::.--L
__
Devices
2 conducting
~....L-__~..I--....:......I--...!-..I--~
(b)
Figure 4.12 Forward motoring and braking control using class C two quadrant chopper: (a) Chopper circuit, (b) Waveforms.
through S2 in the reverse direction, thus preventing the armature current to stay
zero for a finite interval of time. Similarly, the energy transfer interval will be
present when S2 is off and D2 is conducting -- that is, during the interval
O~ t ~ aT. If the current falls to zero during this interval, SI will conduct im-
Sec.4.7
Multiquadrant
171
mediately because ie1 is present and V> E. The annature current will flow,
preventing discontinuous conduction.
2. Since discontinuous conduction is absent, the motor current will be flowing all
the time. Thus, during the interval O ~ t ~ aT, the motor arrnature will be connected to the source either through SI or D2. Consequently, the motor terminal
voltage will be V and the rate of change of i, will be positive because V> E.
Sirnilarly, during the interval aT ~ t ~ T, the motor arrnature will be shorted either through DI or S2' Consequently, the motor terminal voltage will be zero
and the rate of change of ia will be negative. This explains the nature of the
waveforms of Vaand ia.
3. During the interval O ~ t ~ aT, the positive armature current is carried by SI
and the negative arrnature current is carried by D2. The source current flows
only during this interval and it is equal to ia. During the interval aT ~ t ~ T, the
positive current is carried by DI and the negative current by S2' This gives
the explanation about the conduction of the devices in various intervals of the
chopper cycle.
4. From the motor terminal voltage waveform of figure 4.12b,
Hence,
la =
av R
(4.33)
Equation (4.33) suggests that the motoring operation (+ve IJ takes place when
a> (E/V), and thatregenerative braking (-ve la) occurs when a < (E/V).
The no-load operation is obtained when a = (E/V).
It can be shown that for a given a, the ripple in the arrnature current is given
by equation (4.14). This equation shows that the ripple is independent of motor
speed. A change in speed at a given a onlychanges the average value of the current
but not the ripple.
Let us examine the operation for a given a and different speeds. Let the drive
be initially working at no load. Then la will be zero and the waveform of ia will be
symmetrical about the time axis [fig. 4.12b]. A decrease in speed will increase la'
and the entire waveform of ia will shift upward. When la becomes greater than the
magnitude of ripple, ia will always be positive. Now only SI and DI will conduct.
Though S2 will be receiving the control signal, it will not have a chance to conduct
due to the reverse bias applied by the conducting diode DI' Since the ripple may be
at the most 5 percent of the rated current, S2 and D2 will have to conduct only when
the motor is very lightly loaded. Similarly, an increase in speed above the no-Ioad
speed will produce a negative la and the waveform of ia will shift downward. When
ia is always negative, the current will be carried only by S2 and D2, and SI and DI
will not have any chance to conduct.
172
Chopper
Control
of DC Motors
Chap. 4
The foregoing discussion shows that the motoring current is carried by S, and
O, and the braking current by S2 and O2, except at very low torques when al! the
four devices have to conduct.
Example 4.4
The motor of example 4.3 is controlled by a c1ass C two-quadrant chopper operating
with a source voltage of 230 Y and a frequency of 400 Hz.
1. Ca\culate the motor speed for a motoring operation at a = 0.5 and half of
rated torque.
2. What will be the motor speed when regenerating at a = 0.5 and rated torque?
Solution:
At the rated conditions of operation,
E,
y - IarRa= 230 - 90
x O. 115 = 219.7 Y
1. From equation (4.33),
ay
+ laRa
(E4.5)
At half the rated torque, la = 45 A

At a = 0.5
E=
ay -
laRa = 0.5 x 230 - 45 x 0.115
= 109.8
N - NrE _ 500 x 109.8 o

- E, - 219.7 - 25 rpm
2. In the regenerative braking at the rated torque, la = -90 A
From equation (E4.5),
E
= ay - laRa = 0.5 x 230 + 90 x 0.115 = 125.4
= NrE = ~oo x 125.4 = 285
s,
219.7
rpm
4.7.2 Two-Quadrant
Motoring
Control Consisting of Forward

and Reverse Regenerative
Braking
Two-quadrant operation consisting of forward motoring and reverse regenerative

braking requires a chopper capable of giving a positive current and voltage in either
direction. Such a two-quadrant operation is rarely used. But the choppers involved
have applications in current source inverters and the discussion involved provides a
background necessary for understanding four-quadrant control presented in the next
section.
This two-quadrant operation can be obtained in the following two ways:
Scheme 1: Single Chopper Control.
The circuit of figure 4.11 can be used
without the reversing switch. For the motoring operation, manual switch e is closed
and S is controlled giving the class A chopper. When running in the reverse direction, terminal b will be positive with respect to a. Now if e is opened and S is controlled, the regenerative braking is obtained.
Scheme 2: Class D Two-Quadrant Chopper.
In this scheme the two-quadrant chopper of figure 4.13 is used. This chopper can be controlled using a number
of schemes. Here a superior scherne'' is presented.
Sec.4.7
Multiquadrant
173
Figure 4.13 Forward motoring and reverse

braking control using class D two quadrant
chopper.
The control signals and the waveforms of Va' ia, and i, for the forward motoring
and the reverse regenerative braking are shown in figures 4.14a and b, respectively.
The self-commutated semiconductor switches SI and S2 are turned on with a
phase difference of T seco Switch SI is turned on at t = and turned off at t = 2ST.
Switch S2 is turned on at t '= T and turned off at t = T + 2ST. The period of operation of each switch is 2T and S = ton/2T, where ton is the duration for which each
switch is closed. It should be noted that the instants of turn-on are fixed for both the
switches.
The pattern of the control signals suggests that under continuous conduction,
the drive will operate in four different modes. These modes of operation and corresponding values of the instantaneous output voltage of the chopper are as follows:
Mode I occurs when SI and S2 conduct. The armature current flows through
the path consisting of V, S, the armature, and S2' Here
va= +V
(4.34)
Mode Il
is present when SI is on and S2 is open. The armature current flows
through O2 and SI and
(4.35)
Mode III
occurs when SI is open and S2 is closed. The armature current
flows through S2 and DI, and
Va
=O
(4.36)
Mode IV is present when both SI and S2 are open. The armature current
flows through O2, V, DI' Here
Va
=-V
(4.37)
For 0.5 < S < 1, S, and S2 cannot be open simultaneously. Therefore, the instantaneous output voltage of the chopper can be either positive or 0, giving a positive average output voltage and the machine operation in the fir~t quadrant. V~ious
waveforms for this operation are shown in figure 4.14a for contmuous conduction.
For 0< 8 < 0.5, SI and S2 cannot be closed together. Therefore, the instantaneous chopper output voltage can be either O or -V, giving a negative average ou~put voltage and machine operation in the fo.urth quadrant. .The waveforms for this
operation are shown in figure 4.14b for contmuous conduction.
174
el
Chap.4
t~----------.,
ie2t~ __
..,
'~t
26T
2T
I I
T +26T
26T
2T
26T
2T
.. t
;.~
O
c::-:J
;'L1
O
s, S2
'------'---=__
(a) Forward
e2t
motoring,
0.5
j I I
2T
S201
s, S2
-_-=---'-----'-_--'--=-----'
c1
26T
S102
s, S2
---'-=-_-'-_-=-=--_
'-----I~t
< 6 :5
'-----I.
~t
Oevices
conducting
O ---~2~6T~--~T~--~T~+~276T~--72T~----'---~t
;.~
O
;'t
O
26T
T + 26T
T + 26T
2T
..
t
~--L--~"
26T
(b)
Figure 4.14
Reverse regeneration,
2T
O :5 6 :5 0.5
Waveforrns of the two quadrant chopper of Fig. 4.13.
Sec.4.7
Multiquadrant
175
An expression for the average output voltage Ya can be derived froro the waveforms of Va shown in figures 4.14a and b.
For 0.5 < 8 < 1
1 (2OT
Ya = T J
Y dt
= 2Y(8 - 0.5)
(4.38)
and for O < 8
< 0.5
1 fT
Ya = T UT
(-
Y) dt = 2Y(8 - 0.5)
Notice that the saroe expressions are obtained for both ranges of 8.
Now
I
=
a
Ya - E
R,
= 2Y(8
- 0.5) - E
R.
(4.39)
4.7.3 Four-Quadrant Control

The four-quadrant operation can be obtained by using the class E chopper shown in
4.15. The chopper can be controlled using the following roethods.
Method I,
If S2 is kept closed continuously and SI and S4 are controlled, one
gets a two-quadrant chopper as shown in figure 4.12a. This provides a variable positive terminal voltage and the armature current in either direction, giving the motor
control in quadrants I and Il.
Now if S3 is kept closed continuously and SI and S4 are controlled, a twoquadrant chopper is obtained, which can supply a variable negative terminal voltage
and the armature current in either direction, giving motor control in quadrants III
and IV.
For the changeover froro forward motoring to reverse motoring, the following
sequence of steps is followed .
. In the first quadrant S2 is on continuously, and SI and S4 are being controlled.
For the changeover, 8 is reduced to its minimum value. The motor current reverses
[equation (4.33)] and reaches the maximum permissible value. The current control
i.
o,
+
Figure 4.15
Class E four-quadrant chopper.
176
Chopper
Control
of DC Motors
Chap. 4
loop restricts it from exceeding the maximum permissible value. The motor dccelerates at the maximum torque and reaches zero speed. Now S2 is opened, S) is contimj.
ously closed and 8 for the pair SI' S4 is adjusted corresponding to the desired speed.
The motor now accelerates at the maximum torque in the reverse direction and its
current is regulated by the current-control loop. Finally it settles at the desired speed.
This method of control has the following features: The utilization factor of the
switches is low due to the asymmetry in the circuit operation. Switches S) and S2
should remain on for a long periodo This can create commutation problems when the
switches are realized using thyristors. The minimum output voltage depends directly
on the minimum time for which the switch can be closed. Since there is always a restriction on the minimum time for which the switch can be closed, particularly in
thyristor choppers, the minimum available output voltage, and, therefore, the minimum available motor speed, is restricted.
To ensure that the switches SI and S4' and S) and S4 are not on at the same
time, some fixed time interval must elapse between the tum-off of one switch and
the turn-on of another switch. This restricts the maximum permissible frequency of
operation. It also requires two switching operations during a cycle of the output
voltage.
Method Il, Switches SI and S2 with diodes DI and D2 provide a circuit identical to the chopper of figure 4.13. This chopper can provide a positive current and a
variable voltage in either direction, thus allowing motor control in quadrants 1 and
IV. Switches S3 and S4 with diodes D3 and D4 form another chopper, which can
provide a negative current and a variable voltage in either direction, thus allowing
the motor control in quadrants II and III.
The switch-over from quadrant 1 to quadrant III can be carried out using the
following sequence of steps. In quadrant 1, the switches SI and S2 are controlled
with 0.5 < 8 < 1.0. T~ armature current has the direction shown in figure 4.15. For
the changeover, SI and S2 are turned off. The armature current now flows through
diode DI, source V, and diode D2, and quickly falls to zero ..The motor back emf has
the polarity with the left terminal positive. Now the switches S3 and S4 are controlled
with 8 in the range 0< 8 < 0.5, but approaching 0.5. The motor current flows in the
reverse direction and reaches the maximum value [equation (4.39)]. The currentcontrol loop regulates 8 to keep the current from exceeding the maximum permissible value. The motor decelerates at the maximum torque and reaches zero speed.
Now 8 is set according to the desired speed (0.5 < 8 < 1). The motor accelerates at
the maximum torque, with its current regulated by the current-control loop and settles at the desired steady-state speed in the reverse direction.
This method of control has the following features compared to method 1: At
near-zero output voltage, each switch should be on for a period of nearly T sec., unlike in method 1 where it should be on for a period approaching zero. Thus, there is
no limitation on the minimum output voltage and the minimum motor speed. There
is no need for a delay between the turn-off of one switch and the turn-on of another
switch. Consequently, the frequency of operation can be higher. The switching loss
is less because of only one switching per cycle of the output voltage compared to
two in method I. Due to the symmetrical operation, the switches have a better utilization factor.
.
Sec.4.7
Multiquadrant
177
Method 111. This method is a modification of method II. In method Ir,

switches SI and S2 with diodes DI and D2 form one chopper, which allows motor
control in quadrants 1 and IV. The second chopper, providing operation in quadrants II and III is formed by switches S3 and S4' and diodes D3 and D4' In method II,
these choppers are controlled separately. In the present method, these choppers are
controlled simultaneously as follows.?
The control signals for the switches SI-S4 are denoted by iet. ie2, ieJ, and ie4,
respectively. As with the convention adopted, a switch conducts if its control signal
is present and it is forward biased; otherwise it remains open. The control signal iel
to ic4' and the waveform of Va' ia, and is for forward motoring and forward regeneration are shown in figure 4.16a and b, respectively. Switches SI and S2 are given control signals with a phase difference of T secs. Switch SI receives a control signal
from t = O to t = 28T, where 8 = ton/2T. The control signal for switch S2 is present
frorn t = T to t = T + 28T. Switches SI and S4' and S2 and S3 form complementary
pairs in the sense that the switches of the same pair receive control signals alternately. Usually some interval must elapse between the turn-off of one switch and the
turn-on of another switch of the same pair to ensure that they are not on at the same
time. This interval has been neglected in drawing the waveforms of figure 4.16.
In a duration of 2T seconds, which is also the time period of each switch, the
chopper operates in four intervals, which are marked as 1, 11, 111, and IV in
figures 4.16a and b. The devices under conduction during these intervals are also
shown. The operation of the rnachine in quadrant I can be explained as follows.
In interval 1, switches SI and S2 are conducting. The motor is subjected to a
positive voltage equal to the source voltage and the arrnature current increases. At
the end of interval 1, S2 is turned off. In interval 11, switches SI and S3 receive control signals. Since the motor is carrying a positive current, it flows through a path
consisting of DI and SI' Now Vais zero arrd i, is decreasing. Switch S3 rernains off
as it is reverse biased by the voltage drop of the conducting diode DI' At the beginning of interval I1I, S2 is turned on again. Now Va= V and ia is increasing. At the
end of interval I1I, switch SI is turned off. In interval IV, switches S2 and S4 receive
control signals. The positive motor current flows through S2 and D2, and S4 does not
conduct due to the reverse bias applied by the drop of diode D2.
Note that the output voltage waveform is identical to that of figure 4.14a.
Hence, equations (4.38) and (4.39) are applicable.
The forward motoring operation is obtained when la is positive. The operation
can be transferred from forward motoring to forward regeneration by decreasing 8 or
increasing E to make Va < E or la negative [equation (4.39)]. The waveforms for
forward regeneration are shown in figure 4. 16b. The devices in conduction in the
four intervals of the chopper cycle are also shown. The operation of the chopper is
explained as follows.
In interval 1, switches SI and S3 are receiving control signals. The positive
back ernf forces a negative arrnature current through diode D3 and switch S3' During
this interval, lial increases, increasing the energy stored in the armature circuit inductance. Switch SI does not conduct due to the reverse bias provided by the drop of the
conducting diode D3' Switch S3 is opened at the end of interval I. The armature current is forced through diode D3, source V, and diode D4, and the energy is fed to the
178
Chap.4
' '1o
,~1
o
26T
2T
T +26T
2/iT
2T
T + 2/iT t
e3
' '1
o
~1
------'---_'-----L---....L..-_L
26T
26T
2T
26T
2T
5152
___
-+
51 01
II
-+
2T
5152
(a) Forward motoring,
Figure 4.16
Wavefonns
(continued on next page).
-+
52 O2
T + 26T
51S2
Oevices
conductinq
IV
0.5 S /i S 1.0 and V.
of the four quadrant
>E
chopper of Fig. 4.15 using method 111
source. Although switches SI and S2 are receiving the control signals, they remain
open due to the reverse bias provided by the voltage drops of diodes D3 and D4' The
motor terminal voltage is now V and lial is decreasing. S4 is tumed on in interval ill.
The annature current now flows through switch S4 and diode D4' Switch S2 also receives a control signal; however, it does not conduct due to the reverse bias applied
by diode D4. The annature current magnitude again builds up. S4 is tumed off at the
Sec.4.7
Multiquadrant
179
,~1o
---I...
26T
2T
.L,
.L,
26T
2T
26T
2T
.l....-__
T + 26T
T + 26T
,.~
o
':p
DJD4
26T
2T
V
DJSJ
DJD4
S4D4
II
III
(b) Forward regeneration, 0.5':::
Figure 4.16
T +26T
s ::: 1.0 and
DJD4
Devices
conductinq
IV
V.
<E
(continued).
end of interval III. The armature current is forced again through diode D3. the
source, and diode D4. and the energy is fed to the source.
The motoring and regenerative braking operations in the reverse direction are
obtained when 0< 8 < 0.5. for which Va is negative. Reverse motoring is obtained
by setting 8 such that Ival > IEI and reverse regeneration is realized when IEI > Ival.
180
Chap.4
This method has a simplercontrol circuit compared to methods 1 and II. Since
some time must elapse between the tum-off of one switch and the tum-on of another
switch of each of the complementary pairs formed by S,S4 and S2' S3' the maximum permissible frequency of operation must be lower compared to that of
method II.
Example 4.5
The motor of example 4.3 is fed by a four-quadrant chopper controlled by method 1II.
The source voltage is 230 V and the frequency of operation is 400 Hz.
1. If the motor operation is required in the second quadrant at the rated torque
and 300 rpm, caIculate the duty ratio.
2. What should be the value of the duty ratio if the motor is working in the third
quadrant at 400 rpm and half of the rated torque?
Solution:
At the rated conditions of operation
Er=230-90XO.115=219.7
1. Equation (4.39), which is applicable to method III is reproduced here:

I
=
a
2V(0 - 0.5) - E
R,
(4.39)
The motor is working in the second quadrant, therefore,

la= -90
300
300
E = 500 x E, = 500 x 219.7 = 131.8 V
Substituting in equation (4.39), gives
-90 = 2 x 230(0 - 0.5) - 131.8
0.115
or
0= 0.5
121
+ 460 = .76.
2. At half the rated torque and in the third quadrant

la = -45
400
E= - 500 x 219.7 = -175.7 V
Substituting in equation (4.39), gives
-45 = 2 x 230(0 - 0.5)
0.115
or
+ 175.7
Chap.4
References
Four-quadrant
181
Operation with Field Control
When field control is required for getting speeds higher than base speed and the transient response need not be fast, the four-quadrant operation is obtained by a combination of field and annature control s as shown in figure 4.17. Both armature and
field are supplied by the class D two-quadrant choppers of figure 4.13. The reversal
switch RS is employed for the field reversal. The annature chopper provides operation in the first and the fourth quadrant with a positive field current and operation in
the second and the third quadrant with a negative field current. When the field connection is to be reversed, first the field current should be reduced to zero. The use of
the class D two-quadrant chopper allows a reversal of the field terminal voltage,
which forces the field current to become zero fast. The main advantage of this circuit
is the lower cost compared to the class E four-quadrant chopper of figure 4.13, because of the lower current ratings of the components of the field chopper.
~
Field
s,
Figure
4.17
Combined
arrnature and field control for four-quadrant
operation.
REFERENCES
l. G. K. Dubey and -W. Shepherd, "Cornparative study of chopper control techniques for de
motor control," Jour. Intn. of Engrs, Electrical Eng. Div., vol. 58, pt. EL6, June 1978,
pp. 307-312.
2. 1. Gouthiere, J. Gregoire, and H. Hologne , "Thyristor choppers in electric traction,"
ACEC Review, no. 2, 1970, pp. 45-67.
3. G. K. Dubey and W. Shepherd , "Analysis of dc series motor controlled by power
pulses," Proc. lEE, vol. 122, no. 12, Dec. 1975, pp. 1397-98.
4. H. Satpati, G. K. Dubey, and L. P. Singh, "Performance and analysis of chopper-fed dc
series motor with magnetic saturation, armature reaction and eddy current effect," IEEE
Trans. on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-102, April 1983, pp. 990-997.
5. H. Satpati, G. K. Dubey, and L. P. Singh, "Performance and ana1ysis of chopper-fed de
separately excited motor under regenerative braking," Jour. of Electric Machines and
E1ectromechanics, vol. 5, no. 4, 1980, pp. 293-308.
6. R. Wagner, "Possibilities for regenerative braking on dc traction vehicles," Siemens
Review, no. 1, 1973, pp. 38-44.
182
Chap.4
7. H. Satpati , G. K. Dubey, and L. P. Singh, "Performance and analysis of chopper-fed de

series motor under regenerative braking," Jour. of Electric Machines and Electro_
mechanics, vol. 7, no. 2, 1982, pp. 279-304.
8. A. Joshi and S. B. Dewan, "Current cornmutated two quadrant thyristor chopper," Power
Electronics Specialists Conference, Syracuse, N.Y., 1978, pp. 1-8.
9. S. B. Dewan and A. Mirbod, "Microprocessor-based optimum control for four-guadrant
chopper," IEEE Trans. on Industry Applications, vol. IA-l7, no. 1, 1981, pp. 34-40.
10. S. B. Dewan, G. R. Slemon, and A. Straughen, Power Semiconductor Drives, Wiley
Interscience, New York, 1984.
PROBLEMS
4.1. A 2.2 kW, 220 V, 11.6 A, 1500 rpm de separately excited motor has an armature resis.
tance and inductance of 2 n and 32.5 mH, respectively. This motor is controlled by a
chopper with a frequency of 500 Hz and the input voltage of 220 V. The motor is
driving a load whose torque is proportional to the speed. At 8 = 0.9 the motor runs at
1260 rpm. What will be the value of 8 and the current ripple at 800 rpm?
4.2. Calculate the speed-torque characteristic of the de series motor of example 4.2 for
8=0.5.
4.3. A 230 V, 1000 rpm, 20 A dc separately excited motor has the armature resistance and
inductance of 1 n and 50 mH, respectively. The motor is controlled in regenerative
braking by a chopper operating at 600 Hz.
(a) Calculate the motor speed and the regenerated power for 8 = 0.5 and the rated torque,
(b) What is the maximum armature current ripple?
(e) If the minimum value of 8 is 0.2, calculate the maximum safe speed for which the
armature current does. not.exceed the rated value. If now the field current is reduced
by a factor of 0.8, calculate the maximum safe speed assurning a linear relation
between the flux and the field current.
4.4. The de series motor of example 4.2 is controlled by a chopper in regenerative braking.
The source voltage is 220 V.
(a) Calculate the motor speed for 8 = 0.5 and the driving torque equal to twice the rated
motor torque. Neglect friction and windage losses.
(b) Calculate 8 if the machine is running at 500 rpm and the driving torque is equal to
the rated torque.
4.5. (a) Derive expressions for the armature current ripple and the average torque for the
dynamic braking of a chopper controlled separately excited motor.
(b) The separately excited motor of example 4.3 is controlled by a chopper in dynamic
braking. The braking resistance RB (fig. 4.9) is 5 ohms, and the chopper operating
frequency is 450 Hz. Calculate the motor speed-torque characteristic for 8 = 0.5.
4.6. A 7.46 kW, 230 V, 500 rpm, 40 A separately excited de motor has the armature resistance and inductance of 0.478 n and 13 rnH, respectively. The motor is controlled by
the Class C two-quadrant chopper of figure 4.12a operating at 400 Hz. The source voltage is 230 V.
(a) The motor is braked from its initial speed of 500 rpm to zero by regenerative braking.
The current control loop adjusts 8 automatically to keep the motor current at the
rated value. The braking is slow, and, therefore, the chopper and motor can be
assumed to be operating in steady state for al! the speeds. Calculate and plot the
variation of 8 with speed.
Chap.4
183
Problems
(b) The motor is now working in the first quadrant at 300 rpm. Calculate the value of 6
when la = 5A. Obtain the instantaneous annature current waveform and identify the
devices conducting during different intervals of chopper operation.
4.7. Draw the waveforms of control signals, motor terminal voltage, motor annature current,
and source current for the class E four-quadrant chopper of figure 4.15 controlled by
method III for the motor operation in the third and fourth quadrants.
4.8. A 12.2 kW, 230 V, 850 rpm, 56 A separately excited de motor is controlled by the fourquadrant chopper of figure 4.17. The annature resistance and inductance are 0.284 n
and 4.4 rnH, respectively. The chopper operating frequency is large enough to ensure
continuous conduction.
(a) The motor is operating in the first quadrant at 700 rpm at the rated torque. Find 6.
(b) Now the motor operation is transferred to the second quadrant by reversing the field
current. Assuming the motor speed to be still 700 rpm and the motor to be operating
in steady state, calculate the value of 6 for the rated torque.
ESCUElA DE IHG. mCTRICA

BIBLIOTECA
5
Closed-Loop Control
of DC Orives
When the steady-state accuracy requirement cannot be satisfied in an open-loop configuration, the drive is operated in a closed-loop system. Additional feedback loops
are provided to Iimit the parameters to safe or acceptable limits and to improve the
dynamic performance. Here we are mainly concerned with closed-loop variable
speed drives which are widely used in industry. The ratings of such drives range
from as low as fractional kW to 10000 kW and more. Closed-loop rectifier drives are
more widely used than chopper.drives. In view of this, mainly rectifier drives will be
described here. Thesame- schemes are used in chopper drives.
5.1 SINGLE-QUADRANT
VARIABLE-SPEED DRIVES
5.1.1 Armature Voltage Control at Constant Field

A basic scheme of the closed-loop speed control system employing current limit
control, also known as parallel current control, is shown in figure 5.la. w~ sets the
speed reference. A signal proportional to the motor speed is obtained from the speed
sensor. The speed sensor output is filtered to remove the ac ripple and compared
with the speed reference. The speed error is processed through a speed controller.
The output of the speed controller ve adjusts the rectifier frring angle a to make the
actual speed close to the reference speed. The speed controller is usually a PI (proportional and integral) controller and serves three purposes - stabilizes the drive and
adjusts the damping ratio at the desired value, makes the steady-state speed-error
184
Seco 5.1
Single-Quadrant
Variable-Speed
Drives
185
AC supply
r::
Wm
Ve
oc
Rectifier
oc
Speed
controller
(Pl)
Firing
circuit
VI
DC current
sensor
Filter
Threshold
circuit
L~Motor
Speed sensor
(tachogenerator)
Filter
(a) Drive with current
limit control
AC supply
r::
wm
ee
Rectifier
~
l.
Current
limiter
Speed
controller
(pl)
Firing
circuit
Current
controller
(Pl)
V.
1-
Current
sensor
Filter
Lr-------,
Filter
Speed sensor
(tachogenerator)
(b)
Drive with
Figure 5.1
inner current
control
loop
One quadrant closed-loop speed control.
---,
Closed-Loop
186
Control
of DC Drives
Chap. 5
close to zero by integral action, and filters out noise again due to the integral action.
In closed-loop control systems PD (proportional and differential) and PID (proportional, integral, and differential) controllers are often used. But they are not preferred in converter drives because of the presence of substantial noise and ripple in
the current and speed feedback signals.
The drive employs current limit control, the operation of which has been explained in section 3.9. As long as la < Ix, where I, is the maximum perrnissible
value of la' the current control loop does not affect the drive operation. If la exceeds
Ix, even by a small amount, a large output signal is produced by the threshold circuit, the current control overrides the speed control, and the speed error is corrected
essentially at a constant current equal to the maximum perrnissible value. When the
speed reaches close to the desired value, la falls below Ix, the current control goes
out of action and speed control takes overo Thus in this scheme, at any given time
the operation of the drive is mainly controlled either by the speed control loop or the
current control loop, and hence it is also called parallel current control.
Another scheme of closed-loop speed control is shown in figure 5.1 b. It employs an inner current control loop within an outer speed loop. The speed loop is essentially the same as just described for the current limit control. The operation of the
inner current control loop is explained in section 3.9. The speed error is processed
through a PI controller which serves the same three purposes just described. The
output of the speed controller e, is applied to a current limiter which sets the current
reference
for the inner current control loop. The armature current la is sensed by a
current sensor, filtered, preferably by an active filter to remove ripple, and compared
with the current reference 1:. The current error is processed through a PI controller
which enables to achieve the just-mentioned three objectives, though it is not necessary to make the steady-state current error close to zero. The output of the current
controller ve adjusts the converter firing angle such that the actual speed is brought
to a value set by the speed command w~. Any positive speed error, caused by either
an increase in the speed command or an increase in the load torque, produces a
higher current reference 1:. The motor accelerates due to an increase in la' to correct
the speed error and finally settles at a new 1: which makes the motor torque equal to
the load torque and the speed error close '10 zero. For any large positive speed error,
the current limiter saturates and the current reference 1: is limited to a value I:m, and
the drive current is not allowed to exceed the maximum permissible value. The
speed error is corrected at the maximum perrnissible arrnature current until the speed
error becomes small and the current limiter comes out of saturation. Now the speed
error is corrected with la less than the perrnissible value.
.
A negative speed error will set the current reference 1: at a negative value.
Since the motor current cannot reverse, a negative 1: is of no use. It will however
"charge" the PI controller. When the speed error becomes positive the "charged" PI
controller will take a longer time to respond, causing unnecessary delay in the control action. The current limiter is therefore arranged to set a zero-current reference
for negative speed errors.
Since the speed control loop and the current control loop are in cascade, the
inner current control is also known as cascade control. It is also called current
1:
Sec.5.1
Single-Quadrant
Variable-Speed
Drives
187
guided control. It is more commonly used than the current-limit control because of
the following advantages:
1. It provides faster response to any supply voltage disturbance. This can be
explained by considering the response of the two drives to a decrease in the
supply voltage. A decrease in the supply voltage reduces the motor current and
torque. In the current-limit control, the speed falls because the motor torque is
less than the load torque which has not changed. The resulting speed error is
brought to the original value by setting the rectifier firing angle at a lower
value. The response of the drive is mainly govemed by its mechanical time
constant. In the case of inner current control, the decrease in motor current,
due to the decrease in the supply voltage, produces a current error which
changes the rectifier firing angle to bring the armature current back to the original value. The transient response is now govemed by the electrical time constant of the motor. Since the electrical time constant of a drive is much smaller
compared to the mechanical time constant, the inner current control provides a
faster response to the supply voltage disturbances.
2. As explained later, for certain firing schemes, the rectifier and the control circuit together have a constant gain under continuous conduction. The drive is
designed for this gain to set the damping ratio at 0.707, which gives an overshoot of 5 percent. Under discontinuous conduction, the gain reduces. The
higher the reduction is in the conduction angle, the greater the reduction is in
the gain. The drive response becomes sluggish in discontinuous conduction
and progressively deteriorates as the conduction angle reduces. If an atternpt is
made to design the drive for discontinuous conduction operation, the drive is
likely to be oscillatory or even unstable for continuous conduction. The inner
current control loop provides a closed loop around the rectifierand the control
circuit, and therefore, the variation of their gain has much less affect on the
drive performance. Hence, the transient response of the drive with the inner
current loop is superior to that with the current-limit control.
3. In the current-limit control, the current must first exceed the permissible value
before the current-limit action can be initiated .. Since the firing angle can be
changed only at discrete intervals; substantial current overshoot can occur
before the current limiting becomes effective.
Small motors are more tolerant to high transient currents. Therefore, to obtain
a fast transient response, much higher transient currents are allowed by selecting a
larger size rectifier. The current regulation is then needed only for abnormal values
of current. In such cases because of the simplicity, current-limit control is employed.
Both the schemes have different responses for the increase and decrease in the
speed command. A decrease in speed command at the most can make the motor
torque zero; it cannot be reversed as braking is not possible. The drive decelerates
mainly due to the load torque. When load torque is low, the response to a decrease
in the speed command will be slow. These drives are therefore suitable for applications with large load torques, such as paper and printing machines, pumps, and
blowers.
188
Closed-Loop
5.1.2
Control
of DC Drives
Chap. 5
Field Weakening
The schemes of figure 5.1 can provide speed control up to base speed. For speed
control above base speed, field control must be combined with aramature voltage
control. Preferably, speed control from zero to base speed should be done at the
maximum field by armature voltage control, and control above base speed should be
done by field weakening at the rated armature voltage. This strategy can be approximately implemented using the scheme shown in figure 5.2. This is an inner current
control scheme with an additional loop for the field control. The field current is controlled by a controlled rectifier.
In the field control loop, the back ernf E ( = Va - IaRa) is compared with a reference voltage E* which is chosen to be between 0.85 to 0.95 of the rated armature
voltage. The higher value is used for motors with a low armature circuit resistance.
For speeds below base speed, the field controller saturates due to a large value of
AC supply
r:: JC
Wm
Current
limiter
Speed
controller
(PI)
~
la
Current
controller
(PI)
Firing
circuit
la
,...
Filter
Va
AC supply
E
r::
L
Field
controller
Vel
Vel
a,
a,
*-
Firing
circuit
Filter
Figure 5.2
*-
Ve
Ve
Closed loop armature control with field weaking.
V.
Rectifier
Seco 5.1
Single-Ouadrant
Variable-Speed
189
Drives
error e[,applying the rated voltage across the field. This ensures the maximum field
current for motor operation below base speed. When close to base speed, the field
controller comes out of saturation.Now if the reference speed w~ is set for a speed
above base speed, a positive speed error ewm is produced and the current reference
is set for a higher value. The firing angle of the armature rectifier is reduced to initially increase Ya. The motor accelerates, the back emf E increases, and the field
control loop error e[ decreases, decreasing the field current. The motor s eed contines to Increase, In t e rocess ecreaslng the ield current until the motor speed is
set at the value demanded by w::;. Since the speed error ewm WI now e sma,
a
will retum to a value close to the original value. Thus, speed control above base
speed will be obtained by the field weakening with the arrnature terminal voltage
maintained near the rated value.
In the field weakening region, the drive responds very slowly due to the large
. field time constant. Field forcing is sometimes used to improve the transient response, but then the control becomes complex. One can use a half-controlled rectifier but a fully controlled rectifier is usually preferred. Due to the ability to reverse
the voltage, a fully controlled rectifier can reduce the field current much faster than a
half-controlled rectifier.
1:
5.1.3 Details
of Various
Blocks of Closed-Loop
Drives
Details of various blocks of figures 5.1 and 5.2 are described next.
Speed Sensing
Two methods are used for speed sensing: induced voltage sensing and the use of
tachometers. Speed is proportional to the back emf at a constant field. Therefore, if
field control is not used, speed can be sensed by measuring the back emf
( = Ya - laRa). The accuracy of measurernent is affected by the difficulty in sensing
la accurately due to the presence of ripple, the variation of flux due to the field supply disturbance, and the variation of temperatures of the field and armature windings. The method is inexpensive and provides speed measurement with an accuracy
of 2 percent of base speed.
More accurate speed regulation is achieved by using a tachometer driven from
the motor shaft. A tacho meter is an ac or de generator with a high order of linearity
between its speed and output voltage. For de drives, dc tachometers are usually ~
used. A de tacho meter is built with a permanent magnetic field and sometimes with
silver brushes to reduce the contact drop between the brush and commutator. Typical
voltage outputs are 10 Y per 1000 rpm. The tachometer output voltage consists of a
ripple whose frequency depends on its speed. At low speeds, adequate filtering can
only be done by a filter with a large enough time constant to affect the dynamics of
the drive. Special large diameter tachometers with a large number of commutator
segments are sometimes built to overcome this problem. Tachometers are available
to measure speed with an accuracy of 0.1 percent. The tachometer should be coupled to the motor with a torsionally stiff coupling so that the natural frequency of the
system consisting of the arrnatures of the motor and tacho meter lies well beyond the
bandwidth of the speed control loop. 5,6 When very high speed accuracies are required, as in computer peripherals, paper mills and so on, digital tachometers are
190
Closed-Loop
Control
of DC Drives
Chap. 5
used. A digital tachometer employs a shaft encoder which gives a frequency propor.
tional to the motor speed. The enc9der consists of a transparent plastic or alurninum
disc mechanically coupled to the-rnotor shaft. The transparent plastic disc is alternately painted black on its periphery to provide altemately transparent and nontrans.
parent parts. In an aluminum disc, a number of holes or slots are uniformly made
around its periphery. An opto-coupler unit, consisting of a light source and a light
sensor, is so mounted that the disc will run between the light source and the sensor.
The sensor senses the light source whenever a transparent part/slotlhole crosses the
opto-coupler and a voltage pulse is produced. The frequency of the pluse train is
proportional to the speed of the shaft.
Current Sensing
To avoid interaction between the control circuit, carrying low voltage and current,
and the power circuit, involving high voltage, high current, and a substantial amount
of harmonics, isolation must be provided between the two circuits. Therefore, except in low-voltage converters, the current sensor should also provide isolation.
The currents in the ac lines of a rectifier carry information on the de side armature current when freewheeling is not present. The rectified output of the current
transformers, with their primaries connected in the ac lines, then yields a signal proportional to the armature current. One single-phase current tranformer is needed for
a single-phase rectifier. A three-phase current transformer is preferred for a threephase rectifier, though one single-phase transformer can also be used. The frequency
of ripple in the rectified current of a three-phase transformer is three times that of a
single transformer. Because of the higher frequency of the ripple, the fi!ter time constant can be lower, providing fast response of the current control loop. A circuit
using a three-phase current transformer is shown in figure 5.3. The major limitations
of this scheme are that it cannot sense the current direction and cannot be used for
rectifiers employing free-wheeling. The scheme is widely used due to its low cost,
simplicity, and reliability.
A number of methods are available for the direct sensing of armature current.
Two commonly used methods are described here. The first method involves the use
of a current sensor. employing Hall effect. It also has the ability to sense the current
direction. It is commercially available for a wide range of currents (a few amperes to
A
B
C
W
CT2
Figure 5.3
A
B
C
+
Filler
Current sensing in a 3-phase fully-controlled rectifier.
Vo
Sec.5.1
Single-Quadrant
Variable-Speed
Drives
191
several hundred amperes) with a typical accuracy of one percent up to 400 Hz. The
second method involves the use of a noninductive resistance shunt in conjunction
with an isolation amplifier which has an arrangement for amplification and isolation
between the power and the control circuits. The main limitation of the shunt is that it
provides only a small output voltage of the order of 7.5 m V to 75 m V at the rated
current. ~ use of shunts of higher resistance results in the increased power dissipation and drift ofresistance with temperature. In the current control loop of a variable
speed drive, accurate sensing of current is not necessary, and, therefore, the drop
across the interpole winding is often used for current sensing. The isolation amplifier
may consist of any one of the following circuits.
The voltage drop across the shunt is filtered, amplified, modulated, and then
applied to the primary of an isolation transformer. The output of the transformer is
demodulated by a phase sensitive demodulator, filtered, buffered, and applied to
output terminals. The method also allows the sensing of the current direction. In the
alternative scheme, the shunt voltage drop is filtered, amplified, and then processed
through an opto-isolator. The opto-isolator output is buffered and then brought to the
output terminals. Since the opto-isolator gain is temperature dependent and nonlinear, two identical opto-isolators are employed in a feedback loop to compensate
for these nonlinearities. 4,7
The direct sensing of the armature current using a shunt is fast compared to the
indirect sensing involving current transformers. However, it is more expensive.
PI Controller
The error detector, PI controller, and limiter are combined in a single-circuit as
shown in figure 5.4. Diode DI and zener diode DzI provide limitation on the maximum positive voltage, and diode D2 and zener diode Dz2 provide limitation on the
maximum negative voltage. When this circuit forms a part of the inner current control loop, these limitations are used to restrict the magnitudes of the control voltage
ve and thus provide restriction on the range of firing angle as explained in the next
section. When employed in the speed loop, they restrict the maximum positive and
negative values of current reference 1:. In a single-quadrant drive negative current
reference is not required and hence diode D2 alone may be used instead of Dz2
and D2.
R,
-v Q---'VI/v'Ir--+
v Q---'VI/v'Ir----'
Figure 5.4 PI controller with error

detector and limiter; v* and v are reference
and feedback signals respectively.
R,
192
Closed-Loop
Control of DC Drives
Chap. 5
The transfer function of the circuit in the linear region of its operation is
given by
(5.1)
where
(5.2)
Transfer Characteristic
Control Circuit
of Rectifier and
The firing of a rectifier is a discrete process. After the need for the change of the
rectifier firing angle has been assessed, a 3-phase fully controlled rectifier fed by a
50 Hz source may take from Oto 3.33 ms (the time interval between two consecutive
firing instants) before the firing angle can be changed. Since the mechanical time
constant of the motor is much larger compared to this delay, the delay is ignored and
the firing angle change is considered instantaneous. With this approximation the rectifier can be modeled simply as a gain element. This approximate model is found adequate when the aim is to design an adequately damped system. However, it is not
valid close to the stability limito j\n improved, but again approximate model is obtained by adding a term l/O + STd) to the gain,where Td is the average delay which
is 1.67 ms for a 3-phase fully controlled rectifier and 5 ms for a 1-phase rectifier
when they are fed by a 50 Hz source.
The transfer characteristic of a control unit is often selected to match the transfer characteristic of the converter. It is therefore useful to consider the transfer characteristic of the combination.
For the conventional operation of 3-phase and l-phase rectifiers under continuous conduction, from equations (3.16) and (3.78),
(5.3)
Let us generate a reference timing wave given by the following equation:
(5.4)
If a firing pulse is produced when ve = Vr (fig. 5.5a) then,

ve = Vrm cos a
(5.5)
From equations (5.3) and (5.5), the gain of the combination KA is given by
KA
Va
v; = constant
v.,
=- =Ve
(5.6)
Thus a linear. transfer characteristic as shown in figure 5.5b is obtained. This is

known as an inverse cosine firing scheme because according to equation (5.5), the
firing angle a is an inverse cosine function of the control voltage Ve. The reference
wave Vr is timed to have its peak at a = O. For a single-phase rectifier (fig. 3.7), Vr
leads the source voltage Vs by 90. The firing pulses for thyristors TI and T) are produced at the intersection of vr with ve' and the firing pulses for thyristors T2 and T4
Seco 5.1
Single-Ouadrant
Variable-Speed
193
Drives
V.
Vrm
I-~-----vc
o 1---'-_+ __
1-.._--1_
-Vrm
(a) Generation of firing pulses

Figure 5.5
(b) Transfer characteristic
Inverse cosine firing.
are produced at the intersection of =v, with ve' For a three-phase con verter,
(fig. 3.16) v, is timed to have its peak at 7T/3-that
is, at the instant for which
a = O. The phasor diagram of figure 5.6 shows that the phase voltage (- Va) has the
required phase. Vr can therefore be obtained from (- Va). Thyristor TI is then fired at
the intersection of this Vr and Ve' v,'s for thyristors T2, T), T4, T5, and T6, which are
fired in the sequence of their numbers with a phase difference of 60, can be obtained from the phase voltages VA, (-Vd, Va, (-VA) and Ve, respectively.
To ensure the firing of thyristors, Veshould always be less than Vrm. Further,
the maximum value of a should be restricted to some suitable value 180-8, where 8
is a positive angle required for the commutation. These restrictions are implemented
byrestricting the output voltage of th PI controller of figure 5.4 with the help of the
zener diodes Ozl and 0z2' Altematively, one can superimpose sharp narrow pulses
(fig. 5.5) on Vr to satisfy these restrictions. These pulses, commonly known as "endstop" pulses, also ensure firing under the supply voltage dips.
Figure 5.6 Phasor diagram of 3-phase

source voltages.
194
Closed-Loop
Control
of DC Drives
Chap. 5
Por a l-phase half-controlled rectifier, the following express ion gives the output voltage under the assumption of continuous conduction [equation (3.57)]
y
Ya = ~o(1
+ cos
a)
(5.7)
Now if the firing pulse is produced at the intersection of Vcwith the following timing
wave
vr
v., + cos a)
(5.8)
the rectifier will have the linear transfer characteristic with a gain given by the fol.
lowing equation:
(5.9)
Por the l-phase fully controlled rectifier with the controlIed flywheeling and
3-phase fulIy controlIed rectifier with the freewheeling diodes or with the controlled
flywheeling, the linear transfer characteristics cannot be obtained because of different relations between Va and a for the different ranges of a. In such cases the a
versus Va relations can be approximated by a suitable straight Iine.:' The slope of the
straight line will then be the gain of the rectifier. Such an approximation is acceptable for designing the drive with adequate damping.
Sometimes firing angles are generated by comparing ve with a triangular ramp
synchronized with the supply voltage. Here a is proportional to vc' and, therefore,
the output voltage is a cosine function of Vc' The incremental gain of the rectifier
dVa/dvc is then a sine function of v.: In such situations the rectifier gain is assumed
equal to the average of its maximum and minimum values"
Effect of Discontinuous Conduction on the Transfer Characteristics of Rectifiers.
When a fully controlIed rectifier is operated with inverse cosine firing, a
linear transfer characteristic shown in figure 5.5b is obtained under the continuous
conduction. This characteristic is modified considerably by discontinuous conduction as explained in figure 5.7. The figure shows the operation of the drive for a
fixed speed and variable load torque. If the field is maintained constant, {he back
emf wilI also remain constant. As the load on the drive changes, la must change.
The control voltage Vc should also change, to change Ya such that Ya - laRa = E =
constant. Let the drive initially be operating with a load large enough to ensure continuous conduction. This operation corresponds to point "a" on the transfer characteristic for which the control voltage is Vcland the armature current is lal' Now the
load is reduced. The armature current falIs to la2 and the drive operates under discontinuous conduction. Por E to stay constant, Vc must change to Vc2to get the rectifier
output voltage Va2 such that Va2 = E + la2Ra. The operation now takes place at point
"bu. As the load is decreased further the operating point moves along the curve
abcd. Point "d" is an ideal no-load operating point for which la = O and Va = E.
Notice that the incremental gain dVa/dvc is constant and the highest in continuous
conduction. It decreases with Vcin discontinuous conduction. The drive which operates satisfactorily in continuous conduction fails to do so in discontinuous conduction. Because of the decrease in incremental gain, the transient response to a change
Sec.5.2
Four-Quadrant
Variable-Speed
195
Drives
v.
Figure 5.7 Effect of discontinuous

conduction on the transfer characteristic
fully-controlled rectifier.
0<=0
of
O<
= 1800
in the speed command or the load disturbance becomes sluggish and the steady-state
error becomes large. The effect of discontinuous conduction on the drive performance can be reduced by designing the current control loop with a high gain; however, due to the presence of substantial noise, the gain cannot be made too high
without impairing the stability and the dynamic response. Alternatively, an additional loop with the rectifier output voltage feedback can be introduced within the
current control loop.?: 10 A number of other methods can also be used, such as the
nonlinear controller.! dual-mode current controller." feed forward current control, 12
and adaptive current control. 2
5.2 FOUR-QUADRANT
.,...
VARIABLE-SPEED DRIVES
Various methods of multiquadrant operation of fully controlled rectifier-fed de drives

are described in section 3.10. The reader may wish to review section 3.10 before the
present one.
5.2.1 Drive Employing Armature Reversal by a
Contactor
As explained in section 3.10, the armature reversal should be done only after the
armature current has ceased to flow. Furthermore, after the armature reversal, the
rectifier must be activated at an appropriate firing angle to prevent the current from
shooting up to a large value and subjecting the drive to shock loading. This is
achieved by either the advanced firing scheme or the back emf matching method.
A four-quandrant speed control system using the inner-current control and the
advanced firing scheme is shown in figure 5.8. As the fast response usually is not
the primary consideration for such drives, advanced firing is commonly used, in
spite of the resulting slow response. Furthermore, current limit control is more cornmonly used than inner-current control because of simplicity.
The steps required for armature current reversal are implemented by a master
controller. A reversing contactor, which is controlled by the master controller, has
three normally closed and three normally open contacts. The armature reversal is ini-
...
CD
Q)
1,
wml
~_,f-~R,
t::
"1 t:: H1~+
.
Speed
controller
Current
limiter
l.
O<
Firing
Current
controller
V. 1+
circuit
la
1"
a
Ve
Ve .
Filter
la
Master
controller
I
L'4
..-J
,,'"
""
'"
,,'"
I
Filter
.> ","
'"
"
-=Figure 5.8
Four quadrant closed-loop
speed control with armature reversal.
""
F
Sec.5.2
Four-Quadrant
Variable-Speed
197
Drives
tiated by the master controller with the help of the contactor whenever l: and la become zero simultaneously.
The master controller al so implements the advanced
firing scheme.
Let the drive be initially running in steady state in the forward direction with
the contactar in the off position. Both It and la are positive, and the errors ewm and
e are clase to zero because of the PI controllers.
ow the speed command w~ is reduced, which makes ewm negative and sets the current reference 1: = O. As e is negative now, the rectifier output voltage is reduced and the armature current is reduced
to zero. Now both 1: and la are zero simultaneously.
On detecting this condition
(that is, 1: = O and la = O) the master controller applies a sufficiently large signal eo
to set the con verter firing angle a at the highest permissible value and simultaneously operates the contactor, opening the normally closed contacts and closing the
normally open contacts. The converter gets connected to the armature at the highest
firing angle. The signal eo is now slowly reduced to zero. The armature current
builds up slowly and a smooth transition into braking occurs. The transfer of connection from FJ to RJ sets
at a positive value. The drive decelerates under the current
control. When Wm becomes less than w~,
becomes zero again and la is forced to
zero. Since
and la are zero simultaneously,
the master controller applies eo again
to set ex at the highest value. It al so opens the contactor, thus, reconnecting the rectifier to the armature through the normally closed contacts F and setting
to a positive value. eo is now slowly reduced to zero. The motor current builds up and the
drive settles at the speed for which ewm = O.
One can anticipate three types of reference speed settings when considering the
armature reversal. One kind of setting is the reduction of speed in the same direction. The operation of the drive has already been considered for this kind of speed
setting. It requires two armature reversals-one
for shifting the operation to braking
and another back to motoring. In the second type of setting, the reference speed is
set for speed reversal. In this case only one armature reversal is required; after the
reversal the drive is initially braked and then accelerated in the reverse direction
under motoring to a new speed. The third possible setting is when the reference
speed is set for a higher value in the same direction. In this case no armature reversal
is necessary.
1:
1:
1:
1:
5.2.2 Drive Employing

Nonsimultaneous
a Dual-Converter
Control
with
A number of closed-Ioop schemes employing a dual-converter with nonsimultaneous

control are possible. They may differ in the following respects:
1. Each rectifier may have a separate firing circuit, or a single firing circuit may
be used for both rectifiers.
2. The current control may be done by the inner-current
rent-limit control.
control loop or the cur-
3. The rectifier switch-in can be done either by the advanced

back ernf matching method.
firing se heme or the
4. The state of the outgoing rectifier respecting turn-off may be sensed either indirectly by sensing zero current or directly by sensing the state of the thyristors.
198
Closed-Loop Control of DC Drives
Chap.j;
A scheme for a particular application is selected depending on its requirements

related to the speed of response. A high-performance drive will employ the inner_
current control loop, the back ernf matching method, and the direct sensing of the
state of the thyristors. For slower schemes other combinations may be chosen to reduce the complexity.
A scheme employing separate firing circuits, inner-current control loop, back
ernf matching method, and zero-current sensing is described here (fig. 5.9).
The inverse cosine firing, described in section 5.1.3, is used. The firing pulses
for the thyristors of rectifier 1 are produced at the intersection of the control voltage
Vewith the reference voltages Vrl-Vr6 (solid lines) obtained from the phase voltages
(-VB), VA' (-Ve), VB, (-VA) and Vc as shown in figure 5.10. The firing pulses for
the thyristors of rectifier 2 are obtained at the intersection of Ve with reference
voltages v; .... v;6 (dotted lines), which are obtained from the phase voltages which
are 180 out of phase from the phase voltages used for rectifier 1-that is, they are
obtained from the phase voltages VB, (-VA)' Vc, (-VB), VA' and (-Ve). The trans.
fer characteristics of the two rectifiers are shown in figure 5. 11.
The master controller (fig. 5.9) performs the following functions:
0
1. Through the logic variables F and VBLOCK it decides which of the two rectifiers
must receive the firing pulses. When both F and VBLOCK are 1, rectifier 1 receives the firing pulses. When both F and VBLOCK are 1, rectifier 2 receives the
firing pulses. When V BLOCK is O, none of the rectifiers recei ves the firing pulses.
2. It senses the polarity of 1: and current zero (la = O). If 1: is negative and
la = O, it initiates the process of switch-o ver from rectifier 1 to rectifier 2. On
the other hand, if
is positive and la = O, it initiates the process of switchover from rectifier 2 to rectifier 1.
3. It also implements the process of switch-overo By setting VBLOCK to O, it withdraws the firing pulses from the outgoing rectifier. After a fixed delay 'T (2 to
10 ms), it releases the firing pulses to the incorning rectifier by setting VBLOCK
back to.I and F to the appropriate value.
1:
..
veo-control and the associated connections, shown by the dotted lines, are
mainly to implement the back ernf matching method. It is called veo-control because
it sets the initial value of Vefor the firing circuit of the incoming rectifier to make its
output voltage under continuous conduction equal to the back ernf. It is also called
the initialization of the Plcontroller. It is controlled by the master controller through
the logic variables F and F. veo-control operates on the current controller 2 when F is
1 and on the current controller 1 when F is 1. Examination of function I of the master controller, just stated, shows that veo-control always operates on the idle rectifier.
A reference signal vR- obtained from the tachometer and related to E by the same
proportionality constant as Vewith Va under continuous conduction - is compared
with the actual output voltage of the current controller of the idle rectifier. The error
is amplified and fed to the input of the current controller to force its output voltage
to VR' Thus the output voltage of the current controller of the idle rectifier continuously tracks the motor back ernf. When the idle rectifier is switched in, its terminal
voltage under continuous conduction will be equal to the back ernf. This gives fast
switch-over without a current surge.
l.
Firing
circuit 1
Current
controller 1
'"
r"-
r:::~
I
I
I
a,
F
L __
I
IL ____________
l.
s= r:::
Speed
controller
*
Current
limiter
'1:
+0-
Master
controller
1"
r--- --1
r----~
F
I
.__ ..J
r--f-
___
I ve2
...J
VBLOCK
r::: I~
Current
controller 2
-1
'---
v..
II~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a2
I
I
I
I
Firing
circuit 2
wm
I
I
I
I
Li
-:-
-"
(D
(D
Figure 5.9
control.
Four quadrant closed-loop
~~
l.
I
I
I
I
V'2
,---
I
I
-L
e12
L---
I VA
v,o.controlt--,
1
I
I
I
a,
I
Iv"
I
LTI
r---------L__
-..,
1----
I
I
l.
VBLOCK
rJ.- 1-..,
l.
Filter
-r----..,
I
I
f--
~ ve'
I
I
I
speed control by dual con verter with non-simultaneous
V.2
-'--
.*-.-2
Fleld
a2
Closed-Loop
200
Figure 5.10
Control of DC Drives
Chap. 5
Generation of the firing pulses for rectifiers 1 and 2.
a2=(180-5)
a,=(180-5)
Figure 5.11
Transfer characteristics of
rectifiers I and 2.
As mentioned in the previous section, from consideration of the number of

converter switch-overs, various reference speed settings can be classified into
three categories: decrease in speed in the same direction, speed reversal, and increase in speed in the same direction. The operation of the drive under consideration
(fig. 5.9) will be described for the first type of reference speed setting. In this case
two switch-overs are required - one from motoring to braking and another from
braking to motoring.
Initially, let the drive be forward motoring in the steady state. Then rectifier l
is conducting and w.':; is positive. The logic variables F and VBLOCK are set at 1;
therefore, current-controller
l and firing circuit l are in operation and currentcontroller 2 is under the control of veo-control to keep Ve2 proportional to the back
emf. The current reference 1: and the motor current la are positive and error signals
ewm are el are nearly zero because of the PI controllers.
Now the reference speed w.':; is reduced, producing a negative speed error and a
negative current reference
The firing angle of rectifier 1 becomes large enough to '
force la to zero. Since 1: < O and la = O, the master controller sets VBLOCK to O. The
firing pulses are withdrawn from both the rectifiers. After a period T, VBLOCK and F
are set to 1, which releases firing pulses to rectifier 2 and transfers veo-control from
1:.
Sec.5.3
References
201
current controller 2 to current controller l. Since Ve2 was already set to make the rectifier terminal voltage at the instant of switch-in equal to the back emf, rectifier 2
switches in fast without a cument surge. The motor regenerates under the current
control and the speed falls. Meanwhile, Vel is being continuously set proportional to
the back emf by veo-control. When the actual speed Wm becomes les s than the reference speed setting w~, 1: becomes positive and the output voltage of rectifier 2 is set
large enough to force la = O. Since 1: is positive and la = O, the master controller
sets VBLOCK to O to withdraw the firing pulses from both the rectifiers. After a duration T, the master controller sets V BLOCK and F to 1 to release the firing pulses to
rectifier 1 and to transfer veo-control to current controller 2. The drive now settles at
the desired speed.
When the application is such that continuous conduction can be assured in the
incoming rectifier at the time of switch-in, the back emf matching method allows a
fast switch-in without a current surge. However, if the incoming rectifier operates in
the discontinuous
conduction mode at the time of switch-in, the rectifier terminal
voltage and the back ernf may differ sufficiently to give a current surge. In this case
Vel is set for a value VR - !1V and Vc2 for a value VR + !1V, where !1V is a fixed
bias voltage. The voltage VR still has the same relation with E as just stated.
5.2.3 Drive Employing a Dual-Converter

with Simultaneous Control
An open-loop drive with inner-current control and employing a dual-converter with
simultaneous control is shown in figure 3.33. Each con verter has a separate currentlimiter. The block marked control circuit consists of a PI controller and a firing circuit. The inverse cosine firing can be used. The firing pulses can be generated for
the two rectifiers as explained in section 5.2.2 and as shown in figure 5.10.
If a speed loop with a P.I controller
is added to the open-loop
drive of
figure 3.33, one gets a four-quadrant closed-loop variable-speed drive. The operation is straight-forward
and need not be discussed here. The reader may wish to consider the operation of this drive for the three types of reference speed settings.
REFERENCES
1. P. C. Sen, Thyristor DC Drives, Wiley Interscience, 1981.
2. W. Leonhard, Control of Electric Drives, Springer- Verlag, 1985.
3. S. B. Dewan, G. R. Slemmon, and A. Straughen, Power Semiconductor Drives , Wiley
Interscience, 1984.
4. G. K. Dubey, S. R. Doradla, A. Joshi, and R. M. K. Sinha, Thyristorised Power Controllers, Wiley Eastern, 1986.
5. G. Joos and T. H. Barton, "Four-quadrant variable-speed drive-design consideration,"
Proc. IEEE, vol. 63, no. 12, 1975, pp. 1660-1668.
6. A. G. Carter, "Fast response speed regulating systems," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Gen.
Appl., vol. IGA-I, July/Aug. 1965, pp. 270-273.
7. Y. V. V.N. Murty, G. K. Dubey, and R. M. K. Sinha, "Fault diagonosis in three-phase
thyristor converters using microprocessors," IEEE Trans. on Industry Applications,
vol. IA-20, no. 6, Nov./Dec. 1984, pp. 1490-97.
202
References
Chap.5
8. T. Krishnan and B. Ramaswamy, "A fast response de motor speed control system "
IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. lA-lO, no. 5, Sept./Oct. 1974, pp. 643-651.
'
9. L. F. Stringer, "Thyristor de systems for non-ferrous hot line," IEEE Industrial Statie
Power Control Conf. Rec., Nov. 1965, pp. 40-58.
10. K. Kamiyama and T. Konishi, "Analysis of transient firing angle in reversible thyristor
drive speed regulator for mili motor," IEEE Trans. on lnd. Appl., vol. lA-15, 1979
pp. 165-175.
.
11. T. Ohmae, T. Matsuda, T. Suzuki, N. Azusawa, K. Kamiyama, and T. Konishi, "A microprocessor-controlled fast response speed regulator with dual mode current loop-for de
motor drives," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. 1A-16, no. 3, May/June 1980, pp. 388-394.
12. J. Holtz and U. Schwellenberg, "A new fast-response current control scheme for line.
controlled converters," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. 1A-19, no. 4, July/Aug. 1983,
pp. 579-585.
13. P. C. Sen and M. L. McDonald, "Thyristorised de drives with regenerative braking and
speed reversal," IEEE Trans. on IECI, vol. IECI-25, no. 4, Nov. 1978.
14. R. R. Bonert, "Automatic speed controlof one-quadrant de drives," IEEE Trans. on Ind.
Appl., vol. 1A-18, Sept./Oct. 1982, pp. 491-499.
15. P. Anjaneyulu, S. S. Prabhu, and G. K. Dubey, "Stability analysis, design and simulation
of a closed-loop converter-controlled drive," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Electronics, vol. IE31, no. 2, May 1984, pp. 175-180.
16. T. Krishnan and B. Ramaswamy, "Speed control of dc motor using thyristor dual Converter," IEEE Trans. on IECI, vol. IECI-3, 1976, pp. 391-399.
'17. D. L. Duff and A. Ludbrook, "Reversing thyristor arrnature dual converter with logic
cross over control," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Gen. Appl., May/June 1965, pp. 216-222.
18. R- V. Castell and A. R. Danial, "Novel 4-quadrant thyristor controller," Proc. IEE, 1972,
p. 1577.
19. B. R. Pelly, Thyristor Phase Controlled Converter and Cyclo-Converters , Wiley Inter.
science, 1971.
6
Induction Motors
Induction motors, particularly squirrel-cage type induction motors, have a number of

advantages when compared with de motors. Some of these are ruggedness; lower
maintenance requirements; better reliability; lower cost, weight, volume, and inertia;
higher efficiency; and the ability to operate in dirty and explosive environments. The
major drawback of de motors is the presence of commutators and brushes, which require frequent maintenance and make the motor unsuitable for explosive and dirty
environments. Because of their advantages, induction motors are more widely used
than all the rest of the electric motors put together. However, until recently, they
have been mainly used in applications requiring constant speed. Variable speed applications have been dominated by de motors. This can be attributed to the fact that
conventional methods of speed control of induction motors have been either expensive or highly inefficient.With the improvement in capabilities and the reduction in the cost of thyristors
and more recently of power transistors and gate-turn-off thyristors, it has become
possible to build variable speed induction motor drives which can match and in some
cases even surpass dc drives in performance and costo As a result of this development, induction motor drives have succeeded in replacing de drives in a number of
variable speed applications. It is projected that in the future induction motors will be
widely used in variable speed drives.
6.1 PERFORMANCE OF 3-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
A 3-phase induction motor consists of a balanced three-phase winding on the stator.
The rotor of a wound-rotor type induction motor consists of a balanced three-phase
winding of the same number of poles as that of the stator winding. The rotor of a
203
204
Induction Motors
Chap.6
squirrel-cage type induction motor has conductors shorted by end rings. By induc_
tion, the same number of phases and poles are produced by the squirrel-cage rotar as
in the stator winding. When the stator is supplied by a balanced three-phase ac
source of frequency W radians per second (or f Hz), a rotating field moving at a synchronous speed Wms radians per seco is produced. Where
Wms
47Tf
= -w = -
rad/sec,
and
p = number of poles.
(6.1)
If the rotor speed is Wm rad/ sec then the relative speed between the stator rotating
field and the rotor is given by
(6.2)
where
Wse
is called the slip speed. The parameter s is known as slip and is given by
(6.3)
AIso
(6.4)
Because of the relative speed between the stator field and the rotor, balanced three.
phase voltages are induced in the rotor windings. The frequency of these voltages is
proportional to the slip speed. Hence
W
Wse
(w)
SW
rad/sec.
(6.5)
Wms
where Wr is the rotor frequency in rad/sec.

For Wm < Wms, the relative speed is positive. Consequently, the rotar induced
voltages have the same phase sequence as the stator voltages. The three-phase currents flowing through the rotor produce a field which moves with respect to the rotar
at the slip speed in the same direction as the rotor speed. Consequently, the rotor
field moves in space at the same speed as the stator field and a steady torque is produced. The torque is given by the following equation: 1
.
T
where <Pma
and
=-
7T (p)2
2
2'
<PmaFrnr
SIn
Sr
(6.6)
air-gap flux per poJe, Webers

Frnr = peak rotor mmf, Ampere-tums
Sr = torque angIe or phase angJe between the rotor and air-gap mrnf's
=
For any speed wm < wms, the rotor and stator fieIds remain stationary, and a steady
torque is produced. For wm = wms, the reIative speed between the rotor and stator
fieId becomes zero. Consequently, no voltages are induced in the rotor and no torque
is produced by the motor.
For Wm > Wms, the reIative speed between the stator field and the rotor reverses.
Consequently, the rotor induced voltages and currents also reverse and have a phase
sequence opposite to that of the stator. The 3-phase rotor currents produce a field
Seco 6.1
Performance
of 3-Phase Induction
Motors
205
which moves with respect to the rotor at the slip speed in the direction opposite to
the rotor speed. Hence, again the rotor field moves in space at the same speed as the
stator field and a steady torque is produced. Since the direction of rotor currents has
reversed, the developed torque has a negative sign suggesting generator operation.
The generator operation is employed to produce regenerative braking.
6.1.1
Steady-State
Analysis
A per-phase equivalent circuit of an induction motor is shown in figure 6. la. aTI is

the ratio of the stator turns n, to rotor turns n., The equivalent circuit can be sirnplified by referring the rotor quantities to the stator frequency and number of tums. The
resultant equivalent circuit is shown in figure 6.1 b. R; and X; are the rotor resistance and reactance referred to the stator and are given by the following equations:
(6.7)
The portion on the left of the dotted line AB in figure 6.1 b can be replaced by
its Thevenin's
equivalent circuit, giving a simplified equivalent circuit shown in
figure 6.1c. VIL(), R, and XI are Thevenin's equivalent voltage source, resistance,
and reactance, respectively. They are given by the following equations:
V
I
() _
1-
1T
2tan
+ 'X =
R
I
VXm
VR 2s + (X s + X m)2
_1
(X +R X
s
m)
(6.9)
jXm(Rs + jXs)
+ j(Xs + Xm)
R,
J I
(6.8)
(6.10)
In the equivalent circuit of figure 6.1 b, the stator current I, is related to (he equivalent rotor current 1; by the following equation:
1 = [(R;/s) + j(X; + Xm)]I;

jXm
(6.11 )
The approximate equivalent circuit of figure 6.ld is often used to simplify calculations. It is based on the assumption of negligible stator impedance drop compared to
the terminal voltage.
From the equivalent circuit of figure 6.lc,
l'=
r
VIL()I
(
(6.12)
+ ~;) + j(XI + X;)
RI
The power transferred across the air-gap

rotor equivalent resistance R;/s. Hence,
P
Pg is equal to the power absorbed
(R;)
3112
r
in the
(6.13)
206
Induction Motors
sXr
I'r
X.
R.
Chap.6
Rr
---Ir
n.
. sE
I
Ideal
transformer
Stator
Rotor
(a) Per-phase equivalent eireuit
R.
X.
----
x;
'Off'
uuu
R;/s
I'r
I
I
B
(b) Per-phase equivalent cireuit referred to the stator
X,
R,
X'r
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
V,i!.J
I
I
I
I
----
R;/s
I'r
l.
(e) Per-phase simplified equivalent cireuit referred to the stator
R.
l.
r,
V
I'r
Xr
X.
Xm
I
(d) Per-phase approximate
Figure 6.1
equivalent eireuit referred to the stator
Per phase equivalent circuits of an induction motor.
R;/s
Seco 6.1
Performance
207
Motors
Pg, which is known as the air-gap power, is also given by the following equation:
Pg = 3EI; cos Br
(6.14)
where Br is the phase difference between E and 1;. A portion of the air-gap power is
wasted as rotor copper loss, and the remaining power is converted into mechanical
power. Hence, mechanical power is given by
Pm = Pg- 3I;2R;
;C ~ s) =
Pm = 3I;2R
(6.15)
Pi1 - s)
Now the torque developed by the motor is
T= Pm
Wm
Substituting from equations (6.4) and (6.15) gives
T=-gP
(6.16)
Wms
Substituting from equation (6.13) for Pg yields

T =~I,2R;
Wms
Substituting for
1; from
N-m
(6.17)
equation (6.12) gives
T=~[
ms
V~R;/s
(Rt + ~;) 2 + oc, + X;?
N-m
(6.18)
The motor output torque at the shaft is obtained by deducting friction, windage, and
core loss torques from T. Further, from equations (6.16) and (6.17),
sPg = 3I;2R;
= rotor copper loss
(6.19)
The term sPg is known as the slip power, because it is proportional to slip for a given
value of Pg. It is the portion of the air-gap power Pg which is not converted into mechanical power. From equation (6.16)
T
= slip power
(6.20)
SWms
Equation (6.20) is useful in deriving an expression for torque in a doubly fed woundrotor induction motor. A motor is called doubly fed when it is supplied both from
stator and rotor. When the motor is supplied from the stator only, according to equation (6.19), the slip power is equal to the rotor copper loss. According to equation (6.18), for given values of the stator voltage and frequency, the developed
torque is a function of slip. The slip for the maximum developed torque can be ob-
Induction Motors
208
Chap.6
tained by differentiating
T with respect lo s and equating it to zero. Altematively,
one can use the following approach.
From equation (6.16), the torque is maximum when the air-gap power Pg is
maximum. The air-gap power is the same as the power absorbed by the equivalent
rotor resistance R;'/s. One can consider the rest of the circuit to be a voltage SOurce
V( with an internal impedance equal to R( + j(X( + X:). The power transferred across
the air-gap will be maximum at the slip Sm for which R:/sm is equal to the internal
impedance. Thus
(6.21)
The maximum torque Tmal<is obtained
equation (6.18). Thus,
T
by substituting
=_3_.
V~
2wms R(
rnax
from equation
(6.21)
into
(6.22)
VR? + (X( + X:F
Equation (6.22) shows that the maximurn torque is independent of rotor resistance.
However, according to equation (6.21), the slip at the maximum torque changes in
proportion to rotor resistance. From equations (6.12) and (6.21) it can be shown thar
the rotor current at the maximum torque has a unique value, which is independent of
rotor resistance.
The phase of the stator current with respect to the source voltage is obtained
from equations (6.9), (6.11), and (6.12),
,1,.
ws>:
tan
-1(X R+Xm)
S
+ tan
_1(X: R'/+ Xm) _ tan _1(X( + X:)

R'
+~
r S
(6.23)
Now,
power factor
Equations
VI> R(. XI> and
(6.18), (6.21),
equation:
= cos 1>s
relevant to the equivalent circuif of figure 6.1d are obtained when

are replaced by V, R X and 0, respectively in equations (6.12),
and (6.22). The power factor angle is given by the following
e(
,1,.
__
w -
z.2 + tan -1(Xs + X: R'+ Xm) _ tan -1(Xs + X:)

R'
R
+~s
+~S
(6.24)
The nature of the speed-torque and speed-rotor current characteristics of induction motors for the speed range from synchronous
to zero speed are shown in
figure 6.2. The rotor current which is zero at the synchronous speed increases due to
the decrease in R:/s as the speed is decreased. The torque also increases due to the
increase of the component of the rotor current in phase with the back emf E (or
flux), as shown by equations (6.14) and (6.17). The torque reaches the maximum
value at the slip Sm' A further decrease in speed decreases the torque in spite of an
Sec.6.1
Performance
of 3-Phase lndi.ction
s=
Figure 6.2 Speed-torque and speed-rotor

current characteristics of an induction motor.
209
Motors
T rated
T mu
TanctI,-
increase in the rotor current. This can be attributed to the low rotor power factor due
to the low value of R; / s.
The motor operates stably on the portion of the speed-torque characteristic between s = O and Sm' With most loads, the operation is unstable for s > Sm' Therefore,
the portion of the speed-torque curve with s> Sm is often termed a statically unstable
part of the speed-torque curves. When the rotor resistance is low, the change of
speed from no load to rated torque is only a small percentage of the motor speed.
Thus, the motor operates essentially at a constant speed. The short time overloading
of the motor can be done up to the maximum torque. If the load torque exceeds the
maximum torque-which
is also called the breakdown torque-the
motor stops
and the overload protection must irnmediately disconnect the source to prevent darnage due to overheating.
6.1.2 Squirrel-Cage Induction Motors
In a squirrel-cage motor, various parameters have to be chosen at the design stage. A
low rotor resistance is preferred because it gives improved performance during normal running by providing high output power and efficiency and good speed regulation due to the low value of the rated slip. However, the starting performance of
such a motor is poor due to the high starting current and lowstarting torque. An increase in the rotor resistance can improve the starting performance by reducing the
starting current and increasing the starting torque, but then the normal running performance deteriorates. The breakdown torque is a measure of the short time overloading capability of the motor. A low rotor leakage reactance gives a high breakdown
torque, which is, however, obtained'at the expense of the increase in the starting current. Thus the design requirements for normal running and for starting performance
are contradictory.
In a squirrel-cage induction motor, a good normal running performance combined with a good starting performance is obtained by using a rotor whose resistance
automatically varies with speed, providing high resistance at standstill which progressively decreases as the speed increases and becomes quite small at normal
speeds. Such a variation of rotor resistance is realized by making it frequency dependent. At standstill, the rotor frequency is high and equals the stator frequency. The
210
Induction Motors
Chap. 6
rotor frequency decreases as the speed increases, reaching a value of 2 to 10 percent

of the stator frequency around the rated speed. The rotor is designed to have a high
resistance at the stator frequency. The resistance decreases with frequency and becomes quite small at 2 to 10 percent of the stator frequency. This kind of varjation
of the rotor resistance is accomplished by using either deep-bar or double squirrelcage rotors.
The deep-bar squirrel-cage rotor employs a deep and narrow bar. The cross
section of such a bar along with its slot and the leakage flux is shown in figure 6.3a.
One can imagine that the bar is made up of a number of narrow layers connected in
parallel. Three such layers are shown crosshatched in the figure. The leakage induc.
tance of the topmost layer is the least as it is linked to the minimum leakage flux. On
the other hand the bottom layer has the highest leakage inductance due to the highest
flux linkage. At low speeds, when the rotor frequency is high, the difference in the
leakage reactance values cause an unequal distribution of currents between the
layers - the highest amount of current carried by the top layer and the lowest by the
bottom layer. Because of the unequal distribution of the current, the effective rotor
resistance increases and the leakage reactance decreases.l! When near the rated
speed, the leakage reactances of the layers are low due to the low rotor frequency,
and the distribution of current is mainly decided by their de resistances. Since the de
resistance values are the same, the current gets uniforrnly distributed across the cross
section of the bar, decreasing the effective value of the rotor resistance.
The double squirrel-cage rotor consists of two layers of bars short-circuited by
the end rings. The cross section of a slot which consists of a bar of each layer, and
the distribution of the leakage flux are shown in figure 6.3b. The top bar is of
smaller cross-sectional area than the bottom bar and consequently has a higher resistance. On the other hand, due to the substantial amount of flux crossing the slot between the two bars, the lower bar has much higher leakage inductance than the upper
bar. Thus the upper layer has high resistance and 10w leakage inductance and the
lower layer has low resistance and high leakage inductance. At 10w speeds, for
which the rotor frequency is high, the lower layer carries only a small portion of the
rotor current. Therefore, the low-speed operation of the motor is govemed by the
upper layer. When close to the rated speed, the reactances of both the layers are
small due to the low rotor frequency and can be neglected. The rotor resistanee,
which is approximately equal to that of the two layers in parallel, is now very small.
-,
Rotor
bar
/
\
/1/
11/
\ \
\
\ \ 1
Leakage
fl ux
--..;
111
\ 11 I
\ \ \ 1
\ \\
\ \ \\,
" ,,
~I
/1
1/'
11'
1111
1111
Figure 6.3
Bottom
\
\ \ I\
; \ \: (
:);;
\ \ \"
~ ///'
ar
Leakage
,~:::'-~:~//J-t4-flux
,<:=::.../
\~,,--:,:~~/
(a) Deep rotor
Top bar
.:
bar
(b)
Double squirrel-caqe
rotor bar
Squirrel cage rotors with variable rotor resistances.
Sec.6.1
Performance
211
Motors
The steady-state analysis of section 6.1.1 is based on the assumption of constant rotor resistance and leakage reactance. The rotor resistance and leakage reactance of the deep-bar rotor and double-cage rotor motors vary with frequency. The
large size squirrel-cage motors, even when they are not specifically designed to have
a deep-bar rotor, exhibit some deep-bar effect, and therefore, their rotor resistance
and leakage reactance al so change with frequency. The equivalent circuits of
figure 6.1 are still applicable, but the analysis must account for the dependence of
the rotor resistance and leakage reactance on the frequency.l-i
6.1.3 Squirrel-Cage Induction
Classification
Motor
Design
The squirrel-cage induction motor is used in numerous applications with different re- .
quirements for the speed-torque and speed-current characteristics. By a suitable
choice of rotor resistance and leakage reactance, and the degree of deep-bar or
double-cage effects, a squirrel-cage induction motor can be designed to suit the requirements of a specific application. Large size motors are usually designed for a specific
application. The medium and low size motors (around 150 kW and less) have been
classified into standard designs whose speed-torque and speed-current characteristics
have been found over a period of time to satisfy the majority of squirrel-cage induction motor needs. Application engineers choose the one whose characteristics are
closest to their needs. Various countries have their own standard classifications. The
American standard (NEMA) classification is briefIy described next.
The NEMA has classified the squirrel-cage motor designs into five standard
categories: A, B, e, D, and F. The nature of speed-torque characteristics of these
standard designs are shown in figure 6.4. It may be noted that individual motors differ significantly from these curves.
A class A design motor uses a single lw resistance and low leakage reactance
cage winding. It has a low full-load slip, high running efficiency and power factor,
high breakdown torque, .normal starting torque, and high starting current. It is essentially an energy efficient motor designed to obtain a good running performance at the
expense of the starting performance. The full-load slip may vary from 2 percent for a
large size motor to 4 percent for a small motor. The breakdown torque is well over
100
'O
''""
~
0
:o
75
o
c:
o
1:
<J
c:
;'O
50
...
c:
'~
"
'"
25
o..
Figure 6.4 Standard squirrel-cage

induction motor designs.
100
200
Percent of full-load
300
torque
400
Induction Motors
212
Chap.6
twice the fuil-load torque. The starting torque ranges frorn equal to full-Ioad torque
for large motors to twice full-Ioad torque for small motors. The corresponding range
of starting current is from 8 to 5 times the rated current.
Class B design also has a low full-Ioad slip and a normal starting torque. The
starting current is reduced to 70 to 80 percent of that of c1ass A by designing for a
relatively high leakage reactance, and the starting torque is maintained by employing
a deep-bar or double-cage rotor. The use of higher leakage reactance reduces the
breakdown torque to a little over twice the full-load torque and slightly reduces the
full-load power factor.
Class C design employs a double-cage winding with a greater resistance in the
high resistance rotor winding than the c1ass B designo The result is a higher starting
torque (about 2.5 times the full-Ioad torque) with low starting current, lower breakdown torque (about 2 times the full-load torque), slghtly lower running efficiency,
and higher full-Ioad slip (less than 5 percent) than the c1ass B designo
Class O design uses a single-cage rotor with high resistance and low leakage
reactance. It gives exceptionally high starting torque, about 3 times full-load torque,
and low starting current. This excellent starting performance is obtained at the expense of a large full-Ioad slip (5 to 50 percent) and low running efficiency.
Class F design combines a good running performance (full-load slip 2 to
4 percent) with a low starting current. This is obtained at the expense of starting and
breakdown torques,
6.1.4
Wound-Rotor
Induction
Motors
One of the important features of the wound-rotor induction motor is that unlike the
squirrel-cage motor it need not be designed to obtain a compromise between the normal running performance and the starting performance. The rotor winding is designed to have a l~ resistance so that the running efficiency is high and the
full-load slip is low. The improved starting performance is obtained by connecting
an external resistance in series with the rotor winding. The speed-torque and speedrotor current characteristics of a wound-rotor induction motor with different values
of external resistances are shown in figure 6.5. The increase in the rotor resistance
does not affect the value of maximum torque but increases the slip at maximum
torque. When high starting torque is needed, the rotor resistance can be chosen to
R;
increasing
Tmall(
Figure 6.5 Speed-torque (-)

and
speed-rotor current (---) curves of a
wound-rotor motor.
Sec.6.2
Starting
213
obtain the maximum torque at standstill. This also reduces the starting current substantia11y. As the rotor speeds up, external resistances can be decreased, making the
maximum torque available throughout the accelerating range. Since most of the rotor
copper loss occurs in the external resistors, the rotor temperature rise during starting
is substantially lower than it would be if the resistance were incorporated in the rotor
winding, as in the case of squirrel-cage motors. This allows optimum use of the motor torque capabilities. The wound-rotor motor is therefore widely used in applications requiring frequent starting and braking with large motor torques.
Because of the availability of rotor winding for changing the rotor resistance or
injecting voltage in the rotor circuit, the wound-rotor motor offers greater flexibility
for control. However, it has a number of disadvantages in comparison to the squirrelcage motor, such as greater cost, need for occasional maintenance due to slip-rings
and brushes, lack of sturdiness, and so on. In view of this, it is not as widely used as
the squirrel-cage motor.
6.2 STARTING
When started directly on line, an induction motor draws large current. When supplied from a line with low capacity (or appreciable internal impedance), this can
cause a dip in the line voltage which adversely affects other loads connected to the
same line. Thus, some arrangement must be made to reduce motor current during
starting. Various features introduced in the squirrel-cage motors at the design stage
to reduce the starting current are discussed in section 6.1.3. The starting of woundrotor motors using external resistors is explained in section 6.1.4. Other starting
methods, applicable to both the squirrel-cage and wound-rotor motors, incIude reducing the stator voltage,varying
the stator frequency and increasing the stator
impedance. The wound rotor motor can also be started by injecting voltage in the rotoro These methods, except the one involving the increase of stator impedance, are
"also used for speed control, and therefore, they will be mainly discussed along with
speed control in the present and later chapters.
Conventional methods of starting by reducing the stator voltage are star-delta
and autotransfonner methods. In the star-delta method, an induction motor designed
to operate nonnally with delta connection is connected in star. This allows a reduction of motor voltage and current by 1/\13 at the expense of a reduction of torque by
1/3. In the autotransfonner starting method, with the secondary to primary turns
ratio aT, the motor current and torque are reduced by a factor at. In both these methods, the changeover from the starting connection to the normal running connection
may lead to severe current transients if the open circuit transition is used. In the open
circuit transition, the motor is momentarily disconnected from the supply before it
is reconnected directly across the supply. The disconnection of the motor from the
supply causes the stator currents to become zero and the stator field to collapse. Due
to a large time constant of the rotor, the rotor current continues to flow, maintaining
the rotor field and causing the voltage to be induced in the stator windings. The
phase of the voltage induced in the stator depends on the rotor field and is independent of the phase of the supply voltage. At the time of reconnection, the induced
Induction Motors
214
Chap.6
voltage and the supply voltage may aid instead of opposing, resulting in a iarge CUrrent inrush.
Large size motors are often designed with two stator windings which are normally connected in paralle1. During starting only one winding is used. This doubles
the stator impedance. This method is also known as part winding starting.
6.3 BRAKING
The need for electric braking was explained in section 1.2.5. As in the case of de
motors, various methods of braking induction motors can be divided into the follow,
ing categories:
1. Regenerative
braking.
2. Plugging
or reverse voltage braking.
3. Dynamic
or rheostatic
braking.
Unlike de motors, dynamic braking of induction motors can be realized in a

number of ways. Here only de dynamic braking, which is the most widely used
method among dynamic braking methods, wil! be discussed.
6.3',1 Regenerative
Braking
Equations (6.18), (6.21), and (6.22) provide expressions for torque, Sm' and Tmu'
These expressions
are valid for speeds below synchronous
speed (s> O), speeds
above synchronous speed (s < O), and also for negative speeds (s> 1). Figure 6.2
shows the speed-torque
curves for the speed range from O to synchronous
speed.
Figure 6.6 shows the speed-torque curves for al! the three ranges of speed by continuous lines. The operations for Wm > Wms (or s < O) and Wm < O (s> 1) produce
negative power and therefore correspond to the braking operation. The speed-torque
curves obtained by the reversal of the phase sequence of the motor terminal voltages
are also shown by dotted lines.
With a positive sequence voltage across the motor terminals, the operation
above synchronous
speed gives the regenerative braking operation (portion BAE).
Similarly, with a negative sequence voltage across the motor terrninals, regenerative
braking is obtained for peeds above the synchronous speed in the reverse direction
(portion bae). In regenerative braking, the motor works as an induction generator,
converting mechanical energy supplied by the load to electrical energy, which is fed
to the source. Thus the generated energy is usefully employed. It should be understood that if the source cannot accept energy then the regenerative braking cannot
be used. The operation of the motor in regenerative
braking can be explained as
follows.
When the motor runs at a speed greater than the synchronous speed, the relati ve speed between the rotating field and the rotor is negative. The rotor-induced
voltage and current have directions opposite to those under the motoring operation.
The stator current which flows to balance the rotor ampere tums is also in the opposite direction. Thus, the power flows from the motor to the source and the motor
works as an induction generator. The magnetizing current required to produce flux is
Sec.6.3
215
Braking
Forward
plugging
Forward
motoring
.
Reverse
motoring
Reverse
plugging
('
"""'-
---
Reverse
regenerative
braking
---'"
)a
/e
Figure 6.6 Speed-torque curves of an
induction motor for speeds greater and
less than synchronous speeds in either
direction.
Positive sequence voltages
---
Negative sequence voltages
obtained from the source. It may be noted that the machine cannot regenerate unless
it is connected to a source.
For regenerative braking to take place, the motor's speed should be greater
than synchronous speed. When the motor is fed by a fixed frequency source, regenerative braking is possible only for speeds greater than synchronous speed. When the
motor is fed by a variable frequency source, the source frequency can be adjusted to
give a synchronous speed less than the motor speed for any motor speed; and therefore regenerative braking can be obtained up to nearly zero speed.
When regenerative braking is employed for holding the speed against an active
load, care should be taken to restrict the operation in the regin between the synchronous speed and the speed for which the braking torque is the maximumthat is, on the portion AB (or ab for the negative sequence voltages) for which
O> s > -Sm. For slips more negative than -sm (portion AE), the braking torque reduces drastically, leading to runaway speeds, because, the faster the motor runs, the
lesser will be the braking torque. This restriction on the slip range must also be observed when braking against an active load by varying the supply frequency.
When holding an active load by regenerative braking, a short duration dip in
the supply voltage or a momentary increase in the load torque may hift the operation to the unstable region. In such a situation mechanical brakes may be used to as-
216
Induction Motors
Chap. 6
sist the regenerative braking to prevent runaway speeds. Alternatively, capacitors

may be connected in series with the motor to increase the braking torque. If one is
using a wound-rotor motor, the rotor resistance may also be increased to increase the
range of stable operation.
The developed braking torque can be calculated from equation (6.18) by using
the negative sign for the slip. The shaft torque is obtained by adding friction
windage and core los s torque to the developed torque. The maximum developed
braking torque is obtained from equation (6.22) when the negative sign is used.
It may be noted that for the same absolute value of slip, the braking torque is
higher than the motoring torque. Since the braking speeds are also higher, the regen.
erated power is much higher than the motoring power.
6.3.2 Plugging
An induction motor operates in the plugging mode for slips greater than l. For positive sequence voltages, a slip greater than 1 is obtained when the rotor moves in the
reverse direction (portion CD, fig. 6.6). Since the relative speed between the rotaring field and the rotor remains positive, the motor torque is positive and the motor
draws power from the source. Since the motor is running in the reverse direction, a
positive torque provides the braking operation. The electrical power generated by the
conversion of mechanical power supplied by the load and inertia, and also the power
supplied by the source, are dissipated in the motor circuit's resistances. Thus, this is
a highly inefficient method of braking.
With negative sequence voltages, plugging takes place on portion cd, shown
by the chain-dotted line. When running in the forward direction, the motor can be
braked by changing the phase sequence of the motor terminal valtages by simply interchanging the connections of any two motor tenninals. This will transfer the operation from point F to f and braking will commence. The motor torque is not zero at
zero speed. When braked for stopping, the motor should be disconnected from the
supply at or near zero speed. An additional device will be required for detecting zero
speed and disconnecting the motor from the supply. Therefore, plugging is not suitable for stopping. It is, however, quite suitable for reversing the motor. As the motor
is airead y connected with the negative sequence voltages and the torque is finite at
zero speed, it accelerates to a speed in the reverse direction.
Because of high values of slip (nearly 2 at point 0, the equivalent rotor resistance R;/s has a low value. A high current flows, but the torque is low due to the
low power factor of the rotor. In the case of a wound-rotor motor, external resistors
are connected in the rotor to reduce the current and increase the braking torque. The
value of the external resistor can be chosen to provide the maximum torque for
s = 2. As s falls, the resistance can be varied to brake and reverse the motor at the
maximum torque.
From the forward motoring (portion BC), the reverse plugging operation
(portion CD) is obtained when an active load drives the motor in the reverse direction, as in crane and hoist applications. When operating this way, plugging is sometimes called counter-torque braking.
Sec.6.3
217
Braking
6.3.3 De Dynamic Braking

In de dynamie braking, the motor is diseonneeted from the ae supply and eonnected
to a de supply. The ways in whieh the motor can be eonnected to a de supply are
shown in figure 6.7. Conneetions e and f provide uniform loading for all the three
phases but eomplieate the switehing operation. Connections a, b, d, and e are generally used beeause of the simpler switehing operations.
The flow of direct eurrent through the stator windings sets up a stationary rnagnetie field. The relative speed between the stationary stator field and the moving rotor is now negative. Consequently, 3-phase voltages of reverse polarity and phase
sequence (eompared to the motoring in the same direetion) are induced in the rotor.
The resultant three-phase rotor eurrents produce a rotating field, moving at the rotor
speed in the direetion opposite to that of rotor, thus giving a stationary rotor field.
Sinee both stator and rotor fields are stationary and rotor eurrent flows in the reverse
direction, a steady braking torque is produeed at all speeds. It, however, beeomes
zero at standstill due to zero rotor eurrents.
Sinee the de current flowing through the stator depends on its resistance whieh
is low, a low voltage de supply is required. This is obtained from the ae supply by a
step-down transformer and a diode bridge. When eontrolled braking (braking with
variable torque) is required, a thyristor bridge is used instead of the diode bridge.
When quiek braking is required, to produce large braking torque, one can allow the
stator eurrent to be as high as ten times the rated current. But then either the supply
[b)
(a)
(e)
(d)
(e)
Figure 6.7
Stator eonneetions for de dynamie braking.
(1)
Induction Motors
218
Chap.6
must be removed or the eurrent must be redueed below the rated value soon after the
motor stops, otherwise the motor will be overheated.
The de dynamie braking equivalent eireuit of an induetion motor is obtained
as follows.
The equivalent eireuit of figure 6.1b uses the values of various parameters at a
frequeney W rad/see. for whieh the synehronous speed is W
Figure 6.8a illustrates
the equivalent eireuit for a frequeney W, for whieh the synehronous speed is wmsl.
Various parameters are given in terms of their values at the frequeney w. Dividing
all the parameters by (Wmsl/Wms) gives a eireuit as shown in figure 6.8b. For de dymS
Wms1
Wm11
--x,
R.
x;
wm.,
x;
R;
Wml
Wm
wm1
wml
wm,
Wmsl
Wm
Wm
I
(a)
wms
wm11
X,
'TOT'
X'r
w ms V
w mat
! Xm~
Wm
wms1 - wm
-"
I
I
I
I
'TOT'
I 1m
I
R'
I
B
(b)
X;
R,
1,
(el
Figure 6.8
De dynamic braking equivalent circuits of an induction motor.
R'r
(1 - s)
Sec.6.3
219
Braking
namic braking, WI = O and Wmsl = O. Substitution of these values in figure 6.8b,

gives the de dynamic braking equivalent circuit shown in figure 6.8c.
The minus sign with the term [- R;/(l - s)] shows that the torque is negative
and the machine is acting as a sink of mechanical power. As long as it is kept in
mind that the torque is negative, it is not necessary to include the minus sign in the
equivalent circuit. Here also the minus sign will be ignored in the derivations given
later. The portion of figure 6.8b to the left of line AB has been replaced by a current
source I, in series with a resistance Rs' The explanation for this is as follows. The
substitution of Wmsl = O gives an infinite voltage source in series with an infinite resistance. This can be replaced by a current source Is' Any impedance in series with a
current source will have no effect on the current value; hence, X, can be dropped.
However, R, may be retained to account for the stator copper loss.
The value of current source Is' which is an ac equivalent of the de current
through the stator, depends on the type of stator connection employed. It is obtained
as follows.
The direct current Id through the stator windings sets up a stationary field. The
circuit of figure 6.8c is an ac equivalent circuit. An ac current I, will be equivalent
to the de current Id if it produces a rotating field of the same magnitude as that produced by Id' If this condition is satisfied, then there would be an instant when the
distribution of the ac currents through the three-phase stator windings will be the
same as that due to the de current. For example, in connection "a" of figure 6.7 only
two phases are energized: phase A has a current Id, phase B has a current - Id, and the
current through phase C is zero. An equivalent three-phase excitation I, must produce this distribution of current at some instant. AC current distribution for such an
instant is shown in figure 6.9. The projections of the current phasors on the horizontal axis give their instantaneous values. As can be seen, the instantaneous value of
-the phase B current is equal to that of phase A but of opposite sign, and the phase C
current is zero. If the amplitude of the ac phasors is I, then
I, cos 30
Id
or
(6.25)
Now
(6.26)
Figure 6.9
Induction Motors
220
Chap.6
Further,
(6.27)
The relationship between I, and Id' and Vd and Id for connections a, b, d, and e are
listed in table 6.1. The connections e and f require a different approach, which is not
considered here.
Current I, is shared between the rotor impedance and the magnetizing reactance Xm For low values of (l - s), the rotor current will be small. Therefore, the
magnetizing current will be nearly equal to L. It is common practice to use large
values of I, to get fast braking. Then for low values of (l - s), 1m will be large
enough to cause heavy saturation in the magnetic circuit. Because of the saturation,
the magnetization characteristic (the relation between E and 1m) will be nonlinear
and Xm will vary with 1m'
The magnetization characteristic can be obtained experimentally. A woundrotor motor is run at synchronous speed with the rotor open and with de excitation
on the stator. Since the rotor is open, the rotor current Ir is zero; thus 1m = Is' The
rotor induced phase voltage (E) can now be measured for various values of 1m' The
magnetization characteristic of a squirrel-cage motor is obtained by running it at
the synchronous speed with the ac excitation on the stator. Since Ir is zero, the input
phase current and phase voltage are then equal to 1m and E, respectively. By changing the input ac excitation, the magnetization characteristic is obtained.
The analysis of the braking, taking into account the nonlinearity of the magnetization characteristic, is done as follows.
From the equivalent circuit of figure 6.8c,
(6.28)
(6.29)
and
(6.30)
Substituting from equation (6.30) into (6.29), subtracting the resultant equation
equation (6.28) and rearranging the terms gives
from
(6.31)
TABLE 6.1
Connection
I,
Vd
-----------------------------------------------------------
Sec.6.3
221
Braking
AIso from equation (6.29),

s
l-
R',
(6.32)
vi (E/I;)2 - X?
The braking torque T is given by
T=~(I;2~)
W
ms
(6.33)
1- s
The shaft torque is obtained by adding friction, windage, and core loss torques to the
developed torque T.
To avoid solution of nonlinear algebraic equations, the following sequence is
used to calculate speed-torque characteristics. Assume a value for 1m, obtain corresponding E from the magnetization characteristic, calculate Xm from equation (6.30), obtain 1; from equation (6.31), evaluate S frorn equation (6.32) and Wm
frorn equation (6.4), and then obtain T from equation (6.33).
The speed-torque characteristics for two values of Id and R; are shown in
figure 6.10. For a given Id, an increase in R; increases the speed for which the
torque is maximum, but the magnitude of the maximum torque remains constant.
This behavior is similar to the motoring operation and it is explained next.
Substituting from equation (6.28) into equation (6.33) gives
(6.34)
Differentiation of equation (6.34) with respect to (l - s) gives the following expression for the slip at the maximum torque:
R'
(6.35)
sm = 1 - (X; +'Xm)
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
Id2
I
I
1'-1
> Id1
R~2 > R~l
l' T
~ Id1
",
" " ,,
,
o
Figure 6.10 De dynamic braking
speed-torque curves.
----
Id1
222
Induction Motors
Chap. 6
Substitution from equation (6.35) into equation (6.34) yields

T
=_3_
rnax
I;X~
+ Xm)
(6.36)
2wms (X;
Thus, the maximum torque is independent of R;. In the linear region of operation, at
a given speed, the torque is proportional to
For low speeds, the torque is less
than proportional to
because of the decrease in Xm due to the saturation. From
equations (6.31) - (6.33), (6.35), and (6.36) it can be shown that for a given I 1;
has an unique value at the maximum torque.
External resistors are connected in the rotor of a wound-rotor induction motor
for improving the braking performance at high speeds. When quick braking is desired, R; is chosen to get the maximum torque at the highest speed. As the speed
falls, external resistors can be reduced to brake the motor at the maximum torque.
This method of braking is very effective for fast stopping of loads. Since the
stator resistance is very small, a large Id can be easily produced to get large brak.
ing torques. As the torque is zero at zero speed, no arrangement is required to disconnect the motor from the supply. Because of the lower consumption of energy
compared to plugging, it is also used for holding speeds against active loads for
prolonged periods, such as in mine winders.
1;.
1;
Example 6.1
A 3-phase, Y-connected, 6-pole, 60 Hz induction motor has the following constants:
v, =
231 V,
R, = R; = 1 n,
X, = X; = 2
1. If the motor is used for regenerative braking,

(a) Determine the range of active load torque it can hold and the corresponding range of speed.
(b) Calculate the speed and current for an active load torque of 150 N-m.
2. If the motor is used for plugging, determine the braking torque and current for
a speed of 1200 rpm.
Synchronous speed in rpm N, = 120f/p = 120 x 60/6
Solution:
47Tf
wms=--p=
1200 rpm
47T ~ 60
6
= 125.7 rad/sec.
1. From equation (6.21), for regenerative braking
R'
~ = -
sm
YR 2 + (X'
sm =
or
+ X )2
t
- VT+16 = -0.24
From (6.22) for regenerative braking,

T
rnax
= _3_ [
V~
2wms R, - YR~ + (X, + X;)2
= -203.9 N-m
J = 2 x 3125.7 [ 1231
x 231 J
- VT+16
Sec.6.3
223
Braking
(a) The range of active load torque the motor can hold: Oto 203.9 N-m
Speed in rpm at the maximum torque:
N = (1-
x 1200 = 1488 rpm
sm)N, = (1- (-0.24
Therefore the range of speed is 1200 to 1488 rpm.

(b) From equation (6.18)
V~R;/s
T=~[
(R, + ~;) 2 + (X, + x;)2
W ,
(6.18)
For regenerative braking, T = -150 N-m;

thus
_3_.
(231)2(1/s)
125.7 (
1 +-
= -150
1)2
+ 16
s
Let l/s = x; then

(1 + X)2+ 16 = -8.49x
or
X2+ 1O.49x + 17 = O
-10.49 y'(10.49)2 - 4 x 17
or
x=
or
1
s = - = -0.5
2
x
or
-10.49 6.48
= -2
or
-0.118
Since stab1e operation is usually obtained only up to Sm which is -0.24,

value of s is -0.118.
Motor speed N =-(1 - s) N, = 1.118 x 1200 = 1342 rpm
= 27..2 A
231
~(1
+_1_)2
-0.118
+ 16
2. For the motor speed = N rpm

N -N
s=-'-
N,
In the present example, for plugging

N, = -1200 rpm
s
-8.5
N = 1200 rpm
-1200 - 1200
=2
-1200
the feasible
Induction Motors
224
231
1: = =rr=err=e=
\/(1 + 0.5)2
+ (X, + X:)2
2
3 1: R:
T=---=
Wm,
s
3
.
---'(54.1)2'-=34.9
- 125.7
1
2
+ 16
Chap. 6
54.1 A
N-m
In spite of a large eurrent, plugging torque is very low.

Example 6.2
A 2.8 kW, 3-phase, 50 Hz, 4-pole, Y-eonnected wound-rotor induction motor has the
following parameters:
R:
= 2 n,
X:
=3n
Following are the two points on the magnetization charaeteristie with de dynamie brak.
ing eonneetion b of figure 6.8:
E, Volts
Point
1m. Amps
A
B
0.9
80
6.53
266
Point A is from the unsaturated part of the magnetization charaeteristie.
..
1. Calculate de dynamie braking torque, speed, and rotor eurrent for the
foregoing two points for Id = 12 A .
2. For the speed obtained for point B in question 1 calculate the torque,
neglecting saturation. How much is the error in calculation when the
saturation is negleeted?
Solution:
For eonneetion b of figure 6.7 from table 6.1,
1, = I'd/Y2 = 12/Y2 = 8.49 A

417f
Wm,
=-
417
x 50
= 157.1 rad/see.
Synehronous speed in rpm = N, = 1500 rpm.

1. For point A
x, =
80/0.9 = 88.9

1,2 ='
r
12 - 12
(8.49)2 - (0.9)2
2X'
2x3
1 + 88.9
l+_r
Xm
=
or
I:=8.17A
66.8 A
Sec.6.4
225
Speed Control

(1 - s)
R'
Y(E/I;)~ _ X;2
2
Y(80/8.17)2-9
=
Motor speed = (1 - s) N,
T-
= 0.21
0.21
1500 = 315 rpm
_ 3 ,2 R; _ 3 (
wmsIr (1-s) -157.18.17
)2.
2 _
0.21-12.15
N-m
For point B
X
=
m
266
6.53
40 74
.
1;2 = (8.49)2;
~6~53)2= 25.67
1+-40.74
1; = 5.07 A
1- s
Motor speed
.
2
\1(266/5.07)2 - 9
= -
= 0.038
= -- 3
2. Speed
(5 07)2 x -0.038
= 57.3
= 25.8
Wms
N-m .
rpm or 5.97 rad/sec.
If saturation is neglected, X;
T=~
0.038
x 1500 = 57.3 rpm.
157.1'
I~X~(R;/(1 (R;/(l - S2 + (X;
88.9
n (from
point A). From equation (6.34),
s
]
+ X;)2
__ 3_ [(8.49)2
(88.9)2 x (2/0.038)]
- 157.1
(2/0.038)2 + (88.9 + 3)2
_
- 51 N-m
Percent error = 51 - 25.8)/25.8) x 100 = 97.7%

Thus, a very large error is obtained if saturation is. neglected.
6.4 SPEED CONTROL

The present section describes the basic principies of speed control methods employed in power semiconductor controlled induction motor drives. These methods are
1. Variable terminal voltage control.
2. Variable frequency control.
Induction Motors
226
Chap.6
3. Rotor resistance control.

4. Injecting voltage in the rotor circuit.
Methods 1 and 2 are applicable to both squirrel-cage and wound-rotor motors, and
methods 3 and 4 can be used only for wound-rotor motors.:
6.4.1 Variable Terminal Voltage Control
The torque developed by an induction motor is proportional to the square of terminal
voltage [see equations (6.18) and (6.8)]. The torque-speed curves, therefore, retain
their shape but shrink or grow as the square of the terminal voltage. Speed control is
achieved by varying the terminal voltage until the torque required by the load is
developed at the desired speed. Since one cannot allow the terminal voltage to be
more than the rated value, this method allows speed control only below the normal
rated speed.
While the torque for a specific slip is proportional to the square of terminal
voltage, the rotor current is directly proportional to the terminal voltage [equations (6.12) and (6.8)]. Hence the torque to current ratio decreases with the terminal
voltage. Consequently, the torque available for a given thermalloading of the motor
also decreases. Moreover, the breakdown torque decreases in proportion to the
square of terminal voltage. Therefore, low-speed operation without the overheating
of the machine is possible only if the load torque decreases with speed, as in the case
of a fan loado
A set of motor speed-torque curves along with that of a fan load are shown in
figure 6.11. For a wide variation of speed, a motor with a high normal full-load slip
is required. Therefore, either a clsss D squirrel-cage motor with a normal full-load
slip from 0.1 to 0.2 is used or a low slip wound-rotor motor with external rotor resistors is ernployed. The=wound-rotor motor has the advantage that most of the rotor
copper loss takes place outside the motor. Therefore, a smaller motor can be used.
But this does not necessarily ensure a lower cost of the drive because of the higher
cost and maintenance requirements of a wound-rotor motor, and the need for external resistors.
V decreasing
Figure 6.11 Speed control by variation of

rotor resistance.
Sec.6.4
227
Speed Control
If the stator copper los s and the friction, windage,

from equation (6.15) the motor efficiency is given by
11M
and core los se s are ignored,
= Pm = (l - s)
(6.37)
Pg
Equations (6.15) and (6.19) show that

copper los s increases with the increase
very poor at low speeds.
The variable voltage is obtained
of speed control is described in chapter
6.4.2 Variable
Frequency
the developed power decreases but the rotar

in slip. Consequently, the motor efficiency is
by using ac voltage controllers.
7.
This method
Control
The synchronous
speed is directly proportiona1 to the supply frequency [equation (6.1)). Hence, the synchronous speed and the motor speed can be controlled
below and above the normal full-load speed by changing the supply frequency.
The voltage induced in the stator E is proportional to the product of the supply
frequency and the air-gap flux. If the stator drop is neglected, the motor terminal
voltage can be considered proportional to the product of the frequency and the flux.
Any reduction in the supply frequency, without a change in the terminal voltage,
causes an increase in the air-gap flux. Induction motors are designed to operate at
the knee point of the magnetization characteristic to make full use of the magnetic
material. Therefore, the increase in flux will saturate the motor. This will increase
the magnetizing current, distort the line current and voltage, increase the core loss
and the stator copper loss, and produce a high-pitch accoustic noise. While an increase in flux beyond the rated value is undesirable from the consideration of saturation effects, a decrease in flux is also avoided to retain the torque capability of the
motor. Therefore, the variable frequency control below the rated frquency is generally carried out by reducing the machine phase voltage V along with the frequency f
in such a manner that the flux is maintained constant. Above the rated frequency, the
motor is operated at a constant voltage because of the limitation imposed by the
stator insulation or by supply voltage limitations.
Let us define a variable "a" as
a = f/fraled
where f is the operating frequency and fraledis the rated frequency
variable "a" is called the per-unit frequency.
(6.38)
of the motor. The
Operation Below the Rated Frequency (a < 1)

As just stated, it is generally preferred to operate the motor at a constant flux. The
motor will operate at a constant flux if 1m is maintained constant at all operating
points. According to figure 6.1b, at the rated condition of motor operation
1
m
Eraled= Eraled . _1_

fraled 27TLm
x,
(6.39)
Induction Motors
228
Chap. 6
where Lm is the magnetizing inductance. When the motor is operated at a frequency

f, then
E
E
1 =-=-_._-
aXm
a' frated 27TLm
(6.40)
Comparison of equation (6.40) with equation (6.39) shows that 1mwill stay constant
at a value equal to its rated value if
E
(6.41)
= aErated
Equation (6.41) suggests that the flux will remain constant if the back ernf changes
in the same ratio as the frequency - in other words, when (E/ f) ratio is maintained
constant.
We next examine the motor operation for a constant (E/f) ratio. At a frequency
f, frorn the equivalent circuit of figure 6.1b,
l'r
aErated
Erated
-y"'F.:(R==;;=;/:::::S)==2
=+:::::;(=aX==;::;::::)2= -=-yr.:R:=;;=2
/:;=(a=s)~2=+=:=:X~;2
(6.42)
where
(6.43)
Note that
Wms
is the synchronous speed at the rated frequency.

T = _3_I,2R,/s
r
r
awms
3 [ E~tedR;/(as) ]
R;2/(is)2
+ X:2
= Wms
(6.44)
Now for a given frequency, E is maintained constant. The power transferred across
the air-gap will be maximum at a slip Smfor which
(6.45)
Substituting in equation (6.44) gives
T
max
+ _3_
-
2wms
E~ted
X;
(6.46)
Equation (6.46) shows that for a variable frequency control at a constant flux, the
breakdown torque remains constant for a11frequencies, both during motoring and regenerative braking. Further, the examination of equations (6.42) and (6.44) shows
that for a constant (sa), the rotor current 1; and torque T are constant. If E is taken
as a reference vector, then the phase lag of 1; is given by
er = tan-I(as
e
X;/R;)
(6.47)
Since r is also constant for a given (sa), the stator current will also be constant.
Thus the motor operates at constant values of torque, Is and 1; when the flux and (as}
Sec.6.4
229
Speed Control
are maintained constant. Let us now examine the physical significance of sa. From
eqhation (6.43)
sa=
aWms- Wm
Wsf
=Wms
Wms
(6.48)
where
(6.49)
Note that Wsf is the slip speed, which is the difference in the field speed at the
frequency f (or synchronous speed awms) and the rotor speed Wm. According to
equation (6.48), a constant value of (as) implies the motor operation at a constant
slip speed Wsf' Note that Wsf is the drop in motor speed from its no-load speed
(awms)' when the machine is loaded.
The foregoing discussion shows that for any value of T, the drop in the motor
speed from its no-load speed (awms)is the same for all frequencies. Hence the machine speed-torque characteristics for O < s < Smare parallel curves. The nature of
speed-torque curves for the variable frequency operation at a constant flux are shown
in figure 6.12a, both for the motoring and braking operations.
Die operation of the machine at a constant slip speed also implies the operation
at a constant rotor frequency as shown by equation (6.50):
s f
fr
Wr
sa=--=--=-frated frated Wrated
where
(6.50)
Wr and f, are the rotor frequency in rad/sec, and Hz, respectively.

For s < Smax'(R;/s) ~ (aX;); hence from equation (6.44) and equation (6.48)
T=
o
Braking
3E2
raRte~
(as) = constant
Wms r
T
Motoring
(a) Operation at constant

flux
Figure 6. U
(6.51)
X Wsf
Braking
T
Motoring
(b) Operation at a constant

(V /1) ratio
Speed-torque curves with variable frequency control.
Induction Motors
230
Chap. 6
Equation (6.51) suggests that for s < Sm' the speed-torque curves are nearly straight
lines. Since they are also parallel, the speed-torque characteristics are approximately
parallel straight lines for s < Sm' when flux is maintained constant.
The operation of the machine at a constant flux requires a closed-loop control
of flux. When the operating point changes, the closed-loop control adjusts the motor
voltage to maintain a constant flux. The closed-loop control becomes complicated
because the measurement of flux is always difficult. Hence the flux is controlled indirectly by operating the machine at a constant (V/O ratio for most of the frequency
range, except at low frequencies, where the (V/O ratio is increased to compensate
for the stator resistance drop as explained next.
The (V/O ratio is chosen equal to its value at the rated voltage and frequency.
As the load on the machine is increased, the stator resistance drop increases and the
back ernf decreases and the flux reduces. Consequently, the machine does not operate exactly at a constant flux. We will now examine the motor operation when the
(V /f) ratio is held constant.
For simplicity, the equivalent circuit of figure 6.1d is used here. Note that E is
still defined in the same way as in figure 6.1b. E, and not 1m, will be taken as a measure of flux. From the equivalent circuit, at rated motor terminal voltage (Vrated)and
frequency (Wrated)
(6.52)
and
T.
= _3_
max 2wms
V rated
2
R, YR?
+ (X, + X;)2
(6.53)
For a frequency f defined by equation (6.38), the synchronous speed, the terminal
voltage, and any reactance X will have the values awms' a Vrated' and aX, respectively. Substituting these values in equations (6.52) and (6.53) yields
T
= .i.[
ms. (Rs
a
V~tedR;/(as)
+ R;)2 + (X + X')2
sa
(6.54)
a<l
'
3 [
V~ated .
max- 2wms (Rs/ a) Y (RsI a)2 + (X,
+ X;)2 ,
a<1
(6.55)
When f is large, (Rsla) ~ (X, + X;), giving a constant value of Tmax, both for
motoring and regenerative
braking. However, for low values of f, the maximum
torque capability is altered. It decreases for motoring and increases for braking.
What is true for the maximum torque is also true for the rated torque. This behavior
can also be explained from consideration of flux.
When the motor operates at a frequency f with a constant (V/O control, the
terminal voltage and all reactances are reduced by a factor a, but the stator resistance
Sec.6.4
Speed Control
231
remains fixed. The resistance drop, which is negligible for high values of f, becomes
appreciable in comparison with the terminal voltage at low values of f. As a result,
the (E/O ratio decreases, decreasing flux and the motor torque capability. The lower
the frequency, the greater the reduction in the torque capability.
When working in the regenerative braking mode, the rotor current direction
is opposite to that in motoring. Hence, the stator resistance drop has an opposite
effect-that
is, the flux and braking torque have higher values at low frequencies.
The nature of the speed-torque characteristics for constant (V/f) control and
for f < fratedare shown in figure 6.12b. The decrease in motoring torque and increase
in braking torque at low frequencies have higher values for motors of low power
rating.
To rnake full use of the motor's torque capability at the start and for low
speeds, the (V/f) ratio is increased to compensate for the stator resistance drop at
low frequencies, as shown in figure 6.14. This allows a constant maximum torque to
be obtained for motoring operation at all frequencies.
The motoring speed-torque characteristics become similar to those shown in
figure 6.12a. The braking torque which is already high at low frequencies is increased further. The large increase in braking torque may cause severe mechanical
stress on the motor and the loado
Por a given frequency, the exact compensation for the stator resistance drop
can be done only for a particular operating point. This point is chosen either at the
rated torque or the breakdown torque. Then for lower torques, the motor saturates
due to a large flux, particularly at low frequencies. It may be saturated to such an
extent that the no-load current may be greater than rated current. With the reduced
cooling at low speeds, this may lead to overheating.
To obtain a linear relation between V and f, V may also be varied as V =
Vo + K f, where Vo is chosen to produce the nominal flux at zero speed and the
constant K is chosen to get the rated terminal voltage at the rated frequency.
To get a high torque to current ratio, and a high efficiency and power factor,
the motor is operated for s < Sm - that is, on the portion of speed-torque curves with
a negative slope. Therefore, in figures 6.12a and b, only the portions with negative
slope are shown. However, a complete characteristic is shown for the rated frequency to provide a comparison between the starting and low-speed torques available with variable frequency control and constant frequency operation. There is a
large increase in the starting and low-speed torques with variable frequency control.
The corresponding currents are also reduced by a large amount. Thus the starting
and low-speed performance of a variable frequency drive is far superior compared to
that with the fixed frequency operation.
Operation
above the Rated Frequency (a> 1)
The operation at a frequency higher than the rated frequency takes place at a constant terminal voltage Vratedor at the maximum voltage available from the variable
frequency source if it is less than Vrated-Since the terminal voltage is maintained constant, the flux decreases in the inverse ratio of per-unit frequency a. The motor,
therefore, operates in the field weakening mode.
232
Chap.6
Induction Motors
The torque expressions for the operation in this frequency range are obtained
by the substitution of awms for Wms and a(Xs + X;) for (X, + X;) in equations (6.52)
and (6.53), giving
T
=~
Wms
V~tedR;/(as)
(R,
].
a> 1
+ R;/S)2 + a2(Xs + X;)2 '
=_3_
[
V~ted
]
max 2wmsa R, YR? + a2(Xs + X;F '
(6.56)
a> 1
(6.57)
Since a> 1, the breakdown torque decreases with the increase in frequency and
speed. The speed-torque curves for operation for field weakening mode of operation
are shown in figure 6.13. Here also the motor is made to operate for s < Smto get
high torque per ampere, high efficiency, and a good power factor.
Torque and Power Capabilities
The torque and power variations for a given stator current and for frequencies below
and above the rated frequency are shown by dots in figure 6.13. When the stator current has the maximum permissible value, these will represent the maximum torque
and power capabilities of the machine. The variations of various variables, such as
developed torque and power (Pm), slip speed Wsi, and terminal voltage V with perunit frequency a, for the motor operation at a given stator current are shown in
fig. 6.14. When the stator current has the maximum permissible value, these curves
will give the maximurn torque and power capabilities of the machine. These variations can be explained as follows.
Increasing f
Constant
-'"t----+---~;:::-
power locus
f rated
r------t
I
-Tmex
Figure 6.13
-t
Constant
-+f--_I-_-=..-r---
torque
locus
Speed-torque curves for variable frequency control of induction motor.
Sec.6.4
233
Speed Control
v
I
Pm
.
-------~
T
1------"""7~~
1"
P
m
-----
o
1_
1.0
Constant
torque
region
Figure 6.14
2.0
_1_
-----
V, T, Pm, 1, and
Wst
Constant
power
~
region
_1
versus per unit frequency, 'a', plots.
It is shown in the previous section that when the motor operates at a constant
flux and a given stator current, the developed torque and slip speed have constant
values at all frequencies. Thus for a < 1, the variable frequency control with a constant flux gives constant torque operation. When constant (V/O control is used and
the (V/O ratio is increased at low frequencies to compensate for the stator resistance
drop, at the maximum permissible current the drive operates essentially at a constant
flux, providing constant torque operation.
For a> 1,
1; = _--;=;===:::;:V=ra~t=ed======
RI)2
R +_r
s
(6.58)
+ a (X s + X'?
r
2
Since the slip is small,
or
Thus, at a given 1; and hence at a given L, the slip speed Wsf increases linearly with a.
Since the slip is small, 1; is in phase with E. If the rotor resistance loss is neglected, the developed power P m is given by
Pm
If the stator drop is neglected, E
= 3EI;.
Vratedand
Pm = 3Vrat~dI;
Consequently, Pm is constant for a given 1;, and therefore for a given Is' Thus, for
a> 1, the variable frequency control at a constant voltage gives constant power opera-
Induction Motors
234
Chap. 6
ton. When operating at the maximum permissible current, the motor develops a
constant maximum power as shown in figures 6.13 and 6.14. The maximum torque
decreases inversely with speed. At a critical speed wmc (fig. 6.13) the breakdown
torque is reached. Any attempt to operate the motor at the maximum current beyond
this speed will stall the motor. This is also the limit of the constant power operation.
The value of Wmc depends on the breakdown torque of the machine. The range of
constant power operation is higher for a motor with higher breakdown torque.
The speed and frequency at the transition from constant torque to constant
power operation are called base speed and base frequency, respectively. They wiU
usually be equal to Wms and frated, respectively, but this will not always be so.
There are some applications, like traction, where speed control in a wide range
is required and the torque demand in the high-speed range is low. For such applications, control beyond the constant power range is required. To prevent the torque
from exceeding breakdown torque, the machine is operated at a constant slip speed
and the machine current and power are allowed to decrease as shown in figure 6.14.
Now, the motor current reduces inversely with speed; and the torque decreases inversely as the speed squared. This characteristic is often referred to as the series motor characteristic. The torque produced in this region is somewhat higher than that
produced by a de series motor.
Control and Advantages
To get the advantages of a high torque to current ratio, high efficiency, and a good
power factor, the motor is always operated on the portion of the speed-torque curves
with a negative slope, by limiting either the slip speed or the current.
Let us consider the operation of the drive for a change in speed command.
When motoring, a decrease in the speed command decreases the supply frequency.
Thrs shifts the operation to regenerative braking (fig. 6.13). The drive decelerates
under the influence of braking torque and load torque, For speeds below Wms' the
voltage and frequency are reduced with speed to maintain the desired (V/O ratio or
constant flux, and to keep the operation on the portion of the speed-torque curves
with a negative slope by limiting the slip speed. For speeds above Wms, the frequency
alone is reduced with speed to maintain the operation on the portion of speed torque
curves with a negative slope. When close to the desired speed, the operation shifts to
the motoring operation and the drive settles at the desired speed. When regenerative
braking is not possible due to the inability of the source to accept the energy, the
motor torque can be made zero, at most. Then the deceleration occurs mainly due to
the load torque.
When motoring, an increase in the speed cornmand increases the supply frequency, The motor torque exceeds the load torque and the drive accelerates. Again
the operation is maintained on the portion of the speed-torque curves with a negative
slope by limiting the slip speed. The drive finally settles at the desired speed.
Usually a class B squirrel-cage motor is used. Some energy efficient applications may also employ the class A designo It may be recalled that these designs have
low full-load slips, which result in high running efficiency and good speed regulation. Even with these designs, variable frequency control gives large torques with reduced currents for the complete range of speeds. Thus, variable frequency control
Sec.6.4
235
Speed Control
allows simultaneous realization of good running and transient performance from a

squirrel-cage motor which is cheap, rugged, reliable, longer lasting, and maintenance free. Since regenerative braking is also possible down to zero speed, the variable frequency control pro vides a highly efficient variable speed drive with excellent
running and transient performance.
The variable frequency control of induction motors is obtained by using either
inverters or cycloconverters. These methods are described in chapter 8.
Example 6.3
A 3-phase, Y-connected, 60 Hz, 4-pole induction motor has the following parameters
for the equivaIent circuit of figure 6.1d:
R, = R: = 0.024
and
X, = X: = 0.12
The motor is controlled by the variable frequency control with a constant (V If) ratio.
For an operating frequency of 12 Hz, calculate
1. The breakdown torque as a ratio of its value at the rated frequency for both
motoring and braking.
2. The starting torque and rotor current in terms of their values at the rated
frequency.
Solution:
From equation (6.38), a = 12/60 = 0.2
1. From equation (6.55), the ratio of breakdown torques for a

Tm:u(a= 0.2)
Tm:u(a= 1)
0.024 "\1(0.024)2
0.024
0.2
(0.024)2
0.2.
0.2 and a
1 is
+ (0.24)2
+ (0.24)2
For motoring,
Tm:u(a= 0.2) = 0.68

Tm:u(a= 1)
For braking,
-:T
m::=:u:::...:(-;-a
_=_0-..
2~)= 1.46
Tm:u(a= 1)
2. Substitution of s = 1 in equation (6.54) gives an expression for the starting

torque r; Thus
(E6.1)
From equation (E6.1), the ratio of starting torques for a = 0.2 and a = 1 is
0.024/0.2
Ts(a = 0.2) = (0.048/0.2)2 + (0.24)2 = 2 6

Ts(a = 1)
0.024
.
(0.048)2 + (0.24)2
236
Induction Motors
Chap. 6
The starting rotar current is given by

I~ =
-r==;;==~=====
(E6.2)
The ratio of starting currents for a = 0.2 and 1 is

I~(a = 0.2)
I~(a = 1)
\1(0.048)2 + (0.24)2 = 0.72
0.048)2 + (0.24)2
0.2
The preceding ratios of starting torques and starting rotor currents show that the Constant (V/O control provides a high starting torque with a reduced motor current.
Example 6.4
If the rated slip of the induction motor of problem 6.3 is 0.04, calculate the motor
speed for rated torque and f = 30 Hz. The motor is controlled with a constant (V /f)
ratio.
Solution:
a = 30/60 = 0.5
From equation (6.52) for rated torque and f = 60,
T
rared
=~
[
ms
V;a,ed(0.024/0.04)
= 3V;aled 34
O 02 2
( 1.
)
ms
0.024 + ~.044 + (0.24)2
w
(a)
and for 30.Hz from equation (6.54),
o.s-;
2 (0.024)
V,aled
_ 3
]
(b)
T,aled-
Wms
[ 0.024 + 0.024)2 + (0.24)2

0.5
0.5 s
Equating equations (a) and (b) gives

0.024
0.5 s
0.024 + 0.024
0.5
0.5 s
or
26.04 s2-0.98
or
s=
= 1.34
+ (O 24)2
.
s+ 1=0
14.62 V(l4.62)2 - 4 x 26.04

2 x 26.04
= 0.089
or
0.43
The slip on the stable part of the speed torque curve will be 0.089.
Now synchronous speed for 30 Hz = 900 rpm.
Therefore, the motor speed = 900(1 - 0.089) = 820 rpm.
Sec.6.4
237
Speed Control
Example 6.5
A 400 Y, 50 Hz, 6-pole, 960 rpm, Y-connected induction motor has the following
parameters per phase referred to the stator:
R, =0.4
n,
R; = 0.20
n,
X,
X; = 1.5
n,
The motor is controlled by variable frequency control at a constant flux of rated

value.
1. Calculate the motor speed and the stator current at half the rated torque and
25 Hz.
2. Solve for part 1 assuming the speed-torque curves to be straight lines for
s <sm'
3. Calculate the frequency, the stator current, and voltage at the rated braking
torque and 800 rpm.
Use the equivalent circuit of figure 6.1b.
Solution: From the rated conditions of operation,
Synchronous speed N, = 120f/p = 120 x 50/6 = 1000 rpm
Wm,
1000 x
60
21T
= 104.7 rad/sec.
s = 1000 - 960 = O 04
1000
.
Rotor impedance Z; = R; + jX; = 5 + j 1.5
s
= 5.22/16.7
Stator impedance Z, = 0.4 + j 1.5 ="1.55/75
n
n
.
dance Z in = Z ,+ ---','---"'Z;Zm
M ac hime impe
z, +z,
= 4.82 + j3.63 = 6/37
1, = 400~v'3 = 38.5 A
ZmZ; I 1, = 31.89
30 x 38.5 = 36.22 A
Ir, = I Zm+
E=
I;IZ;I =
36.22 x 5.22 = 189 Y
3
Rated torque =-1;2R;/s
Wm,
3
=-104.7
0.2
(36.22)2 ._=
0.04
1. At 25 Hz, a = 25/50 = 0.5

Substituting the known values in equation (6.44) gives
188
2=
3
(189)2 x 0.2/(0.5 s)
104.7' (0.2)2/(0.5 S)2+ 1.52
188 N-m.
Induction Motors
238
Chap. 6
which gives s = 0.0374

From equation (6.43), Wm = awm,(l -- s)
or
= aN,(1
- s)
= 0.5
=
x 1000(1 - 0.0374)
481.3 rpm
At 25 Hz, E = 0.5 x 189 = 94.5 V
Z'
R; + jaX'
S
=~
0.0374
+ jO.75
5.4ft:.. n
Taking E as a reference vector
r: =~=
94.5
5.4/-8
Z;
17.5/-8
- - E _
94.5
_ 6 30/ -90
1m- JaX
-. - - J.'0 5 X 30 - .
m
1, = 1;
+ 1m= 17.5/ -8 + 6.30/ -90

0
Hence 1, = 19.85 A.
2. Slip speed in rpm at the rated torque and frequency

N,e
sN,
0.04
1000 = 40 rpm
Since the speed torque curve is a straight line, slip speed at half the rated torque
N,e2 = 0.5 X 40 = 20 rpm. At 25 Hz, N, = 25/50 x 1000 = 500 rpm. Since the slip
speed remains constant for a given torque,
Motor speed N
= N, -
N ,12
= 500 -
20
= 480
rpm
For a constant flux, the (E/f) ratio must be constant.

Hence, at 25 Hz, E = 0.5 x 189 = 94.5 V
.
s
N,e2 = ~
N, . 500
Z; = R; + jaX;
s
0.04
5
+ jO.75 = 5.06/8S n
Taking E as a reference vector

-, _ E _" 94.~
Ir - Z' - 506/0
r
_
cc -
/_0
eO
18.7~
.~
1 - E _ 94.5 _
/
m- "aX -Ts- 6.30~
J m
J
1, = 1; + I,= 18.7/ -8S
_()(\o
+ 6.30/ -90
Hence 1, = 20.6 A.
3. At the rated braking torque, the slip speed will be the negative of the slip
speed at rated motoring torque.
Sec.6.4
239
Speed Control
Hence slip speed = N,o = -40 rpm

Synchronous speed = N + N,f3 = 800 - 40
Frequency = (760/1000) x 50 = 38 Hz
= 38/50 = 0.76
Hz, E = (38/50) x
= 760
rpm
a
At 38
189 = 143.64 V, s = -40/760
-0.0526
z; = R; + jaX; = -3.8 + j1.l4 = 3.97/163.3 n

s
Taking E as a reference vector,
I:=! =
r
1m remains
or
z;
143.64
3.97/-163.3
= 36.2/-163.3
the same as the foregoing.
1, = 36.2/-163.3 + 6.30/-90
= -34.62 - j16.88 = 38.52/-154
V = E + Z,l, = 143.64 + (0.4 + jO.76 x
V = 156/-17.3 V
Note that the phase angle between

the motor to the source.
6.4.3
1.5) x 38.52/-154
V and 1, is more than 90. Hence, power flows from
Rotor Resistance Control
The speed-torque and speed-rotor current characteristics of a wound-rotor induction motor with rotor resistance control are shown in figure 6.5 and explained in
section 6.1.4. For a -given load torque , the motor speed is reduced as the rotor resistance is increased. The no-load speed, however, remains unaffected by the variation
of the rotor resistance.
Equations (6.19) and (6.37) are also applicable to the rotor resistance control.
These equations show that the motor efficiency drops and the rotor copper loss increases with the decrease in speed. Thus, rotor resistance control is an inefficient
method of speed control like terminal voltage control. It has, however, a number of
advantages over terminal voltage control. It provides a constant torque operation
with a high torque to current ratio. Though the rotor copper loss increases with the
decrease in speed, most of it is dissipated in the external resistors. For a fixed
torque, the copper loss inside the motor in fact remains constant. Because of this, a
motor of smaller size can be employed.
The rotor resistance control is implemented by a diode bridge and a chopper. It
is described in chapter 9.
6.4.4
Injection
of Voltage
in the Rotor Circuit
Figure 6.15a shows the eguivalent circuit of a wound-rotor induction motor with an
injected voltage of Vi..!!!.r volts per phase. Consider the ideal no-Ioad operation for
Induction Motors
240
R.
---
Chap.6
X.
l.
Xm
V,!!.J.
I
(a)
R.
r,
r,
x;
X.
Xm
I
(b)
Figure
6.15
Induction
motor equivalent
circuits with rotor-injected
voltage.
which Ir must be zero. In the absence of the injected voltage, Ir is zero when the motor speed is equal to the synchronous speed. When Vr is in phase with E, Ir is zero
when sE/aTl = Vr
or.
(6.59a)
The no-load speed is
Wmo
(1 - aT~V)wm~
(6.59b)
According to equation (6.59b), the no-load speed can be changed from synchronous to standstill by varying Vr from O to (E/aTl)". Further, if Vr is reversed, s will
be negative and the motor no-load speed will be higher than the synchronous speed. The
relative speed between the stator field and the rotor will now be the opposite of that for
speeds less than the synchronous speed. Hence, the phase sequence and direction of the
rotor induced voltages will also be opposite. Thus, for operation above synchronous
speed, both the polarity and the phase sequence of the injected voltage will have to be
changed. Further, as the speed changes, the frequency of the rotor induced voltage
changes. For the injected voltage to balance the induced voltage, the frequency of the
injected voltage must track the frequency of the induced voltage.
Let us now consider the operation with a fixed Vr of positive polarity and phase
sequence. The no-load speed of the motor will be less than the synchronous speed.
An application of a positive load torque will reduce the motor speed from its no-load
Sec.6.4
241
Speed Control
speed, causing the slip and the rotor induced emf to increase. A positive rotor current will flow and motoring torque will be produced. As the load torque is increased,
the motor speed falls to compensate for the increase in the machine impedance drop
due to the increase in the rotor current. The higher the load torque, the greater the
drop in speed from the no-load speed. This is the motor's subsynchronous motoring
mode of operation. Let P, denote the power absorbed by the source Yr. In this mode
of operation, both P, and Pm are positive. Also Yr has a positive polarity and positive
phase sequence (figure 6.16a).
Let the load torque be removed. This will restore the operation to the no-load
speed. Now let a negative load torque be applied. A negative load torque will increase the motor speed. Consequently, the rotor induced ernf will decrease (because
the motor is running at a speed less than the snychronous speed) and a negative rotor
current will flow. Because of the negative rotor current, the machine will develop a
negative torque and operate under regenerative braking. The motor will run at a
speed higher than the no-Ioad speed but less than the synchronous speed. The higher
the magnitude of the negative load torque, the greater will the increase be in speed
from the no-Ioad speed. In this mode of operation, known as subsynchronous regenerative braking, both P, and P m are negative and Yo which acted as a sink of power
for subsynchronous motoring, acts as a source of power now (figure 6.16b).
Let us now consider the operation of the drive when the polarity and phase sequence of Yr are reversed. The no-Ioad speed is obtained from equation (6.59b). It
will be higher than the synchronous speed. The induced voltage will have negative
polarity and negative phase sequence. Let a positive load torque be applied. The rno-
sE
Vr
11
I
I
I
(b) Subsynehronous
regenerative braking
motoring
<w
sE
Vr
sE
Vr
I[
t
(e) Supersynehronous
motoring
Vr
I
I
(a) Subsynchronous
(Wm
me)
Ir
aT,
(d) Supersynehronous
regenerative brak ing
(Wm
me)
>w
Figure 6.16 Polarities of rotor variables for different modes of drive operation for a
constant magnitude of V, and variable load torque.
Induction Motors
242
Chap. 6
tor will slow down. The induced voltage magnitude will decrease and a positive rotor current will flow, producing motoring torque. The motor will run at a speed less
than the no-load speed but greater than the synchronous speed. The speed will fal]
with an increase in the load torque. This mode of operation is known as supersynchronous motoring. Here P m is positive and P, is negative. The voltage Vr has negative polarity and negative phase sequence (figure 6. 16c).
Let the load torque be removed. This will restore the operation to the no-load
speed which is higher than the synchronous speed. Now let a negative load torque be
applied. This will increase the motor speed and the induced voltage magnitude will
increase. A negative rotor current will flow, producing a negative torque and regen.
erative braking. The higher the load torque, the greater will the increase be of motor
speed beyond the no-load speed. In this mode of operation, known as supersyn.
chronous regenerative braking, P m is negative and P, is positive. The voltage Vr has
negative polarity and negative phase sequence (figure 6.16d). V" which acted as a
source of power for supersynchronous motoring now acts as a sink of power.
Table 6.2 summarizes the polarity and phase sequence of the injected voltage
Vr for the drive's four modes of operation. It also gives the signs of the power terms
ProP m' and Pg (air-gap power) when the rotor copper loss Pcr is neglected. The speedtorque curves for three values of Vr are shown later in figure 6.18.
For a air-gap power Pg,
(6.16)
Pm
W m = ~.
.
Wms
(1 - s)w ~
(1 - s)P g
(6.15)
Hence, the rotor circuit electrical power

P,
Pg - Pm = Pg - (1 - s)Pg'= sPg
(6.60)
The rotor electrical power is the sum of the power absorbed by Vr(= Pr) and the rotor
copper loss Pcr'
Thus,
(6.61)
The power flow diagram of the drive is shown in figure 6.17. Out of the total
power input Pin, a portion is lost as the stator copper loss. The remainingpower is
the air-gap power Pg. A portion of the air-gap power equal to (1 - s) Pg is converted
into mechanical power. The remaining portion sPg, known as slip power, is used to
Table 6.2
Operation
l.
2.
3.
4.
Subsynchronous motoring
Subsynchronous braking
Supersynchonous
motoring
Supersynchronous
braking
Phase
Sequence
Positive
Positive
Negative
Negative
Positive
Terrns
v; Pg,
v,
Pg, Pm
sPg, P,
Pm, sPg, P,
Negative
Terrns
None
Pg, Pm, sPg, P,
sPg, P,
v;
V" Pm, Pg
Seco 6.4
Speed Control
Power
input
Pe.
Stator
copper
243
Developed
mechanical
power
Power
crossing
the
air-qap
P,
1055
Electrical
power
absorbed
byV,~
Rotor
copper
1055
Figure 6.17
Power flow diagram for an induction motor with a rotor injected voltage.
supply rotor copper loss Pcr and the power absorbed by the auxiliary source Vr
(= Pr). The power flow diagram of figure 6.17 is applicable to all the four modes
of operation when the appropriate signs are assigned to the power terms. From figure 6.17,
(6.62)
or
or
(6.63)
Let us now examine the drive operation at a constant value of torque for the
four modes of operation when Vr is varied. For a constant magnitude of torque , the
air-gap power Pg (~ Twms) has a fixed value.
l. Subsynchronous Motoring (1 >s >0):
When operating at a fixed value of torque T, P, will be zero when Vr = O. The motor
speed for Vr = O, Wmc is obtained by the substitution of P, = O in equation (6.63).
Thus
(6.64a)
Substituting from this equation into equation (6.63) yields
Wm
= Wmc
Pr
-
(6.64b)
An increase in Vr from its zero value will give positive P, and according to
equation (6.64b) the speed will reduce below Wmc' Since Pg is constant and P, has
increased, according to equation (6.62), Pm will reduce. Thus, in subsynchronous
motoring the speed control is obtained essentially by diverting a portion of the air-
244
Induction Motors
Chap. 6
gap power away from the rotor with the help of an auxiliary source. To have good
efficiency, the diverted power must be usefully employed. Hence, the drives which
work on this principie either feed this power back to the source or convert it into
mechanical power to supplement the mechanical power produced by the motor.
The subsynchronous motoring operation is also available for the speed range
wmc:5 wm:5 Wms' For this speed range, according to equation (6.64b), P, must be
negative - that is, Vr must supply power. The polarity of Vr should be opposite to
that shown in figure 6.16a. From equation (6.63) at synchronous speed P, = - Pcr
and according to equation (6.15), all the air-gap power is converted into mechanical
power. The source Vr provides the rotor with the de current required to produce
given torque. AII the energy supplied by Vr is dissipated as rotor copper loss. For
Wm < Wms but greater than Wmc'
the rotor copper loss is supplied partly by Vr and
partly by Pg.
2. Supersynchronous Motoring (s <O):
Since for all operating points, Wm > Wmc (because for a positi ve T, Wms > Wmc from
equation (6.64a)), equation (6.64b) shows that P, is negative throughout. In addition
to the air-gap power (= Twms), an additional power [T(co., -wms)] is converted into
mechanical power, The additional power and the rotor copper los s are supplied by
the source Vr (figure 6. 16c). An increase in the magnitude of Vr increases P m and the
motor speed for a given torque.
3. Subsynchronous Braking (1 >s >0):
For the braking operation, torque T, braking power Pm, and air-gap power Pg are
negative. However, the magnitude of the air-gap power for a given torque is still
constant. Therefore, the power supplied by the rotor to the stator is al SO constant.
According to equation (6.64a), the speed Wmc for which P, = O is greater than synchrnnous speed because T is negative. From equation (6.64b) for a speed less than
synchronous speed, P, is negative. By increasing Vr the magnitude ofP, is increased
(figure 6.16b). Since the magnitude of Pg is constant, the magnitude of Pm is decreased (equation 6.62). Consequently, the motor speed for a given torque is
reduced. At the synchronous speed, Vr supplies rotor copper loss and provides a negative dc current to produce the given braking torque (because E = O in figure 6. 16b).
4. Supersynchronous Braking (s <O):
Again here the air-gap power is negative and constant. T and Pm are also negative.
The speed Wmc is greater than synchronous speed (equation (6.64a)). For Wm > Wmc,
P, is positive from equation (6.64b). From figure 6.16d Vr is negative. If the magnitude of Vr is increased to increase P from equation (6.62) the magnitude of Pm must
increase, because the magnitude of Pg is constant. Consequently, motor speed increases. For Wmc > Wm > Wms' Vr will be positive. The rotor copper loss is supplied
partly by Vr and partly by P m (figure 6. 16d). At Wm = Wms' the rotor copper loss is
entirely supplied by Vr.
p
In the foregoing discussion, Vr was considered in phase or in phase opposition

to E. A more general case is when both the magnitude and phase of the injected
voltage are controlled. Let the injected voltage be vrl..:1!.p where 1Jr is the phase angle
between Vr and the motor terminal phase voltage V. Referring the rotor quantities to
Sec.6.4
Speed Control
245
the stator turns and frequency gives the equivalent circuit shown in figure 6.15b.
Note that Xm has been shifted to simplify the calculations.
From the equivalent circuit,
V& -
(V;/s)&
(6.65)
1; = (R, + R;/s) + j(Xs + X;)
Equation (6.65) indicates that by controlling <Pro the motor power factor can be controlled. From equation (6.61)
P =Pr+Pcr=3[II2RI/S+
g
s
rr
where
e;
V;I'
sr
is the phase angle between V; and

T=~
Wms
cos
el]r
(6.66)
;.
= _3_ [112
1+ V'I'
cos e']r
r Rr
r r
(6.67)
SWms
AIso from equations (6.60) and (6.66),

P, = sPg = 3[1;2R; + V;I; cos
e;]
(6.68)
Speed torque curves of a 10 kW induction motor for V; equal to 0.5 V& and O
are shown in figure 6.18. Supersynchronous braking torque is very small, except for
small values of Isl and Ivrl. Note that the curve for V; = O is nothing but the locus of
Wmc for different values of T.
By making the injected voltage track the rotor induced voltage frequency and
phase sequence, it has been ensured that for all speeds, the rotor mmf wave remains
"''""
~...
E:l.
2.0
Supersynchronous
braking
Supersynchronous
motoring
'"
E
~2
v; = -0.5
1.0
v; = 0.5 V LQo
v;=o
Subsynchronous
braking
-3.0
-2.0
Subsynchronous
motoring
-1.0
1.0
2.0
Per-unit torque
Figure 6.18
V~
Speed control by injection of voltage in rotor.
3.0
Induction
246
Motors
Chap. 6
stationary with respect to the air-gap flux wave. Hence, a steady torque is producect
at all speeds. Thus, the main feature of the induction motor-that
is, the ability to
produce steady torque for all speeds-has
been retained in this operation. This operation can be considered a true induction mode of operation to distinguish it from
the synchronous mode of operation described next.
If the frequency of the injected voltage is made independent of the stator frequency, then the motor operates at a fixed speed for which the stator and rotor fields
are stationary with respect to each other. For example, for an injected voltage frequency of 30 Hz, a 60 Hz induction motor will run either at 0.5 Wms or 1.5 Wms depending on whether the injected voltage has the same or opposite phase sequence
compared to the stator supply. For any other speed, the motor will behave like a synchronous motor under pull-out. Hence, the operation of the induction motor with an
independent control of the frequency of the injected voltage can be considered a synchronous mode of operation.
The true induction mode is always preferred because it does not suffer from the
instability problems associated with the synchronous mode.
The implementation of speed control of the induction motor by voltage injection is considered in chapter 9.
Example 6.6
A 3-phase, 400 V, 50 Hz, 6-pole, 10 kW, 960 rpm, star-connected wound-rotor induction motor has the following parameters:
R,
0.4
n,
R; = 0.6 n,
X,= X; = 2 n
Stator to rotor turns ratio is 2.5.

The speed at full-load torque is reduced to 600 rpm by injecting a voltage into the slip
rings. Calculate the magnitude and frequency of the injected voltage. Assume the injected voltage is in phase with V.
Solution:
Synchronous speed in rpm:
N = 120f = 120 x 50 = 1000 rpm

'p
60'
Hence, Wm, = 104.7 rad/sec.
Full-load slip = (1000 - 960)/1000
Full-load torque [equation (6.52)],
T rated =
= 0.04
(400/V3)2 (0.6)
3
0.04
104.7' (
)2
= 90.55 N-m
+ (4)2
O 4 + 0.6
.
0.04
At 600 rpm, s = (1000 - 600)/1000 = 0.4

Since the speed is to be reduced, V, must be positive. From the equivalent circuit of
figure 6.15b
1'=
'~
V-V;/s
R' 2
(R 's+....-!.) + (X 1,+ X ')2
400/v'3
~ (0.4
- V;/O.4
~:~y+
16
Sec.6.5
Operation with a Current Source
I: = 4oo/v'3 - V:/O.4 / -6
4.43
4.6
247

T = _3_[I'2R'
SW
r
+ V'I'r r cos(64 .6)]
ms
3
= 0.4
[(4oo/v'3
- V:/0.4)2
4.43
x 104.7
x 0.6 + V: (4oo/v'3 - V:/O.4) x 0.428J

4.43
2
= 0.0716( -0.052V:
- 12.87V:
+ 1680.5)
Since a torque equal to full-load torque is required,

0.0716( -0.052V:2 - 12.87V: + 1630.5) = 90.55
or
V;2
+ 247.5V; -7036
which gives
V'
-247.5 v'247.52
2
25.75
or
+ 4 x 7036
-273.25
Negative V: is for supersynchronous operation. Hence, for 600 rpm,

V:
25.75 V
Vr = 25.75/aT1
= 25.75/2.5 = 10.3 V
6.5 OPERATION WITH A CURRENT SOURCE

The variable frequency supply for speed control of an induction motor can be a
voltage source' or a current source. The analysis and performance of an induction
motor fed by a voltage source are presented in earlier sections. The present section
considers the case of a current source.
6.5.1 Operation
at a Fixed Frequency
The equivalent circuit of figure 6.1 b is applicable. The only difference is that the
motor is now fed by a current source I, instead of a voltage source Y. The motor
input current will be independent of motor parameters and the terminal voltage V
will change due to the change in the motor impedance.
The input current I, is shared between the rotor impedance and the magnetizing
reactance Xm For low values of s, the rotor current is small and the magnetizing
current 1m is nearly equal to L. Since I, is usually much higher than the normal magnetizing current, the motor operates under saturation for low values of slip. Therefore, the motor should be analyzed taking the saturation into account. The nonlinear
248
Induction Motors
Chap. 6
relationship between E and 1m is obtained experimentally

as explained in section
6.3.3. The following equations can be written from the equivalent circuit (fig. 6.1b):
[(~J+
[(~J
= E2
X;2};2
(6.69)
+ (X; + XT1L?Jr;2 = 1;X~

E
Subtracting
gives
equation
(6.70)
1mXm
(6.69) frorn (6.70) and then substituting
(6.71)
frorn equation
(6.71)
(6.72)
AIso from equation
(6.69),
R'r
s=
V(E/1;)2
- X;2
(6.73)
Now,
(6.74)
Motor input impedance
...
(6.75)
where
Rin
X
In
= R, + (R;/s?
+ Xm[(R;/s?
X
s
(R;/S)2
V = 1s (R 2In
+ (X; + X;)2
+ X;(Xm + X;)]
+ (Xm + X;?
+ X 2 ) 1/2
10
(6.76)
(6.77)
(6.78)
Equations (6.69) to (6.75) are non linear algebraic equations due to the nonlinear relations of E and Xm with 1m' To avoid the need for a numerical solution, the
calculations can be done in the following sequence.
A suitable value (less than Is) is assumed for 1m for a given L; E and Xm are
obtained from the magnetization characteristic; 1; is calculated from equation (6.72);
s is evaluated from equation (6.73), and then T and V are obtained frorn equations (6.74) and (6.78), respectively.
Sec.6.5
Operation
249
with a Current Source
The speed-torque curves of a 2.8 kW, 400 V, 50 Hz, Y-connected induction

motor at different per unit values of I, and the rated frequency are shown in figure 6.19. The per-unit value of I, is obtained by dividing the actual value by the
rated stator current. The speed-torque and speed-current curves of the motor when
fed by a voltage source of rated voltage and frequency are also shown by dash-dots
for the sake of comparison. The variation of the terminal voltage for low values of
slip and two values of I, is also shown. When fed by a voltage source of rated
voltage and frequency, the motor operates nearly at the nominal value of flux and 1m
for allloads, where the nominal values are defined as the values attained at the rated
voltage and frequency on no loado
With a constant current source, the starting torque is low due to the low values
of flux (as 1m is low) and rotor current compared to their values at the rated voltage.
The torque increases with speed due to the increase in flux. The flux and 1m have
nominal values at the intersections with the rated voltage speed-torque curve. A further increase in speed increases the terminal voltage beyond the rated value. The
1.0p.u.
1500
....._~
__
.... .><.A-~.
//-
1250
1, ~ 1.5 p.U.
voltage (eS)
__
.........
....... ,
............."
Stator
current -.
1000
e-
.,.,
, Torque
) (VS)
'':
(VSI
-0-
a.
(/)
I,~1.5p.u.
r-?::x:::~~:=:s~--_~
_.........
,,/Terminal
_____
_---_---,."",.
750
500
250
.1
10
20
40
30
Torque, Nm
50
60
100
200
300
400
Terminal voltage (Iinel. V
500
600
10
I
O
Figure 6.19
I
15
20
Stator current, A
Induction motor operation
25
with a current source.
30
250
Induction Motors
Chap.6
flux and the magnetizing current are also increased beyond nominal values, and the
motor saturates.
Because of the saturation,
the increase in terminal voltage and
torque is much lower than what would be predicted if the saturation is neglected.
Let us examine points A and B on the speed-torque curve for a constant current
I, = 1.5 per unit. At both these points, the motor develops the same torque. Point A
also lies on the motor speed-torque
curve for the rated terminal voltage and frequency. Hence, at point A the motor operates at nominal flux and rated terminal
voltage. At point B, the motor terminal voltage will be higher than the rated value
and the flux will be more than the nominal value. The machine will operate under
saturation and core los s will be higher than at point A. Point B will also provide
stable operation with most loads. On the other hand, the rotor copper los s will
be slightly higher at point A. The stator copper loss will be the same at both points.
On the whole, losses will be less and saturation will be avoided if the machine is
operated at point A. Because of these advantages, the operation at point A is preferred, even though it lies on the statically unstable part of the speed-torque curve.
Let us now consider the motor operation for the same developed torque but I,
higher than 1.5 per unit. At this current, B will shift up and A will shift down. At
the new location of B the operation will be worse than before because of the further
increase in flux. At the new location of A, the machine will operate at a flux lower
than the nominal value, thus not allowing full use of the motor torque capability.
The foregoing discussion suggests that for a given L, operation is preferred at a
point A which lies on the intersection of the speed-torque curve for a given I, and the
speed curve for the rated terminal voltage and frequency. The speed-torque curve
shown by the dot-dash line curve is the locus of such points "A". Figure 6.19 shows
that for each Is, there is a fixed value of slip speed Wse for operation on this locus.
Figure 6.20 shows the nature of relationship between I, and slip speed when the operanon is constrained to occur on this locus. When the torque demand changes, both
I, and Wse are changed according to the relationship o( figure 6.20 until equilibrium
is reached.
Since the operation takes place on a statically unstable part of speed-torque
curves, closed-loop operation is mandatory. It may be noted that a closed-loop system with an unstabie plant can be made stable by a suitable compensator.
The relationship shown in figure 6.20 can be obtained as follows.
When the operation is constrained to occur at a constant flux, saturation does
not occur and Xm can be assumed constant. The motor will operate at nominal flux
if 1m is maintained constant at the nominal value. From the equivalent circuit of
figure 6.1 b,
1 - [
m -
(R;/s) + jX;
](R;/s) + j(Xm + X;) I,
or
(6.79)
Sec.6.5
Operation with a Current Source
251
.~
Figure 6.20
w.2
From equation (6.79), for a given I, one can calculate s which will provide operation
at a constant flux of the nominal value. Now,
T=~I,2R;
Wms
Substituting
T = ~
[
ms
Frequency
(6.70) yields
for 1; from equation
6.5.2 Variable
I~X~R;/s
(~;)2 + (X; + x )2
(6.80)
Control
Operation at and below Rated Frequency

When the drive operates at a per-unit frequency Ha" (= f/frated), any reactance X will
become aX. Hence, from equation (6.79) or from the equivalent circuit of 6.1 b,
(R '/S)2 + a2X,2
12 _
r
r
12
m - (R;/s)2 + a2(Xm + x;)2 s
or
2 _ [
R;2/(sa)2 + X;2
] 2
ImR;2/(sa)2+(X +X;)2
Is
(6.81)
m
Let us now consider the operation at a given I, - say at IsI - and variable frequency.
From equation (6.79) one can obtain the value of slip for a = 1, which will give operation at a nominal value of 1m for Is = IsI' Let this slip be s l. Then from equation (6.79),
2 _ [
(R;2/SI)2+X;2
] 2
1m - (R;/SI)2 + (x., + X;)2 IsI
(6.82)
To get operation at a nominal value of 1m for all values of per-unit frequency a, with
I,remaining fixed at IsI, the following condition must be satisfied according to equations (6.81) and (6.82):
R;2/(sa)2
This equation
R?/(sa)2
yields
+ X;2
+ (X; + x;)2
R r'2/S 2I + (X m + X r')2
(6.83)
sa = SI
Multiplying
both sides of equation
(6.83) by
Wms
gives
252
Induction Motors
Chap. 6
slip speed at rated frequency
(6.84)
or
slip speed at per-unit frequency
Equation (6.84) shows that, for a given Is, the slip speed which provides motor operation at nominal flux at rated frequency also gives operation at nominal flux at al! frequencies. Hence, the relationship obtained between I, and Wse at rated frequency for
the operation at nominal flux is valid for all frequencies.
The relation of equation (6.83) can also be derived directly from the equivalent
circuit of figure 6.1b. When the motor operates at a given I, and variable frequency,
1m will be held constant if the ratio between the rotor impedance and the magnetizing
reactance is kept fixed. Since the reactances change in proportion to a, slip must
change in inverse proportion to a. This gives equation (6.83).
When operating at a per-unit frequency a, Wms and any reactance X in equation (6.80) should be replaced by awms and aX, respectively, giving
=~
ms
I;X~R;/(sa)
(~1)2+ (X; + X~2
(6.85)
For a given Iso if slip speed is maintained constant, torque will also be constant for
all freguencies.
By controlling slip speed as a function of L, the motor is made to operate at a
constant flux. Hence, though it is fed by a current source, performance is identical
to that on a variable frequency voltage source described in section 6.4.2. It can be
shown that equations (6.44) and (6.85) are also identical.
The speed-torque curves for a constant flux operation are shown in figure 6.21.
The figure al so shows how these curves are obtained by selecting constant flux operating points for differet L.
Wm
IS1
152
/
Wm
---
-...-...,
/
,151
L ___
152
"
151
1I
52
---
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
152"
o
--
- - -
151
Locus of operating poionts

at constant flux
Speed-torque
. specific 15
curve for
Figure 6.21
Speed-torque eurves at a
constant flux for induetion motor fed by a
variable frequency eurrent source.
Sec.6.5
Operation
253
with a Current Source
Operation above Rated Frequency

When operating at a nominal flux or nominal 1m, for O < a < 1, the motor terminal
voltage changes as shown in figure 6.14. At the rated frequency, it becomes equal to
the rated value. Hence, operation above the rated frequency is carried out with the
terminal voltage held constant at the rated value. With the operation constrained to
occur at a fixed voltage, the machine behavior is identical to that when fed by a constant voltage variable frequency source, described
in section 6.4.2 and shown
in figures 6.13 and 6.14. The operation at the maximum permissible current gives
operation at a constant maximum power. The maximum torque decreases inversely
with speed. To get a constant terminal voltage, the machine impedance must be held
constant as frequency is increased. This is achieved by increasing the slip speed to
compensate for an increase in reactances. At a certain speed the breakdown torque
is reached. The machine should now be operated at a constant slip speed and the
current should decrease with the increase in frequency to keep the terminal voltage
constant.
Variable frequency current sources are obtained by using either current source
inverters or a cycloconverter.
The induction motor operation with these current
sources is described in chapter 8.
Example 6.7
The motor of example 6.5 is fed by a variable frequency current source. At all operating points, the motor is made to operate at the rated flux.
1. Calculate slip speed for I, = 60 A.
2. Calculate the frequency and stator current for operation at 500 rpm for the
following torque values:
(a) 139 N-m
(b) -188 N-m
3. Also obtain the solution of 2(a) assuming speed-torque crves to be straight
Iines in the region of interest.
Solution: From example 6.5 for 50 Hz operation N,
Rated torque = 188 N-m
Slip speed at rated torque = 40 rpm
E at rated conditions = 189 V
1. L,
1000 rpm,
Wm,
104.7 rad/sec.
= E/Xm = 189/30 = 6.3 A

(6.30)2
[(0.2/S)2
(0.2/S)2
+ (1.5)2]
+ (31.5)2
This gives s = 0.067

Slip speed in rpm = sNs rpm
(60)2
= 0.067 x 1000 = 67 rpm.
2.(a) Since the flux is constant for a given torque, the slip speed will also be
constant for all frequencies. Thus the slip speed can be evaluated from the
rated frequency operation.
254
Induction Motors
Chap. 6
Now
T
=~
E~atedR;/s ]
+ X;2
wms (R;/S)2
Substituting the known values

3
(189)2 x (0.2/s)
139 = 104.7' (0.2/S)2 + (1.5)2
or
(0~2y+
(1.5)2
e~72)
which gives S = 0.0284

Slip speed Nsel = 0.0284 x 1000 = 28.4 rpm
Now for operation at 500 rpm:
Synchronous speed N, = N + N,el = 500 + 28.4
Frequency = (528.4/1000) x 50 = 26.42 Hz
a
26.42/50
N,CI= 28.4
Ns
500
528.4 rpm
0.528
0.0568
= 0.528 x 0.0568 = 0.03
as
6.3
[(0.2/0.03)2 + (30 + 1.5)2] 112= 29 7 A

(0.2/0.03)2 + (1.5)2
.
2.(b) This is the rated braking torque. Hence the slip speed will be the same as
for the rated motor torque, but'of the opposite signo

Hence, NsC2= -40 rpm
N,
frequency
a
+ N,C2
500 - 40
(460/1000) x 50
23
50
0.46
'
460 rpm
23 Hz
s = NsC2
N,
-40
460
-0.087
as = -0.04
Substituting the known values in equation (6.81), gives
_
[(0.2/0.04)2 + (30 + 1.5)2] 1/2
1, - 6.3
(0.2/0.04)2 + (1.5)2
=
38.5 A
3. Since, at a constant flux, speed-torque curves for different frequencies are

straight Iines, slip speed
139
Nsl3 = 188 x 40
= 29.56
rpm.
Sec.6.6
Loss Minimization
255
Hence, synchronous speed N,
= N + N,o = 500 + 29.56

=
Frequency = (529.56/1000) x 50
s = N,o
N,
529.56 rpm
26.48 Hz
= 29.56 = 0.056
529.56
a = 26.48 = 0.53
50
'
sa = 0.03

1 = 630 [(0.2/0.03)2 + (30 + 1.5)2JI/2
,.
(0.2/0.03)2 + (l.5)2
= 29.7

The high cost of energy provides an incentive to reduce energy losses. Reduced
losses not only reduce operating cost but also reduce the capital cost of the utility
system. In battery-powered vehicles, the reduction of losses allows more efficient
use of the battery and thus increases the range of the vehicle in terms of the distance
travelled before the battery discharges. In solar-powered drives, the solar cells constitute a major portion of the total cost of the drive. An efficient operation of the
drive can lead to substantial saving in its capital cost.
The present section briefly describes ideas related to reducing losses in induction motor drives fed by fixed and variable frequency supplies.
6.6.1 Fixed Frectuency Variable Voltage Operation
Nola9 has shown that induction motor efficiency can be improved by means of reduced voltage operation at light loads. This can be explained by the equivalent circuit of figure 6.lb and the phasor diagrams of figure 6.22. At light loads, (R;/s) is
large compared to X; due to a small s. Therefore, one can assume that 1; is in phase
with E and thatthe developed torque is proportional to the product El.: It may also
be noted that the core loss increases with flux at a given frequency.
Figure 6.22a shows the phasor diagram for the rated impressed voltage and a
light loado A large flux is required to produce a back emf E to balance the terminal
-------- \Sr.
l~
I;/K
Klm
l.
- --
KE
K'E
K'lm~l
(b]
Figure 6.22
K<l
(a)
l;/K'
Reduced voltage operation.
K' <K<l
(e)
256
Induction Motors
Chap. 6
voltage. The motor draws a large magnetizing current and the stator current I, is
large in spite of the low rotor current. The motor operates with a low power factor,
high core loss, and high stator copper loss. Figure 6.22b is drawn for a reduced terminal voltage for which the induced ernf is KE, where K is a constant less than l.
The rotor current must increase to (I;/K) and the slip must increase to (S/K2) to produce the same torque as before. The magnetizing current is reduced to Klm, and
consequently I, is also reduced. The flux is also reduced in the same proportion as
1m' Because of the decrease in flux and Is, the core loss and the stator copper loss are
reduced and the motor power factor is improved. Though the rotor copper loss is increased, the total loss is reduced and motor efficiency is improved. It may be ernphasized that the reduction in losses and the improvement in efficiency are obtained
mainly due to the operation at reduced flux for light loads.
There is an optimum value of terminal voltage (or flux) and slip for minimum
loss. Decrease of voltage beyond this value increases losses and reduces efficiency.
Figure 6.22c has been drawn mainly to illustrate this point. Further reduction in the
induced emf gives large values of 1; and Is' Though the core los s will be less, the
total loss will be higher due to the large values of stator and rotor copper losses. It
may also be noted that the power factor is still improving. Thus the minimum loss
operation occurs at a higher flux than the maximum power factor operation.
The load's torque requirement puts a constraint on the amount of voltage reduction; too great a reduction in voltage will create a high slip and lead to pull-out
and motor stalling.
For the analysis of the motor for maximum efficiency at a given output, core
loss must be taken into account. Hence, the equivalent circuit shown in figure 6.23
is employed.
The resistance Rm accounts for the core loss. Now the developed
power will be equal to the shaft power plus the friction and windage loss, because
the core loss is already being accounted for due to Rm'
The developed power is given by equation (6.15). The corresponding electric
power input to the motor is
(6.86)
where Rin is the resistive
given by
part of the input impedance.

Pm
7)=-=
Pin
I;2R;(l
The electrical
efficiency
- s)/s
(6.87)
I;Rin
Let Zs' Z;, and Zm, respectively, denote the stator impedance,
magnetizing branch impedance. Then
is
rotor impedance,
and
(6.88)
and
(6.89)
Seco 6.6
257
Loss Minimization
Substituting from equations (6.88) and (6.89) into equation (6.87) yields
1- s
r
= 1 +-+-+s
2Rs
Q'
a,
f3-
(6.90)
(
2Rs)]
1 +_0
n,
where
Q'
f3
= RI(_I
r
Rm
+~) + R
X2
RsR;
2
m
(6.91 )
+ RS(l + X{V + (2Rs + X;2 + RsX;2)

R;
X:;
a,
R;Rm
R;R~
(6.92)
Equation (6.90) shows that efficiency is independent of the terminal voltage

and depends only on slip. Differentiating r with respect to s and equating to zero
gives an expression for the optimum slip:
(6.93)
Thus, efficiency is maximized if the motor is operated at the constant slip sop.
The variation in torque and output power is then obtained by varying the terminal
voltage. The flux then automatically changes with load to provide operation with a
minimum loss for a given output power. It may also be noted that the same expression is obtained for the optimum slip when efficiency is maximized for a given
torque. 11 Since the optimum operation is obtained at a fixed speed, optimization can
be done only for drives where speed control is not required.
The efficiency of a motor fed by a current source can also be improved by operating it at reduced flux for light loads. It can be shown that there is an optimum
slip which provides maximum efficiency for all values of I, when saturation is neglected (see problem 6.20 and reference 15).
6.6.2 Variable
Frequency ()peration
In describing the variable frequency control of induction motor with a voltage source
(see section 6.4.2) or a current source (section 6.5), the desirability of maintaining
the flux at nominal value was emphasized mainly to make full use of the motor
torque capability at all speeds. The previous section makes it obvious that this is not
the right approach when considering efficiency and losses. A more appropriate
strategy is to operate with reduced flux at light loads, during both motoring and regeneration, though this complicates the control.
It has been mentioned in the previous section that in a lightly loaded motor, the
core loss and stator copper loss decrease, and the rotor copper loss increases with a
decrease in flux below the nominal value. The optimum operation is reached when
the decrease in core loss and stator copper loss equals the increase in rotor copper
loss. It may be useful to identify the two components of stator copper loss: the rnagnetizing component and the load component. The magnetizing component, which is
due to 1m, decreases with flux, and the load component due to 1; changes inversely
Induction Motors
258
Chap. 6
with flux. When operating above fullload, an increase in flux will decrease 1;, and,
therefore, rotor copper loss and the load dependent stator copper loss. But the magnetizing component of the stator copper loss and the core loss will increase. As the
load component of stator copper loss will dominate over the magnetizing component
for large loads, the totalloss will decrease with an increase in flux. Optimum operation may be attained at a flux higher than the nominal, provided that this does not
lead to heavy saturation which will increase 1m substantially and ultimately reduce
efficiency. Operation of the motor above nominal flux may not be allowed at the
rated frequency, because then the motor terminal voltage will be higher than the
rated value; however, such a restriction does not apply at low frequencies.
The core loss decreases with flux and frequency. When operating at low frequencies, the core loss forms a smaller proportion of the totalloss. The optimum operation for a given torque is reached at a higher flux than that at the rated frequency.
The discussion in the preceding two paragraphs suggests that for large torque
demands at low speeds, the optimum operation may be obtained at a flux greater
than nominal. This emphasizes the need for taking saturation into account when accurate analysis is desired.
Since core loss is a function of both flux and frequency, there is a need to remodel Rm (fig. 6.23). Since the back ernf is proportional to the product of flux and
the supply frequency f,
E
= Kf
(6.94)
The stator core loss is given by the following equation:

Pes
Khf<l>2
+ Kef2<1>2
(6.95)
where K, and K, are hysteresis and eddy current coefficients, respectively.

.. The hysteresis loss obeys Steinmetz's formula, where the flux is raised to the
power n, "n", which is known as the Steinmetz index, is determined experimentally
for the material and configuration considered. Since n is in the range 1.5 to 2.5, it is
assumed to be 2 in equation (6.95).
The rotor core loss is given by
Per
Khsf<l>2
+ Kes2f2<1>2
(6.96)
Total core los s is given by

P,
R.
l.
x,
= Pes + Per = Khf<l>2(1 + s) + Kef2<1>2(1 + S)2

x'r
(6.97)
---r
r
Figure 6.23 Equivalent circuit accounting

for core loss.
Sec.6.6
259
Loss Minimization
It is difficult to measure K, and K A reasonable assumption is to measure

core loss at the rated frequency and divide it equally between hysteresis and eddy
current loss. Now,
(6.98)
Substituting from equation (6.94) and (6.97) gives
K2
R=--:-------m Kh(1/ s) + Ke(1 + S)2
(6.99)
This gives the equivalent circuit of figure 6.24 for the variable frequency operation. Per-unit frequency a is defined by equation (6.38). Since s = (awms- wm)/(awms)
(6. 1(0)
In variable frequency control employing a voltage source, we have two variables that can be controlled, V and f. An operating point P with given T and Wm
can be obtained with a number of combinations of the variables, as shown in figure 6.25a. However, the optimum operation with the highest efficiency (or with the
lowest input power) will be pravided only by one set of values of V and f. Similarly,
with a current source, optimal operation for a given T and Wm will be obtained with
one set of values of I, and f.
The optimum solution for a voltage source at the given values of torque (TI)
and speed (Wml), neglecting saturation, is obtained numerically as follows."
The slip is considered as an independent variable. The voltage and the frequency therefore become dependent variables. For a chosen value of s and the given
value of speed Wml' a is obtained frorn equation (6.100). This determines all the
parameters of the equivalent circuito Now, the torque for the rated terminal voltage is
calculated. Let this be Tr. The terminal voltage required to produce the torque TI is
given by
(6.101)
aXs
Rs
-----r,
1
-----r
r
Kh(1 +s)
-"--;;---
K. (1
a f rated
I
Figure 6.24
Variable frequency equivalent circuit accounting for core loss.
s)
Induction Motors
260
Chap.6
(b) Optimum slip speed versus
(a)
per-unit speed
Figure 6.25
Optimum control of variable frequency drives.
The input power is obtained from the equivalent circuit

p.
In
Rin
= 3y2IZ2
(6.102)
In
where Zin is the input impedance and Rin i5 the real part of this impedance.
The input power is calculated for a number of values of s following the foregoing procedure, and the optimum slip for which Pin is the minirnum is identified. One
can do these calculations for a number of operating points. The optimal solution for
the entire range of speed has the nature shown in figure 6.25b, where the optirnurn
slip speed has been plotted against the per unit speed. The readers are referred to
reference 14 for the solution accounting for saturation.
.. The optimum solution for the motor fed by a variable frequency current source
can also be obtained using the preceding approach. The condition for the minimum
input power for a given torque (TI) and speed (Wml), neglecting saturation, is obtained as follows.
For a chosen value of s and a given speed Wml' a is obtained from equation (6.100). This determines all the parameters of the equivalent circuit. The torque
for the rated value of stator current Isr is obtained. Let this be Tr. The stator current
required to produce torque TI is given by
r., = Isrv'TI/Tr
(6.103)
and
(6.104)
The input power is calculated for a number of values of s using the foregoing sequence of steps, and the slip for which Pin has the minimum value is identified.
6.7 MUL TIQUADRANT CONTROL
When the motor is fed by a variable frequency source, multiquadrant control is irnplemented using regenerative braking, provided that the source has the ability to absorb the energy generated. For speed reversal, the operation is shifted frorn motoring
Sec.6.8
Operation
with Nonsinusoidal
261
Supplies
to braking by reducing the supply frequency to make synchronous speed less than
the motor speed. As the motor decelerates the frequency is continuously adjusted to
keep the synchronous
speed less than the motor speed. The phase sequence is reversed at zero speed and the frequency is slowly increased to bring the speed to the
desired value in the reverse direction. A current control is usually employed to restrict the motor current during the speed reversal. When the generated energy cannot
be accepted by the source, it is diverted to a resistor. Then the motor essentially
works under dynamic braking.
When fed by a fixed frequency source, multiquadrant operation is obtained by
plugging. The changeover from motoring to braking is done by changing the phase
sequence. The motor brakes under plugging to zero speed and then reverses. When a
sustained braking operation is required, a large resistance is included in the rotor of a
wound-rotor motor to restrict the current and ensure stable operation. When used for
speed reversal, then a suitable resistance is also included to increase the braking
torque and decrease the current. In the case of a squirrel-cage motor, the terminal
voltage may be reduced to reduce the braking current at the expense of a large reduction in the braking torque.
6.8 OPERATION WITH NONSINUSOIDAL
SUPPLlES
The output voltages of variable voltage and variable frequency voltage sources employing semiconductor converters are nonsinusoidal. The output current of a variable
frequency current source using semiconductor
converters is also nonsinusoidal.
A
nonsinusoidal waveform can be resolved into fundamental and harmonic components
using Fourier analysis [equations (3.109) to (3.113)]. Because of the half-wave syrnmetry only odd harmonics will be present.
6.8.1 Positive, Negative, and Zero Sequence Harmonics

Consider
the fundamental
VAN= VI sin wt,
phase voltage components

VBN= VI sin(wt - 27T/3),
and
vCN = VI sin( wt _
4;)
with the phase sequence ABe. They produce the main field wave in the air-gap
which rotates at synchronous speed. The corresponding
fifth harmonic phase voltages are
VAN= Vs sin 5wt
VBN= Vs sin 5(wt - 27T/3)
VCN= Vs sin 5(wt -
47T
/3)
=
=
Vs sin(5wt - 47T/3)
Vs sin(5wt -
27T
/3)
These equations show that the phase sequence of fifth harmonic voltages is CBA (or
ACB), which is opposite to that of the fundamental. In general it can be shown that
the phase sequence of the harmonic voltages and currents of the order k = 6n - 1,
where n is an integer, is opposite to that of the fundamental.
These are known as
negative sequence harmonics. Since they are carried by the same winding as the fundamental, they have the same number of poles. Because the phase sequence is oppo-
Induction Motors
262
Chap. 6
site and the frequency is k times that of the fundamental, they produce harmonic
field waves in the air-gap, which rotates at k times the fundamental synchronous
speed in the opposite direction to the main field.
.
Next consider the seventh hannonic phase voltages
VAN
VBN
VeN
= V7
= V7
= V7
sin 7wt
sin 7(wt - 21T/3)
sin 7(wt - 41T/3}
= V7
= V7
sin(7wt - 21T/3)
sin(7wt - 41T/3)
These equations show that the phase sequence of the seventh hannonic voltage is
ABC, which is the same as that of the fundamental. This is true in general for the
hannonic voltages and currents of the order k = 6n + 1. These are known as positive
sequence hannonics. They have the same number of poles as the fundamental and
produce hannonic field waves in the air-gap, which rotate at k times the fundamental
synchronous speed in the same direction as fue fundamental.
It can be shown that the phase voltages and currents of harrnonics of the
order k = 3n are in phase. Consequently, these are called zero sequence hannonics.
They do not produce rotating air-gap field waves. The zero sequence harmonic
voltages are able to produce currents and affect motor performance only in the
Y-connected stator winding with the neutral connection. Since their frequencies are
in multiples of 3, they are also known as tripplen hannonics.
6.8.2 Harmonic Equivalent
Circuits
The equivalent circuit of figure 6.lb is valid for the fundamental components of
voltage and current. The equivalent circuit for the kth harmonic voltage and current
can be derived from this equivalent circuit. All the reactances are increased by a
factor k -.The stator and rotor resistances are also increased due to the skin effect. As
explained in the previous section, the kth hannonic field wave may rotate forward or
backward at a speed kwms, and consequentlythe hannonic slip is given by
(6.105)
where the negative sign is applicable to positive sequence hannonics and the positive
sign is valid for negative sequence hannonics. The kth hannonic equivalent circuit is
shown in figure 6.26a.
The hannonic slip can be expressed in terms of the fundamental slip by substituting for Wm from equation (6.4) into equation (6.105), giving
Sk
--
1 -+ (I - s)
(6.106)
If the motor speed vares from the synchronous speed to standstill, s vares from Oto
1. From equation (6.106), the corresponding varations of S5 and S7 are from 1.2 to 1
and 0.857 to 1, respectively, which are close to unity. For higher hannonics, Sk is
even closer to unity. Except for very low fundamental frequencies (around less than
5 Hz), the magnetizing reactance is much higher compared to the rotor impedance
Sec.6.8
263
Supplies
(a)
CJklX~~X:1
Vk
Vk
I
(b)
Figure
6.26
(e)
kth hannonic
equivalent
circuits of induction motor.
in parallel with it, and can be omitted (fig. 6.26b). The equivalent circuits of figure 6.26 are applicable to both voltage and current sources. For a voltage source, Vk
is constant and Isk varies; the reverse is true for a current source.
Since Sk is nearly unity at all motor speeds, the harmonic equivalent circuit is
independent of the motor speed. Thus, harmonic currents are substantially constant
and independent of the motor load and speed. From figure 6.26b,
Vk
Isk = -~;======;=~======
(6.107)
+ R;k)2
+ k (X s + X r')2
Sk
2
sk
When the fundamental frequency is more than about 20 Hz for small motors
and more than about 10 Hz for large motors, X, and X; have values comparable to
R, and R;. At harmonic frequencies their values are increased k times. The increase
in the stator and rotor resistances due to skin effect is much less. Since Sk is close to
unity, the resistances have negligible values compared to the reactances. Hence,
Isk
==
k(Xs
X;)
(6.108)
This approximation gives the equivalent circuit as shown in figure 6.26c.

6.8.3 Efficiency
and Derating
The rotating harmonic air-gap flux waves induce harmonic rotor currents of slip frequency. The slip frequency rotor currents create harmonic mmf waves which travel
at slip speed with respect to the rotor. The rnrnf and the air-gap flux wave produced
by the same harmonic are stationary relative to each other and a steady torque is produced due to their interaction. It can be readily shown that the harmonic torques are
negligible compared to the fundamental.
264
Induction Motors
From the equivalent
circuit of figure 6.26b,

Tk
the kth harmonic
torque is
31;kR:k/sk
kwms
The positive torque is produced by positive

torque by negative sequence harmonics.
The fundamental torque is given by
sequence
Chap. 6
(6.109)
harmonics
and the negative
_ 31:2R:/s
T 1-
(6.110)
Wms
Dividing
equation
(6.109) by equation
TI
(6.110) gives
(Is~)2
(RRr:~) (~)ks,
Ir
(6.111)
The fundamental slip s is small for normal full-Ioad operation.

tion (6.106) yields
Neglecting
s in equa-
k::1
Sk=--
Substituting
in equation
(6.112)
(6.111) gives
(6.113)
A quantitative picture can be obtained by taking a specific case. Let us consider the
operation of a typical induction motor with a starting current S times the rated and
with a six-step voltage source inverter as ~escribed in chapter 8. At starting, resistances have negligible values compared to reactances; consequently,
SI'
r
VI
X +X,s
Thus,
l'
VI
r-S(Xs+X:)
(6.114)
where VI and 1:, respectively, are the fundamental rated phase voltage and current
of the motor.
For a six-step voltage source inverter (equation (8.2,
- VI
Vk-
Now consider the fifth harmonic

in equation (6.108) yields
torque.
Substitution
of Vk = VI/S and k = 5
(6.115)
Sec.6.8
Supplies
265

Iss/I; = (0.2)
(6.116)
Assume a full-load slip SI = 0.04 and a threefold increase in the rotor resistancethat is, R;s/R; = 3. Substituting these values and that from equation (6.116) in equation (6.113) and noting that the negative sign applies to the fifth harrnonic, gives
Ts/TI = -0.0008. Thus the fifth harmonic torque is only 0.08 percent of the fundamental. Noting that the seventh harrnonic torque will be positive, the contribution
of the pair consisting of fifth and seventh harrnonics to the motor developed torque
will be insignificant. Higher harmonics have even lesser torques.
The foregoing example was for a voltage source. One can take an example of a
current source and show that the contribution of harrnonic currents to the developed
torque is insignificant there also.
.
While harrnonics do not contribute to the output power of the motor, they certainly produce additional losses in the machine. From the equivalent circuit of
figure 6.26b, the harrnonic copper loss is given by
Ph
l~k(Rsk + R;k)
(6.117)
k=S.7
The core los s is also increased somewhat in the presence of harrnonics.

Harrnonic losses reduce efficiency and increase therrnal loading. The higher
the harmonic content, the greater the reduction in efficiency and the increase in
therrnal loading. As explained earlier, the harrnonic currents remain constant at al!
operating conditions of the motor; consequently, the harrnonic losses are also independent of the motor load and speed. They cause a significant reduction in motor efficiency and a large increase in its heating at light loads. In general at full load, the
reduction in efficiency is not very significant; however, the increase in-thermal loading may lead to appreciable derating of the motor.
When fed by a voltage source, according to equations (6.108) and (6.117), the
harrnonic losses are less when the motor reactance (X, + X;) is high. The class B design has a higher value of reactance compared to the class A. Hence, the class B design is preferred when the voltage source has a high harrnonic content. The class A
design is used only when the harrnonic content is negligible.
6.8.4 Torque Pulsations
The mmf and air-gap flux waves produced by different harrnonics (including fundamental) are not stationary relative to each other. Consequently, they produce pulsating harrnonic torques, which have zero average value. The prominent components
are those arising from the interaction between the fundamental air-gap flux and rotor
mrnf waves produced by fifth and seventh harrnonic air-gap fluxes. The negative sequence fifth harrnonic air-gap flux wave produces a rotor mmf wave which moves
backward at five times the fundamental synchronous speed. The relative speed between the fifth harrnonic rotor mrnf wave and the fundamental air-gap flux wave being six times the fundamental synchronous speed, their interaction produces a
pulsating torque at six times the fundamental frequency. The positive sequence seventh harmonic air-gap flux wave produces a rotor mmf which rotates forward at
Induction Motors
266
Chap. 6
seven times the fundamental synchronous speed. Since the relative speed between
the fundamental
air-gap flux wave and the seventh harmonic rotor mmf wave is
six times the fundamental synchronous speed, their interaction also produces a pulsating torque at six times the fundamental frequency. Similarly it can be shown that
the eleventh and thirteenth harmonics produce a torque pulsation twelve times the
fundamental frequency, but its amplitude is small.
The torque pulsations cause fluctuations in motor speed. When the fundamental
frequency is sufficiently large, speed fluctuations are sufficiently low because of the
motor inertia. When the fundamental frequency, and thus, the motor speed is low,
large fluctuations in motor speed are obtained producing a jerky or stepped motion.
The amplitude of the torque pulsations depends on the magnitude of fifth and
seventh harmonic currents, which in tum depend on the corresponding
harmonic
voltages and the motor reactance. Higher motor reactance reduces torque pulsations.
This also points towards the suitability of the class B design for such applications.
The torque pulsations also depend on the magnitude of the fundamental air-gap flux.
The saturation increases this flux leading to higher magnitude of torque pulsations.
This is also one of the reasons for operating a current source drive on the region of
speed-torque curves with a positive slope.
Example 6.8
A 440- V, 50 Hz, 6-pole, 960 rpm, Y-connected induction motor has the following
Rs = 0.6
n,
R;
= 0.3
x, = X; = 1 n
n,
Xm is very large and can be ignored.

The motor 1S fed by a nonsinusoidal voltage source. The fundamental component of the source voltage is 440 V. Fifth and seventh harmonics are 20 percent
and 14 percent of the fundamental, respectively. Higher harmonics can be ignored.
Skin effect causes the rotor resistance to increasethree times for the fifth harmonic
and four times for the seventh harmonic.
Calculate the derating of the machine due to nonsinusoidal supply. Neglect
friction, windage, and core loss. AIso ca1culate the rated motor torque with nonsinusoidal supply.
Solution:
Let us first consider the motor operation with a sinusoidal supply.
Synchronous speed N,
Wm,
.
Rated slip
120f 120 x 50
-p- =
6
1000 rpm
= 104.7 rad/sec.
=
1000 - 960
1000
0.04
440/\1'3
Rated current lra'ed=

0.6
30.45 A
03)2 + (l + 1)2
+ -'0.04
Rated power developed = 3I~,ed(~: - R:)

= 3 x (30.45)2(0.3
0.04
- 0.3) = 20 kW
Sec.6.8
Motor heat loss
267
Supplies
3I;.,eiRs + R;)
=3X
(30.45)2 x (0.6 + 0.3)
= 2.5
kW
Let us now consider the motor operation on a nonsinusoidal supply.

440
= \13= 254
Vs = 0.2 x 254
VI
V7 = 0.14 x 254
50.8 V,
= 35.56
V.

50.8
I,s = 5(2)
5.08 A
Copper loss due to the fifth harmonic

=
3 x I;s(R, + 3R;)
3 x (5.08)2(0.6 + 3 x 0.3)
116 W
Again from equation (6.108)

I
=
,7
35.56
7x2
2 5 A
.
Copper loss due to the seventh harmonic

= 3 x I;7(R, + 4R;)
=
3 x (2.5)2 (0.6 + 4 x 0.3)
33.75 W
Total harmonic copper loss = 116 + 33.75 = 0.15 kW

For the same heating of the machine as under rated conditions with a sinusoidal supply,
the maximum fundamental copper loss allowed = 2.5 - 0.15 = 2.35 kW.-
Hence, the maximum fundamental current allowed is
I
29.5
3)"2 = (2.35
(2.35 X 10
3(R,+R;)
3)"2 =
10
3xO.9
29.5A.
VI
= ---;::::::;::::==r=====
R'
R s + ~S
+ (X s + X r')2
254

Since only the fundamental contributes to the developed power,
Rated developed power
Percent derating
3 x (29.5)2 x (0.~:86 - 0.3)
19.5 kW
20 x
19.5
100 = 97.5 percent
268
Induction
Motors
Chap. 6
Since only the fundamental contributes to the output tarque,

Rated torque
3 (
)2
0.3
104.61 29.5 x 0.0386
193.8 N-m
REFERENCES
1. A. E. Fitzgerald, C. Kingsley, and A. Kusko, Electric Machinery, McGraw-Hill, 1971.
2. 1. E. Brown and C. Grantham, "Deterrnination of the parameters and parameter
variations of a 3-phase induction motor having a current displacement rotor," Proc. IEE,
vol. 122, no. 9, Sept. 1975, pp. 919-921.
3. C. Grantham, "Zero-sequence dynamic braking and parameter determination,' Proc.
lEE, vol. 130, Pt. B, Nov. 1983, pp. 392-398.
4. J. M. D. Murphy, Thyristor Control of AC Motors, Pergamon Press, 1973.
5. G. De, Electrical Drives and Their Control, Academic Book Ltd., 1970.
6. S. K. Pillai, A First Course on Electrical Drives, Wiley-Eastem, 1982.
7. A. Abbodanti, "Method of flux control in induction motors driven by variable frequency,
variable voltage supplies ,' IEEE lAS Int. Semi. Power Conv. Conference, 1977,
pp. 177-184.
8. T. A. Lipo and E. P. Comell, "State variable steady-state analysis of a controlled current
induction motor drive," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-ll, Nov.lDec. 1975,
pp. 218-226.
9. F. J. Nola, "Power factor controller-An
energy saver,' Proc. IEEE lAS Annu. Meeting,
1980, pp. 194-198.
10. N. Mohan, "Irnprovernent in energy efficiency of induction motor by means of voltage
control," IEEE Trans. on PAS, vol. PAS-99, July-Aug. 1980, pp. 1466-1471.
11. T. W. Jian, N. L. Schmitz, and D. W. Novotny, "Characteristic induction motor slip
values for variable voltage part load performance optimization,' IEEE Trans. on PAS,
vol. PAS-102, No. 1, 1983, pp. 38-46.
..
12. T. M. Rowan and T. A. Lipo, "A quantitative analysis of induction motor performance
improvement by SCR voltage control," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-19,
July-Aug. 1983, pp. 545-553.
13. J. M. D. Murphy and V. B. Honsinger, "Efficiency optimisation of inverter-fed induction
motor drives," Conf. Rec. IEEE Ind. Appl. Soco Annual Meeting 1982, pp. 544-552.
14. D. S. Kirschen, D. W. Novotny, and W. Suwanwisoot, "Minimising induction motor
losses by excitation control in variable frequency drives,' IEEE Trans. Ind. Appl.,
vol. lA-20, Sept./Oct. 1984, pp. 1244-1250.
15. H. G. Kim, S. K. Sul and M. H. Park, "Optirnal efficiency drive of a current source
inverter fed induction motor by flux control," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-20,
Nov.lDec. 1984, pp. 1453-1459.
.
16. A. Kusko and D. Galler, "Control means for minimization of losses in ac and dc motor
drives," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-19, No. 4, Ju1y/Aug. 1983, pp. 561-570.
17. J. M. D. Murphy, "The analysis of inverter-fed induction motors,' Int. Jour. Elect. Engg.
Educ., vol. 13, 1976, pp. 359-369.
18. G. C. Jain, "The effect of voltage waveshape on the performance of a 3-phase induction
motor," IEEE Trans. on Power App. and Systems, vol. 83, 1964, pp. 561-566.
19. S. D. T. Robertson and K. M. Hebber, "Torque pulsations in induction motors with
inverter drives,' IEEE Trans. on lnd. Appl., vol. IA-7, No. 2, March/Apri1, 1971,
pp. 318-323.
Chap. 6
269
Problems
PROBLEMS
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.S
A 37.3 kW, 460 V, 60 Hz, 6-pole, 1180 rpm, Y-connected squirrel-cage induction
motor has the following parameters per phase referred to the stator:
R, = 0.19 n, X, = 0.75 n, x, = 20 n
R; = 0.07 n, X; = 0.38 n
Calculate
(a) The full-load current, torque, p.f., and efficiency.
(b) The starting torque and current as a ratio of their full-load values.
(e) The breakdown torque (developed) as a ratio of the full-load torque.
(d) The sum of the core and friction losses at full load.
Why is it essential to operate an induction motor between the synchronous speed and
the breakdown speed when it is used to holding an active load by the regenerative
braking?
The motor of problem 6.1 is used for regenerative braking. Calculate
(a) The range of active load torque it can hold and corresponding speed range.
(b) The maximum power it can generate.
(e) The speed at the developed torque of 300 N-m.
Plugging is used for the speed reversal of the induction motor of problem 6.1 from
full-load speed. What changes must be made in its connection? Calculate the initial
braking torque and current as a ratio of their full-load values.
Show the nature of the speed-torque characteristic during reversal from rated
forward speed to rated reverse speed.
A 2.8 kW, 400 V, 50 Hz, 4-pole, 1370 rpm, Y-connected wound-rotor induction motor
has the following parameters per phase referred to fue stator:
R, = 1.9 n, R; = 4.575 n, X, = X; = 3 n
The magnetization characteristic with the two-lead connection (two phases in series
with the third left open) is as follows:
0.1265
12.1
2.24
173
6.6
6.7
0.368
31.8
2.86
199
0.612
54
3.86
226
0.9
80
4.9
246
1.22
108
6.53
266
1.71
143
8.16
281
The motor is used for de dynamic braking with a two-lead connection and Id = 12 A.
Calculate and plot the speed-torque characteristic.
The motor of problem 6.5 is initially running at fullload. It is controlled by the terminal
voltage control. The magnetizing current, and core, friction and windage losses can be
neglected.
(a) If the load torque is directly proportional to speed, ca1culate the motor terminal
voltage and current at half the rated speed. Can the motor be allowed to run continuously at this speed?
(b) Repeat (a) for a fan load.
The motor of problem 6.5 is controlled by the rotor resistance control. The stator to
rotor turns ratio is 4.25. The magnetizing current, and core, friction and windage
losses can be neglected.
(a) What resistance must be inserted in fue rotor to run the motor at 400 rpm at the
full-load torque?
(b) What resistance must be inserted in the rotor to get the maximum plugging torque
at the rated speed?
270
6.8
Induction Motors
Chap.6
A 7.5 kW, 220 Y, 6-pole, 60 Hz, Y -connected

induction motor has the following
parameters per phase referred to the stator for the equivalent circuit of figure 6.1d:
R, = 0.29
X, = 0.5
= 13.3
= 0.145
= 0.21
The motor is controlled by variable frequency control with a constant (Y/O ratio for
frequencies below 60 Hz and with a constant terminal voltage for frequencies greater
than 60 Hz.
(a) Calculate
breakdown
torques at different frequencies,
both for motoring and
regenerative braking, and plot them against frequency.
(b) Calculate the starting torque for different frequencies below 60 Hz, and plot them
against frequency.
R;
n, x,
n
n,
n, X;
6.9
The induction motor of problem 6.8 has a full-load slip of 0.02. The motor is controlled
by the variable frequency
control with a constant (Y/O ratio. Calculate the rotor
current as a percentage of its full-load value for a frequency of 15 Hz and at full-load
torque. Can you run the motor continuously at this operating point? Explain your answer.
What change must be made so that the rotor draws full-Ioad current at full-load
torque when the supply frequency is 15 Hz?
6.10
The motor of problem 6.8 is controlled by variable frequency control. It is required

that the rotor current at full-load torque remains constant for all frequencies below
60 Hz. Calculate the values of terminal voltage for different frequencies and plot thern
against frequency. Compare this plot with that for the constant (Y/O control.
Use the equivalent circuit of figure 6.1d.
6.11
The motor of problem 6.8 is controlled by variable frequency control. It is required

that the breakdown torque should rernain constant for all frequencies below 60 Hz.
Calculate the values of terminal voltage for different frequencies and plot them against
frequency. Compare this plot with that for the constant (Y/f) control.
Obtain the (Y/O ratio for a frequency of 20 Hz for the preceding two cases.
Calculate the regenerative braking breakdown torques for these two voltage ratios and
the frequency of 20 Hz.
Use the equivalent circuit of figure 6.ld.
6.12
A 440 Y, 50 Hz, 6-pole Y-connected induction motor has the following parameters per
phase referred to the stator:
R, = 0.6
R; = 0.3
X, = X; = 1
X; is very large and can be ignored.' The normal full-Ioad slip is 0.05.
Calculate the motor speed at the full-Ioad developed torque when fed at 180 V
and 20 Hz.
n,
n,
6.13
The motor of problem 6.12 is controlled by the variable frequency control with a
constant (Y/O ratio. For an operating frequency of 10 Hz, calculate
(a) The breakdown torque as a ratio of its value at the rated frequency for both motoring and braking.
.
(b) The starting torque and current as a ratio of their values at the rated frequency.
6.14
A 400 Y, 50 Hz, 4-pole, 1370 rpm, Y -connected induction motor fed by a variable
frequency source has the following parameters per phase referred to the stator:
R, = 1.9
R; = 2
X, = X; = 3
X, is very large and can be ignored.
Calculate the motor torque and speed at 60 Hz and the rated motor current.
n,
6.15
n,
A 460 Y, 60 Hz, 4-pole, 1720 rpm, Y -connected induction

R, = 0.5
R; = 0.2
X, = X; = 1
X; = 30
n,
n,
n,
motor has the following
Chap. 6
6.16
Problems
271
The motor is controllcd by variable frcqucncy control. The flux is kept constant at the
rated value. Calculate
(a) The frequency at 1200 rpm and the rated torque.
(b) The motor speed for a frequency of 30 Hz and the rated torque.
(e) The frequency and the stator current at half the rated torque and 1500 rpm.
(d) And solve (e) assuming speed-torque curves, in the region of interest, to be
straight lines at a given frequency and constant flux.
Use the equivalent circuit of figure 6.1 b.
The motor of problem 6.15 is now braked by regenerative braking with variable frequency control at a constant rated flux. Calculate
(a) The frequency at 1200 rpm and rated braking torque
(b) The motor speed and stator current at half the rated braking torque and 30 Hz.
(e) And solve (b) assuming speed-torque curves to be straight Iines, in the region of
interest, at a given frequency and constant flux.
Use the equivalent circuit of figure 6.1d.
6.17
A 460 V, 60 Hz, 4-pole, 1720 rpm, Y-connected wound-rotor induction motor has the
following parameters referred to the stator:
R; = 0.3 n, X; = 2 n, stator to rotor tums ratio = 2.
The stator impedance and the magnetizing reactance may be ignored.
The motor is running at full load with a fan load. What voltage should be injected in the rotor to reduce the motor speed to 1000 rpm? Neglect friction, windage,
and core loss.
6.18
A 400 V, 4-pole, 50 Hz, Y-connected wound-rotor induction motor has the following
constants referred to the stator:
R; = 0.1 n, X; = 1.0 n, stator to rotor tums ratio = 5.
The stator resistance and reactance and the magnetizing reactance may be ignored.
The motor speed when driving a load with constant torque is 1420 rpm. Calculate
the magnitude and phase of the voltage to be impressed on slip rings to operate the
motor at 1000 rpm and a unity power factor.
6.19
A 460 V, 60 Hz, 1185 rpm, -pole, Y-connected wound-rotor induction motor has the
following parameters per phase referred to the stator:
R, = 0.05 n, X, = 0.3 n, x, = 10 n
R; = 0.041 n, X; = 0.38 n
Stator to rotor tums ratio is 2.
The machine speed is controlled by injecting a voltage in the rotor circuit. The
injected voltage is kept either in phase or in phase opposition to the terminal voltage.
(a) For an injected voltage of 46 V, calculate the speed for
(i) The torque equal to half the rated motor torque.
(ii) The braking torque equal to half the rated motor torque.
(b) For an injected voltage of -46 V, calculate the speed for
(i) The torque equal to the rated motor torque.
(ii) The braking torque equal to half the rated motor torque.
6.20
Derive an expression for the optimum slip which maximizes the efficiency of an
induction motor fed by a current source of variable magnitude and fixed frequency.
6.21
The motor of problem 6.15 is controlled by a variable frequency current source. The
flux is maintained constant at nominal value.
(a) Calculate and plot 1, versus W,t, for both motoring and braking, for the range of 1,
from O to 3 times the rated current.
272
6.22
Induction Motors
Chap. 6
(b) CaJculate the motor speed and stator current for 40 Hz and the rated torque both
for motoring and braking.
(e) CaJculate the frequency and stator current for half the rated torque and a motor
speed of 1000 rpm, both for motoring and braking.
The motor of problem 6.14 is fed by a nonsinusoidal supply. CaJculate the motor
torque, current, and efficiency at the rated speed if the fundamental, fifth and seventh
harrnonic phase voItages are 254 V, 100 V, and 40 V, respectively. Neglect higher
harrnonics, friction, windage, core loss, and skin effect.
7
Control of Induction Motors
by AC Voltage Controllers
The speed control of induction motors by stator voltage control has been described in
section 6.4.1. It has been shown that a class D design squirrel-cage induction motor
should be used for wide variation of speed. Since the torque to current ratio decreases with voltage, the method is suitable for applications requiring a low torque at
low speeds.
The variation of motor voltage is obtained by ac voltage controllers. It may be
recalled that the function of ac voltage controllers is to allow a variable ac voltage of
the same frequency to be obtained from a fixed ac voltage. However, this conversion
is obtained at the expense of a low power factor and a considerable amount of harmonics in th output voltage of ac voltage controllers. The harrnonic content increases and the power factor decreases with the decrease in output voltage. The
harmonics increase the losses and require derating of the motor. The motor torque
capability, which is already low at low voltages, is further reduced ..
The induction motors controlled by ac voltage controllers find wide applications in fan, pump, and crane drives.
7.1 AC VOLTAGE CONTROLLER CIRCUITS
Figure 7.1 shows two commonly used symmetrical 3-phase ac voltage controller circuits for wye- and delta-connected stators, respectively. For small size motors, each
antiparallel thyristor pair can be replaced by a triac. Connection el can also be used
with a delta-connected stator. With a delta connection, a third harmonic current may
circulate, increasing the motor losses. Each thyristor pair of circuit el carries the
line current, whereas each thyristor pair of circuit e2 carries only the phase current.
273
274
Motors by AC Voltage Controllers
T,
Chap.7
A---------"""
nn n. '-----"
e
Stator
windings
Figure 7.1
e ---------
3-phase ac voltage controller circuits.
Thus, in C2 the thyristor current rating is reduced by a factor of v'3. Under normal
operation, the maximum voltage to which the thyristors of circuit C, are subjected is
(Y3/2) times smaller than that of the thyristors of circuit C22 However, under abnormal conditions, the maximum voltage is the same (that is, equal to the peak of
the line voltage). Such an abnormal condition can arise if thyristors in one of the
phases are rendered conductive by device failure or misfiring, when all phases are
intended to be off. Since such abnormal conditions can always arise, the thyristor
voltage rating is chosen to be higher than the peak of the line voltage. Thus voltage
controller C2 would cost less than circuit C i- However, circuit C2 can be used only
when the machine is delta-connected and both ends of the phase windings are available. This situation may not exist in many commercially available motors.
A cheaper controller can be obtained by replacing one thyristor in each phase
of circuit C, by a diode. This approach introduces even harmonics. The predominant
harmonic is the second, compared to the fifth and third forothe circuits C, and C2,
respectively. The presence of the low-frequency second harmonic increases the
losses considerably, particularly at low motor speeds.
Asyrnmetrical circuits are obtained by removing one or two antiparallel thyristor pairs from circuit C, and connecting corresponding motor phases directly to the
source. These asyrnmetrical circuits cause asyrnmetrical operation of the induction
motor and increase harmonics. The asyrnmetrical operation and the large harmonic
content substantially derate the motor. The torque capability, which is already low at
low speeds, is greatly reduced. Hence these asymmetrical circuits are not used.
The thyristors of the controllers of figure 7.1 are fired in the sequence of their
numbers with a phase difference of 60 For circuit C" the firing angle a is measured from the instant the phase voltage VAN has a zero value. For circuit C2, the fir0
Sec.7.2
Four-Quadrant
ing angle is measured

define an angle
Control and Closed-Loop Operation
275
from the instant the line voltage V AB has a zero value. Let us
(7.1)
where (Rin + jXin) is the input impedance of the induction motor.

For the firing angle a::; C/>, the motor terminal voltage remains constant and
nearly equal to the supply voltage. Both motor voltage and current are sinusoidal.
For higher values of a, the current flows discontinuously
and the motor voltage decreases with an increase in a. The zero motor voltage and current are reached at
a = 1500 and a = 1800 for the circuits el and e2, respectively. Because of the discontinuous conduction and dependence of Rin and Xin on the motor slip s, the analysis of the induction motor fed by an ac voltage controller becomes complicated. The
speed-torque characteristics
also deviate considerably from those obtained with the
variable sinusoidal ac voltage (fig. 6.11).
The motor voltage and current waveforms depend on the firing angle. A typical current waveform for circuit el at a = 600 is shown in figure 7.2. The delay
from the instant the phase current reaches zero to the firing of the succeeding thyristor in that phase is called hold-off angle y.
o
Figure 7.2 The waveform of the phase
current iA fe;a = 60 for the controller
of Fig. 7.1.
7.2 FOUR-QUAORANT
OPERATION
wt
el
CONTROL
ANO CLOSEO-LOOP
The 3-phase circuits of figure 7.1 can provide forward motoring and reverse plugging
operations. The use of the class O design squirrel-cage motor allows higher torques
to be produced, with reduced currents, for low-speed motoring and high-speed braking operations. The four-quadrant operation with plugging is obtained by the use of
the circuit of figure 7.3a. Thyristor pairs A, B, and e provide operation in quadrants I and IV. The speed-torque curve at a fixed stator voltage and for operation in
quadrants I and IV is shown by a solid line in figure 7.4. Use of thyristor pairs A' ,
B, and e' changes the phase sequence, and thus gives operation in quadrants 11 and
111. The speed-torque curve for the same stator voltage and operation in quadrants 11
and III is shown in figure 7.4 by a dotted line. While changing from one set of
thyristor pairs to another-that
is, from ABe to A'Be'
and vice versa-care
should be taken to ensure that the incoming pair is activated only after the outgoing
276
Chap.7
A---_- ...A
e'
B---+-4---+
A'
e ----------+
(a)
A-_----YH-+
B-----+-++
e -----+f-- ... e
(b)
Figure 7.3
Four quadrant ac voltage controllers.
pair is fully tumed off. Failure to satisfy this condition will cause short circuiting of
the supply by the conducting thyristors of the two pairs. The protection against such
a fault can be provided only by the fuse links and not by the current control. Therefore, when changing from one set of thyristor pairs to another, the firing pulses are
withdrawn to force the current to zero. After the current zero is sensed by the zerocurrent sensor, a dead time of 5 to 10 ms is allowed to ensure that al! the thyristors
Sec.7.2
Four-Quadrant
Control and Closed-Loop
277
Operation
/
Plugging
/
o
\ <,
Motoring
Figure 7.4 Speed-torque curves for a

fixed stator voltage and +ve and -ve
phase sequence.
of the outgoing pair have in fact turned off. Now the pulses are released to the
incoming set of thyristor pairs. In the multiquadrant operation, the current control
(section 3.9) is employed to restrict the motor current below a safe value.
The four-quadrant operation can also be obtained by the circuit of figure 7.3b.
It consists of three pairs of thyristors A, B, and e and a contactor with two normally
open and two normally closed contacts. The operation in quadrants 1 and IV is obtained when the contactor is off and the operation in quadrants II and III is obtained
when the contactor is on. To reduce the contactor rating, the switching operation is
done after the current ceases to flow. Thus, when the need for changeover arises, the
thyristor gate pulses are withdrawn to force the current to zero. The contactor is allowed to operate some time after the current zero is sensed.
Por closed-loop speed control, the inner-current control scheme described in
section 5.1 (fig. 5. lb) for a de motor drive is employed. It consists of an innercurrent control loop and an outer speed loop. Por l-quadrant operation, the voltage
controllers of figure 7.1 are used. Por 4-quadrant operation, the voltage controllers
of figure 7.3 are employed. A closed-loop scheme for the single-quadrant control is
shown in figure 7.5. A four-quadrant closed-loop drive can be realized by using the
AC supply
L 1
Wm
Speed
controller
Current
limiter
r,
L
Current
controller
3-phase
voltage
controller
Firing
circuit
Tachogenerator
Figure 7.5
Single quadrant closed-loop speed control.
Control of Induction Motors by AC Voltage Controllers
278
Chap. 7
AC Supply
r:::
Absolute
value
circuit
Speed
controller
t::
J[
Current
limiter
l.
Current
controller
Ve
Ve
a
a
3phase
voltage
controller
Firing
circuit
~-------------------------------------------------------{~
Tachogenerator
Figure 7.6
Four quadrant closed-loop speed control.
voltage controller of figure 7.3a and the drive of figure 7.6. Let us consider the operation of the drive for speed reversal. When the speed command is set for the reverse
direction, the speed error ewm reverses and exceeds a prescribed limit. The master
controller, on sensing this, withdraws the gate pulses to force the current to zero.
After the zero current is sensed, the master controller provides a delay of 5 to 10 ms
to ensure that the outgoing thyristors have tumed off. Now the gate pulses are released to the other set of thyristors. The drive first decelerates and then accelerates in
the reverse direction at a constant maximum allowable current and finally settles at
the desired speed.
7.3 FAN OR PUMP ANO CRANE HOIST ORIVES
Two major applications of induction motors fed by ac voltage controllers are fan or
pump drives and tbe crane boist drive.
7.3.1 Fan and Pump Orives
In fan and pump drives, the torque varies as tbe square of the speed and the power as
the cube of the speed. The volume of the fluid delivered by the pump or fan against
a constant pressure head is proportional to the motor power, and, hence, to the cube
of speed. Tbus, a small reduction in speed from fullload will cause a large reduction
in fluid flow. For example, a 53.6 percent reduction of speed below the full-load
value reduces the fluid flow to 10 percent. Therefore, most of the pump and fan
drives require speed control only in a narrow range. Because torque reduces as tbe
square of the speed and the speed control is required only in a narrow range, the ac
voltage controller fed class O squirrel-cage induction motor with a full-load slip of
0.1 to 0.2 is found suitable for tbese applications. From equation (6.17) the motor
torque is given by
(7.2)
Sec.7.3
279
AIso
T L = Cw2m = C(1 where C is a constant.
If the friction, windage,
S)2W2
(7.3)
ms
and core loss torques are neglected.

(7.4)
T=TL
Substituting
term gives
from equations
(7.2) and (7.3) in equation

.
l'
K[O v'"R:
- S)Vs]
the
(7.5)
where
K
(7.6)
Y(Cw~sl3)
If the magnetizing branch of the equivalent

= 1; and hence from equation (7.5)
circuit of figure 6.1d is ignored,
then
I,
Is
K[O v;&Vs]
(7.7)
Equation (7.7) shows that for a given slip, the motor current is inversely proportional to the square root of the rotor resistance, R;. If the full-load stator current and
the motor slip are denoted by Iraledand sraled' respectively, then from equation (7.7)
K[(l-
I
rated
Dividing
equation
(7.7) by equating
v'"R:r
(1 -
Iraled
s)Vs
(7.9)
(1 - Sraled)Ysraled
value of I, occurs is obtained by equating (dls/ds)
sm = 1/3
Substitution
from equation
(7. 10) into equation

Imax
--
(7.8)
(7.8) gives
r,
The slip at which the maximum
equation (7.7) to zero, giving
Sraled)vS::;]
(7.10)
(7.9) gives
= --=-------==
Iraled
3\13
in
S rated)Y
(7.11)
Sraled
where Imax is the maximum value of I, - greater than the rated motor current.
Equation (7.11) suggests that the maximum current has a lower value for a
motor with a larger full-load slip. The ratio of maximum to rated motor current has
values of 1.35 and 1.07 for full-Ioad slips of 0.1 and 0.2, respectively. Therefore, if
a motor with a power rating equal to the full-load power requirement of the load is
chosen, it will be overloaded for speeds less than the rated speed.
280
Chap. 7
When a speed range from synchronous speed to two-thirds of snychronous

speed (or s = 1/3), or to a speed less than this, is required, then the motor current
rating will have to be selected as equal to Imax When this is done, the motor current
at fullload will be less than the rated current. Consequently, the full-Ioad power delivered by the motor will be less than the motor power rating and thus the motor will
be derated. The motor derating will be approximately equal to the ratio of rated to
maximum current. Thus, for full-Ioad slips of 0.1 and 0.2, the motor will be derated
by factors 0.74 and 0.93, respectively. Except when forced cooling is used, the motor cooling will be less at s = 1/3 compared to a full-Ioad speed. Hence, actual derating will be higher. These figures suggest that when considering derating, a higher
value of full-load slip is preferred. But then the full-load efficiency is adversely
affected. A compromise value of the full-Ioad slip is chosen considering these
aspects. It gene rally lies between 0.1 and 0.2.
The foregoing discussion does not account for the harmonics generated by the
ac voltage controller. As the motor terminal voltage is decreased to reduce speed,
harmonics in the stator and rotor currents increase. According to section 6.8.2 or
equation (6.108), the harmonic motor current value depends approximately on the
motor reactance alone. Hence the harmonic current remains nearly the same for
motors with 0.1 a~d 0.2 slips if they have the same reactance. Thus, the harmonic
current at s = 1/3 will not appreciably change by the increase in the full-Ioad slip.
When the additional heating of the motor due to harmonics is considered, the motor
derating will be more than just mentioned.
In a fan or pump drive, braking is not required, because the fluid pressure provides adequate braking torque. To maintain the constant fluid flow with variations in
pressure head and the nature of the pumped fluid, the drive is often operated with a
closed-Ioop speed control.
7.3.2 Crane Hoist Drive
The hoist drive on a crane is required to provide motoring and braking operations in
either direction, with a smooth switch-over from motoring to braking and vice versa.
Therefore, the motor is fed by the four-quadrant controller of figure 7.3a. Furthermore, it must operate smoothly at controlled speeds over a wide speed range irrespective of the loado The drive may, therefore, be operated with a closed-Ioop speed
control with inner-current control (fig. 7.6).
The use of a class O design squirrel-cage motor fed by an ac voltage controller
allows good braking and low-speed motoring torques to be obtained. But prolonged
operation under these conditions is not possible because of excessive current. Hence,
a wound-rotor induction motor with variable resistances in the rotor is used. By having a sufficiently large rotor resistance, a high torque with reduced motor current is
obtained. The motor heating is substantially reduced due to the reduction in current
and due to the fact that part of the heat dissipation occurs in the external resistor.
The variable resistance may consist of a few sections which are cut in and out by
contactors. Alternatively, a chopper controlled resistance (section 9.1) may be used.
By the use of combinations of ac voltage controller firing angles and rotor resistance
values, the motor characteristics are shaped to satisfy varying torque and speed requirements during motoring and braking.
Sec.7.3
281
7.4 AC VOLTAGE CONTROLLER STARTERS

AC voltage controllers are finding applications as induction motor starters. Because
of the stepless control of the motor voltage and the controlflexibility provided by the
low power control circuitry, the ac voltage controller starters have a number of advantages over conventional starters such as an autotransformer starter, a wye-delta
starter, and so on. Some of the advantages are smooth acceleration and deceleration;
ease in implementation of the current control; simple protection against singlephasing or unbalanced operation; reduced maintenance requirement in applications
requiring automatic cyclical starting and stopping; absence of the current inrush
which occurs in the open circuit transition to line voltage in the autotransformer and
wye-delta starters as explained in section 6.2.
When the operating conditions are favorable, the ac voltage controller starter
can allow energy savings by operating the motor at the optimum voltage as discussed
in the next section.

It was explained in section 6.6 that considerable savings in motor losses can be obtained by reduced voltage operation at light loads. In such applications, voltage control is used for the reduction of losses and not for speed control. The savings in
losses primarily depends on three factors: the loading on the motor, the magnitude of
the applied voltage, and the quality of the motor construction. The saving in losses is
more with l-phase motors than with three-phase motors.
The most significant factor affecting savings is the loading on the motor. The
lighter the load, the greater the savings. The duty cyele of the motor operation is
defined as the ratio of the full-Ioad period to the sum of the no-load and full-Ioad
periods. The applications with low-duty cyeles will allow greater savings in energy.
Applications where a motor operates at no load for a significant period of time inelude drill presses, cutoff saws, gang ripsaw, woodhog, reciprocating air compressors, machine tools, and industrial sewing machines. In such applications, the motor
is fed at a fixed voltage, as speed control is not required. Considerable savings in
energy can be obtained by operating them at a variable voltage.
The energy savings also depend on the supply voltage. A motor operating near
a distribution substation will have higher voltage than the one at the end of the distribution line. Therefore, the voltage reduction will allow greater savings. A badly
designed motor will draw more magnetizing current and will have higher core losses
from the poor quality of laminations and a larger air-gap. The reduced voltage operation under light loads will allow greater savings than for a well-designed motor.
The variation in the motor voltage can only be obtained by interposing an ac
voltage controller between the source and the motor. The ac voltage controller loss
and the additional motor loss from harmonic voltages substantially reduce the savings in energy. In most applications, the net savings in energy may not justify the
additional cost of an ac voltage controller. However, if the ac voltage controller
is also used for motor starting, then the same controller can be employed for loss
reduction.
282
Control of Induction Motors by AC Voltage Controllers
Chap. 7
REFERENCES
l. W. Shepherd, Thyristor Control of AC Circuits, Crosby Lockwood Staples, London,
1975.
2. G. K. Dubey, S. R. Doradla, A. Joshi, and R. M. K. Sinha, "Thyristorised power
controllers," Wiley Eastem, 1986.
3. D. A. Paice, "Induction motor speed control by stator voltage control," IEEE Trans. on
PAS, vol. PAS-87, Feb. 1968, pp. 585-590.
4. R. M. Crowder and G. A. Srnith, "Induction motor for crane applications,' lEE Jour,
Electric Power Applications, Dec. 1979, pp. 194-198.
5. T. M. Rowan and T. A. Lipo, "A quantitative analysis of induction motor performance
improvement by SCR voltage control," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-19,
July-Aug. 1983, pp. 545-553.
6. F. M. H. Khater and D. W. Novotny, "An equivalent-circuit
model for phase-back
voltage control of ac rnachines,' IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-22, Sept./Oct.
1986, pp. 835-841.
PROBLEMS
7.1 Calculate and plot the (Imax/Irated)versus Sratedrelation for Sratedvalues from 0.05 to 0.25.
Also plot the derating versus sratedcurve on the same axis.
7.2 In a pump drive, the fluid flow is to be varied from full to 50 percent. If the full-load slip
is 0.15, calculate the maximum motor current to rated current ratio and the motor
derating.
8
Frequency-Controlled
Induction Motor Orives
The rectifier-fed de motor is widely used in variable speed drives. It was shown in
section 6.4.2 that variable frequency control allows good running and transient performance to be obtained from a squirrel-cage induction motor. The squirrel-cage motor has a number of advantages over a de motor. It is cheap, rugged, reliable, and
longer lasting. Because of the absence of a commutator and brushes, it requires
practically no maintenance, it can be operated in an explosive and contaminated environment, and can be designed for higher speeds, voltage, and power ratings. It
also has lower inertia, volume, and weight. However, in general, the cost of variable
frequency supplies is higher than that of controlled rectifiers. Though the cost of a
squirrel-cage motor is much lower compared to that of a de motor of the same rating, the overall cost of a variable frequency ac drive is, in general, higher.
In special applications requiring maintenance-free operation, such as underground and underwater installations, and also in applications involving explosive
and contaminated environments, such as in mines and the chemical industry, variable frequency induction motor drives have already gained popularity. Because of
the advantages of squirrel-cage motors and variable frequency control, the variable
frequency ac drives find applications in traction, mill runout tables, pumps, fans,
blowers, compressors, spindle drives, conveyers, machine tools, and so on.
Due to the availability of power transistors with improved ratings and characteristics, general purpose low-power variable frequency drives are now available
with a cost comparable to that of de drives. The recent progress in GTOs may
provide variable frequency drives which will compete very well and probably replace de drives in medium and lower range high-power drives.
283
284
Induction
Chap. 8
Motor Drives
This chapter considers the implementation and performance of variable frequency drives employing power semiconductor converters. The foIlowing converters
are employed:
1. Voltage source inverter
2. Current source inverter and
3. Cycloconverter
. Inverters convert de to variable frequency ac. An inverter belongs to the voltage
source category if, viewed from the load side, the ac terminals of the inverter function as a voltage source. Similarly, an inverter which behaves as a current source at
its ac terminals is called a current source inverter.
Because of. a low internal impedance, the terminal voltage of a voltage source
inverter remains substantially constant with variations in load. It is therefore equally
suitable to single-motor and multi-rnotor drives. Any short-circuit across its terrninals causes current to rise very fast, due to the low time constant of its internal
impedance. The fault current cannot be regulated by current control and must be
cleared by fast-acting fuse links.
Because of a large internal impedance, the terminal voltage, of a current source
inverter changes substantially with a change in loado Therefore, if used in a rnultimotor drive, a change in load on any motor affects other motors. Hence, current
source inverters are not suitable for multi-rnotor drives. Since the inverter current is
independent of load impedance, it has inherent protection against short-circuits
across its terminals.
Y.a?
The cycloconverter allows a variable frequency ac supply with voltage or current source characteristics to be obtained from a fixed frequency voltage source.
1
8.1 CONTROL OF INDUCTION MOTOR BY VOLTAGE SOURCE

INVERTERS
The variable frequency control of an induction motor has been described in
section 6.4.2 and the effects of harmonics on the motor performance have been presented in section 6.8. It is useful to summarize salient points before the operation of
an induction motor fed from voltage source inverters is considered.
It was explained in section 6.4.2 that motor operation below the base speed is
carried out at a constant (V/f) ratio and that operation above the base speed is done
at a constant voltage. At low speeds, the (V/f) ratio may be increased to compensate
for the stator resistance drop. The operation of the drive at the maximum permissible
current allows constant torque operation from standstill to base speed and constant
power operation from base speed to critical speed at which the breakdown torque is
reached (figs. 6.13 and 6.14). Operation for speeds above critical speed is possible
at reduced power. In this speed range, the drive is usually controlled at a constant
slip speed to prevent pull-out. The range of constant power operation can be increased by the use of a motor with a higher breakdown torque. A motor has a higher
breakdown torque when its leakage reactance has a low value. When the leakage reactance is low, the motor has higher derating and torque pulsations in the presence of
harmonics, as explained next.
_.'
Sec.8.1
Motor by Voltage Source Inverters
285
The points stated in the previous paragraph for motoring operation are also
applicable to regenerative braking operation, with the exception that the constant
torque operation is available up to a speed higher than the base speed.
When the (V/f) ratio is increased to compensate for the stator resistance drop
at low speeds, during the motoring operation the motor saturates at light loads and
.may carry a current higher than the rated current.
Usually, a class B design squirrel-cage motor is employed. Some applications
may use the energy efficient class A designo
The operation of an induction motor on a nonsinusoidal supply has been described in section 6.8. Because the magnetizing reactance has a large value (fig. 6.lb
or d), the supply harrnonics are able to produce a negligible magnetizing current,
and hence, the flux remains essentially sinusoida!. The harrnonic rotor current, which
is independent of motor speed, depends on the harrnonic voltage and the motor reactance [equation (6.108)]. The motor reactance acts as a low-pass filter and substantially reduces high-frequency harrnonics in the rotor current. Consequently, a motor
with a high reactance is preferred when its terminal voltage has a high harrnonic content. Because the flux is essentially sinusoidal, the contribution of harrnonics to the
developed torque and power is negligible. However, harrnonic currents increase the
copper loss, leading to motor derating. The skin effect substantially increases the harmonic copper loss in deep-bar and double-cage rotors. They may not be used when
the harrnonic content is large. The interaction between the fundamental flux and the
fifth and seventh harrnonic rotor currents produces a pulsating torque six times the
fundamental frequency. Similarly, eleventh and thirteenth harrnonic rotor currents
produce a pulsating torque 12 times the fundamental frequency, but its magnitude is
comparatively much smaller. At low fundamental frequency, for which the motor
speed is low, the pulsating torques cause large fluctuations in speed, producing a
jerky or stepped motion and shaft cogging at the time of motor rversal. A high
motor reactance helps in reducing machine derating and torque pulsations. Hence a
class B design squirrel-cage motor with a large reactance must be employed when
the terminal voltage has a large harrnonic content. But then the breakdown torque
and the speed range of constant power operation reduce. The class A design motor
must be used only when the motor terminal voltage has' a negligible harmonic content.
The present section describes 3-phase voltage source inverters and the variable
frequency drives employing voltage source inverters.
8.1.1
Three-Phase
Voltage
Source
Inverter
The power circuit of a three-phase voltage source inverter is shown in figure 8.la. It
consists of six self-commutated semiconductor switches (see section 1.6.6) SIto S6
with the antiparallel diodes DI to D6' The switches need not have reverse voltage
blocking capability. They may be realized using power transistors, GTOs, MOSFETs, or inverter grade thyristors with forced commutation circuits. The relative
merits of these devices are given in section 1.6. For diodes DI to D6, fast recovery
diodes are employed. A snubber (not shown) is required for each switch-diode pair.
The motor, which is connected across terminals A, B, and C may have wye or delta
connection. The inverter may be operated as a six-step inverter or as a pulse-width
modulated (PWM) inverter as described in the following sections.
286
Induction
Drives
03
O,
Chap.8
Os
i"
O
r-~Vd
Motor
D.
O2
Os
(a)
iJ
..
.3.
2.
wt
iJ
c
i :t
wt
wt
iJ
c
i
wt
:6
wt
ic:t
wt
VAS
Vd
a
wt
wt
I \. I
I '1
I
I
IVI
IV I V Ilntervals
(b)
Figure 8.1
Three phase voltage source inverter.
Sec.8.1
8.1.2 Six-Step
287
Inverter
The control signals for the six switches of the inverter of figure 8. 1a, id to ic6' are
shown in figure 8.lb. In the in verter output voItage period of 2'TT radians (or T sec.),
each control signal has a duration of rr radians. The control signals are applied to the
switches in the sequence of their numbers, with a phase difference of 'TT /3 radians.
In figure 8.lb, the period T has been divided into six equal intervals. During each
interval the following switches receive control signals:
Interval
Control Signals
Applied To
Interval
Control Signals
Applied To
1
11
III
1,5,6
1,2,6
1,2,3
IV
V
VI
2,3,4
5,4, 3
5, 4, 6
A switch conducts and carries current in the direction of its diode when the control
signal is present and the switch is forward biased. A switch wilI always be forward
biased, except when its antiparallel
diode conducts and thus reverse biases the
switch by its voltage drop. In any case, either the switch or its antiparallel diode will
be in conduction during the presence of the control signal, and the current will be
free to flow in either direction.
Using this information
the waveforms
of line
voltages can be drawn. For example, during interval 1, the switch-diode pairs 1, S,
and 6 are in conduction. Hence, terminals A and
are connected to the positive terminal of the de source and terminal B is connected to the negative terminal of the de
source, giving the following values of line voltages:
VAB= Vd,
vBC = -Vd
and
VCA= O
The line voltage vAB is shown in figure 8.1 b. The line voltages VBCand VCAwill lag
behind vAB by 1200 and 2400, respectively.
For a wye-connected
load, the phase
voltages can be obtained in the same way. The phase voltage VANis al so shown in
figure 8.1 b.
The switch pairs (S 1> S4), (S3' S6), and (S5' S2) form three legs of an inverter.
The switches in the same leg conduct alternately. Some time must elapse between
the turn-off of one switch and turn-on of another switch in the same leg to ensure
that both do not conduct simultaneously.
Their simultaneous conduction will cause a
short-circuit of the dc source. The resultant current will rise very fast. This fault,
known as a shoot-through fault, can only be cleared by fast-acting fuse links.
In the operation under consideration,
a cycle of the line voltage or the phase
voltage is generated in six steps. Hence, when operating this way, the inverter is
known as a six-step inverter. The voltages vABand VANare described by the following Fourier series:
VAB= 2\13 Vd[sin(wt
'TT
+ 'TT/6) + SI sin(Swt - 'TT/6) + ~ sin(7wt + 'TT/6) ... ]

7
(8.1 )
288
VAN
Induction
Motor Drives
2V[d Sin wt + 5"

1. Sin 5wt + 71.7Sin
] wt ...
= 7r
Chap.8
(8.2)
The nns value of the fundamental phase voltage
(8.3)
The nns value of the phase voltage is

1
V = [ 7r
=
{J1ft3
Y2Vd
3
(13" Vd)V
d(wt)
2
1ft3(2
1ft3 3" Vd) d(wt)
f (13" Vd)V
1f
21ft3
d(wt)
}] 112
(8.4)
The hannonic content of line and phase voltages is the same. The different wavefonns are due to a different phase relationship between the harmonics and the fundamental. Only odd hannonics of the order k = 6n 1 are present, where n is an
integer. The tripplen (multiple of 3) hannonics are absent, and hence, there is no
problem of circulating current in a delta-connected stator winding.
The nature of the phase-current wavefonn for a wye-connected stator is shown
in figure 8.1b. This is also the output current iA of the inverter. It is shared between
the switch-diode pairs (SI' 01) and (S4' 04). Ouring the interval -s wt:S tr, when SI
receives the control signal, the pair (S lo 01) carries current iA; the positive iA is carried
by S lo and the negative iA flows through 01. Ouring the interval 7r:S wt:S 27r, when
S4 receives the control signal, iA is carried by the pair (S4' 04); the positive iA flows
through 04, and the negative iA is carried by S4. An identical wavefonn of iA is obtained for a delta-connected stator.
Equations (8.1) and (8.2) give the fundamental and hannonics in the phase
voltages of delta-Oand wye-connected stators, respectively. The analysis presented in
section 6.8 can be employed for the calculation of the motor performance. As explained in section 8.1 (or section 6.8), the developed torque can be obtained by
considering the fundamental alone. The equivalent circuit of figure 6.ld or equations (6.54) to (6.57) is used to calculate the developed torque and also the fundamental component of the current. The hannonic currents are obtained from equation (6.108).
Induction motor control requires the simultaneous variation of frequency and
voltage. The frequency of the inverter output voltage can be controlled by varying
the time period of one cycle. This is done simply by varying the duration of the control signals lel to ie6 (figure 8.lb). According to equations (8.1) and (8.2), the fundamental output voltage of this inverter is fixed. It can be varied by using the
methods described in the next section.
Sec.8.1
289
(a)
Filter
Controlled
rectifier
AC supply
Inverter
DC link
Ib)
Filter
AC supply
Diode
bridge
Inverter
Chopper
(e)
Figure 8.2
8.1.3 Six-Step
Inverter
Voltage
cootrol
in six-step
inverter
drive.
Voltage Control
The output voltage of a six-step inverter can be controlled by either of the following
methods:
1. Control of the de input voltage.
2. Control of the ac output voltage by the use of multiple inverters.
Control of DC Input Voltage
The fundamental component of the output voltage of an inverter can be changed by

controlling the inverter input voltage Vd' When the inverter is fed from a dc source,
as in the case of underground traction, battery-operated vehicles, drives powered by
solar cells, and so on, the dc input voltage of the inverter can be varied by connecting a chopper in between the source and the inverter, as shown in figure 8.2a. Depending on the application, the chopper can be a step-down or step-up. An L-C filter
is interposed between the chopper and inverter to maintain a ripple-free de voltage at
the input of the inverter, and thus, prevent the harmonics in the chopper output
voltage from interfering with the inverter, and the harrnonics in the inverter input
current from interfering with the chopper.
290
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap.8
When the supply is ac, the inverter input voltage can be varied by the schernes
shown in figure 8.2b and c. The scheme of figure 8.2b employs a controlled rectifier
for getting the variable de voltage. The main drawbacks of this scheme are the high
magnitude of low-frequency harmonics in the rectifier output voltage and source current, and the low power factor of the rectifier at low-output voltages. The purpose of
the filter is the same as stated in the previous paragraph. Because of the lowfrequency harmonics in the rectifier output voltage, the filter capacitor is much larger
than for the scheme of figure 8.2a. A large filter capacitor slows down the transient
response o the drive. The power factor can be improved and the filter size can be
reduced by operating the rectifier with controlled flywheeling. Further improvement in the power factor and a reduction in filter size is achieved by using a controlled rectifier with pulse-width modulation.P
The drawbacks of the scheme of figure 8.2b, just mentioned, are eliminated in
the scheme of figure 8.2c, which employs a diode bridge followed by a chopper.
The fundamental power factor remains unity under all conditions of operation and
fast response is obtained. The diode bridge can also provide common dc supply for
multiple inverters. However, the losses are increased due to the use of an additional
power stage.
When the filtering is ideal, the inverter output voltage waveform remains unchanged with a change in its magnitude. Hence, equations (8.1) and (8.2) are applicable to any value of the inverter output voltage. In practice, the filter becomes less
effective at low frequencies because of the low-frequency harmonics in the inverter
input current in all the schemes of figure 8.2 and the large harmonic content in the
output voltage of the rectifier of figure 8.2b. Consequently, the harmonic content of
the output voltage increases with the decrease in the motor speed. However, for the
analysis of the drive, the filtering is assumed to be ideal.
The schernes offigure 8.2a to e suffer from the following drawback,s; .
~ fI'-~.
Dl.st/t'niAN
1. Because of the presence of low-frequency harmonics, the motor losses are increased at all speeds causing deratinz of the motor. .
i4.1~.Y
..
s.
2. Torque pulsations are present at low speeds owing to the presence of fifth, seventh, eleventh, and thirteenth harmonics. cJ,.hld~
3. The harmonic content increases at low speeds, increasing the losses. The increase in the (V /f) ratio at low speeds to compensate for the stator resistance
drop may cause a higher motor current to flow at light loads due to saturation.
These two effects may overheat the machine at low speeds.
Drawbacks 2 and 3 require the minimum speed to be restricted to 10 percent of
base speed.
A thyristor inverter suffers from an additional drawback. The drive requires the
same current cornmutation capability at all speeds. But the commutation capability
of a thyristor inverter reduces with the reduction in the input de voltage. This problem is overcome by the use of a separate fixed voltage supply for the commutation
circuit. The inverters employing power transistors, MOSFETS, and GTOs do not
suffer from this problem, because these devices can be tumed off by the base or gate
drive. Because of the absence of commutation circuits, the GTO, MOSFET, and
Sec.8.1
transistor inverters have lower weight, volume,

pared to thyristor inverters.
and cost, and higher efficiency
291
corn-
Control of AC Output Voltage by the use of

Multiple Inverters
The fundamental component can be varied by adding the output voltages of two sixstep inverters with their control signals out of phase. If the phase difference between
the control signals is ip , then the phase difference between the inverter output
voltages will also be p. By controlling p from O to 1800, the fundamental component
can be changed from the maximum to zero. The resultant voltage has the same harmonics as the individual inverters but their proportion increases rapidly with the
decrease in the fundamental component. Hence, the speed range is limited to 25 to
30 percent of base speed. Since the inverters can be supplied by a common diode
. bridge, the input power factor is high and the drive transient response is fast.
Example 8.1
A 460 V, 60 Hz, 6 pole, 1180 rpm, Y-connected squirrel-cage induction motor has the
following parameters per phase referred to the stator: R, = 0.19 n, R; = 0.07 n,
X, = 0.75 n, X: = 0.67 n, and x, = 20 n
The motor is fed by a 6-step inverter, which in turn is fed by a 6-pulse fully-controlled rectifier.
1. If the vectifier is fed by an ac source of 460 V and 60 Hz, what should the
rectifier firing angle be to get the rated fundamental voltage across the motor?
2. Calculate the percent increase in copper los s of the machine at 60 Hz ,
compared to the value when fed by a sinusoidal supply. Neglect skin effect.
3. If the machine is operated at a constant flux,
(a) Calculate the inverter frequency at 600 rpm and rated torque.
(b) Calculate the inverter frequency at 500 rpm and half the rated torque.
AIso calculate the motor current.
Neglect the derating due to harmonics and use the equivalent circuit of figure 6.1 d.
Solution:
1. From equation (8.1), the fundamental rms line voltage of a 6-step inverter is
given by
(E8.!)
Also from equation (3.78), for a six-pulse rectifier,

3
(E8.2)
Vd =-Vm cos a
1T
where Vm = peak of ac source line voltage.

From equations (E8.!) and (E8.2)
3\16
VL = -2- Vm cos
1T
292
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap.
or
cos a =...J:, '--
v:
11'2
Here VL = 460 V,
Hence
cos a = 71'2/6V3
2.
From equation
x
6
V.
= 0.95
(6.1),
N s -----120f _ 120
.
Rated slip
(E8.3)
3Y6
v; = 460\12
or
the synchronous
18.25.
speed in rpm,
60 - 1200
rpm
1200 - 1180
1200
= 60 = 0.0167
From figure 6.1d

l' =
VL/V3
Hence,
+ R;/sF + (X, + X;F
VeR,
the rated rotor current is
1,R, --
Now
1200
= 60 X
Wm,
460/V3
007
2
0.19 + 0.~167
+ (0.75
= 57.66 A
+ 0.67)2
211' = 47T= 125.66 rad/sec.
Since
the rated torque is

_
T, - 125.66 57.66
)2 0.07 _
0.0167 - 332.7 N-m
From equation (6.108), the kth harmonic

rotor) at a per unit frequency a
I:rk- _
current (which is the same for the stator and
Vk
k(X,
(E8.4)
+ X;)a
where Vk is the harmonic

From equation (8.2)
rms phase voltage at a per unit frequency
a.
VI
Vk=-
(E8.5)
where VI is the fundamental

From (E8.4) and (E8.5)
r:
rk
VI
= ak2(X, + X;)
phase voltage at a per unit frequency
a.
(E8.6)
Sec.8.1
293
Hence nns harmonic current is
r, = a(X,
~ X;)
1 )112
cc
k4
~=S.fll.13
Neglecting harmonics higher than 13 gives

V
1
1
l )112
+ r + 1i4 + 134
(1
t, = a(X, ~ X;)
54
0.046V1
a(X, + X;)
(E8.7)
Substitution of the known values gives

1
= 0.046 x
(0.75
265.6
+ 0.67)
=86
. A
Hence, the nns rotor current
+ (8.6)2 = 58.3 A
I;r = V(57.66)2
Copper loss with sinusoidal source
+ 0.07)
= 3(57.66)2(0.19
= 2593 W
Copper loss with inverter supply
= 3(58.3)2(0.19 + 0.07) = 2651
Percent increase in copper loss

2651 - 2593
2593
2.2 percent
3. (a) It has been shown in section 6.4.2 that for a given torque the motor
operates at a fixed slip speed for all frequencies when the flux is maintained constant.
The slip speed in rpm at the rated torque
N,e
1200 - 1180 = 20 rpm
Hence, synchronous speed at 600 rpm

N,
= N + N,e-=
The inverter frequency
600
+ 20 = 620 rpm
= (620/1200) x 60 = 31
Hz
(b) The back ernf at the rated operation
Era1ed
r;[(R;/s)2
57.66[
+ X;2]1/2
(0~~~~7Y
+
(0.67)2] 1/2= 244.76 V
Torque at a constant flux is given by equation (6.44):

T
=~
Wm,
E~,edR;/(as) ]
R,r2/( as )2 + X,2r
(6.44)
294
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 8
Note that Wm, and X; in this equation are for rated frequency. Substituting the know-,
values gives
= _3
332.7
2
_ [(244.76)2 x 0.07/(as)]
125.66
-'-07)2 + (0.67) 2
sa
(O
or
or
1
_ 122.44- (~)2
as
(as)
+ 91.61 = O
which gives
-1 =
as
121.7
(E8.8)

a
Wm
(1 - s)wm,
500
1
0.417
1200 (1 - s) = (1 - s)
Substituting from equation (E8.8) for a gives

1
121.7s
0.417
(1 - s)

From equation (E8.8), a = 0.425
Thus, frequency = 0.425 x 60 = 25.5 Hz
I
Ir
= [(0.07
244.76
121.7)2 + (0.67)2]1/2
= 28.64
Machine fundamental phase voltage

VI =
1;[ ( R, +
~;y
+ a2(X, + X;?] 112
28.64 [( 0.19
O 07
)2
+ 0.~193 + (0.425
] 1/2
x 1.42)2
= 110.68 V
Taking VI as a reference vector
1; = 28.64/-9
1 =~
aXm
/-90
110.68 /-90
0.425 X 20
1, = 1; + 1m = 28.64/-9
= 13.02/-90
+ 13.02/-90
Sec.8.1
295
or
1, = 33.27 A
From equation (E8.7),
I h-
0.046VI _ 0.046 X 110.68 - 8 44

A
a(X, + X;)
0.425 x 1.42
.
The rms input current = (1;
+ I~)1/2
+ (8.44)2]1/2= 34.32
= [(33.27)2
Example 8.2
If the drive of example 8.1 is operated at a constant (V/f) ratio, calculate the inverter
frequency and the stator current at half the rated torque and 500 rpm. Neglect derating
due to harmonics and use the equivalent circuit of figure 6.1d.
Solution:
The torque for a constant (V/f) ratio is given by equation (6.54):
T = ~
Wm,
V~R;/(as)
R,
a
+ R; 2 + (X + X ')2
as
(6.54)
Note that VI' Wm" and (X, + X;) in this equation are for the rated machinefrequency.
From example 8.1, Wm, = 125.66 rad/sec., VI = 265.6 V
T = 0.5 x 332.7 = 166.35 N-m
Subsituting the known values in equation (6.54) gives
166.35 = _3_.
(265.6)2 x 0.07/(as)
125.66 (0.19
a
+ 0.07)2 + (1.42)2
as
or
. (0.19
0.07)2
--+-a
as
0.71
+2 _--as
(E8.9)
Now Wm = 500 x 21T/60 = 52.36 rad/sec.

or
a=
52.36
0.417
=-(1- s)125.66
(1- s)
(E8.1O)
Equations (E8.9) and (E8.1O) can be solved by iteration. For an assumed value of s,
a is obtained from equation (E8 .10). These values of a and s are substituted in
equation (E8.9) to check whether it is satisfied. If not, the calculations are repeated for
another value of s. The iteration gives the following values:
s=0.0181
a = 0.4247
Hence, the inverter frequency = 0.4247 x 60 = 25.5 Hz
296
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 8
At 25.5 Hz, VI = a x 265.6 = 112.76 V
1'r -
VI
/
V(Rs + R;/s}2 + a2(Xs + X,)2 -tan
112.76
2
007
0.19 + -O . 8
+ (0.4247
.01 1
= 21.49 / -8.40 A
27.49 / -8.40
1;+ I, =
ls =
a(X, + X;)
(R, + R;/s)
/
_ +tan
112.76 /-900=
0.4247 X 20
=~/-900=
aXm
-1
1.42)2
13.27/-900
_1
0.4247 x 1.42
0.19+0.07/0.0181
+ 13.27 / -900 A
Hence, 1, = 32.2 A
From equation (E8. 7) of example 8. 1,
1h-
0.046VI _ 0.046 x 112.76 - 8 6

A
a(Xs + X;)
0.4247 X 1.42
.
The rms input current = (1; + I~)1/2
= (32.22 + 8.62)1/2 = 33.3 A.
Example 8.3
If the drive of example 8.1 is driving a load requiring rated power for all speeds greater
than base. speed, calculate the torque, frequency, stator current, efficiency, fundamental
power factor, and motor power factor for a speed of 1300 rpm. Use the equivalent circuit of figure 6.ld and neglect friction, windage, core loss, skin effect, and derating
due to hannonics.
Solution:
From example 8.1,
Ratedpower=332.7x
Wm
1300 x 21T
.
60
= 136 rad/ sec .
Torque =
(1180 x 21T)
60
=41.11 kW
41.11 x
136
= 302 N-m
From equation (6.56) for a> l

T=~[
ms
(Rs
~:y
V;,edR;/(as)
+ a2(Xs + X;)2
Substituting known values gives

(265.6)2 x 0.07/(as)
302 = -- 3 . -'-----'-.,----'--'---'-125.66 (
O 07)2
0.19 + _-s- + a2(1.42)
Sec.8.1
297
which- gives
0.19
+ 0.07)2 + a2(1.42)2 =0.39

s
(E8.11)
as

Wm
1
a=---=----Wms (1 - s)
1300
1
1200 (1 - s)
(E8.12)
Solution of equations (E8.11) and (E8.12) by iteration gives

s = 0.0172
and
a = 1.102
Hence, frequency = 60 x 1.102 = 66.1 Hz

Now
r: =
r
VI
V(R,
+ R;/s}2 + a2(X, + X;)2
265.6
= 58.53 A
0.07 2 (
)2
0.19 + 0.0172 + 1.102 x 1.42
As expected this is equal to the rated rotor current. Phase angle of
reference vector VI
= tan
Y;
-1 a(X,+X;)
-I(
1.102 X 1.42 )
020
= tan
=2.
R, + R;/s
0.19 + 0.07/0.0172
Y; = 58.53 /20.2
VI
L, = jaX
265.6
/ _-;"{\O
x 20 = 12.05c2Q.. A
= jl.102
Y, = Y; + Ym = 58.53/-20.2
+ 12.05/-90
= 63.7/-
30.4
From equation (E8.7) of example 8.1

I h=
0.046VI
0.046 X 265.6
=
=78A
a(X, + X;)
1.102 X 1.42
.
Input current = 1 =
O; + I~)1J2
= (63.72
+ 7.82)"2
64.2 A
Power developed = TWm = 302 x 136 = 41.07 kW

According to the equivalent circuit of figure 6.1 d,
copper loss = 3(1;2 + I~) (R, + R;)
= 3(58.532 + 7.82) (0.19
Power input = 41.07
+ 0.07) = 2.72 kW
+ 2.72 = 43.79 kW
.
41.07
Efficiency = 43.79 = 94 percent
with respect to the
298
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 8
Fundamental power factor = cos 30.4 = 0.86

From equations (8.3) and (8.4), rms phase voltage
0
1T
(E8.13)
V=-V
3
= 1.047 x 265.6 = 278.1 V
Apparent power = 3VI = 3 x 278.1 x 64.2 = 53.56 kVA
Power factor =
real power
43.79
= -= 0.82.
apparent power
53.56
8.1.4 PWM Inverters
The drawbacks of 6-step inverter drives, described in the previous section, are eliminated in pulse-width modulated (PWM) inverter drives, shown in figure 8.3. The
PWM inverters also have provision for the control of the output voltage; hence they
can be supplied from a fixed de voltage. When the mains supply is de, the scheme of
figure 8.3a is used. When the supply is ac, the inverter is supplied from a diode
bridge as shown in figure 8.3b, giving unity fundamental power factor. Because of
a low harmonic content in the output voltage of a diode bridge and in the input current of a PWM inverter, the filter components are small; consequently drive response
is fast.
Because of a low harmonic content in the inverter output voltage, the drive has
smooth low-speed operation, free from torque pulsations and cogging, and with a
lower derating of the motor and higher efficiency. Because of a constant de bus
voltage, a number ofPWM inverters with their associated motors can be supplied
from a common diode bridge and the commutation problem associated with a 6-step
thyristor inverter, as explained in the previous section, is eliminated. These advantages, however, are obtained at the expense nf a complexcontrol and a higher switching loss due to a higher frequency operation of the switches.
(a)
Filter
AC supply
Diode
bridge
PWM
inverter
DC link
(b)
. Figure 8.3
Pulse width modulated inverter drives.
Sec.8.1
299
There are a number of schemes of PWM. Prominent among these are sinusoidal PWM, I PWM with uniform sampling.i" "optimal" PWM techniques based
on the minimization of certain performance criteria5-II-for
example, selective harmonic elimination.v? optimization of efficiency.P"!" minimization of torque pulsations;" and so on. While the sinusoidal pulse-width modulation and the modulation
with uniform sampling can be implemented using analog techniques, the optimal
pulse-width modulation techniques require the use of a microprocessor,
with the exception of the scheme described in reference 7.
All these schemes use the power circuit of figure 8.la.
Sinusoidal
Pulse-Width Modulation
voltages va' Vb' and Ve of a variable amplitude A are compared in three separate comparators with a common isosceles triangular carrier wave
VT of a fixed amplitude Am, as shown in figure 8.4a. The outputs of comparators 1,
2, and 3 form the control signals for the three legs of the inverter formed by switch
pairs (SI' S4), (S3' S6), and (S5' S2), respectively (fig. 8.la). Let us consider the operation of the pair (S 1, S4), which controls the voltage of the machine phase A with
respect to the imaginary middle point of the de source, O. This is explained in figure 8.4b where the reference wave Va and the carrier wave VT are drawn on a cornmon time axis for a positive half-cycle of Va. Switch SI receives the control signal
when va> VT, and switch S4 receives it when Va < vT' The resultant waveform of VAO
is shown in the figure. The waveforms of figure 8.4b are drawn for the case when a
cyc1e of the reference wave consists of 12 cyc1es of the triangular wave. One can
similarly draw voltages VBO and Vco by considering the operation of switch pairs
(S3' S6) and (S5' S2), respectively. The modulation is called sinusoidal PWM because
the pulse width is a sinusoidal function of its angular position in the cyc1e. The modulation is also known as triangulation or PWM with natural sampling. The line voltage VAB is obtained by subtracting VBOfrom VAO' Similarly the line voltages VBCand
VCAare obtained. Production of the line voltage waveform vAB when each cyc1e of
the reference wave has 6 cyc1es of triangular wave is shown in figure 8.5.
The frequency of the fundamental component of the motor terminal voltage is
the same as that of the reference sinusoidal voltages. Hence, the frequency of the
motor voltage can be changed by changing the frequency of the reference voltages.
The ratio of the amplitude of the reference wave to that of the carrier wave, m, is
called the modulation index, Thus,
Three-phase reference
A
m=-
(8.5)
Am
The fundamental
(rms) component
in the waveform
mVd
VI
=2\72
vAO is given by
(8.6)
Thus, the fundamental voltage increases linearly with m until m = 1 (that is, when
the amplitude of the reference wave becomes equal to that of the carrier wave). For
m > 1, the number of pulses in vAO becomes less and the modulation ceases to be
sinusoidal PWM.
300
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 8
Reference
sine-wave
generator
Comparators
Triangular
wave
generator
(a)
..
vAO
0.5 Vd
-0.5 Vd
Notch
(b)
Figure 8.4 Principie of sinusoidal pulse width modulation:

signals, (b) modulated waveform for p = 6.
(a) generation
of control
The waveforrn V AO contains harrnonics which are odd muItipIes of the carrier
frequency fe (that is, fe' 3fe, 5fe, and so on). The harrnonics which are even multipIes of the carrier frequency are zero. The waveforrn also contains sidebands centered around multipIes of fe and given by
fh=Kfckf
(8.7)
Sec.8.1
301
VAO
0.5 Vd
1T
21T
wt
-0.5 Vd
"l
0.5 Vd
1T
21T
wt
21T
wt
r,.
1T
lo-
Figure 8.5
Sinusoidal pulse width modulation.
where fh and f are the frequeneies of the sidebands and the referenee signal, respectively, in Hz. K and k are integers and K + k is always an odd number. The harmonies and sidebands are listed in table 8.1. The bands whieh are eentered on the earrier
frequeney and its odd multiples eomprise upper and lower sideband eomponents of
equal amplitudes and displaeed by even multiples of the referenee frequeney. The
bands eentered around the even multiples have upper and lower sidebands displaeed
by odd multiples of the referenee frequeney. The magnitudes of the band frequeney
harrnonies deerease rapidly with the inereasing distanee from the band eenter. Furthermore, the width of a band inereases with the inerease in the modulation index.
302
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap.8
TABLE 8.1 Harmonics in Sinusoidal PWM

Harmonics
harmonics
side bands
K=I,k=2,4,6
K = 2, k = 1,3,5,
fe
fe 2f
fe 4f
etc.
2fe f
zr, 3f
etc.
...
K = 3, k = 2, 4, 6, ...
3fe
3fe 2f
3fc 4f
etc.
Let us define a-ratio p as

fe
p=-
(8.8)
When p is large, the frequency of the harmonics is large compared to the fundamental. The nominal leakage inductance of the machine is able to filter out the harmonics and the current approaches a sinusoidal waveform.
The modulation is said to be synchronous when p is an integer and the carrier
wave is syrnrnetrical with respect to three-phase reference voltages Va' Vb, and Ve'
These conditions will be satisfied when p is an integer multiple of 3. When this condition is not satisfied the modulation is called asynchronous or free-running. For an
even p, even harmonics will be present in V AO, according to table 8.1. This will be
true even for the synchronous modulation with a p which is an even multiple of 3.
Reference 17 has presented harmonic analysis of the line voltage for p which is
an odd multiple of 3. It has been shown that the amplitudes of the pth and its integermultiplied harmonics are zero. Thus, the band center frequency harmonics are eliminated in this case. The sideband frequency harmonics are given by table 8.1. The
predominant harmonics among these are p 2 and 2p l.
In asynchronotTS modulation, the phase relationship between the reference
waves and the carrier wave is not fixed. Consequently the pulse pattern does not repeat itself identically from cycle to cycle. This introduces subharmonics of the reference wave frequency and dc component. The subharmonics cause low-frequency
torque and speed pulsations known as frequency beats. When p is large, the de and
subharmonic components have negligible magnitude. Hence, the torque and speed
fluctuations are also negligible. When p is small, they have appreciable magnitudes.
Therefore, for small p, synchronous modulation should be employed and p should
preferably be an odd multiple of 3.
As mentioned earlier, the boundary of the sinusoidal modulation is reached
when the modulation index m = l. For m = 1, the amplitude of the fundamental in
the waveform VAO (fig. 8.5) is (Vd/2). An increase ofm beyond 1 increases the fundamental component with a relationship which is no longer linear. The harmonics
which are odd multiples of the fundamental frequency (or reference frequency) are
also introduced. The number of pulses in the waveform also reduces. When m is
made sufficiently large vAO becomes a square wave and the line voltage waveform
becomes a 6-step waveform, and the inverter operates like the 6-step inverter described earlier. The amplitude of the fundamental component of v AO reaches the
maximum value of (2Vd/7T-). Note that the amplitude of the fundamental on the
boundary of the sinusoidal PWM is only 78.5% of the maximum value. To make full
Sec.8.1
303
use of the inverter voltage capability, the modulation index should be increased beyond 1 until a 6-step operation is reached, even though this introduces lower-order
harrnonics and the relationship between the amplitude of the fundamental and m is
nonlinear. The modulation with m > 1 is called overmodulation.
The range of the sinusoidal PWM can be increased by mixing the reference
voltages Va' Vb' and Ve with third harrnonic voltages. 12 This makes the resultant reference wave flat-topped. Consequently, the width of the notch at the center becomes
zero at a fundamental voltage higher than the value obtained in the absence of the
third harrnonic voltages. A suitable magnitude of the third harrnonic is one-sixth
the amplitude of the fundamental reference waves. The corresponding increase in the
range of the voltage of the sinusoidal PWM is 15.5 percent. The mixing of the third
harrnonic does not distort the line voltage waveforms, since the third harrnonic components in the phase voltage waveforms are cancelled.
When operating with sinusoidal PWM, to minimize the effect of harrnonics on
the motor performance, p should be made as large as possible by operating the
switches at the highest possible frequency. The device capabilities, and the modulation and inverter operation requirements impose certain restrictions on the value of p
and the frequency of operation of the switches. To avoid a short-circuit due to the
simultaneous conduction of the switches in the same leg of the inverter (fig. 8.la), a
fixed time delay, known as lock-out or dwell time must be provided between the
tum-off of one switch and the tum-on of another switch. When m approaches 1, the
notch width near the center (fig. 8.4b) approaches zero. The notch should have a
minimum time duration for a reliable tum-off of switches and snubber relaxation. In
a transistor inverter, failure to discharge the snubber capacitor during the on period
of the switch, increases the tum-off dissipation and may cause its failure by the second breakdown. For a large p, the minimum notch width in radians will be large for
a given minimum time duration. This restriction on the notch width reduces the
maximum voltage available from the sinusoidal PWM. Further, when the notches
are dropped, the machine voltage changes abruptly producing a current surge and a
consequent torque surge. In a transistor inverter, the current rating is increased due
to a low ratio of peak to continuous current rating of a transistor. In a thyristor inverter, the current rating of the commutation circuit will be increased, consequently
increasing the switching losses and cost of the inverter. The abrupt change in voltage
caused by the dropping of pulses can be eliminated by reducing m simultaneously
with the dropping of pulses. The reduction of m compensates for the increase in
voltage caused by the dropping of pulses. Alternatively, one can use methods described in reference 13. However, these additional provisions make the inverter control more complex.
With an increase in the frequency of operation of switches, the machine losses
decrease but the inverter switching losses increase. Thus beyond a certain frequency,
the drive efficiency falls. The increase in switching losses also derates the switching
devices and the associated components in the snubber and commutatioh circuits.
According to the foregoing discussion, the maximum value of p will have to be
restricted, depending on the switching capability of the device used to realize the
switches. A large value of p is realized using a fast device with low switching
losses. For these reasons, the power transistor is widely used in low-power and GTO
304
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap.8
may be preferred in medium-power applications. The MOSFET is the best from the
above considerations (very low switching loss, and so on); however, because of its
low power capability and large on state drop, it is yet to find application in drives.
The modes of induction motor operation with sinusoidal PWM inverter control
will now be described with the help of figure 8.6. In this figure, the frequency of the
carrier wave has been plotted against the ratio f/fb, where fb is the base frequency.
The base frequency is the inverter frequency on the boundary between the constant
torque and constant power region of a variable frequency drive. At low motor speeds
for which the fundamental frequency is low, the asynchronous or free-running rnodu.
lation is employed. The carrier frequency fe is maintained constant at the highest
possible value. As the modulation index m and the reference frequency f are increased to increase the motor speed, p reduces but remains sufficiently large to maintain a nearly sinusoidal current through the motor. A smooth operation, free frorn
torque pulsations, cogging, and frequency beats is obtained. At a suitable value of
reference frequency, the operation is shifted to synchronous modulation. For this,
the carrier frequency fe is reduced to get the frequency ratio p = p i- Now fe is changed
with f at a constant ratio p.. Before fe becomes large enough to violate the minimum
notch time restriction, it is reduced to obtain p = P2 where P2 < p.. With the frequency ratio at P2, the operation is brought close to the boundary of the sinusoidal
PWM. Now with the frequency ratio set at P3' at the base frequency the modulation
ceases and 6-step operation of the inverter is reached. The motor operation changes
from constant torque to constant power operation. For higher frequencies, the inverter functions as a 6-step inverter.
Beyond the boundary of sinusoidal PWM, because of the high harmonic content, the machine losses increase substantially causing its derating. Torque pulsations
are also present. Although they are filtered out by the motor inertia, giving ripplefree speed, they adversely affect the life of the motor.
fe
iv
P2
P - P3
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
fb
Asynehronous
r--l---1
r--eonstant
1.
----1
Synchronous ---6.step
torque-+-eonstant
power---1
Figure 8.6 Variationof the carrier

frequency fe with (f/fb) ratio.
Sec.8.1
Putse-Width Modulation
Sampling
305
with Uniform
The PWM modulation with uniforrn sampling is shown in figure 8.7. Like sinusoidal
PWM, it also uses a set of three-phase referenee voltages Va, Vb, and Veand a common triangular carrier wave with a period Te' The figure shows the production of the
modulated waveform VAO of phase A with respect to the imaginary neutral of the de
supply (fig. 8.la). The reference wave Vais sampled bya sample-and-hold circuit at
a regular interval Te' This produces the waveform VR(fig. 8.7a). The waveform VR
is compared with the triangular carrier wave (fig. 8.7b). The inverter switch SI is
wt
wt
(b)
v Aa
0.5 Vd
Fundamental
~/
-...
/-
'\
1/
O
I
-,
'--
-0.5 V d
"--
r--,
1'/
/'"
(e)
Figure 8.7
Pulse width modulatian with unifarm sampling.
'--
wt
306
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 8
given the control signal when vR> VTand switch S4 is given the control signal when
VR< VT' As a result the modulated waveform vAOis produced (fig. 8.7c). The fundamental component of vAOis also shown by the dotted line. It has the same frequency as that of the reference wave, and its amplitude depends on the amplitude of
the reference wave. Hence the magnitude and frequency of the motor voltage can be
controlled by controlling the frequency and amplitude of the reference wave. Since
the pulse widths are proportional to the amplitude of the reference wave at uniforrnly
spaced sampling times, the modulation is said to have uniform or regular sampling.
Compared to the sinusoidal PWM, the modulation with uniform sampling has
lower low-frequency harmonics. Since the phase relationship between the modular.
ing wave VRand the triangular carrier wave is fixed, even for the asynchronous mode
of operation, the subharmonics and the associated frequency beats are not present.
Selective Harmonic
Elimination
In this method, control of fundamental voltage is obtained with the simultaneous elimination ofundesirable harmonics. The waveform VAOshown in figure 8.8 is produced
by firing the inverter switches SI and S4 at the predetermined angles al, a2, ... ,an
during the period 0:5 wt :5 tt /2. During the period tt /2:5 wt :5 tt , the switches are
fired to make the waveform symmetrical around rr/2. If Mis the number of harmonics to be eliminated, then n is chosen to satisfy the relation M = n-l.
From the
Fourier series expressions (3. 109) to (3.111), because of the quarter wave symmetry
of the waveforms for kth harmonic,
(8.9)
and
4l
ak = rr
1T 2
' vAOsin kwt d(wt)
2V
= _d
tr
la
(+ 1) sin kwt d(wt) +
o
an
(_I)n-I
(-1) sin kwt d(wt)
f1T'2
(+ 1) sin kwt d(wt)]
+ 2(-cos kal + cos ka2 - ... + cos kan)]

n
= -k d [1 + 2:
rr
sin kcot d(wt) +
~-I
2Vd
= krr [1
fa
al
... + f
2V
(8.10)
(- I)P cos kap]
(8.11 )
p=1
Further,
(8. 12)
A total of n simultaneous equations are needed to solve for the values of variables al, a2' ... ,an. These equations are obtained by assigning the required value to
the fundamental and zero values to the (n - 1) harmonics to be eliminated. The procedure is explained by the following example.
Sec.8.1
307
Or-~---4----r---~--~---1----*---;----*--L---~
a,
wt
_ Vd
2
Figure 8.8
Selective harrnonic elimination.
The fifth, seventh, eleventh, and thirteenth harmonics must be eliminated to

remove low-speed torque pulsations. If the machine is Y-connected with an isolated
neutral, then the third and tripplen harmonics will not produce any motor current.
Since the number of harmonics to be eliminated is 4, n = 5. From equation (8.11),
a
2Vd
= -[1
1T
2Vd
as = 51T [1
+ 2(-cos a + cos a2 - cos a3 + cos a4 - cos as)]
+ 2( -cos 5a + cos 5a2 - cos 5a3 + cos 5a4 - cos 5as)]
(8.13)
=O
(8.14)
2Vd
a7 = 71T [1
+ 2( -cos Ta, + cos 7a2 - cos 7a3 + cos 7a4 - cos 7as)] = O
(8.15)
2Vd
= 111T[1 + 2( -cos lla + cos lla2 - cos lla3 + cos lla4 - cos 1las)] = O
(8.16)
2Vd[
a3 = 131T 1 + 2( -cos
13a
+ cos 13a2 ~ cos 13a3 + cos 13a4 - cos 13as)] = O

(8.17)
The nonlinear algebraic equations (8.13) through (8.17) can be solved numerically
for a specified value of the fundamental amplitude a and subjected to the constraints
of equation (8.12). By solving these equations for different fundamental amplitudes,
the variation of a, a2, ... , as with the fundamental can be obtained. Since the variation is nonlinear, a microprocessor with a look-up table of these angles may be used.
The elimination of low-order harmonics is obtained at the expense of an
increase in the next significant low-order and high-order harmonics. When the fundamental frequency is high, the remaining low-order harmonics are filtered out by
the machine leakage reactance, because their frequencies are large enough for the
machine reactance to dominate its resistance. However, when the fundamental frequency is low, the frequencies of the remaining low-order harmonics are not large
enough for the resistance to be negligible compared to the reactance. Hence they are
308
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap.8
not filtered out adequately. Consequently, the low-speed machine losses are more
compared to the sinusoidal PWM.15
The higher the value of n, the greater the number of harmonics that can be
eliminated. Hence, n is made as large as permitted by the device switching capability. At low values of the fundamental frequency, large values of n will be preferred. A large n at low frequency makes the look-up table unusually large, making it
desirable to use some other modulation method at low speeds.
PWM for Minimum L055 in Motor
In this modulation, the switching angles al' a2' ... ,an of the waveform of figure 8.8 are selected to obtain a specified value of the fundamental amplitude with a
mnimum harmonic copper loss. Such an approach allows improvement in efficiency
compared to the selective harmonic elimination method and the sinusoidal PWM.
From equations (6.108) and (6.117), the harmonic loss is given by
h=
k=3 5
3(Rsk + R;J
(X, + X;)2
(Vkk)2
(8.18)
where Rsk and R;k are respectively the stator and stator referred rotor resistances for
the kth harmonic. The resistance values are harmonic dependent because of skin effect. (X, + X;) is the leakage reactance of the motor at the fundamental frequency.
Vk is the rms value of the kth harmonic, thus
(8.19)
where ak is given by equation (8.11)
If skin effect is neglected
Ph=K
00 . (Vkk)2
(8.20)
k=3, 5,.
where K is a constant.
Equation (8.11) gives the amplitudes of the fundamental and harmonics. Substitution from equations (8.11) and (8.19) into equation (8.20) gives the harmonic
loss as a function of switching angles al, a2' ... ,an Using a suitable optimization
technique, such as steepest descent, the switching angles can be obtained to minimize Ph for a specific value of fundamental. By repeating these calculations for
several values of the fundamental, the variation of switching angles with the fundamental can be obtained. Since the variation is nonlinear, a microprocessor with a
look-up table of these angles may be used.
8.1.5 Braking and Multiquadrant Control
The phase-voltage and phase-current waveforms of a Y-connected motor fed by a
six-step inverter of figure 8.la, assuming ideal filtering of the current waveform is
shown in figure 8.9a. The devices under conduction during a cycle of the voltage
wave are also shown in the figure. The power input to the motor is given by
(8.2-1)
Sec.8.1
309
o
21T
I
I
I
I
I
D,
21T
I
I
I
S'--1 D4
S4-1
(a)
I
I
D'--1S,~D4
(b]
Figure 8.9 Induction motor phase voltage and phase current waveforms: (a) motoring,
(b) generating.
where
VI = rms value of the fundamental component of the phase voltage, V
and
I,
= rms fundamental phase current, A
cp
= phase angle between VI and I,
A cp less than 90 gives motoring operation. A reduction in frequency makes

the synchronous speed less than the motor speed. The relative speed between the rotating field and the rotor reverses. Hence, the rotor current and the corresponding
component of the stator current reverse, making cp more than 90. Consequently, the
power flow reverses and the machine operates as a generator, producing braking
torque. The phase voltage and phase current waveforms, and the devices under conduction for generator operation are shown in figure 8.9b. Both switches and diodes
take part in the motoring and generating operations. The direction of the instantaneous current on the de side of the inverter is positive when the switches are on and
it is negative when the diodes are on. The average value of this current changes from
positive to negative when the operation changes from motoring to generating. Since
the polarity of the de link voltage remains the same, the change of the average current direction reverses the flow of power.
Regenerative braking is obtained when the power flowing from the inverter to
the de link is usefully employed, either by absorbing it in the de link itself or transferring it to the ac mains as the case may be. Dynamic braking is obtained when the
power flowing into the de link is wasted in a resistance.
Let us return to the drives of figures 8.2 and 8.3 and consider how we can
make them operate under regenerative and dynamic brakings.
From the drive of figure 8.2a, a drive with regenerative braking capability
is obtained when a class C two-quadrant chopper is employed. The class C twoquadrant chopper permits the de link current to reverse and thus allows the transfer
of the power supplied by the inverter to the de mains. However, regenerative braking occurs only when the source is able to use this energy, either by storing it when
it is a battery or by delivering it to the parallel loads.
310
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap.8
In the drive of figure 8.2b, the de link current cannot reverse and the generated
power cannot be transferred to the ac mains by inversion. Addition of another fully
controlled rectifier in antiparallel with the present fully controlled rectifier will allow
the de link current to reverse. The added rectifier will work as an inverter transfer.
ring power to the ac mains from the de link. If the ac supply fails, the regenerative
braking will stop. Dynamic braking or mechanical brakes will be required to provide
braking in such a situation.
In the case of the drive of figure 8.2c, a class
two-quadrant chopper will be
required to transfer power from the dc link to the dc mains, and a dual con verter, instead of a diode bridge, will be required to transfer it to the ac mains. Such a drive
will be expensive and inefficient. Hence, the drive of figure 8.2c is not used when
regenerative braking is required.
Regenerative braking with a PWM in verter occurs in the same way as with a
6-step in verter. No additional circuitry is needed for regenerative
braking of the
drive of figure 8.3a. However, regenerative braking will occur only when the source
can use the power delivered by the inverter. In the case of the drive of figure 8.3b,
regenerative braking can occur when the power delivered by the inverter to the de
link can be supplied to parallel loads. This can happen when a number of inverter
drives are fed from a common diode bridge. When the power cannot be used by parallel loads, it can be transferred to the ac mains by inversion. For this, the diode
bridge in figure 8.3b should be replaced by a dual converter. During motoring, the
con verter is operated with a zero firing angle to maintain the fundamental power factor at unity. During regenerative braking, the firing angle is kept at the highest permissible value, again to maintain a good power factor. Instead of a dual converter,
one can also use a fully controlled rectifier in antiparallel with the diode bridge
(fig. 8.3). During motoring the rectifier is deactivated, and during braking it operates with the diode bridge in the simultaneous control mode (circulating-current
operation). Here also braking will fail if the ac supply fails.
Four-quadrant
operation can be obtained by any drive with regenerative braking capability. A reduction of the in verter frequency, to make synchronous speed
les s than motor speed, transfers the operation from quadrant 1 to II. The inverter frequency and voltage are reduced to brake the machine to zero speed. Now the phase
sequence of the inverter output voltage is reversed by interchanging the control signals between the switches of any two legs of the inverter - for example, between the
pairs (SI' S4) and (S3' S6)' This transfers the operation to quadrant III. The inverter frequency and voltage are increased to get the required speed in the reverse direction.
For dynamic braking, a braking resistor with a switch in series is connected
across the filter capacitor in the drives of figures 8.2 and 8.3. The generated power
charges the filter capacitor and its voltage rises. When the filter capacitor voltage
reaches a prescribed maximum value, the switch is tumed on, connecting the braking resistor across the filter capacitor. The energy generated and the energy supplied
by the filter capacitor are dissipated in the braking resistor. The capacitor voltage
falIs. When the voltage reaches a prescribed minimum value, the switch is turned
off. Again the capacitor voltage starts rising and the cycle repeats. The energy
should be prevented from flowing from the source to the braking resistor and the filter capacitor. In the drive schemes of figure 8.2, this is achieved by deactivating the
Sec.8.1
311
chopper/rectifier. In the PWM inverter drives of figure 8.3a, this is achieved by

keeping the capacitor voltage greater than the source voltage. In the drive of figure 8.3b, this is achieved by keeping the capacitor voltage greater than the peak of the
ac source voltage. Altematively, a switch can be used to disconnect the mains supply.
The drive with dynamic braking can also provide four-quadrant operation.
It can be obtained even when the supply fails. Because of the simplicity and the
reliability, dynamic braking is widely used. Except in the case of the drive of
figure 8.3a, regenerative braking capability is acquired by the addition of extra
equipment, which increases the cost, volume, weight, and complexity. Regenerative
braking should be employed only when the savings in energy is large enough to justify these expenses.
In dc traction, a cornmon de supply feeds a number of trains with their own
inverter-motor drives. When a train is regenerating, there may not be other trains to
consume all this power. Then the remaining power may be dissipated by dynamic
braking. When regenerating, the power which is not consumed is stored in the filter
capacitor and its voltage rises. When it reaches a prescribed maximum value, the
braking resistor is switched in. Now the generated power and a part of the energy
stored in the capacitor are used to supply the train loads and the braking resistor.
When the capacitor voltage falls below a prescribed minimum value, the braking resistor is switched off and the cycle repeats. Thus, only the amount of energy which
cannot be used is dissipated in the braking resistor. The capacitor voltage at which
the braking resistor is tumed off must be set higher than the de suppply voltage to
prevent the flow of energy from the de supply to the braking resistor. Itrnay be recalled from section 4.5.2, that the combination of regenerative and dynamic brakings
is called composite braking.
Example 8.4
For the brakingroperation
calculate
ofthe
drive of example 8.1 at a constant (V/O ratio,
1. The speed for a braking torque of 350 N-m and the inverter frequency of
40 Hz.
2. The inverter frequency, stator current, regenerated power, efficiency, and
power factor for a motor speed of 1000 rpm and a braking torque of 400 N-m.
Neglect friction, windage, core loss, and skin effect.
Solution:
From example 8.1 at 60 Hz, VI
1. At 40 Hz, a
VI = a x 265.6 =
40/60
2
3
x
265.6 V,
Wms
125.66 rad/sec.
2/3
265.6
177 V
Torque for a constant (V/f) ratio is given by equation (6.54)

a<1
(6.54)
312
Note that VI' WmS' and (X;

ing the known values
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap.8
+ X;) in this equation are for the rated frequency. Substitut-
- 350 = _3 - [
(265.6)2 X 0.07/(2s/3)
125.66 (0.19 x 3 0.07 X 3)2 (
)2
2
+ 2s
+ 1.42
or
(0.285
+ O.
~05X+ 2 = _ 0.~05
(E8.14)
This gives
X2+ 51.22x + 188.74 = O
(E8.15)
where x = l/s
From equation (E8.15) x = -47.22 or -4
Hence s = -0.02 or -0.25
Since the higher slip is for the operating point beyond the breakdown torque, the feasible value of s is -0.02.
Now, synchronous speed N, = (40/60) x 1200 = 800 rpm
Slip speed Ns( = -0.02 x 800 = -16 rpm
Hence, the motor speed = N, - Nsi = 800 - (-16) = 816 rpm
2. Substituting the known values in equation (6.54) (just given) gives
-400 = _3 - [ (265.6)2 x 0.07/(as)

125.66 0.19
.07 2 (
)2
-++1.42
a
as
...
or
0.19
( a
+ 0.07)2 + 2 = _ 0.295
as
(E8.16)
as
AIso from equation (6.43)

a=
Wm
(1 - s)wms
1000
1
=-----=-1200 (1 - s)
0.83
(1 - s)
Solution of equations (E8.16) and (E8.17) by iteration gives

s = -0.0205
a = 0.813
Hence, frequency = 0.813 x 60 = 48.8 Hz and

VI = 0.813 x 265.6 = 215.9 V
Now
-,~=======2=15T~9===========63A
)
(0.19
+ -0.~~05Y
+ (0.813 x 1.42)2
(E8.17)
Sec.8.1
Phase angle of
313
r: with respect to the phase voltage
= tan"! a(Xs + X;) = tan " 0.813 x 1.42 = 1600

Rs+R;/s
O 9-~
.1
0.0205
Hence,
r: = 63/-160
1 = 215.9 =
aXm
I, =
215.9
0.813x20
63/-160
= 1328
. A
+ 13.28/-90
= -59.2 - j21.55 - j13.28

= -59.2 - j34.8 = 68.67/-149S
Note that the phase difference between the fundamental stator voltage and current is
more than 90. Hence, power flows from the machine to the inverter.
From equation (E8. 7) of example 8.1,
Ih = 0.046V1
a(Xs+X;)
= 0.046 x 215.9 = 86 A
0.813 x 1.42
.
Hence the input current 1 = (1; + I~)1/2 = (68.672 + 8.62)1/2= 69.2A.

According to the equivaJent circuit of figure 6.ld,
copper loss = 3(I;2 + I~)(R, + R;)
= 3(632 + 8.62) (0.19 + 0.07) = 3.15 kW
Wm=
1000 x
60
27T
= 104.72 rad/sec.
Power developed = -400 x 104.72= -41.89 kW

Power output = -41.89 + 3.15 = -38.74 kW
Efficiency = (-38.74/-41.89)
x 100 = 92 percent
RMS input phase voltage V = 1.047V1 = 1.047 x 215.9 = 226.0 V
Apparent power = 3VI = 3 x 226 x 69.2 = 46.92 kVA
Power factor = Real power/ Apparent power = 38.74/46.92 = 0.83.
8.1.6 Voltage
Source
Inverter
Variable
Frequency
Drives
Except in the case of the minimum loss control, the basic control strategy is to operate the machine with nearly constant flux up to the base speed and a fixed terminal
voltage above the base speed. The variation of the motor terminal voltage required
to implement this strategy is shown in figure 6.14. The operation at a constant maximum stator current gives constant torque operation up to the base speed and constant
power operation from the base speed to the critical speed Wmc (fig. 6.13). During the
constant torque operation, the slip speed is held constant. It increases linearly with
frequency during the constant power operation and reaches the breakdown value at
the critical speed Wmc' Operation beyond the critical speed is carried out at the breakdown slip speed with reduced stator current and power.
314
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap.8
As explained in section 1.3.2, the inverter current rating is chosen to match the
transient current rating of the motor. For fast transient response, the motor current is
allowed to exceed the rated current. Maximum motor current is chosen anywhere between the rated current and the current at breakdown torque. The inverter rating is
chosen equal to the maximum motor current. In drives where fast transient response
is not necessary, the inverter current rating is made equal to the rated motor current.
This allows considerable savings in the cost of the inverter and the associated controlled rectifier. As in the case of de drives, a current control loop is always provided
to restrict the transient motor current within the inverter current rating. When the
transient current allowed is more than the rated motor current, the current control
loop cannot protect the motor against sustained torque overloads. Then some type of
inverse time overcurrent protection is provided, in addition to the current control
loop. The current control may consist of either the current-limit control or the innercurrent control (section 3.9).
Current control can be implemented indirect1y by controlling slip speed. At a
constant flux, the motor slip speed for a given stator current is constant (fig. 6.14).
Hence, in the constant torque region, the maximum value of the current can be limited indirectly by limiting the slip speed below a specified maximum value. In the
constant power region, the slip speed for a given motor current varies linearly with
frequency. Hence, the maximum current can be limited by limiting slip speed below
a limit which varies linearly with frequency. If operation is required above the critical speed Wmc' the drive can be operated at a constant slip speed which is slightly
less than the breakdown slip speed. The current will then be less than the permissible value.
To operate the machine with a good power factor, high torque per ampere, and
high efficiency, the drive must operate at a slip speed less than its breakdown value,
both during motoring and braking operations. This also prevents runaway speed
of the drive when regenerating against an active load torque, as explained in section 6.3.1.
In variable frequency inverter drives, braking is mandatory. For negative slips,
the induction motor generates, charging the filter capacitor. In the absence of braking, the capacitor voltage attains unusually large values. This damages the semiconductor devices and explodes the filter capacitor, posing a serious hazard to the
operator and the equipment around.
A number of schemes are available for voltage source inverter drives. They
differ in the type of inverter (six-step or PWM), type of braking (regenerative or dynamic), and current control (direct current control or slip speed control). Here a few
schemes employing the PWM inverter are described. They can be easily extended to
six-step inverter drives.
An open-loop variable frequency drive with current-limit control and dynamic
braking is shown in figure 8.10. A speed command w~ sets the inverter frequency
f. From the inverter frequency f, the inverter voltage V is set according to the relation V = Kf + Vo to operate the machine at nearly constant flux up to the base
speed. At the base speed, the motor terminal voltage saturates. Consequently the
machine operates at a constant terminal voltage above the base speed. The offset
voltage Vo is chosen to produce the nominal flux at zero speed and the constant K is
Sec.8.1
315
AC supply
v't ~
Vo
C
Ra
Current
limiter
m
l.
w;,
GTO
PWM
inverter
Speed---t~
command
l.
Delay
Figure 8.10
Open-loop
variable frequency
PWM inverter drive with dynamic braking.
chosen to get the rated (or the maximum available if less than the rated) voltage at
the base speed.
Current-lirnit control is pravided to prevent the motor current fram exceeding a
safe value. The stator current I, is sensed by a three-phase current tran former and a
three-phase diode bridge. As long as I, is les S than the permissible value, the current
limiter output remains zera and m is set according to signal V r- Whenever I, crosses
the permissible value, the current lirniter output reduces m, which reduces Is' Thus,
the drive operates around a maximum value of Is, until the speed reaches a value for
which I, is lower than the permissible value.
In the absnce of the delay circuit, a step change in speed command will cause
the motor slip to exceed the breakdown value. The motor current will tend to exceed
the safe value, but will be prevented [rom doing so by the current-limit control. The
motor terminal voItage will decrease, reducing the motor torque. This may lead to
unstable operation and the motor may stall. Similarly a step decrease in speed command may shift the braking operation beyond the breakdown slip, leading to runaway speeds. Therefore, the speed command is applied through a delay circuit. The
inverter frequency now changes slowly, allowing the motor speed to track the
changes in frequency. Consequently, the slip does not exceed the breakdown value.
The delay circuit, however, slows down the transient response.
A reduction in speed command during the steady-state operation causes the
drive to go into the dynamic braking mode. A GTO is employed to connect and disconnect the braking resistor as the voltage of the filter capacitor reaches the prescribed maximum and rninimum values. When the drive speed reaches the command
value, the opcration changes fram braking to motoring.
316
Induction
Chap.8
Motor Drives
The variation of the ac source voltage and the voltage drops in the diode
bridge, filter, and inverter vary the terminal voltage. Consequently, the flux vares
and the speed regulation increases. These effects can be reduced by using the closedloop control of the motor terminal voltage.
When the desired speed regulation cannot be obtained from open-loop speed
control, closed-loop speed control is employed. A closed-loop speed control scherne
is shown in figure 8.11. It employs a PWM inverter, current-limit control, and dynamic braking.
The error between the reference speed w~ and the actual speed Wm is processed
through a PI speed controller and a function generator. The inverter frequency f is
adjusted to make the actual speed equal to the reference speed. A signa1 Vi = Kf +
Vo is constructed from f. This sets a reference for the closed-loop control of the motor terminal voltage VI to maintain a constant flux up to the base speed. Saturation in
the signal Vi causes the machine to operate at.a constant terminal voltage for speeds
greater than and equal to base speed. Because of the closed-loop control, the terminal voltage is not affected by variations in the source voltage and the voltage drops
in the converter, filter and inverter. The purpose of the PI controller is to make the
steady-state speed error close to zero and to filter out noise.
A current limiter is provided to limit the current and to ensure that the inverter
frequency tracks the motor speed and thus slip speed is not allowed to exceed the
breakdown value. A step increase in speed command activates the current lirniter.
AC supply
V1~
vl
oTo
Voltage
controller
L
11
C
~
Ra
Speed
controller
w
m
+
e",m
t:
GTO
Function
generator
m
PWM
inverter
v,
Wm
Sign of
e",m
Current
limiter
Wm
.... -
Tachogenerator
Figure 8.11
Closed-loop variable frequency PWM inverter drive with dynamic braking.
Motor
Sec.8.1
317
Consequently, frequency is allowed to increase slowly. The machine accelerates at

the maximum allowable current and torque. When the speed reaches close to the
command value, the current limiter goes out of action and the machine settles at the
desired speed and current where the motor torque equals the load torque. Similarly,
in response to a decrease in speed command, the machine decelerates at the maximum allowable torque and current due to the current limiter. Now the current limiter
must slow down the rate of decrease in inverter frequency. Hence, for negative
speed errors, the polarity of the output voltage of the current limiter is reversed.
When the speed reaches close to the desired value, the current limiter goes out of action and operation shifts to motoring and the drive settles at the desired speed.
The drive has fast response because the speed error is corrected at the maximum allowable torque due to current limiting. The current limiting also ensures
stable operation by limiting slip speed below the breakdown value.
A closed-loop control scheme, where the slip speed Wse is controlled directly
and thus current is controlled indirectly, is shown in figure 8.12. A dua1 converter is
employed to obtain regenerative braking.
The speed error is processed through a PI controller and a slip speed regulator.
The slip speed regulator sets the slip speed command wie, whose maximum value is
limited to limit the inverter current to a permissible value. The synchronous speed,
obtained by adding actual speed Wm and slip speed wie, determines the inverter frequency. The reference signal for the closed-loop control of the machine terminal voltage Vi is generated from frequency f using a function generator. It ensures nearly a
Voltage
controller
L
VI
Flux
control
~
e
m
L
wm
Speed
controller
PWM
inverter
Wm
+
Slip speed
wm
VI
regulator
Wm
~----------------------~----------------~~
Tachogenerator
Figure 8.12
Motor
Closed-loop slip speed-controlled PWM inverter drive with regenerative braking.
318
Induction Motor Drives
Chap.8
constant flux operation up to the base speed and the operaticn at a constant terminal
voltage above the base speed.
A step increase in speed command w~ produces a positive speed error. The slip
speed command wie is set at the maximum value. The drive accelerates at the maximum permissible inverter current, producing the maximum available torque, until
the speed error is reduced to a small value. The drive finally settles at a slip speed
for which the motor torque balances the load torque.
A step decrease in speed command produces a negative speed error. The slip
speed command is set at the maximum negative value. The drive decelerates under
regenerative braking, at the maximum permissible current and the maximum available braking torque, until the speed error is reduced to a small value. Now the operation shifts to motoring and the drive settles at the slip speed for which the motor
torque equals the load torque.
The drive has fast response because the speed error is corrected at the maximum available torque. Direct control of slip speed assures stable operation under all
operating conditions. The dynamic performance of this drive is somewhat superior
to the drive of figure 8.11. It also avoids an expensive current sensing circuit.
For operation beyond the base speed, as explained at the beginning of the
present section, the slip speed limit of the slip speed regulator must be increased linearly with the frequency until the breakdown value is reached. This is achieved by
adding to the slip speed regulator output an additional slip speed signal, proportional
to frequency and of appropriate signo For frequencies higher than the frequency for
which the breakdown torque is reached, the slip speed limit is kept fixed near the
breakdown value.
A closed-Ioop scheme toachieve the minimum loss control is shown in
figure 8.l3. The minimization of losses in an induction motor fed by a variable frequ'ncy sinusoidal source was considered in section 6.6.2. When saturation of the
magnetic circuit of an induction motor is neglected, the motor efficiency is maximized when slip speed varies with speed in a manner shown in figure 6.25b. When
supplied by an inverter, the harmonic loss must also be considered. As the harmonic
loss depends on voltage, like core losses, the proportion of the voltage dependent
loss increases. Coasequently the optimum operation is obtained at a lower voltage.
One can obtain a relationship similar to that shown in figure 6.25b, accounting for
harmonic loss. At a given speed, the optirnum value of slip speed for braking will be
somewhat different from motoring. The scheme of figure 8.13 assumes them to be
the same and uses a common function generator for both operations. When it is significantly different, two separate function generators may be employed. The scheme
of figure 8.l3 operates as follows.
For a given speed wm, the optimum slip speed Wse is obtained from the function
generator. It is added to the actual speed to produce synchronous speed, which sets
the inverter frequency. The sign of the slip speed depends on the sign of the speed
error ewm' When the speed error is positive, a motoring operation is required to correct the speed error, and hence, the slip speed is given a positive signo Using the
same argument, it is assigned a negative sign when ewm is negative. Speed error is
processed through an absolute value circuit to set a reference vi for the closed-Ioop
control of motor terminal voltage V[. An inner-current control loop is provided
Sec.8.1
V'
319
Voltage
controller
v,
l.
Absolute
value
circuit
Current
controller
Speed
controller
v,
m
PWM
inverter
l.
v,
Function
generator
Wm
Tachogenerator
Figure 8.13
Varia~le frequency
PWM inverter drive with regeneration and minimum
Motor
1055
control.
within the voltage loop. Thus, while the frequency loop ensures an optimum slip
speed for each motor speed, the voltage loop adjusts the voltage to make the motor
torque equal to the load torque at the desired speed. The speed, voltage, and current
controllers employ PI controllers.
A step increase in the speed command produces a large speed error ewm and
consequently a large voltage error evoThe reference current 1: is set at the maximum
value and the drive accelerates at the maximum al\owable current. As the speed
changes, the slip speed is adjusted automatically at the optimum value. When ewm
approaches zero, the current reference I reduces and the motor current is adjusted
to produce a torque equal to the load torque at the desired steady-state speed.
A step decrease in speed command makes synchronous speed less than motor
speed and regenerative braking takes place. The machine decelerates under the
current control at the maximum permissible current. When close to the desired
speed, the motor current reduces and the operation shifts to motoring. Finally, the
drive settles at the desired speed. Because of the slow response of flux to a change
in motor voltage, the transient response is slow when initially operating at a reduced flux.
320
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 8
In all the drive schemes just described, four-quadrant operation is accomplished by changing the phase sequence of the inverter output voltages. The positive
phase sequence provides operation in quadrants I and Il, and the negative phase sequence gives operation in quadrants III and IV. Thus when speed reversal is carried
out, the phase sequence of the inverter output voltages must be reversed at the crossing of zero speed. The reversal of the phase sequence is accomplished simply by interchanging control signals between any two legs of the inverter.
8.2 CONTROL OF INDUCTION MOTOR BY CURRENT SOURCE
INVERTERS
The operation of an induction motor fed from a variable frequency current
source was described in section 6.5. This section describes three-phase current
source inverters and variable frequency drivesemploying current source inverters.
8.2.1 Three-Phase Current Source Inverter
The basic 3-phase current source inverter is shown in figure 8.14a. The inverter is
fed from a controlled current source Id' The inverter employs six self-commutated
semiconductor switches SIto S6' which are turned on in the sequence of their numbers, with a phase difference of 60, and each switch is kept on for 120. The control
signals for the switches are shown in figure 8.14b. In figure 8.14c, a period of the
inverter operation has been divided into six intervals. According to the control signals, the switches conduct with the following pattern:
Interval
1
II
III
Switches
Conducting
SI> 56
S2. S,
S). S2
Interval
IV
V
VI
-'
Switches
Conducting
S4. S)
S5. S.
S6. S5
Thus, two switches conduct at a time-one

from the upper group (SI>S3' and S5)
and one from the lower group (S2' S4' and S6)' The waveforrn of the line current
iA is shown in figure 8.14c. It is a six-step square wave. The waveforrns for the
line currents i B and ic will be identical with a phase difference of 120 and 240,
respectively.
At wt = O, the current source forces iA to jump instantaneously from O to Id' In
the absence of the capacitor bank C, the machine phase current will also jump instantaneously. Due to a large rate of change of the phase current, the machine leakage inductance will produce a sharp positive spike in the phase voltage VAN'
Similarly, when switch SI is turned off at wt = 2'TTj3, iA is suddenly forced to become zero. Consequently, the leakage inductance will produce a sharp negative
spike in VAN' These voltage spikes, which are produced each time the phase current
changes, cause a manifold increase in the voltage rating of the switches. The capacitor bank, by providing alternative paths for the currents to flow, reduces the rate of
Sec.8.2
Motor by Current Source Inverters
iA
i~
ia
i~
ie
i~
321
Id
Vd
DC
current
source
C
CA
Ca
Ce
LU
Capaeitor
Motor
bank
(a)
ie,t
O
e2
ie3
ie4
ieS
2"
"
3"
4"
wt
t
t
wt
wt
wt
wt
ie6t
wt
[b]
iA
VAN
TI
III
IV
TI
IV
(e)
Figure 8.14
Three-phase
CUITentsource inverter.
Intervals
322
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 8
change of the machine phase currents and, therefore, the voltage spikes, and cense.
quently prevents excessive increase in the voltage rating of the switches.
The magnitude of voltage spikes increases with the increase in the leakage
inductance. A larger value of C is then required to limit their magnitude. Consequently, the time required for the current transfer from one phase to another increases, decreasing the frequency range of the in verter. Hence, an induction motor
with a low leakage inductance is preferred. Recall that this requirement is contrary
to that in the case of voltage source inverters, where high leakage inductance is
preferred, because it is more effective in filtering out harmonics.
The current iA can be described by the following Fourier series:
iA = 2
Id [sin(wt
+ 1r/6) + ~
sin(5wt - 1r/6)
+ ~ sin(7wt + 1r/6) ... ]

(8.22)
The fundamental
rms current is
(8.23)
And total rms current is

Inns
[! f7T/3 J
I d(wt)J/2
(V2/3)Id
(8.24)
For a Y-connected load, iA will also be the motor phase current if the small current
carried by the capacitar bank is assumed negligible. Under the same assumption, for
a delta-connected
load, the waveform of the phase current iAB will be similar to the
waveformvjj,
of figure 8.lb, with Vd repjaced by Id and phase advanced by 1r/3.
Hence, for a delta-connected
load,
iAB = ~ Id [sin(wt
+ 1r/3) - ~
sin(5wt - 1r/3)
+ ~ sin(7wt + 1r/3) ... ]
(8.25)
Equations (8.22) and (8.25) show that the motor current contains odd harmonics and
the tripplen harmonics are zero. The line current passes through the stator and gets
divided between the magnetizing inductance and the rotor impedance (fig. 6.lb).
Since the reactance offered by the magnetizing inductance to the harmonics is very
high compared to that offered by the rotor impedance, the harmonic currents flow
mostly through the rotor. The magnetizing current is virtually a sin uso id of the fundamental frequency. Consequently the flux and the back emf are also sinusoidal. For
the operating conditions with negligible stator drop compared to the back emf, the
motor terminal voltage is aiso sinusoidal with superimposed
voltage spikes at the
switching instants, as shown in figure 8.14c. The semiconductor
device, which is
.used to realize the switch, is provided with its own snubber to further reduce the
effect of the voltage spikes on the device. A dI/dt inductor is also connected in
series with each device.
Because of the sinusoidal flux, only the fundamental component of the current
contributes to the developed torque and power. The harmonics increase the copper
Sec.8.2
323
and core losses and consequently derate the motor. They also produce pulsating
torques which cause jerky motion at low speeds and cogging during reversal, as in
the case of voltage source inverters. The motor speed-torque curves can be calculated by considering only the fundamental component and following the method described in section 6.5.
GTOs and thyristors with forced commutation circuits are used to realize the
switches Sito S6' Since the reverse voltage must be blocked during a part of each
cycle, GTOs with reverse voltage blocking capability must be used. When the GTO
does not have the reverse voltage blocking capability, a fast recovery diode is connected in series with it.
When thyristors are used, forced cornrnutation is required. It will be econornical if the capacitor bank, which serves to reduce voltage spikes, can also be used for
commutation. If the capacitors (fig. 8. 14a) are chosen such that the capacitor-rnotor
combination has a leading power factor, then the thyristors can be turned off naturally. Such commutation is known as load commutation. The leading power factor
under all operating conditions of the inverter and motor, involving variation in frequency and motor loading, can be obtained when variable capacitors are employed.
The variable capacitors can be realized using a static leading VAR generator. The
leading VAR generator then serves the dual purpose of providing commutation and
suppressing the voltage spikes. However, the leading VAR generator increases the
drive's complexity and cost.
The dual purpose of providing commutation and supressing voltage spikes can
also be accomplished by relocating the capacitors. A number of circuits exist with
this provision.21-23 The most commonly used among them is the autosequentially
commutated inverter (ASC!) shown in figure 8.15. It employs six thyristors TI to T6
to perform the function of the switches. The forced commutation of thyristors is
done with the help of six identical capacitors Cito C6. These capacitors also arrange
Figure 8.15
Auto-sequentially commutated current source inverter.
324
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 8
gradual transfer of current between the motor phases at the instants of switching,
and thus also perforrn the function of suppression of switching spikes. The diodes
help in retaining charge on the capacitors with polarities appropriate for the cornrnu.
tation of thyristors. Each thyristor is also provided with its own dI/dt inductor and
the snubber circuit. These are not shown in the figure. The thyristor gate signals will
be the same as the control signals iCI to iC6of figure 8.l4b. Thus, the thyristors will
be fired in the sequence of their numbers with a phase difference of 60, and two
thyristors will be in conduction at a time.
In the steady state, the sequence of events will be identical at each switching.
Hence, it will be adequate to examine the inverter operation for one switching. Let
thyristors TI and T2 be conducting initially. Then, the source current Id will be flowing through the path consisting of thyristor TI, diode DI' phase A, phase e,
diode D2, and thyristor T2 The next thyristor to be turned on is T3. When the
commutation and transfer of current are completed, thyristors T2 and T3 will be Conducting and the source current Id will be flowing through the path consisting of
thyristor T3, diode D3, phase B, phase e, diode D2, and thyristor T 2. Thus the
switching operation involves the turn-off of thyristor TI and the transfer of the
source current Id from phase A to phase B. We will now examine how this transfer
of current is achieved in the circuit under consideration.
As just stated, initially devices TI' DI, T2, and D2 are in conduction. Let
capacitors el and C, be charged with the polarities shown in the figure during the
previous cornmutation. When thyristor T3 is tumed on, full voltage of capacitor el is
applied to reverse bias. thyristor TI' which is then commutated. The circuit that is effective during the transfer of current is shown in figure 8.16. The current now flows
through thyristor T3, a parallel circuit formed by el' and e3 and C, in series,
diode DI' phase A, phase e, diode D2, and thyristor T2. Diode D3 does not conduct
dUe to a reverse bias applied by el through the path consisting of diode DI, phase A,
and phase B. The current Id flowing through the parallel combination of el, and C,
and C, in series, linearly reverses the voltage of capacitor el until it is sufficient to
D,
e
Figure
8.16
Equivalent
circuit of inverter of Fig. 8.15 during comrnutation.
Sec.8.2
325
forward bias diode D3' When diode D3 conducts, the current in phase B begins to
flow. As capacitor el charges, the current in phase A reduces and the current in
phase B increases, at the rate deterrnined by the value of the capacitors, and thus a
gradual transfer of current from phase A to phase B takes place. During the current
transfer, capacitor el is charged with the right plate positive, and capacitor e3
(fig. 8.15) is charged with the left plate positive. Thus, C, is charged with a polarity
which is appropriate for the commutation of T3 when T 5 is tumed on for the next
comutation in the upper thyristor group.
In the commutation process of TI just described, when TI ceases to conduct,
capacitor el applies reverse bias across TI for a duration which depends on the value
of el and Id' By selecting an appropriate value of el, the reverse bias across e" for
all values of Id, can be maintained for a sufficient time to tum it off.
To suppress the switching spikes adequately to keep the device voltage ratings
reasonable, large capacitors are required. The value of capacitors is such that, with
careful design, the inexpensive converter grade thyristors can be tumed off. Hence,
con verter grade thyristors are used in the current source inverter. This is different
from the voltage source inverters where expensive inverter grade thyristors are ernployed. Because of large capacitors, the maximum frequency of operation of a
current source inverter is rather low.
The ASe inverter finds wide applications in medium and large power current
source inverter drives.
8.2.2 Current Sources
Let us examine the scheme shown in figure 8.17a. The inverter is fed from a
de source through a large inductance Ld' Because of the large value of Ld, the current Id can be assumed to be ripple-free de. When the inverter is controlled as described in the previous section, the six-step current waveform of figure 8.14b is
obtained. Therefore, the combination of Ld and the inverter is known as a current
source inverter. Strictly speaking, this scheme does not act as a current source. Any
. change in the machine impedance, with a change in slip, changes the magnitudes of
Id and machine phase currents.
If both the waveforrn and the magnitudes of rnachine currents are to be made
independent of changes in machine operation, then the magnitude of Id should also
be maintained constant. This is achieved by closed-loop control of Id' Figures 8.17b
and e show the current source inverter schemes incorporating closed-loop current
control. The scheme of figure 8.17b is employed with an ac supply. The actual current Id is compared to the reference value Id'. The error is processed in a controller
to adjust the rectifier firing angle IX, to make Id equal to Ir The operation of
the scheme of figure 8.17c, which is employed with a de supply, can be similarly
explained.
Induction motor drives mostly employ schemes of figure 8.17b or 8.17c.
Single-phase induction motor drives sometimes use the scheme of figure 8.17a.
Hence, in this chapter, the term current source inverter refers to the schemes of
figures 8.17b and e only.
Usuallya 3-phase fully controlled rectifier (fig. 8.17b) is employed. A singlephase controlled rectifier may be used for low-power applications. An exception is
326
Induction
AC supply
Chap. 8
Inverter
~
(a)
DC link
Fully
controlled
Motor Drives
~
+
t.,
Vd
Inverter
rectifier
el
l
d
(b)
DC link
Id
+
C
Chopper
Ld
Inverter
Vd
...
l
d
(e)
Figure 8.17 Current sources.
made for traetion applications where, owing to the availability of the l-phase supply
only, the single-phase rectifier is employed at substantially high power levels.
The major drawbaek of the rectifier current source is the poor power factor at
low de link voltages. This can be overcome by using a rectifier with controlled flywheeling/? or pulse-width rnodulation.P
8.2.3 Braking
The phase voltage and phase current waveforrns of a Y-connected induction motor
fed by a current source inverter are shown in figure 8.14e. As explained in section 8.1.5, the phase current lags behind the phase voltage by an angle cp, which is
less than 90 for motoring and greater than 90 for generation. In a current source
inverter, the phase of the eurrent waveforrn remains fixed with respect to the switching instants. Hence the maehine phase voltage is produced to lead the current waveform by an angle cp which is less than 90 for motoring and more than 90 for
generation. The machine phase current waveforrn and the line voltage waveforrns
Sec.8.2
are shown in figure 8.18 for rnotoring and generation. Since
327
leads iA by an angle
VBC and VCA lag
behind vAB by 120 and 240, respectively. From the line voltages one can obtain the
inverter input voltage Vd' Por example, during the interval s wt:5 Tr/3, switches S,
and S6 conduct, hence Vd = V AB; during the interval tt /3:5 wt :5 2Tr/3 switches S,
and S2 conduct, hence Vd = V AC (fig. 8.14), and so on. Figure 8.18 shows that the
average value of Vd (Vd) is positive for motoring and negative for generation. This is
true for both the drive schemes of figure 8.17. Since the direction of the de link current is fixed, the flow of de link power reverses as operation of the machine is
shifted from motoring to generation.
In the drive of figure 8.17b, the closed-loop control of the rectifier current automatically adjusts the rectifier firing angle and keeps the dc link current constant.
When the operation shifts from motoring to generation, and hence Vd becomes negative, the rectifier firing angle automatically changes to make its output voltage negative. Consequently, the rectifier works as an inverter transferring power from the
VAN
cp, line voltage vAB leads iA by an angle of (cp + 60) and voltages
wt
wt
Motoring
operation
wt
Braking operation
Figure 8.18
Braking operation of CSI-fed induction motor.
328
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 8
dc link to the ac supply, and regenerative braking is achieved. Thus, regenerative

braking of a current source inverter drive is very simple. One has simply to reduce
the inverter frequency to make the synchronous speed less than the rotor speed. The
inverter and the rectifier automatically adjust their operations to arrange the transfer
of the generated power to the ac supply.
Regenerative braking capability is inherent in the drive of figure 8.17b and no
additional equipment is required to achieve it. This should be compared with the
voltage source inverter drive where the regenerative braking capability is achieved
by the addition of a fully controlled rectifier in antiparallel with the existing Controlled rectifier, which adds to the drive's cost and complexity.
The drive of figure 8.17b can also provide four-quadrant operation. With a
given phase sequence, the drive operates in quadrants 1 and II. When the motor is at
standstill, the phase sequence is reversed simply by interchanging the control signals
between any two legs of the inverter, causing the motor to run in the reverse direction and to pravide operation in quadrants III and IV.
As explained earlier, when the machine operation shifts frorn motoring to generation, voltage Vd reverses, with the direction of Id remaining unchanged. Therefore, the drive of figure 8.17c can have regenerative braking capability if a chopper
capable of operating in the 1 and IV quadrants of the V-I plane is employed. Recall
that a class D two-quadrant chopper, described in section 4.7.2, has this capability.
As the magnitude and polarity of Vd change, the chopper will automatically adjust
the magnitude and polarity of its output voltage to keep Id constant. As the operation
shifts from motoring to generation, the polarity of its output voltage will autornatically change to reverse the flow of power between the dc mains and the de link. This
drive can al so pravide four-quadrant operation in the same way as the drive of
fi~ure 8.17b.
In the drive of figure 8.17c, when the regenerated energy cannot be absorbed
by the dc mains, dynarnic braking is used. The regenerated energy charges the filter
capacitor and its voltage rises. When the voltage exceeds a set upper limit, a switch
connects a braking resistor across the filter capacitor. When the voltage falls below
a set lower limit, the switch disconnects the braking resistor. To prevent the flow
of energy frorn the de source to the braking resistor, the resistor is tumed off at a
capacitor voltage greater than the de source voltage. Thus, one is able to get cornposite braking, where only that portion of the energy which cannot be accepted by
the source is dissipated in the braking resistor.
If the supply fails, regenerative braking cannot be used in both the schemes.
Dynamic braking is also not possible because the machine needs some source from
which to draw magnetizing current. Then braking can be obtained only by the use of
mechanical brakes.
8.2.4 Pulse-Width Modulation
C.S. Inverter
in a Thyristor
In a current source inverter, the fundamental component of the machine current can
be varied by contralling Id' Therefore, the pulse-width modulation (PWM) is only
required to imprave the current waveforms.
Sec.8.2
329
As explained in section 8.2.1, for the thyristor inverter of figure 8.15, switching spikes are suppressed with the help of capacitors by delaying the transfer of current between the phases. The delay in the transfer of current restricts the frequency
of operation of thyristors and inverter. The higher the value of capacitors, the greater
the reduction in switching spikes and the greater the delay in the transfer of current.
The value of capacitors required for the adequate suppression of spikes is rather
high; consequently
the frequency of operation of thyristors is rather low. The frequency restriction is imposed by the circuit configuration and not by the switching
capability of thyristors. Hence, replacing the con verter grade thyristors by the faster
thyristors, such as inverter grade thyristors, is of little value.
Because of the low operating frequency of thyristors, the PWM is possible
only at low in verter frequencies. Hence, it has been used only at low motor speedsless than 10 percent of the base speedmainly to eliminate torque pulsations.
The implementation
of the PWM in AS el of figure 8.15 is shown in figure 8.19. In section 8.2.1, a typical switching operation was considered involving
the tum-on of T 3 and the commutation of T l, resulting in the transfer of a positive
current from line A to line B, while line
carried current in the negative direction
through thyristor T2. The switching operation al so caused the voltage of capacitor el
to reverse. It also signified the terrnination of the positive half-cycle of line current
iA and the commencement
of the positive half-cycle of line current iB while the negative half-cycle of the line current ic was in progress.
An examination of the capacitor voltage polarity at the end of the foregoing
switching operation indicates that it will enable the transfer of a positive current back
Id
2"
I
Id
wt
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
wt
wt
Figure 8.19
Current waveforrns of a PWM current source inverter.
330
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 8
to line A if thyristor TI is gated again. Ir is, therefore, possible to transfer a positivcurrent back and forth between lines A and B by altemately gating TI and T) while
the other line
is carrying a negative current through T2. Thus, the trailing side of
the positive half-cycle of iA and the leading side of the positive half-cycle of iB can
be pulse-width modulated in such a way that the pulse-off period in one line is equal
to the pulse-o n period in the other. By repeating this process in al! the upper thyristors, TI, T3, and T5, both ends of the positive half-cycles of the three line currents
can be pulse-width modulated. Similarly, both ends of the negative half-cycles of the
three line currents can be pulse-width modulated by repeating this process for the
lower group of thyristors, T2, T4, and T6.
If the three phases are modulated syrnmetrically, then the pulse widths in the
leading side of a phase will be equal to the notch widths in the trailing side. Hence in
general the modulation will have half-wave symmetry. When two phases are being
modulated, the third phase cannot be modulated. Thus the wide middle pulse cannot
be less than 7T' /3 as shown in the figure.
The switching angles al' a2' ... can be chosen to implement the selective harmonic elimination (SHE) method, described in section 8.1.4. In the SHE method of
section 8.1.4, the waveform, had quarter-wave syrnmetry. Hence the Fourier coefficient bk was zero. Therefore, for the elimination of M harrnonics, M equations were
needed to set the Fourier coefficient a, for all these harmonics equal to zero. One
degree of freedom was used to vary the fundamental. Thus, (M + 1) switchings at
angles al' a2, ... , aM+ 1 were required to implement the SHE method. In the present
case, the waveforms have half-wave symmetry. Hence, both ak and b, will not be
zero. Therefore, for the elimination of M harmonics, M equations will be required
for setting each of a, and bk for those harmonics equal to zero. Since the fundamental is varied by varying Id, one more degree of freedom used in section 8.1.4 is not
required here. Thus, 2M switchings at angles al, a2; ... , a2M will be needed to
eliminate M harmonics.
The preceding discussion suggests that the waveforms of figure 8.19 with five
switching angles al' a2, ... , a5 can allow the elimination of the fifth and seventh
harmonics
and consequently
can eliminate the dominant sixth harmonic torque
pulsation.
At lower fundamental
frequencies,
the number of witchings can be
increased. If one chooses to produce nine switching angles, then the eleventh and
thirteenth harmonics,
in addition to the fifth and seventh, can be eliminated, thus
also eliminating twelfth harmonic torque pulsation.
An alternative
pulse-width
modulation
technique is described in the next
section.
8.2.5 Pulse-Width
Modulated
GTO C.S. Inverter
A GTO current source inverter is shown in figure 8.20. It is obtained when GTOs
are used to realize the switches in the inverter circuit of figure 8.14a. The pulsewidth modulation can be implemented in the same way as described in the previous
section for the inverter of figure 8.15. The switching angles may be selected to
achieve the selective harmonic elimination method. Altematively, the method shown
in figure 8.21a may be employed. The figure shows the modulation of line current iA
in its positive half-cycle. A carrier wave ve is compared with a modulating reference
Sec.8.2
G,
G3
Gs
331
i~
ia
Id
ic
G4
G6
G2
CALLJ
C
i~
Figure 8.20
OTO current source inverter.
wave vR. When vR> Ve, a pulse of current is produced. In this case, the waveforrn
has quarter-wave symmetry. Since the fundamental component can be varied by
changing Id, the PWM is employed only to improve the current waveforrn. Hence,
the modulation index (Al Am) is fixed at 0.82 to minimize the harrnonic content. 32
The capacitor bank filters out the harrnonics, producing a sinusoidal current in the
machine. The modulated waveforms of line currents iA, iB, and ie are shown in
figure 8.21b. The sinusoidal machine currents will lag behind the respective line
currents, due to a smallleading current drawn by the capacitors.
Reference 32 has described a method which allows the suppression of switching spikes to be achieved with a much smaller capacitor than in the inverter of
figure 8.15. Before this is discussed, first the mechanism of how voltage spikes are
produced must be understood.
Let us consider the operation of the GTO inverter (fig. 8.20) at wt = O in
figure 8.21b. Since ie is positive and iB is negative, GTOs G, and G6 are on, and the
source current Id is flowing through a path consisting of Gs, phase C, phase B, and
G6 as shown in the equivalent circuit of figure 8.22a. Let this path be designated
loop 1. The machine phase current i, which is sinusoidal and lags behind iA, is still
negative. Hence, another relatively small current is flowing through loop 2 forrned
by phase A, capacitor CA, capacitor CB, and phase B. At angle al (fig. 8.2Ib), Id is
transferred from line C to line A, by tuming off G, and tuming on GI. Since the
machine phase current i is still negative, the source current, Id, flows through a
loop comprised of GI, capacitor CA, capacitor Ce, phase C, phase B, and G6, as
shown in the equivalent circuit of figure 8.22b. Let this loop be called loop 3. The
current through loop 2 continues to flow as before. Now CA is charged both by the
source current Id and the loop 2 current, and its voltage shoots up. The loop 2 current charges capacitor CB in the negative direction. The voltage VAB, which is the
sum of voltages across capacitors CA and CB also shoots up. The modulated waveforrn of figure 8.21b shows only a few pulses, but in actual practice there would be
many more pulses. As the source current is transferred back and forth between
loop 1 and loop 3, by altemate conductions of Gs and G 1, the voltages across capacitors CA and CB build up. Consequently, voltage vABrises to a very high value. The
332
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 8
I
II
II
Ir
I
I
I
,.....
I
I
I
I
I
r--
III
III
III
I
I
I
I
I
I
- ..-
~'lr/3--i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
'Ir
(a) Principie of modulation
12'1r
I
I
wt
I
I
I
I
wt
12'1r
wt
I
(b) Modulated current waveform
Figure 8.21
PWM current source inverter.
build-up of voltage V AB continues as long as the machine phase current i remains

negative. After i reverses, the loop 2 current flows to discharge capacitors CA and
CB, while the loop 3 current continues to charge them. At a certain value of i, the
build-up of the capacitor voltage is checked and vAB decreases after attaining a rnaximum value. This is the maximum spike in the voltage vAB and it occurs soon after
the reversal of the machine current i. Since the circuit works syrnmetrically, identical spikes will be produced at the reversal of currents i and i.
Sec.8.2
r;::=====::::;-
333
Loop 1
eurrent
Loop 2 eurrent
,--------------------------l
I
I
1---------,
I
I
I
I
(a)
Loop 2 eu rrent
G,
------------------------l
A
I
I
I
I
t
I
IL
./ ./
B
(b)
Loop 2 eurrent
r------I
I
I
t
I
r-------------,
I
IL
././
I
I
L_.J
Loop 4 eurrent
(e)
Figure 8.22
Equivalent circuits of the inverter of Fig. 8.20.
334
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 8
The voltage spikes continue to be produced at each switching, even after the
build-up of vAB has been checked. For example, the transfer of the source current
from G, to G causes a current (Id - iftJ to flow through capacitor CA' Consequently,
the capacitor voltage shoots up producing a spike. Until wt = 7r/2, the pulse duration increases; hence, the period of charging of capacitor CA increases. Consequently, a voltage spike of appreciable magnitude is produced even though charging
current (Id - i~) is low.
The foregoing discussion shows that the voltage spikes are produced primarily
from capacitors being charged by the source current. In the particular case we have
just examined, this happens due to the charging of CA by the source current when it
flows through loop 3. This suggests that the voltage spike can be reduced if the
source current can be diverted away from loop 3 for some time. In a current source
inverter, the GTOs in the same leg can be allowed to conduct for a short duration.
Hence, the source current can be diverted away from loop 3 by turning on G and
G4, and turning off G6. When this is done, the source current flows through G l and
G4 as shown in figure 8.22c. Let us now consider the operation of the inverter
during the transfer of current from phase C to phase A when an arrangement is made
for diverting the current away from loop 3.
At wt = 0, G, and G6 conduct and the operation is described by the equivalent
circuit of figure 8.22a as before. The source current flows through loop 1 consisting
of Gs, phase C, phase B, G6, and the source. Another current flows through loop 2
consisting of phase A, capacitor CA, capacitor CB, and phase B. At angle al' GI and
G4 are tumed on. Consequently the source current flows through the path consisting
of GI and G4. The loop 2 current continues to flow as before. The phase C current
now flows through loop 4 formed by phase C, phase B, capacitor CB, and capacitor Cc. The equivalent circuit valid for this interval is shown in figure 8.22c. Because
of the diversion of t~ source current, capacitor CA is prevented from being overcharged for some time. Notice al so that, as before, loop 2 current charges capacitor
CB in a direction to increase v AB' However, the loop 4 current, which is higher than
the loop 2 current, charges CB to reduce voltage VAB' At a2, G4 is turned off and G6
is turned on. G l is already on. The inverter operation is now governed by the equivalent circuit of figure 8.22b. The source current flows through loop 3 and the phase A
current continues to flow through loop 2.
The foregoing discussion shows that the diversion of the source current from
loop 3 during the interval al < wt < a2 reduces overcharging of capacitor CA' and
capacitor CB is charged in a direction to reduce VAB' Hence at a), the voltage VAS
will be much smaller than before when the source current was not diverted away
from loop 3. If now the strategy is adopted that every time the source current is to be
transferred from G s to G l' it will first be made to flow through G l and G4 for some
time, then the maximum voltage spike can be reduced by a large amount, or the
voltage spike can be restricted below a permissible value by capacitors of much
lower value.
The foregoing discussion relates to the transfer of current from inverter line e
to line A. The same approach much be adopted for the transfer of current from any
one inverter line to another. Obviously, the control becomes complex. The motor
operates with sinusoidal voltage and current, and hence the problems of derating and
Sec.8.2
335
torque pulsations are eliminated. However, the Jiversion of the souree eurrent derates the inverter.
8.2.6 Current Source Inverter Variable
Frequency
Drives
The operation of an induetion motor fed from a current source is described in

seetion 6.5. The drive has the same modes of operation as the induction motor fed
by a voltage source inverter. It operates at a constant flux up to base speed, giving
constant torque operation. Operation above the base speed is done at a constant terminal voltage, giving constant power operation. However, the minimum loss control
is an exeeption to this practice.
Operation at a eonstant flux up to base speed is realized when the relationship shown in figure 6.20 between stator current I, and rotor slip speed Wse is maintained at all frequencies. Since, Id is proportional to Is, a similar relationship exists
between Id and Wsf' When operating at a constant flux, the operating points are
loeated mostly on the statically unstable part of speed-torque curves (fig. 6.19).
Hence, closed-loop operation is mandatory. Since the motor is eonstrained to operate
at constant flux, its steady-state behavior is identieal to that of a voltage source
inverter case.
At base speed, either the rated machine voltage is reaehed or the de link
voltage saturates. In the former case, a maximum limit is imposed on the de link
voltage; by imposing a lower limit on the firing angle a of the rectifier when the
scheme of figure 8.17b is employed or by imposing a maximum limit on the duty
ratio of the chopper when the scheme of figure 8.17c is used. In either case, the
machine operates at a constant terminal voltage above base speed. Though the waveforms continue to be those of a current source inverter, the motor behavior is sornewhat similar to that of avoltage source inverter. Because of a low value of the
maximum operating frequency of a current source inverter, the maximum drive
speed is rather low.
At a constant value of Is' various parameters ehange with frequency in the
same way as shown in figure 6.14 for a voltage source,
A closed-loop eSI drive is shown in figure 8.23.23 The speed error signal,
after being processed through the speed controller, is given to the slip speed regulator, which controls slip speed Wse. The sum of rotar speed Wm and slip speed Wse
gives synchronous speed, which determines the inverter frequency. Based on the
value of the slip speed, the flux controller produces a reference signal Id, which
through a closed-loop current control adjusts the dc link current Id to maintain a constant flux. Both the speed and current controller employ PI controllers to get good
steady-state aceuraey and to attenuate noise.
When speed error is positive, slip speed is also positive and the drive accelerates under motoring to the required speed. When speed error is negative, slip speed
is also negative, giving a synchronous speed less than motor speed. Hence the drive
decelerates under braking to the desired speed. The limit imposed on the output of
the slip regulator limits Id at the inverter (and converter) rating. Thus, the transient
operation of the drive, below base speed, both in motoring and braking, is carried
336
Frequency-Controlled Induction Motor Drives
Chap. 8
Base speed
AC supply
~~::~:g~
Fully
ex
Firing
circuit
Current
controller
controlled
rectifier
Id
Id
(a)
t.,
Speed
controller
wm
11
Flux
control
Id
Wm
W.~
Inverter
wm
Slip speed
regulator
>:
Tachogenerator
--
Motor
(b)
Figure 8.23
eSI variable frequency drive with slip speed control.
out at the rated inverter current. Since the flux is constant, the drive operates at the
maximum available torque, as shown by dotted lines in figure 8.23a. Consequently,
fast transient response is obtained.
Beyond base speed, the machine terminal voltage saturates as stated earlier.
Consequently, flux control becomes ineffective and the machine operates in a constant power mode. To operate the drive up to the rated inverter current, the slip
speed limit of the slip speed regulator must increase linearly with frequency. This is
achieved by adding to the slip speed regulator output an additional slip speed signal
proportional to frequency and of appropriate signo
An altemative scheme is shown in figure 8.24.33 The speed error is processed
through a speed controller and an absolute value circuit to get the current reference
Id. Through a closed-loop current control, the de link current Id is made to track
Id'. Based on the value of Id, the flux control block produces a slip speed Wse to
maintain a constant flux. The addition of actual speed Wm and slip speed Wse gives
synchronous speed Wms' which determines inverter frequency. When the speed error
is positive, the slip speed is assigned a positive sign for the motoring operation.
Sec.8.2
337
AC supply
ewm
Speed
controller
wm
Current
controller
and firing
circuit
C<
Fully
controlled
rectifier
Id
Absolute
value circuit
Id
Id
Flux
control
IWSQltc
t.,
11
Id
ewm
Sign of
ewm
Id
Inverter
+
wm
Motor
Tachogenerator
Figure 8.24
eS! variable frequency drive with current control.
When the speed error is negative, the slip speed is assigned a negative sign for the
braking operation.
Saturation in the absolute value circuit ensures that speed error is corrected at
the rated inverter current. Since the flux is constant, the drive operates at the maximum torque, as shown by dotted lines in figure 8.23a. Hence, fast transient response
is achieved. In a thyristor inverter, a minimum value of Id must be retained to
achieve thyristor commutation. This is ensured by the absolute value circuit which
maintains a minimum value of Id'.
Both the drives just described have a similar dynamic response.I" Reference 35
gives a method of designing controllers for these drives.
A drive with minimum loss control is shown in figure 8.25. The relationship
between optimum slip speed and motor speed is the same as for the case of a voltage
source inverter. This relationship is stored in the function generator. It is assumed
that for a given speed, the optimum slip has the same magnitude for motoring and
regenerative braking operations. When these magnitudes are sufficiently different,
two separate function generators may be used - one for motoring and another for
braking. The function generator determines the magnitude of optimum slip speed Wsf
based on motor speed Wm. When speed error is positive, a motoring operation is
required. When it is negative, a braking operation is required. Hence, the optimum
338
Chap.8
AC supply
Current
controller
Fully
controlled
rectifier
Firing
circuit
Absolute
value
circuit
Inverter
Function
generator
./
~----------------~------~----------~~
"
""
"
Motor
Tachogenerator
Figure
8.25
CSI variable frequency
drive with mnimum
1055
control.
slip speed is assigned the same sign as that of the speed error ewm' The sum of Wm
and w determines the inverter frequency. An inner-current loop within the speed
loop is provided to serve three purposes: to provide a current source for the inverter,
to prevent current from exceeding the safe value, and to vary the drive torque for a
given speed. The absolute value circuit has the same functions as described for the
drive of figure 8.24.
When the speed command w~ is increased, the reference current Id' is set at the
highest value. The drive accelerates at the maximum allowable current. The slip
speed is always maintained at the optimum positive value. When near the desired
speed, Id' decreases. The drive finally settles to the desired speed with Id' adjusted lo
cause the motor torque to equal the load torque.
When the speed command w~ is reduced, again the reference current Id' is set
at the highest value. Since the speed error ewm has a negative sign, the optimum slip
speed also has a negative signo Hence, the motor decelerates under regenerative
braking at the maxirnum permissible current. When close to the desired speed, Id
decreases, reducing motor torque. Speed continues to fall until ewm changes sign and
the operation shifts to motoring. The drive finally settles at the desired speed.
Sec.8.2
339
Example 8.5
A 460 V, 60 Hz, 1176 rpm, 6 pole, Y-connected squirrel-cage induction motor has the
following equivalent circuit parameters per phase referred to the stator: R, = 0.29 n,
X, = 0.21 n, x, = 13.3 n, R; = 0.145 n, and X; = 0.5 n
The motor is supplied from a current source inverter. The flux is maintained constant at
the rated value. Calculate
1. The stator current and de link current when the machine operates at rated
torque and 60 Hz.
2. The inverter frequency and de link current for a speed of 600 rpm and rated
torque.
3. The motor speed, stator current, and de link current for half of the rated
torque and inverter frequency of 30 Hz.
Solution:
At the rated operation,
120f 120 X 60
200
Synchronous speed N, = -p- =
6
= I
rpm
= 125.66 rad/sec.
Rated slip = 1200 - 1176 = 0.02
1200
.
, 0.145
.
Rotar impedance Z, = 0.02 + JO.5
= 7.25 + jO.5 = 7.27/3.9
.
d
Z
Z;Zm
M ac hme impe
ance = ,+ Z'Z
r
= 0.29 + jO.21 + (7.25 + jO.5) U 13.3)

7.25 + j 13.8
= 5.57 + j3,46 = 6.557/31.84
- _
460\/3
1, - 6.557/31.84
- 40.5/ - 31.84 A
1; = Z
_
13.3/90
m ,1, =
/
X 40.5/ -31.84 = 34.55/ -4 A.
m+Z,
15.59_62.28
_
Im=Z
Z'
_
'Z,I,=
m+,
Torque =
7.27/3.9
15 59/
oX40.5/-31.84=
. _62.28
3
-1;
(R;/s)
W ,
2
_
3 (
)2(0.145) _
- 125.66 34.55
0.02 - 206.6 N-m
18.89/-90
A.
340
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap.8
From equation (8.24) rms stator current

Irm,
(V2/3)Id = 0.816 x
51.94
42.4 A.
2. It was explained in section 6.5.2 that when the motor is controlled at a

constant flux for a given torque, the slip speed has a constant value.
The slip speed at the rated torque and frequency is
N,e = sN, = 0.02 x 1200 = 24 rpm
Hence, at the motor speed of 600 rpm, synchronous speed, N, = 600 + 24 = 624 rpm
Hence the inverter frequency = (624/1200) x 60 = 31.2 Hz.
As explained in section 6.5, when the motor is controlled at a constant flux, for a
given torque, the stator current remains constant at all speeds. Since the stator current
is constant, the dc link current also remains constant at 51. 94 A.
3. Since the flux is constant, for a given torque, the slip speed is constant at al!
frequencies. Thus, the slip speed for 30 Hz operation at half the rated torque can be
found from 60 Hz operation. For 60 Hz operation,
E,ated= IrnXrn= 18.89
x 13.3 = 251.2
Now,
T=~
Wrn,
E;atedR;/S ]
(R;/S)2 + X;2
Substituting for the known values,

206.6 = _3 _ [(251.2)2(0.145/S)]
2
125.66
-'- 145)2 + (0.5)2
(o
..
or

Hence, slip speed N,e = sN, = 0.01 x 1200 = 12 rpm
Now consider the operation at 30 Hz
a = 30/60 = 0.5
Synchronous speed N, = 0.5 x 1200 = 600 rpm
Hence, motor speed = 600 - 12 = 588 rpm
N,e
s =N=
12
600 =0.02
0.5 x 251.2
~ (0.145)2
0.02
+ (0.5
=
X
0.5)2
17.32 A
Sec.8.2
341

2 - 12
1,2 =' 1
m
,
2X'
1+_'
Xm
or
17.322
1; -
18.89
2 X 0.5
1 +--13.3
which gives 1, = 26.1 A

.
De link
current Id =
vi
7TI
7T X
26.1
V6
= 33.47 A

The rms stator current Icm,
8.2.7 Comparison
Source
of Current
Inverter Drives
(V2!3)
Source
33.47
27.33 A
and Voltage
The important relative merits and disadvantages

follows:
of eSI and VSI drives are as
.1. In a eSI drive, the simultaneous conduction of two switches in the same leg of
the inverter, due to misfiring or commutation failure, does not lead to a shoot
through fault because the resultant current, which rises slowly due to the large
value of Ld, can be regulated by the control of the rectifier firing angle. Protection for a short-circuit across the load takes place in the same way. In the case
of a VSI, such faults can be cleared only by high-speed fuse links. For these
reasons, a eSI is more reliable and rugged than a VSI.
2. The regenerative braking capability is inherent in a eSI drive powered by an ac
source. In a YSI drive, an additional fully controlled rectifier is required to obtain regenerative braking capability. If the ac supply fails, regenerative braking
will not be possible in both the drives. In such an eventuality, a VSI drive can
use dynamic braking but not a eSI drive.
When the drive is powered by a de source, only the PWM VSI drive has
inherent regenerative braking capabilities. The six-step VSI and eSI drives require the replacement of a single-quadrant chopper by a two-quadrant chopper
to achieve regenerative braking capability.
3. Because of the large value of Ld, the dynamic response of a eSI drive is
slower compared to a PWM VSI drive. Because of the large filter capacitor,
the dynamic response of a six-step VSI drive is nearly as slow as that of a
eSI drive.
4. In the case of VSI drives, the use of PWM allows efficient and smooth operation, free from torque pulsations and cogging. Because of the low frequency of
342
Frequency-Controlled Induction Motor Drives
Chap.8
operation of a thyristor CSI, PWM is possible only at low speeds. This elirn],
nates torque pulsations at low speeds but not at high speeds. Though the torque
pulsations present at high speeds do not cause any speed fluctuations, they do
reduce the life of a motor. When GTOs are used, PWM may be employed up
to the base speed in CSI also, but then the control becomes complex.
5. When the source is de, a PWM VSI drive will be much cheaper compared to a
CSI drive of the same rating. Because of the large commutation capacitors and
large dc link inductor, which is oversized to prevent saturation, the volume and
weight of a CSI drive is much larger compared to a PWM VSI drive.
6. The CSI is not suitable for multi-motor drives. Hence, each motor is fed by its
own inverter and rectifier. A single-diode bridge or controlled rectifier can be
used to feed a number of VSI inverter-rnotor systems. Altematively, a single
VSI can feed a number of motors.
7. The frequency range of a CSI is lower than VSI. Consequently, the CSI drive
has a lower speed range.
8.3 CURRENT-CONTROLLED
PWM INVERTERS
In the inverters discussed so far, a VSI was fed by a de voltage source, and a CS!
was fed by a de current source. In this section, a PWM CSI fed by a de voltage
source is described. Such an inverter is called a current-controlled PWM inverter.
The VSI power circuit shown in figure 8.la is employed. The de supply for the
inverter is obtained by using the scheme of figure 8.3. The three-phase reference
currents i, it and it are compared with the respective machine phase currents iA,
iB, and ic in three separate comparators. The comparator arrangement for phase A is
-shown in figure 8.26a. The generation of a modulated waveform is shown in
figure 8.26b for the positive half-cycle of i.
Consider the interval when switch SI is on. The voltage of machine phase A
with respect to the imaginary midpoint of the source v AO, is positive. Hence, the
phase current iA increases. When iA reaches the upper band limit, the comparator
output changes from 1 to O. This information is used to tum off SI and tum on S4
after the lock-ot time. Consequently vAO becomes negative and iA decreases. When
iA reaches the lower band limit, the comparator output changes from O to l. Switch
S4 is tumed off and switch SI is tumed on after the lock-out time. Thus by altemate
conductions of SI and S4' the machine current iA is made to track the reference current i within the hysteresis bando The frequency and magnitude of the fundamental
component in iA are the same as in i. Hence, the magnitude and frequency of the
fundamental in machine currents iA, iB, and ic can be controlled by changing the
magnitude and frequency of the reference currents i, it and
Since the magnitude of the machine currents (which depends on the reference currents) is independent of the load impedance and changes in the source voltage, the inverter essentially
operates as a current source inverter.
The peak-to-peak ripple in motor current is restricted to the hysteresis bando
Consequently, the harrnonic content and the maximum instantaneous current have
low values. The low harmonic content reduces motor heating and derating, and
torque pulsations. The low value of the maximum instantaneous current is advanta-
ir
Sec.8.3
Current-Controlled
343
PWM Inverters
Firing pulse generator
r------------------
I
1
I
I
:
Comparator
with hysteresis
1
11
-f-
DC supply
1
1 To
Lock-out
time delay
s, S4
Inverter
: .
1
1
L
1
J
(a)
Upper band
limit
~::~eresis
)J _~
-i
Lower band
limit
Reference
current
Phase A
current, iA
o
1-
tr
... ... ..... ......-
1
1
wt
.. ..
I
Ir-
wt
-0.5 Vd
i-
i-
...
i-
(b)
Figure 8.26
Current controlled pulse width modulation.
geous in transistor inverters, because the ratio of rnaxirnurn instantaneous to continuous current rating is low for a transistor. It is also beneficial in thyristor and GTO
inverters because it reduces the cornrnutation burden. A decrease in hysteresis band
reduces the peak-to-peak current ripple, but increases the frequency of modulation.
344
Induction
Chap. 8
Motor Drives
A suitable hysteresis band is chosen depending on tum-on and tum-off times of the
device used to realize the switches. Since the higher the modulation frequency, the
better the machine voltage and current waveforrns, fast devices, such as power transistors and MOSFETs, are suitable for such inverters. At present the power transistor is widely used in such inverters.
As the inverter frequency is increased to increase speed, to compensate for the
increase in the machine impedance, the inverter is required to supply higher voltage
to produce the same current. Hence the pulse width increases and the notch width
decreases. This allows smooth transition frorn the current-controlled PWM mode to
the 6-step voltage source inverter mode. Hence, the drive operates as a eSI drive up
to base speed and as a VSI drive above base speed. The modes of drive operation are
the same as described in the previous section. The closed-loop drive schemes shown
in figures 8.23 and 8.24 can be used with the modification that signals f and Id' wil1
now control a three-phase reference current wave generator. This generator will proFiring pulse
generator
Amplitude
of
reference wave
Reference
wave
generator
DC supply
Inverter
+
To S,. S4
+
Flux
control
w,Q
+
+
wm
Slip speed
regulator
Speed
controller
~--------~----------------------------~
r
Tachogenerator
Figure 8.27
Closed-loop variable frequency drive using current-controlled PWM inverter,
Sec.8.4
Cycloconverters
345
duce reference currents i,t i~, and i:, which will control the machine winding currents iA, iB, and ic by PWM as just explained. The system based on the slip speed
regulator scheme of figure 8.23 is shown in figure 8.27. The power circuits of the
current-controlled
PWM inverter and the voltage source PWM inverters are identical. Hence braking and multiquadrant
operations described in section 8.1.5 for a
motor fed from a PWM voltage source inverter are applicable to a motor fed by a
PWM current-controlled
in verter.
8.4 CYCLOCONVERTERS
Oual converters have been described in section 3.10.1 and are shown in figure 3.32d
and e. They may be operated with simultaneous control or nonsimultaneous
control.
Rectifiers
1 and 2 may consist of a 6-pulse fully controlled
rectifier shown in
figure 3. 16a or a 3-pulse fully controlled rectifier. Oual converters are capable of
providing operation in all four quadrants of the V -1 plane, with a variable voltage.
The positive load current is supplied by rectifier I and the negative load current is
supplied by rectifier 2. When operated with nonsimultaneous control, only one rectifier conducts at a time - rectifier I for the positi ve load current and rectifier 2 for
the negative load current. Rectifier I operates as a rectifier when Va is positive and
as an inverter when Va is negative. The reverse is true for rectifier 2. When operating with simultaneous
control, both rectifiers operate all the time. When the load
current is positive, it is carried by rectifier 1, which operates as a rectifier or inverter
depending on whether Va is positive or negative. Rectifier 2, which is kept in readiness to take over whenever the current reverses, has its firing angle cohtrolled
according to equation (3.117) to ensure that the dc terminal voltages of the two rectifiers are equal and no de current circulates between them. However, an ac current
circulates due to the difference in the instantaneous terminal voltages of the two rectifiers, and inductors L and L2 are .connected to limit it. When the load current
reverses, the two rectifiers reverse their roles.
Consider a dual con verter with the nonsimultaneous
control feeding an R-L
loado The converter output voltage is controlled by a closed-loop voltage control as
shown in figure 8.28. Reference signal v consists of a sinusoidal signal of frequency lower than that of the source frequency. Because of the closed-Ioop control,
the firing angles of various thyristors will be automatically altered to allow the average converter output voltage Va to track the reference wave v. The frequency of the
fundamental in the output wave will be the same as that of the reference wave. Further, the amplitude of the fundamental in the output wave will depend on the amplitude of the reference wave. Hence, the amplitude and frequency of the output voltage
can be controlled by varying the amplitude and frequency of the reference signal.
Thus, a dual converter operated in this way works as a single-phase cycloconverter.
It allows a variable frequency and variable magnitude voltage source to be obtained
from a source of fixed frequency and fixed voltage. A three-phase voltage source cycloconverter is obtained by using three dual converters with their reference waves
phase shifted by 120 with respect to each other. To avoid interaction between the
dual converters, each dual converter is fed by a separate three-phase winding of a
three-phase transformer as shown in figure 8.29. When the dual converters are oper-
346
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 8
3phase
AC supply
(X,
f,
Cl:z
v.
Load
2~
Dual converter
Firing and
control
circuit
Firing and
control
circuit
V.
Voltage
controller
V.
Figure 8.28 Realisation of a l-phase cycloconverter by closed-loop voltage control of
a dual converter.
ated with simultaneous control, the transformer can be avoided and instead interphase inductors may be used as shown in figure 8.30.
The foregoing approach can be used to realize a cycloconverter from off the
shelf dual converters. It is also helpful in understanding the principie of a cycloconverter. In actual practice, a cycloconverter is realized without closed-loop voltage
control, as explained next.
The inverse cosine firing for a dual converter is described in section 5.2.2. The .
generation of firing pulses is shown in figure 5.10. The firing pulses for thyristors TI
to T6 of rectifier 1 are produced at the intersection of control voltage Vewith signals
Vrl to Vr6, respectively. When Veis changed from its maximum positive value to 0,
the firing angle changes from O to 90 and the output voltage changes from its rnaxirnum positive value to O. When Veis changed from O to its negative rnaxirnurn, the
firing angle changes from 90 to (180 - 8) and the output voltage changes frorn Oto
its maximum negative value. The firing pulses for rectifier 2 are produced at the
intersection of ve with signals V:l to V:6' The variations of the firing angle and the
output voltage with Veare opposite to that for rectifier 1.
Sec.8.4
Cycloconverters
347
3-phase
AC supply
Primary
winding
Secondary
winding
1
Oual converter
Oual converter
Oual con verter 2
. Figure 8.29
control.
3-phase cycloconverter
employing
dual converters
with non-simultaneous
In a cycloconverter, the dc control signal is replaced by a sinusoidal signal Ve

as shown in figure 8.31. Inverse cosine reference signals Vrl to Vr6 for rectifier 1 are
also shown in the figure. As the control signal increases from its zero value, the
firing angle of rectifier 1 progressively decreases and hence the output voltage increases, reaching a maximum value at the peak of the control signal. After the peak,
the firing angle increases, reaching a value of 90 when Ve = O. Hence, the output
voltage also decreases. When the control signal reverses, the firing angle increases
from 90, reaching the maximum value at the negative peak of the control signal.
After the peak, the firing angle decreases reaching 90 when Ve = O. Consequently
the output voltage also vares in the same way as Ve' The same control signal with
reference voltage V;I to V;6 (not shown) produces somewhat identical variation in the
output voltage of rectifier 2. When operating with simultaneous control, both the
rectifiers work together. When operating in nonsimultaneous control, rectifier 1
works when the current is positive and rectifier 2 works when the current is nega-
348
Induction
Chap. 8
Motor Drives
3-phase AC supply
;::;:-=
~vlv'--
~VIIU~
,.--'--
,.--'--
~
i
,.--'--
~i
~tL:A'~~
f---+-+--i
-.--
'--,.-s:
e'
/~
Machine
phase
Figure
8.30
3-phase cycloconverter
employing
dual converters
Figure 8.31
Generation of the firing pulses for rectifier
the output frequency is (1/6) of the input frequency.
with simultaneous
control.
1 of the dual converter
when
tive. The load voltage wavefonn and the load current wavefonn, assuming ideal filtering, are shown in figure 8.32 for -nonsimultaneous control. The rectifier under
operation and the mode of operation are also indicated in the figure.
A 3-phase cycloconverter is obtained when the three dual converters in figures 8.29 and 8.30 are controlled by sinusoidal control voltages which fonn a threephase set.
The frequency of the output voltage has to be less than that of the source. With
an increase in the load frequency, the harmonic content in the load voltage and
source current increases. Depending on how much harmonic content can be tolerated
by a load, a limit is imposed on the maximum frequency. In general, the output frequency is limited to below 40 percent of the source frequency - that is, below
24 Hz when the supply frequency is 60 Hz and below 20 Hz when it is 50 Hz.
Now consider the operation of the dual con verter of figure 8.28 with a closedloop current control, instead of closed-loop voltage control. Let the reference current
i be sinusoidal and of frequency lower than the source frequency. When the load
Sec.8.4
Cycloconverters
349
-----
Phase current
Inversion
Inversion
Rectification
Rectifier
conducts
Figure
8.32
Output voltage wavefonn
-.....:::::::::-
Rectification
Rectifier 2
conducts
and modes of operation of a cycloconverter.
has enough inductance to produce continuous conduction, the average load current la
will track the reference current i. Consequently, the frequency of the load current
will be the same as that of the reference signal and the amplitude of the load current will be proportional to that of the reference signal. By varying the frequency
and the amplitude of the reference signal, one is able to get a variable frequency current source. Thus, a single-phase current source cycloconverter is realized. By having three-phase arrangements <;>ffigures 8.29 and 8.30 and with closed-loop current
control, a three-phase current ~ource cycloconverter is obtained.
With the voltage source cycloconverter, the variable frequency drives of figures 8.10 to 8.13 can be used and with the current source cycloconverter, the schemes
of figures 8.23 to 8.25 and 8.27 can be employed. In both the cases, the power can
flow in either direction. Hence, regenerative braking is inherent. Full four-quadrant
operation of the drive is obtained by reversing of the phase sequence. Because of the
low frequency range, the speed range of a cycloconverter drive is low.
A 3-phase cycloconverter will require 36 thyristors. The number of thyristors
can be reduced to 18 when a cycloconverter employs 3-pulse fully controlled rectifiers instead of 6-pulse fully controlled rectifiers. This, however, increases the
harmonic contento Because of the need for a large number of thyristors, a cycloconverter becomes economical only for large size drives, where, because of the large
current rating, a number of thyristors will have to be connected in parallel if an
inverter is used.
For the foregoing reasons, cycloconverter controlled induction motor drives
are used in high power drives requiring low speed range, such as rolling mills and
mine winders. Like controlled rectifiers, cycloconverters also suffer from a low
power factor at low-output voltages.
350
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 8
REFERENCES
1. G. K. Dubey, S. R. Doradla, A. Joshi, and R. M. K. Sinha, Thyristorised Power
Controllers, Wiley Eastem, 1986.
2. S. R. Bowes and R. R. Clements, "Cornputer-aided design of PWM inverter systems,"
IEE Proc., vol. 129, pt. B, Jan. 1982, pp. 1-17.
3. S. R. Bowes, "New sinusoidal pulsewidth modulated inverter," Proc lEE, vol. 122,
Nov. 1975, pp. 1279-1285.
4. G. Franzo, M. Mazzucchelli, L. Puglisi, and G. Sciutto, "Analysis of PWM techniques
using uniform sampling in variable-speed electrical drives with large speed range," IEEE
Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. 1A-21, July-Aug. 1985, pp. 966-974.
5. H. S. Patel and R. G. Hoft, "Generalised techniques of harmonic elimination and voltage
control in thyristor inverters, Part I-Harmonic
elimination ," IEEE Trans. on Ind.
Appl., vol. IA-9, May-June 1973, pp. 310-317.
6. H. S. Patel and R. G. Hoft, "Generalised techniques of harmonic elimination and voltage
control in thyristor inverters, Part Il: Voltage control techniques," IEEE Trans. on Ind.
Appl., vol. lA-lO, Sepr.-Oct. 1974, pp. 666-673.
7. K. A. Krishnamurthy,
S. B. Mahajan, G. N. Revankar and G. K. Dubey, "Selective reduction of harmonics in inverters," Int. Jour. of Electronics, vol. 46, 1979,
pp. 321-330.
8. G. S. Buja and G. B. Idri, "Optimal pulsewidth modulation for feeding ac motors," IEEE
Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-l3, Jan.-Feb. 1977, pp. 38-44.
9. l. Takahashi and H. Machikawa, "A new control of PWM waveform for mnimum loss
operation of an induction motor drive ," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-21,
May-June 1985, pp. 580-587.
10. F. C. Zach and H. Ertl, "Efficiency optimal control for ac drives with PWM inverters,"
IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-21, July-Aug. 1985, pp. 987-1000.
11. F. C. Zach, R. Martinez, S. Keplinger, and A. Seiser, "Dynarnically optimal switching
pattems for PWM inverter drives (for mrrimization of the torque and speed ripplies),"
IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-21, July-Aug. 1985, pp. 975-986.
12. 1. A. Houldsworth and D. A. Grant, "Use of harmonic distortion to increase the output
voltage of a three-phase PWM inverter," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. lA-20,
Sept.-Oct. 1984, pp. 1224-1228.
13. D. Grant and R. Seidner, "Techniques for pulse elimination in pulsewidth-rnodulation
inverters with no waveform discontinuity,"
IEE Proc. vol. 129, Pt B, July 1982,
pp. 205-210.
14. G. B. Kliman, "Harmonic effects in pulsewidth modulated inverter induction motor
drives," IEEE lAS Annual Meeting, 1972, pp. 783-790.
15. S. Williamson and R. G. Can, "A comparison of PWM switching strategies on the basis
of drive system efficiency," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. lA-20, Nov.-Dec. 1984,
pp. 1460-1472.
16. J. M. D. Murphy and G. Egan, "A comparison of PWM strategies for inverter-fed induction rnotors," IEEE Trans., vol. IA-19, May-June 1983, pp. 363-369.
17. K. S. Rajashekar and J. Vithayathil, "Harmonics in voltage source PWM inverters," Int.
Jour. of Electronics, vol. 50, Nov. 1981, pp. 325-337.
18. T. Grant and T. H. Barto n, "Control strategies for PWM drives," IEEE Trans. on Ind.
Appl., vol. 1A-16, March-April 1980, pp. 211-215.
19. J. Zubek, A. Abbodanti, and C. J. Nordby, "Pulsewidth modulated inverter motor drives
with improved rnodulation," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-lI,
ov-Dec, 1975,
pp. 695-703.
Chap. 8
References
351
20. Y. Matsuda, H. Fukui, H. Amano, H. Okuda, S. Watanabe, and A. Ishibashi, "Development of PWM inverter employing GTO," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-19.
May-June 1983, pp. 335-342.
21. D. A. Grant, J. A. Houldsworth, and K. N. Lower, "A new high-quality, PWM ac
drive," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-19, March-April 1983, pp. 211-216.
22. B. K. Bose, "Adjustable speed ac drives-a
technology status review," Proc. IEEE,
vol. 70, No. 2, Feb. 1982, pp. 116-196.
23. K. P. Phillips, "Current source converter for ac motor drives," IEEE Trans. on Ind.
Appl., vol. IA-8, Nov.-Dec. 1972, pp. 679-683.
24. M. B. Brennen, "A comparative analysis of two commutation circuits for adjustable
current input inverters feeding induction rnotors," IEEE Power Elec. Spec. Conf., 1973,
pp. 201-212.
25. R. L. Steigerwald, "Characteristics of a current-fed inverter with commutation applied
through load neutral point," IEEE Trans. Ind. Appl., vol. IA-15, Sept.-Oct. 1979,
pp. 538-553.
26. R. G. Palaniappan, "Voltage clamping circuits for CSVIM drives," IEEE Trans. on Ind.
Appl., vol. IA-21, March-April 1985, pp. 429-447.
27. W. Drurry, B. L. Jones, and J. E. Brown, "Performance of current-fed inverter system
with controlled flywheeling applied to the supply converter," lEE Proc., Pt B: Electrical
Power Applications, vol. 129, Sept. 1982, pp. 262-270.
28. W. Lienau, A. M. Hellmann, and H. C. Skudelny, "Power converters foro feeding
asynchronous traction motors of single-phase ac vehicles," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl.,
vol. IA-16, Jan.-Feb. 1980, pp. 103-110.
29. H. Inaba, A. Veda, T. Ando, T. Kurosawa, Y. Sakai, and S. Shima, "A new speed
control system for de motor using GTO converter and its application to elevators," IEEE
lAS Annual Meeting 1983, pp. 725-730.
30. L. H. Walker and P. M. Espelage, "A high performance controlled current inverter
drive,"JEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl. vol. IA-16, March-April 1980, pp. 193-202.
31. J. Zubek, "Evaluation of techniques for reducing shaft cogging in current fed ac drives,"
Conf. Record, IEEE lAS Annual Meeting 1978; pp. 517-521.
32. M. Hombu, S. Veda, A. Veda, and Y. Matsuda, "A new current source inverter with
sinusoidal output voltage and current," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-2l, Sept.Oct., 1985, pp. 1192-1198.
33. E. P. Cornell and T. A. Lipo, "Modelling and design of controlled current induction
motor drive systerns ," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-l3, July-Aug. 1977,
pp. 321-330.
34. M. L. McDonald and P. C. Sen, "Control loop study of induction motor drives using DQ
rnodel," Conf. Rec. IEEE lAS Annual Meeting, 1978, pp. 897-903.
35. S. Boloznani and G. S. Buja, "Control system design of a current inverter induction
motor drive," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-2l, Sept.-Oct. 1985, pp. 1145-1153.
36. H. G. Kim, S. K. Sul, and M. H. Park, "Optimal efficiency drive of a current source
inverter fed induction motor by flux control," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-20,
Nov.-Dec. 1984, pp. 1453-1459.
37. A. B. Plunkett, J. D. D'Atre, and T. M. Lipo, "Synchronous control of static ac
induction motor drive ," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. IA-15, July-Aug. 1979,
pp. 430-437.
38. D. M. Brod and D. W. Novotny, "Current control of VSI-PWM inverters," IEEE Trans.
lnd. Appl., vol. IA-21, May-June 1985, pp. 562-570.
39. A. Joshi and S. B. Dewan, "Cornparison in ac traction drives using voltage and current
source inverters," IEEE lAS Annual Meeting Proc. 1978.
352
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 8
40. K. Yenkatesan and J. F. Lindsay, "Cornparative study of the losses in voltage and Current source inverter-fed induction motors," Proc. IEEE lAS Annual Meeting, 1981,
pp. 644-649.
41. B. K. Bose, Power Electronics and AC Drives, Prentice-Hall, 1986.
42. S. B. Dewan, G. R. Slemon, and A. Straughen, Power Semiconductor Drives, John
Wiley, 1984.
PROBLEMS
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
A 460 Y, 60 Hz, 4 pole, 1760 rpm, Y-connected squirrel-cage induction motor has the
following parameters per phase referred to the stator: R, = 0.14 n, X, = 0.4 n, R; ==
0.08 o. X; = 0.8 n, x, = 15 n
The motor is fed by a 6-step inverter, which in tum is fed by a 6-pulse fully controlled
rectifier with an ac supply of 460 Y, 60 Hz.
The motor is controlled by variable frequency control at a constant flux.
1. Calculate the inverter frequency, motor input current, and rectifier firing angle for
1200 rpm and the rated torque.
2. Calculate the motor speed and input current, and rectifier firing angle for an
inverter frequency of 30 Hz and the rated torque.
3. If the minimum inverter frequency is restricted to 6 Hz, calculate the starting
torque and motor current as a ratio of their values when the motor is started at the
rated voltage and frequency.
Use the equivalent circuit of figure 6.ld and neglect derating due to harrnonics.
The drive of problem 8.1 is now controlled at a constant (Y/f) ratio, instead of at a
constant flux. Calculate
1. The inverter frequency, rectifier firing angle, motor input current, efficiency and
power factor, and rectifier power factor for a speed of 1200 rpm and the rated
torque.
2. The motor speed, input current, efficiency and power factor, and rectifier power
factor for an inverter frequency of 40 Hz and 80 percent of the rated torque.
3. If the mnimum inverter frequency is restricted to 6 Hz, calculate the breakdown
torque at 6 Hz as the ratio of the breakdown torque at 60 Hz. AIso calculate the
starting torque as a percentage of the starting torque obtained with constant flux
control.
Neglect friction, wiridage, core loss, skin effect, and motor derating due to harrnonics. Assume converter output current to be perfect dc. Use the equivalent circuit of
figure 6.1 d.
A 440 Y, 50 Hz, 6 pole, 960 rpm, Y-connected squirrel-cage induction motor has the
following parameters for the equivalent circuit of figure 6.ld: R, = 0.6 n, X, = In,
x, = 50 n, R; = 0.3 n, X; = 2 n
The machine is controlled by a 6-step inverter at a constant flux
1. Calculate and plot slip speed against frequency at rated and half of rated torque.
2. AIso calculate and plot slip frequency against torque for the frequencies 60 Hz and
30 Hz.
The drive of problem 8.3 is controlled at a constant (Y/f) ratio. Calculate the motor
speed at half of rated torque and inverter frequency of 40 Hz. AIso calculate the
rectifier firing angle, input ac current and power factor, and motor input current,
efficiency, and power factor at this operating point.
Chap. 8
353
Problems
Neglect friction, windage, core loss, skin effect, motor derating due to harmonics, and losses in inverter, filter, and rectifier. Assume the rectifier output current
to be ripple free.
8.5
A 440 Y, 50 Hz, 1470 rpm, 4 pole, Y-connected squirrel-cage induction motor has the
following parameters per phase referred to the stator: R, = 0.2 n, X, = 0.5 n, Xm =
17.5 n,
=0.11 n,
=0.8 n
The motor is controlled by a 6-step in verter. If it is driving a load requiring rated
power for all speeds greater than base speed, calculate for the motor
1. The torque, frequency, stator current, efficiency, and power factor for a speed of
1600 rpm.
2. The speed, torque, stator current, efficiency, and power factor for a frequency of
60 Hz.
3. What is the highest speed at which the motor can drive this load?
Use the equivalent circuit of figure 6.ld.
eglect friction, windage, core loss, ski n
effect, and derating due to harmonics.
R;
X;
8.6
The drive of problem 8.5 drives a load whose torque varies inversely as speed squared.
At the rated speed, the load torque is equal to 1.2 times the rated torque. Calculate
1. The torque and frequency for a speed of 2000 rpm.
2. The speed and torque for a frequency of 80 Hz.
Use the same assumptions as described in problem 8.5.
8.7
A 460 Y, 60 Hz, 1180 rpm, 6 pole, Y-connected,

squirrel-cage
induction motor has
the following parameters per phase referred to the stator: R, = 0.1
X, = 0.3
= 10 n, R; = 0.06 n, X; = 0.6 n
The motor is controlled by a 6-step inverter at a constant flux up to base speed and at
rated terminal voltage above base speed. For a constant rotor current of the rated
value, plot the developed torque, developed power and slip speed against the frequency ratio "a". Use the equivalent circuit of figure 6.ld.
x,
n,
n,
8.8
For the
1. The
2. The
3. The
4. The
Use the
braking qperation of the drive of problem 8.7, calculate

speed for a braking torque of 600
-rn and an inverter frequency of 30 Hz.
frequency for a speed of 900 rpm and a braking torque of 750
-m.
speed for a braking torque of 300 N-m and an inverter frequency of 75 Hz.
frequency for a speed of 1800 rpm and a braking torque of 400 N-m.
equivalent circuit of figure 6.1d and neglect friction, windage, and core loss,
8.9
A 460 Y, 60 Hz, 1185 rpm, 6 pole, Y-connected induction motor has the following
values for the parameters of the equivalent circuit of figure 6.ld: R, = 0.05 n, X, =
0.3 n, X; = 8 n, R; = 0.04 n, X; = 0.4 n
The motor is controlled by a 6-step inverter at a constant (Y If) ratio up to the ba e
speed and at the rated motor voltage above base speed.
1. Calculate the inverter frequency, stator current, regenerated power, and motor power
factor and efficiency for a speed of 900 rpm and a braking torque of 1000 N-m.
2. Calculate the speed, stator current, regenerated power, power factor, and efficiency
for a frequency of 30 Hz and a braking torque of 1000 N-m.
eglect friction, windage, core loss, and skin effect.
8.10
The inverter-motor
combination of problem 8.9 is fed by a 3-phase 6-pulse dual converter with an ac input voltage of 460 Y, 60 Hz. Calculate the inverter frequency,
power fed to ac supply and input ac current of the rectifier, when the drive is regenerating at a speed of 1300 rpm and a braking torque of 600 N-m. Neglect losses in
the rectifier, filter, and inverter, core loss, friction, windage, and skin effect. Assume
ideal filtering-that
is, a ripple-Iess rectifier output current and inverter input voltage.
354
8.11
Chap. 8
In prablem 8.10, dynamic braking is used instead of regenerative braking. Calculate

the value of the braking resistance if the switch which connects and disconects the
braking resistor has a duty ratio of 0.5.
8.12 A 400 V, 50 Hz, 4 pole, 1485 rpm, Y-connected squirrel-cage motor has the following
parameters for the equivalent circuit of figure 6.lb: R, = 0.03 n, X, = 0.32 n, X; ==
7 o, R; = 0.024 n, X; = 0.48 n
The motor is fed from a current source inverter, which in turn is fed frorn a 3-phase
fully contralled 6-pulse rectifier with an ac supply of 440 V, 50 Hz. The de link
inductance has a resistance of 0.001 ohm. The flux is maintained constant at the rated
value. Calculate
1. The stator current, de link current, and rectifier firing angle when the motor
operates at the rated torque and 50 Hz.
2. The inverter frequency, dc link current, and rectifier power factor for a speed of
1200 rpm and 80 percent of the rated torque.
3. The motor speed, stator current, dc link current, and rectifier firing angle for
90 percent of the rated torque and inverter frequency of 25 Hz.
8.13 The drive of prablem 8.12 is controlled at the rated motor terminal voltage for a frequency higher than the rated. For an inverter frequency of 75 Hz and a motor torque of
one-fourth the rated value, ca1culate motor speed, stator current, dc link current,
rectifier firing angle, and drive efficiency. Neglect friction, windage, core loss, skin
effect, derating due to harmonics, and losses in the inverter and rectifier.
8.14 The motor of problem 8.12 is fed from a current source inverter, which in turn is
fed frorn a class D chopper with a de line voltage of 600 V. The dc link inductor
has a resistance of 0.001 n. The motor is operated at a constant flux of the rated
value. Calculate the duty ratio of the chopper for the rated motor torque and a speed of
1000 rpm.
8.15 A 460 V, 60 Hz, 4 pole, 1782rpm, Y-connected squirrel-cage motor has the following
. parameters for the equivalent circuit of figure 6.lb: R, = 0.02 n, X, = 0.22 n, Xm ==
6.5 n, R; = 0.016 n, X; = 0.32 n
The motor is fed frorn a current source inverter, which in turn is fed from a 3-phase
fully controlled 6-pulse rectifier with an ac supply voltage of 480 V and 60 Hz. The
resistance of the de link inductor is 0.0008 n. The motor flux is maintained constant at
the rated value. For an inverter frequency of 40 Hz, .calculate motor speed, de link current, and rectifier firing angle for the developed braking torque of half the rated value.
8.16 The inverter motor system of problem 8.15 is now fed from a de source of 750 V
through a class D chopper. The de link inductor now has a resistance of 0.001 n. The
motor flux is maintained constant at the rated value. Ca1culate the inverter frequency
and the duty ratio of the chopper for the developed braking torque of 80 percent of the
rated value and a speed of 1000 rpm. AIso calculate regenerated power neglecting core
loss and skin effect.
9
Slip Power Controlled
Wound-Rotor Induction
Motor Orives
The methods of induction motor control described in chapters 7 and 8, control the
motor from the stator. Hence they are applicable to both squirrel-cage and woundrotor motors. However, the squirrel-cage motor is always preferred because of the
advantages described in chapter 8.
The present chapter considers the methods which control the motor from the
rotor. They are applicable to wound-rotor motors only. Compared to a squirrel-cage
motor, the wound-rotor motor has a number of disadvantages, such as higher cost,
weight, volume, and inertia, and frequent maintenance due to the presence of brushes
and slip rings. However, the control of a wound-rotor motor from the rotor allows
cheaper drives to be obtained for a few specific applications.
The portion of the air-gap power which is not converted into mechanical power
is called slip power. Slip power control methods regulate the amount of slip power.
Hence for a given air-gap power, the power converted into mechanical power is altered. Consequently, the speed for a given torque is changed. The methods involving
rotor resistance control and voltage injection in the rotor, described in sections 6.4.3
and 6.4.4, come under this category. This chapter considers the implementation of
these methods using power semi conductor converters. The following methods are
considered:
1. Static rotor resistance control.
2. Static Scherbius drive.
3. Static Kramer drive.
355
356
9.1 STATIC ROTOR RESISTANCE
Wound-Rotor
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 9
CONTROL
The rotor resistance control of a wound-rotor induction motor is described in

section 6.4.3. It is inefficient because the speed reduction is obtained by wasting slip
power in extemal resistors. It has, however, advantages of low cost, a good power
factor, and a high torque-to-current ratio for a wide range of speed, including starting and braking. The variable frequency control is the only other method of induction motor speed control which gives a high torque-to-current ratio. However, it is
very expensive. Hence, rotor resistance control finds application in drives requiring
low cost and a high torque-to-current ratio, such as low-power excavators, crane
hoists, and so on.
Instead of mechanically varying the resistance, the rotor circuit resistance can
be varied statically by using the principIe of a chopper. This gives stepless and
smooth variation of resistance and consequently of motor speed. As shown in
figure 9. 1, the slip frequency ac rotor voltages are con verted into de by a 3-phase
diode bridge and applied across an extemal resistance R. The self-commutated semiconductor switch S, connected in parallel with R, is operated periodically with a
period T and remains on for an interval ton in each periodo The effective value of
resistance R changes from R to O as ton changes from O to T. The filter inductor L,
is provided to minimize the ripple in current Id' A high ripple in Id produces high
harmonic content in the rotor, increasing copper losses and causing derating of the
motor. The filter inductor also helps in eliminating discontinuous conduction at light
loads. As in the case of a de motor, discontinuous conduction makes the speed regulation poor. The main contributor to the ripple is the diode bridge and not the semiconductor switch, because it operates at a sufficiently high frequency.
The diode bridge output voltage Vd changes from its maximum value at standstill to nearly 5 percent of the maximum value at near rated motor speed. If switch S
is realized using a thyristor, reliable commutation can only be obtained either by using
a bulky commutation capacitor or an auxiliary source for charging the commutation
capacitor. Hence, a thyristor is not suitable for this application. Because induction
motors are usually dsigned with a stator-to-rotor tums ratio greater than 1, the volt3-phase
AC supply
Wound-rotor
motor
Diode bridge
Figure 9.1 Static rotor resistance control

of wound-rotor induction motor.
Sec.9.1
357
Static Rotar Resistance Control
age Vd is small. Hence, a transistor is suitable for low-power drives. A GTO may be
employed for ratings beyond the capability of transistors. The self-commutation eapability of these devices ensures reliable commutation at all operating points and
makes the semiconductor switch compact.
An alternative static rotor resistance control circuit is obtained by using either a
6-pulse or 3-pulse controlled rectifier instead of the diode bridge and semiconductor
switch S. The power consumed by R is then controlled by controlling the rectifier
firing angle. As the firing angle is increased from O to the maximum, the effective
rotor resistance increases from R to a maximum value, controlling the speed.
9.1.1 Analysis
and Performance
The following assumptions are made:

1. Commutation overlap in the diode bridge due to the motor leakage inductances
is ignored. The effect of the commutation overlap is to increase the phase lag
in the rotor-induced voltage and the fundamental rotor current.
2. The filter inductor current Id is assumed to be ripple-free dc.
3. Under assumptions 1 and 2, the rotor phase current will have a six-step waveform shown in figure 9.2. The waveform of the corresponding input phase
voltage of the diode bridge is also shown. The fundamental rotor current is in
phase with the phase voltage. The rotor phase current waveform is similar to
the phase current waveform of a current source inverter (fig. 8.14). It can be
described by the Fourier series of equation (8.22). As far as harmonics are
concerned, the motor can be considered fed from the rotor by a current source.
The harmonics in rotor current cause only a small harmonic current to flow in
the stator." Therefore, the machine-induced emf and hence flux can be assumed sinusoidal. When the 'flux is sinusoidal, the torque is produced only by
the fundamental. The harmonics produce only pulsating torques.
4. The losses in the diode bridge and the semiconductor switch are neglected.
Equivalent Circuit
The duty ratio of ihe switch
is defined in the same way as for a chopper. Thus,

0=
Figure 9.2 Rotor phase current and phase

voltage waveforms.
(9.1)
ton
wt
358
Wound-Rotor
Induction
Motor Drives
When the ripple in current Id is neglected, the energy absorbed

ing a period of operation of the switch (T) is given by
by resistance
Chap. 9
R dur-
ER = IaR(T - ton)
The average power absorbed
Substituting
from equation
by resistance
R during a period T is
(9.1) gives
P, = IaR(l - 5)
Hence,
the effective
value of resistance
R* = (l - 5)R
(9.2)
From figure 9.2, the nns value of the rotor phase current is
Irrns=
[! f'll"3
Iad(wt)J/2
= ~Id
From the Fourier series expressions (3.109) to (3.111),

symmetry of the rotor phase current ir> b 1 = O and
al =-
4
7T'
Hence the fundamentar
f'll"2.
Id
(9.3)
because of the quarter-wave
2\13
SIn
'11'/6
wtd(wt) =--Id
7T'
rotor current is
(9.4)
From equations
(9.3) and (9.4),

(9.5)
The total resistance
across the diode bridge

Re = R,
The per-phase
power consumed
+ (l
= R,
by resistance
P, =
Substituting
+ R*
Re
3 Ia[Rd + (l
for Id from equation(9.3)
- 5)R
- 5)R]
gives
P, = O.5[Rd + (l - 5)R]I~s
This is equivalent to the power dissipation in a resistance
caused by the nns rotor current Irrns' Hence, the effective
tance Re is given by
R: = O.5[Rd
+ (l
- 5)R]
of O.5[Rd + (1 - 5)R] o,
per-phase value of resis(9.6)
Seco 9.1
Static Rotor Resistance
359
Control
An equivalent circuit of a machine is valid for a given frequency. In this analysis a fundamental frequency equivalent circuit of the drive is derived, which, while
retaining the relationship between fundamental voltages and currents, al so allows
calculation
of developed torque and total copper loss, including the copper los s
caused by harrnonic currents.
In a fundamental equivalent circuit, the power transferred across the air-gap
(Pg) is given by
Pg
(9.7)
3EI; cos 0,
0, is the phase angle between phasors E and 1;.

In the drive under consideration,
the total power consumed
(P~) is
where
P~ = 31~s(R,
Substituting
from equation
in the rotor circuit
+ RD + Pm
(9.8)
(9.5) gives
2
"'31,2( R, + Re*) + Pm
, _
-
7T
Pg
(9.9)
The fundamental
equivalent circuit of the drive must satisfy
Pg = P~. Hence, from equations (9.7) and (9.9)
El' cos 0
r
7T2
=-
'9"
In the drive under consideration,

current
sPg1
where Pg1 is the fundamental
developed by the fundamental
from equation
= 31;(Rr + RD
rotor
(9.11)
The mechanical
power
= (I - s)Pg1
(9.11) gives
m
from equation
(9.10)
air-gap power in the drive.

rotor current is given by
P
Substituting
gives
+ R *) + -.!!!
the slip power due to the fundamental
Pm
Substituting
12(R
the condition,
= 312r(R + R e*) (I -S
s)
(9.12)
the terms
(9.13)
where
(9.14)
360
Wound-Rotor
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 9
(9.15)
Referring all parameters
side gives
on the right side of equation (9.13) also to the stator
El'r cos 0 r = (R' h
+ RSr)I,2r
(9.16)
where Rh and R] are respectively the values of Rh and R referred to the stator side.
Thus,
(9.17)
where aTl is the stator to rotor tums ratio.
The per-phase fundamental equivalent circuit of the drive referred to the stator,
as obtained from equation (9.16), is shown in figure 9.3a. Resistance (R/s)
accounts for the developed mechanical power and the fundamental rotor copper loss.
Resistance Rh accounts for the rotor harrnonic copper loss. The equivalent circuit of
figure 9.3a can be simplified to that of figure 9.3b.
Performance
From the equivalent circuit of figure 9.3b,
1; = (R, + Rh + Rr/s) + j(Xs + X;)

T=~
I;\Rf!s)
N-m
(9.18)
(9.19)
Wms

_
T-
3 [
Wms
y2(Rr/s)
]
(R, + Rh + Rr/s)2 + (X, + X;?
x,
R,
x'r
R'h
(a)
Rs
x:
X,
R'h
I
(b)
Figure 9.3 Equivalent circuits of

wound-rotor motor with static rotor
resistance control.
(9.20)
Sec.9.1
361
Static Rotar Resistance Control
Rh and Ri are given by equations (9.14), (9.15), and (9.17).

For given values of 8 and s, the rotor current and torque can be calculated from
equations (9.18) and (9.20).
In this analysis, the energy loss in switch S and the diodes have been ignored.
This los s is negligible compared to the total rotor loss for low values of 8. For 8
close to unity, this los s forms a significant portion of the total rotor loss. Thus, appreciable error may be caused in the calculation of speed-torque curves for values of
8 close to unity.
The nature of speed-torque curves for different values of8 is shown in figure 9.4. For 8 = 1, R is fully bypassed by the semiconductor switch S. However,
due to the additional losses in the switch, resistance Rd, resistance Rh, and diodes,
the speed-torque curve for 8 = 1 lies below the natural speed-torque curve. For a
given torque, speed reduces with 8. The control regio n consists of the area enclosed
in ABCD. Any operating point in this region can be obtained by controlling 8. The
operation is not possible in the area ADO. The control region is increased and the
area ADO is decreased when R is increased.
Since only the fundamental rotor current is assumed to contribute to the torque,
the same value of the fundamental rotor current is necessary to produce a given
torque, whether the current is sinusoidal or nonsinusoidal. For the rated thermal
loading, the rms current is fixed, irrespective of whether it is sinusoidal or nonsinusoidal, when the increase in machine resistance due to skin effect is neglected. Therefore, the maximum fundamental current rating of the machine will decrease by a
factor (Ir/Inns)' The motor power rating will also decrease by this factor. When used
in this drive, the motor power rating will reduce to (Ir/Inns) times its rating. Thus,
where
motor derating
(I~)
0.95
If the ripple in the Id, commutation overlap in the diode bridge, skin effect, and -the
reduction in full-load speed due to losses in diode bridge, inverter, transformer, and
semiconductor switch are considered, the derating of the motor will be much higher.
Figure 9.4 Speed-torque curves for static

rotor resistance control.
T,.ted
362
Wound-Rotor
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 9
The harmonic torques, both steady and pulsating, have small values, and they
can be ignored in a well-designed motor.
Compared to conventional rotor resistance control methods employing contac.
tors, slip regulators, and so on, the static rotor resistance control has the disadvantage of requiring motor derating. But it has many more advantages, such as smooth
and stepless control, fast response, less maintenance, longer life, compact size, assured balance between rotor phase currents, simple closed-loop control, and so on.
Because of the fast and simple closed-loop operation, the drive can provide
fast transient response during starting and braking. Fast acceleration during starting
is obtained by operating the. motor at breakdown torque for all speeds. It was shown
in section 6.1.1 that the rotor current has a fixed value at the breakdown torque for
all speeds. The do sed-loop current control scheme of figure 9.5, with reference current set for the breakdown current, is employed to get fast acceleration. Similarly,
fast deceleration under plugging is obtained by operating the motor again at breakdown torque. A phase sequence reversal arrangement in the stator will be required to
switch over from motoring to plugging. This will also allow motor reversal. The
closed-loop control of figure 9.5 can be used for fast deceleration in plugging and
also during the entire reversing operation, provided R is chosen large enough to get
the breakdown torque at the highest speed in plugging. In the case of de dynamic
braking also, for a given dc current through the stator, the rotor current at breakdown
torque has a constant value for all speeds, as explained in section 6.3.3. Therefore,
the closed-loop scheme of figure 9.5 can also be used to get fast dc dynamic braking.
In some crane applications, to get good speed regulation and smooth operation,
the drive is operated with closed-loop speed control with inner-current control (similar to the scheme of fig. 5.lb or fig. 7.5). This allows speed control with good speed
regulation as long as the operating point is located in the control region ABCD of
figre 9.4. For lower torques, the operation will take place on line AD and closedloop control will become ineffective. To extend the constant speed operation to
region ADO and to get four-quadrant control with plugging, the three-phase voltage
controller of figure 7.3 is incorporated in the stator circuit. In the region ABCD
AC supply
Ir
Wound-rotor
motor
Figure 9.5
Closed-loop current control for starting and braking.
Sec.9.1
Static Rotor Resistance Control
363
(fig. 9.4); the stator voltage is maintained constant at the rated value and the closedloop speed control is obtained by controlling o. In the region ADO, o becomes O and
closed-loop speed control is obtained by varying the firing angle ex of the voltage
controller. The transient operation for a change in speed command is carried out at
the rated terminal voltage by the rotor resistance control. This ensures a high torqueto-current ratio, and, hence, fast transient operation. The speed reversal is carried
out as follows.
When speed command is reversed, the firing pulses are withdrawn to force the
current through the conducting thyristors to zero. After the thyristors cease to conduct, a delay of 5 to 10 ms is provided for the thyristors to regain their forward
voltage blocking capability. Now the firing pulses are released to another set of
thyristors to cause reversal of the phase sequence. The firing angle is set to provide
rated stator voltage and o is controlled to regulate the current. The motor is braked
and then accelerated in the reverse direction at the maximum allowable current and
torque by the rotor resistance control. The drive is finally brought to the desired
speed by first adjusting o. However, if the operating point lies in the region ADO of
figure 9.4, o would reach its lowest limit (that is, O, on line AD). Now the stator
voltage will be reduced by increasing ex to get the required speed in the region ADO.
Example 9.1
A 3-phase, 460 V, 60 Hz, 1164 rpm, Y-connected, wound-rotor induction motor has
the following parameters: R, = 0.4 O, R; = 0.6 O, X, = X, = 1.8 O, X, = 40 n, stator
to rotor turns ratio is 2.5. The motor speed is controlled by static rotor resistance control. Fi1ter resistance is 0.02 O and the externa! resistance is chosen such that at {)= O,
the breakdown torque is obtained at standsti11.
1. Ca1cu1ate the va1ue of the external resistance.
2. Ca1culate {)for a speed of 960 rpm at 1.5 times the rated torque.
3. Ca1culate the speed for {)= O. and l.5 times the rated torque.
Neglect friction and windage.
Solution:
= 120f = 120 x 60 = 1200 rpm
'p
V = 460/\1'3 = 265.6 V
lm, =
.
Full-load slip
1200 x 27T
60
= 125.66 rad/sec.
1200 - 1164
1200
= 0.03
Without rotor resistance control,
T
Full-Ioad torque
3 [
= lm,
(R, +
~;y
V2(R;/s)
+ (X, + X;)2
3
[(265.6)2(0.6/0.03)
125.66 (
0.6)2
2
0.4 + 0.03 + (3.6)
78.5 N-m
364
Wound-Rotor
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 9
1. From figure 9.3b, at the breakdown torque
R'
-; = [(R,
+ R~)2 + (X, + X;)2]1/2
When the breakdown torque occurs at standstill,

(R;)2 = (R,
+ R~)2 + (X, + X;)2
or
(R;)2 = R~2 + 2R~R,
+ R; + (X, + X;)2
(E9.1)

R~ = (~2 _ I)R; = 0.0966R;
(E9.2)
Substituting from (E9.2) and known values in (E9.1) gives

R;2 - 0.078R; - 13.25 = O
which gives R; = 3.68
n; hence,
R~ = 0.355
R~* = R; - R; = 3.68 - 0.6 = 3.08

R: = 3.08/ail
= 0.49
From equation (9.6) for 8 = O,

R = 2R: - R, = 2
0.49 - 0.02 = 0.96
2. With rotor resistance control, from equation (9.20),

2
V (R;/s)
3 [
T=
Wm,
(R,
(9.20)
+ R~ + R;/S)2 + (X, + X;)2
From (E9.2), R~ = 0.0966R;

s-
1200 - 960
-O 2
1200
-.
Rated torque as just calculated = 78.5 N-m. Substituting

equation (9.20) gives
15x78
.
or
.5
=_3_[
125.66 (0.4
R;2 - 2.595R
(265.6)2(R;/0.2)
+ 0.5 = O or R; = 2.39 n or 0.2 n
The latter value is not feasible because it is less than R;

Hence, R; = 2.39 n
R*=(R'-R')/2
e
+ 0.0966R; + R;/0.2)2 + (3.6)2
aTl
=(2.39-0.6)=029fl
(2.5)2
.
known values in
Sec.9.2
Static Scherbius
365
Drives
O - 5) = 2R: - Rd = 2 x 0.29 - 0.02 = 0.58

R
or
5 = 0.42
0.96
3. From equations (9.6),

R: = 0.5[0.02
R; = R;
+ (1 - 0.6) x 0.96] = 0.202 n
+ ailR: = 0.6 + 6.25 x 0.202 = 1.86 n
R~ = 0.0966 x 1.86 = 0.18

15 x 785 =_3_[
.
.
125 66 (
.
0.4
(265.6)2(1.86/s)
1 86)2
+ 0.18 + -'s- + (3.6)2
which gives
GY
-7.06G)
giving ~ = 6.47
s
+ 3.84 = O
or
0.595
or
s = 0.15
or
1.68
Discarding the latter value which is not feasible,

N = N,O - s) = 12000 - 0.15) = 1020 rpm
9.2 STATIC SCHERBIUS DRIVES

Instead of wasting the slip power in the rotor circuit resistance, it can be fed back
to the ac mains using the approach suggested by Scherbius.? A static scheme based
on this approach is shown in figure 9.6. It is known as the static Scherbius drive. It
is also knwn as the slip power recovery scheme or subsynchronous con verter cascade because it is capable of providing speed control only in the subsynchronous
speed range.
A diode bridge converts a portion of slip power into de which in turn is converted into line frequency ac by a 3-phase line commutated inverter and fed back to
the ac mains through a transformer. The filter inductor L, is provided to eliminate
discontinuous conduction and to minimize the ripple in the de link current Id to keep
the harmonic copper losses, and the consequent derating of the motor, low.
Drive operation and analysis is considered subjected to the assumptions 1 to 4
described in section 9. l. 1 for the static rotor resistance control. In addition to these
four assumptions, the following assumptions are also made:
5. The transformer is assumed ideal-that
is, having no leakage, no loss, and the
capability to exactly transform a six-step current wave from the inverter to the
ac mains.
6. From the foregoing assumption it automatically follows that the commutation
overlap in the inverter will be neglected. In any case it is much smaller com-
366
Slip Power Controlled Wound-Rotor Induction Motor Drives
Chap.j;
AC supply
--
Power
fedback
Shaft
power
Slip
power
Diode bridge
Inverter
Figure 9.6
Static Scherbius drive.
pared to the commutation overlap in the diode bridge which has also been neglected (assumption 1).
Initially, approximate relations are derived to get an idea of the control range of
the drive and to simplify the phasor diagram which is considered in the next section.
If the stator and rotor leakage impedance drops are also neglected, in addition
to assumptions 1 to 6, the output voltage of the diode bridge is obtained frorn equation (3.78) by substituting a = O. Thus,
(9.21 )
where V is the stator phase voltage and aTI is the stator to rotor tums ratio.
Again from equation (3.78), the de output voltage of the line commutated inverter is given by
VI
3V6
= --
7T
V
aTI
-- cos a
(9.22)
where aTI is the transformer line side-to-inverter ac side tums ratio and a is the inverter firing angle.
If the resistance of inductor L, is ignored, then
Sec.9.2
Static Scherbius
367
Drives
Substituting from equations (9.21) and (9.22) and rearranging tenns gives
an
s = - - cos ex = - aT cos ex
aTI
(9.23)
where aT = aTI/aTI'
For inverter operation ex 2': 90; therefore s is always positive. By varying ex
from 90 to 180, s can be varied from O to aToIf aTI is chosen equal to aTI, then the
slip will vary from O to 1 and the motor speed from synchronous to standstill. Thus
the motor speed can be controlled in the subsynchronous region simply by controlling the inverter firing angle.
From assumptions 1 and 2, the rotor current will have a six-step waveform as
shown in figure 9.2. Its fundamental component will be in phase with the slip frequency input voltage of the diode bridge, because a diode bridge always operates
with ex = O. According to equations (9.21) and (9.22), for a given inverter firing angle, VI, Vd, and therefore the input voltages of the diode bridge, have fixed values.
As the inverter firing angle is changed, the diode bridge input voltages are made to
change to maintain a balance between Vd and VI, consequently changing the motor
speed. Thus, this method in fact is the speed control of the induction motor by injecting a slip frequency voltage in the rotor circuit, as described in section 6.4.4.
Consequently, the power flow diagram of figure 6.17 and equations (6.59) to (6.68)
are also applicable to this drive. However, it can only provide the subsynchronous
motoring and supersynchronous braking operations. For the subsynchronous braking
operation to be obtained, the slip power must flow from the de link to the rotor, as
shown in table 6.2 and explained in section 6.4.4. This is not possible due to the
diode bridge, which can allow power flow only from the rotor to the de link.
Approximate speed-torque relations can be derived as follows. If the rotor cop1'er loss is neglected, then from figure 6.17, the fundamental rotor slip power sPg is
approximately equal to the de link power. Thus,
sPg = VdId
(9.24)
or
P = VdId
S
Now
T=~=
VdId
Wms
SWms

T=3v'6~
(9.25)
7T anWms
which suggests that the torque is approximately proportional to the de link current Id'
Since the fundamental rotor current is proportional to Id [equation (9.4)], the torque
is directly proportional to the fundamental rotor current.
368
Wound-Rotor
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 9
9.2.1 Power Factor Considerations

The approximate phasor diagram of the drive for operation at the rated torque is
shown in figure 9.7. All the phasors are referred to the stator or line side. The addi.
tion of the magnetizing current 1m and the stator-referred fundamental rotor currenr
gives the stator current Is' which lags behind the stator phase voltage V by an
angle CPs' As just explained, for a given torque , !he fundamental rotor current is
constant. Hence, for the rated torque operation, I, has a constant magnitude and
phase angle. The addition of Is and the transformer line side fundamental current IT,
gives the fundamental drive input current IL. If the de link current is assumed ripple
free, the fundamental inverter ac current 1, willlag behind its ac phase voltage by an
angle a. Hence, IT also lags behind V by an angle a. The phasor diagram has been
drawn for two values of "aT" (that is, aT = 1.04 and aT = 0.52, where aT = aTl/an).
First consider the operation for aT = 1.04. For reliable commutation of thyristors, the inverter firing angle is kept less than 180. It is assumed that reliable commutation is assured if the maximum value of a is restricted to 165. Now if speed
control is required from synchronous speed to stand-still, then from equation (9.23),
1:
1 = -aT cos 165 or
aT = 1.04
This shows that "a-" has been chosen such that zero motor speed is obtained when
a = 165. Thus for s = 1, phasor IT lags behind V by 165. If the machine losses are
neglected, then zero speed is obtained when the power fed back equals the motor
power input, which gives
IT cos 165 = Is cos CPs
This condition is satisfied when OA forms the phasor IT. For a ripple-free Id, the rotor and inverter ac currents have identical amplitudes and waveforms. Therefore, 1,
D~
-r __
r--r
+-V
Figure 9.7 Phasor diagram of static

Scherbius drive at rated torque.
Sec.9.2
Static Scherbius
369
Drives
must be equal to Ir and hence IT = aTl;. Since for a given torque 1; is constant, IT
must also be constant. This suggests that as the slip is controlled from 1 to O, the tip
of the phasor IT moves along the locus ABC, which is an are of the circle with the
center at O and the radius equal to OA. At point B, the slip is 0.5 because the power
retumed to the line is 50 percent of the motor power input. Similarly, the slip is}deally zero at point C because_ no po~er is retumed to theline. The line current IL is
obtained by adding phasors I, and IT. The tip of phasor IL will also move along the
are ABC as slip is changed from 1 to O, with the other end fixed at D. For s = 0.5,
phasor IT is shown as In. The sum of phasors Is and ITI gives line current ILl which
lags behind the line phase voltage V by an angle CPLl'Note that the fundamental drive
power factor cos CPLlis much smaller compared to the motor power factor cos CPs'
Sirnilarly, if line current phasors are examined for s = O (DC) and s = 1 (DA), one
observes that the drive power factor, which is already very low at s = O, decreases
further with an increase in slip and becomes zero at s = l. The drive power factor is
poor at s = O, because, while the real power drawn by the drive from the line remains
the same as that taken by the motor, the inverter draws an additional reactive power
3VIT from the line. The drive power factor decreases with an increase in slip, because, while the real power drawn from the line is the difference between the real
powers drawn by the motor and inverter, the reactive power is the sum of the reactive powers drawn by the motor and the inverter. The poor power factor is a major
drawback of this drive.
Next consider an application where speed control is required from synchronous
to half of synchronous speed. From equation (9.23), the value of "aT" which gives
the lowest speed (s = 0.5 here) at the highest permissible value of firing angle (that
is, 165) is given by
0.5
-aT cos 165 or
aT = 0.52.
Any value of "aT" greater than 0.52 will also allow the speed control from synchronous to half-synchronous speed. For example, with aT = 1.04, the speed can be
varied from synchronous to half-synchronous speed when a is controlled from 90 to
118.7. Let us examine the power factor for these two altematives (that is, aT = 0.52
and aT = 1.04).
Figure 9.7 also shows the phasor. diagram for aT = 0.52 and the rated torque
operation. Since the torque is the same, the stator current is still represented by the
phasor ls. As just explained, IT = aTI;; hence for aT = 0.52, the magnitude of the 1T
phasor will be half of that for aT = 1.04. Thus, as the slip is changed from O 5 to O,
the tip of IT phasor will move along the locus A'B'C', which is an are of a circle
with the center at O and the radius equal to (aTI;). The line current 1Lwhich is the
sum of Is and IT will have its tip moving along the locus A'B'C' when s is changed
from 0.5 to O. For s = 0.5, the line current for aT = 0.52 is shown as Iu, and the
line current for aT = 1.04 is shown as ILl' The comparison of the phases ofthese line
current phasors shows that the drive will have a higher power factor for aT = 0.52.
Comparison of phase angles for any value of s between O and 0.5 will show that the
power factor is higher for aT = 0.52. A comparison of the power factor for aT = 0.52
with that for any other value of aT> 0.52 will show that for any slip between O and
0.5, the power factor will have the highest value when aT = 0.52. It may be noted
370
Wound-Rotor
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap.9
that the choice of aT = 0.52 was done to achieve the drive operation at the maxirnum
permissible firing angle at the lowest speed.
From the preceding discussion, the following important conclusions can be
drawn:
1. The drive power factor is maximized when "aT" is chosen to obtain the drive
operation at the maximum permissible firing angle at the lowest speed.
2. The narrower the speed range, the greater the power factor.
The optimum value of "a-" which satisfies condition 1 can be obtained by the
choice of transformer tums ratio. Let us consider a numerical example to fully ernphasize the need for a transformer to improve the power factor of the drive. Consider
a motor with aTl = 4, V = 230 V, and t, = 40/-30. The desired control range is
from synchronous to 80 percent of synchronous speed. For simplification it is assumed that the highest value of firing angle is 180.
From equation (9.23), the optimum value of aT = 0.2. Hence,
aT2= aTI/aT = 4/0.2 = 20.
Now IT = aTI;
Assuming 1; = I,
IT = 0.2 x 40 = 8 A
Hence,
IT = 8/-180
IL =
I, + IT = 40/-30
+ 8/-180 = 33.3/-36.9
Power factor = cos 36.9 = 0.8.

Let us examine the power factor when the transformer is not employed and the
inverter is directly connected to ac mains. This amounts to setting aT2= 1, which
gives aT = 4. From equation (9..23) at s = 0.2 and aT = 4, a = 92.9.
Now, IT = aTI; = aTIs= 4 x 40 =: 160 A
IT = 160/-92.9
IL=40/-300+
A
160/-92.9=
181.75/-81.6
Power factor = cos 81.6 = 0.146

Note that when the transformer is not used, the power factor at the lowest speed
drops to 0.146 from 0.8 and the line current increases from 33.3 A to 181.75 A.
Because aTI is usually greater than 1, a transformer is necessary to achieve the
optimum condition 1 just stated. If a transformer is not used, the power factor will
deteriorate. The narrower the speed range, the greater the deterioration in the power
factor. In other words, when the speed range is narrow, the use of a transformer substantially improves the power factor over its value without a transformer.
The drive power factor can be further improved if the lagging reactive power
drawn by the con verter from the line can be reduced. A simple alternative is to operate the inverter with controlled flywheeling as described in section 3.5.2.10-12In a
Sec.9.2
Static Scherbius Drives
371
3-phase inverter, the controlled flywheeling can be used for the firing angles between
90 and 120. Thus, the power factor is improved for the speed range covered by this
range of firing angle. For a ~ 120, controlled flywheeling cannot be used; hence
the drive power factor remains unaltered. A comparison of the power factor with and
without controlled flywheeling is shown in figure 9.8. With controlled flywheeling,
when the slip is changed from 1 to O, the tip of the line current phasor IL moves
along the path ABO instead of ABC in the absence of the controlled flywheeling.
Greater improvement in the power factor is obtained by operating the inverter
with pulse-width modulation. For this, thyristors in the inverter are replaced by selfcommutated switches (section 3.8). With pulse-width modulation, the inverter can
be operated with zero reactive power. In this case the tip of the line current vector
will move along the locus OEF, and thus the drive power factor will be substantially
improved. When pulse-width modulation is employed, the inverter can also be operated with a leading reactive power, thus causing further improvement in the drive
power factor.
9.2.2
Rating and Applications
Let us assume that the inverter operates at the maximum firing angle at the lowest
speed. This maximizes the drive power factor, as explained in the previous section.
To simplify the calculations, the largest firing angle is taken to be 180 and the slip
at the lowest speed is denoted by smax'Then from equation (9.23),
(9.26)
v
~----~~~--------~--~o
s=
e
-
- -
Controlled
----
Figure 9.8
Comparison of power factors.
Without
-
flywheeling
flywheeling
Pulse-widtti
modulation
372
Wound-Rotor
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap.9
For a given torque, Ir is fixed. Since I = Ir>the ac current carried by the rotor,
diode bridge, inverter, and transforrner secondary is the same. The ac voltage across
the diode bridge is maximum for the slip Smax.It is given by (smaxV/aTI). The ac side
inverter voltage is
V
aTI
-=_._=--
aTV
Since aT = smax'from equation (9.26), the ac voltage rating of the diode bridge, inverter, and transforrner secondary is the same. As the current rating has to be the
same, the kVA rating of these three is equal. Since the voltage rating of the diode
bridge is Smaxtimes that of the rotor, the kVA rating of each of these is Smaxtimes
that of the motor.
The foregoing conclusion about the kVA rating can also be derived from a different approach. At the rated motor torque, the air-gap power Pg is constant. From
figure 6.17, when the rotor copper loss is neglected, the maximum power carried by
the diode bridge, inverter, and transforrner will be SmaxPg (that is, Smaxtimes the motor rating).
When the speed control is required only in a narrow range, the kVA rating of
the diode bridge, inverter, and transforrner will be small. Therefore the capital cost
of the drive will be low. For example, when speed control is required from synchronous to 80 percent of synchronous speed, as in some fan and pump drives, the
kVA rating of each of these will be 20 percent of the motor kVA rating. Compare
this with the variable frequency voltage source PWM inverter drive. An inverter will
use a pair of six self-cornmutated switches and six diodes, and the diode bridge will
use another pair of six diodes. Here the rating is independent of the speed range.
Hence, each of thesepairs will have a rating at least equal to that of the motor. Furtherrnore, the control will be complex.
The low cost, coupled with good efficiency and simple control, makes this
drive suitable for large capacity [Megawatts range] fan and pump drives, where
speed control is required only in a narrow range. The drive has two drawbacks. It
cannot provide subsynchronous braking, and the power factor is rather poor. The
forrner drawback is not of much consequence in fan and pump drives, because the
fIuid pressure itself is able to provide adequate braking torque. However, the poor
power factor does cause concern, particularly when the drive capacity is very large.
Use of controlled fIywheeling or pulse-width modulation can be of great help in improving the power factor.
When the diode bridge, inverter, and transforrner are chosen to pro vide control
in a narrow speed range, a separate arrangement is required for starting the motor.
Usually, the motor is started by connecting external resistors in the rotor. A starting
arrangement is shown in figure 9.9. Initially, contacts C2 are closed and contacts el
are open. The drive starts with the rotor resistance control. At the lowest speed in
the control range, a speed sensitive device causes contacts CI to close and the inverter to be activated. Contacts C2 are opened after a suitable time delay to remove
the resistors.
In low-voltage and low-power drives, the transforrner is not employed, to reduce the cost. While this does not change the inverter current rating, the voltage rat-
Sec.9.2
Static Scherbius
373
Drives
AC supply
Wound-rotor
motor
Figure 9.9
Starting of Scherbius drive.
ing is increased to that of the line, and the power factor is greatly reduced. The
diode bridge may also be chosen to withstand rotor voltage for unity slip, to dispense
with the external starting resistors. For very low power applications (less than 10 kW),
a l-phase inverter is sometimes used, again to reduce the cost. Since the power is
now fed to only two lines, the line currents are unbalanced.
-.
9.2.3 Equivalent
Circuit
and Analysis
Equation (9.25) was derived with the limited purpose of showing that Id and 1; remain approximately constant for a constant torque. It is too imprecise to be used for
the calculation of the motor speed-torque curves. In this section, a fundamental frequency equivalent circuit and a method of calculating the drive performance more
accurately are described. In this analysis, the same six assumptions, which are described in section 9.2, are made. Since the de link current has been assumed ripple
free for a given Id, the rotor current waveform and amplitude will be identical to that
of the static rotor resistance controlled drive of figure 9.1, and the rms rotor current Inns and the fundamental rotor current Ir are given by equations (9.3) and (9.4)
and their interrelationship by equation (9.5).
Equivalent Circuit
For the fundamental equivalent circuit to represent the drive performance satisfactorily, it should not only retain the relationship between the fundamental voltages and
currents, but it should also allow us to calculate developed torque, total copper
loss - including the copper loss caused by harmonic currents - and power fed back
374
Chap.9
with reasonable accuracy. Because of assumption 3, only the fundamental rotor CUrrent will be responsible for producing torque.
In a fundamental equivalent circuit, the power transferred across the air-gap
(Pg) is given by equation (9.7).
In the drive under consideration, the total power consumed in the rotor circuit
(P~) will be the sum of the mechanical power developed (P m), rotor copper loss
(Per), and power fed back by the inverter (R). Thus,
(9.27)
From figure 9.6,
P, = -VIct
The negative sign with V is required because its reference direction is chosen with
the lower terminal positive with respect to the upper terminal as in any rectifier circuit. Substituting from equations (9.4) and (9.22) yields
Pr=
3VIr
---
aT2
cos a
(9.28)
+ O.5Rct)
(9.29)
Now,

Per = 3I~s(Rr
which suggests that the effective rotor circuit resistance per phase is (R,
_
Per-
+ O.5Rd).
7T
2(
)
"3
Ir Rr + O.5Rct
(9.30)
The torque and mechanical power are produced only by the fundamental rotor current. The .slip power with the fundamental rotor current is
sPg1
3I;(Rr
+ O.5Rd) + Pr
(9.31)
where Pg1 is the fundamental air-gap power in the drive.

The mechanical power developed by the fundamental rotor current is given by
Pm = (1- s)Pg1
Substituting from equation (9.31)
(9.32)
Pm = 3 [ Ir2( R, + O.5Rct)
r
VI
aT2] cos a (1-s--
s)
(9.33)
,.
"
Sec.9.2
Substituting from equations (9.28), (9.30), and (9.33) in equation (9.27)

2
P ~ = 3 (7T- - 1) (R, + 0.5Rd)I;

9
VI] cos a
+ -3 [ (R, + 0.5Rd)l; - _r
s
aT2
(9.34)
The fundamental equivalent circuit must satisfy the condition Pg = P~. Hence, from
equations (9.7) and (9.34)
2
7T
El; cos 0r = ( -9 - 1 (R, + 0.5Rd)l;
VI
+ (R r + 0.5R d) 1; - __
r cos a
s
saT2
(9.35)
(9.36)
where
Rh = (~2 -
"
"
375
R.
1) (R + 0.5R
(9.37)
d)
= (R, + 0.5Rd)
(9.38)
and
V = _ V cos a
(9.39)
aT2
AIso referring all parameters on the right side of equation (9.36) to the stator side
yields
-
El'r cos 0 r = (R' h
r)
+ RS I r,2 +
(V;)
S
I r'
(9.40)
where
(9.41)
and
(9.42)
The per-phase fundamental equivalent circuit of the drive referred to the stator,
as obtained from equation (9.40), is shown in figure 9.,10. Resistance (Re/s) accounts for the developed mechanical power and the fundamental rotor copper loss.
R,
x,
x'r
R'h
r;
+
E
Figure 9.10 Equivalent circuit of

wound-rotor motor with static Scherbius
control.
376
Wound-Rotor
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap.9
Rcsistance R h accounts for the rotor harmonic copper loss. Counter emf (V; / s) ac.
counts for the power fed back to the ac mains. It is always in phase with 1;.
In deriving the equivalent circuit of figure 9.10, the energy loss in the diode
bridge and the inverter has been ignored. This loss is negligible except for speeds
close to synchronous speed. For accurate prediction of performance for speeds close
to synchronous speed, this loss can be accounted for by noting that two diodes and
two thyristors will conduct simultaneously
causing nearly a constant voltage drop
equal to the sum of voltages across the four devices. Let this drop be denoted by VD.
This can be accounted for by modifying V; as given next.
V,r = -aT V cos a T' 7TaTlV
.17
D
(9.43)
3v6
Speed-Torque
Curves
From the equivalent circuit of figure 9.10,
[ (Rs + Rh + ~;)I:
~;r
+ [(Xs + X;)I;]2
= V2
or
(9.44)
where
(9.45)
R = Rs + R h + R; / s
(9.46)
Veq=V;/s
X
...
From equation
X,
+ X;
(9.47)
(9.44),
(R2 + X2)I,2r + 2V eqRI' r - (V2 - V2eq) = O
Hence,
(9.48)
AIso from figure 9.10 [or equation
(9.44)]
r.;,.
cos ~ r =
RI;+Veq
(9.49)
1;
For given values of s and a, one can obtain current

and its phase angle from equations (9.48) and (9.49). From equations (9.33), (9.38), and (9.39),
Pm
_
-
3[lrRr+
Vrlr]--
(1 - s)
= 3[1 r,2R, f + V'I']

r r
(9.50)
(1 - s)
S
Sec.9.2
377
Now,
T=
(1 _
Pm
)
S W
ms
=_3_CI,2R'+V'I']
r f
SW
(9.51)
r r
ms
Power Factor
When the supply voltage is assumed
sinusoidal,
Drive power factor (P.F.)
real power input

apparent
power mput
VIL cos cf>L

VIL(rms)
where IL = fundamental line current
_
cf>L= phase difference between V and IL
and IL(rms)= rms line current
Now,
I
P. F. = -1 - L cos cf>L= .L cos cf>L
L(rms)
(9.52)
where .L is the distortion factor and cos cf>Lis the fundamental power factor.
Equation (9.52) suggests that the P.F. can be calculated if the fundamentalline
current IL and its phase angle cf>L,and the rms line current IL(rms)are known. These
are evaluated as follows.
For a ripple-less Id, the rotor and inverter ac currents have identical amplitudes
and waveforms, but the inverter current lags behind the inverter voltage by an angle
a. If the rotor phase current waveform shown in figure 9.2 is shifted-by an angle a,
the inverter ac current waveform is obtained. The transformer line side current iT has
the same phase, but the amplitude is Id/an. The phase A current waveform of the
transformer is shown in figure 9.11. The supply phase A voltage has been taken as
the reference phasor. Thus,
VAN= V2V
sin wt
(9.53)
The stator phase A current isA has also been shown in the figure. It lags behind VAN
by an angle cf>s' Thus,
(9.54)
wt
Figure 9.11 Stator current and feedback

current waveforms.
378
Wound-Rotor
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap.9
Now,
(9.55)
and
or
(9.56)
From figure 9.11, the instantaneous line current iL is given by the following equation:
iL= V2 I, sin(wt
=V2Is
- <Ps) - Id/an,
sin(wt-<ps)'
= V2Is sin(wt
(a-
~)
- <Ps) + Id/an,
..!.<L=~l=~
an
<Ps~ wt ~ (a - ~)
v'6 an
~wt~(a+7T/6)
+ ~) ~ wt ~
(a
aTlI, =~a
v'6 an
(9.57)
v'6
(7T
r:
+ <Ps)
(9.59)
T r
Substituting in equation (9.58) gives

IL(nns)=
[1; + ~2 a?I;2 + 2aTIsI; costo _ <Ps)]
1/2
(9.60)
Sec.9.2
379
Substitution from equations (9.56) and (9.60) into equation (Y.52) gives the power
factor.
9.2.4 Performance
The nature of speed-torque curves of a static Scherbius drive with a as a para meter
is shown in figure 9.12. For speeds close to synchronous speed, regulation is good.
It becomes poor at low speeds, but the drive is rarely used in this range. Because of
the additionallosses in the diode bridge, inverter, filter, and resistance Rh, the rated
drive speed for a = 90 is lower than the rated motor speed. The harmonic content in
the rotor current is the same as for the static rotor resistance control. Hence, their
effect on the motor is similar to that described for the static rotor resistance control
in section 9.1.1. The important points to be noted are a derating of the motor by
more than 5 percent and that the harmonic torques, both steady and pulsating, are
negligible.
When the drive has been designed to operate in a limited speed range, the fall
of motor speed below the control range, due to a disturbance, may cause the de link
voltage to exceed the peak of the inverter input voltage. This will cause comrnutation failure in the inverter and consequently the short-circuiting of the de link and
ac source by the inverter's thyristors. Such a situation can be avoided by installing a
speed sensitive device which will change the operation to rotor resistance control
whenever the speed falls below the control range. The same device cal} be used to
reconnect the diode bridge (fig. 9.9) when the speed reaches the control range. This
speed sensitive device can also be used for switching over from resistance control to
static Scherbius control during starting.
If a reversible drive is required, a contactor for phase sequence reversal is incorporated in the stator circuit. Speed reversal is accomplished by switching over to
rotor resistance control (fig. 9.9).
Some pump and fan drives require closed-loop speed control. Closed-loop control is obtained by using the inner current control scheme of figure 9.13. This is similar to the single-quadrant closed loop speed control of a rectifier-fed de motor,
shown in figure 5.1b. The functions of various blocks in the speed and current loops
are the same as described in section 5.1 for the de motor drive of figure 5. lb. Since
the static Scherbius drive does not have subsynchronous braking capability, it is eapable of providing only forward motoring operation. Any decrease in speed cornmand causes the inverter counter emf to increase. Consequently, Id falls to zero,
Wm.r-------
Figure 9.12 Nature of speed-torque

curves of static Scherbius drive.
O~----~~------~-L~----~
Rated
T
torque
380
Wound-Rotor
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 9
3-phase
AC supply
Tachogenerator
Woundrotor
motor
Wm
r,
Wm
r:: 1
Speed
controller
Current
limiter
Figure 9.13
r::
Current
controller
Closed-loop speed control of static Scherbius drive.
causing the motor torque to go to zero. The drive, therefore, decelerates only due
to the load torque. In fan and pump drives, the load torque is large enough to provide adequate deceleration, When the speed reaches close to the desired speed, the
de link current flows and its value is adjusted to make the motor torque equal to the
loadtorqueat the set speed. Any increase in,the speed command sets the current reference for the maximum de link current. The drive aceelerates at the maximum allowable current and torque. When near the set speed, the current limiter desaturates
and the eurrent value is adjusted to produce a motor torque equal to the load torque
at the set speed.
When the inverter is operated withthe conventional fully eontrolled operation,
the de link current is sensed by sensing the inverter ac side eurrent, as is done in
de drives. When operated with controlled flywheeling or pulse-width modulation,
the link current is no longer proportional to inverter ac eurrents; consequently, it
must be sensed direetly from the de link.
It is worthwhile to compare the static Scherbius drive with the ac voltage controller drive deseribed in seetion 7.3, beeause both are commonly used in fan and
pump drives requiring speed control over a small range.
1. In the ac voltage controller scheme, the speed reduction is obtained by dissipating the slip power in the rotor. In the static Scherbius drive, the speed reduction is obtained by feeding the slip power back to the line. Hence the latter
scheme is far more efficient than the former.
2. In the ac voltage controller scheme, the motor current increases as the speed
is deereased below the full-load value. The maximum value is reached at
s = 1/3. This behavior derates the motor. To keep the derating low, use of an
Sec.9.2
Static Scherbius
381
Drives
inefficient high slip motor, with a full-Ioad slip between 0.1 and 0.2, becomes
mandatory.
In a static Scherbius drive, the current decreases with speed;
hence, it does not suffer with this type of derating. Therefore, a highly efficient low-slip wound-rotor motor can be used. This increases full-Ioad speed,
power, and efficiency.
3. The static Scherbius
drive power factor is low at and near full-Ioad speed.
4. The ac voltage controller
drive employs a squirrel-cage motor; hence, it does

not suffer from the limitations of a wound-rotor motor described at the begin- .
ning of this chapter.
5. Initial cost of a static Scherbius drive is higher, but the running cost is lower.
Example 9.2
The motor of example 9.1 is now controlled by a static Scherbius drive. The drive has
been designed to provide speed control up to 50 percent of the synchronous speed. The
maximum value of the firing angle is 170 and Rd = 0.0211.
1. Calculate "aT".
2. Calculate the torque and power factor for el! = 120 and 720 rpm.
3. Calculate el! for the rated torque and 720 rpm.
Solution:
1. If the no-load speed is chosen to be 50 percent of the synchronous speed.
then for all loads, speed control up to half-synchronous speed is assured. Thus from
equation (9.23),
0.5 = -aT cos 170
or
aT = 0.508
2.
s = (1200 - 720)/1200 = 0.4
From equations (9.37) to (9.42),

R; ='a~I(Rr
R~ =
(~2_
+ 0.5Rd) = R; + 0.5Rda~1
= 0.6 + 0.5 x 0.02 x 6.25 = 0.6625 11
I)R; =
V; = -aTV cos
el!
(~2_
= -0.508
1) x 0.6625 = 0.064 11
x
265.6 cos 120 = 67.46 V
From equations (9.45) to (9.47),

Veq= V;/s = 67.46/0.4 = 168.7 V
X = 3.6 11,
R = 0.4
+ 0.064 + 0.6625/0.4 = 2.12 11
VeqR= 168.7 x 2.12 = 357.7 V

R2
+ X2 = 2.122 + 3.62 = 17.45
V2 -
V;q = 265.62
168.72 = 42,084
382
Wound-Rotor
Induction
Motor Drives
Chap. 9
1= -357.7 + Y357.72 + 17.45 x 42,084 = 32.72 A

Ir
17.45

T=
0.4
3
[32.722 x 0.66 25
125.66
+ 67.46
32.72]
174 N-m
Substitution of the known values in equation (9.49) gives

- 2.12
cos O r -
32.72 + 168.7 - 09
265.6
- .
or
0, = 25.8
265.6
1m = --;o
= 6.64 A
I, = 1; + 1m = 32.72/
=
-25.8
36.1/ -35.4
+ 6.64/ -90
= 16.62/ -1200 A
IL = Is + IT = 36.1/ -35.4 + 16.62/ -1200 = 41.13/ -59.10 A
IT
= aTI:/-a
= 0.508
32.72/ -1200

IL(rms)= [36.12
+ ~2 (0.508)2
(32.22)2
+ 2 x 0.508
36.1
x 32.72 COS(84.6)r
41.46 A

P.F.
41.13
o
41.46 cos 59.1
0.51
3. From example 9.1, rated torque = 78.5 N-m.

V;
-aTV cos a
= -134.9
cos
-0.508
x 265.6 cos a
(E9.3)
Substitution of the known values in equation (9.51) gives

78.5
0.4
x ~25.66 [1;2 x 0.6625 + V;I;]
or
0.66251;2
+ V;I;
1315 .
Sec.9.2
Static Scherbius
Drives
383
Substituting from equation (E9.3) and rearranging the terms gives

1;2- 203.61; cos
(E9.4)
= 1985
From part 2, R = 2.12 n, X = 3.6 n, R2 + X2 = 17.45

Now Yeq= Y;/s = -(134.9 cos a)/O.4 = -337.25 cos a
and 2YeqR= -2 X 2.12 X 337.25 cos a = -1429.9 cos a
(R2+X2)I,2+2Y
r
eqRI'_(y2_y2)=0
r
eq
Substituting known values,

17.451;2 - 1429.91; cos a - [265.62 - (337.25)2 cos2a] = O
or
1;2 - 81.941; cos a - [4043 - 6518 cos! a] = O
(E9.5)
Subtracting (E9.5) from (E9.4) yields

-121.7I;
cos
a -
6518 cos!
+ 2058 = O
(E9.6)
Eqns. (E9.4) and (E9.6) are two simultaneous nonlinear equations in 1; and a. Their
solution by iteration gives 1; = 12.89 A and a = 134.
9.2.5 Supersynchronous
Speed Control
It was explained in section 9.2 that the drive of figure 9.6 can provide subsynchronous motoring and supersynchronous regenerative braking operations only, because the power flow can take place only from the rotor to the ac mains. If the
changes are made such that the power flow between the rotor and the ac mains becomes bidirectional, then the motoring and braking operations can De obtained both
for subsynchronous and supersynchronous speeds. If the rating is chosen to provide
operation at the maximum slip Smaxthen with the provision for supersynchronous
speeds, the slip can be controlled from -Smax to +smax, con sequen tly doubling the
speed range for the same rating. To realize these operations, the voltage injected into
the rotor must track the frequency and phase sequence of the rotor-induced voltages,
as explained in section 6.4.4. Thus, the phase sequence of the injected voltage must
be reversed for operation at supersynchronous speeds. Next we discuss three possible changes to be made in the drive of figure 9.6 to also get speed control at supersynchronous speeds.
The first change which allows the power flow in either direction is to replace
the diode bridge by a 6-pulse fully controlled rectifier. The power flow reverses
when the rectifier works as an inverter and the existing inverter is made to work as a
rectifier. The increase in speed range is obtained at the expense of an increase in cost
and complexity. The cost of a thyristor bridge is substantially higher than that of a
diode bridge. A slip frequency gating circuit is needed for the new converter. ear
the synchronous speed, the magnitude of the rotor-induced voltages becomes insufficient to provide line commutation of thyristors of the new rectifier, consequently the
drive fails to develop any torque near synchronous speed.
384
Slip Power Controlled Wound-Rotor
Chap.9
The second change which can allow the power flow in either direction is to replace the diode bridge by a current source inverter. 15 The inverter frequency and
phase sequence are made to track the frequency and the phase sequence of the rotor
induced voltages. As explained in section 8.2.3, a current source inverter and fully
controlled rectifier combination is capable of allowing power flow in either direction. Because of the forced commutation, no thyristor commutation problem occurs
near synchronous speed. At synchronous speed, the current source inverter supplies
the rotor with the de current necessary to produce torque. The cost and complexity
of this drive is substantially higher than the drive of figure 9.6.
The third possible change is to replace the diode bridge and inverter of figure 9.6 by a cycloconverter, which may be operated either as a voltage source or
current source.16,17 The cycloconverter frequency and phase sequence are made to
track those of the rotor-induced voltages. Since the thyristors of the cycloconverter
depend for their line commutation on the transformer output voltages which are constant and independent of the drive speed, no commutation problem is encountered
near synchronous speed. At synchronous speed, the cycloconverter supplies the
de current required to produce torque. When the drive is to be controlled in a limited
speed range, the cycloconverter frequency can be restricted to well below one-third
of the source frequency, ensuring nearly a sinuosidal rotor current and thus improving efficiency and reducing motor derating.
Because of the reactive power drawn by the cycloconverter, the drive has a low
power factor. The explanation for this behavior is the same as that given for the
drive of figure 9.6 in section 9.2.1. Sometimes the transformer is eliminated and the
cycloconverter is directly connected to the mains to reduce cost, weight, and volume
of the drive. But this makes the power factor very poor and increases the cost of the
cycloconverter due to an increase in the voltage rating of its thyristors.
Since the cycloconverter employs a .large number of thyristors, the drive is
suitable only for very large capacity drives.
In all three schemes, when the drive is designed for a limited speed range, resistance control is used for starting. The drive does not have the capability of speed
reversal. If speed reversal is required, a phase sequence reversing contactor is connected in the stator and rotor resistance control is used during reversal. The first
scheme is not used in practice. The last two are employed in very large capacity
pump or fan drives. But they have limited applications because the increase in cost
and complexity outweigh the benefits available from the increase in speed range.
The subsynchronous static Scherbius drive is generally preferred because of its low
cost and simplicity.
9.3 MODIFIED KRAMER DRIVES

Kramer suggested that the slip power taken from the rotor for speed control can be
usefully employed by converting it to mechanical power in an auxiliary motor
mounted on the induction motor shaft.? The mechanical power produced by the auxiliary motor supplements the main motor power, thus allowing the same power to be
Modified Kramer Drives
Sec.9.3
385
delivered to the load at different speeds, In the earlier static Kramer drive, the slip
frequency rotor voltages were converted into de by a diode bridge. The rectified
dc voltage was fed to the armature of a de motor mounted on the induction motor
shaft. If the armature resistance drop is neglected, then the de machine induced
voltage is equal to the de output voltage of the diode bridge, which in tum depends
on the induction motor slip. By controlling the field, the de motor induced voltage,
and consequently the induction motor speed, can be controlled. This static Kramer
drive is not employed anymore because of problems associated with de motors, particularly at high power levels. Instead, the drive of figure 9.14 is ernployed." In this
drive, the dc machine is replaced by a commutatorless de motor, which consists of a
synchronous motor fed by a load commutated inverter. The operation of the cornmutatorless motor is described in chapter 11. The speed is controlled by varying the
commutation lead angle. The speed can also be controlled by the field current control. However, it is not preferred because of the following problems associated with
it. To drive the system at synchronous speed, the field current must be reduced to
zero to reduce the inverter dc terminal voltage to zero. Now the induced voltage will
not be sufficient to obtain load commutation. Two other problems associated with
field current control are the slow response of the field circuit and increased armature
reaction at low field currents. The field current control can, however, be used to
control flux and the synchronous motor terminal voltage within the ratings of inverter thyristors.
The drive has a better power factor and lower harmonic content in the line current compared to the static Scherbius drive. In the static Scherbius drives, reactive
power and harmonics are associated with the power fed back to the line. In the static
Kramer drive, since the power is not fed back to the line, problems associated with
the feedback of power are also eliminated.
3-phase
AC supply
Power
recovered,
P,
Synchronous
motor
Load
sPg
Load
commutated
inverter
slip power
Figure 9.14
Cornrnutatorless Krarner drive.
386
Chap. 9
REFERENCES
l. P. C. Sen and K. H. Ma, "Rotor chopper control of induction motor drive: TRC
strategy," IEEE Trans. on Ind. Appl., vol. lA-ll, 1975, pp. 43-49.
2. G. K. Dubey, S. K. Pillai, and P. P. Reddy, "Analysis and design of a doubly-fed chopper
for speed control of slip ring induction motor-Part
I," IEEE Trans. on lECI, vol. 22,
no. 4, Nov. 1975, pp. 522-531.
3. G. K. Dubey, S. K. Pillai, and P. P. Reddy, "Analysis and design of a doubly-fed
chopper for speed control of induction motor, Part Il," IEEE Trans. on lECI, vol. 22,
no. 4, Nov. 1975, pp. 531-538.
4. P. R. Joshi and G. K. Dubey, "Optimurn de dynamic braking control of induction motor
using thyristor chopper controlled resistance," IEEE Trans. on lECI, vol. "1, no. 2,
1974, pp. 60-65.
5. P. C. Sen and K. H. Ma, "Constant torque operation of induction motors using chopper in
rotor circuit," IEEE Trans. on lnd. Appl., vol. LA-14, 1978, pp. 408-414.
6. R. M. Crowder and G. A. Smith, "Induction motors for crane applications," lE Jour. of
Electric Power Applications, vol. 2, no. 6, Dec. 1979, pp. 194-197.
7. A. S. Langsdorf, Theory of Alternating Current Machinery, McGraw-Hill, 1955.
8. A. Lavi and R. J. Polge, "Induction motor speed control with static inverter in the rotor,"
IEEE Trans. on Power App. and Syst., vol. PAS-85, Jan. 1966, pp. 76-84.
9. W. Shepherd and J. Stanway, "Slip power recovery in an induction motor by the use of a
thyristor inverter," IEEE Trans. on lnd. Gen. Appl., vol. lGA-5, Jan.-Feb. 1969,
pp. 74-82.
lO. P. N. Miljanic, "The through pass inverter and its application to speed control of
induction motor," IEEE Trans. on PAS, vol. PAS-87, 1968, pp. 234-239.
11. W. Drury, B. L. Jones, and J. E. Brown, "Application of controlled flywheeling to the
recovery bridge of a static Kramer drive," lEE Proc., vol. 130, Pt. B, no. 2, March
983, pp. 73-85.
12. N. Hayashi, "Speed control of wound rotor induction motor by through pass inverter,"
Electrical Engineering in Japan, vol. 83, no. 6, 1970, p. 59.
13. H. lnaba, A. Veda, T. Ando, T. Kurosawa, Y. Sakai, and S. Shima, "A new speed control
system for de motor using GTO converter and its applications to elevator," Proc. IEEE
LAS Annual Meeting 1983, pp. 725-730.
14. E. Ohno and M. Akamatsu, "Secondary excitation of an induction motor using a
self-controlled inverter," Electrical Engineering in Japan, vol. 88, no. lO, 1968, p. 76.
15. G. A. Smith, "A current source inverter in the secondary circuit of a wound-rotor
induction motor provides sub- and supersynchronous operation," IEEE Trans. on Jnd.
Appl., vol. lA-l7, July-Aug. 1981, pp. 399-406.
16. H. W. Weiss, "Adjustable speed ac drive systems for pump and compressor applications," IEEE Trans, on lnd. Appl., vol. lA-lO, Jan.-Feb. 1974, pp. 162-167.
17. G. A. Smith, "Static Scherbius system of induction-rnotor speed control," Proc. lEE,
vol. 124, no. 6, June 1977, pp. 557-560.
18. T. Wakabayashi, T. Hori, K. Shimizu, and T. Yoshioka, "Cornmutatorless Kramer
control system for large capacity induction motors for driving water service pumps,"
Conference Rec. IEEE LAS Annual Meeting 1976, pp. 822-828.
19. J. M. D. Murphy, Thyristor Control of AC Motors, Pergamon Press, 1973.
20. B. K. Bose, Power Electronics and AC Drives, Prentice Hall, 1986.
Chap. 9
387
Problems
PROBLEMS
9.1 A 460 V, 60 Hz, 6 pole, 1170 rpm, Y-connected wound-rotor induction motor has the
following parameters per phase referred to the stator: R, = 0.1 n, X, = 0.3 n, X; =
10 n, R; = 0.06 n, X; = 0.6 n. Stator to rotor turns ratio is 2. The motor speed is
controlled by the static rotor resistance control. Filter resistance is 0.01 n. The value of
external resistance is chosen such that for o = O, the breakdown torque is obtained at
s = 2.
1. CaIculate the value of the external resistance.
2. CaIculate the torque for o = 0.5 and 5=0.5.
9.2 For the static rotor resistance controlled drive of problem 9.1, caIculate and plot the
boundaries of the control region (region ABCD of figure 9.4).
9.3 A 460 V, 60 Hz, 4 pole, 1760 rpm, Y-connected wound-rotor induction motor has the
following pararneters per phase referred to the stator: R, = 0.14 n, X, = 0.4 n, R; = 0.1 n,
X; = 0.7 n, X; = 18 n. The motor is controlled by the static rotor resistance control.
R, = 0.01 n. The value of the external resistance is chosen such that at standstill and
o = O, the motor torque is 50 percent of the rated torque. aTl = 2.
1. CaIculate the value of the external resistance.
2. CaIculate o for a speed of 600 rpm and the rated torque.
3. CaIculate the speed for 0= 0.5 and the rated torque.
9.4 For the drive of problem 9.1
1. Obtain o for a speed of 1020 rpm and the rated torque.
2. CaIculate the speed for o = 0.8 and 120 percent of the rated torque.
9.5 The motor of problem 9.3 is controlled by a static Scherbius scheme. The drive is
- designed for a speed range of 30 percent below the synchronous speed. The resistance of
the filter inductor is negligible. The maximum value of the firing angle is 1650
1. CaIculate aTo
.
2. CaIculate the torque and power factor for a = 1050 and 960 rpm.
3. Now the transformer is removed and the inverter is connected directly to the ac
mains. The-firing angle is adjusted to get the same torque and speed as in 2. CaIculate
the power factor and compare it with that obtained in 2.
9.6 A 440 V, 50 Hz, 1470 rpm, 4 pole, Y-connected wound-rotor induction motor has the
following parameters per phase referred to the stator: R, = 0.2 n, X, = 0.5n, Xm =
20 n, R; = 0.1 n, X; = 0.8 n. The motor is controlled by a static Scherbius scheme.
The drive is designed for a speed range of 50 percent below synchronous speed. The
resistance of the filter inductor is negligible and the maximum value of the firing angle
is 170.
1. Obtain aTo
2. CaIculate the torque and power factor for a = 120 and speed of 1025 rpm.
3. Obtain the torque and power factor for a = 100 and speed of 1125 rpm.
388
Chap. 9
9.7 The motor of problem 9.6 is controlled by a static Scherbius scheme. The drive is designed for a speed range from synchronous speed to standstill, assuming the maximum
firing angle to be 180. The filter inductor has a negligible resistance. Calculate and plot
the speed-torque, speed-rotor current, and speed-fundamental power factor curves for
ex = 90, 120, and 150. Neglect friction, windage, and core loss.
9.8 A 460 V, 60 Hz, 1185 rpm, 6 pole, Y-connected wound-rotor induction motor has the
following parameters per phase referred to the stator: R, = 0.05 n, X, = 0.3 n, X; ==
8 n, R; = 0.04 n, X; = 0.4 n. The motor is controlled by a static Scherbius scheme.
The drive is designed for a speed range of 30 percent below synchronous speed, taking the
maximum firing angle to be 170. The resistance of the filter inductor can be neglected.
1. Calculate aTo
2. Calculate the inverter firing angle ex for the rated motor tarque and 960 rpm.
3. What will be the motor speed at the rated torque and ex = 120?

Power Semiconductor Controlled Drives - Gopal K Dubey PDF

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Power Semiconductor Controlled Drives - Gopal K Dubey PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Power Semiconductor Controlled Drives - Gopal K Dubey PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

lIST OF PRINCIPAL SYMBOLS

Per unit frequency i.e. ratio of operating to

Instantaneous value of the dc link current of

R.M.S. value of a non-sinusoidal current, A

Commutating inductance of a ynchronous

Instantaneous value of ac source current, A

Rotor resistance referred to stator,

Thcvenin 's equivalen! re istance. n

Torque required to do the useful meCh ni

nimum value of commutation

Minimum value of margin angle. rad

Power factor angle of a synchronous motor

Source frequency. rad/scc

Peak value of an ac source voltage. V

lnstantaneous value of the de motor arma

Base speed. rad/ ec

Rcference value of a variable

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Prentice-Hall Intemational (UK) Limited, London

'The Power Semiconductor

Orive and lts

1.2 .Dynamics of the Motor Load System -. 3

The Converter Motor System

Speed Control and Multiquadrant

Power Semiconductor Devices

Methods of Speed Control

Excited DC Motor with Regenerative

2.6 . Loss Minimization

Transfer Functions of Separately Excited

RECTIFIER CONTROL OF DC MOTORS

Braking Operation of Rectifier Controlled

Separately Excited Motor

Separately Excited Motor

Ripple and Its Effect on

Pulse-Width Modulated Rectifiers

Operation of Separately Excited

Regenerative Braking of DC Motors

Dynamic and Composite

CONTROL OF INDUCTION MOTOR BY AC

Fan or Pump and Crane Hoist Drives

Control and Closed-Loop

SLIP POWER CONTROLLED WOUND-ROTOR

Static Rotor Resistance Control

Rotor Motor from Constant Voltage and

10.2.2 Power Factor Control and

Rotor Motor Operation from a

Salient Pole Motor

Operating from a Voltage Source of

Starting and Braking when Fed from a

Brushless Excitation of Wound-Field

Permanent Magnet Synchronous

Operating from a Fixed Frequency

Operating from a Voltage Source of

Operation with Nonsinusoidal

10.10 Speed Control

Brushless and Commutatorless

Current Source Inverter with Load

11.3.1 Analysis of Cornrnutation and